63983en PDF

GE Fanuc Automation
Computer Numerical Control Products
Series 30i/300i/300is-MODEL A
Series 31i/310i/310is-MODEL A5
PMC
Programming Manual
GFZ-63983EN/02 June 2004

GFL-001
Warnings, Cautions, and Notes
as Used in this Publication
Warning
Warning notices are used in this publication to emphasize that hazardous voltages, currents,
temperatures, or other conditions that could cause personal injury exist in this equipment or
may be associated with its use.
In situations where inattention could cause either personal injury or damage to equipment, a
Warning notice is used.
Caution
Caution notices are used where equipment might be damaged if care is not taken.
Note
Notes merely call attention to information that is especially significant to understanding and
operating the equipment.
This document is based on information available at the time of its publication. While efforts
have been made to be accurate, the information contained herein does not purport to cover all
details or variations in hardware or software, nor to provide for every possible contingency in
connection with installation, operation, or maintenance. Features may be described herein
which are not present in all hardware and software systems. GE Fanuc Automation assumes
no obligation of notice to holders of this document with respect to changes subsequently made.
GE Fanuc Automation makes no representation or warranty, expressed, implied, or statutory

with respect to, and assumes no responsibility for the accuracy, completeness, sufficiency, or
usefulness of the information contained herein. No warranties of merchantability or fitness for
purpose shall apply.
©Copyright 2004 GE Fanuc Automation North America, Inc.

All Rights Reserved.
B-63983EN/02 DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE
DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE

This manual includes safety precautions for protecting the user and
preventing damage to the machine. Precautions are classified into
Warning and Caution according to their bearing on safety. Also,
supplementary information is described as a Note. Read the Warning,
Caution, and Note thoroughly before attempting to use the machine.
WARNING
Applied when there is a danger of the user being
injured or when there is a danger of both the user
being injured and the equipment being damaged if
the approved procedure is not observed.
CAUTION
Applied when there is a danger of the equipment
being damaged, if the approved procedure is not
observed.
NOTE
The Note is used to indicate supplementary
information other than Warning and Caution.
• Read this manual carefully, and store it in a safe place.
s-1
B-63983EN/02 TABLE OF CONTENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Volume 1 of 2
DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE.................................s-1
1 OVERVIEW OF PMC ............................................................................. 1
1.1 WHAT IS PMC? ............................................................................................ 2
1.1.1 Basic Configuration of PMC....................................................................................2
1.1.2 I/O Signals of PMC ..................................................................................................2
1.1.3 PMC Signal Addresses.............................................................................................3
1.2 WHAT IS LADDER LANGUAGE? ................................................................. 6
1.2.1 Ladder Diagram Format ...........................................................................................6
1.2.2 Signal Name (Symbol Name)...................................................................................7
1.2.3 Comment ..................................................................................................................7
1.2.4 Graphic Symbols of Relays and Coils......................................................................8
1.2.5 Line Number and Net Number.................................................................................8
1.2.6 Difference Between Relay Sequence Circuit and Ladder Sequence Program.........9
1.2.7 SPECIFICATION OF EXTENDED SYMBOL AND COMMENT......................10
1.3 SEQUENCE PROGRAM CREATION PROCEDURE.................................. 13
1.3.1 Determining Specification .....................................................................................13
1.3.2 Creating Ladder Diagram.......................................................................................13
1.3.3 Editing Sequence Program .....................................................................................14
1.3.4 Transferring and Writing Sequence Program to PMC...........................................15
1.3.5 Checking Sequence Program..................................................................................16
1.3.6 Storage and Management of Sequence Program....................................................16
1.4 EXECUTION OF SEQUENCE PROGRAM ................................................. 17
1.4.1 Execution Procedure of Sequence Program...........................................................18
1.4.2 Repetitive Operation ..............................................................................................19
1.4.3 Processing Priority (1st Level, 2nd Level, and 3rd Level) ....................................20
1.4.4 Structured Sequence Program ................................................................................22
1.4.4.1 Implementation .................................................................................................. 22
1.4.4.2 Subprogramming and nesting............................................................................. 28
1.4.4.3 Notes on using subroutines ................................................................................ 32
1.4.5 Synchronization Processing of I/O Signals............................................................34
1.4.6 Interlock .................................................................................................................39
1.4.7 Notes on I/O Signals Updated by Other Than PMC ..............................................40
1.5 MULTI-PMC FUNCTION ............................................................................. 41
c-1
TABLE OF CONTENTS B-63983EN/02
1.5.1 Execution Order and Execution Time Percentage .................................................43

1.5.2 Setting I/O Address for I/O Link............................................................................45
1.5.3 Interface Between CNC and PMC .........................................................................46
1.5.4 Multi-Path PMC Interface......................................................................................48
2 PMC SPECIFICATIONS....................................................................... 49
2.1 SPECIFICATIONS....................................................................................... 50
2.1.1 Basic Specifications ...............................................................................................50
2.1.2 Program Capacity...................................................................................................53
2.1.3 Sequence Program Memory Capacity....................................................................55
2.1.4 Data Size for PMC Message Multi-Language Display..........................................56
2.1.5 Addresses ...............................................................................................................57
2.1.6 Basic Instructions ...................................................................................................59
2.1.7 Functional Instructions (Arranged in Sequence of Instruction Group)..................60
2.1.8 Functional Instructions (Arranged in Sequence of SUB No.)................................63
2.2 PMC SIGNAL ADDRESSES ....................................................................... 66
2.2.1 Addresses for Signals Between the PMC and CNC (F, G)....................................66
2.2.2 Addresses of Signals Between the PMC and Machine (X, Y)...............................67
2.2.3 Internal Relay Addresses (R) .................................................................................70
2.2.4 Internal Relay (System Area) Addresses (R) .........................................................71
2.2.5 Extended Relay Addresses (E)...............................................................................78
2.2.6 Message Display Addresses (A) ............................................................................79
2.2.7 Timer Addresses (T) ..............................................................................................80
2.2.8 Counter Addresses (C) ...........................................................................................81
2.2.9 Keep Relay Addresses (K) .....................................................................................83
2.2.10 Nonvolatile Memory Control Address (K) ............................................................84
2.2.11 System Keep Relay Addresses (K) ........................................................................85
2.2.12 Data Table Addresses (D) ......................................................................................91
2.2.13 Addresses for Multi-path PMC interface (M, N) ...................................................96
2.2.14 Subprogram Number Addresses (P).......................................................................96
2.2.15 Label Number Addresses (L) .................................................................................97
2.3 PMC PARAMETERS ................................................................................... 98
2.3.1 Cautions for Reading from/Writing to Nonvolatile Memory.................................99
2.3.2 PMC Parameter Format........................................................................................100
2.4 PARAMETERS FOR THE PMC SYSTEM ................................................ 106
2.4.1 Setting Parameters................................................................................................106
2.4.2 PMC System Parameters ......................................................................................109
2.4.3 CNC Parameters Related to the PMCs.................................................................111
c-2
2.5 COMPATIBILITY WITH CONVENTIONAL MODELS................................ 122

2.5.1 Compatibility with the PMCs for the 16i/18i/21i-B ............................................122
2.5.2 Compatibility with the PMCs for the 15i-A/B .....................................................124
2.5.3 The convert method of source program using FANUC LADDER-III .................126
2.6 PMC MESSAGE MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY FUNCTION ................... 127
2.6.1 Usage of PMC Message Multi-Language Display Function................................128
2.6.2 Multi-Language Display.......................................................................................130
2.6.3 Maximum number of message .............................................................................131
2.6.4 Display of European characters ...........................................................................132
2.7 DATA BACKED UP BY THE BATTERY.................................................... 133
3 I/O LINK ............................................................................................. 135
3.1 WHAT IS THE I/O LINK? .......................................................................... 136
3.1.1 Configuration of an I/O Link ...............................................................................137
3.1.2 Numbers of Input Points and of Output Points of the I/O Link ...........................139
3.2 ASSIGNMENT METHOD .......................................................................... 140
3.2.1 Assignment Method for I/O Unit-MODEL A ......................................................145
3.2.2 Assignment Method for I/O Unit-MODEL B ......................................................149
3.2.3 Assignment Method for Distribution I/O Connection Panel I/O Modules and
Distribution I/O Operator's Panel I/O Modules ...................................................152
3.2.4 Assignment Method for the Power Mate .............................................................158
3.2.5 Assignment Method for I/O Link Connection Units............................................159
3.2.6 Assignment Method for a Handy Machine Operator's Panel...............................161
3.2.7 Assignment Method for an AS-i Converter Unit .................................................163
3.2.8 FS0 Operator's Panel ............................................................................................165
3.3 SELECTABLE I/O LINK ASSIGNMENT FUNCTION ................................ 174
3.3.1 Outline..................................................................................................................174
3.3.2 Example................................................................................................................177
3.3.3 Notes 182
3.4 I/O LINK CONNECTION CHECK FUNCTION........................................... 183
4 LADDER LANGUAGE ....................................................................... 185
4.1 BASIC INSTRUCTIONS ............................................................................ 186
4.1.1 Details of the Basic Instructions ..........................................................................188
4.1.2 RD Instruction ......................................................................................................189
4.1.3 RD.NOT Instruction.............................................................................................190
4.1.4 WRT Instruction...................................................................................................191
4.1.5 WRT.NOT Instruction .........................................................................................192
c-3
4.1.6 AND Instruction...................................................................................................193

4.1.7 AND.NOT Instruction..........................................................................................194
4.1.8 OR Instruction ......................................................................................................195
4.1.9 OR.NOT Instruction.............................................................................................196
4.1.10 RD.STK Instruction .............................................................................................197
4.1.11 RD.NOT.STK Instruction ....................................................................................198
4.1.12 AND.STK Instruction ..........................................................................................199
4.1.13 OR.STK Instruction .............................................................................................201
4.1.14 SET Instruction ....................................................................................................203
4.1.15 RST Instruction ....................................................................................................204
4.2 FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS................................................................ 205
4.2.1 Format of the Functional Instructions ..................................................................205
4.3 TIMER ....................................................................................................... 213
4.3.1 TMR (Timer: SUB 3)...........................................................................................214
4.3.2 TMRB (Fixed Timer: SUB 24) ............................................................................216
4.3.3 TMRC (Timer: SUB 54) ......................................................................................218
4.4 COUNTER................................................................................................. 221
4.4.1 CTR (Counter: SUB 5).........................................................................................222
4.4.2 CTRB (Fixed counter: SUB 56)...........................................................................228
4.4.3 CTRC (Counter: SUB 55) ....................................................................................231
4.5 DATA TRANSFER..................................................................................... 234
4.5.1 MOVB (Transfer of 1 Byte: SUB 43)..................................................................235
4.5.2 MOVW (Transfer of 2 Bytes: SUB 44) ...............................................................236
4.5.3 MOVD (Transfer of 4 Bytes: SUB 47) ................................................................237
4.5.4 MOVN (Transfer of an Arbitrary Number of Bytes: SUB 45) ............................238
4.5.5 MOVE (Logical Product Transfer: SUB 8) .........................................................240
4.5.6 MOVOR (Data Transfer After Logical Sum: SUB 28) .......................................242
4.5.7 XMOVB (Binary Index Modifier Data Tranfer: SUB 35)...................................244
4.5.8 XMOV (Indexed Data Transfer: SUB 18) ...........................................................254
4.6 COMPARISON .......................................................................................... 257
4.6.1 COMPB (Comparison Between Binary Data: SUB 32) ......................................258
4.6.2 COMP (Comparison: SUB 15) ............................................................................261
4.6.3 COIN (Coincidence Check: SUB 16) ..................................................................263
4.7 DATA SEARCH ......................................................................................... 265
4.7.1 DSCHB (Binary Data Search: SUB 34)...............................................................266
4.7.2 DSCH (Data Search: SUB 17) .............................................................................269
4.8 BIT OPERATION....................................................................................... 272
c-4
4.8.1 DIFU (Rising Edge Detection: SUB 57).............................................................273

4.8.2 DIFD (Falling Edge Detection: SUB 58) ............................................................275
4.8.3 EOR (Exclusive OR: SUB 59) ............................................................................277
4.8.4 AND (Logical AND: SUB 60)............................................................................279
4.8.5 OR (Logical OR: SUB 61) ..................................................................................281
4.8.6 NOT (Logical NOT: SUB 62).............................................................................283
4.8.7 PARI (Parity Check: SUB 11).............................................................................285
4.8.8 SFT (Shift Register: SUB 33) .............................................................................287
4.9 CODE CONVERSION ............................................................................... 290
4.9.1 COD (Code Conversion: SUB 7) ........................................................................291
4.9.2 CODB (Binary Code Conversion: SUB 27)........................................................295
4.9.3 DCNV (Data Conversion: SUB 14) ....................................................................298
4.9.4 DCNVB (Extended Data Conversion: SUB 31) .................................................300
4.9.5 DEC (Decode: SUB 4) ........................................................................................303
4.9.6 DECB (Binary Decoding: SUB 25) ....................................................................305
4.10 OPERATION INSTRUCTION .................................................................... 309
4.10.1 ADDB (Binary Addition: SUB 36) .....................................................................310
4.10.2 SUBB (Binary Subtraction: SUB 37)..................................................................313
4.10.3 MULB (Binary Multiplication: SUB 38)............................................................316
4.10.4 DIVB (Binary Division: SUB 39) .......................................................................319
4.10.5 ADD (BCD Addition: SUB 19) ..........................................................................322
4.10.6 SUB (BCD Subtraction: SUB 20).......................................................................324
4.10.7 MUL (BCD Multiplication: SUB 21) .................................................................326
4.10.8 DIV (BCD Division: SUB 22) ............................................................................328
4.10.9 NUMEB (Definition of Binary Constants: SUB 40) ..........................................330
4.10.10 NUME (BCD Definition of Constant: SUB 23) .................................................333
4.11 INSTRUCTIONS RELATED TO CNC FUNCTIONS.................................. 335
4.11.1 DISPB (Display Message: SUB 41)....................................................................336
4.11.2 EXIN (External Data Input: SUB 42) .................................................................351
4.11.3 WINDR (Reading CNC Window Data: SUB 51) ...............................................358
4.11.4 WINDW (Writing CNC Window Data: SUB 52)...............................................361
4.11.5 AXCTL (Axis Control by PMC: SUB 53)..........................................................363
4.12 PROGRAM CONTROL.............................................................................. 372
4.12.1 COM (Common Line Control: SUB 9)...............................................................373
4.12.2 COME (Common Line Control End: SUB 29) ...................................................376
4.12.3 JMP (Jump: SUB 10) ..........................................................................................377
4.12.4 JMPE (Jump End: SUB 30) ................................................................................380
c-5
4.12.5 JMPB (Label Jump 1: SUB 68) ..........................................................................381

4.12.6 JMPC (Label Jump 2: SUB 73) ..........................................................................383
4.12.7 LBL (Label: SUB 69)..........................................................................................385
4.12.8 CALL (Conditional Subprogram Call: SUB 65).................................................387
4.12.9 CALLU (Unconditional Subprogram Call: SUB 66)..........................................389
4.12.10 SP (Subprogram: SUB 71) ..................................................................................390
4.12.11 SPE (End of a Subprogram: SUB 72) .................................................................391
4.12.12 END1 (1st Level Sequence Program End: SUB 1).............................................392
4.12.13 END2 (2nd Level Sequence Program End: SUB 2)............................................392
4.12.14 END3 (3rd Level Sequence Program End: SUB 48) ..........................................393
4.12.15 END (End of a Ladder Program: SUB 64)..........................................................393
4.12.16 NOP (No Operation: SUB 70) ............................................................................393
4.12.17 CS (Case Call: SUB 74) .......................................................................................394
4.12.18 CM (Sub Program Call in Case Call: SUB 75)....................................................397
4.12.19 CE (End of Case Call: SUB 76) ...........................................................................398
4.13 ROTATION CONTROL ............................................................................. 399
4.13.1 ROT (Rotation Control: SUB 6) .........................................................................400
4.13.2 ROTB (Binary Rotation Control: SUB 26).........................................................404
4.14 INVALID INSTRUCTIONS......................................................................... 408
4.15 NOTE ON PROGRAMMING ..................................................................... 409
5 WINDOW FUNCTIONS ...................................................................... 411
5.1 FORMATS OF CONTROL DATA .............................................................. 412
5.2 LOW-SPEED RESPONSE AND HIGH-SPEED RESPONSE ................... 413
5.2.1 Note on the Programming of a Low-speed Response Window Instruction .........414
5.3 LIST OF WINDOW FUNCTIONS .............................................................. 415
5.4 CNC INFORMATION................................................................................. 422
5.4.1 Reading CNC System Information (High-speed Response) ................................422
5.4.2 Reading a Tool Offset (High-speed Response)....................................................424
5.4.3 Writing a Tool Offset (Low-speed Response) .....................................................426
5.4.4 Reading a Workpiece Origin Offset Value (High-speed Response)....................429
5.4.5 Writing a Workpiece Origin Offset Value (Low-speed Response) .....................431
5.4.6 Reading a Parameter (High-speed Response) ......................................................433
5.4.7 Writing a Parameter (Low-speed Response)........................................................435
5.4.8 Reading a Real Type Parameter (High-speed Response).....................................437
5.4.9 Writing a Real Type Parameter (Low-speed Response) ......................................439
5.4.10 Reading Setting Data (High-speed Response) .....................................................441
5.4.11 Writing Setting Data (Low-speed Response).......................................................443
c-6
5.4.12 Reading a Custom Macro Variable (High-speed Response)................................445

5.4.13 Writing a Custom Macro Variable (Low-speed Response) .................................447
5.4.14 Reading the CNC Alarm Status (High-speed Response) .....................................449
5.4.15 Reading the Current Program Number (High-speed Response) ..........................453
5.4.16 Reading the Current Sequence Number (High-speed Response).........................455
5.4.17 Reading Modal Data (High-speed Response) ......................................................456
5.4.18 Reading Diagnosis Data (Low-speed Response) .................................................463
5.4.19 Reading Value of the P-code Macro Variable (High-speed Response) ...............465
5.4.20 Writing Value of the P-code Macro Variable (Low-speed Response) ................467
5.4.21 Reading CNC Status Information (High-speed Response) ..................................469
5.4.22 Reading the Current Program Number (8-digit Program Numbers)
(High-speed Response) ........................................................................................471
5.4.22 Entering Data on the Program Check Screen (Low-speed Response) .................473
5.4.23 Reading Clock Data (Date and Time) (High-speed Response)............................475
5.4.24 Reading the Pitch Error Compensation Value (High-speed Response)...............477
5.4.25 Writing the Pitch Error Compensation Value (Low-speed Response) ................479
5.5 AXIS INFORMATION ................................................................................ 481
5.5.1 Reading the Actual Velocity of Controlled Axes (High-speed Response) ..........481
5.5.2 Reading the Absolute Position (Absolute Coordinates) of Controlled Axes (High-
speed Response) ...................................................................................................483
5.5.3 Reading the Machine Position (Machine Coordinates) of Controlled Axes (High-
speed Response) ...................................................................................................485
5.5.4 Reading a Skip Position (Stop Coordinates of Skip Operation (G31)) of
Controlled Axes (High-speed Response) .............................................................488
5.5.5 Reading the Servo Delay for Controlled Axes (High-speed Response) ..............490
5.5.6 Reading the Acceleration/Deceleration Delay on Controlled Axes
5.5.7 Reading the Feed Motor Load Current Value (A/D Conversion Data)
5.5.8 Reading the Actual Spindle Speed (High-speed Response).................................497
5.5.9 Reading the Relative Position on a Controlled Axis (High-speed Response) .....499
5.5.10 Reading the Remaining Travel (High-speed Response) ......................................501
5.5.11 Reading the Actual Velocity of each Controlled Axis (High-speed Response) ..503
5.5.12 Reading Actual Spindle Speeds (High-speed Response).....................................505
5.5.13 Entering Torque Limit Data for the Digital Servo Motor
(Low-speed Response) .........................................................................................509
c-7
5.5.13 Reading Load Information of the Spindle Motor (Serial Interface)

5.5.14 Reading the Estimate Disturbance Torque Data (High-speed Response)............514
5.5.15 Presetting the Relative Coordinate (Low-speed Response) .................................519
5.6 TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT FUNCTION .................................................. 522
5.6.1 Reading The Tool Life Management Data (Tool Group Number)
5.6.2 Reading Tool Life Management Data (Number of Tool Groups)
5.6.3 Reading Tool Life Management Data (Number of Tools)
5.6.4 Reading Tool Life Management Data (Tool Life) (High-speed Response) ........530
5.6.5 Reading Tool Life Management Data (Tool Life Counter)
5.6.6 Reading Tool Life Management Data (Tool Length Compensation Number (1):
Tool Number) (High-speed Response) ................................................................534
Tool Order Number) (High-speed Response) ......................................................536
5.6.8 Reading Tool Life Management Data (Cutter Radius Compensation Number (1):
Tool Number) (High-speed Response) ................................................................538
Tool Order Number) (High-speed Response) ......................................................540
5.6.10 Reading Tool Life Management Data (Tool Information (1): Tool Number) (High-
speed Response) ...................................................................................................542
5.6.11 Reading Tool Life Management Data
(Tool Information (2): Tool Order Number) (High-speed Response) .................544
5.6.12 Reading Tool Life Management Data (Tool Number) (High-speed Response) ..546
5.6.13 Reading the Tool Life Management Data (Tool Life Counter Type)
5.6.14 Registering Tool Life Management Data (Tool Group) (Low-speed Response) 550
5.6.15 Writing Tool Life Management Data (Tool Life) (Low-speed Response) ..........552
5.6.16 Writing Tool Life Management Data (Tool Life Counter)
5.6.17 Writing Tool Life Management Data (Tool Life Counter Type)
5.6.18 Writing Tool Life Management Data (Tool Length Compensation Number (1):
Tool Number) (Low-speed Response) .................................................................558
c-8
5.6.19 Writing Tool Life Management Data (Tool Length Compensation Number (2):
Tool Order Number) (Low-speed Response).......................................................560
5.6.20 Writing Tool Life Management Data (Cutter Radius Compensation Number (1):
Tool Number) (Low-speed Response) .................................................................562
Tool Order Number) (Low-speed Response).......................................................564
5.6.22 Writing the Tool Life Management Data (Tool Information (1): Tool Number)
5.6.23 Writing the Tool Management Data
(Tool Information (2): Tool Order Number) (Low-speed Response) ..................568
5.6.24 Writing Tool Life Management Data (Tool Number) (Low-speed Response)....570
5.6.25 Reading The Tool Life Management Data (Tool Group Number)
(High-speed Response) (8-digit tool number)......................................................572
5.6.26 Reading Tool Life Management Data (Tool Information (1): Tool Number) (High-
speed Response) (8-digit tool number) ................................................................574
5.6.27 Registering Tool Life Management Data (Tool Group Number)
(Low-speed Response) (8-digit tool number) ......................................................576
Tool Number) (High-speed Response) (8-digit tool number)..............................579
Tool Number) (High-speed Response) (8-digit tool number)..............................581
5.6.30 Writing Tool Life Management Data (Tool Length Compensation Number (1): Tool
Number) (Low-speed Response) (8-digit tool number) .......................................583
Tool Number) (Low-speed Response) (8-digit tool number) ..............................585
5.6.32 Writing the Tool Life Management Data (Tool Information (1): Tool Number)
(Low-speed Response) (8-digit tool number) ......................................................587
5.6.33 Deleting Tool life Management Data (Tool Group) (Low-speed Response) ......589
5.6.34 Deleting Tool life Management Data (Tool Data) (Low-speed Response) .........591
5.6.35 Clearing Tool Life Management Data
(Tool Life Counter and Tool Information) (Low-speed Response).....................593
5.6.36 Writing Tool Life Management Data (Arbitrary Group Number)
5.6.37 Writing Tool Life Management Data (Remaining Tool Life)
5.7 TOOL MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS ........................................................ 599
c-9
5.7.1 Moving (Exchanging) Tool Management Data Numbers in a Cartridge

Management Table (Low-speed Response) .........................................................600
5.7.2 Searching for a Free Pot (Low-speed Response) .................................................602
5.7.3 Registering New Tool Management Data (Low-speed Response) ......................604
5.7.4 Writing Tool Management Data (Low-speed Response).....................................609
5.7.5 Deleting Tool Management Data (Low-speed Response) ...................................614
5.7.6 Reading Tool Management Data (Low-speed Response)....................................616
5.7.7 Writing a Specified Type of Tool Management Data (Low-speed Response) ....620
5.7.8 Searching for Tool Management Data (Low-speed Response) ...........................624
5.7.9 Shifting Tool Management Data (Low-speed Response) ....................................626
5.7.10 Searching for a Free Pot (oversize tools supported)(Low-speed Response)........628
6 OPERATING THE PMC SCREEN ..................................................... 630

6.1 OPERATION SCREENS OF THE PMC AND SOFT KEY
ORGANIZATION ....................................................................................... 632
6.1.1 Transition of the PMC Screens ............................................................................632
6.1.2 Basic Screen Operations ......................................................................................633
6.2 DISPLAY AND OPERATION CONDITIONS FOR SCREENS .................. 635
6.2.1 Programmer Protection Function .........................................................................635
6.2.2 PMC Parameter Input/Output Conditions ............................................................645
6.2.3 Password Function ...............................................................................................648
6.2.4 Partial protection function for ladder program ....................................................650
6.2.5 Protection of Data at 8 Levels..............................................................................651
6.3 MULTI-PMC DISPLAY............................................................................... 655
6.4 DISPLAYING EXTENDED SYMBOL AND COMMENT............................. 657
Volume 1 of 2
7 PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS
([PMC MAINTE]) ................................................................................ 659
7.1 MONITORING PMC SIGNAL STATUS ([STATUS] SCREEN).................. 660
7.1.1 Forced I/O Function .............................................................................................663
7.1.2 Forced I/O Screen.................................................................................................667
7.2 CHECKING PMC ALARMS ([PMC ALARM] SCREEN)............................. 671
7.3 SETTING AND DISPLAYING PMC PARAMETERS ................................. 672
7.3.1 Setting and Displaying Variable Timers ([TIMER] Screen) ...............................673
7.3.2 Setting and Displaying Counter Values ([COUNTR] Screen) ............................676
7.3.3 Setting and Displaying Keep Relays ([KEEP RELAY] Screen) .........................678
7.3.4 Setting and Displaying Data Tables ([DATA] Screen)........................................681
c-10
7.4 DATA INPUT/OUTPUT ([I/O] SCREEN) .................................................. 688

7.4.1 Writing to the Memory Card................................................................................691
7.4.2 Setting the Communication Port ([PORT SETING] Screen)...............................693
7.4.3 Displaying a File List ([LIST] Screen) ................................................................695
7.4.4 Setting an I/O Target PMC...................................................................................698
7.4.5 Outputting a Sequence Program to the Memory Card .........................................701
7.4.6 Inputting a Sequence Program from the Memory Card .......................................702
7.4.7 Comparing Sequence Programs with Memory Card Files...................................704
7.4.8 Saving Sequence Programs to the Flash ROM ....................................................706
7.4.9 Inputting Sequence Programs from the Flash ROM ............................................707
7.4.10 Comparing Sequence Programs with Flash ROM Files.......................................708
7.4.11 Outputting a Sequence Program to the FLOPPY.................................................709
7.4.12 Inputting a Sequence Program from the FLOPPY ...............................................710
7.4.13 Comparing Sequence Programs with FLOPPY Files...........................................712
7.4.14 Outputting Sequence Programs to Other Devices (via the RS-232C Port).........714
7.4.15 Inputting Sequence Programs from Other Devices (via the RS-232C Port) .......715
7.4.16 Comparing Sequence Programs with Files of Other Devices
(via the RS-232C Port) .........................................................................................717
7.4.17 Outputting PMC Parameters to the Memory Card...............................................718
7.4.18 Inputting PMC Parameters from the Memory Card.............................................720
7.4.19 Comparing PMC Parameters with Memory Card Files .......................................722
7.4.20 Outputting PMC Parameters to the FLOPPY ......................................................724
7.4.21 Inputting PMC Parameters from the FLOPPY.....................................................725
7.4.22 Comparing PMC Parameters with FLOPPY Files ...............................................727
7.4.23 Outputting PMC Parameters to Other Devices (via the RS-232C Port) .............729
7.4.24 Inputting PMC Parameters from Other Devices (via the RS-232C Port) ...........730
7.4.25 Comparing PMC Parameters with Files of Other Devices
(via the RS-232C Port) .........................................................................................731
7.4.26 Outputting a Message Data for Multi-Language Display to the Memory Card...732
7.4.27 Inputting a Message Data for Multi-Language Display from the Memory Card.733
7.4.28 Comparing Message Data for Multi-Language Display with Memory Card
Files 735
7.4.29 Saving Message Data for Multi-Language Display to the Flash ROM ...............737
7.4.30 Inputting Message Data for Multi-Language Display from the Flash ROM .......738
7.4.31 Comparing Message Data for Multi-Language Display with Flash ROM Files..740
7.4.32 Deleting Memory Card Files or Formatting a Memory Card ..............................741
7.4.33 Deleting One or All FLOPPY Files .....................................................................743
c-11
7.5 DISPLAYING I/O LINK CONNECTION STATUS ([I/O LINK] SCREEN) ... 745
7.6 TRACING AND DISPLAYING PMC SIGNAL STATUS ............................. 747
7.6.1 Signal Trace Function ([TRACE] Screen)...........................................................748
7.6.2 Setting of Trace Parameter ([TRACE SETING] Screen) ....................................749
7.6.3 Execution of Trace ...............................................................................................755
7.6.4 Operation after Execution of Trace......................................................................757
7.6.5 Automatic Start of Trace Setting..........................................................................760
7.6.6 Trace Result Output .............................................................................................761
7.7 I/O DIAGNOSIS SCREEN ......................................................................... 766
7.7.1 MONITORING I/O DIAGNOSIS ([I/O DGN] SCREEN) ..................................767
7.7.2 SETTING SCREEN OF I/O DIAGNOSIS ..........................................................776
8 LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS

([PMC LADDER])............................................................................... 780
8.1 DISPLAYING A PROGRAM LIST ([LIST] SCREEN)................................. 782
8.1.1 Setting the Program List Screen...........................................................................786
8.2 MONITORING LADDER DIAGRAMS ([LADDER] SCREEN) .................... 788
8.2.1 Operating on the LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR Screen ..............................791
8.2.2 Setting the Display Format of the LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR Screen....797
8.2.3 Display Format for Parameters ............................................................................805
8.2.4 FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTION DATA TABLE VIEWER Screen...................809
8.3 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS............................................................... 812
8.3.1 Operating on the LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR Screen ..................................814
8.3.2 Setting the LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR Screen ............................................818
8.3.3 NET EDITOR Screen...........................................................................................824
8.3.4 Structure of Valid Net ..........................................................................................833
8.3.5 FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTION LIST Screen....................................................834
8.3.6 FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTION DATA TABLE EDITOR Screen....................836
8.3.7 Operating on the FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTION DATA TABLE EDITOR
Screen ...................................................................................................................837
8.3.8 PROGRAM LIST EDITOR Screen .....................................................................840
8.3.9 Setting the PROGRAM LIST EDITOR Screen ...................................................842
8.4 SELECTING AND DISPLAYING THE NECESSARY LADDER NET
([SWITCH] SCREEN]) ............................................................................... 844
8.4.1 Collective Monitor Function ................................................................................844
8.4.2 COLLECTIVE MONITOR Function ..................................................................846
8.5 ADDRESS ALTERATION FUNCTION ...................................................... 850
8.5.1 Screen Structures..................................................................................................851
c-12
8.5.2 Operating on the Screen .......................................................................................852

8.6 FUNCTION TO REFERENCE ADDRESSES IN USE ............................... 855
8.6.1 Address Map Display Screen ...............................................................................856
8.6.2 Operating on the Screen .......................................................................................857
8.7 FUNCTION TO AUTOMATICALLY INPUT UNSUSED ADDRESSES ...... 858
8.8 AUTOMATICALLY INPUTTING UNUSED PARAMETER NUMBERS ...... 859
8.9 DETECTION OF DOUBLE COILS ............................................................ 861
9 PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS
([PMC CONFIG])................................................................................ 862
9.1 DISPLAYING AND EDITING TITLE DATA ([TITLE] SCREENS) .............. 863
9.1.1 Displaying Title Data ...........................................................................................863
9.1.2 Editing Title Data.................................................................................................865
9.1.3 Displaying Title Data (Message) .........................................................................867
9.2 DISPLAYING AND EDITING SYMBOL AND COMMENT DATA
([SYMBOL] SCREENS) ............................................................................. 868
9.2.1 Displaying Symbol and Comment Data ...............................................................868
9.2.2 Editing Symbol and Comment Data.....................................................................870
9.2.3 Partially Changing Symbol and Comment Data ..................................................873
9.2.4 Registering New Symbol and Comment Data......................................................876
9.2.5 Displaying extended symbol and comment..........................................................878
9.2.6 Editing extended symbol and comment ...............................................................882
9.2.7 Adding an extended symbol and comment ..........................................................887
9.3 DISPLAYING AND EDITING MESSAGE DATA ([MESAGE] SCREENS). 890
9.3.1 Displaying Message Data.....................................................................................890
9.3.2 Editing Message Data...........................................................................................893
9.3.3 Editing Desired Message Data .............................................................................897
9.4 DISPLAYING AND EDITING I/O MODULE ALLOCATION DATA
([MODULE] SCREENS)............................................................................. 901
9.4.1 Displaying I/O Module Allocation Data ..............................................................901
9.4.2 Editing I/O Module Allocation Data....................................................................902
9.5 DISPLAYING AND EDITING PMC SETTINGS ([SETING] SCREENS) .... 905
9.6 DISPLAYING THE STATUS OF PMCS AND CHANGING THE TARGET
PMC ([PMC STATUS] SCREENS)............................................................ 914
9.6.1 Starting and Stopping Sequence Programs ..........................................................916
9.7 DISPLAYING AND SETTING PARAMETERS FOR THE ONLINE
FUNCTION ([ONLINE] SCREEN) ............................................................. 917
9.7.1 Setting Parameters for the Online Function .........................................................918
c-13
9.7.2 Communication Status .........................................................................................921

9.7.3 About Ethernet Communication Parameters........................................................923
9.7.4 About connection log of Ethernet ........................................................................926
9.8 DISPLAYING AND SETTING SYSTEM PARAMETERS
([SYSTEM PARAM] SCREENS) ............................................................... 928
9.8.1 Displaying and Setting the Counter Data Type....................................................929
9.8.2 Displaying and Setting Parameters for an FS0 Operator's Panel .........................931
9.8.3 Displaying and Setting Parameters for the Selectable I/O Link Assignment
Function................................................................................................................934
9.9 DISPLAYING AND SETTING CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS
([CONFIG PARAM] SCREENS) ................................................................ 937
9.9.1 Menu for Setting Configuration Parameters ........................................................938
9.9.2 Setting the CNC-PMC Interface...........................................................................939
9.9.3 Setting the Machine Signal Interface ...................................................................944
9.9.4 Setting the Parameters Related to Ladder Execution...........................................948
10 STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION.......................................................... 952

10.1 OVERVIEW ............................................................................................... 953
10.1.1 Step Sequence Method.........................................................................................953
10.1.2 Graphical Symbols ...............................................................................................956
10.1.3 Editing and Debugging Step Sequence Programs................................................957
10.2 STEP SEQUENCE BASICS ...................................................................... 958
10.2.1 Terminology .........................................................................................................958
10.2.2 Execution of Step Sequence.................................................................................968
10.3 CONFIGURATION AND OPERATION OF STEP–SEQUENCE
PROGRAMS.............................................................................................. 972
10.3.1 Step 972
10.3.2 Initial Step ............................................................................................................974
10.3.3 Transition .............................................................................................................976
10.3.4 Divergence of Selective Sequence .......................................................................977
10.3.5 Convergence of Selective Sequence ....................................................................978
10.3.6 Divergence of Simultaneous Sequence ................................................................979
10.3.7 Convergence of Simultaneous Sequence .............................................................980
10.3.8 Jump 981
10.3.9 Label 982
10.3.10 Block Step ............................................................................................................983
10.3.11 Initial Block Step..................................................................................................984
10.3.12 End Of Block Step................................................................................................984
c-14
10.4 EXTENDED LADDER INSTRUCTIONS.................................................... 985

10.4.1 FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTION TRSET............................................................985
10.4.2 PMC ADDRESS (S ADDRESS) .........................................................................986
10.5 SPECIFICATION OF STEP SEQUENCE.................................................. 988
10.5.1 Specification.........................................................................................................988
10.5.2 General Rules .......................................................................................................989
10.5.3 Exclusive Control for Functional Instructions .....................................................995
10.6 STEP SEQUENCE SCREEN OPERATION .............................................. 998
10.6.1 Displaying a Step Sequence Diagram ..................................................................998
10.6.2 Hierarchy of Display ..........................................................................................1001
10.6.3 Program List Display Screen..............................................................................1002
10.6.4 Step Sequence Display Screen ...........................................................................1003
10.6.5 Setting the Step Sequence Diagram Screen .......................................................1006
10.6.6 Subprogram List Display Screen........................................................................1008
10.6.7 Setting Subprogram List Screen.........................................................................1011
10.6.8 Ladder diagram monitor screen..........................................................................1011
10.6.9 Collective monitor screen ..................................................................................1011
10.7 EXECUTION STATE DISPLAY ............................................................... 1012
10.7.1 Step Sequence State Display Screen (Global) ...................................................1013
10.7.2 Step Sequence State Display Screen (Subprogram)...........................................1015
10.8 TIME MONITOR FUNCTION................................................................... 1017
10.8.1 Time Monitor Setting Screen .............................................................................1018
11 PMC ALARM MESSAGES AND ACTIONS TO TAKE..................... 1022

11.1 ALARM MESSAGE LIST ......................................................................... 1023
11.1.1 Messages That May Be Displayed on the PMC Alarm Screen..........................1023
11.1.2 PMC System Alarm Messages ...........................................................................1028
11.1.3 Operation Errors.................................................................................................1031
11.1.4 I/O Communication Error Messages..................................................................1042
11.2 I/O LINK COMMUNICATION ERRORS AND ACTIONS TO TAKE......... 1046
11.2.1 Causes of Communication Errors ......................................................................1047
11.2.2 Check Items ........................................................................................................1050
11.2.3 Sample Cases......................................................................................................1054
c-15
B-63983EN/02 1.OVERVIEW OF PMC
1 OVERVIEW OF PMC
-1-
1.OVERVIEW OF PMC B-63983EN/02
1.1 WHAT IS PMC?
The programmable machine controller (PMC) is a programmable

controller (PC) built into a CNC to perform sequence control for a
machine tool (spindle rotation, tool change, machine operator's panel
control, and so on).
Sequence control is to perform control steps successively in a
predetermined sequence or according to the logic operation.
Programs for performing sequence control for machine tools are called
sequence programs. Generally, sequence programs coded in the
Ladder language are used.
1.1.1 Basic Configuration of PMC
The following is the basic configuration of the PMC:
CNC PMC Machine
Internal External
I/O Sequence I/O
program
Signal input to PMC

Internal relay
Signal output from PMC
Fig. 1.1.1 Basic configuration of PMC
The sequence program reads input signals, performs operations, and

outputs results in a predetermined sequence.
1.1.2 I/O Signals of PMC
Input signals of the PMC include signals input from the CNC (such as
M and T function signals) and signals input from the machine (such as
the cycle start button and feed hold signal button). Output signals of
the PMC include signals output to the CNC (such as the cycle start
command and feed hold signal command) and signals output to the
machine (such as turret rotation and spindle stop). The PMC controls
these I/O signals by executing a sequence program to control the
machine tool.
-2-
1.1.3 PMC Signal Addresses
PMC signal addresses indicate the locations of I/O signals exchanged

with the machine, I/O signals exchanged with the CNC, and signals for
internal relays and data (PMC parameters) in nonvolatile memory.
PMC addresses are roughly classified as shown in Fig. 1.1.3 (a).
F X Signals
Signals to/from
PMC
to/from CNC machine
G Y (MT)
Nonvolatile memory
(1) Variable timer (T)
Internal relay (R) (2) Counter (C)
(3) Keep relay (K)
(4) Data table (D)
Extra relay (E) (5) Extra relay (E)

(NOTE)
Fig. 1.1.3 (a) PMC-related addresses
NOTE
Optionally, extra relays (E) may be assigned to
nonvolatile memory locations.
The PMC signal address format consists of an address number and bit
number (0 to 7) as follows:
Bit number (0 to 7)
Address number (letter followed by decimal
number)
Fig. 1.1.3 (b) PMC address format
The first letter of an address number represents the type of the

signal.
In sequence programs, an address of a byte may be specified. In
the above example, specify X127 to specify a byte address. In this
case, the period "." and bit number are unnecessary.
-3-
Table 1.1.3 lists the address symbols and corresponding signals.
Table 1.1.3 Address Symbols and signal types

Symbol Signal type
F Input signal from CNC to PMC (CNC → PMC)
G Output signal from PMC to CNC (PMC → CNC)
X Input signal from machine to PMC (MT → PMC)
Y Output signal from PMC to machine (PMC → MT)
R Internal relay
E Extra relay
A Message display
T Variable timer
C Counter
K Keep relay
D Data table
M Input signal from another PMC path
N Output signal to another PMC path
L Label number
P Subprogram number
(1) Addresses of signals between the PMC and CNC (F and G)

These addresses are assigned to interface signals between the
CNC and PMC. The relationships between the signals and
addresses are defined by the CNC.
F indicates an input signal from the CNC to PMC.
G indicates an output signal from the PMC to CNC.
(2) Addresses of signals between the PMC and machine (X and Y)

I/O signals exchanged with an externally connected machine can
be assigned to any addresses within an available range to control
the machine.
X indicates an input signal from the machine to PMC.
Y indicates an output signal from the PMC to machine.
(3) Addresses of internal relays and extra relays (R and E)

These addresses are used to temporarily store operation results
during sequence program execution processing.
Optionally, E addresses may be assigned to nonvolatile memory
locations.
The address locations of internal relays also include a reserved
area used by the PMC system software. The signals in the
reserved area cannot be written by sequence programs.
(4) Signal addresses for message display (A)

Instruction “DISPB” used in sequence programs include
instructions to display a message on the CNC screen. These
addresses are used by such instructions.
-4-
(5) Nonvolatile memory addresses

The contents of these address locations are not erased even when
the power is turned off.
These addresses are used for management of the data items listed
below. These data items are called PMC parameters.
(a) Variable timer (T)
(b) Counter (C)
(c) Keep relay (K)
A reserved area used by the PMC system software is partly
included.
(d) Data table (D)
(e) Extra relay (E)
Optionally, E addresses may be assigned to nonvolatile
memory locations.
These addresses are used to temporarily store operation
results during sequence program execution processing.
(6) Multi-path PMC interface address (M, N)

These addresses are used to the Multi-path PMC interface.
M indicates an input signal from another PMC path.
N indicates an output signal to another PMC path.
(7) Other addresses

(a) Label number (L)
Sequence program instructions include an instruction to
cause a jump to a specified position in the middle of
processing. This address indicates the jump destination used
by this instruction. The contents of L address can not be
read/written in sequence program.
(b) Subprogram number (P)
In sequence programs, a main program can call subprograms.
P addresses indicate the numbers of these subprograms. The
contents of P address can not be read/written in sequence
program.
-5-
1.2 WHAT IS LADDER LANGUAGE?
The Ladder language is one of sequence programming languages. This

programming language, which represents the sequence and logic
operations of I/O signals by ladder diagrams, is widely used by
sequence control engineers. This language is mainly used for PMCs.
1.2.1 Ladder Diagram Format
Designers develop and see ladder diagrams in the design stage.

However, other people (for example, many maintenance engineers)
have much more chances to see ladder diagrams than the designers of
the ladder diagrams have. Therefore, the designers should create
ladder diagrams so that these diagrams are intelligible to any one.
The following is the format of ladder diagrams:
Line No. Signal name (symbol name) Address
Net No. Comment
The meanings of ladder diagram contents will be described later.
-6-
1.2.2 Signal Name (Symbol Name)

Symbol names representing I/O signal names can be assigned to PMC
addresses. It is recommended that signal names (symbol names)
suitable for I/O signals be assigned as explained below.
(1) Signal names may consist of any alphanumeric characters and the
special symbols. The number of characters that can be entered
varies depending on the PMC model. For the allowable number of
characters, see the table in Subsection 2.1.1.
(2) As the names of the signals between the CNC and PMC, use the
signal names indicated in the address table of the PMC without
modifications.
(3) Some CNC signals are input from the machine or output to the
machine. The names of these signals are distinguished by
prefixing X or Y to the names of signals between the CNC and
PMC.
For example, a single block input signal is represented as XSBK
by prefixing X, while a start lamp output signal is represented as
YSTL by prefixing Y.
The names of some signals between the CNC and PMC, however,
exceed the maximum allowable number of characters as a result
of prefixing X or Y to the names. In such a case, delete the last
character of the signal name.
(*SECLP → X*SECL)
(4) The same signal name (symbol name) cannot be assigned to more
than one signal address.
1.2.3 Comment
A comment can be added to each symbol in the symbol table so that it
can be indicated as a comment on a relay or coil in the sequence
program. The number of characters that can be entered varies
depending on the PMC model. For the number of characters that can be
entered, see the table in Subsection 2.1.1.
For all relays and coils that are output signals to the machine, add a
comment to provide a detailed signal explanation. For other auxiliary
relays, provide explanations of the signals if these relays have
significant meanings in sequence control.
In particular for machine-related input signals, be sure to provide a
detailed signal explanation as a comment in the symbol table.
Add detailed comments to signals dedicated to the machine so that one
can guess the meanings of these signals just from the symbol names.
-7-
1.2.4 Graphic Symbols of Relays and Coils
Ladder diagrams use the following relay symbols:
Relays (contacts)
Instruction
Function
representation
Normally open contact
-| |-
(contact A)
Normally closed contact
-|/ |-
(contact B)
Coils
Instruction
Function
representation
-¡- Coil
-¡¡- Negated coil
-(S)- Set coil
-(R)- Reset coil
These instructions perform a 1-bit operation and are called basic

instructions.
In addition, there are functional instructions that enable easy
programming of complicated operations for processing byte, word, and
double-word data, which are difficult to program just using basic
instructions. The symbol formats of the functional instructions are
slightly different from instruction to instruction. For details, see the
description of each functional instruction in Chapter 4.
1.2.5 Line Number and Net Number
A line number is indicated in every line of ladder diagrams.

A continuous ladder circuit from a contact to a coil is called a net. A
net number is also indicated for each net.
-8-
1.2.6 Difference Between Relay Sequence Circuit and Ladder

Sequence Program
In general relay sequence circuits, because of a limited number of relay

contacts, one contact may be shared by several relays to minimize the
number of contacts used. Fig. 1.2.6 (a) gives an example.
A
R1
B
R2
Fig. 1.2.6 (a)
With the PMC, relay contacts are considered to be unlimited, so ladder

diagrams are created as shown in Fig. 1.2.6 (b).
A
R1
A B
R2
Fig. 1.2.6 (b)
In a relay sequence circuit having no contact between a branch point

and a coil as shown in Fig. 1.2.6 (c), a similar ladder diagram can be
created even for the PMC.
A B
R1
R2
Fig. 1.2.6 (c)
-9-
1.2.7 SPECIFICATION OF EXTENDED SYMBOL AND COMMENT
Using extended symbol and comment, you can use following functions.
· Local symbols effective in sub programs

· Extension of maximum character length of symbol and comment
· Multi-language support of comment
· Multiple definitions of symbol and comment to one signal
· Data type definition
(1) Local symbols effective in sub programs

You can define local symbols effective only in a sub program. So
you can define local symbols having same string in other sub
programs. Local symbols defined in different sub programs do not
conflict.
P1 (Control_Path1) P2 (Control_Path2)
Alarm Lock *ESP Alarm Lock *ESP
X*ESP X*ESP
Lock = X100.0 Lock = X100.1

Alarm = R1000.0 Alarm = R2000.0
*ESP = G8.4 *ESP = G1008.4
Global Symbol :
X*ESP = X8.4
Using local symbols, symbol conflict does not occur. So it is easy

to develop ladder in modular programming technique. And it is
easy to reuse sequence programs. When you have to program a
similar program in some sub programs, copy the logic to another
sub program, redefine the local symbols, and compile on FANUC
LADDER-III.
NOTE
1 Same local symbol names are not allowed in the
same sub program.
2 Same symbol name of global symbol and local
symbol are not allowed.
3 Local symbol can not be defined to address P.
Symbol definition to address P must be global
symbol.
4 You cannot create initial sequence program
using extended symbol and comment on CNC.
To create it, you have to use FANUC LADDER-
III.
- 10 -
(2) Extension of maximum character length of symbol and comment

Maximum character length of a symbol and comment is extended
as follows. So you can describe in details.
Kind Extended type Former

symbol 40 characters in 16 characters in maximum
maximum
comment 4 set 255 characters in 1 set 30 characters in
maximum maximum
(3) Multi language support

One symbol entry has four comments set in maximum.
Displaying comment set can automatically selected by display
language setting in CNC. By describing each comment set in
different languages, you can display comment in all PMC screens
in multi languages. This is very useful in maintenance.
(4) Multiple definition of symbol and comment to one signal

You can define multiple symbols and comments to the same signal.
NOTE
When multiple symbol and comment are defined
to the same signal, you can search the names by
each symbol. On the other hand the symbol on
PMC screen is displayed one of these symbol
names. So if you search symbols, displayed
symbol name on searched position may be
different from searched word.
(5) Data type definition

You can define symbol and comment with data type definition.
Data type Meaning

BOOL Boolean
BYTE 8 bits integer
WORD 16 bits integer
DWORD 32 bits integer
LABEL Label (Address L)
PROG Sub program (Address P)
NOTE
1 In ladder editing screen, for example, BYTE type
symbol can be set to the WORD type parameter
of a function. But it is recommended that data
type of the symbol should be consistent with the
data type of the parameter that it is assigned to.
2 When two or more symbols are defined with a
signal and these symbols have different data
types the symbol name of largest data type is
displayed on PMC screens.
- 11 -
(6) Available characters

Those characters can be used.
- Available characters for symbol :

The character A to Z, a to z, 0 to 9, _ A to Z, a to z, 0 to 9, _
that can be !”#&’()*+,.-<= >? Space,
used as the @[/]^`{|}~;: !”#$%&’()*+,.-<
symbol (Note) =>?@[/]^`{|}~;:
The character %$
that cannot be
used for the first
character of the
symbol
The character Space,
that cannot be ;:.
used for the
symbol
NOTE
Although it is allowed to use special characters
in symbol, using only alphabets, digits and
_(underscore) to comply with the variable name
defined in IEC61131-3 is recommended.
- Available characters for comment :

The character A to Z, a to z, 0 to 9, A to Z, a to z, 0 to 9,
that can be !”#&’()*+,.-<= >? Space,
used as the @[/]^_`{|}~;: !”#$%&’()*+,.-<
comment =>?@[/]^_`{|}~;:
- 12 -
1.3 SEQUENCE PROGRAM CREATION PROCEDURE
This section briefly explains how to create a program for providing

sequence control for a machine tool by using the Ladder language as an
example. When creating a sequence program, see the necessary
manual for editing after understanding the contents of this chapter
thoroughly.
1.3.1 Determining Specification
First, determine the specifications of the control target. Calculate the

number of I/O signals, and determine the interfaces of the I/O signals.
In this step, creation of interface specifications is recommended.
1.3.2 Creating Ladder Diagram
After determining specifications, represent control operations with a

ladder diagram. Timer, counter, and other functions that cannot be
represented by relay symbols are called functional instructions.
Represent these functional instructions with corresponding symbols.
When using offline programmer or built-in edit function explained in
"Editing Sequence Program" in the next subsection, you can enter a
sequence program in a ladder diagram form. At the time of sequence
program editing, you can make entry while creating a ladder diagram
on the display screen, so you need not prepare a ladder diagram in
advance.
If you want to create a sequence program efficiently, however, it is
recommended that you should create a ladder diagram in advance.
Ladder diagrams are referenced as maintenance drawings by FANUC
maintenance engineers, maintenance engineers of machine tool
builders, and maintenance engineers of end users not only domestically
but also in foreign countries. Therefore, try to create as intelligible
ladder diagrams as possible.
- 13 -
1.3.3 Editing Sequence Program
A sequence program in the Ladder language is edited with one of the

following two methods:
(1) PC programmer
FANUC supplies FANUC LADDER-III as sequence program
development software for FANUC PMC. Use of FANUC
LADDER-III allows you to edit a program in the Ladder language
on a personal computer.
(2) Built-in programmer

The PMC software built into the CNC has a built-in edit function.
With this function, a program in the Ladder language can be
edited.
By using either of these editing methods, a sequence program can be

entered in a ladder diagram form from the EDITOR screen. FANUC
LADDER-III can also output an entered sequence program to a printer
in a ladder diagram form.
Furthermore, FANUC LADDER-III provides a function for converting
a program in a ladder diagram form to mnemonic form or vice versa.
By using this function, you can edit the program in mnemonic form
with a text editor.
Fig. 1.3.3 shows an example of a ladder diagram, and Table 1.3.3
shows an example of a mnemonic form.
Auxiliary function
completion
signal
Fig. 1.3.3
- 14 -
Table 1.3.3
Step No. Instruction Address No. & bit No. Remarks
1 RD F7.0 MF
2 OR F7.2 SF
3 OR F7.3 TF
4 RD.NOT.STK F7.0 MF
5 OR R211.7 MFIN
6 AND.STK
7 RD.NOT.STK F7.2 SF
8 OR R211.5 SFIN
9 AND.STK
10 RD.NOT.STK F7.3 TF
11 OR R211.6 TFIN
12 AND.STK
13 WRT G4.3 FIN
During sequence program editing, signal names (symbols) and

comments can be entered for I/O signals, relays, and coils. Easy-to-
understand signal names and comments should be entered to improve
program maintainability.
1.3.4 Transferring and Writing Sequence Program to PMC
After completing editing for the sequence program, input (transfer) the
program to the PMC. This operation is unnecessary when you have
edited the program by using the built-in programmer.
When you have edited the sequence program by using the PC
programmer, input the sequence program from the editing environment
(the personal computer (PC)) to the PMC. The following input
methods can be used:
(1) Input from the I/O screen

For data input, connect the PC containing the sequence program to
the CNC via RS-232C. Alternatively, save the sequence program
from the PC to a memory card, then input the memory card
contents to the PMC.
(2) Input from the online monitor screen

For data input, connect the PC containing the sequence program to
the CNC via Ethernet or RS-232C.
After inputting the sequence program, write it in the flash ROM. This
operation can be done with the DATA I/O screen of the PMC.
- 15 -
1.3.5 Checking Sequence Program
After writing the sequence program in the flash ROM, check the
sequence program.
The sequence program can be checked in the following two ways:
(1) Checking with a simulator

Connect a simulator (consisting of lamps and switches) instead of
the machine. Instead of using input signals from the machine, turn
the switches on and off to input signals, and confirm output
signals by checking the on/off states of the lamps.
(2) Checking by system operation

Connect the machine to make checks. Before starting the
operation, take safety measures because when the sequence
program is executed for the first time, an unpredictable motion
can occur.
1.3.6 Storage and Management of Sequence Program
When the sequence program is completed after checking, it should be

stored and managed by the machine tool builder.
The sequence program can be output to the printer in a ladder diagram
form by using the PC programmer.
The output ladder diagram should be attached as a maintenance
drawing to the machine together with other attached materials such as a
power magnetic cabinet circuit diagram.
- 16 -
1.4 EXECUTION OF SEQUENCE PROGRAM
Sequence programs in the Ladder language are executed in the order of

instructions coded in the ladder diagrams.
Fig. 1.4 shows how a sequence program is executed.
Sequence program
memory
Sequence
program
input
Control target such as machine tool

Input circuit
Output circuit
Internal relay (RAM)
Fig. 1.4 Sequence program execution by PMC
The RD instruction causes the CPU to read the signal of the input
circuit at address X0.0 and set the read data in the operation register.
Next, the AND instruction causes the CPU to AND the set data with the
internal relay state at address R10.1 and set the result in the operation
register. The CPU then executes the subsequent instructions at high
speed, and the operation result is output to the output circuit at address
Y0.0.
- 17 -
1.4.1 Execution Procedure of Sequence Program
In general relay sequence circuits, relays operate at exactly the same

time. This means that when relay A operates in the following figure,
relays D and E operate at exactly the same time (when contacts B and C
are both off).
Fig 1.4.1 (a)
In PMC sequence control, on the other hand, relays in the circuit

operate sequentially. When relay A in Fig. 1.4.1 (a) operates, relay D
operates, then relay E operates.
Therefore, in PMC sequence control, relays operate in the order coded
in the ladder diagram (the order of programming). The sequential
operations in this sequence are performed at high speed, but some
instructions are affected by the execution order.
Accordingly, in the ladder diagrams shown in Fig. 1.4.1 (b), there is a
distinctive difference in operation between the PMC sequence and the
sequence of the relay circuit.
Fig. 1.4.1 (b) Circuit examples
- 18 -
(1) For relay sequence circuit

(A) and (B) in Fig. 1.4.1 (b) operate in the same manner. When A
(P.B) is turned on, current flows through coils B and C, turning on
B and C simultaneously. After C is turned on (after relay
operation time), B is turned off.
(2) For PMC programming

In (A) in Fig. 1.4.1 (b), as with the relay sequence circuit, when A
(P.B) is turned on, B and C are turned on, then B is turned off after
a certain time elapses (after a time required for one cycle of the
PMC sequence). In (B) in Fig. 1.4.1 (b), turning on A (P.B) turns
on C but does not turn on B even momentarily.
1.4.2 Repetitive Operation
A sequence program is executed until the end of the ladder diagram

(the end of the program) is reached, then program execution is repeated
from the beginning of the ladder diagram (the beginning of the
program).
The execution time from the beginning to the end of the ladder diagram
(the time required for one cycle) is a time for processing the sequence
program once and is called a scan.
This processing time depends on the sequence control scale (the
number of steps) and the size of the 1st level sequence described below.
A shorter processing time results in a better signal response in the
sequence.
- 19 -
1.4.3 Processing Priority (1st Level, 2nd Level, and 3rd Level)
A sequence program consists of two operation parts: a high-speed

sequence part called the 1st level, which is executed every several msec,
and a normal sequence part called the 2nd level. When the model used
allows use of the 3rd level, the 3rd level sequence part is added. (See
Fig. 1.4.3 (a).)
Sequence program
1st level sequence part Specifies end of 1st level

sequence
Division 1
Division 2
2nd level sequence part
Division n
Specifies end of 2nd level

3rd level sequence part
sequence
(only with model that can
use 3rd level)
Specifies end of 3rd level sequence
Fig. 1.4.3 (a) Sequence program structure
The 1st level sequence part is a high-speed sequence part that is

executed every ladder execution cycle. The ladder execution cycle is 4
or 8 msec, which is set in a CNC parameter. If the execution of the 1st
level program requires a long time, the overall execution time including
the 2nd level (sequence processing time) is extended. So, the 1st level
sequence part should be created so that it can be processed in a short
time where possible. The 2nd level sequence part is executed every
(ladder execution cycle × n) msec (where n is the number by which the
2nd level is divided). The 3rd level sequence part is executed when the
PMC is idle.
(1) Division of the 2nd level program

The 2nd level program must be divided to execute the 1st level
program. The order of sequence program execution is illustrated
in Fig. 1.4.3 (b), where the number of divisions is assumed to be n.
After the last division (division n) of the 2nd level program is
executed, the sequence program is executed from the beginning.
Therefore, when the number of divisions is n, the execution cycle
of the overall sequence program is expressed as the ladder
execution cycle × n msec.
- 20 -
As the amount of the 1st level sequence part increases, the amount
of the 2nd level sequence portion executed within the ladder
execution cycle decreases. As a result, the number of divisions n
increases, which increases the overall execution time including
the 2nd level (sequence processing time). Therefore, the 1st level
sequence program part should be minimized where possible. The
division number of 2nd level may be indefinite because of
changing of the working condition of functional instructions in 1
st level and 2 nd level.
1st level
Last division n
Division 1 Division 2
2nd level
3rd level
3rd level processing
Ladder execution cycle (4 or 8 ms) Ladder execution cycle (4 or 8 ms) Ladder execution cycle(4 or 8 ms)
Fig. 1.4.3 (b) Sequence program execution order
(2) 1st level sequence part

High-speed sequence operation. Only high-speed sequence
processing such as processing of a pulse signal with a short signal
width in time is performed.
These signals include emergency stop and feed hold signals.
(3) 3rd level sequence part

The 3rd level sequence processing is performed during the
remaining time from the end of the last division (n) of the 2nd
level until the 1st level processing restarts (see Fig. 1.4.3 (b)).
It is possible to program the 3rd level, but the execution cycle
period of time for processing the 3rd level sequence part is not
guaranteed to maintain program compatibility with conventional
models. Therefore, the 1st and 2nd level sequence parts should be
programmed without using the 3rd level sequence part.
- 21 -
1.4.4 Structured Sequence Program
Structured ladder coding has the following advantages:

• Programming is easy to understand, therefore programming
becomes easier.
• Program errors can be found easily.
• Troubleshooting can be done easily.
1.4.4.1 Implementation
Three major implementation techniques are supported.
(1) Use of routines

Ladder sequence processing units are created so that they can be
treated as routines.
Job A
Job B
(2) Nesting
Ladder routines created in (1) are connected to configure a ladder
sequence.
Job A Job A1 Job A11
Job B Job A12
Job An
- 22 -
(3) Conditional branch

The main program loops and determines conditions. If conditions
are satisfied, a subprogram process is executed. If the conditions
are not satisfied, the subprogram process is skipped.
Application example
(1) Example
Suppose that there are four major jobs.
If Y0 is 1, workpiece machining request is assumed to be issued,

and processing is performed. (Conditional)
A: <1> Pick up workpiece from pallet. (A1)
<2> Machine workpiece. (A2)
<3> Return workpiece to pallet. (A3)
B: <4> Move pallet.
(2) Program configuration
- 23 -
(3) Program coding
Machine workpiece.
Machine workpiece.
Move pallet.
Pick up workpiece from pallet.
Machine workpiece.
Return workpiece to pallet.
- 24 -
Pick up workpiece
from pallet. Ladder representation
Ladder representation
Machine workpiece.
Ladder representation
Return workpiece to pallet.
Move pallet. Ladder representation
- 25 -
Specifications
(1) Main program
A ladder program consisting of the 1st ladder level and 2nd ladder
level is called a main program. You can create just one main
program. Subprogram calls from the 1st ladder level are not
allowed. Any number of subprogram calls from the 2nd ladder
level may be made. Functional instructions JMP and COM must
be closed within the main program and each subprogram.
(2) Subprogram
Programs called from the 2nd ladder level are referred to as
subprograms. A subprogram is a program unit enclosed by
functional instructions SP and SPE. Up to 512 or 5000
subprograms can be created for one PMC.
(3) Nesting
A subprogram can call another subprogram.
Up to eight levels of subprograms can be nested.
Recursive calls are not permitted.
- 26 -
(4) Programming order when subprograms are used
1st level sequence

part
2nd level sequence

part
3rd level sequence

part (only with model
that can use 3rd
level)
Code subprograms after 2nd and 3rd

levels.
Subprograms
End of sequence
End of entire sequence program is
program
indicated by END instruction.
Fig. 1.4.4.1
- 27 -
1.4.4.2 Subprogramming and nesting
Function
A conditional call (or unconditional call) is coded in the main program,
and the name of a subprogram to be executed is specified. In the
subprogram, the subprogram name and a ladder sequence to be
executed are coded.
When a conditional call specifying Pn (representing a program name)
is made, a subprogram named Pn is called and executed.
A subroutine name can be assigned by adding a symbol or comment to
Pn.
In the example shown in Fig. 1.4.4.2 (a), the main program calls three
subprograms. These calls are all conditional calls. Subprogram P1 is
named SUBPRO. Subprogram P1 calls subprogram PROCS1
unconditionally.
Fig. 1.4.4.2 (a) Example of subprogramming and nesting
- 28 -
Execution method
The main program is always active. Subprograms are active only when
called by another program.
In the following example, subprogram SUBPRO is called by signal A.
Program cycle
Signal A
Main
program
Subprogram
Management
program
Execution flow
(1) A subprogram call by functional instruction CALL transfers
control to the subprogram.
(2) When the execution of the subprogram is completed, control is
returned to the main program.
(3) When the execution of the main program is completed, the ladder
program postprocessing is performed.
- 29 -
Creating a program
After the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd level ladder programs, create subprograms
in the similar manner.
Creation example
Be sure to code this.
- 30 -
Inhibit items
(1) Subprograms are nested.
(2) A subprogram is created within the 1st, 2nd, or 3rd level ladder
program.
- 31 -
1.4.4.3 Notes on using subroutines
(1) DISPB
(2) EXIN
(3) WINDR (low-speed type only)
(4) WINDW (low-speed type only)
(5) AXCTL
For the above functional instructions, ACT = 1 must be held until

transfer completion information (coil) is set to 1.
When using these functional instructions in subprograms, note the
following prohibition:
(1) When one of the above functional instructions is being used

within a subprogram and is not yet completed (processing is in
progress), the subprogram call is canceled. (ACT for the CALL
instruction is set to 0.)
The subsequent operation of the above functional

instruction is not guaranteed.
(2) When one of the above functional instructions is being used

within a subprogram and is not yet completed (processing is in
progress), the subroutine is called from another subprogram.
Because the preceding function is being processed,

the subsequent operation of the above functional
instruction is not guaranteed.
When a subprogram using the above functional instructions is called

from more than one place, exclusive control is required. An example of
using the WINDR instruction (low-speed type) is given below.
- 32 -
Example:
A subprogram is called from two places. (When the WINDR
instruction is used)
Main program Subprogram 1 Subprogram 2
Set DATA1.
Set DATA2.
Explanation:
Subprogram 1 controls ACT (A) and W1 (B) of WINDR (subprogram
2).
The main program determines which data (C1 or C2) is to be used
according to A controlled by subprogram 1. Upon completion of the
WINDR instruction, the next data is set, and the other CALL
instruction is executed. In the subsequent operation, these steps are
repeated.
- 33 -
1.4.5 Synchronization Processing of I/O Signals
Signals input to the PMC include input signals from the CNC (such as
M function and T function signals) and input signals from the machine
(such as cycle start and feed hold signals). Signals output from the
PMC include output signals to the CNC (such as cycle start and feed
hold signals) and output signals to the machine (such as turret rotation
and spindle stop signals).
The relationships between these signals and the PMC are shown in Fig.
1.4.5 (a), in which input signals are input to the input memory of the
PMC, and output signals are issued from the PMC.
As shown in Fig. 1.4.5 (a), the input signals are synchronized during 1
scan of the 2nd level sequence part.
CNC
Input memory of CNC Sequence program
Input signal from 1st level sequence
CNC part
Transferred at
start of 2nd level 2nd level synchronous
input signal memory
Input signal from

CNC
Transferred every 8 ms
Input signal from 2nd level sequence

machine part
Output memory of CNC
Output signal to
CNC
Output signal memory
Output signal to Output signal to

machine machine
Input signal memory
Input signal from Input signal from 3rd level sequence

machine machine part
Transferred every 2 ms
Fig. 1.4.5 (a) I/O signals of PMC
- 34 -
Input signal processing

(1) Input memory of the CNC
Signals input from the CNC to PMC are set in the memory of the
CNC and are normally transferred to the PMC at intervals of 4 or
8 msec. Since the 1st and 3rd level sequence parts directly
reference and process these signals, these signals are not
synchronized with input signals from the CNC. See the
description of following “Notes on programming asynchronous
I/O signals”.
(2) Input signals from the machine (DI/DO card)

Signals input from the machine are transferred to the input signal
memory via the input circuit (DI/DO card). The 1st and 3rd level
sequence parts read the input signals from the input signal
memory and process them.
(3) Input signal memory

The input signal memory stores signals transferred from the
machine at intervals of 2 msec.
The 1st and 3rd level sequence parts of the PMC read and process
signals stored in this memory. In this case, the signal set in the
input signal memory is not synchronized with the 1st and 3rd level
sequence parts. For notes on asynchronous processing, see the
description of following “Notes on programming asynchronous
I/O signals”.
(4) 2nd level synchronous input signal memory

The 2nd level synchronous input signal memory stores signals
processed by the 2nd level sequence part of the PMC. Signals
synchronized with the 2nd level sequence part are set in this
memory.
Input signals in the input signal memory and input signals from
the CNC are automatically transferred to the 2nd level
synchronous input signal memory at the beginning of the 2nd
level sequence part. Therefore, the status of the 2nd level
synchronous input signal memory is kept unchanged during the
time from the beginning of the 2nd level sequence part until the
end of the sequence part.
The programmer function automatically performs processing so
that the 1st and 3rd level sequence parts use input signals in the
input signal memory and input signals from the CNC while the
2nd level sequence part uses the 2nd level synchronous input
signal memory. (This need not be considered during
programming.)
- 35 -
Output signal processing

(1) Output memory to the CNC
Signals output from the PMC to CNC are set in the output memory
of the CNC. Normally, the PMC transfers signals to the output
memory of the CNC at intervals of 4 or 8 msec.
(2) Output signals to the machine (DI/DO card)

Signals output to the machine are transferred from the output
signal memory of the PMC to the output circuit (DI/DO card).
(3) Output signal memory

The output signal memory is set by the sequence program of the
PMC. Signals set in the output signal memory are transferred to
the machine at intervals of 2 msec.
NOTE
1 The statuses of the input memory of the CNC, input
signals from the machine, output memory of the
CNC, and output signals to the machine can be
viewed on the SIGNAL STATUS screen of the PMC.
For the SIGNAL STATUS screen, see Section 7.1.
2 I/O signals exchanged with the machine are normally
transferred at intervals of 2 msec when the I/O Link is
used. Depending on the channel setting of the I/O
Link, however, the transfer interval varies. For
details, see Section 3.1.
- 36 -
Notes on programming asynchronous I/O signals

Normal input signals from the CNC are transferred to the PMC at
intervals of 4 or 8 msec. Normal output signals to the CNC are
transferred from the PMC at intervals of 4 or 8 msec. Therefore, I/O
signals exchanged with the CNC are usually transferred at intervals of
4 or 8 msec. When creating a sequence program, note that the input
signals from the CNC are not synchronized with the 1st and 3rd level
sequence program parts. Because the input signals from the CNC are
asynchronous, the status of an input signal from the CNC may change
during execution of the 1st level sequence program part, which can lead
to a problem as shown in Fig. 1.4.5 (b). To prevent such a problem,
write the TF signal to an internal relay at the beginning of the 1st level
sequence part so that the subsequent operation of the 1st level sequence
program part references the internal relay. Then, the TF signal can be
treated as a synchronous signal. See Fig. 1.4.5 (c).
Signals input from the machine via the I/O Link and signals input from
other control units over a network are also asynchronous, so these
signals should be treated in a similar manner.
If the TF status changes to 1 after TF=0 is read first,

W1 and W2 may be set to 1 momentarily.
Fig. 1.4.5 (b)
When the TF signal is made synchronized, neither W1

nor W2 is set to 1.
Fig. 1.4.5 (c)
- 37 -
Difference in signal status between 1st level and 2nd level sequence parts
The status of the same input signal may become different between the
1st and 2nd level sequence parts. The 1st level sequence part uses the
input signal memory for signal processing while the 2nd level sequence
part uses the 2nd level synchronous input signal memory. Therefore, it
is possible that an input signal for the 2nd level sequence part lags
behind the input signal for the 1st level sequence part by a cycle of the
2nd level sequence execution at the worst.
When creating a sequence program, note the following:
Signal status
A.M On (pulse signal with short pulse width in time)
B Off
C On
When the 1st level is executed, the following difference can occur
between Fig. 1.4.5 (d) and Fig. 1.4.5 (e):
(1) For Fig. 1.4.5 (d)

Even when W1 = 1, W2 may not be 1. (This is because the A.M
signal may differ between the 1st level and 2nd level.)
(2) For Fig. 1.4.5 (e)

If W1 = 1, W2 is always 1.
When performing the sequence shown in Fig. 1.4.5 (d), do the
following:
At the 1st level, perform the high-speed sequence processing
applied when the A.M signal status changes (operating).
At the 2nd level, perform the sequence processing applied when
the A.M signal status does not change (stopped).
NOTE
In the middle of 1st level processing, a signal status
change may occur asynchronously with the
sequence program processing. For details, see
Subsection 1.4.7.
- 38 -
1st level
2nd level
Fig. 1.4.5 (d) Fig. 1.4.5 (e)
1.4.6 Interlock
In sequence control, considering how to provide an interlock is a key
design issue from the safety point of view. Of course, an interlock must
be provided by sequence programs. Furthermore, an interlock must
also be provided at the end of the electrical circuit in the power
magnetic cabinet of the machine. Even when an interlock is provided
logically by a sequence program (software), the interlock by the
sequence program will not work if the hardware for executing the
sequence program fails for a certain cause. Therefore, be sure to
provide an interlock within the power magnetic cabinet of the machine
to ensure safety of the operator and prevent machine damage.
- 39 -
1.4.7 Notes on I/O Signals Updated by Other Than PMC

I/O signals transmitted over networks (such as an Ethernet, I/O Link-II,
PROFIBUS, DeviceNet, and FL-net) (signals assigned to addresses R,
D, and E) are updated asynchronously with PMC sequence program
execution.
Similarly, other applications (FOCAS2, C executor, real-time custom
macros, etc.) update I/O signals asynchronously with PMC sequence
program execution. Therefore, when a signal updated via a network or
by another application is to be used by a PMC sequence program, the
following should be noted:
(1) Note on input signals

When an input signal transmitted via a network or another
application is referenced at more than one place in the PMC
sequence program, the same value is not guaranteed to be
referenced within the same cycle of the sequence program.
To reference the same input signal value within the same cycle,
store the input signal status in an area such as an internal relay.
(2) Note on output signals

When an output signal is transmitted via a network or another
application, it may be transmitted to a slave unit in the middle of
the PMC sequence program execution cycle. Care should be
exercised when the slave unit references more than one signal.
(3) Note on multiple-byte data

When multiple-byte data is input or output via a network or
another application, concurrence of the data (a condition free
from data splitting) is not guaranteed. To ensure data concurrence,
perform handshaking, which does not cause data splitting during
data I/O.
- 40 -
1.5 MULTI-PMC FUNCTION
The multi-PMC function allows one PMC system to execute multiple

sequence programs at the same time.
PMC memory for each sequence program is basically independent, and

the same PMC address can be used for different purposes of the
individual PMCs. Extra relays (E addresses) can be shared among
PMCs as shared memory. All PMCs can read from and write to this
area, so the area can be used for the interface between the PMCs. M,N
addresses can be also used for the interface between the PMCs.
1st PMC 2nd PMC 3rd PMC
X0-, Y0-, X0-, Y0-, X0-, Y0-,

F0-, G0-, F0-, G0-, F0-, G0-,
R0-, A0-, R0-, A0-, R0-, A0-,
T0-, C0-, T0-, C0-, T0-, C0-,
K0-, D0-, K0-, D0-, K0-, D0-,
P1-, L1- P1-, L1- P1-, L1-
M0-, M0-,
N0- N0-
M0-,
N0-
Shared memory (E0 -)
Fig. 1.5 (a) PMC memory of multi-PMC function
A program for each PMC is saved as an independent file and can be

edited, updated, and backed up separately.
The CNC systems and the I/O Link channels to be controlled by PMCs
can be changed by CNC parameter setting. In a parameter-set
configuration, one PMC may control all CNC systems, or each PMC
may control a different CNC system.
- 41 -
Fig. 1.5 (b) shows a configuration example.
CNC PMC
Machine 1st PMC Operator's

control group panel for
machine
control, etc.
(1)
Peripheral
2nd PMC equipment,
etc.
Loader
3rd PMC Operator's
control group
panel for
loader, etc.
Fig. 1.5 (b) Multi-PMC function configuration example
If the Series 30i/31i/32i-A system is used to control more than one

CNC path, some paths can be grouped to share data within a group and
to stop all the paths in the group if an alarm condition occurs in one of
the paths. The group is referred to as the machine group.
The system supports up to 3 machine groups. Each group has a
separate emergency stop signal address.
A PMC is basically assigned to each machine group.
- 42 -
1.5.1 Execution Order and Execution Time Percentage
For the multi-PMC function, the order of PMC execution and

execution time percentages of the PMCs can be set with CNC
parameters.
Execution order
If parameters related to the execution order are not set (0 is set), the
following order sequence is assumed by default:
1st PMC 2nd PMC 3rd PMC
Other processing such as

tracing
Fig. 1.5.1 (a) Default execution order of multiple PMCs
Execution time percentage

If parameters related to execution time percentages are not set (0 is set),
the following execution time percentages are assumed by default:
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
1st PMC 2nd 3rd

PMC PMC
(75%)
(15%) (10%)
Ladder execution cycle (4 or 8 msec)
Fig. 1.5.1 (b) Execution time percentages of multiple PMCs
- 43 -
An example of changing the execution order and execution time

percentages by setting CNC parameters is explained below. In the
following, sequence programs are executed in the order from the third
PMC to the first PMC to the second PMC with the execution time
percentage of the third PMC set to 30%, the percentage of the first
PMC to 50%, and the percentage of the second PMC to 20%:
3rd PMC 1st PMC 2nd PMC

tracing
Fig. 1.5.1 (c) Example of setting execution order of multiple PMCs
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
3rd PMC 1st PMC 2nd PMC

(30%) (50%) (20%)
Ladder execution cycle (4 or 8 msec)
Fig. 1.5.1 (d) Example of setting execution time percentages of multiple

PMCs
For details of parameter setting, see Subsection 2.4.3.
- 44 -
1.5.2 Setting I/O Address for I/O Link
The I/O addresses of I/O Link channels can be assigned with CNC
parameters.
If these parameters are not set (0 is set), all channels are assigned to the
first PMC by default as follows:
1st PMC
Channel 1
X/Y0 to X/Y127
Channel 2
X/Y200 to X/Y327
Channel 3
X/Y400 to X/Y527
Channel 4
X/Y600 to X/Y727
Fig. 1.5.2 (a) Default I/O addresses of I/O Link channels
In the following example, channel 1 is assigned to X/Y0 to X/Y127 of

the first PMC, channel 2 is assigned to X/Y200 to X/Y327 of the first
PMC, channel 3 is assigned to X/Y0 to X/Y127 of the second PMC,
and channel 4 is assigned to X/Y0 to X/Y127 of the third PMC:
1st PMC
Channel 1
X/Y0 to X/Y127
Channel 2
X/Y200 to X/Y327
2nd PMC
Channel 3
X/Y0 to X/Y127
3rd PMC
Channel 4
X/Y0 to X/Y127
Fig. 1.5.2 (b) Example of I/O address assignment for I/O Link channels
- 45 -
1.5.3 Interface Between CNC and PMC
The PMC to control the interface between the CNC and PMC and PMC
addresses (F/G addresses) can be set with CNC parameters.
With these parameter settings, a desired interface control system can be
built, in which the entire CNC-PMC interface of the CNC may be
controlled by a single PMC or the CNC-PMC interface may be
controlled by multiple PMCs.
For the CNC-PMC interface, a memory area consisting of 10 blocks,
each of which is an addressable, 768-byte DI/DO area, is provided.
When viewed from the ladder program in each PMC, these addresses
begin with 0.
If these parameters are not set (0 is set), the initial settings are assumed,
where the F/G addresses of the CNC equals the F/G addresses of the
first PMC as follows:
CNC 1st PMC

F/G0 to F/G767 of CNC F/G0 to F/G767 of 1st PMC


Fig. 1.5.3 (a) Initial settings for CNC-PMC interface
- 46 -
In the following example, F/G0 to F/G767 and F/G1000 to F/G1767 of

the CNC are assigned to F/G0 to F/G767 and F/G1000 to F/G1767 of
the first PMC, and F/G3000 to F/G3767 of the CNC are assigned to
F/G0 to F/G767 of the second PMC:
CNC 1st PMC

F/G2000 to F/G2767 of CNC

2nd PMC
F/G0 to F/G767 of 2nd PMC
Fig. 1.5.3 (b) Setting example for CNC-PMC interface
- 47 -
1.5.4 Multi-Path PMC Interface
The multi-path PMC interface is the communication means between

two PMC paths.
Generally, Each path of multi-path PMC system has individual PMC

memory space except E address. And, E address can be used to share
data of multi-path PMC system. However, this method has a risk that
the memory is over written by other PMC path inappropriately.
When using this function, the input and output signals of each path
become definitely. So, you can send or receive the data on between two
PMC paths safely.
When you output data to N address at one of PMC paths, it can be
referenced by M address in other PMC path.
Ex.) When using this function with 1st PMC and 2nd PMC :
1st PMC 2nd PMC
M M
N N
Moreover, signals of M address are synchronized during 1 scan of 2nd

level program. Therefore, you can reference the same signal status on
the first step and the last step of level2 program, like as X and F
address.
For details of setting for two PMC paths, see Subsection 2.4.3.
- 48 -
B-63983EN/01 2.PMC SPECIFICATIONS
2 PMC SPECIFICATIONS
- 49 -
2.PMC SPECIFICATIONS B-63983EN/01
2.1 SPECIFICATIONS
2.1.1 Basic Specifications
Table 2.1.1 (a) Basic specifications of the PMCs for the Series 30i/31i/32i-A
30i/31i/32i-A
Function Second PMC Third PMC Dual-check safety
First PMC
(option) (option) PMC (Note 1)
Programming language Ladder Ladder Ladder Ladder
Number of ladder levels 3 3 3 2 (Note 11)
Level 1 execution period 4 or 8 msec 4 or 8 msec 4 or 8 msec 4 or 8 msec
(Note 2)
Processing power
• Basic instruction 25 nsec/step 25 nsec/step 25 nsec/step 1 µsec/step
processing speed
Program capacity (Note 3)
• Ladder Up to about 64,000 Up to about 64,000 Up to about 64,000 Up to about 3,000
steps steps steps steps
• Symbol/comment At least 1 KB At least 1 KB At least 1 KB At least 1 KB
• Message At least 8 KB At least 8 KB At least 8 KB At least 8 KB
Instructions
• Basic instructions 14 14 14 14
• Functional instructions 69 (83) 69 (83) 69 (83) 63 (83)
(Note 4)
• Variable timers 250 pieces 40 pieces 40 pieces 40 pieces
• Fixed timers 500 pieces 100 pieces 100 pieces 100 pieces
• Variable counters 100 pieces 20 pieces 20 pieces 20 pieces
• Fixed counters 100 pieces 20 pieces 20 pieces 20 pieces
• DIFUs/DIFDs 1000 pieces 256 pieces 256 pieces 256 pieces
PMC memory
• Internal relay (R)
• User area 8,000 bytes 1,500 bytes 1,500 bytes 1,500 bytes
• System area 500 bytes 500 bytes 500 bytes 500 bytes
• Extra relay (E) 10,000 bytes (Note 5) 10,000 bytes (Note 5) 10,000 bytes (Note 5) -
• Message display (A)
• Display requests 2,000 points 2,000 points 2,000 points 2,000 points
• Status displays 2,000 points 2,000 points 2,000 points 2,000 points
• Nonvolatile memory
• Timer (T)
• Variable timer 500 bytes 80 bytes 80 bytes 80 bytes
• Variable timer 500 bytes 80 bytes 80 bytes 80 bytes
precision (Note 6)
• Counter (C)
• Variable counter 400 bytes 80 bytes 80 bytes 80 bytes
• Fixed counter 200 bytes 40 bytes 40 bytes 40 bytes
• Keep relay (K)
• User area 100 bytes 20 bytes 20 bytes 20 bytes
• System area 100 bytes 100 bytes 100 bytes 100 bytes
• Data table (D) 10,000 bytes 3,000 bytes 3,000 bytes 3,000 bytes
- 50 -
Table 2.1.1 (b) Basic specifications of the PMCs for the Series 30i/31i/32i-A
30i/31i/32i-A
Function First PMC Second PMC Third PMC Dual-check safety
(option) (option) PMC (Note 1)
PMC memory
• Subprograms (P) 5,000 pieces 512 pieces 512 pieces 512 pieces
• Labels (L) 9,999 pieces 9,999 pieces 9,999 pieces 9,999 pieces
CNC interface(Note 7)
• Input (F) 768 bytes × 10 768 bytes × 10 768 bytes × 10 768 bytes
• Output (G) 768 bytes × 10 768 bytes × 10 768 bytes × 10 768 bytes
DI/DO
• I/O Link(Note 8)
• Inputs (X) Up to 4,096 points Up to 4,096 points Up to 4,096 points Up to 64 points
(3,072 points) (3,072 points) (3,072 points)
• Outputs (Y) Up to 4,096 points Up to 4,096 points Up to 4,096 points Up to 64 points
(3,072 points) (3,072 points) (3,072 points)
Symbol/comment
Number of symbol 40 40 40 40
characters (Note 12)
Number of comment 255 255 255 255
characters (Note 10,12)
Program storage area Up to 768 KB of flash Up to 768 KB of flash Up to 768 KB of flash 128 KB of flash ROM
(Note 9) ROM ROM ROM
NOTE
1 This PMC is used for dual-check safety. It is used to watch both safety-related signals
and ladder programs. Refer to "FANUC Series 30i dual-check safety Operators
Manual (B-64004EN)" for details.
2 NC parameter No. 11930 is used to specify a level-1 execution period. See
Subsection 2.4.3 for details. Note, however, that it is impossible to specify a level-1
execution period for each PMC separately.
3 The maximum overall program size (including the maximum number of ladder steps,
symbols/ comments, and messages) varies depending on option settings. See
Tables 2.1.2 (a) to 2.1.2 (d) for details.
4 For the number of functional instructions, each parenthesized number indicates the
number of all functional instructions, and each non-parenthesized number, the
number of valid functional instructions.
5 The extra relay is common memory for the multi-PMC function. To put it another way,
its size covers all of the first, second, and third PMCs.
6 This area is used to specify the precision of the variable timer. Do not use this area in
user programs.
7 It is possible to specify which program is used to control a specific CNC system. See
"Interface between CNC and PMC" in Subsection 2.4.3 for details.
- 51 -
NOTE
8 Series 30i can use up to four I/O Link channels (4,096 input points and 4,096 output
points). Series 31i/32i can use up to three I/O Link channels (3,072 input points and
3,072 output points). However, only one I/O Link channel (1,024 input points and
1,024 output points) can be used in the basic function. Using more than one channel
requires installing an I/O Link expansion option for each additional channel.
It is possible to specify which program is used to control a specific I/O Link channel.
See "I/O Link input/output addresses" in Subsection 2.4.3 for details.
9 The capacity of the program storage area varies depending on option settings. See
Tables 2.1.2 (a) to 2.1.2 (d) for details.
10 When you use only the full-size character. The number of comment character
becomes half of the normal specification.
11 These instructions are intended to maintain source-level compatibility with programs
for other models. A program can be created on level 3, but it is not executed.
12 These are the number for extended symbol and comment character. The number of
basic symbol character is 16 and the number of comment character is 30. Refer to
section 1 “Specification of extended symbol and comment“ for details
- 52 -
2.1.2 Program Capacity

Table 2.1.2 (a) Program capacity for the first PMC
Maximum program size
Number-of-ladder-step option
(flash ROM capacity)
3000-step option
5000-step option
8000-step option 128 KB
12000-step option
16000-step option
32000-step option
(Symbol capacity expansion) 768 KB
(Note1, 2)
48000-step option 1 MB
(Symbol capacity expansion)
(Note1, 2)
64000-step option 1.5 MB
(Symbol capacity expansion)
(Note1, 2)
Table 2.1.2 (b) Program capacity for the second PMC

8000-step option
128 KB
16000-step option
Table 2.1.2 (c) Program capacity for the third PMC

8000-step option
128 KB
16000-step option
Table 2.1.2 (d) Program capacity for the dual-check safety PMC
Number of ladder steps
3000 steps (Note 3) 128 KB
- 53 -
NOTE
1 Conventional symbol and comment are also able to
be used.
2 The program size tend to increase when
programming with extended symbol and comment.
If the program size exceeds the current option,
specify next bigger option or extended size option
with same step.
3 The dual-check safety option supports this quantity
of steps.
- 54 -
2.1.3 Sequence Program Memory Capacity
The following table lists the memory capacity used by sequence

programs. When creating sequence programs, keep their total size
within this memory capacity.
Table 2.1.3 (a)

Required memory size
Category Item
(Note 1)
Ladder (Note 2) Basic instruction 4 bytes
Functional instruction 4 bytes
(except for Table 2.1.3 (b))
Functional instruction 4 bytes
parameter
Symbol/comment One definition of 24 bytes
conventional type symbol/comment
(Note 2) (Including symbol string)
One comment character 1 byte (Note 3)
Symbol/comment One definition of 16 - 23 bytes (Note 5)
extended type symbol/comment
(Note 2) One symbol character 1 byte
One comment character 1 byte (Note 3)
One sub-program 8 bytes (Note 6)
Message (Note 2) One message character 1 byte (Note 4)
(alphanumeric
characters)
Others Area used by the system About 16K bytes
Table 2.1.3 (b) Functional instructions having a non-standard size

Functional instruction Required memory size
TMR 8 bytes
DEC 8 bytes
JMP 8 bytes
CALL 8 bytes
CALLU 8 bytes
JMPB 12 bytes
LBL 8 bytes
JMPC 12 bytes
CM 8 bytes
- 55 -
NOTE
1 The total sequence program size (including all items
such as ladders, symbols/comments, and
messages) cannot exceed the sequence program
memory storage capacity. If a ladder, symbol/
comment, or message is large, the size of other
categories may be limited.
2 The PMC programmer may adjust arrangement of
these items in the sequence program memory to
improve processing efficiency. As a result, up to 1K
byte (1024 bytes) may be added to the sum of the
sizes of individual items.
3 Each full-size character takes a memory capacity of
2 bytes.
4 For half-size katakana, full-size hiragana, kanji, and
special characters, each character in a character
code notation (including leading and trailing "@"
characters) takes a memory capacity of one byte.
See descriptions about the DISPB function
instructions for the character input code notation.
5 One definition of extended symbol and comment
takes 16-23 bytes plus the memory according to the
length of symbol and comment.
6 8 bytes are taken for a sub-program when local
symbols are defined.
2.1.4 Data Size for PMC Message Multi-Language Display
The PMC message multi-language display function has a memory card

format file, independently of a ladder. To load the data of this file to
the CNC, the options for the following are needed:
Option name Maximum memory size

(Flash ROM size)
1st path PMC message multi-language 256K 256 KB
1st path PMC message multi-language 128K 128 KB
2nd path PMC message multi-language 128K 128 KB
3rdpath PMC message multi-language 128K 128 KB
- 56 -
2.1.5 Addresses
Table 2.1.5 (a) Addresses of the PMCs for the Series 30i/31i/32i-A
30i/31i/32i-A
Dual-check
Function Symbol Second PMC Third PMC
First PMC safety PMC
(option) (option)
(option)
Signal input to the PMC X X0 to X127 X0 to X127 X0 to X127 X0 to X127
from the machine X200 to X327 X200 to X327 X200 to X327
X400 to X527 X400 to X527 X400 to X527
X600 to X727 X600 to X727 X600 to X727
X1000 to X1127 X1000 to X1127 X1000 to X1127
(Note 1) (Note 1) (Note 1)
Signal output from the Y Y0 to Y127 Y0 to Y127 Y0 to Y127 Y0 to Y127
PMC to the machine Y200 to Y327 Y200 to Y327 Y200 to Y327
Y400 to Y527 Y400 to Y527 Y400 to Y527
Y600 to Y727 Y600 to Y727 Y600 to Y727
Y1000 to Y1127 Y1000 to Y1127 Y1000 to Y1127
(Note 1) (Note 1) (Note 1)
Signal input to the PMC F F0 to F767 F0 to F767 F0 to F767 F0 to F767
from the CNC F1000 to F1767 F1000 to F1767 F1000 to F1767
F2000 to F2767 F2000 to F2767 F2000 to F2767
F3000 to F3767 F3000 to F3767 F3000 to F3767
F4000 to F4767 F4000 to F4767 F4000 to F4767
F5000 to F5767 F5000 to F5767 F5000 to F5767
F6000 to F6767 F6000 to F6767 F6000 to F6767
F7000 to F7767 F7000 to F7767 F7000 to F7767
F8000 to F8767 F8000 to F8767 F8000 to F8767
F9000 to F9767 F9000 to F9767 F9000 to F9767
Signal output from the G G0 to G767 G0 to G767 G0 to G767 G0 to G767
PMC to the CNC G1000 to G1767 G1000 to G1767 G1000 to G1767
G2000 to G2767 G2000 to G2767 G2000 to G2767
G3000 to G3767 G3000 to G3767 G3000 to G3767
G4000 to G4767 G4000 to G4767 G4000 to G4767
G5000 to G5767 G5000 to G5767 G5000 to G5767
G6000 to G6767 G6000 to G6767 G6000 to G6767
G7000 to G7767 G7000 to G7767 G7000 to G7767
G8000 to G8767 G8000 to G8767 G8000 to G8767
G9000 to G9767 G9000 to G9767 G9000 to G9767
Signal input to other PMC M M0 to M767 M0 to M767 M0 to M767
path
Signal output from other N N0 to N767 N0 to N767 N0 to N767
PMC path
Internal relay R
• User area R0 to R7999 R0 to R1499 R0 to R1499 R0 to R1499
• System area R9000 to R9499 R9000 to R9499 R9000 to R9499 R9000 to R9499
Extra relay E E0 to E9999 E0 to E9999 (Note 3) E0 to E9999 (Note 3) (Note 4)
- 57 -
Table 2.1.5 (b) Addresses of PMCs for the Series 30i/31i/32i-A

30i/31i/32i-A
Dual-check
Function Symbol Second PMC Third PMC
(option) (option)
(option)
Message display A
• Display request A0 to A249 A0 to A249 A0 to A249 A0 to A249
• Status display A9000 to A9249 A9000 to A9249 A9000 to A9249 A9000 to A9249
Timer T
• Variable timer T0 to T499 T0 to T79 T0 to T79 T0 to T79
• Variable-timer precision T9000 to T9499 T9000 to T9079 T9000 to T9079 T9000 to T9079
(Note 2)
Counter C
• Variable counter C0 to C399 C0 to C79 C0 to C79 C0 to C79
• Fixed counter C5000 to C5199 C5000 to C5039 C5000 to C5039 C5000 to C5039
Keep relay K
• User area K0 to K99 K0 to K19 K0 to K19 K0 to K19
• System area K900 to K999 K900 to K999 K900 to K999 K900 to K999
Data table D D0 to D9999 D0 to D2999 D0 to D2999 D0 to D2999
Subprogram P P1 to P5000 P1 to P512 P1 to P512 P1 to P512
Label L L1 to L9999 L1 to L9999 L1 to L9999 L1 to L9999
NOTE
1 This area is reserved for PMC management software.
No I/O can be allocated in this area. Do not use it in
user programs.
2 This area is used to specify the precision of a variable
timer.
-Don’t modifiy the value of timer and precision
except for same value when working the timer
-Don’t set the value other than the following range.
-If above rules are violated, the working of the timer
is not guaranteed.
-The rage other than from T9000 to T9499 are
reserved.
The value of precision

0: Default (8msec or 4msec)
1: 1msec
2: 10msec
3: 100msec
4: 1sec
5: 1min
3 This area is common memory for the multi-PMC
function. It is possible for each program to read the
same value from, and write it to, the area.
4 No extra relay is available for the dual-check safety
PMC.
- 58 -
2.1.6 Basic Instructions
Table 2.1.6 Basic instructions for PMCs for the Series 30i/31i/32i-A
30i/31i/32i-A
Dual-check
Instruction name Second PMC Third PMC
(option) (option)
(option)
RD ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
RD.NOT ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
WRT ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
WRT.NOT ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
AND ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
AND.NOT ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
OR ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
OR.NOT ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
RD.STK ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
RD.NOT.STK ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
AND.STK ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
OR.STK ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
SET ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
RST ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
(¡: Usable. ×: Unusable.)
- 59 -
2.1.7 Functional Instructions (Arranged in Sequence of Instruction

Group)
Table 2.1.7 (a) Functional instructions for PMCs for the Series 30i/31i/32i-A
(arranged in sequence of instruction group)
30i/31i/32i-A
Instruction Instruction SUB Second Third
Processing DCS
group name No. First PMC PMC PMC
(Note 4)
(option) (option)
Timer 1 TMR 3 Timer processing ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
(Section 4.3) 2 TMRB 24 Fixed-timer processing ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
3 TMRC 54 Timer processing ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
Counter 1 CTR 5 Counter processing ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
(Section 4.4) 2 CTRB 56 Counter processing ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
3 CTRC 55 Counter processing ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
Data transfer 1 MOVB 43 1-byte transfer ¡ ¡ ¡ ×
(Section 4.5) 2 MOVW 44 2-byte transfer ¡ ¡ ¡ ×
3 MOVD 47 4-byte transfer ¡ ¡ ¡ ×
4 MOVN 45 Transfer of arbitrary number of bytes ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
5 MOVE 8 Data transfer after logical product ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
6 MOVOR 28 Data transfer after logical sum ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
7 XMOVB 35 Index modification binary data transfer ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
8 XMOV 18 Index modification data transfer ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
Comparison 1 COMPB 32 Binary comparison ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
(Section 4.6) 2 COMP 15 Comparison ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
3 COIN 16 Coincidence check ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
Data search 1 DSCHB 34 Binary data search ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
(Section 4.7) 2 DSCH 17 Data search ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
Bit operation 1 DIFU 57 Rising-edge detection ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
(Section 4.8) 2 DIFD 58 Falling-edge detection ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
3 EOR 59 Exclusive OR ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
4 AND 60 Logical AND ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
5 OR 61 Logical OR ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
6 NOT 62 Logical NOT ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
7 PARI 11 Parity check ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
8 SFT 33 Shift register ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
Code 1 COD 7 Code conversion ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
conversion 2 CODB 27 Binary code conversion ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
(Section 4.9) 3 DCNV 14 Data conversion ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
4 DCNVB 31 Extended data conversion ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
5 DEC 4 Decoding ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
6 DECB 25 Binary decoding ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
(¡: Usable. ∆: Executed as NOP instruction (Note 1). ×: Unusable.)
- 60 -
Table 2.1.7 (b) Functional instructions for PMCs for the Series 30i/31i/32i-A
30i/31i/32i-A
Processing DCS
(Note 4)
(option) (option)
Operation 1 ADDB 36 Binary addition ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
(Section 2 SUBB 37 Binary subtraction ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
4.10) 3 MULB 38 Binary multiplication ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
4 DIVB 39 Binary division ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
5 ADD 19 BCD addition ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
6 SUB 20 BCD subtraction ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
7 MUL 21 BCD multiplication ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
8 DIV 22 BCD division ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
9 NUMEB 40 Binary constant definition ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
10 NUME 23 BCD-constant definition ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
CNC function 1 DISPB 41 Message display ¡ ¡ ¡ ∆
(Section 2 EXIN 42 External data input ¡ ¡ ¡ ∆
4.11) 3 WINDR 51 CNC window data read ¡ ¡ ¡ ∆
4 WINDW 52 CNC window data write ¡ ¡ ¡ ∆
5 AXCTL 53 PMC axis control ¡ ¡ ¡ ∆
Program 1 COM 9 Common line control ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
control 2 COME 29 End of common line control ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
(Section 3 JMP 10 Jump ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
4.12) 4 JMPE 30 End of jump ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
5 JMPB 68 Label jump 1 ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
6 JMPC 73 Label jump 2 ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
7 LBL 69 Label ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
8 CALL 65 Conditional subprogram call ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
9 CALLU 66 Unconditional subprogram call ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
10 SP 71 Subprogram ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
11 SPE 72 End of subprogram ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
12 END1 1 End of first-level program ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
13 END2 2 End of second-level program ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
14 END3 48 End of third-level program ¡(Note 2) ¡ (Note 2) ¡ (Note 2) ∆ (Note 3)
15 END 64 End of ladder program ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
16 NOP 70 No operation ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
17 CS 74 Case call ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
18 CM 75 Sub program call in case call ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
19 CE 76 End of case call ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
Rotation 1 ROT 6 Rotation control ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
control
(Section 2 ROTB 26 Binary rotation control ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
4.13)
- 61 -
Table 2.1.7 (c) Functional instructions for PMCs for the Series 30i/31i/32i-A
30i/31i/32i-A
Processing DCS
(Note 4)
(option) (option)
Invalid 1 SPCNT 46 Spindle control ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
instruction 2 DISP 49 Message display ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
(Section 3 MMCWR 98 MMC window data read ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
4.14) 4 MMCWW 99 MMC window data write ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
5 PSGNL 50 Position signal output ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
6 PSGN2 63 Position signal output 2 ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
7 FNC90 90 Arbitrary-function instruction 1 ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
NOTE
1 These instructions are intended to maintain source-
level compatibility with programs for conventional
models. They are treated as a NOP instruction
(instruction that performs no operation).
2 The 3rd level sequence part is available for the
conpativility with programs for conventional models.
However the execution cycle period of time for
processing the 3rd level sequence part is not
guaranteed. See Section 1.4.3 “Processing priority”.
level compatibility with programs for other models. A
program can be created on level 3, but it is not
executed.
4 This term stands for the dual-check safety
PMC(option).
- 62 -
2.1.8 Functional Instructions (Arranged in Sequence of SUB No.)
Table 2.1.8 (a) Functional instructions for PMCs for the Series 30i/31i/32i-A
30i/31i/32i-A
Instruction SUB
Processing Second PMC Third PMC DCS
name No. First PMC
(option) (option) (Note 4)
END1 1 End of first-level program ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
END2 2 End of second-level program ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
TMR 3 Timer processing ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
DEC 4 Decoding ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
CTR 5 Counter processing ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
ROT 6 Rotation control ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
COD 7 Code conversion ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
MOVE 8 Data transfer after logical product ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
COM 9 Common line control ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
JMP 10 Jump ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
PARI 11 Parity check ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
DCNV 14 Data conversion ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
COMP 15 Comparison ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
COIN 16 Coincidence check ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
DSCH 17 Data search ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
XMOV 18 Index modification data transfer ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
ADD 19 Addition ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
SUB 20 Subtraction ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
MUL 21 Multiplication ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
DIV 22 Division ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
NUME 23 Constant definition ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
TMRB 24 Fixed-timer processing ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
DECB 25 Binary decoding ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
ROTB 26 Binary rotation control ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
CODB 27 Binary code conversion ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
MOVOR 28 Data transfer after logical sum ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
COME 29 End of common line control ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
JMPE 30 End of jump ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
DCNVB 31 Extended data conversion ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
COMPB 32 Binary comparison ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
SFT 33 Shift register ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
DSCHB 34 Binary data search ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
XMOVB 35 Index modification binary data transfer ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
ADDB 36 Binary addition ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
- 63 -
Table 2.1.8 (b) Functional instructions for PMCs for the Series 30i/31i/32i-A
30i/31i/32i-A
Instruction SUB
name No. First PMC
SUBB 37 Binary subtraction ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
MULB 38 Binary multiplication ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
DIVB 39 Binary division ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
NUMEB 40 Binary constant definition ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
DISPB 41 Message display ¡ ¡ ¡ ∆
EXIN 42 External data input ¡ ¡ ¡ ∆
MOVB 43 1-byte transfer ¡ ¡ ¡ ×
MOVW 44 2-byte transfer ¡ ¡ ¡ ×
MOVN 45 Transfer of arbitrary number of bytes ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
SPCNT 46 Spindle control ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
MOVD 47 4-byte transfer ¡ ¡ ¡ ×
END3 48 End of third-level program ¡(Note 2) ¡ (Note 2) ¡ (Note 2) ∆ (Note 3)
DISP 49 Message display ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
PSGNL 50 Position signal output ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
WINDR 51 CNC window data read ¡ ¡ ¡ ∆
WINDW 52 CNC window data write ¡ ¡ ¡ ∆
AXCTL 53 PMC axis control ¡ ¡ ¡ ∆
TMRC 54 Timer processing ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
CTRC 55 Counter processing ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
CTRB 56 Counter processing ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
DIFU 57 Rising-edge detection ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
DIFD 58 Falling-edge detection ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
EOR 59 Exclusive OR ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
AND 60 Logical AND ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
OR 61 Logical OR ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
NOT 62 Logical NOT ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
PSGN2 63 Position signal output 2 ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
END 64 End of ladder program ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
CALL 65 Conditional subprogram call ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
CALLU 66 Unconditional subprogram call ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
JMPB 68 Label jump 1 ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
LBL 69 Label ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
NOP 70 No operation ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
SP 71 Subprogram ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
SPE 72 End of subprogram ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
JMPC 73 Label jump 2 ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
CS 74 Case call ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
CM 75 Sub program call in case call ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
CE 76 End of case call ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
- 64 -
Table 2.1.8 (c) Functional instructions for PMCs for the Series 30i/31i/32i-A
30i/31i/32i-A
Instruction SUB
name No. First PMC
FNC90 90 Arbitrary-function instruction 1 ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
MMCWR 98 MMC window data read ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
MMCWW 99 MMC window data write ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
NOTE
level compatibility with programs for conventional
models. They are treated as a NOP instruction
(instruction that performs no operation).
2 The 3rd level sequence part is available for the
conpativility with programs for conventional models.
However the execution cycle period of time for
processing the 3rd level sequence part is not
guaranteed. See Section 1.4.3 “Processing priority”.
level compatibility with programs for other models. A
program can be created on level 3, but it is not
executed.
4 This term stands for the dual-check safety
PMC(option).
- 65 -
2.2 PMC SIGNAL ADDRESSES

This section describes the use of each PMC address. See Subsection
2.1.4 for explanations about all address types and ranges.
2.2.1 Addresses for Signals Between the PMC and CNC (F, G)
This subsection briefly describes interface addresses. Refer to the
applicable CNC connection manual for details.
(1) Signals from the CNC to the PMC

The following table lists the range of addresses for the signals sent
from the CNC to the PMC.
Refer to address tables in the applicable CNC connection manual
for details about the signals.
30i/31i/32i-A
Dual-check
Second PMC Third PMC
(option) (option)
(option)
F0 to F767 F0 to F767 F0 to F767 F0 to F767
F1000 to F1767 F1000 to F1767 F1000 to F1767
F2000 to F2767 F2000 to F2767 F2000 to F2767
F3000 to F3767 F3000 to F3767 F3000 to F3767
F4000 to F4767 F4000 to F4767 F4000 to F4767
F5000 to F5767 F5000 to F5767 F5000 to F5767
F6000 to F6767 F6000 to F6767 F6000 to F6767
F7000 to F7767 F7000 to F7767 F7000 to F7767
F8000 to F8767 F8000 to F8767 F8000 to F8767
F9000 to F9767 F9000 to F9767 F9000 to F9767
(2) Signals from the PMC to the CNC

The following table lists the range of addresses for the signals sent
from the PMC to the CNC.
Refer to address tables in the applicable CNC connection manual
for details about the signals.
30i/31i/32i-A
Dual-check
(option) (option)
(option)
G0 to G767 G0 to G767 G0 to G767 G0 to G767
G1000 to G1767 G1000 to G1767 G1000 to G1767
G2000 to G2767 G2000 to G2767 G2000 to G2767
G3000 to G3767 G3000 to G3767 G3000 to G3767
G4000 to G4767 G4000 to G4767 G4000 to G4767
G5000 to G5767 G5000 to G5767 G5000 to G5767
G6000 to G6767 G6000 to G6767 G6000 to G6767
G7000 to G7767 G7000 to G7767 G7000 to G7767
G8000 to G8767 G8000 to G8767 G8000 to G8767
G9000 to G9767 G9000 to G9767 G9000 to G9767
- 66 -
2.2.2 Addresses of Signals Between the PMC and Machine (X, Y)
(1) If the FANUC I/O Link is used
(a) Signals input from the machine to the PMC
First/second/third PMC
The addresses for four channels, X0 to X127, X200 to
X327, X400 to X527, and X600 to X727, can be used
for the signals input to PMCs. Each address is not fixed
at a specific channel. They can be assigned to any
channel. See "I/O Link channel input/output
addresses" in Subsection 2.4.3 for details.
Dual-check safety (DCS)

The addresses for one channel, X0 to X127, are used
for the signals input to the DCS.
These addresses are fixed at channel 3 or channel 4.
(b) Signals output from the PMC to the machine
First/second/third PMC
The addresses for four channels, Y0 to Y127, Y200 to
Y327, Y400 to Y527, and Y600 to Y727, can be used
for signals output from PMCs. Each address is not
fixed at a specific channel. They can be assigned to any
channel. See "I/O Link channel input/output
addresses" in Subsection 2.4.3 for details.
Dual-check safety (DCS)

The addresses for one channel, Y0 to Y127, are used for
the signals output from the DCS.
These addresses are fixed at channel 3 or channel 4.
(2) Address-fixed CNC signals input from the machine

The CNC processes signals input from the machine (listed in
Table 2.2.2) by referencing fixed addresses. Be sure to assign
specified addresses.
- 67 -
Table 2.2.2 Address-fixed input signals

Address
Signal name Symbol
Path 1 Path 2 Path 3
Common Common skip signal SKIP X4.7 X13.7 X11.7
to T/M Emergency stop signal (machine group 1) *ESP X8.4 (Note 1)
Emergency stop signal (machine group 2) *ESP X8.0 (Note 1)
Emergency stop signal (machine group 3) *ESP X8.1 (Note 1)
Deceleration signal for 1st-axis reference
*DEC1 X9.0 X7.0 X10.0
position return
Deceleration signal for 2nd-axis reference
*DEC2 X9.1 X7.1 X10.1
position return
Deceleration signal for 3rd-axis reference
*DEC3 X9.2 X7.2 X10.2
position return
Deceleration signal for 4th-axis reference
*DEC4 X9.3 X7.3 X10.3
position return
*DEC5 X9.4 X7.4 X10.4
position return
*DEC6 X9.5 X7.5 X10.5
position return
*DEC7 X9.6 X7.6 X10.6
position return
*DEC8 X9.7 X7.7 X10.7
position return
- 68 -
NOTE
1 If the Series 30i/31i/32i-A system is used to control
more than one path, some paths can be grouped to
share data within a group and to stop all the paths in
the group if an alarm condition occurs in one of the
paths. The group is referred to as the machine
group.
The system supports up to 3 machine groups. Each
group has a separate emergency stop signal
address.
2 The emergency stop signal address is common
signal address in a machine group. But other
signals has indivisual address with each path. For
example, in the following configuration, X11.7 does
not mean “the common skip signal” in first PMCs. In
second PMCs, it means “the common skip signal”.
CNC PMC
Path 1 First PMC
Path 2 Second PMC
Path 3
3 Path-specific, X address-based input signals are

assigned to up to 3 paths. For additional paths,
therefore, bit 2 of CNC parameter No. 3008 must be
used to assign such input signals.
4 The X address for an axis-specific deceleration
signal (*DECn) for reference position return is
assigned to 8 axes of each of up to 3 paths. For
additional paths and axes, therefore, bit 2 of CNC
parameter No. 3008, CNC parameter Nos. 3013
and 3014 must be used to assign the X address.
- 69 -
2.2.3 Internal Relay Addresses (R)
The following table lists the number of signals (bytes) that can be used
as internal relays.
Signals that interface with other control units can be assigned to these
bytes over the FA network.
Turning on the power clears these areas to 0.
30i/31i/32i-A
First PMC Second PMC Third PMC Dual-check
(option) (option) safety PMC
(option)
Number of User area 8000 1500 1500 1500
bytes System area 500 500 500 500
Address number
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
R0
Second PMC First PMC
Third PMC
R1 Dual-check safety
PMC
.
.
.
∼ ∼
R1499
.
.
.
∼ ∼
R7999
R9000
R9001
.
.
.
∼ ∼
R9499
- 70 -
2.2.4 Internal Relay (System Area) Addresses (R)
Internal addresses (R) 9000s are an area managed by the system

program.
Operation results of functional instructions
This area holds information necessary for individual ladder levels, such
as the operation results of functional instructions. This information is
saved/restored when the task is switched.
(1) R9000 (operation output register for the ADDB, SUBB, MULB,
DIVB, and COMPB functional instructions)
The result is 0.
The result is negative.
The result has
overflowed.
(2) R9000 (error output for the EXIN, WINDR, and WINDW
functional instructions)
The result is erroneous.
(3) R9002 to R9005 (operation output registers for the DIVB

functional instruction)
The remainder of a division performed with the DIVB functional
instruction is output to these addresses.
- 71 -
System timers
Four signals can be used as system timers.
Their specifications are as follows.
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
R9091
Normally OFF signal

Normally ON signal
200 ms cyclic signal

(104 ms ON and 96 ms OFF)
1 s cyclic signal
(504 ms ON and 496 m OFF)
CAUTION
1 Each signal is initially OFF.
2 The signals R9091.0 and R9091.1 are set at the
beginning of the first ladder level on every cycle.
3 Each pulse signal (ON-OFF signal) has an error of ±8
or 4 msec (ladder execution period).
- 72 -
Ladder execution start signal

Ladder stop signal
Ladder execution status signal
Using the ladder execution start and stop signals in a ladder program
can detect when the ladder program starts and stops.
Referencing the ladder execution status signal from an external system
or program, such as the network board, C Language executor program,
FOCAS2 Ethernet, or HSSB library, can detect the execution status of
the ladder program.
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
R9015
R9015.0: "Ladder execution start

signal" (can be referenced
only from the ladder
program)
R9015.1: "Ladder stop signal" (can be
referenced only from the
ladder program)
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
R9091
R9091.2: "1st Ladder execution

status signal"
0: Ladder at a stop
1: Ladder being executed
R9091.3: "2nd Ladder execution

status signal"
0: Ladder at a stop
R9091.4: "3rd Ladder execution

status signal"
0: Ladder at a stop
Signal operation
Ladder execution status Execution

Stop
"Ladder execution start

signal"
"Ladder stop signal"
"Ladder execution status

signal"
One ladder One ladder

scan cycle scan cycle
- 73 -
(1) Ladder execution start signal (R9015.0)

When directed to start ladder program execution, the system
software starts executing the ladder program, turns on this signal,
and keeps it on for the first one scan cycle. Like R9000, this
signal indicates the status of ladder execution corresponding to
each ladder execution level. For this reason, this signal is securely
turned on for the first one scan cycle after the start of execution no
matter on what execution level the signal is referenced. This
signal is turned on when:
(a) Ladder execution begins at power turn-on.
(b) The [RUN] soft key on the PMC screen is pressed.
(c) FANUC LADDER-III or a ladder editing package directs the
ladder to start.
Referencing this signal in a ladder program can detect when
ladder execution has begun, making it possible to program
preprocessing related to ladder execution.
CAUTION
Reference this signal only within a ladder program.
Do not reference it from an external system or
program as it indicates the status of ladder execution
separately for each ladder execution level.
(2) Ladder stop signal (R9015.1)

When directed to stop ladder program execution, the system
software turns off this signal and keeps it off for the last one scan
before stopping ladder program execution. Like R9000, this
signal indicates the status of ladder execution corresponding to
each ladder execution level. For this reason, this signal is securely
turned off for the last one scan before the stop of execution no
matter on what execution level the signal is referenced. This
signal is turned off when:
(a) The [EXIT] soft key on the PMC screen is pressed.
(b) FANUC LADDER-III or a ladder editing package directs the
ladder to stop.
(c) On the PMC DATA I/O screen, the ladder program is loaded
to the PMC.
(d) FANUC LADDER-III or a ladder editing package stores the
ladder program to the PMC.
Referencing this signal in a ladder program can detect when
ladder execution stops, making it possible to program post
processing related to ladder execution (that is, preprocessing for
ladder execution stop). Before the ladder is stopped, for example,
it is possible to put signals in an proper state for safety purposes.
- 74 -
CAUTION
1 Reference this signal only within the ladder
program. Do not reference it from an external
system or program as it indicates the status of
ladder execution separately for each ladder
execution level.
2 If the power is turned off or a CNC system alarm
occurs, ladder execution and I/O signal transfer are
immediately stopped for safety purposes. In this
case, therefore, this signal cannot be used.
(3) Ladder execution status signal (R9091.2,R9091.3,R9091.4)

Referencing this signal from an external system or program, such
as the network board, C language executor program, FOCAS2
Ethernet, or HSSB library, can detect the execution status of the
ladder program.
(4) Example of using the signals

(a) Example of calling a subprogram just before the ladder stops
- 75 -
(b) Example of forcibly turning off an output signal

programmed on the first ladder level just before the ladder
stops
Input Output
(c) Example of sending an execution-in-progress signal to the

outside
Outputting the status of this signal as the DO signal (output
address from the PMC) assigned to the I/O Link causes the
CNC unit to be interlocked with an external system.
CNC unit
Y0.0
R9015.1 Y0.0 I/O Link slave
I/O Link
- 76 -
Extended relay area volatile/nonvolatile status signal
The extended relay area (address E) can be optionally configured as

nonvolatile. Referencing this signal can check whether the extended
relay area is nonvolatile.
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
R9091
Extended relay (E) area volatile/

nonvolatile status signal
0: Volatile
1: Nonvolatile
- 77 -
2.2.5 Extended Relay Addresses (E)
The following table lists the number of signals (bytes) that can be used
as extended relays.
Extended relays can be used in the same manner as for internal relays.
Turning on the power clears this area to 0.
30i/31i/32i-A
Dual-check
(option) (option)
(option)
Number of bytes 10000 10000 10000 -
For the multi-PMC function, this area is common memory. It is

possible for each PMC program to read the same value from, and write
it to, the area.
Address number
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
E0
E1
.
.
.
∼ ∼
E9999
NOTE
The extended relay addresses (E) can be optionally
configured as nonvolatile. When they are
nonvolatile, turning off the power does erase the
memory contents.
- 78 -
2.2.6 Message Display Addresses (A)
These addresses are intended to be used for a message display request

and message status display.
The following table lists how many messages can be used (number of
messages = number of bytes × 8).
Turning on the power clears this area to 0.
See descriptions about the DISPB functional instruction in Chapter 4
for explanations about how to use this area.
30i/31i/32i-A
Dual-check
(option) (option)
(option)
Display
Number of 250 250 250 250
request
bytes
Status display 250 250 250 250
Display
Number of 2000 2000 2000 2000
request
messages
Status display 2000 2000 2000 2000
Address number
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
A0
Message display request
A1
.
.
.
∼ ∼
A249
A9000
Message status display
A9001
.
.
.
∼ ∼
A9249
- 79 -
2.2.7 Timer Addresses (T)
These addresses are an area for variable timers used with the TMR
instruction and an area for the precision of the variable timers.
The following table lists how many timers can be used (number of
timers = number of bytes/2).
The number of timer precision values matches that of the timers.
Turning off the power does not cause the memory contents to be erased
because these areas are nonvolatile memory.
30i/31i/32i-A
Dual-check
(option) (option)
(option)
Number of bytes 500 80 80 80
Number of timer
500 80 80 80
precision(bytes)
Number of timers 250 40 40 40
Address number
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Variable
timer
T0
T1 Third PMC
Dual-check
safety PMC
.
. ∼ ∼
.
T79
.
. ∼ ∼
.
T499
Variable-timer
T9000 precision
T9001 Third PMC
Dual-check
safety PMC
.
. ∼ ∼
.
T9079
.
. ∼ ∼
.
T9499
- 80 -
2.2.8 Counter Addresses (C)
These addresses are an area for variable counters used with the CTR
instruction and an area for fixed counters used with the CTRB
instruction.
The numbers of the counters that can be used are:
The number of variable counters = number of bytes/4
The number of fixed counters = number of bytes/2
30i/31i/32i-A
Dual-check
(option) (option)
(option)
Number of
400 80 80 80
Variable bytes
counters Number of
100 20 20 20
counters
Number of
200 40 40 40
Fixed bytes
counters Number of
100 20 20 20
counters
- 81 -
Address number
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
C0 Variable
C1
Preset value counter
Third PMC
Counter Dual-check
C2 No. 1 safety PMC
Cumulative value
C3
.
.
.
∼ ∼
C76
Preset value
C77
Counter
C78 No. 20
Cumulative value
C79
.
.
.
∼ ∼
C396
Preset value
C397 Counter
No. 100
C398
Cumulative value
C399
C5000 Fixed
C5001
Cumulative value counter
Third PMC
Dual-check
. safety PMC
.
.
∼ ∼
C5038
Cumulative value
C5039
.
.
.
∼ ∼
C5198
Cumulative value
C5199
- 82 -
2.2.9 Keep Relay Addresses (K)
These addresses are areas for keep relays and PMC parameters.
The following table lists the number of bytes that can be used. It also
lists information related to the nonvolatile memory control addresses
and the area (system area) used by the management software.
30i/31i/32i-A
Dual-check
(option) (option)
(option)
Number of User area 100 20 20 20
bytes System area 100 100 100 100
Nonvolatile memory control
K909 K909 K909 K909
address
Area used by the
K900 to K999 K900 to K999 K900 to K999 K900 to K999
management software
Address number
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
K0
Third PMC
K1 Dual-check
safety PMC
.
.
.
∼ ∼
K19
.
.
.
∼ ∼
K99
K900
K901
.
.
.
∼ ∼
K999
- 83 -
2.2.10 Nonvolatile Memory Control Address (K)
This address is intended to be used in, for example, the configuration in

which the position of a movable mechanical part (such as a lathe turret)
is stored as code data (such as BCD) to nonvolatile memory to preserve
the current machine position even when the power is turned off.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
K909 MWRTF2 MWRTF
On the KEEP RELAY screen, it is possible to set and display the

address of the nonvolatile memory. It is also possible for a sequence
program to read or write the address.
If the power is accidentally turned off when the turret is rotating, the
turret stops at an unexpected position and a mismatch occurs between
the current position stored in the memory and the actual turret position.
When the power is resumed and a normal operation begins, the
mismatch results in an incorrect sequence operation.
To prevent such a malfunction, make a check by using nonvolatile
memory control in a sequence program as follows:
(1) Write "1" to MWRTF for the nonvolatile memory control before
the turret starts moving.
(2) Start the turret.
(3) After the turret has stopped, reset MWRTF to "0".
(4) If the power is turned off after the turret has started, therefore,
MWRTF stays at "1".
(5) When the CNC power is turned on, MWRTF2 is set to "1"
automatically if MWRTF is "1", thus informing the sequence
program of the failure.
To sum up, the sequence program performs steps (1) to (4) and
checks for an abnormal condition, using MWRTF2. If an
abnormal condition (NWRTF2 = 1) is detected, an alarm is raised
to the operator, using a user-created alarm output program.
(6) Recognizing the alarm, the operator resets MWRTF and
MWRTF2 to "0" on the KEEP RELAY screen.
(7) After making the memory content match the actual turret position,
restart operation.
- 84 -
2.2.11 System Keep Relay Addresses (K)
The following table lists the keep relay area used by the system (PMC
management software).
30i/31i/32i-A
Dual-check
(option) (option)
(option)
Area used by the
K900 to K999 K900 to K999 K900 to K999 K900 to K999
management software
Explained below is the meaning of each bit of the system keep relay
address. The bits and addresses left unused are reserved for use by the
system.
The system keep relays indicated with an asterisk (*) can be set up,
using setting parameters.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
K900 DTBLDSP MEMINP AUTORUN PRGRAM LADMASK
[Data type] Bit

LADMASK PMC program view inhibit(*)
0: The sequence program is allowed to be viewed.
1: The sequence program is inhibited from being viewed.
PRGRAM Programmer function enable(*)
0: The built-in programmer function is disabled.
1: The built-in programmer function is enabled.
AUTORUN PMC program execute(*)
0: The sequence program is automatically started when the power is
turned on.
1: The sequence program is started, using the sequence program
execution soft key.
MEMINP Memory write permit(*)
0: The forcing and override functions are disabled.
1: The forcing and override functions are enabled.
NOTE
Using the override function requires setting "Override
enable" (K906.0).
DTBLDSP Data table GRP setting display(*)

0: The DATA TABLE CONTROL screen is displayed.
1: The DATA TABLE CONTROL screen is not displayed.
- 85 -
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
K901 EDTENBL
[Data type] Bit

EDTENBL Editing permit(*)
0: The sequence program is inhibited from being changed.
1: The sequence program is allowed to be changed.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
K902 PROTPRM HIDEPRM ALLWSTOP FROM-WRT
[Data type] Bit

FROM-WRT Save after edit(*)
0: After being edited, the sequence program is not automatically
written to flash ROM.
1: After being edited, the sequence program is automatically written
to flash ROM.
ALLWSTOP PMC stop enable(*)
0: The sequence program is inhibited from being started/stopped.
1: The sequence program is allowed to be started/stopped.
HIDEPRM PMC parameter view inhibit(*)
0: PMC parameters are allowed to be displayed and sent to the
outside.
1: PMC parameters are inhibited from being displayed or sent to the
outside.
PROTPRM PMC parameter change inhibit(*)
0: PMC parameters are allowed to be changed and read.
1: PMC parameters are inhibited from being changed or read.
- 86 -
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
K906 KEEPSYS TRCST EOUTPUT IOLNKCHK IOGRPSEL OVRRID
[Data type] Bit

OVRRID Override enable(*)
0: The override function is disabled.
1: The override function is enabled.
NOTE
Using the override function requires setting "Memory
write permit" (K900.4).
IOGRPSEL IO GROUP SELECTION screen(*)

0: The selectable I/O Link assignment function setting screen is not
displayed.
1: The selectable I/O Link assignment function setting screen is
displayed.
IOLNKCHK
0: The I/O Link connection check function is enabled.
1: The I/O Link connection check function is disabled.
EOUTPUT
0: On the I/O screen, the E address is output when PMC parameters
are output.
1: On the I/O screen, the E address is not output when PMC
parameters are output.
TRCST Trace function start(*)
0: The trace function is not executed when the power is turned on.
1: The trace function is automatically executed when the power is
turned on.
KEEPSYS KEEP RELAY (SYSTEM) (*)
0: The KEEP RELAY (K900-K919) screen is not displayed.
1: The KEEP RELAY (K900-K919) screen is displayed..
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
K909 MWRTF2 MWRTF LASER_IO
[Data type] Bit

LASER_IO
0: The contents of the DI/DO area are not transferred during initial
ladder execution.
1: The contents of the DI/DO area are transferred during initial
ladder execution.
MWRTF For nonvolatile memory control. See Subsection 2.2.10.
MWRTF2 For nonvolatile memory control. See Subsection 2.2.10.
- 87 -
K916 Message shift start address (LOW)

K917 Message shift start address (HIGH)
Message shift start address(*)
[Valid data range] Range of the A addresses
This area is used to specify the message shift start address value (word
type) by converting it to bit data form.
The bit offset for the A addresses is calculated as follows:
A address Calculation Bit offset

Ax.y x×8+y = z
Example:
A0.0 0×8+0 = 0
A249.7 249 × 8 + 7 = 1999
K918 Message shift amount (LOW)

K919 Message shift amount (HIGH)
Message shift amount(*)
[Valid data range] 1 to 9999
This area is used to specify the message shift amount value (word type)
by converting it to bit data form.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
K920 Group 7 Group 6 Group 5 Group 4 Group 3 Group 2 Group 1 Group 0
[Data type] Bit

Groups 0 to 7 For the selectable I/O Link assignment function, whether to enable or
disable assignment of groups 0 to 7 to addresses X/Y0 to X/Y127 is
specified.
0: Assignment of each group to the corresponding bit position is
enabled.
disabled.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
[Data type] Bit

specified.
enabled.
disabled.
- 88 -
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
[Data type] Bit

specified.
enabled.
disabled.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
[Data type] Bit

specified.
enabled.
disabled.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
[Data type] Bit

specified.
enabled.
disabled.
- 89 -
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
[Data type] Bit

specified.
enabled.
disabled.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
[Data type] Bit

specified.
enabled.
disabled.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
[Data type] Bit

specified.
enabled.
disabled.
- 90 -
2.2.12 Data Table Addresses (D)
PMC sequence control sometimes requires a sizable amount of numeric

data (hereinafter referred to as data table). If the contents of a data
table can be set or read freely, they can be used as various PMC
sequence control data, such as tool numbers of tools on the ATC
magazine.
Each table can have an arbitrary size as long as it fits the data table
memory, and 1-, 2-, and 4-byte binary and BCD data can be used for
each table separately; so it is possible to configure efficient, easy-to-
use tables.
Data in a data table can be set in PMC nonvolatile memory or displayed
via the DATA TABLE screen.
Data set in data tables can also be easily read and written with the
sequence program using functional instructions such as data search
(DSCHB) and index modification data transfer (XMOVB).
The following table lists the number of bytes that can be used.
30i/31i/32i-A
Dual-check
(option) (option)
(option)
Number of bytes 10000 3000 3000 3000
(1) Data table configuration

The PMC data table consists of table control data and data tables.
The table control data manages the data form (binary or BCD) and
size of each table.
Creating a data table requires first setting up table control data
from the DATA TABLE CONTROL screen.
The sequence program cannot read or write the table control data.
If the Floppy Cassette is used to read or write the contents of the
nonvolatile memory, however, the table control data is read or
written together. Fig. 2.2.12 (a) roughly shows the configuration
of the data table. Fig. 2.2.12 (b) shows it in detail.
- 91 -
Table control data Data table
Address number
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
D0
Data held separately Second PMC First PMC
Third PMC
∼ from data table ∼ D1 Dual-check
(address D)
safety PMC
.
.
.
∼ ∼
D2999
.
.
.
∼ ∼
D9999
Fig. 2.2.12 (a) General configuration of data table
NOTE
In some cases, the start address of a data table is
odd. If an odd number of 1-byte data tables are
created, for example, the start address of the next
data table may be odd. This setting is acceptable.
However, an even start address assures faster
operations than an odd start address. We
recommend you use even start addresses whenever
possible.
- 92 -
Number of table n
groups
Table parameter
Data type
Table group 1
control data
Number of data items
Table start address
Table parameter
Table group 2 Data type

Table control data
control data
Table start address
Table parameter
Data type
Table group n
control data
Table start address

Address
D0 Intra-table number
D1 0 Data
D2 1 Table group 1
:
n1
Intra-table number
0
1
2 Data
3 Table group 2 Data table
:
n2
Intra-table number
Intra-table number
0 Data
1 Table group n
: (Note) n1, n2, and np are the last
np intra-table number of the
respective data tables.
Fig. 2.2.12 (b) Detailed configuration of data tables
- 93 -
(2) Table control data

The table control data is used to manage data tables.
Unless this data is correctly set up, it is impossible to create data
tables, explained in (3), correctly.
While referencing the descriptions in this item, first set up table
control data and then data tables.
(a) Number of table groups
This item specifies how many groups are to form the data
table, using a binary number.
(b) Table group 1 control data to table group n control data
Each data table is provided with table control data. The
meaning of data (table start address, table parameter, data
type, and the number of data items) set up as table control
data is the same for all table groups.
(i) Table start address
This item specifies the start address of a data area used
for each data table.
(ii) Table parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
SIGN HEX MASK COD
COD
0: Data in the data table is in binary form.
1: Data in the data table is in BCD form.
MASK
0: The contents of the data table is not protected.
1: The contents of the data table is protected.
HEX
0: Data in the data table is in binary or BCD form.
1: Data in the data table is in HEX form.
SIGN
0: Data in the data table is signed.
1: Data in the data table is unsigned.
NOTE
1 The setting of COD (bit 0) is valid if HEX (bit 2) = 0.
2 The setting of SIGN (bit 3) is valid if COD (bit 0) = 0
and HEX (bit 2) = 0.
- 94 -
(iii) Data type

This item specifies the length of data in the data table.
0 : 1 byte long
1 : 2 bytes long
2 : 4 bytes long
3 : 8 bits
(iv) Number of data items
This item specifies the number of data items in the data
table.
(3) Data table

A data table can be divided into several groups, and each group
can be created within the memory range (address D) for the data
table.
The number of groups is determined according to the number of
table control data table groups.
Intra-table number
Table group 1
(1-byte data)
Table group 2
(2-byte data)
Data in each data table can be 1-, 2, or 4-byte data depending on

the data type of the corresponding table control data.
If the table data is 1-byte data, one intra-table number in the
corresponding data table is assigned to one byte of data. If the
table data is 2-byte data, one intra-table number is assigned to two
bytes of data.
- 95 -
(4) Creating data for a data table

Data for a data table is created by specifying an intra-table number
for the data table and entering the data into the table from the
DATA TABLE screen. A specific method for specifying intra-
table numbers is available for individual data table groups
separately.
NOTE
The sequence program can also read and write the
data table.
2.2.13 Addresses for Multi-path PMC interface (M, N)

These addresses are used to the Multi-path PMC interface.
(1) Input signals from another PMC path

The following addresses are available.
30i/31i/32i-A
Dual-check
(option) (option)
(option)
M0 to M767 M0 to M767 M0 to M767 -
(2) Output signals to another PMC path

The following addresses are available.
30i/31i/32i-A
Dual-check
(option) (option)
(option)
N0 to N767 N0 to N767 N0 to N767 -
2.2.14 Subprogram Number Addresses (P)
These addresses are used to specify jump destination subprogram

labels in the CALL, CALLU and CM instructions.
Each subprogram number must be unique in the entire sequence
program.
The following tables lists the number of subprograms that can be used.
30i/31i/32i-A
Dual-check
(option) (option)
(option)
Number of subprograms 5000 512 512 512
- 96 -
2.2.15 Label Number Addresses (L)
These addresses are used to specify jump destination labels (positions

within the sequence program) in the JMPB and JMPC instructions.
The same label number can be specified for different instructions as
long as the instructions are not within the same program unit (main
program or subprogram).
The following table lists the number of labels that can be used.
30i/31i/32i-A
Second PMC Third PMC Dual-check
First PMC
Number of labels 9999 9999 9999 9999
- 97 -
2.3 PMC PARAMETERS

The term "PMC parameter" refers to any of the timer, counter, keep
relay parameters, and data table. PMC parameters are held in
nonvolatile memory, whose contents are not lost even when the power
is turned off.
(1) Timer
This parameter specifies a timer value.
It is possible to set and display the timer value on the TIMER
screen.
The sequence program can read and write the timer setting.
(2) Counter
This parameter is used for a counter preset value and cumulative
value. It is possible to set and display these values on the
COUNTER screen. Sequence program instructions can also read
and write these settings. See Subsection 2.2.8 for details of the
counter addresses.
Counter data is two bytes in ether BCD or binary form. Higher-
order bits are held at higher addresses. Whether the counter
address is BCD or binary is determined according to the
corresponding PMC system parameter.
The default setting is binary form.
(Example) If the counter addresses of the PMC are C0 and C1,

and the preset value is 1578
BCD format (1578)
Binary format (1578)
- 98 -
To change the lower digit of the preset value to a certain value,

using a 1-byte processing instruction in the sequence program,
write the new data by specifying C0 with an output address in the
parameter of a functional instruction.
(3) Keep relay

This parameter is used for parameters for sequence control, keep
relays, and others.
It can be set and displayed from the KEEP RELAY screen.
It can also be read and written, using instructions in the sequence
program.
The data set up or displayed from the KEEP RELAY screen is 8-
bit binary data. On the KEEP RELAY screen, therefore, each of
the eighth digits is set or displayed as 0 or 1.
(4) Data table

The data table enables a set of numeric data (data table) to be used
for PMC sequence control.
See Subsection 2.2.12 for details.
2.3.1 Cautions for Reading from/Writing to Nonvolatile Memory
All data in the nonvolatile memory can be read and written with the
sequence program. The memory from which the sequence program
reads and to which it writes is not nonvolatile in effect. It has the same
data as in the nonvolatile memory in a form of nonvolatile memory
image (RAM). For this reason, turning off the power lets the data of
nonvolatile memory image disappear. However, data is sent from the
nonvolatile memory as nonvolatile memory image immediately after
the power is resumed, thus restoring the previous data correctly.
If the sequence program rewrites the nonvolatile memory image, the
changed data is automatically sent to the nonvolatile memory.
Data at more than one address in the nonvolatile memory image can be
rewritten at any time. The changed data is automatically sent to the
nonvolatile memory.
Therefore, reading from and writing to the nonvolatile memory with
the sequence program does not require any special processing. Writing
to the nonvolatile memory takes time (about 100 msec), however.
- 99 -
2.3.2 PMC Parameter Format
This subsection describes the format used in outputting the contents of

the PMC parameter to an external device. As for the operation of output,
refer to section 7 “sequence program and PMC parameter I/O”.
(1) Header information

The data begins with header information. Its format is as follows:
[Format]
%; (PMC = xxx, MSID = n)
PMC = xxx "xxx" is the model name of the PMC.
MSID = n "n" is ID information.
The following table lists values that can be set as "xxx" or "n".
30i/31i/32i-A
(option) (option) Safety PMC
(option)
30i 31i 32i 30i 31i 32i 30i 31i 32i 30i 31i 32i
xxx 30I-A 31I-A 32I-A 30I-A 31I-A 32I-A 30I-A 31I-A 32I-A 30I-A 31I-A 32I-A
n 1 2 3 9
(2) Timer (T)

[Format]
N60xxxx Pnnnnn; Timer setting
N Sum of the timer address (T) offset and 600000.
The sum can range from N600000 to N600xxx and
from N609000 to N609xxx. "xxx" can take the
values listed below.
P Timer address value in decimal notation. It can
range from 0 to 32767 for a range of N600000 to
N600498.
(Example)
N600000 P1; (Timer number 1 T0)
N600002 P20; (Timer number 2 T2)
.
N600498 P32767; (Timer number 250 T498)
N609000 P0; ( T9000)

N609002 P0; ( T9002)
.
N609498 P0; ( T9498)
NOTE
At present, N609000 to N609xxx are a reserved
area, and P0 is set up for it.
- 100 -
30i/31i/32i-A
Dual-check
(option) (option)
(option)
xxx 498 038 038 038
(3) Counter (C)

[Format]
N61xxxx Pnnnnn; Counter preset and current values
N Sum of the counter address (C) and 610000. The
sum can range from N610000 to N610xxx and from
N615000 to N615nnn. "xxx" and "nnn" can take
the values listed below.
P Counter address value in decimal notation. It has a
size of 2 bytes and can range from 0 to 32767 for a
range of N610000 to N610xxx. The preset and
current values alternate. For a range of N615000 to
N615nnn, each counter value can range from 0 to
32767, and only the current values appear. The
counter addresses are assumed to be binary for
input/output no matter whether the counter data
type is specified as BCD or binary.
(Example)
N610000 P7; (Counter number 1 C0)
N610002 P7; ( C2)
.
N610396 P9999; (Counter number 100 C396)
N610398 P0; ( C398)
N615000 P7; (Fixed-counter number 1 C5000)

.
30i/31i/32i-A
Dual-check
(option) (option)
(option)
xxx 398 078 078 078
nnn 198 038 038 038
- 101 -
(4) Keep relay (K)

[Format]
N62xxxx Pnnnnnnnn;
N Sum of the keep relay address (K) offset and
620000. The sum can range from N620000 to
N6200xx and from N620900 to N620999.
P Keep relay address value in binary notation. It can
range from 00000000 to 11111111 for a range of
N620000 to N6200xx. For a range of N620900 to
N620999, it can range from 00000000 to 11111111.
(Example)
N620000 P00000000; (K0)
N620001 P11111111; (K1)
.
N620099 P10101010; (K99)
N620900 P00000000; (K900)

N620901 P11111111; (K901)
.
N620999 P10101010; (K999)
"xx" indicating a range can take the values listed below.
30i/31i/32i-A
Dual-check
(option) (option)
(option)
xx 99 19 19 19
- 102 -
(5) Data (D)
(a) Data table control

[Format]
N630000 Pnn; Total number of table groups (1 to
100)
N630002 Pnnnnnnnn; Group 1 table parameter (bit type)
N630003 Pn; Group 1 data type (0, 1, 2,3)
N630004 Pnnnn; Number of data items in group 1 (1 to
xxxxx)
N630006 Pnnnn; Start address of data in group 1 (0 to
nnnn)
N630010 Pnnnnnnnn; Group 2 table parameter (bit type)
N630011 Pn; Group 2 data type (0, 1, 2,3)
N630012 Pnnnn; Number of data items in group 2 (1 to
xxxxx)
N630014 Pnnnn; Start address of data in group 2 (0 to
nnnn)
N Sum of the control data table address offset and
N630600.
P Control data table address value.
"Total number of groups" Range: 1 to 100
"Table parameter" Range: 00000000 to
11111111
"Data type" Range: 0 to 3
Data type Data table output format
0 1 byte signed decimal number
3 Binary notation
"Number of data items in a group" Range: 1 to xxxxx
"Start address of data in a group" Range: 0 to nnnn
(Example)
N630000 P2;
N630002 P00000000;
N630003 P0;
N630004 P10;
N630006 P0;
N630010 P00000001;
N630011 P0;
N630012 P10;
N630014 P10;
- 103 -
"xxxxx" and "nnnn" indicating a range can take the values listed
below.
30i/31i/32i-A
Dual-check
(option) (option)
(option)
xxxxx 10000 3000 3000 3000
nnnn 9999 2999 2999 2999
(b) Data table

[Format]
N64xxxx Pnnnnn;
N Sum of the data table address (D) offset and 640000.
The sum can range from N640000 to N64nnnn.
P Data table address value. Its size depends on the
"data type" of data table control data and is
represented using a signed decimal number. It can
range from -128 to 127, from -32768 to 32767, and
from -2147483648 to 2147483647, respectively, for
1-, 2-, and 4-byte data. And the range of the binary
notation is 00000000 to 11111111.
(Example)
N640000 P-128;
N640001 P100;
N640002 P0;
.
N640010 P1000;
N640012 P-1;
.
N649992 P50000000;
N649996 P50000000;
"nnnn" indicating a range can take the values listed below.
30i/31i/32i-A
Dual-check
(option) (option)
(option)
nnnn 9999 2999 2999 2999
- 104 -
(6) Expansion memory (E)

[Format]
N69xxxx Pnnnnn;
N Sum of the expansion memory (E) offset and
N699999.
P Expansion memory (E) address value represented
using a signed decimal number. It can range from
-128 to 127.
(Example)
N690000 P-128;
N690001 P100;
.
N697998 P127;
N697999 P0;
%
NOTE
1 E address is output in the first PMC parameter.
2 Setting keep relay K906.3 to 1 disables the E
address from being output.
- 105 -
2.4 PARAMETERS FOR THE PMC SYSTEM
2.4.1 Setting Parameters
The parameters set up on the PMC SETTING screen are called the
setting parameters. Part of the system keep relays described earlier can
be set up using setting parameters.
This subsection describes the setting parameters for each setup menu.
See Section 9.5 for explanations about the setting screen and how to
use it.
(1) Trace function start (K906.5 0: Manual. 1: Automatic.)

This item specifies whether to allow the trace function to be
executed automatically when the power is turned on. The default
setting is "Manual" (not automatic execution).
(2) Editing permit (K901.6 0: No. 1: Yes.)

This item specifies whether to enable the functions related to
program editing. The default setting is "No" (not to enable).
(3) Save after edit (K902.0 0: No. 1: Yes.)

This item specifies whether to perform an automatic write to flash
ROM after program editing. The default setting is "No" (not to
perform an automatic write).
(4) Memory write permit (K900.4 0: No. 1: Yes.)

This item specifies whether to enable the forcing and override
functions. The default setting is "No" (not to enable).
NOTE
Using the override function requires setting "Override
enable" (K906.0).
(5) Data table GRP setting display (K900.7 0: Yes. 1: No.)

This item specifies whether to display the DATA TABLE
CONTROL screen. The default setting is "Yes" (to display).
(6) PMC parameter view inhibit (K902.6 0: No. 1: Yes.)

This item specifies whether to inhibit the PMC PARAM screens
(TIMER, COUNTER, KEEP RELAY, DATA TABLE screens)
from being displayed and the PMC parameter data from being sent
to the outside. The default setting is "No" (not to inhibit).
- 106 -
(7) PMC parameter change inhibit (K902.7 0: No. 1: Yes.)

This item specifies whether to inhibit data from being input from
the PMC PARAM screens (TIMER, COUNTER, KEEP RELAY,
and DATA TABLE screens) and the PMC parameter data from
being input from the outside. The default setting is "No" (no to
inhibit).
(8) PMC program view inhibit (K900.0 0: No. 1: Yes.)

This item specifies whether to inhibit the sequence program from
being viewed. The default setting is "No" (not to inhibit).
(9) IO GROUP SELECTION screen (K906.1 0: Hide. 1: Display.)

This item specifies whether to display the selectable I/O Link
assignment function setting screen. The default setting is "Hide"
(not to display).
(10) PMC program execute (K900.2 0: Automatic. 1: Manual.)

This item specifies whether to cause the sequence program to be
started automatically when the power is turned on. The default
setting is "Automatic" (to cause automatic start).
(11) PMC stop enable (K902.2 0: No. 1: Yes.)

This item specifies whether to allow the sequence program to
start/stop. The default setting is "No" (not to allow).
(12) Programmer function enable (K900.1 0: No. 1: Yes.)

This item specifies whether to enable the built-in programmer
function. The default setting is "No" (not to enable).
(13) Override enable (K906.0 0: No. 1: Yes.)

This item specifies whether to enable the override function. The
default setting is "No" (not to enable).
NOTE
Using the override function requires setting "Memory
write permit" (K900.4).
(14) Message shift amount (K918, K919)

This item specifies how much to shift the message display request
bits in displaying language-specific information, using the DISPB
functional instruction. No default setting is available.
(15) Message shift start address (K916, K917)

This item lets you input the start bit address for the area of
message display request bits to be shifted in displaying
language-specific information, using the DISPB functional
instruction. No default setting is available.
- 107 -
(16) Selectable I/O Link assignment function: Selecting a valid group:

(K920-K927 0: No. 1: Yes.)
This item specifies a group to be enabled or disabled for the
selectable I/O Link assignment function for individual addresses.
The default setting is 0 (disable) for all groups.
See Section 3.3 for the selectable I/O Link assignment function.
(17) Keep relay (system) (K906.6 0: Hide. 1: Show.)

If you set " KEEP RELAY (SYSTEM)" to "SHOW", The KEEP
RELAY (K900-K919) screen is enabled.
The default setting is "Hide" (not to display).
- 108 -
2.4.2 PMC System Parameters
The parameters set up on the PMC SYSTEM PARAMETER screen are

called the system parameters.
This subsection describes the system parameters for each setup menu.
See Section 9.8 for explanations about the how to operate the SYSTEM
PARAMETER screen.
(1) Counter type

This item specifies the data type of a counter value used on the
COUNTER screen (CTR functional instruction). It can be
represented in either binary or BCD form.
(2) FS0-compatible operator's panel

This item specifies whether to connect an operator's panel for the
FS0. If the setting is "Yes", specify also the DI/DO address to
which the operator's panel is actually connected, the address of the
KEY image transferred from the operator's panel, and the address
of the LED image to be transferred to the operator's panel.
(a) DI address
This item specifies the start address of the external DI to
which the operator's panel is actually connected, using PMC
addresses (X0 to X127, X200 to X327, X400 to X527, or
X600 to X727).
(b) DO address
This item specifies the start address of the external DO to
which the operator's panel is actually connected, using PMC
addresses (Y0 to Y127, Y200 to Y327, Y400 to Y527, or
Y600 to Y727).
(c) Key input image address
This item specifies the start address of the KEY image to be
referenced by the user program, using a PMC address.
Usually, set up an arbitrary internal relay (R) area.
(d) LED output image address

This item specifies the start address of the LED image
generated by the user program, using PMC addresses.
Usually, set up an arbitrary internal relay area (R).
(3) Selectable I/O Link assignment function

This item specifies whether to enable/disable the selectable I/O
Link assignment function for each address and the number of the
related basic groups.
(a) Function enable
This item specifies whether to enable/disable the selectable
I/O Link assignment function.
- 109 -
(b) Number of basic groups

This item specifies the number of groups that are always
enabled no matter what machine configuration is employed.
See Section 3.3 for explanations about the selectable I/O Link
assignment function.
- 110 -
2.4.3 CNC Parameters Related to the PMCs
The CNC parameters related to the PMCs can be divided into those for
controlling communication with FANUC LADDER-III and ladder
editing package and those for setting up the PMCs.
The following table summaries the CNC parameters related to the

PMCs.
Table 2.4.3 (a) Summary of the CNC parameters related to the PMCs
No. Use Remarks
24 Setting up communication with PMC online connection
ladder development tools function
11900 to Execution sequence for multiple First PMC to Third PMC
11902 PMCs
11905 to Percent execution time for First PMC to Third PMC
11907 multiple PMCs
11910 to I/O Link input/output address Channels 1 to 4
11913
11920 to CNC interface control address CNC10 system
11929
11930 Ladder 1 level execution period First PMC to Third PMC
11931#1 Run/stop of Ladder First PMC to Third PMC
11932 Multi path PMC interface
- 111 -
Communication parameters
00024 Setting up communication with ladder development tools (FANUC LADDER-

III and ladder editing package)
[Input type] Setting input

[Data type] Integer
This item specifies whether to enable/disable the PMC online

connection function.
Entering this parameter makes it possible to enable/disable the PMC
online setup function without displaying the PMC online setup screen.
Setting RS-232C High-speed interface

0 The settings on the PMC online setup screen are
changed.
1 To be used (channel 1) Not to be used
2 To be used (channel 2) Not to be used
10 Not to be used To be used
11 To be used (channel 1) To be used
12 To be used (channel 2) To be used
255 Communication is forced to stop (equivalent to the [EMG
STOP] soft key).
NOTE
1 The setting of this parameter is put into effect when it
is changed or the power is turned on. It is
unnecessary to turn the power off and on again after
the parameter is re-set.
2 The setting changed on the PMC online setup screen
is not reflected to this parameter.
3 As for the RS-232C, the communication settings,
such as a baud rate, specified on the PMC online
setup screen are valid. The valid settings are a baud
rate of 9600 bps, no parity, and two stop bits if no
change has been made on the PMC online setup
screen since installation.
- 112 -
PMC setup parameters
Execution sequence for multiple PMCs
11900 PMC having the first priority in execution sequence
11901 PMC having the second priority in execution sequence
11902 PMC having the third priority in execution sequence
NOTE
Once any of these parameters is re-set, it is
necessary to turn the power off and on again.
[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Integer
This item specifies the execution sequence for each PMC if the multi-
PMC function is used.
Setting PMC
0 Standard setting (see below)
1 First PMC
2 Second PMC
3 Third PMC
When all these parameters are 0, the standard execution sequence

setting shown below is used.
Second
First PMC PMC Third PMC

tracing
Fig. 2.4.3 (a) Standard execution sequence for multiple PMCs
CAUTION
If any of these parameters is nonzero, a duplicate or
missing number results in the PMC alarm "ER50
PMC EXECUTION ORDER ERROR", thus disabling
all the PMCs from starting.
- 113 -
Percent execution time for multiple PMCs
Percent execution time for the PMC having the first priority in execution
11905
sequence
Percent execution time for the PMC having the second priority in execution
11906
sequence
Percent execution time for the PMC having the third priority in execution
11907
sequence
NOTE

[Data type] Integer
This item specifies the percent execution time for each PMC if the
multi-PMC function is used.
When all these parameters are 0, the standard execution time settings
listed below are used.
Table 2.4.3 (b) Standard settings of the percent execution time for
multiple PMCs
PMC PMC PMC
having the having the having the
Multi-PMC configuration
first second third
priority priority priority
First PMC only 100%
First and second PMCs 85% 15%
First and third PMCs 85% 15%
First, second, and third PMCs 75% 15% 10%
NOTE
1 If these parameters are set to too low a value, it may
be impossible to start the first level on every scan.
2 Even if you input the same program in both second
and third PMC, the scan time of both programs may
not correspond because of changing of the waiting
time by execution timing.
3 If the sum of these parameter settings exceeds 100,
the PMC alarm "ER51 PMC EXECUTION
PERCENTAGE ERROR" occurs, thus disabling all
PMC from starting.
- 114 -
I/O Link input/output addresses
11910 I/O Link channel 1 input/output addresses
NOTE

[Data type] Integer
[Valid data range] 0, 100 to 103, 200 to 203, 300 to 303, 900 to 903
This item specifies input/output addresses for an I/O Link channel.
Table 2.4.3 (c) I/O Link channel input/output addresses

Setting Input/output address
100 X0 to X127/Y0 to Y127 for the first PMC
200 X0 to X127/Y0 to Y127 for the second PMC
300 X0 to X127/Y0 to Y127 for the third PMC
900 X0 to X127/Y0 to Y127 for the dual-check safety PMC
- 115 -
If all these parameters are 0, all channels are assigned to the first PMC
(standard setting) as shown below.
First PMC
Channel 1
X/Y0 to X/Y127
Channel 2
X/Y200 to X/Y327
Channel 3
X/Y400 to X/Y527
Channel 4
X/Y600 to X/Y727
Fig. 2.4.3 (b) Standard input/output address setting for the I/O Link
channel
CAUTION
1 If any of these parameters is nonzero, a duplicate
number results in the PMC alarm "ER52 I/O LINK
CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT ERROR", thus disabling
all the PMCs from starting.
2 If these parameters are not set up in part, it is
impossible to assign a PMC address to the related
channel.
- 116 -
CNC-PMC interface
11920 CNC-PMC interface 1 input/output address
NOTE

[Data type] Integer
[Valid data range] 0, 100 to 109, 200 to 209, 300 to 309
This item assigns a PMC F/G address to a CNC F/G address.
CNC First PMC

CNC F/G address First-PMC F/G address
Second PMC
Second-PMC F/G address
Third PMC
Third-PMC F/G address
Fig. 2.4.3 (c) CNC-PMC interface assignment concept
- 117 -
Table 2.4.3 (d) CNC-PMC interface input/output address

Setting Input/output address
100 F0 to 767/G0 to G767 for the first PMC
101 F1000 to F1767/G1000 to G1767 for the first PMC
200 F0 to F767/G0 to G767 for the second PMC
300 F0 to F767/G0 to G767 for the third PMC
- 118 -
If all these parameters are 0, the standard setting is used, that is, "CNC
F/G address = first-PMC F/G address" is satisfied.
CNC First PMC

F/G0 to F/G767 for the CNC F/G0 to F/G767 for the first PMC
Fig. 2.4.3 (d) CNC-PMC interface initial settings
CAUTION
1 If any of these parameters is nonzero, a duplicate
number results in the PMC alarm "ER54 NC-PMC I/F
ASSIGNMENT ERROR", thus disabling all the PMCs
from starting.
2 If these parameters are not set up in part, it is
impossible to assign a PMC address to the related
CNC F/G address.
- 119 -
Level 1 execution period
11930 Ladder level execution period
NOTE
Once this parameters is re-set, it is necessary to turn
the power off and on again.
[Input type] Byte input

[Data type] Integer
[Valid data range] 0, 4, 8
This item specifies an execution period for ladder level 1.
Setting Meaning
4 Executed at a 4-msec interval.
0, 8 Executed at an 8-msec interval.
CAUTION
1 Setting this parameter to a value other than 0, 4, or 8
results in the PMC alarm "ER55 LEVEL1
EXECUTION CYCLE ERROR", thus disabling all
PMCs from starting.
Start or stop of the ladder
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11931 PCC
[Data type] Bit

PCC This item specifies start or stop of the ladder as follows:
0: The ladder is started or stopped independently for each
PMC.
1: The ladders in all PMCs are started or stopped together.
NOTE
- 120 -
Multi-path PMC interface
11932 Multi-path PMC interface
NOTE

[Data type] Integer
[Valid data range] 0, 1, 2, 3
Select the PMC path to use the Multi-path PMC interface.
Setting Meaning
0 Not use the Multi-path PMC interface
1 Use the Multi-path PMC interface between 1ST and 2ND
PMC.
2 Use the Multi-path PMC interface between 1ST and 3RD
PMC.
3 Use the Multi-path PMC interface between 2ND and 3RD
PMC.
CAUTION
When you setting a inappropriate value to this

parameter, the PMC alarm "ER57 MULTI-PATH
PMC I/F ASSIGNMENT ERROR" occurs and all
PMC paths are stopped.
Then, the specified PMC path is not available, the
PMC alarm "ER57 MULTI-PATH PMC I/F
ASSIGNMENT ERROR" occurs and all PMC paths
are stopped, too.
- 121 -
2.5 COMPATIBILITY WITH CONVENTIONAL MODELS
2.5.1 Compatibility with the PMCs for the 16i/18i/21i-B

30i/31i/32i-A PMC is highly compatible with the PMC-MODEL SB7
(PMC-SB7) and PMC-MODEL SA1 (PMC-SA1) for the Series
16i/18i/21i-MODEL B (16i/18i/21i-B) on the source level.
Table 2.5.1 Compatibility with the PMCs for the Series 16i/18i/21i-MODEL B
30i/31i/32i-A
Model
(option)
PMC-SA1 ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
PMC-SB7 ¡ ▲ ▲ ▲
(¡: Upward-compatible. ▲: Partly compatible)
Transporting programs require modification because the specifications

of the following functions have been changed.
(1) In case of PMC-SB7 and PMC-SA1, the first level execution

period is fixed at 8 msec. In case of 30i/31i/32i-A PMC, it can be
switched between 4 and 8 msec, using a CNC parameter.
(2) In case of PMC-SB7, the basic instruction execution speed is 33
ns/step. In case of 30i/31i/32i-A PMC, it is 25 ns/step.
(3) As the execution speed of instructions become fast, the following
items about execution timing may be changed.
- The execution cycle of both first and second level of ladder
- The timing of the execution cycle of first level of ladder
according to the partition of second level ladder
- The timing between ladder execution and I/O transfer
The working test of the machine is necessary.
(4) The used size of system, some functional instractions and
symbol/comment (extended type) are changed. Generally, the
program size of 30i/31i/32i-A PMC becomes bigger than one for
PMC-SB7 even if the same source program is converted. If the
program size exceed the capacity of the flash ROM, please change
the ladder step option or reduce the symbol and comment.
(5) For the PMC-SB7 and PMC-SA1, the timer precision defined
with the TMR functional instruction is fixed at a certain value.
For the 30i/31i/32i-A PMC, the timer precision can be set up for
each timer number separately. See Subsection 4.3.1 for details.
- 122 -
(6) The nonvolatile memory control keep relay (MWRTF and

MWRTF2) has been changed from K16 to K909.
(7) In the PMC-SA1 and loader control PMCs, the keep relay system
area has been changed from "K17 to K20" to "K900 to K999".
(8) A part of window function for PMC-MODEL SB7 and SA1 is not
supported. See “5 Window function” for available window
function.
(9) The contents of the completion codes for some window functions
are changed. See “5 Window function” for the completion codes.
(10) The MMCWR, MMCWW, and FNC90 to FNC97 functional
instructions are treated as a NOP.
(11) Programs can be created on the third level because of program
compatibility. The operations on the third level are not
guaranteed with respect to timing, however. Use only the first and
second levels in programming.
PMC parameter compatibility
Parameters prepared for conventional PMC models can be loaded to

30i/31i/32i-A PMC.
30i/31i/32i-A PMC have a smaller address range than the models

indicated as "Partly compatible" in Table 2.5.1. So the parameters
prepared for these models can be loaded partly into the 30i/31i/32i-A
PMC. Any data that does not fit the address range is discarded.
See Subsection 2.3.2.
- 123 -
2.5.2 Compatibility with the PMCs for the 15i-A/B
30i/31i/32i-A PMC is compatible with the PMC-MODEL NB6

(PMC-NB6) for the Series 15i-MODEL A/B (15i-A/B) with respect to
instructions on the source level except for some functions. The
specifications of these functions have been changed, thus requiring
modification in transporting programs. In addition, the arrangement
and specifications of the DI/DO signals (addresses G and F) used with
the CNC vary between the 30i/31i/32i-A and 15i-A/B. For their
sequences, it is necessary to modify signal addresses and control logic.
(1) In case of 15i-A/B, the first level execution period is fixed at 8

msec. In case of 30i/31i/32i-A PMC, it can be switched between 4
and 8 msec, using a CNC parameter.
(2) In case of PMC-NB6, the basic instruction execution speed is 85
ns/step. In case of 30i/31i/32i-A PMC, it is 25 ns/step.
(3) As the execution speed of instructions become fast, the following
items about execution timing may be changed.
- The execution cycle of both first and second level of ladder
- The timing of the execution cycle of first level of ladder
according to the partition of second level ladder
- The timing between ladder execution and I/O transfer
The working test of the machine is necessary.
(4) The used size of system, some functional instractions and

symbol/comment(extended type) are changed. Generally, the
program size of 30i/31i/32i-A PMC becomes bigger than one for
PMC-NB6 even if the same source program is converted. If the
program size exceed the capacity of the flash ROM, please change
the ladder step option or reduce the symbol and comment.
(5) In case of PMC-NB6, the timer precision defined with the TMR
functional instruction is fixed at a certain value. In case of
30i/31i/32i-A PMC, the timer precision can be set up for each
timer number separately. See Subsection 4.3.1 for details.
(6) The arrangement and specifications of the DI/DO signals
(addresses G and F) used with the CNC vary between the
30i/31i/32i- A and 15i-A/B. Refer to the respective connection
manuals.
(7) The nonvolatile memory control keep relay (MWRTF and
MWRTF2) has been changed from K16 to K909.
(8) The SPCNT functional instruction is not supported. It is treated
as a NOP.
- 124 -
(9) As for the WINDR and WINDW functional instructions, there is

no compatibility between the new and conventional PMC models,
because the structures of their control data are different.
(10) Programs can be created on the third level because of program
compatibility. The operations on the third level are not
guaranteed with respect to timing, however. Use only the first and
second levels in programming.
PMC parameter compatibility
Parameters prepared for the PMC-NB6 can be loaded to 30i/31i/32i-A

PMC.
- 125 -
2.5.3 The convert method of source program using FANUC

LADDER-III
The version of FANUC LADDER-III applied to 30i-A PMC is 4.0 or

more.
The version of FANUC LADDER-III applied to 31i/32i-A PMC is 4.4
or more.
- For new users A08B-9210-J505
- For up grade A08B-9210-J506
When you want to change ladder from old PMC to 30i/31i/32i-A PMC,
you can convert the source program using FANUC LADDER-III.
Please refer to following manual for details.
FANUC LADDER-III OPERATOR’S MANUAL B-66234EN

“10.3 CONVERTING SEQUENCE PROGRAM BETWEEN PMC
MODELS”
The sequence of the conversion to first PMC of 30i-A from PMC-SB7

is as follows.
i) Convert a source program into the mnemonic file by FANUC

LADDER-III.([Tool]->[Source Program Convert])
ii) Change the system parameters in the mnemonic file for PMC-SB7
by text editor. (“4 PMC-SB7” -> “4 30i-A PMC”)
If the mnemonic file has insufficient parameters for first PMC of 30i-
A from PMC-SB7, the initial values are set with conversion for the
source program.
The mnemonic file format of the system parameter for first PMC of
30i-A is as follows.
%@0
2 BINARY 2 : Counter type ( BINARY or BCD )
3 NO 3 : Operator panel ( YES or NO )
4 30i-A PMC 4 : PMC type ( 30i-A PMC )
31 1 31: Number of display language (comment) ( 1-16 )
32 -1 32: CNC display language number 1 ( -1, 0-127 )
33 0 33: Comment set number 1 ( 0-16 )
%
iii) Create a new LAD file for first PMC of 30i-A by FANUC
LADDER-III.
iv) Convert the mnemonic file to the source program.([Tool] ->

[Mnemonic Convert])
- 126 -
2.6 PMC MESSAGE MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY FUNCTION

The PMC message multi-language display function manages the
language of alarm message and operator message, switching the
language according to the language setting of CNC using message data
defined in various languages. The message data for this function is
stored into a memory card format data, separated from the data of
ladder program, and loaded into CNC individually. Up to 2000
messages can be registered for each language.
This function, when compared with the conventional multi-language
display capability based on the message shift function, has the
following features:
• Because “A” address area does not need to be divided for
messages of each language, all bits of “A” address can be used for
each language, and available number of message is increased.
• Switching the language of alarm messages and operator messages
do not need power cycle of CNC, and the language follows the
setting of CNC display language dynamically.
• A message data file can be replaced, independently of ladder
program.
NOTE
This function is optional. This function cannot be
used with a PMC and CNC software not
supporting this function.
- 127 -
2.6.1 Usage of PMC Message Multi-Language Display Function

To utilize the PMC message multi-language display function, you need
to prepare the data files with FANUC LADDER-III and store them into
CNC as described below:
Step 1 At first, prepare a ladder program. The message data in the

ladder program must have alarm numbers associated.
Step 2 Prepare a mnemonic file of multi-language message data. The
mnemonic file is a text file, and can be created and edited by
some text editor application on PC. The alarm numbers in the
mnemonic file must correspond with the alarm numbers in the
message data of the ladder program.
Step 3 Make the memory card format file of the ladder program by
compile process on FANUC LADDER-III as usual.
Step 4 Make the memory card format file of the multi-language
message data using “Multi-language PMC Message Creation
Tool” included in FANUC LADDER-III which supports this
function.
Step 5 Store these memory card format files created in step 3 and 4.
You can use Boot Menu to store them directly into Flash ROM,
or you can use PMC I/O screen to read them into the memory,
and then write them into Flash ROM.
You can store two or more language sets of messages into a multi-
language message data file. And you can prepare two or more multi-
language message data files to enable switching the available language
of the messages by altering the message file in CNC afterwards.
NOTE
1 Message data for multi-language display cannot
be created, browsed, or edited on the CNC
screen. To create or edit the message data,
FANUC LADDER-III is required.
2 If the ladder program uses the extended symbol
and comment feature, you can use symbols in
multi-language message data instead of “A”
address notation. Otherwise, you have to use “A”
address notation only.
3 For instructions of FANUC LADDER-III and file
format of multi-language message data
mnemonic file, refer to the following manual:
Manual title Drawing No.
FANUC LADDER-III Operator's Manual B-66234EN
- 128 -
Outline of the process flow from data creation to display them with PMC message multi-language display
function
Mnemonic file (Message) Step 2

Ladder program ID code:%@4-D (ANSI/Unicode)
Message (Standard)
Message Japanese ALM1001 “1001 ”
ALM1001 “1001 E.STOP”
display/editor
screen German ALM1001 “1001 E.STöP”
Step 1
Compile FANUC LADDER-III Multi-language PMC

Step 3
Message Creation Tool
Step 4
PC
PMC sequence program Message (option) To be loaded using

(Memory card format file) (Memory card format file) the CNC boot menu
or PMC I/O screen
: 1st message data as with a PMC
Symbol and comment data (Japanese) sequence program
ALM1001 A000.0 ALM1001 “1001 ”
$1 ‘ No.1001’ CNC
2nd message data
: (German) CNC
Ladder data ALM1001 “1001 E.STöP” Flash ROM
A0000.0 Japanes
DISPB function
Step 5 German CNC Display
Message (standard) Language
A000.0→“1001 E.STOP” English
A000.1→“1002 FUSE IS BLOWN” (Others)
:
Message
screen
- 129 -
2.6.2 Multi-Language Display

By setting the display language attribute for each message data item for
multi-language display to be edited, the language of alarm/operator
messages to be displayed can be dynamically switched to match the
CNC display language. Up to 2000 messages can be registered for each
language.
When setting a language for message data, set an attribute value from 0
to 15 for the message data with FANUC LADDER-III.
Attribute value: 0 to 15
0: English 8: Dutch
1: Japanese 9: Danish
2: German 10: Portuguese
3: French 11: Polish
4: Chinese (Traditional) 12: Hungarian
5: Italian 13: Swedish
6: Korean 14: Czech
7: Spanish 15: Chinese (Simplified)
The message data which has a language attribute number other than
ones in the table above, will be just ignored.
Alarm number setting
To display messages of multi-language message data, alarm numbers at
least have to be defined at the corresponding entries in ordinary
message data in ladder program. And each alarm number of “A”
address has to have identical alarm number in multi-language message
data and in ordinary message data. If they differ with each other, alarm
number of ordinary message data will be used.
Selection of language
If messages of required language are not found in multi-language
message data, English messages will be used instead. If English
messages are not found either, messages in ordinary message data in
ladder program will be used.
- 130 -
NOTE
1 A message defined in multi-language message data
will not be displayed unless the corresponding
message data in ladder program has valid alarm
number.
2 If messages of current language has no
corresponding message entry to the bit of “A”
address that has turned on, alarm message without
any message will be issued, with the alarm number
that is defined at corresponding entry in ordinary
message data. If ordinary message data has no
valid alarm number at the entry, no alarm is issued.
3 It may take a while to change alarm and operator
messages to one of languages after changing
display language of CNC. The more messages per
a language are defined especially using symbol, the
longer time it tends to take to switch them.
2.6.3 Maximum number of message

The number of displayable alarm messages and the number of
displayable operator messages can be extended to 16 by the following
NC parameter:
NC parameter No. 11931 bit 1 = 0 : Displays up to 4 messages

(conventional specification).
1 : Displays up to 16 messages.
NOTE
To increase the number of displayable messages
on the CNC screen, the relevant NC parameter
needs to be set. If the number of displayable
messages is increased by setting the NC
parameter, the number of displayable messages
also increases with DISPB instruction, even
without using multi-language display function.
- 131 -
2.6.4 Display of European characters

With the conventional PMC message function, a European character
such as “À” can be edited only in the code format notation, enclosing
the character code between “@0D” and “01@”. With the PMC message
multi-language display function, you can edit these characters as a
normal character to create message data on personal computer.
The European characters which are available on CNC screen are listed
in the following table:
Character
+0 +1 +2 +3 +4 +5 +6 +7 +8 +9 +A +B +C +D +E +F
Code
A0
B0
C0
D0
* The character code in the table is for the code format notation.
NOTE
1 The characters that can be displayed on CNC
screen are as same as ones that can be
displayed by conventional DISPB function. If
code of a character that can not be displayed is
contained in message data, the character will not
be displayed.
2 For instructions for editing message data on
personal computer, refer to the following manual:
- 132 -
2.7 DATA BACKED UP BY THE BATTERY
Some data on the CNC is backed up by the battery so that the data is not
lost even when the main power is turned off.
The data backed up by the battery is lost when the battery voltage
decreases. So, periodically, the data needs to be saved to an external
device, and the battery needs to be replaced with a new one.
NOTE
For the method of battery replacement, refer to
"Maintenance Manual (B-63945EN)".
With the PMC, the following data is backed up by the battery:
Type of data Data item

PMC parameters (Note 1) Timer (T)
Counter (C)
Keep relay (K)
Data table (D)
Data table control data
Extra relay (E) (Note 2)
Settings of various functions and Setting of the PMC data I/O function
screens Setting of the online function
Setting of the trace function
Setting of the ladder diagram screen
Setting of the I/O diagnosis screen
NOTE
1 A delay occurs in PMC parameter backup operation.
For details, see Subsection 2.3.1, "Cautions for
Reading from/Writing to Nonvolatile Memory ".
2 The data is backed up when using the nonvolatile
PMC extra relay function (option).
- 133 -
Width the following functions, data backed up by the battery can be

saved to an external device.
Type of data External device Function Remarks

PMC parameters Memory card Writing PMC parameters For details, see Section 7.4,
Handy File from the PMC data I/O "SEQUENCE PROGRAM AND PMC
RS-232C device screen PARAMETER I/O ([I/O] SCREEN)".
Personal Loading PMC parameters For details, see FANUC LADDER-III
Computer with FANUC LADDER-III OPERATOR’S MANUAL (B-
66234EN)”.
All CNC data (including PMC Memory card Backing up the S-RAM with For details, see MAINTENANCE
parameters and the settings the boot system MANUAL (B-63945EN)”.
of various functions and
screens)
PMC battery backup data can be cleared by the following operation:
Type of data Operation

PMC parameters, Select [3.CLEAR FILE] - [5:PMC-
Settings of various functions and PARA.DAT] from the IPL menu.
screens Hold down "O" and "Z" when turning
on the power to the CNC.
WARNING
Exercise special care when clearing PMC
parameters. When PMC parameters are cleared,
the machine malfunctions. After clearing PMC
parameters, be sure to set the correct values again.
NOTE
PMC battery backup data is also cleared when the
entire memory of the CNC is cleared. For operation
to clear the entire memory of the CNC, refer to
"Maintenance Manual (B-63945EN)".
- 134 -
B-63983EN/02 3.I/O LINK
3 I/O LINK
- 135 -
3.I/O LINK B-63983EN/02
3.1 WHAT IS THE I/O LINK?
The FANUC I/O Link is a serial interface which passes input/output

signals between the PMC and each I/O device at a high speed.
For each channel, up to 1024 DI points and up to 1024 DO points can
be connected and controlled from the PMC.
NOTE
1 To use channels 2 to 4 of the I/O Link, the I/O Link
point expansion option is required for each channel.
2 The transfer cycle of signals from I/O devices is 2
ms with channels 1 and 2, or 4 or 8 ms (execution
cycle of the first ladder level) with channels 3 and 4.
- 136 -
B-63983EN/02 3.I/O LINK
3.1.1 Configuration of an I/O Link
The following figure shows a basic configuration of the I/O Link.
Slaves
I/O Unit I/O Unit
Group 0
I/O Link
master
Group 1
Operator's panel
connection unit
Group 2
Power Mate
: : : : :
: : : : :
Group 15
(1) The I/O Link consists of one master and multiple slaves.
Master: CNC (such as Series 30i-A)
Slaves: I/O Unit-MODEL A, Power Mate, operator's panel
connection unit, and other devices
(2) Up to 16 groups of slaves can be connected to one I/O Link.
Group numbers 0 to 15 are sequentially assigned. Number 0 is
assigned to the group nearest to the master.
The number of connected slaves in a group differs depending on
the types of slaves.
(3) Any slave can be connected in any group. One group must
consist of slaves of the same type, however.
- 137 -
3.I/O LINK B-63983EN/02
NOTE
1 Turn the power to the slaves and master on
simultaneously or turn the power to the slaves on
before turning the power to the master.
2 When turning the power to the master off, also turn
the power to all slaves off. Turn the power to all
slaves on again before turning the power to the
master on or turn the power to all slaves and the
master on simultaneously. Turn the power to the
master on after turning the power to all slaves on or
turn the power to the master and all slaves on
simultaneously.
3 For the maximum number of slaves per group that
can be connected, refer to the hardware connection
manual for each I/O device used as a slave.
- 138 -
B-63983EN/02 3.I/O LINK
3.1.2 Numbers of Input Points and of Output Points of the I/O Link
The I/O Link has up to 1024 input points and up to 1024 output points
for each channel when viewed from the master. These I/O points can
be assigned to each slave to periodically pass I/O data between the
master and each slave.
Each slave occupies the predetermined number of I/O points.
The total number of I/O points occupied by all slaves connected to one
channel is up to 1024 points (128 bytes) for each of input and output.
The number of I/O points occupied by one group is up to 256 points
(32 bytes) for each of input and output.
NOTE
The number of occupied I/O points may differ from
the actual number of I/O points. For example, if the
number of input points is smaller than or equal to that
of output points for a group, the number of input
points is assumed equal to that of output points. For
this reason, when the number of input points for the
actually connected hardware components is 128 and
that of output points is 256, the number of occupied
input points is assumed to be 256 because there is
the following relationship between the numbers of
input points and of output points:
128 (number of input points) £ 256 (number of
output points)
For more specific rules, see Section 3.2.
- 139 -
3.I/O LINK B-63983EN/02
3.2 ASSIGNMENT METHOD
To use an I/O device as a slave, assign connection information to X

addresses (input) and Y addresses (output) of the PMC. The machine
tool builder should determine addresses to be used for input/output of
each I/O device in a sequence program. Connection information can
be assigned to these determined addresses using the PMC screen or
FANUC LADDER-III. The information is written in the flash ROM
together with the sequence program. For this reason, the set
information is not changed unless the sequence program is changed.
Information to be set to addresses includes the connection location and
module name of each I/O device.
The connection location of an I/O device is represented by its group,
base, and slot numbers. For the module name, set a name representing
the number of occupied I/O points.
Setting the connection location
I/O devices can roughly be divided into the following three types
according to the method for specifying the connection location.
(1) Type of I/O device whose connection location is specified with

its group, base, and slot numbers
I/O Unit-MODEL A is of this type. Specify the connection
location with its group, base, and slot numbers.
The range of valid settings of each item is as follows:
Group = 0 to 15
Base = 0 and 1
Slot = 1 to 10 (number of a slot on a I/O Unit-MODEL
A base board)
its group and slot numbers
I/O Unit-MODEL B and handy machine operator's panels are of
this type. Always set the base number to 0.
Group = 0 to 15
Base = 0 (Always set 0.)
Slot = 0 to 30 (NOTE)
NOTE
For detailed information on settings, see Subsections
3.2.2 and 3.2.6.
- 140 -
B-63983EN/02 3.I/O LINK

its group number
Machine operator's panel interface unit, I/O Link connection unit,
Power Mate, and other devices are of this type. One unit of this
type occupies one group. When using this type, always set the
base number to 0 and the slot number to 1.
Group = 0 to 15
Base = 0 (Always set 0.)
Slot = 1 (Always set 1.)
Setting the module name
Set the module name at the X or Y address assigned as input/output of

each I/O device. For the module name, see Tables 3.2 (a) to (c).
The number of bytes of the address occupied is determined for each
module name. The number of occupied I/O points per byte is 8.
NOTE
1 Assign the start byte of an analog input module
(AD04A) or analog output module (DA02A) to an
even input address (X ) or even output address
(Y ).
2 Always read an A/D converted digital value from an
input address (X ) or write a digital value to be
converted to an analog value to an output address
(Y ) in word (16-bit) units.
For details of the assignment method, see the assignment method for
each I/O device described later.
When you want to set assignment data using the I/O module screen,
for required operations, see Section 9.4.
- 141 -
3.I/O LINK B-63983EN/02
Table 3.2 (a) Module names (1)

Module name Occupied
Name Specifications
(actual module name) address
Input modules for ID32A (AID32A1) 4 bytes for input A03B-0807-J101
I/O Unit-MODEL A ID32B (AID32B1) 4 bytes for input A03B-0807-J102
ID32H (AID32H1) 4 bytes for input A03B-0807-J111
ID16C (AID16C) 2 bytes for input A03B-0807-J103
ID16D (AID16D) 2 bytes for input A03B-0807-J104
ID16K (AID16K) 2 bytes for input A03B-0807-J113
ID16L (AID16L) 2 bytes for input A03B-0807-J114
ID32E (AID32E1) 4 bytes for input A03B-0807-J105
ID32E (AID32E2) 4 bytes for input A03B-0807-J110
ID32F (AID32F1) 4 bytes for input A03B-0807-J106
ID32F (AID32F2) 4 bytes for input A03B-0807-J109
IA16G (AIA16G) 2 bytes for input A03B-0807-J107
AD04A (AAD04A) 8 bytes for input A03B-0807-J051
CT01A (CT01A in operation mode A)
(ACT01A) 4 bytes for input A03B-0807-J053
CT01B (CT01B in operation mode B)
ES01A (AES01A) 1 byte for input A03B-0807-C108
ID08F (AID08F) 1 byte for input A03B-0807-C112
Output modules for OD32A (AOD32A1) 4 bytes for output A03B-0807-J162
I/O Unit-MODEL A OD08C (AOD08C) 1 byte for output A03B-0807-J151
OD08D (AOD08D) 1 byte for output A03B-0807-J152
OD16C (AOD16C) 2 bytes for output A03B-0807-J153
OD16D (AOD16D) 2 bytes for output A03B-0807-J154
OD32C (AOD32C1) 4 bytes for output A03B-0807-J155
OD32C (AOD32C2) 4 bytes for output A03B-0807-J172
OD32D (AOD32D1) 4 bytes for output A03B-0807-J156
OD32D (AOD32D2) 4 bytes for output A03B-0807-J167
OA05E (AOA05E) 1 byte for output A03B-0807-J157
OA08E (AOA08E) 1 byte for output A03B-0807-J158
OA12F (AOA12F) 2 bytes for output A03B-0807-J159
OR08G (AOR08G) 1 byte for output A03B-0807-J160
OR16G (AOR16G) 2 bytes for output A03B-0807-J161
OR16H (OR16H2) 2 bytes for output A03B-0807-J165
DA02A (ADA02A) 4 bytes for output A03B-0807-J052
BK01A (ABK01A) 1 byte for output A03B-0807-C164
OA08K (AOA08K) 1 byte for output A03B-0807-C169
OD08L (AOD08L) 1 byte for output A03B-0807-C170
OD16D (AOD16D2) 2 bytes for output A03B-0807-C171
OR08I (AOR08I3) 1 byte for output A03B-0807-C166
OR08J (AOR08J3) 1 byte for output A03B-0807-C168
Output modules with an /2 (AOD16DP) 2 bytes for output A03B-0807-J182
output protection function /1 (AOD08DP) 1 byte for input
for I/O Unit-MODEL A A03B-0819-J183
/1 (AOD08DP) 1 byte for output
Input/output module for IO24I (AIO40A) 3 bytes for input
A03B-0807-C200
I/O Unit-MODEL A IO16O (AIO40A) 2 bytes for output
- 142 -
B-63983EN/02 3.I/O LINK
Table 3.2 (b) Module names (2)

Name Specifications
FANUC CNC SYSTEM 4 bytes for input FANUC Series 0-C
FS04A
FANUC Power Mate 4 bytes for output (compatible with the FANUC I/O Link)
8 bytes for input FANUC Power Mate-MODEL
FS08A
8 bytes for output A/B/C/D/E/F/H
OC02I 16 bytes for input
OC02O 16 bytes for output
FANUC Power Mate-MODEL D/H
I/O Link b amplifier OC02I 16 bytes for input FANUC SERVO MOTOR b series
OC02O 16 bytes for output I/O Link option
Analog input module AD04A (AAD04A) 8 bytes for input
Analog output module DA02A (ADA02A) 4 bytes for output
Connection unit 1 CN01I 12 bytes for input
A20B-1005-0310
CN01O 8 bytes for output
Connection unit 2 CN02I 24 bytes for input
A20B-1003-0200
CN02O 16 bytes for output
Operator's panel /8 8 bytes for input A16B-2200-0661 (sink type)
connection unit A /4 4 bytes for output A16B-2201-0731 (source type)
Operator's panel CN01I 12 bytes for input A16B-2200-0660 (sink type)
connection unit B CN01O 8 bytes for output A16B-2201-0730 (source type)
Machine operator's panel OC02I 16 bytes for input
interface unit OC02O 16 bytes for output
A16B-2201-0110
Modules for I/O Unit- bytes for input Specify a value of 1 to 8 indicating the number
#
MODEL B bytes for output of bytes for input/output for .
Specify an area for reading the power on-off
## 4 bytes for input
state of each unit of I/O Unit-MODEL B.
I/O Link connection unit bytes for input Specify a value of 1 to 8 indicating the number
/
bytes for output of bytes for input/output for .
Distribution I/O CM03I 3 bytes for input Basic unit only
connection panel I/O CM06I 6 bytes for input Uses expansion unit 1.
modules CM09I 9 bytes for input Uses expansion unit 2.
CM12I 12 bytes for input Uses expansion unit 3.
CM13I 13 bytes for input Uses the first MPG.
CM14I 14 bytes for input Uses the second MPG.
CM15I 15 bytes for input Uses the third MPG.
CM16I 16 bytes for input Uses DO alarm detection.
CM02O 2 bytes for output Basic unit only
CM04O 4 bytes for output Uses expansion unit 1.
- 143 -
3.I/O LINK B-63983EN/02
Table 3.2 (c) Module names (3)

Name Specifications
Distribution I/O CM06I 6 bytes for input
operator's panel I/O CM13I 13 bytes for input Uses the first MPG.
modules CM14I 14 bytes for input Uses the second MPG.
CM15I 15 bytes for input Uses the third MPG.
CM16I 16 bytes for input Uses DO alarm detection.
CM04O 4 bytes for output
CM08O 8 bytes for output
External I/O cards A and /6 6 bytes for input A16B-2201-0071 (A)
D for the Power Mate /4 4 bytes for output A16B-2202-0733 (D)
External I/O cards B and OC01I 12 bytes for input A16B-2201-0070 (B)
E for the Power Mate OC01O 8 bytes for output A16B-2202-0732 (E)
External I/O cards C and /3 3 bytes for input A16B-2600-0150(C)
F for the Power Mate /2 2 bytes for output A16B-2600-0170 (F)
Handy machine 2 bytes for input
#2
operator's panel 2 bytes for output
(NOTE 3) ## 4 bytes for input
AS-i converter unit OC03I 32 bytes for input
NOTE
1 For the specifications and connection of each I/O
device, refer to the relevant hardware connection
manual.
2 For the assignment method for each I/O device, see
Subsections 3.2.1 to 3.2.8.
3 As assignment data for a handy machine operator's
panel, assign multiple module names successively.
For details, see Subsection 3.2.6.
- 144 -
B-63983EN/02 3.I/O LINK
3.2.1 Assignment Method for I/O Unit-MODEL A
Figs. 3.2.1 (a) and 3.2.1 (b) show sample configurations of I/O Unit-
MODEL A.
I/O Unit I/O Unit

I/O Link
A A Group 0
master
I I
Slot 1
Slot 2
Slot 3
Slot 4
Slot 5
Slot 1
Slot 2
Slot 3
Slot 4
Slot 5
F F
0 0
1 1
A B
Base 0 Base 1
Fig. 3.2.1 (a)
I/O Unit I/O Unit

I/O Link
A A Group 0
master
I I
Slot 1
Slot 2
Slot 3
Slot 4
Slot 5
Slot 1
Slot 2
Slot 3
Slot 4
Slot 5
F F
0 0
1 1
A B
Base 0 Base 1
I/O Unit I/O Unit

A A Group 1
I I
Slot 1
Slot 2
Slot 3
Slot 4
Slot 5
Slot 1
Slot 2
Slot 3
Slot 4
Slot 5
F F
0 0
1 1
A B
Base 0 Base 1
Operator's panel Group 2

connection unit
Base 0
Group 3
Power Mate
Base 0
Fig. 3.2.1 (b)
- 145 -
3.I/O LINK B-63983EN/02
Assignment method
(1) Group number

For I/O Unit-MODEL A, up to two I/O units can be connected
when interface module AIF01A is used as the basic unit and
expansion interface module AIF01B is also used. This is called
the base expansion function. This set of up to two I/O units
comprises one group (see Fig. 3.2.1 (a)). When required I/O
modules cannot be contained only in one group or when multiple
I/O units are to be distributed at distant locations on the machine
side, the second AIF01A can be connected to the first AIF01A
using a cable to add a group. (See Fig. 3.2.1 (b).)
(2) Base number

One group consists of up to two I/O base units. The base number
of the I/O unit on which interface module AIF01A is mounted is
0; the base number of the other I/O unit is 1.
In other words, when the base expansion function is used, the
base number of the basic unit is always 0 and that of the
expansion unit is always 1. When the base expansion function is
not used, the base number is always 0.
(3) Slot number

On one I/O base unit, up to five (ABU05A) or ten (ABU10A)
I/O modules can be mounted depending on the type of I/O base
unit. The location of each module on the I/O base unit is
represented by a slot number. For each base unit, the location of
the I/O interface module is 0 and slot numbers 1 to 10 are
assigned from left to right. Each module can be mounted into
any desired slot. I/O modules may not be mounted closely from
left to right. An intermediate slot may not be used.
(4) Module name

For module names, see Tables 3.2 (a) to (c) in Section 3.2 above.
Actual module names begin with A. When setting a module
name, remove this A. Some actual module names may end with
a numeric character. In this case, when setting a module name,
also remove the numeric character.
(Example 1) To set module AID16D, enter ID16D.
(Example 2) To set module AID32A1, enter ID32A.
- 146 -
B-63983EN/02 3.I/O LINK
NOTE
For I/O Unit-MODEL A, when assigning 3, 5, 6, or 7
bytes, change the module name as follows.
Do not use IO24I, /3, /5, /6, or /7 as a module name.
Module names
Before change ® After change
IO24I ® /4
/3 ® /4
/5 ® /8
/6 ® /8
/7 ® /8
Number of occupied I/O points
Obtain the number of occupied I/O points as follows.
[Number of output points]

Total number of points required for output Number of occupied
modules used in one group I/O points
0 to 32 32
40 to 64 64
72 to 128 128
136 to 256 256
NOTE
When obtaining the number of points, assume that
the number of points required for AOA05E is 8 and
that of points required for AOA12F is 16.
[Number of input points]

Total number of points required for input modules Number of occupied
used in one group I/O points
0 to 32 32
40 to 64 64
72 to 128 128
136 to 256 256
If the obtained total number of input points is smaller than or equal to

that of output points in the same group, however, the number of input
points is assumed equal to that of output points. For this reason, when
the number of input points for the actually connected hardware
components is 128 and that of output points is 256, the number of
occupied input points is assumed to be 256.
- 147 -
3.I/O LINK B-63983EN/02
Related hardware manual
"FANUC I/O Unit-MODEL A Connection and Maintenance Manual"

(B-61813E)
NOTE
For the specifications and connection of I/O Unit-
MODEL A and related I/O modules, refer to the
hardware connection manual for each I/O device.
- 148 -
B-63983EN/02 3.I/O LINK
3.2.2 Assignment Method for I/O Unit-MODEL B
I/O Unit-MODEL B can be used together with I/O Link devices such
as the Power Mate, operator's panel interface unit, connection unit,
and I/O Unit-MODEL A. In this case, I/O Unit-MODEL B comprises
one group and other units cannot be contained in the group.
An example of connection is shown below.
I/O LINK
MASTER
[GROUP] = 0
Power Mate
[BASE] = 0, [SLOT] = 1
[GROUP] = 1
Operator's panel
interface unit
[BASE] = 0, [SLOT] = 1
[GROUP] = 2
®SLOT No. ®SLOT No.
I/O Unit-A I/O Unit-A

[GROUP] = 3
[BASE] = 0 [BASE] = 1
I/O Unit-B
interface unit
I/O Unit-B I/O Unit-B
DI/DO unit DI/DO unit
(Unit No. = 1) (Unit No. = 20)
[BASE] = 0, [SLOT] = 1 [BASE] = 0, [SLOT] = 20


- 149 -
3.I/O LINK B-63983EN/02
Assignment method
As the group number, set the group number used in the configuration.
As the base number, always set 0. As the slot number, set the unit
number of a DI/DO unit of I/O Unit-MODEL B. To assign power on-
off information, set 0 for the slot number.
Set the following values for the slot number and assignment name:
Slot number: 0: Power on-off information
1 to 30: Unit number
Assignment name: Module name representing the address
occupied by the I/O Unit-MODEL B
DI/DO unit (see Table 3.2 (b).)
Number of input or
output points required
Assignment name Occupied address
for [basic unit] +
[expansion unit]
1 byte #1 1 byte for input/output
2 bytes #2 2 bytes for input/output
Power on-off information ## 4 bytes for input
Example of setting
To connect an I/O Unit-MODEL B DI/DO unit with unit number 10

whose occupied address is 3 bytes in GROUP=1:
Enter 1.0.10.#3.
NOTE
When channels 2 to 4 are also used to connect I/O
devices, the maximum total number of groups used
for connecting I/O Unit-MODEL B with channels 1 to
4 is 8.
- 150 -
B-63983EN/02 3.I/O LINK
Interface module incorporating I/O Unit-MODEL A
Interface module AIF02C can control communication both with I/O

Unit-MODEL A and with I/O Unit-MODEL B.
I/O Unit I/O Unit

I/O Link
A A
master Group 0
I I
Slot 1
Slot 2
Slot 3
Slot 4
Slot 5
Slot 1
Slot 2
Slot 3
Slot 4
Slot 5
F F
0 0
2 1
C B
Group 1
I/O Unit-MODEL B I/O Unit-MODEL B I/O Unit-MODEL B

DI/DO unit DI/DO unit DI/DO unit
Group 2
Operator's panel
connection unit
For the AIF02C, the base expansion function of the AIF02A is

removed and the functions of the I/O Unit-MODEL B interface unit
are added.
When I/O Unit-MODEL A is not used, only I/O Unit-MODEL B
cannot be used. The base expansion function cannot also be used.
The AIF02C occupies two groups. Assignment is required for each of
I/O Unit-MODEL A and I/O Unit-MODEL B.
NOTE
For details of the AIF02C, refer to "FANUC I/O Unit-
MODEL A Connection and Maintenance Manual" (B-
61813E).
Related hardware manual
"FANUC I/O Unit-MODEL B Connection Manual" (B-62163E)
NOTE
For the setting of each I/O Unit-MODEL B unit and
the specifications and connection of related I/O
modules, refer to the hardware connection manual for
each I/O device in addition to the above connection
manual.
- 151 -
3.I/O LINK B-63983EN/02
3.2.3 Assignment Method for Distribution I/O Connection Panel I/O

Modules and Distribution I/O Operator's Panel I/O Modules
For the I/O Link, when assigning connection information of a

connection panel or operator's panel I/O module, set an I/O Link serial
number (0 for the module nearest to the I/O Link master CNC) for the
group number, always set 0 for the base number, and always set 1 for
the slot number. When basic and expansion connection panel I/O
modules are used, assign one connection information item for all
modules in one I/O Link group. For a distribution I/O module unlike
I/O Unit-MODEL A, the slot number need not be specified. For the
module name used to set assignment data, see "Distribution I/O
connection panel I/O modules" in Table 3.2 (b).
An example of assignment is shown below.
Example of assignment
Example)
CNC
JD1A
72 input points (16 general-purpose points + 56 matrix points), 56 output points

(X4…, Y0…)
Operator's panel
I/O module
A20B-2002-0470
JD1B
JD1A
96 input points, 64 output points (X20…, Y10…)

Connection Expansion Expansion Expansion
panel I/O module 1 module 2 module 3
basic module
JD1B
JD1A
24 input points, 16 output points (X100…, Y100…)

Connection
panel I/O
basic module
JD1B
JD1A
- 152 -
B-63983EN/02 3.I/O LINK
Group number Base number Slot number Assignment

name
X004 0 0 1 CM14I
X020 1 0 1 CM12I
X100 2 0 1 CM03I
Y000 0 0 1 CM08O
Y010 1 0 1 CM08O
Y100 2 0 1 CM02O
- 153 -
3.I/O LINK B-63983EN/02
Connection panel I/O modules
For signal mapping of connection panel I/O modules, refer to the

connection manual (hardware) for the CNC used as the I/O Link
master.
Assignment data is described below for each configuration of basic
and expansion modules.
CAUTION
Always connect expansion modules 1, 2, and 3 in this
order closely when required. Any intermediate
expansion module cannot be skipped.
Basic Expansion Expansion

module module 1 module 2
JD1B
JD1A
You may want to make the above setting so that

expansion module 1 is not mounted to connect it later
and connection information of only expansion module
2 is assigned, but the setting is disabled.
(1) Only basic module
24 input points, 16 output points
Basic
module
JD1B
JD1A
(a) When DO alarm detection is not used

· When no manual pulse generator is used
Input: X=CM03I, output: Y=CM02O
(b) When DO alarm detection is used
· Regardless of the number of manual pulse generators
- 154 -
B-63983EN/02 3.I/O LINK
(2) Basic module + expansion module 1
Basic Expansion
module module 1
JD1B
JD1A

· When one manual pulse generator is used
(3) Basic module + expansion module 1 + expansion module 2
Basic Expansion Expansion

module module 1 module 2
JD1B
JD1A

· When two manual pulse generators are used
- 155 -
3.I/O LINK B-63983EN/02
(4) Basic module + expansion module 1 + expansion module 2 +

expansion module 3
Basic Expansion Expansion Expansion

module module 1 module 2 module 3
JD1B
JD1A

· When three manual pulse generators are used
- 156 -
B-63983EN/02 3.I/O LINK
Operator's panel I/O modules
For signal mapping of operator's panel I/O modules, refer to the

connection manual (hardware) for the CNC used as the I/O Link
master.
(1) Operator's panel I/O module (compatible with matrix input,

A20B-2002-0470)
Input: 16 general-purpose points + 56 matrix points

Output: 56 matrix points
Operator's panel
I/O module
JD1B
JD1A

- 157 -
3.I/O LINK B-63983EN/02
(2) Operator's panel I/O module (A20B-2002-0520, A20B-2002-

0521)
48 input points
32 output points
Operator's panel
I/O module
JD1B
JD1A

(3) Distribution I/O machine operator's panel

(A20B-8001-0721, A20B-8001-0720, A20B-8001-0210)
Input: 8 points for override signals and so on + 24 general-purpose points + 64
matrix points
Output: 64 matrix points
Operator's panel
I/O module
JD1B
JD1A

- 158 -
B-63983EN/02 3.I/O LINK
3.2.4 Assignment Method for the Power Mate
To use Power Mate-MODEL D/H, Power Mate i MODEL-D/H, or I/O

Link b amplifier as an I/O Link slave, assign its connection
information on the I/O Link master.
On the I/O Link slave, assignment is not required because the
addresses are fixed.
An example of connection is shown below.
I/O LINK
MASTER
[GROUP] = 0
Operator's panel
interface unit
[BASE] = 0, [SLOT] = 1
[GROUP] = 1
Power Mate
[BASE] = 0, [SLOT] = 1
Assignment method
For the group number, set the group number used in the configuration.
For the base number, always set 0.
For the slot number, always set 1.
Number of input/output Input device assignment Output device assignment

points (input/output) name (module name) name (module name)
32/32 FS04A FS04A
64/64 FS08A FS08A
128/128 OC02I OC02O
256/256 OC03I OC03O
NOTE
1 Assign input and output module names with the
same number of points.
2 For the I/O Link b amplifier, assign OC02I/OC02O.
Examples of settings
To connect Power Mate-D with 256/256 points in group 1:
Enter 1.0.1.OC03I for input and 1.0.1.OC03O for output.
To connect an I/O Link b amplifier in group 1:

Enter 1.0.1.OC02I for input and 1.0.1.OC02O for output.
- 159 -
3.I/O LINK B-63983EN/02
3.2.5 Assignment Method for I/O Link Connection Units
Conventionally, to exchange data between CNCs A and B, the devices

indicated by (a) in the figure below must be connected. (Any I/O
units can be used to exchange data.)
CNC A I/O Unit I/O Unit CNC B

Model A Model A
(a)
I/O Unit « I/O Unit
Model A Model A
I/O Unit I/O Unit

Model A Model A
An I/O Link connection unit replaces the connected devices to

eliminate cable connection and enable the power to each master or
slave to be turned on and off independently.

Model A Model A
¬ These devices are replaced with an

I/O Link connection unit.
I/O Unit (a) I/O Unit
Model A « Model A
I/O Unit I/O Unit

Model A Model A
- 160 -
B-63983EN/02 3.I/O LINK
Therefore, when an I/O Link connection unit is used, the connection is

as follows.

Model A Model A
I/O Link
connection unit
I/O Unit I/O Unit

Model A Model A
Assignment method
Assignment data is determined according to the types of I/O devices

replaced with an I/O Link connection unit.
Occupied Input device assignment name Output device assignment

address name
1 to 8 / : Numeric character 1 to 8 / : Numeric character 1 to 8
16 OC02I OC02O
32 OC03I OC03O
Example of setting
To connect a connection unit whose occupied address is 16 bytes in

GROUP=1 as an input device:
Enter 1.0.1.OC02I.
NOTE
For details of the hardware connection method,
particularly connection of a power supply, refer to the
hardware connection manual for each related
master/slave device.
- 161 -
3.I/O LINK B-63983EN/02
3.2.6 Assignment Method for a Handy Machine Operator's Panel
An example of connecting a handy machine operator's panel to the I/O

Link is shown below.
I/O Link Handy machine

Group 0
master operator's panel
Operator's panel
Group 1
connection unit
Assignment method
Assign 16 bytes to X addresses and 32 bytes to Y addresses

contiguously starting from any address for each group. Set the group
number used in the configuration for the group number and always set
0 for the base number. Set the slot number and assignment name as
shown in the table below. The number of occupied input points for
each group is 32 bytes, which is the same as that of output points,
because of limitations of the I/O Link.
[Examples of assigning X addresses]

X address Slot number Assignment Occupied
name address
Xn+0 0 ## 4 bytes
Xn+4 1 #2 2 bytes
Xn+6 2 #2 2 bytes
Xn+8 3 #2 2 bytes
Xn+10 4 #2 2 bytes
Xn+12 5 #2 2 bytes
Xn+14 6 #2 2 bytes
- 162 -
B-63983EN/02 3.I/O LINK
[Examples of assigning Y addresses]

Y address Slot number Assignment Occupied
name address
Yn+0 7 #2 2 bytes
Yn+2 8 #2 2 bytes
Yn+4 9 #2 2 bytes
Yn+6 10 #2 2 bytes
Yn+8 11 #2 2 bytes
Yn+10 12 #2 2 bytes
Yn+12 13 #2 2 bytes
Yn+14 14 #2 2 bytes
Yn+16 15 #2 2 bytes
Yn+18 16 #2 2 bytes
Yn+20 17 #2 2 bytes
Yn+22 18 #2 2 bytes
Yn+24 19 #2 2 bytes
Yn+26 20 #2 2 bytes
Yn+28 21 #2 2 bytes
Yn+30 22 #2 2 bytes
- 163 -
3.I/O LINK B-63983EN/02
3.2.7 Assignment Method for an AS-i Converter Unit
An I/O Link-AS-i converter unit converts I/O from the I/O Link to the
AS-Interface (called AS-i below) to enable the use of AS-i slave
module DI/DO signals as a standalone unit.
The AS-i comes in two main versions: Ver 2.0 and Ver 2.1. Two
types of I/O Link-AS-i converter units are available for each of these
versions.
An I/O Link-AS-i converter unit for Ver 2.0 differs from that for Ver
2.1 in the following points.
For Ver 2.0 For Ver 2.1

Number of 256 input points/256 output 512 input points/512 output
input/output points points points
Occupied groups 1 group Contiguous 2 groups
For each version, an example of connection is shown and the

assignment method is described below.
Example of connection for Ver 2.0
AS-i power
supply Group 0
I/O Link I/O Link-AS-i
master converter unit for
AS-i slave AS-i slave
Ver 2.0
Group 1
Operator's panel
connection unit
Assignment method for Ver 2.0
For the group number ([GROUP]), set the group number used in the
configuration. (Set 0 for the above example of connection.)
For the base number ([BASE]), always set 0.
For the slot number ([SLOT]), always set 1.
An I/O Link-AS-i converter unit occupies 256 points (32 bytes) for
both input and output. Therefore, the assignment names are as
follows.
Input device assignment name Output device assignment name

OC03I OC03O
- 164 -
B-63983EN/02 3.I/O LINK
Example of connection for Ver 2.1
AS-i power
supply Groups 0 and 1
I/O Link I/O Link-AS-i
master converter unit for AS-i slave AS-i slave

Ver 2.1
Group 2
Operator's panel
connection unit
Assignment method for Ver 2.1
For the group number ([GROUP]), set the numbers for two contiguous
groups in the configuration. Set 0 and 1 for the above example of
connection.
An I/O Link-AS-i converter unit occupies 512 points for both input
and output, 256 points (32 bytes) per group. Therefore, the
assignment names per group are the same as for an I/O Link-AS-i
converter unit for Ver 2.0. Set the same assignment names for each
occupied group number.
Group number Input device assignment Output device assignment

name name
n OC03I OC03O
n+1 OC03I OC03O
NOTE
An I/O Link-AS-i converter unit for Ver 2.1 cannot be
used as a converter unit for Ver 2.0 with
assignment data for Ver 2.0.
- 165 -
3.I/O LINK B-63983EN/02
3.2.8 FS0 Operator's Panel
The FS0 operator's panel consists of many key-operated switches,

LEDs, a rotary switch, and other components. The status of each of
key-operated switches and lamps is coded and as many signal lines as
the number of actual switches are not required to connect the
operator's panel to a CNC. PMC management software automatically
codes the status and transfers data.
These operations require only that simple bit images indicating the
switches, LEDs, and other components to be operated by a PMC
ladder program.
CNC
Bit PMC Input Coding

images manage- Xn… Keyboard
Rk…
ment
software
Bit Output Coding
images Ym… LED
Rl…
Input Protect key

Contact Emergency stop
X*…
button
Override rotary
switch, etc.
FS0 operator's panel

G*… PMC Input
ladder X*…
(X)
CNC program
software (user) Interface with
another machine
Output
F*… Y*…
Fig. 3.2.8 (a) Block diagram of connection of an operator's panel
- 166 -
B-63983EN/02 3.I/O LINK
An operator's panel consists of the following keys, LEDs, and other

components:
· Key-operated switches (sheet keys)
42 keys (0-TC)
46 keys (0-MC)
· LEDs (red) on all key-operated switches
· Override rotary switch (4 bits)
· Emergency stop button (1 bit)
· Program protect key (1 bit)
Fig. 3.2.8 (b) Operator's panel for 0-TC
Fig. 3.2.8 (c) Operator's panel for 0-MC
- 167 -
3.I/O LINK B-63983EN/02
Fig. 3.2.8 (d) Machine operator's panel for the 0-TC full-keyboard 9-inch CRT/MDI unit
- 168 -
B-63983EN/02 3.I/O LINK
Fig. 3.2.8 (e) Machine operator's panel for the 0-MC full-keyboard 9-inch CRT/MDI unit
- 169 -
3.I/O LINK B-63983EN/02
Example of connection
CNC
MAIN CPU
I/O Link I/O unit FS0 operator's panel
JD1A
JD1B DI M1A
(I/O Link)
module
CP32
PSU DO M2A
CP6 JD1A module
24 VDC Another I/O unit
DI module: +24 V common, 24 ms

(Example) AID32A1
DO module: 0 V common
(Example) AOD32A1
Assignment method
For the group number ([GROUP]), set the group number used in the
configuration.
For the above example of connection, the FS0 operator's panel
occupies 32 points (4 bytes) for both input and output. Therefore, the
assignment names are as follows.
Input device assignment name Output device assignment name

ID32A OD32A
Operator's panel connection signals
Emergency stop signal (*ESP)
This signal is directly monitored by the CNC and is assigned at the

fixed address.
For connection, refer to the section describing the interface between
the CNC and PMC in the CNC connection manual.
- 170 -
B-63983EN/02 3.I/O LINK
Override signals (*OV1 to *OV8) and

program protect key signal (KEY)
For these signals, the relevant key-operated switch contact signals are
directly input to the PMC. Directly process these signals with a PMC
ladder program.
For connection, refer to the section describing the interface between
the CNC and PMC in the CNC connection manual.
Key-operated switch signals (Xn, Xn+2)
Each key-operated switch signal is coded by PMC management

software and input to the relevant PMC address R as a bit image.
Whether a required key is pressed can be determined by checking the
bit image of the key-operated switch using the user PMC ladder
program. (See Tables 3.2.8 (a), 3.2.8 (b), and 3.2.8 (c).) When a key
is pressed, the bit corresponding to the key is 1.
Up to two keys can be input simultaneously. Do not use any keyboard
input method for a user PMC program that requires simultaneous
pressing of three or more keys. If three or more keys are pressed
simultaneously, they are not input correctly.
It takes up to 60 ms until the bit corresponding to a key is set to 1 (0)
after the key is pressed (released).
The address of a key-operated switch signal (Xn to Xn+2: Table 3.2.8
(a)) and the address of its bit image (Rk to Rk+7: Tables 3.2.8 (b) and
(c)) can be defined as the fixed address or an unused address without
restrictions.
LED signals (Ym)
Create each LED signal at PMC address R as a bit image in the user
PMC ladder program. PMC management software converts the bit
image of the LED signal to a coded output signal. (See Tables 3.2.8
(a), (b), and (c).) When a value of 1 is written in an LED bit image,
the corresponding LED is automatically turned on. In the same way,
when a value of 0 is written, the LED is turned off. All LEDs are off
at power-on.
It takes up to 200 ms until an LED is turned on (off) after a value of 1
(0) is written in the corresponding bit image by the PMC.
- 171 -
3.I/O LINK B-63983EN/02
The address of an LED signal (Ym: Table 3.2.8 (a)) and the address
of its bit image (Rl to Rl+7: Tables 3.2.8 (b) and (c)) can be defined
as the fixed address or an unused address without restrictions.
Table 3.2.8 (a) Key-operated switch and LED signal addresses

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Xn KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0
Xn+1
Xn+2 KST KA3 KA2 KA1 KA0
Ym LD7 LD6 LD5 LD4 LD3 LD2 LD1 LD0
Table 3.2.8 (b) Key-operated switch and LED signal bit image addresses
(for a compact operator's panel)
KEY/LED #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Rk/Rl F3 F2 F1 D1 C1 B1 A1
Rk+1/Rl+1 F4 D2 C2 B2 A2
Rk+2/Rl+2 D4 D3 C4 C3 B4 B3 A4 A3
Rk+3/Rl+3 F6 F5 D5 C5 B5 A5
Rk+4/Rl+4 F8 D6 C6 B6 A6
Rk+5/Rl+5 D8 C8 B8 A8 A7
Rk+6/Rl+6 F9 D9 C9 B9 A9
Rk+7/Rl+7 F10 D10 C10 B10 A10
- 172 -
B-63983EN/02 3.I/O LINK
Table 3.2.8 (c) Key-operated switch and LED signal bit image addresses
(for a full-keyboard operator's panel)
KEY/LED #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Rk/Rl E1 C1 A1 E6 D6 C6 B6 A6
Rk+1/Rl+1 E2 C2 A2 E7 D7 C7 B7 A7
Rk+2/Rl+2 E3 C3 A3 E8 D8 C8 B8 A8
Rk+3/Rl+3 E5 C4 A4 E9 D9 C9 B9 A9
Rk+4/Rl+4 D2 C5 A5 E10 D10 C10 B10 A10
Rk+5/Rl+5 D4 D5 B2 E11 D11 C11 B11 A11
Rk+6/Rl+6 D1 B1 B4 E12 D12 C12 B12 A12
Rk+7/Rl+7 D3 B3 B5 E13 D13 C13 B13 A13
Setting addresses
Use the system parameter screen to set key-operated switch and LED
signal addresses and bit image addresses.
For details of screen operations, see Section 9.8 described later. For
details of parameters to be set, see Section 2.4 described earlier.
The following simply describes how values set on the system
parameter screen are set at addresses shown in Tables 3.2.8 (a), (b),
and (c).
Example:
On the system parameter screen, specify that the FS0 operator's panel
is to be used. Then, set the start key-operated switch address for "DI
address", start LED signal address for "DO address", start key-
operated switch bit image address for "key input image address", and
start LED signal bit image address for "LED output image address".
When the following values are set:
DI address: X0
DO address: Y0
Key input image address: R900
LED output image address: R910
- 173 -
3.I/O LINK B-63983EN/02
The addresses shown in Tables 3.2.8 (a), (b), and (c) are set to the
following PMC addresses:
Xn ® X1000
Xn+1 ® X0001
Xn+2 ® X0002
Ym ® Y1000
Rk / Rl ® R0900 / R0910
Rk+1 / Rl+1 ® R0901 / R0911
Rk+2 / Rl+2 ® R0902 / R0912
Rk+3 / Rl+3 ® R0903 / R0913
Rk+4 / Rl+4 ® R0904 / R0914
Rk+5 / Rl+5 ® R0905 / R0915
Rk+6 / Rl+6 ® R0906 / R0916
Rk+7 / Rl+7 ® R0907 / R0917
- 174 -
B-63983EN/02 3.I/O LINK
3.3 SELECTABLE I/O LINK ASSIGNMENT FUNCTION
3.3.1 Outline
This function enables the common use of a sequence program for

several machines which have different I/O device configuration with
each other, by setting the parameter to enable/disable each group in
I/O link assignment data.
Machine A Machine B
I/O devices I/O devices
CNC Power Connection CNC Power I/O

Mate Unit Mate Unit
I/O link assignment data I/O link assignment data

X0 0.0.1 FS08A (Power Mate) X0 0.0.1 FS08A (Power Mate)
X8 1.0.1 OC02I (Connection Unit) X24 1.0.1 I D32E (I/O Unit)
The I/O link assignment data of both the

machine A and the machine B are merged.
Off line programmer
I/O link assignment data
X0 0.0.1 FS08A (Power Mate)
X8 1.0.1 OC02I (Connection Unit)
X24 2.0.1 ID32E (I/O Unit)
Make ROM format file with I/O link assignment data that is used in both the
machine A and the machine B.
A sequence program is sent to CNC.

CNC
Set effective I/O groups on parameter.
Power Mate Enable Power Mate Enable

Connection Unit Enable Connection Unit Disable
I/O Unit Disable I/O Unit Enable
Machine A: I/O devices Machine B: I/O devices

Mate Unit Mate Unit
- 175 -
3.I/O LINK B-63983EN/02
The I/O devices that are used in all machines can be set as basic part
of configuration that is always effective.
Basic part
Machine A: I/O devices Machine B: I/O devices

Mate Unit Mate Unit
The I/O link assignment data of the

machine A and the machine B are merged.
Off line programmer

X0 0.0.1 FS08A (Power Mate) Basic part (always connected)
X8 1.0.1 OC02I (Connection Unit) Optional group by parameter
X24 2.0.1 ID32E (I/O Unit) Optional group by parameter
Determine the basic part and the optional part of I/O link assignment data.
The sequence program is sent to CNC

CNC
Set effective I/O group on parameter.
Power Mate Basic Power Mate Basic

Connection Unit Enable Connection Unit Disable
I/O Unit Disable I/O Unit Enable
Machine A : I/O devices Machine B : I/O devices

Mate Unit Mate Unit
NOTE
When you set a basic part, you have to assign
devices of basic part continuously from group 0.
And the basic part is connected with the top of the
link.
- 176 -
B-63983EN/02 3.I/O LINK
Basic part Optional part
Power Connection I/O

CNC OK
Mate Unit Unit
CNC Power Connection I/O NG

Mate Unit Unit
Optional part
Basic part
This function requires setting the following parameters. These

parameters can be set for each channel. For details of each parameter,
see Sections 2.4 and 9.5.
(1) ENABLE SELECTION:

Enables/Disables this function in the system parameter.
(2) BASIC GROUP COUNT:
Sets the counts of group in basic part in the system parameter.
(This part must be assigned continuously from group 0.) The
basic groups in I/O link assignment data are always effective on
all machine configurations.
(3) EFFECTIVE GROUP SELECTION:
Sets the group of optional I/O device that is connected with each
machine in the setting parameter. This parameter doesn't affect
the basic part.
NOTE
The use of the "I/O Link point expansion option" for
each of channels 2 to 4 enables this function for the
relevant channel.
- 177 -
3.I/O LINK B-63983EN/02
3.3.2 Example
There are three machines which have different configurations of I/O

devices, each other.
· Configuration A
A machine which has a distribution I/O machine operator's panel
and a connection panel I/O connected with channel 1 of NC.
Channel 1
CNC Distribution I/O machine Connection panel I/O

operator's panel
Group 0 Group 1
Channel 2
No connection
· Configuration B
A machine which has a distribution I/O machine operator's panel
and a Power Mate connected with channel 1 of NC.
Channel 1
CNC Distribution I/O machine Power Mate

operator's panel
Group 0 Group 1
Channel 2
No connection
- 178 -
B-63983EN/02 3.I/O LINK
· Configuration C
A machine which has the configuration A on channel 1 and two
beta amplifiers on channel 2.
Channel 1
CNC Distribution I/O machine Connection panel I/O

operator's panel
Group 0 Group 1
Channel 2
CNC Beta amp. Beta amp.
Group 0 Group 1
These machines can use a common sequence program which has I/O
link assignment data that includes all I/O device configurations. The
contents of parameters for each I/O device configuration are as shown
below.
(1) The contents of I/O link assignment data in sequence program

Channel 1
Address Group Base Slot Name I/O device
X0000 0 0 1 CM12I Distribution I/O machine
operator’s panel
: : : : : :
X0020 1 0 1 CM03I Connection panel I/O
: : : : : :
X0030 2 0 1 FS08A Power Mate
: : : : : :
Channel 2
X0200 0 0 1 OC02I Beta amp.
: : : : : :
: : : : : :
- 179 -
3.I/O LINK B-63983EN/02
(2) The contents of parameter
· Configuration A
· System parameter
X0000/Y0000
ENABLE SELECTION = YES
BASIC GROUP COUNT = 1
X0200/Y0200
· Setting parameter
Group NO.: 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07
X0000/Y0000 * 1 0 0 0 0 0 0
08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Group NO.: 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07
X0200/Y0200 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
· Configuration B
· System parameter
X0000/Y0000
X0200/Y0200
Group NO.: 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07
X0000/Y0000 * 0 1 0 0 0 0 0
08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Group NO.: 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07
X0200/Y0200 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
- 180 -
B-63983EN/02 3.I/O LINK
· Configuration C
· System parameter
X0000/Y0000
X0200/Y0200
Group NO.: 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07
X0000/Y0000 * 1 0 0 0 0 0 0
08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Group NO.: 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07
X0200/Y0200 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0
08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
(3) The actual contents of I/O link assignment data modified by the
parameter
· Configuration A
Channel 1
operator’s panel
: : : : : :
: : : : : :
Channel 2
No connection
· Configuration B
Channel 1
operator’s panel
: : : : : :
X0030 1 0 1 FS08A Power Mate
: : : : : :
Channel 2
No connection
- 181 -
3.I/O LINK B-63983EN/02
· Configuration C
Channel 1
operator’s panel
: : : : : :
: : : : : :
Channel 2
: : : : : :
: : : : : :
- 182 -
B-63983EN/02 3.I/O LINK
3.3.3 Notes
(1) If PMC-parameters are cleared, cycling the power of CNC links

only the basic part.
(2) After selecting the assignment data, the I/O devices are linked
with shifted group number of effective I/O link assignment data.
You can check the actual result of connection using the I/O Link
connection display screen.
Before selection After selection
Group 0 Effective Group 0
Group 1 Not effective Group 1
Group 2 Effective Group 2
Group 3 Not effective
Group 4 Effective
(3) You can not exchange the order of the I/O group number.
WARNING
1 If the machine is linked again with incorrect setting
of I/O link assignment parameters, the machine may
perform unexpected operation. If you want to have
the machine linked with I/O devices under the
selected I/O link assignment data, you have to turn
off and on power after the confirmation of the correct
connection of the I/O devices.
2 To prevent any operator error caused in a case as
described in "WARNING 1" above, it is
recommended that the "I/O Link connection check
function" be enabled. For details, see Section 3.4.
- 183 -
3.I/O LINK B-63983EN/02
3.4 I/O LINK CONNECTION CHECK FUNCTION
The I/O Link connection check function always checks whether the
number of I/O Link groups defined in a sequence program is the same
as that of actually connected groups. When the selectable I/O Link
assignment function is used, the I/O Link connection check function
compares the number of selected groups with that of connected groups.
If these numbers of groups do not match, the PMC alarm "ER97 IO
LINK FAILURE (CHx yyGROUP)" is issued. For action to be taken,
see Section 11.1.
NOTE
1 All I/O devices connected to the channel in which
this alarm occurs are not linked.
2 The ladder program is executed regardless of
whether this alarm occurs.
The execution of this function can be controlled using keep relay

K906.2.
K906.2
0: Enables the I/O Link connection check function. (Initial value)
1: Disables the I/O Link connection check function.
CAUTION
If I/O devices are linked in the status in which an I/O
device error or I/O device connection error occurs or
the setting of an I/O device is changed due to an
unintentional operation, the machine may not operate
normally. This function can always be operated to
detect an I/O device error at power-on. To
troubleshoot problems with I/O devices easily, it is
recommended that keep relay K906.2 be set to the
initial value (0).
- 184 -
B-63983EN/02 4.LADDER LANGUAGE
4 LADDER LANGUAGE
- 185 -
4.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/02
4.1 BASIC INSTRUCTIONS

Designing a sequence program entails drawing a ladder diagram.
Draw a ladder diagram by using relay contact symbols as well as
symbols representing the functional instructions described later. The
logic laid out in the ladder diagram is input to the programmer as a
sequence program.
You can input a sequence program to the programmer in two ways -
the relay symbol input method whereby relay contact symbols and
functional instruction symbols drawn in the ladder diagram are used as
they are (−−, −/−, −¡−, etc.) and the mnemonic format input
method that uses the mnemonic language (PMC instructions such as
RD, AND, and OR).
The relay symbol input method allows the ladder diagram format to be
used as it is, thus letting you input a sequence program in an intuitive,
easy-to-understand manner. You will virtually have no trouble
creating a program even if you have little or no knowledge of the
PMC instructions (basic instructions such as RD, AND, and OR).
In fact, however, the content of a sequence program that is input using
the relay symbol input method is internally converted to instructions
that are equivalent to the corresponding PMC instructions. Also, you
need to fully understand the functionalities of the functional
instructions that are described later. It is therefore necessary for you
to carefully read the descriptions of the basic and functional
instructions that are given later in this manual.
For information about how to input PMC instructions to the
programmer using relay and other symbols, see Chapter 8.
When reading the descriptions of the PMC instructions, keep the
following in mind.
(1) Signal addresses

An address is assigned to every relay coil and contact - that is,
every signal - drawn in a ladder diagram (see Fig. 4.1 (a)). An
address consists of an address number and a bit number. A zero
at the beginning of an address may be omitted. For detailed
information about addresses, see Section 2.2.
Signal name Relay name
RO
A B
X8.1 R12.6
C R9.0
Y20.4 Bit number
Address number
Fig. 4.1 (a) Signal addresses
- 186 -
(2) Types of instruction

There are two types of PMC instruction - basic instructions and
functional instructions.
(a) Basic instructions
The basic instructions are most frequently used in designing
a sequence program. There are 14 instructions, including
AND and OR, each of which performs a one-bit operation.
(b) Functional instructions
The functional instructions are intended to make it easy to
program those machine operations that are difficult to code
with the basic instructions alone. For the types of
functional instructions, see Subsection 2.1.6.
(3) Storage of logical operation results
There is a register that stores the interim results of logical
operations during the execution of a sequence program.
This register consists of a total of nine bits, which is divided into
a one-bit segment and an eight-bit segment as shown in Fig. 4.1
(b).
Contains the interim

Stack register result of the logical
(Stores the interim results of previous operations temporarily.) operation currently
executed.
ST8 ST7 ST6 ST5 ST4 ST3 ST2 ST1 ST0
Fig. 4.1 (b) Structure of the register storing the results

of logical operations
When an instruction (such as RD.STK) that temporarily stores

the interim result of a logical operation is executed, the current
content of the register is shifted to the left and the interim logical
operation result is stacked in the register, as shown in the above
figure. Conversely, when an instruction (such as AND.STK) that
retrieves a stacked signal is executed, the register content is
shifted to the right and the signal is retrieved. The last stacked
signal is retrieved first. For information about the actual uses
and operations of these instructions, see the relevant descriptions
in this manual.
- 187 -
4.1.1 Details of the Basic Instructions

Table 4.1.1 lists the types of the basic instructions and explains the
processing they perform.
The difference between the two types of formats shown under
Instruction is described below.
Mnemonic format:
The instructions are displayed in this format when you edit or
print a ladder program that has been converted to the mnemonic
format with FANUC LADDER-III, by using a commercially
available text editor.
Mnemonic format (abbreviated):
These are the abbreviated forms of instructions that you can use
when editing a ladder program that has been converted to the
mnemonic format with FANUC LADDER-III, by using a
commercially available text editor. If you input a file in this
abbreviated format and convert it again to the ladder diagram
format with FANUC LADDER-III, the code in the file can still
be recognized as being written in the valid mnemonic format.
Detailed explanations of the individual basic instructions follow.
Table 4.1.1
Instruction
Mnemonic Mnemonic
No. Processing
format format
(abbreviated)
1 RD R Reads the status of the specified signal and sets it in the ST0 bit.
2 RD.NOT RN Reads and reverses the logical status of the specified signal and sets it in the ST0
bit.
3 WRT W Outputs the logical operation result (the status of the ST0 bit) to the specified
address.
4 WRT.NOT WN Reverses and outputs the logical operation result (the status of the ST0 bit) to the
specified address.
5 AND A Produces a logical product.
6 AND.NOT AN Reverses the logical status of the specified signal and produces a logical product.
7 OR O Produces a logical sum.
8 OR.NOT ON Reverses the logical status of the specified signal and produces a logical sum.
9 RD.STK RS Shifts the register content one bit to the left and sets the status of the signal at the
specified address in the ST0 bit.
10 RD.NOT.STK RNS Shifts the register content one bit to the left, reads and reverses the logical status
of the signal at the specified address, and sets it in the ST0 bit.
11 AND.STK AS Sets the logical product of the ST0 and ST1 bits in the ST1 bit and shifts the
register content one bit to the right.
12 OR.STK OS Sets the logical sum of the ST0 and ST1 bits in the ST1 bit and shifts the register
content one bit to the right.
13 SET SET Finds the logical sum of the ST0 bit and the status of the signal at the specified
address and outputs it to the specified address.
14 RST RST Finds the logical product of the reversed status of the ST0 bit and the status of the
signal at the specified address and outputs it to the specified address.
- 188 -
4.1.2 RD Instruction
(1) Format
W1
A B C
X10.1 X2.0 R2.1 R200.0
RD W2
D G
instruction
X5.1 R5.4
R200.1
E
Y5.2
F
Y5.3
Fig. 4.1.2
(Address)
RD .
Bit number
Address number
(2) Use this instruction to start coding from contact A (−−). For
examples of how the RD instruction is used, see the ladder
diagram shown in Fig. 4.1.2 and the input example in the
mnemonic format given in Table 4.1.2.
(3) The instruction reads the status (0 or 1) of the signal at the
specified address and sets it in the ST0 bit.
(4) The signal (contact) to be read by the RD instruction may be any
signal (contact) that is input as a logical condition of a coil
(output).
Table 4.1.2
Mnemonic format Status of operation result
Step Address
Instruction Bit No. Remarks ST2 ST1 ST0
number No.
1 RD X10 .1 A A
2 AND X2 .0 B A⋅B
3 AND.NOT R2 .1 C A⋅B⋅C
4 WRT R200 .0 W1 output A⋅B⋅C
5 RD X5 .1 D D
6 OR.NOT Y5 .2 E D+E
7 OR Y5 .3 F D+E+F
8 AND R5 .4 G (D + E + F)⋅G
9 WRT R200 .1 W2 output (D + E + F)⋅G
- 189 -
4.1.3 RD.NOT Instruction

(1) Format
A B C W1
R1.1 F2.2 F3.3 R210.1

RD.NOT??
RD.NOT
instruction D G W2
G5.1 R10.5
R210.2
E
X4.2
F
Y10.7
Fig. 4.1.3
(Address)
RD.NOT .
Bit number
Address number
(2) Use this instruction to start coding from contact B (−/−). For
examples of how the RD.NOT instruction is used, see the ladder
diagram shown in Fig. 4.1.3 and the input example in the
mnemonic format given in Table 4.1.3.
(3) The instruction reads and reverses the logical status of the signal
at the specified address and sets it in the ST0 bit.
(4) The signal (contact) to be read by the RD.NOT instruction may
be any contact B that is input as a logical condition of a coil.
Table 4.1.3
Step Address
number No.
1 RD.NOT R1 .1 A A
2 AND.NOT F2 .2 B A⋅B
3 AND.NOT F3 .3 C A⋅B⋅C
5 RD.NOT G5 .1 D D
6 OR.NOT X4 .2 E D+E
7 OR Y10 .7 F D+E+F
8 AND R10 .5 G (D + E + F)⋅G
- 190 -
4.1.4 WRT Instruction

(1) Format
A C W1
R220.1 G2.2
Y11.1
B
W2
WRT
X4.2 Y14.6 instruction
Fig. 4.1.4
(Address)
WRT .
Bit number
Address number
(2) The WRT instruction outputs the result of the logical operation,
namely the status of the ST0 bit (0 or 1), to the specified address.
(3) The instruction can also output a logical operation result to two
or more addresses simultaneously. In that case, use the WRT
instruction as shown in Fig. 4.1.4 and Table 4.1.4.
Table 4.1.4
Step Address
number No.
1 RD R220 .1 A A
2 OR X4 .2 B A+B
3 AND G2 .2 C (A + B)⋅C
4 WRT Y11 .1 W1 output (A + B)⋅C
CAUTION
In each WRT,WRT.NOT instruction, specify different
address. Double coil, which means a coil with an
address is often used in one ladder program, may
occur trobles of the execution timing in the sequence
program. Don't use "double coil".
- 191 -
4.1.5 WRT.NOT Instruction

(1) Format
A C
W1
R220.1 G2.2
Y11.1
B
W2
X4.2 Y14.6
WRT.NOT instruction
Fig. 4.1.5
(Address)
WRT.NOT .
Bit number
Address number
(2) The WRT.NOT instruction reverses and outputs the result of the
logical operation, namely the status of the ST0 bit, to the
specified address. Fig. 4.1.5 and Table 4.1.5 show examples of
how the WRT.NOT instruction is used.
Table 4.1.5
Step Address
number No.
1 RD R220 .1 A A
2 OR X4 .2 B A+B
3 AND G2 .2 C (A + B)⋅C
5 WRT.NOT Y14 .6 W2 output (A + B)⋅C
CAUTION
In each WRT,WRT.NOT instruction, specify different
address. Double coil, which means a coil with an
address is often used in one ladder program, may
occur trobles of the execution timing in the sequence
program. Don't use "double coil".
- 192 -
4.1.6 AND Instruction

(1) Format
A B C W1
X10.1 X2.0 R2.1 R200.0
D G W2
X5.1 R5.4
R200.1
E
Y5.2
F
AND
AND??
instruction
Y5.3
Fig. 4.1.6
(Address)
AND .
Bit number
Address number
(2) This instruction produces a logical product.

(3) For examples of how the AND instruction is used, see Fig. 4.1.6
and Table 4.1.6.
Table 4.1.6
Step Address
number No.
1 RD X10 .1 A A
2 AND X2 .0 B A⋅B
5 RD X5 .1 D D
7 OR Y5 .3 F D+E+F
8 AND R5 .4 G (D + E + F)⋅G
- 193 -
4.1.7 AND.NOT Instruction

(1) Format
A B C W1
X10.1 X2.0 R2.1 R200.0
D G W2
X5.1 R5.4
R200.1
E
AND.NOT
instruction
Y5.2
F
Y5.3
Fig. 4.1.7
(Address)
AND.NOT .
Bit number
Address number
(2) This instruction reverses the status of the signal at the specified
address and produces a logical product.
(3) For examples of how the AND.NOT instruction is used, see Fig.
4.1.7 and Table 4.1.7.
Table 4.1.7
Step Address
number No.
1 RD X10 .1 A A
2 AND X2 .0 B A⋅B
5 RD X5 .1 D D
7 OR Y5 .3 F D+E+F
8 AND R5 .4 G (D + E + F)⋅G
- 194 -
4.1.8 OR Instruction
(1) Format
A B C W1
X10.1 X2.0 R2.1 R200.0
D G W2
X5.1 R5.4
R200.1
E
Y5.2
F
Y5.3 OR instruction
Fig. 4.1.8
(Address)
OR .
Bit number
Address number
(2) This instruction produces a logical sum.

(3) For examples of how the OR instruction is used, see Fig. 4.1.8
and Table 4.1.8.
Table 4.1.8
Step Address
number No.
1 RD X10 .1 A A
2 AND X2 .0 B A⋅B
5 RD X5 .1 D D
7 OR Y5 .3 F D+E+F
8 AND R5 .4 G (D + E + F)⋅G
- 195 -
4.1.9 OR.NOT Instruction

(1) Format
A B C W1
X10.1 X2.0 R2.1 R200.0
D G W2
X5.1 R5.4
R200.1
E
Y5.2 OR.NOT instruction

F
Y5.3
Fig. 4.1.9
(Address)
OR.NOT .
Bit number
Address number
(2) This instruction reverses the status of the signal at the specified
address and produces a logical sum.
(3) For examples of how the OR.NOT instruction is used, see Fig.
4.1.9 and Table 4.1.9.
Table 4.1.9
Step Address
number No.
1 RD X10 .1 A A
2 AND X2 .0 B A⋅B
5 RD X5 .1 D D
7 OR Y5 .3 F D+E+F
8 AND R5 .4 G (D + E + F)⋅G
- 196 -
4.1.10 RD.STK Instruction

(1) Format
A C W1
X1.1 Y1.2 Y15.0

B D
X1.3 Y1.4
E F
R2.1 R3.5
RD.STK instruction
Fig. 4.1.10
(Address)
RD.STK .
Bit number
Address number
(2) The RD.STK instruction stacks the interim result of a logical

operation. Use this instruction when the signal you specify is
contact A (−−). After shifting the register content one bit to
the left, the instruction sets the status of the signal at the
specified address in the ST0 bit.
(3) For examples of how the RD.STK instruction is used, see Fig.
4.1.10 and Table 4.1.10.
Table 4.1.10
Step Address
number No.
1 RD X1 .1 A A
2 AND Y1 .2 C A⋅C
3 RD.STK X1 .3 B A⋅C B
4 AND Y1 .4 D A⋅C B⋅D
5 OR.STK A⋅C + B⋅D
6 RD.STK R2 .1 E A⋅C + B⋅D E
7 AND R3 .5 F A⋅C + B⋅D E⋅F
8 OR.STK A⋅C + B⋅D + E⋅F
9 WRT Y15 .0 W1 output A⋅C + B⋅D + E⋅F
- 197 -
4.1.11 RD.NOT.STK Instruction

(1) Format
A B E F W1
RD.NOT.STK instruction
X1.0 X1.1 Y1.2 Y1.3 Y15.7

C D G H
R1.4 R1.5 X1.6 Y1.7
Fig. 4.1.11
(Address)
RD.NOT.STK .
Bit number
Address number
(2) The RD.NOT.STK instruction stacks the interim result of a

logical operation. Use this instruction when the signal you
specify is contact B (−/−). After shifting the register content
one bit to the left, the instruction reverses the status of the signal
at the specified address and sets it in the ST0 bit.
(3) For examples of how the RD.NOT.STK instruction is used, see
Fig. 4.1.11 and Table 4.1.11.
Table 4.1.11
Step Address
number No.
1 RD X1 .0 A A
2 AND.NOT X1 .1 B A⋅B
3 RD.NOT.STK R1 .4 C A⋅B C
4 AND.NOT R1 .5 D A⋅B C⋅D
5 OR.STK A⋅B + C⋅D
6 RD.STK Y1 .2 E A⋅B + C⋅D E
7 AND Y1 .3 F A⋅B + C⋅D E⋅F
8 RD.STK Y1 .6 G A⋅B + C⋅D E⋅F G
9 AND.NOT Y1 .7 H A⋅B + C⋅D E⋅F G⋅H
10 OR.STK A⋅B + C⋅D E⋅F + G⋅H
11 AND.STK (A⋅B + C⋅D)⋅(E⋅F + G⋅H)
12 WRT Y15 .7 W1 output (A⋅B + C⋅D)⋅(E⋅F + G⋅H)
- 198 -
4.1.12 AND.STK Instruction

(1) Format
A B E F W1
X1.0 X1.1 Y1.2 Y1.3 Y15.7

C D G H
AND.STK instruction
R1.4 R1.5 X1.6 Y1.7
Fig. 4.1.12 (a)
AND.STK
(2) The AND.STK instruction finds the logical product of the

operation result stored in the ST0 bit and that stored in the ST1
bit and sets it in the ST1 bit. The instruction then shifts the
register content one bit to the right and puts the resulting logical
product into the ST0 bit. Fig. 4.1.12 (b) shows a detailed image
of what is shown in Fig. 4.1.12 (a).
ST1 ST0
A B E F
W1
C D G H
AND.STK instruction
Fig. 4.1.12 (b)
- 199 -
(3) For examples of how the AND.STK instruction is used, see Fig.
4.1.12 (a) and Table 4.1.12.
Table 4.1.12
Step Address
number No.
1 RD X1 .0 A A
2 AND.NOT X1 .1 B A⋅B
3 RD.NOT.STK R1 .4 C A⋅B C
4 AND.NOT R1 .5 D A⋅B C⋅D
5 OR.STK A⋅B + C⋅D
6 RD.STK Y1 .2 E A⋅B + C⋅D E
7 AND Y1 .3 F A⋅B + C⋅D E⋅F
8 RD.STK Y1 .6 G A⋅B + C⋅D E⋅F G
9 AND.NOT Y1 .7 H A⋅B + C⋅D E⋅F G⋅H
10 OR.STK A⋅B + C⋅D E⋅F + G⋅H
11 AND.STK (A⋅B + C⋅D)⋅(E⋅F + G⋅H)
12 WRT Y15 .7 W1 output (A⋅B + C⋅D)⋅(E⋅F + G⋅H)
- 200 -
4.1.13 OR.STK Instruction

(1) Format
A C W1
X1.1 Y1.2 Y15.0

B D
X1.3 Y1.4
E F
R2.1 R3.5
OR.STK instruction
RD.STK??
Fig. 4.1.13 (a)
OR.STK
(2) The OR.STK instruction finds the logical sum of the operation
result stored in the ST0 bit and that stored in the ST1 bit and sets
it in the ST1 bit. The instruction then shifts the register content
one bit to the right and puts the resulting logical sum into the
ST0 bit. Fig. 4.1.13 (b) shows a detailed image of what is shown
in Fig. 4.1.13 (a).
ST1
A C
ST0
B D
W1
E F
OR.STK instruction
OR.STK??
Fig. 4.1.13 (b)
- 201 -
(3) For examples of how the OR.STK instruction is used, see Fig.
4.1.13 (a) and Table 4.1.13.
Table 4.1.13
Step Address
number No.
1 RD X1 .1 A A
2 AND Y1 .2 C A⋅C
3 RD.STK X1 .3 B A⋅C B
4 AND Y1 .4 D A⋅C B⋅D
5 OR.STK A⋅C + B⋅D
6 RD.STK R2 .1 E A⋅C + B⋅D E
7 AND R3 .5 F A⋅C + B⋅D E⋅F
8 OR.STK A⋅C + B⋅D + E⋅F
9 WRT Y15 .0 W1 output A⋅C + B⋅D + E⋅F
CAUTION
In the example shown in Table 4.1.13, the OR.STK
instruction is specified at step number 5. You will
obtain the same result if you place the OR.STK
instruction between step numbers 7 and 8. However,
coding similar instructions, such as OR.STK and
AND.STK, successively makes you prone to errors.
It is therefore recommended to code your program as
shown in Table 4.1.13.
- 202 -
4.1.14 SET Instruction

(1) Format
A C
(S)
R0.0 Y0.0
X0.0
SET instruction
Fig. 4.1.14
(Address)
SET .
Bit number
Address number
(2) This instruction keeps the status of the specified address to ON.
It finds the logical sum of the operation result (ST0) and the
specified address and outputs it to the specified address.
(3) For examples of how the SET instruction is used, see Fig. 4.1.14
and Table 4.1.14.
Table 4.1.14
Step Address
number No.
1 RD R0 .0 A A
2 OR X0 .0 B A+B
3 SET Y0 .0 Y0.0 output (A + B) + C
(4) Caution
• Relationship with COM and COME
When placed between the COM and COME instructions, the
SET instruction behaves as follows:
When the COM condition is set to ON (ACT = 1), the SET
instruction runs normally.
When the COM condition is set to OFF (ACT = 0), the SET
instruction does not run.
- 203 -
4.1.15 RST Instruction

(1) Format
A C
(R)
R0.0 Y0.0
X0.0
RST instruction
Fig. 4.1.15
(Address)
RST .
Bit number
Address number
(2) This instruction keeps the status of the specified address to OFF.
It finds the logical product of the operation result (ST0) and the
specified reversed address and outputs it to the specified address.
(3) For examples of how the RST instruction is used, see Fig. 4.1.15
and Table 4.1.15.
Table 4.1.15
Step Address
number No.
1 RD R0 .0 A A
2 OR X0 .0 B A+B
3 RST Y0 .0 Y0.0 output (A + B)⋅C
(4) Caution
• Relationship with COM and COME
When placed between the COM and COME instructions, the
RST instruction behaves as follows:
When the COM condition is set to ON (ACT = 1), the RST
instruction runs normally.
When the COM condition is set to OFF (ACT = 0), the RST
instruction does not run.
- 204 -
4.2 FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS

When creating a sequence program, you may find it difficult to code
certain types of functions with the basic instructions alone that
perform a one-bit logical operation each. One example is a shortcut
control function for a rotating part that involves numeric and other
complex operations. To facilitate the programming of these functions
that are difficult to code with the basic instructions alone, a set of
functional instructions are available.
This section describes how to use each functional instruction. For a
list of the functional instructions and information about their
specifications, see Subsection 2.1.6.
4.2.1 Format of the Functional Instructions

Before detailed descriptions of the individual functional instructions
are given, this subsection explains the format of the functional
instructions and their general specifications. Be sure to read this
subsection because it contains important information such as the rules
regarding the use of the functional instructions.
(1) Format of the functional instructions

Since the functional instructions cannot be represented using
relay symbols, they need to be represented in the format shown
in Fig. 4.2.1 (a). The structure of a functional instruction
consists of control conditions, an instruction, parameters, an
output coil (W1), a functional instruction operation result register
(R9000 to R9005).
- 205 -
Control conditions Parameters

A B
(3)
L0 L1 Instruction Parameter 1
C D
(2) Parameter 2
W1
R 2.4 R 3.1 Parameter 3
RST
(1) Parameter 4
R 10.1
R 5.7
ACT
(0)
(Note 1)
R 7.1
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
R9000
R9001
R9002
R9003
R9004
R9005
Fig. 4.2.1 (a) Structure of a functional instruction
- 206 -
Table 4.2.1 (a) Coding format of the functional instructions

Step Address
Instruction Bit No. Remarks ST3 ST2 ST1 ST0
number No.
1 RD R1 . 0 A A
2 AND R1 . 1 B A⋅B
3 RD.STK R2 . 4 C A⋅B C
4 AND.NOT R3 . 1 D A⋅B C⋅D
5 RD.STK R5 . 7 RST A⋅B C⋅D RST
6 RD.STK R7 . 1 ACT A⋅B A⋅D RST ACT
7 SUB ¡¡ Instruction A⋅B A⋅D RST ACT
8 (PRM) (Note 2) ¡¡¡¡ Parameter 1 A⋅B A⋅D RST ACT
9 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Parameter 2 A⋅B A⋅D RST ACT
12 WRT R10 . 1 W1 output A⋅B A⋅D RST W1
NOTE
1 The number within each pair of parentheses shown
for the control conditions represents the position in
the register where the result is to be stored.
2 The term (PRM) in the Instruction fields for step
numbers 8 to 11 means a parameter. You do not
need to input the term (PRM); just enter an address
or numeric data.
(2) Control conditions

The number of control conditions and the meanings of those
conditions differ for each functional instruction.
The control conditions are stored in the register, as shown in
Table 4.2.1 (a). Once set, therefore, the sequence of the control
conditions is fixed. You cannot change the sequence or omit any
of the control conditions.
CAUTION
All functional instructions give precedence to the
RST processing when they include RST in their
control conditions. Therefore, when RST = 1, the
functional instruction carries out the RST processing
even if ACT = 0.
- 207 -
(3) Instruction
For the types of functional instructions, see Subsection 2.1.6.
To input the instruction with relay symbols, use the soft keys of
the programmer.
(4) Parameters
Unlike the basic instructions, the functional instructions deal
with numeric values. Therefore, reference data values and
addresses storing data may be entered in their parameters. The
number of parameters and the meanings of those parameters
differ for each functional instruction.
(5) W1
W1 is the destination to which the functional instruction outputs
its operation result when that result can be represented by a one-
bit value, 0 or 1. The designer can freely decide the address of
W1. The meaning of W1 differs for each functional instruction.
Some functional instructions do not have the W1 output.
(6) Data to be processed
The data processed by the functional instructions is in two
formats - binary coded decimal (BCD) format and binary format.
Formerly, the PMC system handled numeric data mainly in the
BCD format. However, dealing with all numeric data in the
binary format is now recommended for the following reasons.
(a) The numeric data exchanged between NC and PMC (M, S,
T, and B codes) is in the binary format.
(b) The CPU carries out all numeric data operations in the
binary format. Therefore, if data is provided in the binary
format, the conversion between the BCD and binary formats
becomes unnecessary, thus speeding up the PMC processing.
(c) The use of binary format data allows you to handle a wider
range of numeric data while at the same time making it
easier to deal with negative numeric data. This leads to an
enhanced operation capability. In principle, binary numeric
data is handled in units of one byte (−128 to +127), two
bytes (−32,768 to +32,767), or four bytes (−2,147,483,648
to +2,147,483,647).
(d) When you enter numeric data using the CNC screen keys or
display numeric data on the CNC screen, you will
experience no inconvenience because binary numeric data
values are all set and displayed in the decimal format. It is
just that the data stored in the internal memory is written in
the binary format. You only need to exercise care when the
sequence program references memory. See item (7) for
examples of numeric data. For the reasons mentioned
above, all the functional instructions described in this
manual are designed to deal with binary data and handle
mainly binary data.
- 208 -
(7) Examples of numeric data

(a) BCD format data
Basically, the data processed in the BCD format is handled
in units of one byte (0 to 99), two bytes (0 to 9999), or four
bytes (0 to 99,999,999; for the DCNVB instruction only).
A four-digit BCD data block is stored in two bytes of
consecutive addresses, as in the following example.
(Example) When BCD data 1234 is stored at addresses R250

and R251
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
R250 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0
3 4
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
R251 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0
1 2
In the functional instruction, specify the address having the smaller number, R250.
Note) The low-order digits are stored in the smaller number address.
- 209 -
(b) Binary format data

Basically, the data processed in the binary format is handled
in units of one byte (−128 to +127), two bytes (−32,768 to
+32,767), or four bytes (−2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647).
The data is stored at addresses R200, R201, R202, and
R203, as shown below. Note that negative numbers are set
as two's complements.
One-byte data (−128 to +127) (Example) One-byte data
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
6 5 4 3 2 1
R200 ± 2 2 2 2 2 2 20 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 (+1)
0: Positive
Sign
1: Negative
Two-byte data (−32,768 to +32,767) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 (-1)

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
R200 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 (+127)
R201 ± 214 213 212 211 210 29 28
Four-byte data (−2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647) 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 (-127)

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
7 6 5 4 3 2 1
R200 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 20
R201 215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28
R202 223 222 221 220 219 218 217 216
R203 ± 230 229 228 227 226 225 224
In the functional instruction, specify the address having the

smallest number, R200.
- 210 -
(8) Addresses of numeric data processed by functional instructions

When the numeric data to be processed by a functional
instruction consists of two or four bytes, it is recommended to
specify an even number or a multiple of four as the address of the
numeric data in the relevant parameter of that functional
instruction. Specifying an even-numbered or multiple-of-four
address causes the functional instruction to execute slightly faster.
In the case of a functional instruction that mainly deals with
binary data, such a parameter is marked with an asterisk (*) in
the parameter field of the diagram illustrating the format of the
functional instruction, as shown below.
An even-numbered or multiple-of-four address means that the
letter R is followed by an even number or a multiple of four in
the case of an internal relay, or that the letter D is followed by an
even number or a multiple of four in the case of a data table.
* When the numeric data consists of two or four bytes, specify an even-numbered or multiple-of-four address
for each of those addresses marked with *. Doing so causes the functional instruction to execute faster.
Error output
RST ¡¡¡¡ Format

SUB36 W1
¡¡¡¡ Summand data address *
ADDB
¡¡¡¡ Addend data (address) *
ACT
¡¡¡¡ Addition result output address *
Fig. 4.2.1 (b)
- 211 -
(9) Functional instruction operation result register

(R9000 to R9005) (See Fig. 4.2.1 (c).)
The results of executing functional instructions are set in this
register. The register is shared by all the functional instructions.
Therefore, if you do not reference the register immediately after
executing the target functional instruction, the operation data of
that instruction is erased as a subsequent functional instruction is
executed.
Also note that the operation data of this register cannot be
exchanged between sequence programs of different levels. For
example, when the subtraction instruction (SUBB) is executed in
a first level program and the result of its execution is set in the
register, a second level program cannot reference the set
operation data by reading the register in the R9000 range.
The operation data set in this register can be shared by sequence
programs of the same level and is maintained until immediately
before a functional instruction is executed that sets subsequent
operation data in the register. The operation data to be set in this
register differs for each functional instruction. The sequence
program can read this data but not write to this register.
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
R9000
R9001
R9002
R9003
R9004
R9005
Fig. 4.2.1 (c)
This register consists of six bytes, from R9000 to R9005. A single

block of data can be read from the register in bits or bytes at a time.
To read the data of the first bit of R9000, for example, specify RD
R9000.1.
- 212 -
4.3 TIMER
The following types of timer instruction are available. Use any of
these instructions as appropriate for your purpose.
Instruction Sub Processing

name number
1 TMR 3 Timer processing
2 TMRB 24 Fixed timer processing
3 TMRC 54 Timer processing
- 213 -
4.3.1 TMR (Timer: SUB 3)

This is an on-delay timer.
Since you set the time in nonvolatile memory (T address) using the
timer screen, you can change the set time without changing the ladder
diagram.
The timer number you specify in the parameter is a number displayed
on the timer screen.The data type in this instruction is binary type.
Format
Fig. 4.3.1 (a) shows the ladder format and Table 4.3.1 shows the
mnemonic format.
Timer relay
ACT W1
SUB 3
TMR
¡¡¡ Timer number
Fig. 4.3.1 (a) Format of TMR instruction
Table 4.3.1 Mnemonic of TMR instruction

Mnemonic format Memory status of control
condition
Step Address
number No.
1 RD ¡¡¡¡ .¡ ACT ACT
2 TMR ¡¡¡ Timer number
3 WRT ¡¡¡¡ .¡ Timer relay output W1
In the above mnemonic format, instruction name "TMR" at step

number 2 can be abbreviated as "T".
ACT
W1
T
T indicates the time set in this timer
command.
Fig. 4.3.1 (b) Operation of the timer
Control condition
ACT = 0: Turns off W1.
ACT = 1: Starts the timer.
- 214 -
Parameter
Set the timer number.
WARNING
If the timer number is duplicated, or falls outside the
valid range, the operation will be unpredictable.
Setting timers
The initial value of the timer setting time can be set in steps of 48
msec for timer numbers 1 to 8 and in steps of 8 msec for timer
numbers 9 and later. (For information about the number of timers of
each PMC, see the table below.) The setting time value is rounded
down to a multiple of the unit time.
For example, if 38 msec is set, the remainder 6 (38 = 8 × 4 + 6) is
discarded, and only 32 msec is actually set.
30i/31i/32i-A
Initial number of the timer
1st PMC 2nd PMC 3rd PMC Dual check
setting time
48-msec timer number 1 to 8 1 to 8 1 to 8 1 to 8
8-msec timer number 9 to 250 9 to 40 9 to 40 9 to 40
Timer accuracy
The timer screen allows you to set the accuracy of each timer
individually. The setting time range and error are as shown below.
For detailed information about how to set the timer accuracy, see
Subsection 7.3.1.
Timer type and number Setting time Error

48 msec (1 to 8) (initial value) 48 msec to 1572.8 sec 0 to ±1st level sweep interval (4/8 msec)
8 msec (9 or larger) (initial value) 8 msec to 262.1 sec 0 to ±1st level sweep interval (4/8 msec)
1 msec (1 or larger) 1 msec to 32.7 sec 0 to ±1st level sweep interval (4/8 msec)
10 msec (1 or larger) 10 msec to 327.7 sec 0 to ±1st level sweep interval (4/8 msec)
100 msec (1 or larger) 100 msec to 54.6 min 0 to ±1st level sweep interval (4/8 msec)
1 sec (1 or larger) 1 sec to 546 min 0 to ±1st level sweep interval (4/8 msec)
1 min (1 or larger) 1 min to 546 h 0 to ±1 sec
Error is caused only by operation time of the timer instruction. For

example, when a timer instruction is used in the 2nd level sequence
part, the variation does not include the delay time (Max. 2nd level
sequence one cycle time) until the sequence actuates after the set time
is reached.
Timer relay (W1)
When the time preset is reached with ACT = 1, the timer relay turns
on. The designer can freely decide the address of W1.
- 215 -
4.3.2 TMRB (Fixed Timer: SUB 24)

This timer is used as a fixed on-delay timer.
Time present in this fixed timer is written to the memory together with
the sequence program, so the time once set cannot be changed unless
the whole sequence program is exchanged. The data type in this
instruction is binary type.
Format
mnemonic format.
Timer relay
ACT W1
SUB 24
TMRB
¡¡¡ Timer number
¡¡¡¡ Setting time
Fig. 4.3.2 (a) Format of TMRB instruction
Table 4.3.2 Mnemonic of TMRB instruction

condition
Step Address
number No.
2 SUB 24 TMRB instruction
3 (PRM) ¡¡¡ Timer number
4 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Setting time
ACT
W1
T
command.
Fig. 4.3.2 (b) Timer operation
Control condition
- 216 -
Parameters
Specify the timer number of a fixed timer. The timer numbers and the
setting time range are as shown below.
30i/31i/32i-A
1st PMC 2nd PMC 3rd PMC Dual check
(option) (option) safety PMC(option)
Timer number 1 to 500 1 to 100 1 to 100 1 to 100
Setting time 1 to 32,760,000 1 to 32,760,000 1 to 32,760,000 1 to 32,760,000
(msec) (msec) (msec) (msec)
WARNING
If the same timer number is used more than once or
if a timer number out of the valid range is used,
operation is unpredictable.
The maximum setting time is approximately 546 minutes.
Precision of the timer

Variation in the setting time is between 0 and ±1st level execution
cycle (4/8 msec). The varing time in this timer is caused only the
error occurred when the timer instruction performs operation process.
Error caused by sequence program processing time (time of 1 cycle of
the second level), etc. are not included.
Timer relay (W1)

The output W1 is turned on after certain time preset in the parameter
of this instruction pasts after ACT = 1. The designer can freely decide
the address of W1.
- 217 -
4.3.3 TMRC (Timer: SUB 54)

This is the on-delay timer.
A timer setting time is set at an arbitrary address. There is no limit to
the number of timers as long as memory areas can be allocated for the
timer instruction to use. The data type in this instruction is binary type.
Format
mnemonic format.
Timer relay
ACT W1
SUB 54
TMRC
¡ Timer accuracy number
¡¡¡¡ Timer set time address
¡¡¡¡ Timer register address
Fig. 4.3.3 (a) Format of TMRC instruction
Table 4.3.3 Mnemonic of TMRC instruction

condition
Step Address
number No.
2 SUB 54 TMRC instruction
3 (PRM) ¡ Timer accuracy number
4 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Timer set time address
5 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Timer register address
ACT
W1
T
command.
Fig. 4.3.3 (b) Timer operation
Control condition
- 218 -
Parameters
(a) Timer accuracy
The timer accuracy values, setting time range, and error are as
shown below.
Timer Setting The range of setting time (Note) Margin of error

accuracy number
8 msec 0 8 msec to about 262.1 sec 0 to ±1st level sweep interval (4/8 msec)
48 msec 1 48 msec to about 26.2 min 0 to ±1st level sweep interval (4/8 msec)
1 sec 2 1 sec to about 546 min 0 to ±1st level sweep interval (4/8 msec)
10 sec 3 10 sec to about 91 h 0 to ±1st level sweep interval (4/8 msec)
1 min 4 1 min to about 546 h 0 to ±1 sec
100 msec 7 100 msec to about 54.6 min 0 to ±1st level sweep interval (4/8 msec)
Error exclusively refers to that taking place while the timer

instruction carries out its operation. It does not include, for
example, error that occurs when the timer instruction is used in
the 2nd level sequence program, such as the delay from the
expiry of the timer until the sequence program initiates
processing (time equivalent to one cycle of the 2nd level at
worst).
NOTE
The value range of the setting time is between 0 and
32,767 for all timer accuracies. For example, when
the timer accuracy is 8 msec, the value 0 means 8
msec and the value 32,767 means 262,136 msec.
- 219 -
(b) Timer set time address

Sets the first address of the timer set time field.
The continuous 2-byte memory space is required for the timer set
time field.
The data table (field D) is normally used as this field.
Timer set time + 0

TIME
Timer set time + 1
TIME: Timer set time (1 to 32,767)
The timer setting time is converted to the binary format based on

the timer accuracy (in units of 8 msec, 48 msec, etc.).
The timer setting time is shown as follows:
8 msec..................8 to 262,136 msec
48 msec................48 to 1,572,816 msec
1 sec.....................1 to 32,767 sec
10 sec...................10 to 327,670 sec
1 min....................1 to 32,767 min
1 msec..................1 to 32,767 msec
10 msec................10 to 327,670 msec
100 msec..............100 to 3,276,700 msec
(c) Timer register address

Set the start address of a timer register area.
A timer register area must be allocated to a continuous four-byte
memory area starting from the set address. The user area (R
area) is used as a timer register area. This area should be used by
the PMC system, and therefore should not be used by the
sequence program.
Timer register + 0
Timer register + 1
Timer register
Timer register + 2
Timer register + 3
Timer relay (W1)

The output W1 is turned on when the time specified in the parameter
of this instruction elapses after ACT is set to 1. The designer can
freely decide the address of W1.
- 220 -
4.4 COUNTER
The following types of counter instruction are available. Use any of

name number
1 CTR 5 Counter processing
2 CTRB 56 Fixed counter processing
3 CTRC 55 Counter processing
- 221 -
4.4.1 CTR (Counter: SUB 5)

CTR is used as a counter. Counters are used for various purposes for
NC machine tools.
Numerical data such as preset values and count values can be used
with either BCD format or binary format by a system parameter of
PMC.
WARNING
When a incollect BCD data was set to a BCD type
counter, the movement of CTR cannot be sured.
If changing the counter type, be sure to reconfigure
the preset value and count value.
This counter has the following functions to meet various applications.
(a) Preset counter

Outputs a signal when the preset count is reached. The number
can be preset from the counter screen, or set in the sequence
program.
(b) Ring counter
Upon reaching the preset count, returns to the initial value by
issuing another count signal.
(c) Up/down counter
The count can be either up or down.
(d) Selection of initial value
Selects the initial value as either 0 or 1.
A combination of the preceding functions results in the ring counter

below.
8 1
7 2
6 3
5 4
Presetting : 8
Initial value : 1
Such a counter permits the position of a rotor to be memorized.
- 222 -
Format
mnemonic format.
Countup output
W1
CN0
¡¡¡¡.¡ SUB 5 ¡¡¡¡.¡

UPDOWN ¡¡¡
CTR
Counter
¡¡¡¡.¡ number
RST
¡¡¡¡.¡
ACT
¡¡¡¡.¡
Control condition
Fig. 4.4.1 (a) Format of CTR instruction
Table 4.4.1 Mnemonic of CTR instruction

Mnemonic format Memory status of control condition
Step Address
number No.
1 RD ¡¡¡¡ .¡ CN0 CN0
2 RD. STK ¡¡¡¡ .¡ UPDOWN CN0 UPDOWN
3 RD. STK ¡¡¡¡ .¡ RST CN0 UPDOWN RST
4 RD. STK ¡¡¡¡ .¡ ACT CN0 UPDOWN RST ACT
5 SUB 5 CTR instruction
6 (PRM) ¡¡¡ Counter number
7 WRT ¡¡¡¡ .¡ Countup output W1
Control conditions
(a) Specify the initial value. (CN0)
CN0 = 0: Begins the value of the counter with 0.
0, 1, 2, 3, ....., n.
CN0 = 1: Begins the value of the counter with 1 (0 is not used).
1, 2, 3, ....., n.
(b) Specify up or down counter. (UPDOWM)
UPDOWN = 0:
Up counter. The counter begins with 0 when CN0 = 0;
1 when 1.
UPDOWN = 1:
Down counter. The counter begins with the preset value.
- 223 -
(c) Reset (RST)

RST = 0: Releases reset.
RST = 1: Enables reset.
W1 becomes 0.
The integrated value is reset to the initial value.
CAUTION
Set RST to 1, only when reset is required.
(d) Count signal (ACT)
"1"
"0"
Count Count
0: Counter does not operate. W1 does not change.

ACT
1: Count is made by catching the rise of ACT.
Parameter
(a) Counter number
The numbers that can be used are shown below.
30i/31i/32i-A
Model 1st PMC 2nd PMC 3rd PMC Dual check
Counter number 1 to 100 1 to 20 1 to 20 1 to 20
The preset value and cumulative value that can be set are as
follows:
Binary counter: 0 to 32,767
BCD counter: 0 to 9,999
WARNING
If the counter number is duplicated, or falls outside
the valid range, the operation will be unpredictable.
Countup output (W1)

In case of up counter mode(UPDOWN=0), when the count is up to a
preset value, W1 = 1.
In case of down counter mode(UPDOWN=1) and initial value
0(CN0=0), when the counter reaches 0, W1 is set to 1.
In case of down counter mode (UPDOWN=1) and initial value
1(CN0=1), when the counter reaches 1, W1 is set to 1.
the address of W1 can be determined arbitrarily.
- 224 -
Examples of using the counter

[Example 1]
As a preset counter (See Fig. 4.4.1 (b).)
The number of workpieces to be machined is counted. When the
number reaches the preset count, a signal is output.
• L1 is a circuit to make logic 1.
• Since the count ranges from 0 to 9,999, contact B of L1 is used
for making CN0 = 0.
• Since it is to be up counter, contact B of L1 is used make
UPDOWN = 0.
• The reset signal of the counter uses input signal CRST.M from
the machine tool.
• The count signal is M30X, which was decoded from the NC
output M code. M30X contains contact B of CUP to prevent
counting past the preset value, as long as reset is not enabled
after countup.
L1
L1
R200.1
L1 R200.1
R200.1
L1
(CN0) CUP Countup output
R200.1 SUB 5
L1 Y6.1
(UPDOWN) CTR 0001
R200.1
CRST.M
(RST)
X36.0
CUP M30X
(ACT)
Y6.1 R200.3
Fig. 4.4.1 (b) Ladder diagram for the counter, example 1
- 225 -
[Example 2]
Use of the counter to store the position of a rotor. (See Fig. 4.4.1 (c).)
L1
"1"
R200.1
R200.1
L1
R200.1
L1
(CN0)
R200.1 SUB 5 R200.0
REV
(UPDOWN) CTR 0002
R200.1
L1
(RST)
R200.1
POS
(ACT)
X36.0
Fig. 4.4.1 (c) Ladder diagram for the counter, example 2
3 4
5
2
6
1 7
12 8
11 9
10
Fig. 4.4.1 (d) Indexing for a rotor
Fig. 4.4.1 (c) shows a ladder diagram for a counter to store the
position of a rotor of Fig. 4.4.1 (d).
(1) Control conditions

(a) Count start number
When a 12-angle rotor shown in Fig. 4.4.1 (d) is used, the
count starting number is 1.
Contact A of L1 is used for making CN0 = 1.
- 226 -
(b) Specify up and down

The signal REV changes according to the then direction of
rotation. It becomes 0 for forward rotation and 1 for reverse
rotation. Thus, the counter is an up counter for forward
rotation and a down counter for reverse rotation.
(c) Reset
In this example, since W1 is not used, RST = 0, and contact
B of L1 is used.
(d) Count signal
The count signal POS turns on and off 12 times each time
the rotor rotates once.
(2) Counter number and W1
In this example, the second counter is used. The result of W1 is
not used, but its address must be determined.
(3) Operation
(a) Setting the preset value
Since the rotor to be controlled is 12-angle as shown in Fig.
4.4.1 (d), 12 must be preset in the counter. It is set from the
counter screen.
(b) Setting the current value
When the power is turned on, the position of the rotor must
be equated with the count on the counter. The count is set
via the counter screen. Once a current value is set, then
correct current positions will be loaded to the counter every
time.
(c) The POS signal turns on and off each time the rotor rotates.
The number of times of the POS signal turns on and off is
counted by the counter 2, as below.
1, 2, 3, . . . 11, 12, 1, 2, . . .
for forward rotation
1, 12, 11, . . . 3, 2, 1, 12 . . .
for reverse rotation
- 227 -
4.4.2 CTRB (Fixed counter: SUB 56)

CTRB is used as a counter. Numerical data such as preset values and
count values can be used with binary format. This counter has the
following functions to meet various applications.
(a) Preset counter
Preset the count value. If the count reaches this preset value,
outputs to show that.
(b) Ring counter
This is the ring counter which is reset to the initial value when
the count signal is input after the count reaches the preset value.
(c) Up/down counter
This is the reversible counter to be used as both up counter and
down counter.
(d) Selection of initial value
Either 0 or 1 can be selected as the initial value.
Format
Fig. 4.4.2 shows the ladder format and Table 4.4.2 shows the
mnemonic format.
Countup
CN0 W1
SUB 56
¡¡¡ Counter number

UPDOWN
CTRB
¡¡¡¡ Preset value
RST
ACT
Fig. 4.4.2 Format of CTRB instruction
- 228 -
Table 4.4.2 Mnemonic of CTRB instruction

Step Address
number No.
1 RD ¡¡¡¡ .¡ CN0 CN0
5 SUB 56 CTRB instruction
6 (PRM) ¡¡¡ Counter number
7 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Preset value
8 WRT ¡¡¡¡ .¡ Count up output W1
Control conditions
(a) Specifying the initial value (CN0)
CN0 = 0: The counter value starts with "0". 0,1,2,3,.......,n
CN0 = 1: The counter value starts with "1". 1,2,3,.........,n
(b) Specifying up or down (UPDOWN)
UPDOWN = 0: Up counter
The initial value is "0" when CN0 = 0 or "1" when CN0 = 1.
UPDOWN = 1: Down counter
The initial value is the preset value.
(c) Reset (RST)
RST = 0: Cancels reset.
RST = 1: Resets. W1 is reset to 0. The accumulated value is
reset to the initial value.
ACT = 0: The counter does not operated. W1 does not change.
ACT = 1: The counter operates at the rise of this signal.
Parameters
(a) Counter number
The numbers that can be used are shown below.
30i/31i/32i-A
Model 1st PMC 2nd PMC 3rd PMC Dual check
Counter number 1 to 100 1 to 20 1 to 20 1 to 20
(b) Preset value

Following value can be set as preset value.
Binary counter: 0 to 32,767
* CTRB is always binary counter. System parameter is
ineffective.
- 229 -
Countup output (W1)

In case of the up couter mode (UPDOWN=0), when the counter value
reaches the preset value, W1 is set to 1.
In case of the down couter mode (UPDOWN=1) and initial value
0(CN0=0), when the counter value reaches 0, W1 is set to 1.
The W1 address can be specified arbitrarily.
Accumulate value
The address C5000s are used for accumulate value of the CTRB.
Each CTRB consumes 2 bytes.
CTRB of counter number 1 uses C5000-5001 and CTRB of number 2
uses C5002-5003 for their accumulate values.
- 230 -
4.4.3 CTRC (Counter: SUB 55)

The numeral data of this counter are all binary. This counter has the
following functions and can be used according to the application:
(a) Preset counter
Preset the count value and if the count reaches this preset value,
outputs to show that.
(b) Ring counter
This is the ring counter which is reset to the initial value when
the count signal is input after the count reaches the preset value.
(c) Up/down counter
This is the reversible counter to be used as both the up counter
and down counter.
(d) Selection of the initial value
Either 0 or 1 can be selected as the initial value.
Format
mnemonic format.
Countup
CN0 W1
SUB 55
UPDOWN ¡¡¡¡ Counter preset value address
CTRC
¡¡¡¡ Counter register address
RST
ACT
Fig. 4.4.3 Format of CTRC instruction
- 231 -
Table 4.4.3 Mnemonic of CTRC instruction

Step Address
number No.
1 RD ¡¡¡¡ .¡ CN0 CN0
5 SUB 55 CTRC instruction
6 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Counter preset value
address
7 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Counter register address
8 WRT ¡¡¡¡ .¡ Count up output W1
Control conditions
(a) Specifying the initial value (CN0)
CN0 = 0: The count value starts with "0". 0, 1, 2, 3, . . . n
CN0 = 1: The count value starts with "1". 1, 2, 3, . . . n
(b) Specifying up or down count (UPDOWN)
UPDOWN = 0:
Up counter.
The initial value is "0" when CN0 = 0 or "1" when CN0 = 1.
UPDOWN = 1:
Down counter. The initial value is the preset value.
(c) Reset (RST)
RST = 0: Reset cancelled.
RST = 1: Reset. W1 is reset to "0". The accumulated value is
reset to the initial value.
ACT = 0: The counter does not operate. W1 does not change.
ACT = 1: The counter operates at the rise of this signal.
Parameters
(a) Counter preset value address
The first address of the counter preset value field is set.
The continuous 2-byte memory space from the first address is
required for this field. Field D is normally used.
Counter preset value+0

CTR CTR: Preset value
(0 to 32,767)
Counter preset value+1
The counter preset value is binary. Therefore, it ranges from 0 to

32,767.
- 232 -
(b) Counter register address

The first address of the counter register field is set.
The continuous 4-byte memory space from the first address is
required for this field. Field D is normally used.
Counter register +0
CTR Count value
Counter register +1
Counter register +2
WORK WORK: Unusable
Counter register +3
CAUTION
When R address is specified as the counter register
address, the counter starts with count value "0" at
power on.
Countup output (W1)

In case of the up couter mode (UPDOWN=0), when the counter value
reaches the preset value, W1 is set to 1.
The W1 address can be specified arbitrarily.
- 233 -
4.5 DATA TRANSFER

The following types of data transfer instruction are available. Use any
of these instructions as appropriate for your purpose.

name number
1 MOVB 43 Transfer of 1 byte
2 MOVW 44 Transfer of 2 bytes
3 MOVD 47 Transfer of 4 bytes
4 MOVN 45 Transfer of an arbitrary number of bytes
5 MOVE 8 Logical product transfer
6 MOVOR 28 Data transfer after logical sum
7 XMOVB 35 Binary index modifier data transfer
8 XMOV 18 Indexed data transfer
- 234 -
4.5.1 MOVB (Transfer of 1 Byte: SUB 43)

The MOVB instruction transfers 1-byte data from a specified source
address to a specified destination address.
Format
mnemonic format.
ACT
SUB 43
MOVB ¡¡¡¡ Transfer source address

¡¡¡¡ Transfer destination address
Fig. 4.5.1 Format of MOVB instruction
Table 4.5.1 Mnemonic of MOVB instruction

condition
Step Address
number No.
2 SUB 43 MOVB instruction
3 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Transfer source address
4 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Transfer destination address
Control condition
(a) Execution specification
ACT = 0: No data is transferred.
ACT = 1: One-byte data is transferred.
Parameters
(a) Transfer source address
Specify the source address for the transfer.
(b) Transfer destination address

Specify the destination address for the transfer.
- 235 -
4.5.2 MOVW (Transfer of 2 Bytes: SUB 44)

The MOVW instruction transfers 2-byte data from a specified source
Format
mnemonic format.
ACT
SUB 44
MOVW ¡¡¡¡ Transfer source address

Fig. 4.5.2 Format of MOVW instruction
Table 4.5.2 Mnemonic of MOVW instruction

condition
Step Address
number No.
2 SUB 44 MOVW instruction
Control condition
ACT = 1: Two-byte data is transferred.
Parameters

NOTE
Take care not to specify overlapped areas for
source and destination. If the source and
destination areas are overlapped with each other,
the result is not guaranteed.
- 236 -
4.5.3 MOVD (Transfer of 4 Bytes: SUB 47)

The MOVD instruction transfers 4-byte data from a specified source
Format
mnemonic format.
ACT
SUB 47
MOVD ¡¡¡¡ Transfer source address

Fig. 4.5.3 Format of MOVD instruction
Table 4.5.3 Mnemonic of MOVD instruction

condition
Step Address
number No.
2 SUB 47 MOVD instruction
Control condition
(a) Input signal
ACT = 1: Four-byte data is transferred.
Parameters

NOTE
- 237 -
4.5.4 MOVN (Transfer of an Arbitrary Number of Bytes: SUB 45)

The MOVN instruction transfers data consisting of an arbitrary
number of bytes from a specified source address to a specified
destination address.
Format
mnemonic format.
ACT
SUB 45
MOVN ¡ Number of bytes to be transferred

¡¡¡¡ Transfer source address
Fig. 4.5.4 Format of MOVN instruction
Table 4.5.4 Mnemonic of MOVN instruction

condition
Step Address
number No.
2 SUB 45 MOVN instruction
3 (PRM) ¡ Number of bytes to be transferred
Control condition
ACT = 1: A specified number of bytes are transferred.
- 238 -
Parameters
(a) Number of bytes to be transferred
Specify the number of bytes to be transferred. An odd number
can also be specified. A number from 1 to 9,999 can be specified.
CAUTION
Make sure that the source data area and destination
data area are within the PMC address range.
(b) Transfer source address

(c) Transfer destination address

NOTE
- 239 -
4.5.5 MOVE (Logical Product Transfer: SUB 8)

ANDs logical multiplication data and input data, and outputs the
results to a specified address. Can also be used to remove unnecessary
bits from an eight-bit signal in a specific address, etc.
(Logical multiplication data) (Input data) to a specified address
The input data is one byte (eight bits).
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Input data 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Logical ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
multiplication data
Low-order 4-bit logical

multiplication data
High-order 4-bit logical multiplication data
Format
mnemonic format.
ACT
SUB 8
¡¡¡¡ High-order 4-bit logical multiplication data
MOVE ¡¡¡¡ Low-order 4-bit logical multiplication data
¡¡¡¡ Input data address
¡¡¡¡ Output address
Fig. 4.5.5 (a) Format of MOVE instruction
Table 4.5.5 Mnemonic of MOVE instruction

Step Address
number No.
2 SUB 8 MOVE instruction
3 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ High-order 4-bit logical
multiplication data
4 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Low-order 4-bit logical
multiplication data
5 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Input data address
6 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Output address
- 240 -
Execution command
ACT = 0: MOVE instruction not executed.
ACT = 1: Executed.
Example of using the MOVE instruction

If a code signal and another signal co-exist at address X35 for an input
signal from the machine tool, to compare the code signal and a code
signal at another address, the rest of signals in address X35 becomes
an obstacle. Thus, the MOVE instruction can be used to output only
the code signal at address X35 address R210.
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Address X35
Code signal
Another signal
Logical multiplication data 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1
Low-order 4-bit logical multiplication data
High-order 4-bit logical multiplication data
Address R210 0 0 0
Code signal
A SUB 8
0001 High-order 4-bit logical multiplication data
MOVE 1111 Low-order 4-bit logical multiplication data
R228.1 X035 Input data address

R210 Output address
Fig. 4.5.5 (b) MOVE instruction ladder diagram
- 241 -
4.5.6 MOVOR (Data Transfer After Logical Sum: SUB 28)

This instruction ORs the input data and the logical sum data and
transfers the result to the destination.
Input data Logical sum data

OR
Output data
Format
mnemonic format.
ACT
SUB 28
MOVOR ¡¡¡¡ Input data address

¡¡¡¡ Logical sum data address
¡¡¡¡ Output address
Fig. 4.5.6 Format of MOVOR instruction
Table 4.5.6 Mnemonic of MOVOR instruction

Step Address
number No.
2 SUB 28 MOVOR instruction
4 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Logical sum data address
5 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Output address
- 242 -
Control condition
(a) Command (ACT)
ACT = 0: Do not execute MOVOR.
ACT = 1: Execute MOVOR.
Parameters
(a) Input data address
Specifies the address for the input data.
(b) Logical sum data address

Specifies the address of the logical sum data with which to OR
the transferred data.
(c) Output address

This is the address to contain the logical sum obtained. It is also
possible to obtain the logical sum (OR) of the input and the
logical sum data and output the result in the logical sum data
address. For this, you must set the logical sum data address for
the output address.
- 243 -
4.5.7 XMOVB (Binary Index Modifier Data Tranfer: SUB 35)

Reads or rewrites the contents of the data table. The value type in this
instruction ia binary.
There are two specifications - basic specification and extended
specification - for setting the format specification parameter in the
XMOVB instruction. The extended specification allows two or more
sets of data to be read or written with a single instruction. For the
details of the setting of a format specification parameter, see the
description of parameters.
- 244 -
(a) Read data from data table
The number of data table elements: M (It specifies the storage address of number
of data table elements)
DT[0] D I 3 S B
DT[1] A Index: I Input/output data: S
DT[2]
DT[3] B
DT[4]
DT[5] C
−1]
DT[M−
Data table: DT
The operation of the instruction:
DT[I] → S
Fig. 4.5.7 (a) Read data from data table (basic specification)
The number of index array elements: N (It specifies the format specification)
DT[0] D I[0] 1 S[0] A
DT[1] A I[1] 3 S[1] B
DT[2] I[2] 5 S[2] C
DT[3] B I[3] 0 S[3] D
DT[4]
−1]
I[N− −1]
S[N−
DT[5] C
Index Input/output
array: I data array: S
−1]
DT[M−
Data table: DT

DT[I[n]] → S[n] (n = 0, 1, 2, ..., N−1)
Fig. 4.5.7 (b) Read data from data table (extended specification)
- 245 -
(b) Write data to data table
S B I 3 DT[0]
Input/output data: S Index: I DT[1]
DT[2]
DT[3] B
DT[4]
DT[5]
−1]
DT[M−
Data table: DT
S → DT[I]
Fig. 4.5.7 (c) Write data to data table (basic specification)
The number of index array elements: N (It specifies the format specification)
S A I[0] 1 DT[0] D
S[1] B I[1] 3 DT[1] A
S[2] C I[2] 5 DT[2]
S[3] D I[3] 0 DT[3] B
DT[4]
−1]
S[N− −1]
I[N−
DT[5] C
Input/output Index
data array: S array: I
−1]
DT[M−
Data table: DT
−1)
S[n] → DT[I[n]] (n = 0, 1, 2, ..., N−
Fig. 4.5.7 (d) Write data to data table (extended specification)
- 246 -
Format
Figs. 4.5.7 (e) and (f) show the ladder format and Tables 4.5.7 (a) and
(b) show the mnemonic format.
W1
RW
SUB 35
RST XMOVB ¡ Format specification

¡¡¡¡ Storage address of number of data table elements
¡¡¡¡ Data table head address DT[ ]
ACT ¡¡¡¡ I/O data storage address S[ ]
¡¡¡¡ Index storage address I[ ]
Fig. 4.5.7 (e) Format of XMOVB instruction (basic specification)
Table 4.5.7 (a) Mnemonic of XMOVB instruction (basic specification)

Step Address
number No.
1 RD ¡¡¡¡ .¡ RW RW
2 RD.STK ¡¡¡¡ .¡ RST RW RST
3 RD.STK ¡¡¡¡ .¡ ACT RW RST ACT
4 SUB 35 XMOVB instruction
5 (PRM) ¡ Format specification
6 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Storage address of number of data
table elements
7 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Data table head address
8 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ I/O data storage address
9 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Index storage address
10 WRT ¡¡¡¡ .¡ Error output W1
- 247 -
W1
RW
SUB 35
RST XMOVB ¡¡¡¡ Format specification

¡¡¡¡ Storage address of number of data table elements
¡¡¡¡ Data table head address DT[ ]
ACT ¡¡¡¡ I/O data storage address S[ ]
¡¡¡¡ Index storage address I[ ]
Fig. 4.5.7 (f) Format of XMOVB instruction (extended specification)
Table 4.5.7 (b) Mnemonic of XMOVB instruction (extended specification)

Step Address
number No.
1 RD ¡¡¡¡ .¡ RW RW
2 RD.STK ¡¡¡¡ .¡ RST RW RST
3 RD.STK ¡¡¡¡ .¡ ACT RW RST ACT
4 SUB 35 XMOVB instruction
5 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Format specification
6 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Storage address of number of data
table elements
8 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ I/O data sotrage address
9 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Index storage address
Control conditions
(a) Read, write designation (RW)
RW = 0: Read data from data table.
RW = 1: Write data to data table.
(b) Reset (RST)
RST = 0: Reset release.
RST = 1: Reset. W1 = 0.
(c) Activation command (ACT)
ACT = 0: Do not execute XMOVB instruction. There is no
change in W1.
ACT = 1: Execute XMOVB instruction.
- 248 -
Parameters
(a) Format specification
Specifies data length. Specify byte length in the first digit of the
parameter.
0001: 1-byte long data
When setting format specification in the following extended
format, XMOVB can read/write multiple data in data table in 1
instruction.
Specifies data length (1, 2, or 4) to the 1st digit as above-
mentioned. Specifies the number of the index array elements to
the 2nd and 3rd digit. Specifies 0 to the 4th digit.
0nn1: In case of reading/writing multiple (nn) data in data
table by 1 byte length
The nn is the numerical value from 02 to 99. When setting 00 or
01, it works as the basic specification in which one data transfer
is performed by one instruction.
Format specification (extended specification):

0 n n x
The byte length setting

1: 1 byte length
2: 2 byte length
4: 4 byte length
The number of the index array elements

00-01:
It works as the basic specification.
02-99:
Read/Write multiple (nn) data from/to data table.
(b) Storage address of number of data table elements

Set to the memory at the byte length which set the number of the
data table elements in "(a) Format specification" and set the
address to this parameter. The value which you can set depends
on the "(a) Format specification" setting.
1 byte length: 1 to 255
2 bytes length: 1 to 16384
- 249 -
(c) Data table head address

Sets head address in the data table.
The memory of (byte length) × (number of data table elements)
which was set in "(a) Format specification" and "(b) Storage
address of number of data table elements" is necessary.
(d) Input/Output data storage address
In case of the reading, set the address of the memory which
stores a reading result. In case of the writing, set the address of
the memory which stores a writing result. The memory with the
byte length which set in "(a) Format specification" is necessary.
When setting format specification in the extended format, set the
head address of the array. (In case of the reading, set the head
address of the array in which a reading result is stored. In case of
the writing, set the head address of the array in which a writing
result is stored.) The memory of (byte length) × (number of
index array elements) which was set in "(a) Format specification"
is necessary.
(e) Index storage address
Set the address of the memory in which an index value is stored.
The memory with the byte length set in "(a) Format
specification" is necessary. The effective range of number of
data in index is as follows according to the byte length set in "(a)
Format specification".
Actually, set the value which is smaller than the value to set in
"(b) Storage address of number of data table elements" to the
index.
When setting an index value above the value to set in "(b)
Storage address of number of data table elements", it causes an
error output W1 = 1 in instruction execution.
2 byte length: 0 to 32,766
4 byte length: 0 to 2,147,483,646
When setting format specification in the extended format, set an
address at the head of the array in which an index value is stored.
The memory of (byte length) × (number of data in index array)
which was set in "(a) Format specification" is necessary.
- 250 -
WARNING
1 You can not specify the table that includes different
kind of address type or discontinuous address area.
In this case, operation is not guaranteed.
2 You have to set the "Storage address of number of
data table elements" and the "Data table head
address" not to exceed the limit of its continuous
address area. If the table exceeds the limit of the
continuous address area, operation is not
guaranteed. For example, when a range of address
R is 0 to 7999 and the "Format specification" is set
to 1 and the "Data table head address" is set to
"R7990", you can set 10 or less to the "Storage
address of number of data table elements".
Error output (W1)

W1 = 0: No error
W1 = 1: Error found. In the case where the index value set in "(e)
Index storage address" exceeds the value set in "(b) Storage
address of number of data table elements", it becomes W1 =
1. The reading or writing of the data table isn't executed.
When "(a) Format specification" is used for operation in the
extended format, if the values of one or more elements in the
index array specified in (e) are greater than the value set in
"(b) Storage address of number of data table elements", it
becomes W1 = 1. The reading or writing of a data table is
executed for the normal index values but not executed as for
the wrong index values.
- 251 -
Example for extended specification

(a) Read data from data table (extended specification)
The number of data table elements: R0 = 9

The number of index array elements: 4
RW = 0 W1
SUB 35
XMOVB 0041
RST = 0
R0
R100
ACT = 1 R200
D0
R100 D D0 2 R200 A
R101 D1 5 R201 B
R102 A D2 8 R202 C
R103 D3 0 R203 D
R104 Index array Input/output

data array
R105 B
R106
R107
R108 C
Data table

(1) R102 → R200
(2) R105 → R201
(3) R108 → R202
(4) R100 → R203
Fig. 4.5.7 (g) Example for XMOVB instruction (extended specification)
- 252 -
(b) Write data to data table (extended specification)
The number of data table elements: R0 = 9

The number of index array elements: 4
RW = 1 W1
SUB 35
XMOVB 0041
RST = 0
R0
R200
ACT = 1 R100
D0
R100 A D0 2 R200 D
R101 B D1 5 R201
R102 C D2 8 R202 A
R103 D D3 0 R203
Input/output Index array R204

data array
R205 B
R206
R207
R208 C
Data table

(1) R100 → R202
(2) R101 → R205
(3) R102 → R208
(4) R103 → R200
Fig. 4.5.7 (h) Example for XMOVB instruction (extended specification)
- 253 -
4.5.8 XMOV (Indexed Data Transfer: SUB 18)

Reads or rewrites the contents of the data table. The value type in this
instruction ia binary.
CAUTION
The data table heading address specified here is
table internal number 0. The table internal number
specified here, however, is different from that
mentioned in Subsection 2.2.12.
Table internal number Data table

0
1
2
Input or output data <1> 3
<2>
Table internal storing

input or output data 2
<1> Read out data from the data table.

<2> Write data in the data table. n
Fig. 4.5.8 (a) Reading and writing of data
Format
Fig. 4.5.8 (b) shows the ladder format and Table 4.5.8 shows the
mnemonic format.
W1 Error output
BYT
¡¡¡¡.¡ SUB 18
RW ¡¡¡¡.¡
XMOV
¡¡¡¡.¡ ¡¡¡¡ Number of data of the data table (Table capacity)
RST
¡¡¡¡ Data table heading address
¡¡¡¡.¡
ACT ¡¡¡¡ Address storing input/output data
¡¡¡¡ Address storing table internal number

¡¡¡¡.¡
Fig. 4.5.8 (b) Format of XMOV instruction
- 254 -
Table 4.5.8 Mnemonic of XMOV instruction

Memory status of control
Mnemonic format
condition
Step Address
number No.
1 RD ¡¡¡¡ .¡ BYT BYT
2 RD. STK ¡¡¡¡ .¡ RW BYT RW
3 RD. STK ¡¡¡¡ .¡ RST BYT RW RST
4 RD. STK ¡¡¡¡ .¡ ACT BYT RW RST ACT
5 SUB 18 XMOV instruction
6 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Number of data of the data table
7 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Data table heading address
8 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Address storing input/output data
9 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Address storing table internal
number
Control conditions
(a) Specify the number of digits of data. (BYT)
BYT = 0: Data stored in the data table, BCD in two digits long.
BYT = 1: Data stored in the data table, BCD in four digits long.
(b) Specify read or write (RW)
RW = 0: Data is read from the data table.
RW = 1: Data is write in the data table.
(c) Reset (RST)
RST = 0: Release reset.
RST = 1: Enables reset, that is, sets W1 to 0.
(d) Execution command (ACT)
ACT = 0: The XMOV instruction is not executed. W1 does not
change.
ACT = 1: The XMOV instruction is executed.
Parameters
(a) Number of data of the data table
Specifies the size of the data table. If the beginning of the data
table is 0 and the end is n, n + 1 is set as the number of data of
the data table.
(b) Data table heading address

Address that can be used in a data table are fixed. When
preparing a data table, the addresses to be used must be
determined beforehand, and the head address placed in that data
table. The value which you can set depends on the control
condition "BYT".
BYT=0: 1 to 99
BYT=1: 1 to 9999
- 255 -
(c) Address storing input/output data

The input/output data storage address is the address storing the
specified data, and is external to the data table. The contents of
the data table is read or rewritten.
(d) Address storing table internal number

The table internal number storage address is the address storing
the table internal number of the data to be read or rewritten.
This address requires memory specified by the number-of-digits
designation (BYT).
WARNING
2 You have to set the "Number of data of the data
table" and the "Data table heading address" not to
exceed the limit of its continuous address area. If
the table exceeds the limit of the continuous
address area, operation is not guaranteed. For
example, when a range of address R is 0 to 7999
and the control condition "BYT" is set to 0 and the
"Data table heading address" is set to "R7990", you
can set 10 or less to the "Number of data of the data
table".
Error output
W1 = 0: There is no error.
W1 = 1: There is an error.
An error occurs if a table internal number exceeding the
previously programmed number of the data table is specified.
- 256 -
4.6 COMPARISON
The following types of comparison instruction are available. Use any

name number
1 COMPB 32 Comparison between binary data
2 COMP 15 Comparison
3 COIN 16 Coincidence check
- 257 -
4.6.1 COMPB (Comparison Between Binary Data: SUB 32)

This instruction compares 1, 2, and 4-byte binary data with one
another. Results of comparison are set in the operation output register
(R9000). Sufficient number of bytes are necessary in the memory to
hold the input data and comparison data.
Format
mnemonic format.
ACT
SUB 32
COMPB 00 Format specification
¡¡¡¡ * Input data (address)
¡¡¡¡ * Address of data to be compared
Fig. 4.6.1 Format of COMPB instruction
Table 4.6.1 Mnemonic of COMPB instruction

Step Address
number No.
2 SUB 32 COMPB instruction
3 (PRM) 00 Format specification
4 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Input data (address)
5 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Address of data to be compared
Control condition
(a) Command (ACT)
ACT = 0: Do not execute COMPB.
ACT = 1: Execute COMPB.
- 258 -
Parameters
Specify data length (1,2, or 4 bytes) and format for the input data
('constants data' or 'address data').
0 0
Specification of data length

1: 1-byte length data
Specification of format
0: Constants
1: Address
(b) Input data (address)

Format for the input data is determined by the specification in (a).
(c) Address of data to be compared
Indicates the address in which the comparison data is stored.
Operation output register (R9000)

The data involved in the operation are set in this register. This register
is set with data on operation. If register bit 1 is on, they indicate the
following:
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
R9000
Zero (input data=data compared)
Negative (input data<data compared)
Overflow
The following table shows the relationship among the [input data],
[data compared], and operation output register.
R9000.5 R9000.1 R9000.0

[Input data] = [data compared] 0 0 1
[Input data] > [data compared] 0 0 0
[Input data] < [data compared] 0 1 0
Overflow 1 0 0
- 259 -
Programming examples for the operation output register

Programming examples of comparison between two positive value are
shown bellow.
(1) When checking that [input data] = [data compared]

ACT R9000.5 R9000.0 Check result
(2) When checking that [input data] != [data compared]

(3) When checking that [input data] > [data compared]

ACT R9000.5 R9000.1 R9000.0 Check result
(4) When checking that [input data] >= [data compared]

(5) When checking that [input data] < [data compared]

(6) When checking that [input data] <= [data compared]

R9000.1
(7) When checking for an overflow of the comparison operation

ACT R9000.5 Check result
- 260 -
4.6.2 COMP (Comparison: SUB 15)

Compares input and comparison values. The value type in this
instruction is BCD.
Format
mnemonic format.
W1
BYT Comparison result output
SUB 15
¡¡¡¡.¡ COMP
¡¡¡¡.¡
ACT
¡ Specification of input data format (constant or address)
¡¡¡¡ Input data
¡¡¡¡.¡ ¡¡¡¡ Comparison data address
Control condition
Fig. 4.6.2 Format of COMP instruction
Table 4.6.2 Mnemonic of COMP instruction

Step Address
number No.
2 RD. STK ¡¡¡¡ .¡ ACT BYT ACT
3 SUB 15 COMP instruction
4 (PRM) ¡ Specification of input data format
5 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Input data
6 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Comparison data address
7 WRT ¡¡¡¡ .¡ Comparison result output W1
- 261 -
Control conditions
(a) Specify the data size. (BYT)
BYT = 0: Process data (input value and comparison value) is
BCD two digits long.
BYT = 1: Process data (input value and comparison value) is
BCD four digits long.
(b) Execution command (ACT)
ACT = 0: The COMP instruction is not executed. W1 does not
alter.
ACT = 1: The COMP instruction is executed and the result is
output to W1.
Parameters
(a) Specification of input data format
0: Specifies input data with a constant.
1: Specifies input data with an address
Not specify input data directly, but specify an address storing
input data.
(b) Input data

The input data can be specified as either a constant or the address
storing it. The selection is made by a parameter of format
specification.
(c) Comparison data address

Specifies the address storing the comparison data.
(d) Comparison result output

W1 = 0: Input data > Comparison data
W1 = 1: Input data ≤ Comparison data
- 262 -
4.6.3 COIN (Coincidence Check: SUB 16)

Checks whether the input value and comparison value coincide.
The value type in this instruction is BCD.
Format
mnemonic format.
W1 Comparison
BYT result output
SUB 16
¡¡¡¡.¡
COIN ¡¡¡¡.¡
ACT
¡ Specification of input data format (constant or address)

¡¡¡¡.¡ ¡¡¡¡ Input data
¡¡¡¡ Comparison data address
Control conditions
Fig. 4.6.3 Format of COIN instruction
Table 4.6.3 Mnemonic of COIN instruction

Mnemonic format
condition
Step Address
number No.
3 SUB 16 COIN instruction
4 (PRM) ¡ Specification of input data format
5 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Input data
6 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Comparison data address
7 WRT ¡¡¡¡ .¡ Comparison result output W1
- 263 -
Control conditions
(a) Specify the data size.
BYT = 0: Process data (input value, and comparison values).
Each BCD is two digits long.
BYT = 1: Each BCD four digits long.
(b) Execution command

ACT = 0: The COIN instruction is not executed. W1 does not
change.
ACT = 1: The COIN instruction is executed and the results is
output to W1.
Parameters
(a) Specification of input data format
0: Specifies input data as a constant.
1: Specifies input data as an address.
(b) Input data

The input data can be specified as either a constant or an address
storing it. The selection is made by a parameter of format
designation.
(c) Comparison data address

Specifies the address storing the comparison data.
Comparison result output (W1)
W1 = 0: Input data ≠ Comparison data

W1 = 1: Input data = Comparison data
- 264 -
4.7 DATA SEARCH

The following types of data search instruction are available. Use any

name number
1 DSCHB 34 Binary data search
2 DSCH 17 Data search
- 265 -
4.7.1 DSCHB (Binary Data Search: SUB 34)

This function instruction instructs data search in the data table.
DSCHB searches the data table for a specified data, outputs an address
storing it counting from the beginning of the data table. If the data
cannot be found, an output is made accordingly.
The numerical data handled in this instruction are all in binary format
and number of data (table capacity) in the data table can be specified
by specifying the address, thus allowing change in table capacity even
after writing the sequence program in the flash ROM.
Table number Data table
0
Search data 1
100 2 100
3
Search result output
2
Fig. 4.7.1 (a)
Format
mnemonic format.
Search result
RST W1
SUB 34
DSCHB ¡ Format designation

ACT ¡¡¡¡ * Storage address of number of data in data table
¡¡¡¡ * Data table head address
¡¡¡¡ * Search data address
¡¡¡¡ * Output address of search result
Fig. 4.7.1 (b) Format of DSCHB instruction
CAUTION
You can specify any R,E and D address for the data
table in this functional instruction.
- 266 -
Table 4.7.1 Mnemonic of DSCHB instruction

Step Address
number No.
1 RD ¡¡¡¡ .¡ RST RST
2 RD.STK ¡¡¡¡ .¡ ACT RST ACT
3 SUB 34 DSCHB instruction
4 (PRM) ¡ Format designation
5 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Storage address of number of data in
data table
7 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Search data address
8 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Output address of search result
9 WRT ¡¡¡¡ .¡ Search result W1
Control conditions
(a) Reset (RST)
RST = 0: Release reset
RST = 1: Reset. W1 = "0".
(b) Activation command (ACT)

ACT = 0: Do not execute DSCHB instruction. W1 does not
change.
ACT = 1: Execute DSCHB instruction. If the search data is
found, table number where the data is stored will be
output. If the search data is not found, W1 becomes 1.
- 267 -
Parameters
(a) Format designation
Specifies data length. Specify byte length in the first digit of the
parameter.
1: 1 byte length
2: 2 bytes length
4: 4 bytes length
(b) Storage address of number of data in data table
Specifies address in which number of data in the data table is set.
This address requires memory of number of byte according to the
format designation.
Number of data in the table is n + 1 (head number in the table is
0 and the last number is n). The value which you can set depends
on the "(a) Format designation".
(c) Data table head address
Sets head address of data table.
(d) Search data address
Address in which search data is set.
(e) Output address of search result
After searching, if search data is found, the table number where
the data is stored will be output. The searched table number is
output in this search result output address. This address requires
memory of number of byte according to the format designation.
WARNING
2 You have to set the "Storage address of number of
data table elements" and the "Data table head
address" not to exceed the limit of its continuous
address area. If the table exceeds the limit of the
continuous address area, operation is not
guaranteed. For example, when a range of address
R is 0 to 7999 and the "Format specification" is set
to 1 and the "Data table head address" is set to
"R7990", you can set 10 or less to the "Storage
address of number of data table elements".
Search result (W1)

W1 = 0: Search data found.
W1 = 1: Search data not found.
- 268 -
4.7.2 DSCH (Data Search: SUB 17)

This function instruction instructs data search in the data table. DSCH
searches the data table for a specified data, outputs an address storing
it counting from the beginning of the data table. If the data cannot be
found, an output is made accordingly. The value type in this
instruction is BCD.
Table internal number Data table

0
1
Search data
2
100 100
Search data result output
Fig. 4.7.2 (a)
CAUTION
You can specify any R,E and D address for the data
table in this functional instruction.
Format
mnemonic format.
BYT W1
SUB 17 Search result
¡¡¡¡.¡
RST
DSCH ¡¡¡¡.¡
¡¡¡¡.¡
ACT
¡¡¡¡ Number of data of the data table (Table capacity)
¡¡¡¡ Data table heading address
¡¡¡¡.¡ ¡¡¡¡ Search data address
¡¡¡¡ Search result output address
Control condition
Fig. 4.7.2 (b) Format of DSCH instruction
- 269 -
Table 4.7.2 Mnemonic of DSCH instruction

condition
Step Address
number No.
2 RD. STK ¡¡¡¡ .¡ RST BYT RST
3 RD. STK ¡¡¡¡ .¡ ACT BYT RST ACT
4 SUB 17 DSCH instruction
5 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Number of data of the data table
6 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Data table heading address
7 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Search data address
8 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Search result output address
9 WRT ¡¡¡¡ .¡ Search result W1
Control conditions
(a) Specify data size. (BYT)
BYT = 0: Data stored in the data table, BCD two digits long.
BYT = 1: Data stored in the data table, BCD four digits long.
(b) Reset (RST)
RST = 0: Release reset
RST = 1: Enables a reset, that is, sets W1 to 0.
(c) Execution command (ACT)
ACT = 0: The DSCH instruction is not executed. W1 does not
change.
ACT = 1: The DSCH is executed, and the table internal number
storing the desired data is output. If the data cannot
be found, W1 = 1.
- 270 -
Parameters
(a) Number of data of the data table
Specifies the size of the data table. If the beginning of the data
table is 0 and the end is n, n + 1 is set as the number of data of
the data table.
(b) Data table heading address
Addresses that can be used in a data table are fixed. When
preparing a data table, the addresses to be used must be
determined beforehand, specify the head address of a data table
here. The value which you can set depends on the control
condition "BYT".
BYT=0: 1 to 99
BYT=1: 1 to 9999
(c) Search data address
Indicates the address of the data to be searched.
(d) Search result output address
If the data being searched for is found, the internal number of the
table storing the data is output to this field. This address field is
called a search result output address field.
The search result output address field requires memory whose
size is the number of bytes conforming to the size of the data
specified by BYT.
WARNING
2 You have to set the "Number of data of the data
table" and the "Data table heading address" not to
exceed the limit of its continuous address area. If
the table exceeds the limit of the continuous
address area, operation is not guaranteed. For
example, when a range of address R is 0 to 7999
and the control condition "BYT" is set to 0 and the
"Data table heading address" is set to "R7990", you
can set 10 or less to the "Number of data of the data
table".
Search result (W1)

W1 = 0: Search data found.
W1 = 1: Search data not found.
- 271 -
4.8 BIT OPERATION
The following types of bit operation instruction are available. Use any
Instruction Sub
Processing
name number
1 DIFU 57 Rising edge detection
2 DIFD 58 Falling edge detection
3 EOR 59 Exclusive OR
4 AND 60 Logical AND
5 OR 61 Logical OR
6 NOT 62 Logical NOT
7 PARI 11 Parity check
8 SFT 33 Shift register
- 272 -
4.8.1 DIFU (Rising Edge Detection: SUB 57)
The DIFU instruction sets the output signal to 1 for one scanning cycle
on a rising edge of the input signal.
Format
mnemonic format.
ACT OUT
SUB 57
DIFU
Rising edge
¡¡¡¡
number
Fig. 4.8.1 Format of DIFU instruction
Table 4.8.1 Mnemonic of DIFU instruction

Step Address
number No.
2 SUB 57 DIFU instruction
3 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Rising edge number
4 WRT ¡¡¡¡ .¡ OUT OUT
Control conditions
(a) Input signal (ACT)
On a rising edge (0 → 1) of the input signal, the output signal is
set to 1.
Detection result
(a) Output signal (OUT)
The output signal level remains at 1 for one scanning cycle of the
ladder level where this functional instruction is operating.
- 273 -
Parameters
30i/31i/32i-A
Dual check safety
1st PMC 2nd PMC (option) 3rd PMC (option)
PMC (option)
Rising edge 1 to 1000 1 to 256 1 to 256 1 to 256
number
WARNING
If the same number is used for another DIFU
instruction or a DIFD instruction (described later) in
one Ladder diagram, operation is not guaranteed.
Operation
1 2 3 4 Execution period
ACT
OUT
- 274 -
4.8.2 DIFD (Falling Edge Detection: SUB 58)

The DIFD instruction set the output signal to 1 for one scanning period
on a falling edge of the input signal.
Format
mnemonic format.
ACT OUT
SUB 58
DIFD
¡¡¡¡ Falling edge
number
Fig. 4.8.2 Format of DIFD instruction
Table 4.8.2 Mnemonic of DIFD instruction

Step Address
number No.
2 SUB 58 DIFD instruction
3 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Falling edge number
4 WRT ¡¡¡¡ .¡ OUT OUT
Control conditions
On a falling edge (1→0) of the input signal, the output signal is set
to 1.
Detection result
(a) Output signal (OUT)
The output signal level remains at 1 for one scanning period of the
ladder level where this functional instruction is operating.
- 275 -
Parameters
30i/31i/32i-A
Dual check safety
PMC (option)
Falling edge
1 to 1000 1 to 256 1 to 256 1 to 256
number
WARNING
If the same number is used for another DIFD
instruction or a DIFU instruction (described above) in
one ladder diagram, operation is not guaranteed.
Operation
1 2 3 4
Execution period
ACT
OUT
- 276 -
4.8.3 EOR (Exclusive OR: SUB 59)
The EOR instruction exclusive-ORs the contents of address A with a

constant (or the contents of address B), and stores the result at address
C. The value type in this instruction is binary.
Format
mnemonic format.
ACT
SUB 59
o00o Format specification
EOR ¡¡¡¡ Address A
¡¡¡¡ Constant or address B
¡¡¡¡
Address C
Fig. 4.8.3 Format of EOR instruction
Table 4.8.3 Mnemonic of EOR instruction

Step Address
number No.
2 SUB 59 EOR instruction
3 (PRM) o00o Format specification
4 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Address A
5 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Constant or address B
6 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Address C
Control conditions
ACT=0: The EOR instruction is not executed.
ACT=1: The EOR instruction is executed.
- 277 -
Parameters
Specify a data length (1, 2, or 4 bytes), and an input data format
(constant or address specification).
o 0 0 o
Data length specification

Format specification 1:1 byte
0: Constant 2:2 bytes
1: Address specification 4:4 bytes
(b) Address A
Input data to be exclusive-ORed. The data that is held starting at
this address and has the data length specified in format
specification is treated as input data.
(c) Constant or address B

Input data to be exclusive-ORed with. When address
specification is selected in format specification, the data that is
held starting at this address and has the data length specified in
format specification is treated as input data.
(d) Address C
Address used to store the result of an exclusive OR operation.
The result of an exclusive OR operation is stored starting at this
address, and has the data length specified in format specification.
Operation
When address A and address B hold the following data:
Address A 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 1
Address B 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
The result of the exclusive OR operation is as follows:
Address C 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0
- 278 -
4.8.4 AND (Logical AND: SUB 60)
The AND instruction ANDs the contents of address A with a constant

(or the contents of address B), and stores the result at address C. The
value type in this instruction is binary.
Format
mnemonic format.
ACT
SUB 60
AND ¡¡¡¡ Address A
¡¡¡¡
Address C
Fig. 4.8.4 Format of AND instruction
Table 4.8.4 Mnemonic of AND instruction

Step Address
number No.
2 SUB 60 AND instruction
Control conditions
ACT=0: The AND instruction is not executed.
ACT=1 : The AND instruction is executed.
- 279 -
Parameters
o 0 0 o

Format specification 1: 1 byte
0: Constant 2: 2 bytes
1: Address specification 4: 4 bytes
(b) Address A
Input data to be ANDed. The data that is held starting at this
address and has the data length specified in format specification
is treated as input data.

Input data to be ANDed with. When address specification is
selected in format specification, the data that is held starting at
(d) Address C
Address used to store the result of an AND operation. The result
of an AND operation is stored starting at this address, and has the
data length specified in format specification.
Operation
Address A 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 1
Address B 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
The result of the AND operation is as follows:
Address C 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1
- 280 -
4.8.5 OR (Logical OR: SUB 61)
The OR instruction ORs the contents of address A with a constant (or

the contents of address B), and stores the result at address C. The value
type in this instruction is binary.
Format
mnemonic format.
ACT
SUB 61
OR ¡¡¡¡ Address A
¡¡¡¡
Address C
Fig. 4.8.5 Format of OR instruction
Table 4.8.5 Mnemonic of OR instruction

Step Address
number No.
2 SUB 61 OR instruction
Control conditions
ACT=0: The OR instruction is not executed.
ACT=1: The OR instruction is executed.
- 281 -
Parameters
o 0 0 o

Format specification 1: 1 byte
0: Constant 2: 2 bytes
1: Address specification 4: 4 bytes
(b) Address A
Input data to be ORed. The data that is held starting at this
address and has the data length specified in format specification is
treated as input data.

Input data to be ORed with. When address specification is
selected in format specification, the data that is held starting at
(d) Address C
Address used to store the result of an OR operation. The result of
an OR operation is stored starting at this address, and has the data
length specified in format specification.
Operation
Address A 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 1
Address B 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
The result of the OR operation is as follows:
Address C 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1
- 282 -
4.8.6 NOT (Logical NOT: SUB 62)
The NOT instruction inverts each bit of the contents of address A, and
stores the result at address B.
Format
mnemonic format.
ACT
SUB 62
000o Format specification
NOT ¡¡¡¡ Address A
¡¡¡¡ Address B
Fig. 4.8.6 Format of NOT instruction
Table 4.8.6 Mnemonic of NOT instruction

Step Address
number No.
2 SUB 62 NOT instruction
3 (PRM) 000o Format specification
5 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Address B
Control conditions
ACT=0: The NOT instruction is not executed.
ACT=1: The NOT instruction is executed.
- 283 -
Parameters
Specify a data length (1, 2, or 4 bytes).
0 0 0 o

1: 1 byte
2: 2 bytes
4: 4 bytes
(b) Address A
Input data to be inverted bit by bit. The data that is held starting at
(c) Address B
Address used to output the result of a NOT operation. The result
of a NOT operation is stored starting at this address, and has the
data length specified in format specification.
Operation
When address A holds the following data:
Address A 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 1
The result of the NOT operation is as follows:
Address B 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0
- 284 -
4.8.7 PARI (Parity Check: SUB 11)
Checks the parity of code signals, and outputs an error if an

abnormality is detected. Specifies either an even- or odd-parity check.
Only one-byte (eight bits) of data can be checked.
Format
mnemonic format.
O.E
¡¡¡¡. ¡ Error output

SUB 11 W1
RST
PARI ¡¡¡¡
¡¡¡¡. ¡
¡¡¡¡. ¡
ACT
¡¡¡¡. ¡
Check data address

Control condition Instruction
Fig. 4.8.7 (a) Format of PARI instruction
Table 4.8.7 Mnemonic of PARI instruction

Step Address
number No.
1 RD ¡¡¡¡ .¡ O.E O.E
2 RD. STK ¡¡¡¡ .¡ RST O.E RST
3 RD. STK ¡¡¡¡ .¡ ACT O.E RST ACT
4 SUB 11 PARI instruction
5 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Check data address
Control conditions
(a) Specify even or odd. (O.E)
O.E=0: Even-parity check
O.E=1: Odd-parity check
- 285 -
(b) Reset (RST)

RST=0: Disables reset.
RST=1: Sets error output W1 to 0. That is, when a parity error
occurs, setting RST to 1 results in resetting.

ACT=0: Parity checks are not performed. W1 does not alter.
ACT=1: Executes the PARI instruction, performing a parity
check.
Error output (W1)

If the results of executing the PARI instruction is abnormal, W1=1 and
an error is posted. The W1 address can be determined arbitrarily.
Example of using the PARI instruction
Fig. 4.8.7 (b) shows odd-parity checking of a code signal entered at

address X036.
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Address X036 0
6-bit code signal

Odd-parity bit
A
A
R228.0
A R228.0
R228.0
A
SUB 11
R228.0
PARI X036
ERST.M
ERR
X32.7
TF
F7.3
Fig. 4.8.7 (b) Ladder diagram for the PARI instruction
NOTE
For bits 0 to 7, bits other than those for the parity
check must be 0.
- 286 -
4.8.8 SFT (Shift Register: SUB 33)
This instruction shifts 2-byte (16-bit) data by a bit to the left or right.
Note that W1=1 when data "1" is shifted from the left extremity (bit 15)
in left shift or from the right extremity (bit 0) in right shift.
Format
mnemonic format.
DIR
*
CONT SUB 33
¡¡¡¡
SFT W1
RST Address of
shift data
ACT
Fig. 4.8.8 Format of SFT instruction
Table 4.8.8 Mnemonic of SFT instruction

Step Address
number No.
1 RD ¡¡¡¡ .¡ DIR DIR
2 RD. STK ¡¡¡¡ .¡ CONT DIR CONT
3 RD. STK ¡¡¡¡ .¡ RST DIR CONT RST
4 RD. STK ¡¡¡¡ .¡ ACT DIR CONT RST ACT
5 SUB 33 SFT instruction
6 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Address of shift data
7 WRT ¡¡¡¡ .¡ Shifted-out output W1
- 287 -
Control conditions
(a) Shift direction specification (DIR)]
DIR=0: Left shift
DIR=1: Right shift
(b) Condition specification (CONT)

CONT=0:
On "1" bit shifts by one bit in the specified direction.
The condition of an adjacent bit (either right or left adjacent
bit according to the specification of shift direction DIR) is
set to the original bit position of the on "1" bit.
Also, "0" is set to bit 0 after shifting in the left direction or
set to hit 15 after shifting in the right direction.
In case of leftward shift;
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Left shift
Bit shifts leftward every bit
Shift out at bit 15

Zero is set to bit 0.
CONT=1:
Shift is the same as above, but 1s are set to shifted bits.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Left shift
0 0 0 0 0 0 1 <1> 1 <1> 0 0 1 <1> 0 0
Each bit shifts leftward. Status 1 remains unchanged
(c) Reset (RST)

The shifted out data (W1=1) is reset (W1=0).
RST=0: W1 is not reset.
RST=1: W1 is reset (W1=0).
(d) Actuation signal (ACT)

Shift processing is done when ACT=1. For shifting one bit only,
execute an instruction when ACT=1, and then, set ACT to 0
(ACT=0).
- 288 -
Parameters
(a) Shift data addresses
Sets shift data addresses. These designated addresses require a
continuous 2-byte memory for shift data.
Bit numbers are represented by bit 0 to 15 as shown below. When
addresses are designated for programming, an address number is
attached every 8 bits, and the designable bit numbers are 0 to 7.
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Designated address
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
Designated address +1
Shifted out
W1=0: "1" was not shifted out because of the shift operation.
W1=1: "1" was shifted out because of the shift operation.
- 289 -
4.9 CODE CONVERSION
The following types of code conversion instruction are available. Use

any of these instructions as appropriate for your purpose.
Instruction Sub
Processing
name number
1 COD 7 Code conversion
2 CODB 27 Binary code conversion
3 DCNV 14 Data conversion
4 DCNVB 31 Extended data conversion
5 DEC 4 Decoding
6 DECB 25 Binary decoding
- 290 -
4.9.1 COD (Code Conversion: SUB 7)
Converts BCD codes into an arbitrary two- or four-digits BCD numbers.

For code conversion shown in Fig. 4.9.1 (a) the conversion input data
address, conversion table, and convert data output address must be
provided.
Set a table address, in which the data to be retrieved from the
conversion table is contained, to conversion table input data address in
a two-digits BCD number. The conversion table is entered in sequence
with the numbers to be retrieved in the two- or four-digits number. The
contents of the conversion table of the number entered in the
conversion input data address is output to the convert data output
address. As shown in Fig. 4.9.1 (a), when 3 is entered in the conversion
input data address, the contents 137 located at 3 in the conversion table
is output to the convert data output address.
Table internal address Conversion table

Conversion input 0
data address 3
1
¡¡¡¡
Specifies table internal 2
number (BCD two-digits).
3 137
4
Convert data
output address
¡¡¡¡
Data of the specified table internal address
is output to this address.
n
Fig. 4.9.1 (a) Code conversion diagram
- 291 -
Format
mnemonic format.
BYT Error output

W1
¡¡¡¡. ¡ SUB 7
RST ¡¡¡ Size of table data
COD ¡¡¡¡ Conversion input data address
¡¡¡¡. ¡ ¡¡¡¡ Converted data output address
ACT
¡¡¡¡. ¡
Control condition
Table address Convert data
0 ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
1 ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
2 ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
3 ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
Fig. 4.9.1 (b) Format of COD instruction
Table 4.9.1 Mnemonic of COD instruction

Step Address
number No.
2 RD.STK ¡¡¡¡ .¡ RST BYT RST
3 RD.STK ¡¡¡¡ .¡ ACT BYT RST ACT
4 SUB 7 COD instruction
5 (PRM) ¡¡¡ Size of table data
6 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Conversion input data address
7 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Convert data output address
8 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Convert data at table address 0
: : : :
7+n (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Data at {n (convert data at table address) - 1}
7 + n + 1 WRT ¡¡¡¡ .¡ Error output W1
- 292 -
Control conditions
(a) Specify the data size. (BYT)
BYT=0: Specifies that the conversion table data is to be BCD
two digits.
BYT=1: Specifies that the conversion table data is to be BCD
four digits.
(b) Error output reset (RST)

RST=0: Disable reset
RST=1: Sets error output W1 to 0 (resets).

ACT=0: The COD instruction is not executed. W1 does not
change.
ACT=1: Executed.
Parameters
(a) Size of table data
A conversion table data address from 00 to 99 can be specified.
Specify n+1 as the size of table when n is the last table internal
number.
(b) Conversion input data address

The conversion table address includes a table address in which
converted data is loaded. Data in the conversion table can be
retrieved by specifying a conversion table address.
One byte (BCD 2-digit) is required for this conversion input data
address.
(c) Convert data output address

The convert data output address is the address where the data
stored in the table is to be output. The convert data BCD two
digits in size, requires only a 1-byte memory at the convert data
output address.
Convert data BCD four digits in size, requires a 2-byte memory at
the convert data output address.
- 293 -
Error output (W1)

If an error occurs in the conversion input address during execution of
the COD instruction, W1=1 to indicate an error.
For example, W1=1 results if a number exceeding the table size
specified in the sequence program is specified as the conversion input
address. When W1=1, it is desirable to effect an appropriate interlock,
such as having the error lamp on the machine tool operator's panel light
or stopping axis feed.
Conversion data table

The size of the conversion data table is from 00 to 99.
The conversion data can be either BCD two digits or four digits, which
is specified depends on the control conditions.
- 294 -
4.9.2 CODB (Binary Code Conversion: SUB 27)
This instruction converts data in binary format to an optional binary

format 1-byte, 2-byte, or 4-byte data.
Conversion input data address, conversion table, and conversion data
output address are necessary for data conversion; as shown in Fig. 4.9.2
(a).
Compared to the "COD Function Instruction", this CODB function
instruction handles numerical data 1-, 2- and 4-byte length binary
format data, and the conversion table can be extended to maximum
256.
Table address Conversion table
Conversion data 0
address 2
¡¡¡¡
Specify table address here. 1
(binary format1 byte)
2 (Note 1) This table data is binary
format 2-byte data.
Conversion data 3
(Note 2) Conversion table is
output address 1250 written in the ROM
¡¡¡¡ together together with
Data stored in the specified ∼ ∼ the program, because it
table address is output to ∼ ∼ is defined in the
this address sequence program.
n
(n: max. 255)
Fig. 4.9.2 (a) Code conversion diagram
- 295 -
Format
mnemonic format.
Error output
W1
RST
SUB 27
CODB
ACT ¡ Format designation
¡¡¡ Number of conversion table data
¡¡¡¡ Conversion input data address
¡¡¡¡ * Conversion data output address
Fig. 4.9.2 (b) Format of CODB instruction
Table 4.9.2 Mnemonic of CODB instruction

Step Address
number No.
2 RD.STK ¡¡¡¡ .¡ ACT RST ACT
3 SUB 27 CODB instruction
5 (PRM) ¡¡¡ Size of table data
6 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Conversion input data address
: : : :
7+n Data at {n (convert data at table address) - 1}
7 + n + 1 WRT ¡¡¡¡ .¡ Error output W1
Control conditions
(a) Reset (RST)
RST=0: Do not reset.
RST=1: Reset error output W1 (W1=0).
(b) Activate command (ACT)

ACT=0: Do not execute CODB instruction
ACT=1: Execute CODB instruction.
- 296 -
Parameters
(a) Format designation
Designates binary numerical size in the conversion table.
1: Numerical data is binary 1-byte data.
(b) Number of conversion table data

Designates size of conversion table. 256 (0 to 255) data can be
made.
(c) Conversion input data address

Data in the conversion data table can be taken out by specifying
the table number. The address specifying the table number is
called conversion input data address, and 1-byte memory is
required from the specified address.
(d) Conversion data output address

Address to output data stored in the specified table number is
called conversion data output address.
Memory of the byte length specified in the format designation is
necessary from the specified address.
Conversion data table

Size of the conversion data table is maximum 256 (from 0 to 255).
Error output (W1)

If the table number in the conversion input data address exceeds the
number of the conversion table data when executing the CODB
instruction, W1=1.
- 297 -
4.9.3 DCNV (Data Conversion: SUB 14)
Converts binary-code into BCD-code and vice versa.
Format
mnemonic format.
Error output
BYT W1
¡¡¡¡.¡ SUB 14
CNV ¡¡¡¡.¡
DCNV
¡¡¡¡.¡ ¡¡¡¡ Input data address

RST
¡¡¡¡ Conversion result output
¡¡¡¡.¡
ACT
¡¡¡¡.¡
Control condition
Fig. 4.9.3 Format of DCNV instruction
Table 4.9.3 Mnemonic of DCNV instruction

Mnemonic format
condition
Step Address Bit No.
Instruction Remarks ST3 ST2 ST1 ST0
number No.
2 RD. STK ¡¡¡¡ .¡ CNV BYT CNV
3 RD. STK ¡¡¡¡ .¡ RST BYT CNV RST
4 RD. STK ¡¡¡¡ .¡ ACT BYT CNV RST ACT
5 SUB 14 DCNV instruction
7 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Conversion result output
address
8 WRT ¡¡¡¡ .¡ W1 error output W1
- 298 -
Control conditions
(a) Specify data size. (BYT)
BYT=0: Process data in length of one byte (8 bits)
BYT=1: Process data in length of two bytes (16 bits)
(b) Specify the type of conversion (CNV)

CNV=0: Converts binary-code into BCD-code.
CNV=1: Converts BCD-code into binary-code.
(c) Reset (RST)

RST=0: Disables reset.
RST=1: Resets error output W1. That is, setting RST to 1 when
W1=1, makes W1=0.

ACT=0: Data is not converted. W1 does not alter.
ACT=1: Data is converted.
Parameters
(a) Input data address
Specify the address of the input data
(b) Output address after conversion
Specify the address output data converted into BCD or binary type
Error output (W1)

W1=0: Normal
W1=1 : Conversion error
W1=1 if the input data which should be BCD data, is
binary data, or if the data size (byte length) specified in
advance is exceeded when converting binary data into
BCD data.
- 299 -
4.9.4 DCNVB (Extended Data Conversion: SUB 31)

This instruction converts 1, 2, and 4-byte binary code into BCD code or
vice versa. To execute this instruction, you must preserve the
necessary number of bytes in the memory for the conversion result
output data.
Format
mnemonic format.
SIN
W1
CNV
SUB 31
¡ Format specification
RST DCNVB ¡¡¡¡ * Input data address
¡¡¡¡ * Conversion result output address
ACT
Fig. 4.9.4 Format of DCNVB instruction
Table 4.9.4 Mnemonic of DCNVB instruction

Mnemonic format
condition
Step Address
number No.
1 RD ¡¡¡¡ .¡ SIN SIN
2 RD. STK ¡¡¡¡ .¡ CNV SIN CNV
3 RD. STK ¡¡¡¡ .¡ RST SIN CNV RST
4 RD. STK ¡¡¡¡ .¡ ACT SIN CNV RST ACT
5 SUB 31 DCNVB instruction
6 (PRM) ¡ Size of table data
7 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Conversion input data
address
- 300 -
Control conditions
(a) Sign of the data to be converted (SIN)
This parameter is significant only when you are converting BCD
data into binary coded data. It gives the sign of the BCD data.
Note that though it is insignificant when you are converting binary
into BCD data, you cannot omit it.
SIN=0: Data (BCD code) to be input is positive.
SIN=1: Data (BCD code) to be input is negative.
(b) Type of conversion (CNV)

CNV=0: Convert binary data into BCD data
CNV=1: Convert BCD data into binary data.
(c) Reset (RST)

RST=0: Release reset
RST=1: Reset error output W1. In other words, set W1=0.

ACT=0: Data is not converted. The value of W1 remains
unchanged.
ACT=1: Data is converted.
Parameters
Specify data length (1,2, or 4 bytes).
Use the first digit of the parameter to specify byte length.
1: one byte
2: two bytes
4: four bytes
(b) Input data address

Specify the address containing the input data address.
(c) Address for the conversion result output

Specify the address to output the data converted to BCD or binary
format.
- 301 -
Error output (W1)

W1=0: Correct conversion
W1=1: Abnormally
(The data to be converted is specified as BCD data but is found to be
binary data, or the specified number of bytes cannot contain (and hence
an overflow occurs) the BCD data into which a binary data is
converted.)
This register is set with data on operation. If register bit 1 is on, they
signify the following.
For the positive/negative signs when binary data is converted into BCD
data, see R9000.
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
R9000
Negative
Overflow
(data exceeds the number of bytes specified)
- 302 -
4.9.5 DEC (Decode: SUB 4)
Outputs 1 when the two-digit BCD code signal is equal to a specified

number, and 0 when not. Is used mainly to decode M or T function.
The value type in this instruction is BCD.
Format
Fig. 4.9.5 (a) shows the ladder format and Table 4.9.5 (a) shows the
mnemonic format.
Decoding result output

W1
ACT
SUB 4
DEC
¡¡¡¡.¡ ¡¡¡¡.¡
Address of decode signal
¡¡¡¡ Decode instruction
¡¡¡¡ ¡¡ ¡¡
Control condition Number of digits instruction
Number of digits instruction
Fig. 4.9.5 (a) Format of DEC instruction
Table 4.9.5 (a) Mnemonic of DEC instruction

Step Address
number No.
2 DEC ¡¡¡¡ Code signal address
3 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Decode specification
4 WRT ¡¡¡¡ .¡ W1, decoding result output W1
The mnemonic-format instruction name "DEC" for step number 2

above may be abbreviated as "D".
Control condition
ACT=0: Turns the decoding result output off (W1).
ACT=1: Performs decoding.
When the specified number is equal to the code signal, W1=1; when
not, W1=0.
- 303 -
Parameters
(a) Code signal address
Specify the address containing two-digit BCD code signals.
(b) Decode specification

There are two paths, the number and the number of digits.
Decode specification ¡¡ ¡¡
Number of digits specification

Number specification
(i) Number:
Specify the decode number.
Must always be decoded in two digits.
(ii) Number of digits:
01: The high-order digit of two decimal digits is set to 0
and only the low-order digit is decoded.
10: The low-order digit is set to 0 and only the high-order
digit is decoded.
11: Two decimal digits are decoded.
W1 (decoding result output)
W1 is 1 when the status of the code signal at a specified address is

equal to a specified number, 0 when not. The address of W1 is
determined by designer.
W1
SUB 4 R200
DEC
R100.0 R103.1 3011
R228.1
Fig. 4.9.5 (b) Ladder diagram using the DEC instruction
Table 4.9.5 (b) Mnemonic for Fig. 4.9.5 (b)

Step Address
Instruction Bit No. Remarks
number No.
1 RD R100 .0
2 AND R103 .1
3 DEC R200
4 (PRM) 3011
5 WRT R228 .1
- 304 -
4.9.6 DECB (Binary Decoding: SUB 25)
DECB decodes one, two, or four-byte binary code data. When one of
the specified eight consecutive numbers matches the code data, a
logical high value (value 1) is set in the output data bit which
corresponds to the specified number. When these numbers do not
match, a logical low value (value 0) is set.
Use this instruction for decoding data of the M or T function.
DECB instruction. The extended specification allows 8n consecutive
values to be decoded at a time. For the details of the setting of a format
specification parameter, see the description of parameters.
Format
SUB 25 Decode result output

¡
Code ¡¡¡¡ 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
DECB
data ¡¡¡¡
¡¡¡¡ Decode designating
number +0
1, 2 or 4-byte
binary code data Decode designating
number +1
Decode designating
number +7
Decode designating numbers
Eight numbers, each of which is added by 0, 1, 2, . . . , and 7 to the specified
number are decoded.
When number 62 is specified, for example, eight numbers of 62 to 69 are
decoded.
If code data is 62, 0 bit of output data is turned on; if 69, 7th bit is turned on.
Fig. 4.9.6 (a) Function of DECB instruction (basic specification)
- 305 -
Decode result output

SUB 25 0ooo
Code ¡¡¡¡ 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
data DECB ¡¡¡¡
¡¡¡¡ Decode designating
number +0
1, 2 or 4-byte
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
binary code data
Decode designating
number +8
8n-1 8(n-1)
Decode designating
number +(8n-1)
Decode designating numbers

8n numbers, each of which is added by 0, 1, 2, . . . , and (8n-1) to the specified
number are decoded. (n is set by the format specification parameter)
When number 62 is specified, for example, 8n numbers of 62 to 62+8n-1 are
decoded.
If code data is 62, 0 bit of output data+0 is turned on; if 77, 7th bit of output
data+1 is turned on.
Fig. 4.9.6 (b) Function of DECB instruction (extended specification)
Figs. 4.9.6 (c) and (d) show the ladder formats and Tables 4.9.6 (a) and
(b) show the mnemonic formats.
ACT
SUB 25
¡ Format specification
DECB ¡¡¡¡ * Code data address
¡¡¡¡ Decode designation
¡¡¡¡ Decode result output address
Fig. 4.9.6 (c) Format of DECB instruction (basic specification)
Table 4.9.6 (a) Mnemonic of DECB instruction (basic specification)

Step Address
number No.
2 SUB 25 DECB instruction
4 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Code data address
5 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Decode designation
6 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Decode result output address
- 306 -
ACT
SUB 25
0ooo Format specification
DECB ¡¡¡¡ * Code data address
¡¡¡¡ Decode designation
¡¡¡¡ Decode result output address
Fig. 4.9.6 (d) Format of DECB instruction (extended specification)
Table 4.9.6 (b) Mnemonic of DECB instruction (extended specification)

Step Address
number No.
2 SUB 25 DECB instruction
3 (PRM) 0ooo Format specification
4 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Code data address
5 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Decode designation
6 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Decode result output address
Control conditions
(a) Command (ACT)
ACT=0: Resets all the output data bits.
ACT=1: Decodes data.
Results of processing is set in the output data address.
- 307 -
Parameters
Set the size of code data to the 1st digit of the parameter.
0001: Code data is in binary format of 1 byte length
0002: Code data is in binary format of 2 bytes length
0004: Code data is in binary format of 4 bytes length
When setting format specification in the following extended format,
DECB can decode multiple (8 × n) bytes by 1 instruction.
0nn1: In case of decoding multiple (8 × nn) bytes and code data
is binary format of 1 byte length
is binary format of 2 bytes length
is binary format of 4 bytes length
The nn is the numerical value from 02 to 99. When setting 00 or
01, it works for decoding 8 numbers.
Format specification (extended specification) :

0 n n X
The byte length setting of code data

1: 1 byte length
2: 2 byte length
4: 4 byte length
The multiple decoding number setting

00-01:
It decodes 8 continuous numbers.
The decode result output address needs a memory of 1 byte length.
02-99:
It decodes multiple (8 nn) continuous numbers.
The decode result output address needs a memory of nn bytes length.
(b) Code data address

Specifies the numbers to be decoded.
(c) Number specification decode designation

Specifies the numbers to be decoded.
(d) Decode result address

Specifies an address where the decoded result shall be output.
A one-byte area is necessary in the memory for the output.
When executing this instruction in extended specification, the
area of setting by the format specification for the nn bytes is
necessary.
- 308 -
4.10 OPERATION INSTRUCTION
The following types of operation instruction are available. Use any of

Instruction Sub
Processing
name number
1 ADDB 36 Binary addition
2 SUBB 37 Binary subtraction
3 MULB 38 Binary multiplication
4 DIVB 39 Binary division
5 ADD 19 BCD addition
6 SUB 20 BCD subtraction
7 MUL 21 BCD multiplication
8 DIV 22 BCD division
9 NUMEB 40 Definition of binary constants
10 NUME 23 Definition of BCD constants
- 309 -
4.10.1 ADDB (Binary Addition: SUB 36)
This instruction performs binary addition between 1-, 2-, and 4-byte
data. In the operation result register (R9000), operating data is set
besides the numerical data representing the operation results. The
required number of bytes is necessary to store each augend, the added,
and the operation output data.
Format
mnemonic format.
Error output
RST W1
SUB 36
ADDB o00o Format specification

ACT ¡¡¡¡ * Augend address
¡¡¡¡ * Addend data (address)
¡¡¡¡ * Result output address
Fig. 4.10.1 Format of ADDB instruction
Table 4.10.1 Mnemonic of ADDB instruction

Step Address
number No.
2 RD. STK ¡¡¡¡ .¡ ACT RST ACT
3 SUB 36 ADDB instruction
5 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Augend address
6 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Addend data (address)
7 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Result output address
- 310 -
Control conditions
(a) Reset (RST)
RST=1: Resets error output W1. In other words, makes W1=0.
(b) Command (ACT)

ACT=0: Do not execute ADDB. W1 does not change now.
ACT=1: Execute ADDB.
Parameters
Specifies data length (1, 2, and 4 bytes) and the format for the
addend (constant or address).
0 0

1: 1 byte length data
2: 2 bytes length data
Format specification
0: Constant data
1: Address data
(b) Augend address

Address containing the augend.
(c) Addend data (address)

Specification in (a) determines the format of the addend.
(d) Result output address

Specifies the address to contain the result of operation.
Error output (W1)

W1=0: Operation correct
W1=1: Operation incorrect
W1 goes on (W1=1) if the result of addition exceeds the
specified data length.
- 311 -
This register is set with data on operation. If register bit is on, they
signify the following operation data:
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
R9000
Zero
Negative
Overflow
- 312 -
4.10.2 SUBB (Binary Subtraction: SUB 37)
This instruction subtracts one data from another, both data being in the
binary format of 1, 2 or 4 bytes.
In the operation result register (R9000), operation data is set besides
the numerical data representing the operation. A required number of
bytes is necessary to store the subtrahend, minuend, and the result
(difference).
Format
mnemonic format.
Error output
RST W1
SUB 37
SUBB o00o Format specification

ACT ¡¡¡¡ * Menuend address
¡¡¡¡ * Minuend data (address)
Fig. 4.10.2 Format of SUBB instruction
Table 4.10.2 Mnemonic of SUBB instruction

Step Address
number No.
3 SUB 37 SUBB instruction
5 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Minuend address
6 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Minuend data (address)
- 313 -
Control conditions
(a) Reset (RST)
RST=1: Resets error output W1. (Set W1 to 0.)
(b) Command (ACT)

ACT=0: Do not execute SUBB. W1 does not change now.
ACT=1: Execute SUBB.
Parameters
subtrahend (constant or address).
0 0

0: Constant data
1: Address data
(b) Minuend address

Address containing the minuend.
(c) Minuend data (address)

Specification in (a) determines the format of the minuend.

Error output (W1)

W1 goes on (W1=1) if the result of subtraction exceeds the
specified data length.
- 314 -
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
R9000
Zero
Negative
Overflow
- 315 -
4.10.3 MULB (Binary Multiplication: SUB 38)
This instruction multiplies 1-, 2-, and 4-byte binary data items. In the
operation result register (R9000), operation data is set besides the
numerical data representing the operation.
A required number of bytes is necessary to store multiplicand,
multiplier, and the result (product).
Format
mnemonic format.
Error output
RST W1
SUB 38
MULB o00o Format specification

ACT ¡¡¡¡ * Multiplicand address
¡¡¡¡ * Multiplier data (address)
Fig. 4.10.3 Format of MULB instruction
Table 4.10.3 Mnemonic of MULB instruction

Step Address
number No.
3 SUB 38 MULB instruction
5 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Multiplicand address
6 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Multiplier data (address)
- 316 -
Control conditions
(a) Reset (RST)
(b) Command (ACT)

ACT=0: Do not execute MULB. W1 does not change now.
ACT=1: Execute MULB.
Parameters
multiplier (constant or address).
0 0

0: Constant data
1: Address data
(b) Multiplicand address

Address containing the multiplicand.
(c) Multiplier data (address or constant)

Specification in (a) determines the format of the multiplier.

Error output (W1)

W1 goes on (W1=1) if the result of multiplication exceeds
the specified data length.
- 317 -
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
R9000
Zero
Negative
Overflow
- 318 -
4.10.4 DIVB (Binary Division: SUB 39)
This instruction divides binary data items 1, 2, and 4 byte in length. In

the operation result register (R9000), operation data is set and
remainder is set to R9002 and following addresses.
A required number of bytes is necessary to store the dividend, divisor,
and the result (quotient).
Format
mnemonic format.
Error output
RST W1
SUB 39
DIVB o00o Format specification

ACT ¡¡¡¡ * Dividend address
¡¡¡¡ * Divisor data (address)
Fig. 4.10.4 Format of DIVB instruction
Table 4.10.4 Mnemonic of DIVB instruction

Step Address
number No.
3 SUB 39 DIVB instruction
5 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Dividend address
6 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Divisor data (address)
- 319 -
Control conditions
(a) Reset (RST)
(b) Command (ACT)

ACT=0: Do not execute DIVB. W1 does not change now.
ACT=1: Execute DIVB.
Parameters
divisor (constant or address).
0 0

Format specification 4: 4 bytes length data
0: Constant data
1: Address data
(b) Dividend address

Address containing the dividend
(c) Divisor data (address)

Specification in (a) determines the format of the divisor.

Specified the address to contain the result of operation.
Error output (W1)

W1 goes on (W1=1) if the divisor is 0.
- 320 -
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
R9000
Zero
Negative
Overflow
Remainder output address
Depending on its length, the remainder is stored in one or more of

registers R9002 to R9005.
- 321 -
4.10.5 ADD (BCD Addition: SUB 19)
Adds BCD two- or four-digit data.
Format
mnemonic format.
BYT W1
Error output
¡¡¡¡.¡ SUB 19
RST
ADD ¡¡¡¡.¡
¡¡¡¡.¡ ¡ Data format of addend (Constant or address)

ACT ¡¡¡¡ Summand address
¡¡¡¡ Addend
¡¡¡¡.¡ ¡¡¡¡ Sum output address
Control conditions
Fig. 4.10.5 Format of ADD instruction
Table 4.10.5 Mnemonic of ADD instruction

Mnemonic format
condition
Step Address
number No.
4 SUB 19 ADD instruction
5 (PRM) ¡ Addend format
6 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Summand address
7 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Addend (address)
8 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Sum output address
- 322 -
Control conditions
BYT=0: Data is BCD two digits long.
BYT=1: Data is BCD four digits long.
(b) Reset (RST)

RST=0: Release reset.
RST=1: Resets error output W1, that is, sets W1 to 0.

ACT=0: The ADD instruction is not executed. W1 does not
change.
ACT=1: The ADD instruction is executed.
Parameters
(a) Data format of addend
0: Specifies addend with a constant.
1: Specifies addend with an address.
(b) Summand address

Set the address storing the summand.
(c) Addend (address)

Addressing of the addend depends on above (a).
(d) Sum output address

Set the address to which the sum is to be output.
Error output
W1=0: Normal operation
W1=1: Abnormal operation. W1 is set to 1 to indicate an error, e.g. if
the result of the addition exceeds the data size specified for
control condition (a) described above.
- 323 -
4.10.6 SUB (BCD Subtraction: SUB 20)
Subtracts BCD two- or four-digit data.
Format
mnemonic format.
BYT W1
Error output
¡¡¡¡.¡ SUB 20
RST
SUB ¡¡¡¡.¡
¡¡¡¡.¡ ¡ Data format of subtrahend
ACT ¡¡¡¡ Minuend address
¡¡¡¡ Subtrahend
¡¡¡¡.¡ ¡¡¡¡ Difference output address
Control condition
Fig. 4.10.6 Format of SUB instruction
Table 4.10.6 Mnemonic of SUB instruction

Step Address
number No.
4 SUB 20 SUB instruction
5 (PRM) ¡ Data format of subtrahend
6 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Minuend address
7 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Subtrahend (address)
8 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Difference output address
- 324 -
Control conditions
(a) Specification of the number of digits of data. (BYT)
BYT=0: Data BCD two digits long
BYT=1: Data BCD four digits long
(b) Reset (RST)


ACT=0: The SUB instruction is not executed. W1 does not
change.
ACT=1: The SUB instruction is executed.
Parameters
(a) Data format of subtrahend
0: Specifies subtrahend with a constant.
1: Specifies subtrahend with an address.
(b) Minuend address

Set the address storing the minuend.
(c) Subtrahend (address)

Addressing of the subtrahend depends on above (a).
(d) Difference output address

Sets the address to which the difference is output.
Error output
W1=1: Abnormal operation. W1 is set 1 to indicate an error if the
difference is negative.
- 325 -
4.10.7 MUL (BCD Multiplication: SUB 21)
Multiplies BCD two- or four-digit data. The product must also be BCD
two- or four-digit data.
Format
mnemonic format.
BYT W1
Error output
¡¡¡¡.¡ SUB 21
RST
MUL ¡¡¡¡.¡
¡¡¡¡.¡ ¡ Data format of multiplier (constant or address)

ACT ¡¡¡¡ Multiplicand address
¡¡¡¡ Multiplier
¡¡¡¡.¡ ¡¡¡¡ Product output address
Control conditions
Fig. 4.10.7 Format of MUL instruction
Table 4.10.7 Mnemonic of MUL instruction

Mnemonic format
condition
Step Address
number No.
4 SUB 21 MUL instruction
5 (PRM) ¡ Data format of multiplier
6 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Multiplicand address
7 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Multiplier (address)
8 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Product output address
- 326 -
Control conditions
(b) Reset (RST)

RST=0: Releases reset.

ACT=0: The MUL instruction is not executed. W1 does not
change.
ACT=1: The MUL instruction is executed.
Parameters
(a) Data format of multiplier
0: Specifies multiplier with a constant.
1: Specifies multiplier with an address.
(b) Multiplicand address

Sets the address storing the multiplicand.
(c) Multiplier (address)

Addressing of the multiplier depends on above (a).
(d) Product output address

Set the address to which the product is output.
Error output
W1=1: Abnormal operation. W1=1 is set to indicate an error if the
product exceeds the specified size.
- 327 -
4.10.8 DIV (BCD Division: SUB 22)
Divides BCD two- or four-digit data. Remainders are discarded.
Format
mnemonic format.
BYT W1
Error output
¡¡¡¡.¡ SUB 22
RST
DIV ¡¡¡¡.¡
¡¡¡¡.¡ ¡ Divisor data format designation (constant or address)

ACT ¡¡¡¡ Dividend address
¡¡¡¡ Divisor (address)
¡¡¡¡.¡ ¡¡¡¡ Quotient output address
Control conditions
Fig. 4.10.8 Format of DIV instruction
Table 4.10.8 Mnemonic of DIV instruction

Mnemonic format
condition
Step Address
number No.
4 SUB 22 DIV instruction
5 (PRM) ¡ Divisor data format
designation
6 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Dividend address
7 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Divider (address)
8 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Quotient output address
- 328 -
Control conditions
(b) Reset (RST)

RST=0: Releases reset.

ACT=0: The DIV instruction is not executed. W1 does not
change.
ACT=1: The DIV instruction is executed.
Parameters
(a) Divisor data format designation
0: Specifies divisor data by constant.
1: Specifies divisor data by address.
(b) Dividend address

Sets the address storing the dividend.
(c) Divisor (address)

Addressing of the divisor depends on above (a).
(d) Quotient output address

Sets the address to which the quotient is output.
Error output
W1=1: Abnormal operation. W1=1 is set to indicate an error if the
divider is 0.
- 329 -
4.10.9 NUMEB (Definition of Binary Constants: SUB 40)
This instruction defines 1, 2, or 4-bytes long binary constant. Data

entered in decimal during programming is converted into binary data
during program execution. The binary data is stored in the specified
memory address(es).
NUMEB instruction. The extended specification allows all the set
constants to be defined simultaneously in an array having n elements.
This extended specification is effective when initializing a large
memory area with value. For the details of the setting of a format
specification parameter, see the description of parameters.
Format
Figs. 4.10.9 (a) and (b) show the ladder formats and Tables 4.10.9 (a)
and (b) show the mnemonic formats.
ACT
SUB 40
NUMEB ¡ Format specification
¡¡¡¡ Constant
¡¡¡¡ Constant output address
Fig. 4.10.9 (a) Format of NUMEB instruction (basic specification)
Table 4.10.9 (a) Mnemonic of NUMEB instruction (basic specification)

Step Address
number No.
2 SUB 40 NUMEB instruction
4 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Constant
5 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Constant output address
- 330 -
ACT
SUB 40
0ooo Format specification
NUMEB
¡¡¡¡ Constant
¡¡¡¡ Constant output address
Fig. 4.10.9 (b) Format of NUMEB instruction (extended specification)
Table 4.10.9 (b) Mnemonic of NUMEB instruction (extended specification)

Step Address
number No.
2 SUB 40 NUMEB instruction
3 (PRM) 0ooo Format specification
Control conditions
(a) Command (ACT)
ACT= 0: Do not execute NUMEB.
ACT=1 : Execute NUMEB.
- 331 -
Parameters
Specifies data length (1, 2, or 4 bytes).
Use the first parameter digit to specify byte length:
0001: Binary data of 1 byte length
When setting format specification in the following extended

format, NUMEB can define all the set constants simultaneously in
an array having nn elements.
Specify data length (1, 2, or 4) to the 1st digit as above-mentioned.
Specify the number of the array in which is a constant to the 2nd
and 3rd digit is defines.
Specify 0 to the 4th digit.
0nn1: In case of defining multiple (nn) data by 1 byte length
The n is the numerical value from 02 to 99. When setting 00 or 01,

it works as the basic specification that works for one data.
Format specification (extended specification):

0 n n x
The byte length setting of constant

1: 1 byte length
2: 2 byte length
4: 4 byte length
Number of data in the array

00-01 :
It defines constant at 1 memory.
02-99 :
It defines constants at multiple (nn) memory.
(b) Constant
Defined constants in decimal format. Set a constant data within
the effective range for the byte length which is set in above (a).
(c) Constant output address

Specifies the address of the area for output of the binary data. The
memory of the number of bytes which is set in above (a) is
necessary.
When setting format specification in the extended format, it is
necessary to reserve memory of (byte length) × (number of array
elements which define constant) which was set in above (a).
- 332 -
4.10.10 NUME (BCD Definition of Constant: SUB 23)
Defines constants, when required. In this case, constants are defined

with this instructions. The value type in this instruction is BCD.
Format
mnemonic format.
BYT
SUB 23
NUME ¡¡¡¡ Constant
¡¡¡¡.¡
ACT ¡¡¡¡ Constant output
address
¡¡¡¡.¡
Instruction
Control condition
Fig. 4.10.10 Format of NUME instruction
Table 4.10.10 Mnemonic of NUME instruction

Step Address
number No.
3 SUB 23 NUME instruction
Control conditions
(a) Specify the number of digits of a constant. (BYT)
BYT=0: Constant is BCD two digits long.
BYT=1: Constant is BCD four digits long.
(b) Execution command (ACT)

ACT=0: The NUME instruction is not executed.
ACT=1: The NUME instruction is executed.
- 333 -
Parameters
(a) Constant
Sets the constant as the number of digits specified for control
condition (a).
(b) Constant output address

Sets the address to which the constant defined in parameter (a) is
output.
- 334 -
4.11 INSTRUCTIONS RELATED TO CNC FUNCTIONS
The functions of the CNC can be used by means of the functional

instructions of the PMC system. The following types of instruction are
available. Use any of these instructions as appropriate for your
purpose.
Instruction Sub
Processing
name number
1 DISPB 41 Message display
2 EXIN 42 External data input
3 WINDR 51 Reading of CNC window data
4 WINDW 52 Writing of CNC window data
5 AXCTL 53 PMC axis control
- 335 -
4.11.1 DISPB (Display Message: SUB 41)
This instruction displays messages on the CNC screen. You can also
specify the message number to generate an alarm in the CNC.
You can program up to 2000 messages. You must use the special
message addresses in your program to simplify use of the messages.
The following are the features of this function.
NOTE
To use this instruction requires that the external data
input option or external message option be set on the
CNC side.
(a) In the program, specify 0 in the parameter and set ACT to 1. See
Fig. 4.11.1 (a).
If you set any bit of the message display request memory
(addresses A) to "1" when ACT = 1, the instruction displays the
message data defined in the message data table corresponding to
that bit. While the message is displayed, the bit of the message
display status memory corresponding to that message remains to
be "1".
Even if multiple messages are requested simultaneously, the
instruction does not necessarily display all the requested
messages. The number of messages that can be displayed
simultaneously is determined by the specifications of the CNC
screen. For example, if the CNC is designed to display up to four
messages on its screen at a time, a fifth message cannot be
displayed unless any of the four currently displayed messages is
cleared. This way, you can display the sixth and subsequent
messages as you clear the currently displayed messages one by
one.
- 336 -
Message display request memory Message data table
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 A000.0 (Message data corresponding to

A0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 address A000.0)
A1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
A000.1 (Message data corresponding to
A2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 address A000.1)
|
| ∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼
| ∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼
A249 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
A249.7 (Message data corresponding to

address A249.7)
Message display status memory

NC message screen
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
xxxx:(Message of A000.0)
A9000 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1
A9001 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 yyyy:(Message of A000.1)
A9002 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 zzzz:(Message of A249.7)
|
| ∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼
|
A9249 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 [ ][ ][ ][ ][ ]
Fig. 4.11.1 (a) Message display request memory, message display status memory, and message data table
NOTE
When ACT = 0, no message display processing is
performed at all. Make sure that ACT is always set
to "1" and code the program so that the message
display can be enabled or disabled by setting the
data in the message display request memory.
(i) Message display request memory

The message display request memory consists bits at A addresses
on each PMC model. One bit corresponds to one type of message
data.
If you want to display a message on the CNC screen, set the
corresponding display request memory 1. Set 0 to erase the
message of CNC screen.
- 337 -
(ii) Message display status memory

This memory locates at the address A9000 to A9249 and has 2000
bits. Each bit corresponds to a message. While displaying a
message in CNC screen, the corresponding bit is set to 1. The
ladder can not write on this memory.
(iii) Message data table

This table stores messages corresponding to the message display
request bits. The table is stored in the EPROM together with the
sequence program. Message data table numbers correspond to the
message display request memory addresses.
The message data table capacity is prepared by the maximum
capacity of a message, or, 255 characters (255 bytes). Produce a
message data within this capacity.
A character prepared in CNC screen key consists of one byte, and
4 bytes are necessary for a message number (consisting of 4
characters) in the next item. A character not covered by the CNC
screen keys requires two bytes (a half-width kana character) or
four bytes (a kanji character or other full-width character). For
details, see the column "Defining characters not found in the CNC
screen" described later.
(iv) Message number

There are two specifications - the same specification as that for
the previous PMC models (standard specification) and extended
specification added for 30i/31i/32i-A PMC. When the number of
paths to be controlled is three or less, the standard specification
can be applied to set message numbers for 30i/31i/32i-A PMC.
When four or more paths are to be controlled, however, message
numbers must be set based on the extended specification.
- 338 -
• Standard specification (applicable when the number of paths

to be controlled is three or less)
This message number consisting of 4 digits must always be
defined at the start of each message data. Using this four-
digit number, set the type and number of the message and the
CNC screen on which the message is to be displayed. The
CNC screen is as specified below by this message number.
Message
CNC screen Display contents
number
1000 to Alarm screen Alarm message
1999 (on path 1) • Path 1 is placed in the alarm state.
2000 to
Operator Operator message
2099(*Note)
message
2100 to Operator message (with no message
screen
2999(*Note) number)
Alarm message
• Path 2 is placed in the alarm state.
5000 to Alarm screen
• The displayed message number is a
5999 (on path 2)
specified number from which 4000 is
subtracted.
Alarm message
• Path 3 is placed in the alarm state.
7000 to Alarm screen
• The displayed message number is a
7999 (on path 3)
specified number from which 6000 is
subtracted.
NOTE
Normally, the number of the operator message with
the message number is 100 (2000 to 2099) and the
number of it without the message number is 900
(2100 to 2999). By setting into the CNC parameter
No. 6310 "The number of the operator message
with the message number", you can change the
number of it with the message number.
(Example)
400 is set into the CNC parameter No.6310
- 2000 to 2399 displaying with the number
- 2400 to 2999 displaying without the number
- 339 -
• Extended specification
Set an eight-digit or nine-digit alphanumeric character string
at the start of each set of message data to indicate the type
and number of the message and the CNC screen on which the
message is to be displayed.
The format is as follows:
Alarm message
AL1+000=
Operator message
OP1+000=
Explanation:
AL 1 + 000 =
<1> <2> <3>
<1>: The first two characters indicate whether the
message is an alarm message or operator message.
<2>: Represents a path number. In the case of an alarm
message, specify a path number. In the case of an
operator message, specify the top path number in a
machine group number. (Note)
<3>: This value represents a message number. In the case
of an operator message, it indicates whether the
message has a message number or not.
NOTE
1 The path number specified with alarm message and
operator message is the interface path number in
PMC side.
2 For the path number for the operator message,
Specify the top path number. If you specify other
path number except the top, the operator message is
not displayed.
- 340 -
The following table shows the message numbers and the

corresponding CNC screens.
Message
CNC screen Display contents
number
AL1+000= to Alarm screen Alarm message
AL1+999= (Path 1) • Path 1 is placed in the alarm state.
OP1+000= to
Operator message Operator message
OP1+099=
screen
OP1+100= to Operator message
(Machine group 1)
OP1+999= (with no message number)
OP2+000= to
OP2+099=
screen
(Machine group 2)
OP3+000= to
OP3+099=
screen
(Machine group 3)
NOTE
The message number differs between an operator
message with a message number and that with no
message number. Note this difference when
displaying operator messages.
(b) You need not use numerical codes for message data input. Instead,
when programming, directly key in the characters making up the
messages (from the CNC screen keyboard). For the characters
that CNC screen does not provide for, you must enter these
characters by numerical data with special symbols "@". For
details, see the column "Defining characters not found in the CNC
screen" described later.
- 341 -
(c) If you write the message data items in the ROM after
programming, you cannot change them any more (they will
become fixed data items). The only exception is numerical values
you want to use as variables. You can display these values,
existing in memory at the time when the message display starts, by
defining their memory addresses in the message data. Note,
however, that their values in memory cannot be displayed in real
time.
(d) A message is displayed on the NC alarm message/operator
message screen.
When using the DISPB instruction, you must satisfy the following
conditions:
To use DISPB, the optional External Data Input function or
External Message Display is necessary for NC.
Format
Fig. 4.11.1(b) shows the ladder format and Table 4.11.1(a) shows the
mnemonic format.
ACT
SUB 41
DISPB 0 (Not used)
Fig. 4.11.1(b) Format of DISPB instruction
Table 4.11.1(a) Mnemonic of DISPB instruction

Step Address
number No.
2 SUB 41 DISPB instruction
3 (PRM) 0 (Not used)
Control conditions
ACT=0: Do not display messages on the CNC screen.
ACT=1: Display the messages on the CNC screen.
- 342 -
Parameter
This parameter is not used.
Enter "0" as the input value. (NOTE)
NOTE
Thanks to the compatibility with the former models,
the instruction runs normally if the entered value is in
the range between 1 and 2000.
Numerical data display

To change the numerical data contained within the messages, enter in
the messages the number of digits making up the data and the memory
address to contain the data. To differentiate between the numerical
data from the other message data, write it within [ ] in the message.
Since the brackets, [ ], are used to contain numerical data, they are not
themselves treated as symbols to be included in the messages.
(a) Numerical data format

(i) Signed
[Ibid, ¡¡¡¡]
Address where the numerical data is stored

Set binary data in the specified address.
Set the "bid" data after the letter "I":
b: Number of bytes (1, 2, or 4)

i: Number of digits in the integer part (0 to 8)
d: Number of digits in the decimal part (0 to 8)
(ii) Unsigned
[Ubid, ¡¡¡¡]
Address where the numerical data is stored
Set binary data in the specified address.
Set the "bid" data after the letter "U".

b: Number of bytes (1, 2, or 4)
i: Number of digits in the integer part (0 to 8)
d: Number of digits in the decimal part (0 to 8)
- 343 -
NOTE
1 Sum of integer part digits and fractional part digits
must be within 8.
2 Blank is displayed for digits exceeding 8 digits.
3 Do not use any space between the brackets, [ ].
(b) Example
The following message includes 3 digits tool number at the
spindle and the offset data (¡.¡¡) for this tool. And these data
are contained in memory address of 2bytes:
SPINDLE TOOL NO. = [I230, oooo]
OFFSET DATA = [I212, ∆∆∆∆]
- 344 -
Defining characters not found in the CNC screen
Message characters not covered by the CNC screen keys (kanji and
half-width kana characters) can be input as follows:
(a) Half-width kana characters

(i) Data format
Numerical code enclosed by @ and @
(ii) Input method
Enter the numerical codes corresponding to the characters to
be input, by referring to the character code table (Table
4.11.1(b)). Each character requires two bytes.
Characters covered by the CNC screen keys can also be input
in this way.
(iii) Example
NOTE
Spaces are used between each numerical code in
example to understand easily, but do not use them
actually.
(b) Kanji (full-width) characters

(i) Data format
Numerical code enclosed by @02 and 01@
(ii) Input method
Enter the codes corresponding to the characters to be input,
in accordance with JIS level-1/2 kanji set. Each character
requires four bytes.
NOTE
1. It recommends that Kanji character is input from
FANUC LADDER-III.
2. Some Kanji characters cannot be displayed. These
characters can be checked by “Invalid kanji character
check button” on FANUC LADDER-III.
3. For operation of FANUC LADDER-III , refer to the
following manual:
- 345 -
(iii) Example
CAUTION
1 To define @, enter @40...@, where 40 is the code
corresponding to @40 . . . . . @
Code for @
2 To renew the message line displayed on the CNC
screen, input as:@ 0A @ at the end of the data.
3 When using numerical codes, @ code occupies 1
byte, and space code occupies 2 bytes. (Space code
= 20, 2 and 0 occupies 1 byte each).
4 The following control codes are used: 02: 2-byte
code (kanji and hiragana characters) 01: 1-byte code
(alphanumeric and half-width kana characters) Do
not specify 02 or 01 between @02 and 01@, as
follows. The characters may not be correctly
displayed. @02 ... 02 ... 01@ @02 ... 01 ... 01@
5 Spaces are used between each numerical code in
example to understand easily, but do not use them
actually.
Table 4.11.1(b) Character code table
*1) Minus, *2) Under bar, *3) Long bar *4) Dakuten *5) Han-dakuten
Notes when this functional instruction is used in subroutine
See Subsection 1.4.4.3 for details.
- 346 -
Message shift function

(a) General
In the message data areas corresponding to contiguous message
display request memory locations, message data can be displayed
in any of several languages.
The language in which a message is displayed is selected by
shifting the message display request bit according to the address
bit shift amount set the parameter in setting screen.
A0.0 Language 1 When A0.0 is turned on after setting the
A0.1 Language 2 message display request bit shift amount to 2,
A0.2 Language 3 the message display request bit is shifted by 2
A0.3 Language 4 bits to display language 3.
A0.4 Language 5
The parameters set on the setting screen are listed below. See
Subsection 2.4.1 and Section 9.5 for details.
• Message shift value
Message display request bit shift amount
• Message shift start address
Start bit address of the message display request bit area to be
shifted
(b) Examples
Example 1:
Message data in any of four languages is set starting at A0.0
in the order of Japanese, English, Italian, German, Japanese
and so on. The Italian message data is displayed.
Set the parameters as follows:
Message shift value : 2
Message shift start address : A0.0
(Message shift value = 0:Japanese/1:English/2:Italian/
3:German)
Manipulate A0.0, A0.4, A1.0, and A1.4 with the ladder.
Message table
A0.0 Japanese 1
When A0.0 is turned on, Italian 1 is displayed.
A0.1 English 1
(The message data is shifted by 2 bits).
A0.2 Italian 1
A0.3 German 1
A0.4 Japanese 2
A0.5 English 2 When A0.4 is turned on, Italian 2 is displayed.
A0.6 Italian 2 (The message data is shifted by 2 bits).
A0.7 German 2
: :
Am.n :
- 347 -
Example 2:.
As common alarm messages, English message data is
displayed with A0.0 through A9.7. Operator messages are
set starting at A10.0 in the order of Japanese, English, Italian,
German and so on, and German message data is displayed.
Message shift value : 3
(Message shift value = 0:Japanese/1:English/
2:Italian/3:German)
Manipulate A10.0, A10.4, A11.0, A11.4, and so forth with
the ladder.
When any of A0.0 to A9.7 is turned on, the message
corresponding to the bit is displayed.
Message table
A0.0 English A (ALARM)

A0.1 English B (ALARM) When A0.1 is turned on, English
B is displayed.
A0.2 English C (ALARM)
∼ ∼
A10.0 Japanese 1 (OPE) When A10.0 is turned on,
A10.1 English 1 (OPE) German 1 is displayed. (The
A10.2 Italian 1 (OPE) message data is shifted by 3
bits).
A10.3 German 1 (OPE)
A10.4 Japanese 2 (OPE)
A10.5 English 2 (OPE) When A10.4 is turned on,
German 2 is displayed. (The
A10.6 Italian 2 (OPE) message data is shifted by 3
A10.7 German 2 (OPE) bits).
: :
: :
A m.n :
- 348 -
Example 3:
As common alarm messages, English message data is
displayed with A0.0 through A9.7. Operator messages are
set starting at A10.0 in the order of Japanese, English, Italian,
German and so on, with 40 successive messages assigned to
each language. For these messages, German message data is
displayed.
Message shift value : 120 (40 × 3)
(Message shift value = 0:Japanese/40:English/
80:Italian/120:German)
Manipulate A10.0 through A14.7 with the ladder.
When any of A0.0 to A9.7 is turned on, the message
corresponding to the bit is displayed.
Message table
A0.0 English A (ALARM)

When A0.1 is turned on, English
A0.1 English B (ALARM)
B is displayed.
A0.2 English C (ALARM)
∼ ∼
When A10.0 is turned on,
∼ ∼
German 1 is displayed.
When A10.1 is turned on,
A15.0 English 1 (OPE) German 2 is displayed.
(The message data is shifted
A15.1 English 2 (OPE)
∼ ∼ by 120 bits).
A20.0 Italian 1 (OPE)
∼ A20.1 Italian 2 (OPE)

∼
: :
Am.n :
- 349 -
(c) Notes
The same message number should be assigned to a message in
each language that has the same meaning.
Message table
A0.0 1000 English A (ALARM)

∼ A0.1 1001 English B (ALARM) ∼
A10.0 1000 Japanese 1 (OPE)
A10.1 1001 Japanese 2 (OPE)
PMC message multi-language display function

The PMC message multi-language display function manages the
language of alarm message and operator message stored in a separate
file from ladder program, switching the language according to the
language setting of CNC using the message data defined in various
languages.
For more details about this function, refer to “2.6 PMC MESSAGE
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY FUNCTION”.
- 350 -
4.11.2 EXIN (External Data Input: SUB 42)
This instruction enables the use of the external data input functions
(options) of the CNC. It controls the "external data input signals" to be
exchanged between CNC and PMC and automatically executes the
CNC-PMC handshake sequence. The use of this instruction facilitates
the execution of the external data input functions.
NOTE
When using this instruction, do not directly write the
"external data input signals" to be exchanged
between CNC and PMC. Writing these signals
directly causes an adverse effect on the handshake
sequence, potentially disabling the external data
input functions or causing them to malfunction.
You can use the EXIN instruction only when optional external data
input function is provided with NC.
Four-byte control data as described below is required for external data
input function (option).
In addition to the basic specification, the extended specification is also
supported that needs six bytes of control data. With this setting, the
extended operation can use ED16 to ED31 signals (for program
number O8 digits etc.). To use the extended specification, it is
necessary to set to CNC parameter 6300#7 (EEXIN)=1.
CNC parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6300 EEXIN
[Data format] Bit type
EEXIN EXIN function of PMC
0: basic specification
1: extended specification
NOTE
1 To use program number O8 digits, the option with
program number O8 digits and NC parameter
6300#7 (EEXIN)=1 are necessary.
2 The change of NC parameter 6300#7 requires CNC
re-boot.
- 351 -
Format
mnemonic format.
ACT
W1
SUB 42
EXIN
¡¡¡¡ Control data
address
Fig. 4.11.2 Format of EXIN instruction
Table 4.11.2 Mnemonic of EXIN instruction

Step Address
number No.
2 SUB 42 EXIN instruction
3 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Control data address
4 WRT ¡¡¡¡ .¡ Transmission completion W1
Control conditions
ACT=0: Do not process external data input/output.
ACT=1: Process external data input/output.
ACT is to be maintained '1' till the end of external data input/output.
After external data input, reset ACT (W1 = 1).
- 352 -
Parameter
(a) Control data
The control data needs 4 continuous bytes from the specification
address. The path is specified to the 1st byte. The addresses G0
to G2 of the interface from PMC to NC are specified by after 3
bytes. For 2nd path, the addresses G1000 to G1002 are specified.
For 3rd path, the addresses G2000 to G2002 are specified.
In case of the extended specification (program number O8 digits
etc.), a control data is extended. In this case, the control data
address needs 6 continuous bytes from the specified address. The
path is specified in the 1st byte. The addresses G0 to G2 and
G210 to G211 of the interface from PMC to NC are specified in
later 5 bytes. For 2nd path, the addresses G1000 to G1002 and
G1210 to G1211 are specified. For 3rd path, the addresses G2000
to G2002 and G2210 to G2211 are specified.
Extended specification
Basic specification
(program number O8 digits etc.)
CTL+0 CTL+0
HEAD.NO. HEAD.NO.
+1 +1
ED0 to ED7 ED0 to ED7
+2 +2
ED8 to ED15 ED8 to ED15
+3 +3
EA0 to EA6,ESTB ED16 to ED23
+4 +4
ED24 to ED31
+5
EA0 to EA6,ESTB
+6
[For single path control]

CTL+0 : 0
CTL+1 to CTL+3 : Data to be specified for G0 to G2

etc.), it sets CTL+1 to CTL+5 as follows.
CTL+5 : Data to be specified for G2
- 353 -
[For multi path control]

(1) 1st path
CTL+0 : 0 or 1

(2) 2nd path

CTL+0 : 2

(3) 3rd path

CTL+0 : 3

(4) 4th path

CTL+0 : 4

- 354 -
(5) 5th path

CTL+0 : 5

(6) 6th path

CTL+0 : 6

(7) 7th path
CTL+0 : 7

(8) 8th path

CTL+0 : 8

- 355 -
(9) 9th path

CTL+0 : 9

(10) 10th path

CTL+0 : 10

NOTE
Refer to the NC connecting manual for detailed data
to be specified concerning external data input.
- 356 -
End of transfer (W1)

This indicates end of transfer of external data. This transfer end
condition shows the end of a series of external data input sequence.
This functional instruction executes a series of transfer sequence, and
finally sets ESTB = 0 in the PMC → NC interface. As a result, W1 is
set to 1 (W1 = 1) after confirming that EREND = 0.
When W1 = 1, transfer of data is over. Reset ACT now.
CAUTION
1 The EXIN command cannot input multiple external
data items at the same time. Be sure to issue the
next EXIN command (ACT = 1) after external data
transfer ends (W1 = 1).
2 Be sure to specify an interlock when the external
data input function is used by commands other than
the function command EXIN.
3 When an external program number search, one of
the external data input functions, is executed, the
end of data transfer (W1 = 1) means that the search
command has been accepted. Note that this does
not mean the completion of the program search. To
confirm the completion of the program search, check
the search completion signal (ESEND = 1) after the
data transfer ends (W1 = 1).
Operation output register

If any of the following errors occurs during external data input, the bit
in the operation output register is set. In this case, external data transfer
ends (W1 = 1).
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
R9000
EXIN error
(Description of errors)
• When the EXIN command (ACT = 1) is started, the strobe
signal (ESTB) or EREND signal is already on. The external
data may be input by commands other than the function
command EXIN.
See Subsection 1.4.4.3 for details.

- 357 -
4.11.3 WINDR (Reading CNC Window Data: SUB 51)
This function reads various data items via the window between the
PMC and the CNC.
The "WINDR" is classified into two types. One type completes reading
a data during one scan time. Another type completes reading a data
during a few scan times. The former is called the function of a high-
speed response and the latter is called the function of a low-speed
response.
Format
mnemonic format.
ACT W1
SUB 51
WINDR ¡¡¡¡ Control data
address
Fig. 4.11.3 Format of WINDR instruction
Table 4.11.3 Mnemonic of WINDR instruction

Step Address
number No.
2 SUB 51 WINDR instruction
4 WRT ¡¡¡¡ .¡ Read completion W1
Control condition
ACT=0: The WINDR function is not executed.
ACT=1: The WINDR function is executed. Using the function of a
high-speed response, it is possible to read the data
continuously by always keeping ACT on. However, using the
function of a low-speed response, as soon as reading a data is
completed (W1=1), reset "ACT" once (ACT=0).
- 358 -
Parameter
(a) Control data address
The PMC byte address is used to specify the area where control
data is stored.
Control data
CTL+0 Function code * Set the control data area by sequence
program before executing the
+2 Completion code "WINDR" or "WINDW".
+4 Data length
+6 Data number
+8 Data attribute
+10 * Only the size of the read data is

Read data
∼ ∼ necessary for the data area below to
"CTL+10" usually.
+n
See Chapter 5.
Reading completion (W1)

W1=0: "W1" is usually reset. The "W1=0" indicates that the
"WINDR" is not executed or the "WINDR" being executed
now.
W1=1: "W1" is set when the reading a data is completed by the
reading command (ACT=1). If the function of a low-speed
response is used, as soon as reading a data is completed
(W1=1), reset "ACT" (ACT=0).

If an error occurs during execution of the "WINDR" or "WINDW", the
bit in the operation output register is set. At the same time, the reading
completion is set (W1=1). Details of the error are output to the
completion code (CTL+2) in the control data area. See Chapter 5.
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
R9000
WINDR error
- 359 -
When you use the function of a low-speed response, there are a few
limitations. See Subsection 1.4.4.3. When you use the function of a
high-speed response, there is no limitation.
- 360 -
4.11.4 WINDW (Writing CNC Window Data: SUB 52)
This function writes various data items via the window between the
PMC and the CNC.
Format
mnemonic format.
ACT W1
SUB 52
¡¡¡¡ Control data
WINDW address
Fig. 4.11.4 Format of WINDW instruction
Table 4.11.4 Mnemonic of WINDW instruction

Step Address
number No.
2 SUB 52 WINDW instruction
4 WRT ¡¡¡¡ .¡ Write completion W1
Control condition
ACT=0: The WINDW function is not executed.
ACT=1: The WINDW function is executed. As soon as writing a data
is completed (W1=1), reset "ACT" once (ACT=0).
Parameter
(a) Control data address
The PMC byte address is used to specify the area where control
data is stored.
- 361 -
Control data
CTL+0 Function code * Set the control data area by sequence
program before executing the
+2 Completion code "WINDR" or "WINDW".
+4 Data length
+6 Data number
+8 Data attribute
+10 Writing data

∼ ∼
+n
See Chapter 5.
Writing completion (W1)

W1=0: "W1" is usually reset. The "W1=0" indicates that the
"WINDW" is not executed or the "WINDW" being executed
now.
W1=1: "W1" is set when the writing a data is completed by the
writing command (ACT=1). As soon as writing a data is
completed (W1=1), reset "ACT" (ACT=0).

If an error occurs during execution of the "WINDR" or "WINDW", the
bit in the operation output register is set. At the same time, the writing
completion is set (W1=1). Details of the error are output to the
completion code (CTL+2) in the control data area. See Chapter 5.
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
R9000
WINDW error
When you use the function of a low-speed response, there are a few
limitations. See Subsection 1.4.4.3. When you use the function of a
high-speed response, there is no limitation.
- 362 -
4.11.5 AXCTL (Axis Control by PMC: SUB 53)
NOTE
To use this function requires that the PMC axis
control option be set on the CNC side.
Function
This function simplifies the handshake of DI/DO signal for the axis
control by PMC.
Format
mnemonic format.
RST W1
SUB 53
¡¡¡¡ Group No. of DI/DO signal
ACT AXCTL ¡¡¡¡ Axis control data address
Fig. 4.11.5 Format of AXCTL instruction
Table 4.11.5 Mnemonic of AXCTL instruction

Step Address
number No.
3 SUB 53 AXCTL instruction
5 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Group No. of DI/DO signal
6 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Axis control data address
7 WRT ¡¡¡¡ .¡ Processing completion W1
- 363 -
Control condition
ACT=0: The AXCTL function is not executed.
If RST is 1, PMC axis control instruction reset processing is
performed.
ACT=1: The AXCTL function is executed.
ACT is to be maintained '1' till the end of AXCTL processing.
And reset ACT immediately after the processing is complete
(W1 = 1) or when the CNC enters the alarm state.
RST=1: Set the reset signal (ECLRx) to 1 and W1 becomes 0. All the
buffered commands are invalidated and the command being
executed is stopped.
If the CNC enters the alarm state, reset the PMC axis control
instruction by setting ACT to 0.
CAUTION
1 Usually, set both ACT and RST to 0. Set ACT or
RST to 1 only when executing the instruction. Note
that, while ACT or RST is set to 1, you cannot update
the ladder program after editing it.
2 If you make any change to the ladder program while
RST is set to 1, you may be unable to continue to
execute the AXCTL instruction when re-executing
the ladder program. When changing the ladder
program, set both ACT and RST to 0.
3 When RST and ACT become 1 at the same time,
RST is prior to ACT.
- 364 -
Parameters
(a) Group number of DI/DO signal
Specify the DI/DO signal group by the number.
Signal
Set value group DI address DO address
number
1 1 G142 to G149, G150.5 F130 to F132, F142
2 2 G154 to G161, G162.5 F133 to F135, F145
3 3 G166 to G173, G174.5 F136 to F138, F148
4 4 G178 to G185, G186.5 F139 to F141, F151
1001 5 G1142 to G1149, G1150.5 F1130 to F1132, F1142
1002 6 G1154 to G1161, G1162.5 F1133 to F1135, F1145
1003 7 G1166 to G1173, G1174.5 F1136 to F1138, F1148
1004 8 G1178 to G1185, G1186.5 F1139 to F1141, F1151
2001 9 G2142 to G2149, G2150.5 F2130 to F2132, F2142
2002 10 G2154 to G2161, G2162.5 F2133 to F2135, F2145
2003 11 G2166 to G2173, G2174.5 F2136 to F2138, F2148
2004 12 G2178 to G2185, G2186.5 F2139 to F2141, F2151
3001 13 G3142 to G3149, G3150.5 F3130 to F3132, F3142
3002 14 G3154 to G3161, G3162.5 F3133 to F3135, F3145
3003 15 G3166 to G3173, G3174.5 F3136 to F3138, F3148
3004 16 G3178 to G3185, G3186.5 F3139 to F3141, F3151
4001 17 G4142 to G4149, G4150.5 F4130 to F4132, F4142
4002 18 G4154 to G4161, G4162.5 F4133 to F4135, F4145
4003 19 G4166 to G4173, G4174.5 F4136 to F4138, F4148
4004 20 G4178 to G4185, G4186.5 F4139 to F4141, F4151
5001 21 G5142 to G5149, G5150.5 F5130 to F5132, F5142
5002 22 G5154 to G5161, G5162.5 F5133 to F5135, F5145
5003 23 G5166 to G5173, G5174.5 F5136 to F5138, F5148
5004 24 G5178 to G5185, G5186.5 F5139 to F5141, F5151
6001 25 G6142 to G6149, G6150.5 F6130 to F6132, F6142
6002 26 G6154 to G6161, G6162.5 F6133 to F6135, F6145
6003 27 G6166 to G6173, G6174.5 F6136 to F6138, F6148
6004 28 G6178 to G6185, G6186.5 F6139 to F6141, F6151
7001 29 G7142 to G7149, G7150.5 F7130 to F7132, F7142
7002 30 G7154 to G7161, G7162.5 F7133 to F7135, F7145
7003 31 G7166 to G7173, G7174.5 F7136 to F7138, F7148
7004 32 G7178 to G7185, G7186.5 F7139 to F7141, F7151
8001 33 G8142 to G8149, G8150.5 F8130 to F8132, F8142
8002 34 G8154 to G8161, G8162.5 F8133 to F8135, F8145
8003 35 G8166 to G8173, G8174.5 F8136 to F8138, F8148
8004 36 G8178 to G8185, G8186.5 F8139 to F8141, F8151
9001 37 G9142 to G9149, G9150.5 F9130 to F9132, F9142
9002 38 G9154 to G9161, G9162.5 F9133 to F9135, F9145
9003 39 G9166 to G9173, G9174.5 F9136 to F9138, F9148
9004 40 G9178 to G9185, G9186.5 F9139 to F9141, F9151
- 365 -
(b) Axis control data address

Select the addresses of the locations that contain PMC axis
control data.
+0 Not used Specify 0.
1 Control command (EC0x to EC6x)
2
Command data 1 (EIF0x to EIF15x)
4 Command data 2 (EID0x to EID31x)
6
(x=A/B/C/D)
7
- 366 -
The following functions are available.
Operation Control Command data 1 Command data 2

Rapid traverse 00H Feedrate Total travel
(Note 1) amount
Cutting feed (feed per min.) 01H Feedrate Total travel
(Note 2) amount
Cutting feed 02H Feedrate per Total travel
(feed per revolution) revolution amount
Skip (feed per min.) 03H Feedrate Total travel
amount
Dwell 04H Not used Dwell time
Reference pos. return 05H Feedrate Not used
(Note 1)
Continuous feed (Note 3) 06H Feedrate Feed direction
(Note 4)
1st ref. pos. return 07H Feedrate Not used
2nd ref. pos. return 08H (Note 1) Not used
3rd ref. pos. return 09H Not used
4th ref. pos. return 0AH Not used
External pulse 0BH Pulse weighting Not used
synchronization
(Position coder) (Note 3)
External pulse 0DH Pulse weighting Not used
synchronization (1st manual
pulse generator) (Note 3)
External pulse 0EH Pulse weighting Not used
synchronization (2nd manual
External pulse 0FH Pulse weighting Not used
synchronization (3rd manual
Speed command (Note 5) 10H Feedrate Not used
Torque control 11H Maximum Torque data
feedrate
Auxiliary function 1 12H Not used Auxiliary function
code
code
code
Machine coordinate system 20H Rapid traverse Machine
selection rate (Note 1) coordinate
position
Cutting feedrate (sec/block) 21H Cutting feed time Total travel
amount
Simultaneous start mode off 40H Not used Not used
Simultaneous start mode on 41H Simultaneous start group
- 367 -
CAUTION
1 The rapid traverse rate is effective when parameter
RPD (No. 8002#0) is set to 1.
2 When you specify 0 for feedrate, CNC does not
work. Please release this state by RST = 1.
3 When you end a continuous feed or external pulse
synchronization, set RST to 1. And, continuous feed
can't be used with buffering inhibits signal (EMBUFx)
= 1. You must set the signal to 0.
4 Specify the direction by most significant bit of
command data 2.
5 Command control axis must be specified to rotary
axis by setting parameter ROTx (No. 1006#0) to 0.
6 For details such as the range of command data,
please refer to the NC connecting manual.
7 The above table is not up-to-date. For the latest
information, refer to the descriptions about PMC axis
control in the "CNC Connection Manual (Functions)".
Example 1) In case of cutting feed (feed per min.)
+0 0H Not used (Specify 0).
Command code for cutting feed.

1 01H
(feed per min.)
2 Feedrate unit : mm/min.
4 Total travel amount
5 unit : 0.001mm
6
(x=A/B/C/D)
7
- 368 -
Example 2) In case of machine coordinate positioning.
+0 0H Not used (Specify 0).
Command code for machine coordinate

1 20H selection.
2 0
or In case of CNC PRM8002#0 = 0 not used.
Feedrate = 1 Feedrate.
3
Position in machine
4
coordinate system
(Absolute)
5
CAUTION
It is necessary to set the CNC parameters relating to
the axis movement.
End of command (W1)

W1=0: It is 0 usually. W1=1 indicates that AXCTL instruction is
completed.
Specify ACT=0 immediately after processing is completed.
(W1=1).
W1=1: It will become 1 when the command of the axis control by
PMC is buffered on CNC (when EMBUFx=0) or when axis
movement is completed (when EMBUFx=1).
- 369 -
When error occurs by processing the axis control by PMC, the bit of the
operation output register will be set. At the same time, processing is
over (W1=1).
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
R9000
Group number of DI/DO signal

specification error
NOTE
1 W1 becomes 1 regardless of the state of ACT.
2 It is not related to the state of the alarm signal
(EIALx).
- 370 -
Remarks
(1) The following signals cannot be operated from this function.
Please operate by LADDER.
• Axis control stop signal
ESTPx (G142.5, G154.5, G166.5, G178.5)
• Servo-off signal
ESOFx (G142.4, G154.4, G166.4, G178.4)
• Block stop signal
ESBKx (G142.3, G154.3, G166.3, G178.3)
• Block stop inhibit signal
EMSBKx (G143.7, G155.7, G167.7, G179.7)
• Controlled axis selection signal
EAX1 - EAX8 (G136.0 to 7)
• Override signal
*FV0E - *FV7E (G151.0 to 7)
• Override cancel signal
OVCE (G150.5)
• Rapid traverse override signal
ROV2E, ROV1E (G150.1,0)
• Dry run signal
DRNE (G150.7)
• Manual rapid traverse selection signal
RTE (G150.6)
• Skip signal
SKIP/ESKIP (X4.7,6)
• Buffering inhibit signal
EMBUFx (G142.2, G154.2, G166.2, G178.2)
(x=A/B/C/D)
WARNING
Movement cannot be sured when controlled axis
selection signal (EAXx) is changed in the state of
ACT=1.
(2) Buffering inhibit signal (EMBUFx)

0: The commands are buffered on the CNC.
Even if one command is being executed, the CNC accepts the
next command as long as there is vacancy in the buffer on
CNC.
W1 will become 1 when the command of the axis control by
PMC is buffered on CNC.
1: Prohibits the buffering on CNC.
W1 will become 1 when the movement of the instructed axis
control by PMC is completed.
- 371 -
4.12 PROGRAM CONTROL
The following types of program control instruction are available. Use

Instruction Sub
Processing
name number
1 COM 9 Common line control
2 COME 29 Common line control end
3 JMP 10 Jump
4 JMPE 30 Jump end
5 JMPB 68 Label jump 1
6 JMPC 73 Label jump 2
7 LBL 69 Label
8 CALL 65 Conditional subprogram call
9 CALLU 66 Unconditional subprogram call
10 SP 71 Subprogram
11 SPE 72 End of a subprogram
12 END1 1 End of a first level program
13 END2 2 End of a second level program
14 END3 48 End of a third level program
15 END 64 End of a ladder program
16 NOP 70 No operation
17 CS 74 Case call
18 CM 75 Sub program call in case call
19 CE 76 End of case call
- 372 -
4.12.1 COM (Common Line Control: SUB 9)
The coils in a region up to the common line control end instruction

(COME) are controlled.
Set 0 for the number of coils, and specify the range to be controlled
using the common line control end instruction.
If the common line control end instruction is not specified, the "COM
FUNCTION MISSING" error results.
ACT
SUB 9 0
COM
Range in
which the
COM
instruction is
effective
SUB 29
COME
Fig. 4.12.1 (a) Function of COM instruction
Format
mnemonic format.
ACT
SUB 9 0
COM
Fig. 4.12.1 (b) Format of COM instruction
Table 4.12.1 Mnemonic of COM instruction

Step Address
number No.
2 SUB 9 COM instruction
3 (PRM) 0 Specify 0.
- 373 -
Control conditions
ACT=0: The coils within the region specified are unconditionally
turned off (set to 0).
ACT=1: The program operates in the same way as when COM is not
used.
Parameter
(a) Specify 0. (Range specification only)
CAUTION
1 Operation of the COM instruction
Suppose a ladder diagram that includes the COM
instruction, as shown below.
ACT
SUB 9 0
COM
ON OUT1
OFF OUT2
¡
SUB 29
COME
For the "OUTx" coils, the COM instruction makes

the above ladder diagram similar to the ladder
description shown below.
ON ACT OUT1
OFF ACT OUT2

¡
A functional instruction in a range specified by

COM executes processing, regardless of COM
ACT. However, if COM ACT=0, the coil of the
execution result becomes 0.
2 Another COM instruction cannot be specified in the
range by the COM instruction.
3 If COM ACT=0, the coil of a WRT.NOT instruction in
a range specified by COM becomes 1
unconditionally as described in 1 above.
- 374 -
Caution
Do not create a program in which a combination of JMP and JMPE
instructions is used to cause a jump to and from a sequence between the
COM and COME instructions; the ladder sequence may not be able to
operate normally after the jump.
JMP instruction
COM instruction
×
Prohibited
JMP instruction
COM instruction
COME instruction
JMPE instruction ×
Prohibited
COME instruction
JMPE instruction
- 375 -
4.12.2 COME (Common Line Control End: SUB 29)
This instruction indicates the division in the region specification of the

common line control instruction (COM).
This instruction cannot be used alone. It must he used together with the
COM instruction.
Format
mnemonic format.
SUB 29
COME
Fig. 4.12.2 Format of COME instruction
Table 4.12.2 Mnemonic of COME instruction

Step Address
number No.
1 SUB 29 COME instruction
- 376 -
4.12.3 JMP (Jump: SUB 10)
The JMP instruction causes a departure from the normal sequence to

executing instructions. When a JMP instruction is specified,
processing jumps to a jump end instruction (JMPE) without executing
the logical instructions (including functional instructions) in the range
delimited by a jump end instruction (JMPE). (See Fig. 4.12.3 (a).)
Specify a range to be skipped using the jump end instruction.
When the jump end instruction is not specified, the message JUMP
FUNCTION MISSING is displayed.
ACT
SUB 10 0
JMP
Valid range
of the JMP
instruction
SUB 30
JMPE
Fig. 4.12.3 (a) Function of JMP instruction
- 377 -
Format
mnemonic format.
ACT
SUB 10 0
JMP
Fig. 4.12.3 (b) Format of JMP instruction
Table 4.12.3 Mnemonic of JMP instruction

Step Address
number No.
2 SUB 10 JMP instruction
3 (PRM) 0 Specify 0.
Control conditions
ACT=1: The logical instructions (including functional instructions) in
the specified range are skipped; program execution proceeds
to the next step.
ACT=0: The same operation as when JMP is not used is performed.
Parameters
(a) Specify 0. (Range specification only)
NOTE
JMP instruction operation
When ACT = 1, processing jumps to a jump end
instruction (JMPE); the logical instructions
(including functional instructions) in the specified
jump range are not executed. This instruction can
reduce the Ladder execution period (scan time).
- 378 -
Caution
Do not create a program in which a combination of JMP and JMPE
instructions is used to cause a jump to and from a sequence between the
COM and COME instructions; the ladder sequence may not be able to
operate normally after the jump.
JMP instruction
COM instruction
×
Prohibited
JMP instruction
COM instruction
COME instruction
JMPE instruction ×
Prohibited
COME instruction
JMPE instruction
- 379 -
4.12.4 JMPE (Jump End: SUB 30)
This instruction indicates the division in the region specification of the

jump instruction (JMP).
It cannot be used alone. It must be used together with the JMP
instruction.
Format
mnemonic format.
SUB 30
JMPE
Fig. 4.12.4 Format of JMPE instruction
Table 4.12.4 Mnemonic of JMPE instruction

Step Address
number No.
1 SUB 30 JMPE instruction
- 380 -
4.12.5 JMPB (Label Jump 1: SUB 68)
The JMPB functional instruction transfers control to a Ladder

immediately after the label set in a Ladder program. The jump
instruction can transfer control freely before and after the instruction
within the program unit (main program or subprogram) in which the
instruction is coded. (See the description of the LBL functional
instruction, which is be explained later.)
As compared with the conventional JMP functional instruction, JMPB
has the following additional functions:
• More than one jump instruction can be coded for the same label.
• Jump instructions can be nested.
Ladder program
Program unit Program unit

LBL AA
LBL AA
JMPB BB
JMPB AA
JMPB AA
JMPB AA LBL BB
Format
mnemonic format.
ACT
SUB 68
JMPB L¡¡¡¡ Specification
of the jump
destination
label
Fig. 4.12.5 Format of JMPB instruction
Table 4.12.5 Mnemonic of JMPB instruction

Step Address
number No.
2 SUB 68 JMPB instruction
3 (PRM) L¡¡¡¡ Specification of the jump
destination label
- 381 -
Control conditions
ACT=0: The next instruction after the JMPB instruction is executed.
ACT=1: Control is transferred to the Ladder immediately after the
specified label.
Parameters
(a) Label specification
Specifies the label of the jump destination. The label number
must be specified in the L address form. A value from L1 to
L9999 can be specified.
CAUTION
1 For the specifications of this instruction, see the
description of functional instruction JMP.
2 When this instruction is used to jump back to a
previous instruction, care must be taken not to cause
an infinite loop.
- 382 -
4.12.6 JMPC (Label Jump 2: SUB 73)
The JMPC functional instruction returns control from a subprogram to

the main program. Be sure to code the destination label in the main
program. The specifications of this JMPC functional instruction are
the same as those of the JMPB functional instruction, except that
JMPC always returns control to the main program.
• More than one jump instruction can be coded for the same label.
Ladder program
Main program Main program
LBL AA
LBL AA
LBL BB
Subprogram Subprogram
JMPC AA JMPC AA
JMPC AA JMPC BB
Format
mnemonic format.
ACT
SUB 73
JMPC L¡¡¡¡ Specification
of the jump
destination
label
Fig. 4.12.6 Format of JMPC instruction
Table 4.12.6 Mnemonic of JMPC instruction

Step Address
number No.
2 SUB 73 JMPC instruction
3 (PRM) L¡¡¡¡ Specification of the jump
destination label
- 383 -
Control conditions
ACT=0: The instruction after the JMPC instruction is executed.
ACT=1: Control is transferred to the Ladder after the specified label.
Parameters
Specifies the label of the jump destination. The label number
must be specified in the L address form. A number from L1 to
L9999 can be specified.
CAUTION
1 For the specifications of this instruction, see the
description of functional instruction JMP.
2 When this instruction is used to jump back to a
previous instruction, care must be taken not to cause
an infinite loop.
- 384 -
4.12.7 LBL (Label: SUB 69)
The LBL functional instruction specifies a label in a Ladder program.

It specifies the jump destination for the JMPB and JMPC functional
instructions. (See the explanation of the JMPB and JMPC functional
instructions.)
Ladder program
LBL AA
LBL AA
JMPB BB
JMPB AA
JMPC AA
JMPC AA LBL BB
Format
mnemonic format.
SUB 69
LBL Label
L¡¡¡¡
specification
Fig. 4.12.7 Format of LBL instruction
Table 4.12.7 Mnemonic of LBL instruction

Step Address
number No.
1 SUB 69 LBL instruction
2 (PRM) L¡¡¡¡ Label specification
- 385 -
Parameters
Specifies the jump destination for the JMPB and JMPC functional
instructions. The label number must be specified in the L address
form. A label number from L1 to L9999 can be specified. A label
number can be used more than once as long as it is used in a
different program unit (main program, subprogram).
NOTE
For the use of this instruction, see the description of
functional instruction JMP.
- 386 -
4.12.8 CALL (Conditional Subprogram Call: SUB 65)
The CALL functional instruction calls a subprogram. When a

subprogram number is specified in CALL, a jump occurs to the
subprogram if a condition is satisfied.
Format
mnemonic format.
ACT
SUB 65
CALL P¡¡¡¡ Subprogram number
Fig. 4.12.8 Format of CALL instruction
Table 4.12.8 Mnemonic of CALL instruction

Step Address
number No.
2 SUB 65 CALL instruction
3 (PRM) P¡¡¡¡ Subprogram number
Control conditions
(a) Input signal
ACT=0: The CALL instruction is not executed.
ACT=1: The CALL instruction is executed.
- 387 -
Parameters
(a) Subprogram number
Specifies the subprogram number of a subprogram to be called.
The subprogram number must be specified in the P address form.
Example: To call subprogram 1
ACT
SUB 65 P1
CALL
CAUTION
Be careful when using the CALL instruction with the
COM, COME, JMP, or JMPE functional instruction.
For details, see Subsection 1.4.4.
- 388 -
4.12.9 CALLU (Unconditional Subprogram Call: SUB 66)
The CALLU functional instruction calls a subprogram. When a

subprogram number is specified, a jump occurs to the subprogram.
Format
mnemonic format.
SUB 66
CALLU P¡¡¡¡ Subprogram number
Fig. 4.12.9 Format of CALLU instruction
Table 4.12.9 Mnemonic of CALLU instruction

Step Address
number No.
1 SUB 66 CALLU instruction
Parameters
Specifies the subprogram number of a subprogram to be called.
The subprogram number must be specified in the P address form.
Example: To call subprogram 1
SUB 66 P1
CALLU
- 389 -
4.12.10 SP (Subprogram: SUB 71)
The SP functional instruction is used to create a subprogram. A

subprogram number is specified as a subprogram name. SP is used
with the SPE functional instruction (mentioned later) to specify the
subprogram range.
Format
mnemonic format.
SUB 71
SP P¡¡¡¡ Subprogram number
Fig. 4.12.10 Format of SP instruction
Table 4.12.10 Mnemonic of SP instruction

Step Address
number No.
1 SUB 71 SP instruction
Parameters
Specifies the subprogram number of a subprogram to be coded
following this instruction. The subprogram number must be
specified in the P address form.
30i/31i/32i-A
Dual check safety
PMC(option)
P1 to P5000 P1 to P512 P1 to P512 P1 to P512
The specified subprogram number must be unique within the

sequence program.
Example: When the subprogram number is set to 1
SUB 71 P1
SP
- 390 -
4.12.11 SPE (End of a Subprogram: SUB 72)
The SPE functional instruction is used to create a subprogram. SPE is

used with the SP functional instruction. It specifies the range of a
subprogram. When this functional instruction has been executed,
control is returned to the functional instruction that called the
subprogram.
SUB 72
SPE
Fig. 4.12.11 Format of SPE instruction
Table 4.12.11 Mnemonic of SPE instruction

Step Address
number No.
1 SUB 72 SPE instruction
- 391 -
4.12.12 END1 (1st Level Sequence Program End: SUB 1)
Must be specifies once in a sequence program, either at the end of the

1st level sequence, or at the beginning of the 2nd level sequence when
there is no 1st level sequence.
SUB 1
END1
Fig. 4.12.12 Format of END1 instruction
Table 4.12.12 Mnemonic of END1 instruction

Step Address
number No.
1 SUB 1 END1 instruction
4.12.13 END2 (2nd Level Sequence Program End: SUB 2)
Specify at the end of the 2nd level sequence.
SUB2
END2

Step Address
number No.
- 392 -
4.12.14 END3 (3rd Level Sequence Program End: SUB 48)

Specify this command at the end of the 3rd level sequence program, i.e.
it indicates the end of the sequence program. If there is no 3rd level
sequence program, this instruction need not be specified.
SUB 48
END3

Step Address
number No.
4.12.15 END (End of a Ladder Program: SUB 64)

The END functional instruction designates the end of a ladder program.
END must be placed at the end of the ladder program.
SUB 64
END
Fig. 4.12.15 Format of END instruction
Table 4.12.15 Mnemonic of END instruction

Step Address
number No.
1 SUB 64 END instruction
4.12.16 NOP (No Operation: SUB 70)

During creation of a ladder program using the programmer, if the
program is compiled with specifying the setting with which a net
comment or form feed code is used and the point of the net comment is
output, position information of the net comment or form feed code is
output as the NOP instruction. This instruction performs no operation
during execution of the ladder.
- 393 -
4.12.17 CS (Case Call: SUB 74)
The combination of one CS, one or more CM and one CE is used to

construct a case call block.
The CS starts the case call block and the CE ends the block. Each CM
that should be located between the CS and CE specifies a sub program
to be called in each case.
Executing case call block, the CS instruction evaluates the case number
from its 1st parameter and only one of CMs that is selected by the case
number is activated and calls its associated sub program. When the
case number is 0, the 1st CM immediately after CS is executed and
certain sub program is called. When the case number is 1, the 2nd CM
after CS is executed. The number from 0 to 255 is allowed as the case
number. When the case number except 0 through 255 is detected on CS,
no sub program is called.
The CM instructions should be programmed immediately after the CS.

Other functions except CM must not be programmed between CS and
CE. If not so, an error will be detected in compiling process.
The case call block is available only in LEVEL2 and outside of a COM
and COME block where normal subprogram call instructions such as
CALL and CALLU are allowed. The case call block can be
programmed wherever normal subprogram call instructions can be
programmed.
- 394 -
In the following example program, the sub program corresponding to

the case number is called.
• R100 = 0 The sub program P10 is called.
• R100 = n The sub program P15 is called.
SUB10
JMP
0
SUB74 Case Call Block

CS
R100
Case number
SUB75
CM Case number 0
P10
Sub program address
SUB75
CM Case number 1
P20
Sub program address
SUB75
CM Case number 2
P50
Sub program address
..............
SUB75
CM Case number n
P15 (255 in maximum)
Sub program address
SUB76
CE
SUB30
JMPE
- 395 -
Format
mnemonic format.
SUB74
CS
¡¡¡¡ Case number
(Signed integer in 2 bytes
length)
Fig. 4.12.17 Format of CS instruction
Table 4.12.17 Mnemonic of CS instruction

Step Address
number No.
1 SUB 74 CS instruction
2 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ case number (Address)
Parameters
(a) Case number
Set the address or symbol of the variable in which the case number
is stored and commanded. The data type is signed integer in 2
bytes length.
NOTE
Case number is evaluated by CS only once in every
cycle. Even if you change the case number in the
sub program which is called by the case call block,
this change becomes effective in next cycle. This
means that only one or no sub program is called in
each case call block in each cycle.
- 396 -
4.12.18 CM (Sub Program Call in Case Call: SUB 75)

The CM that should be located between the CS and CE is used to

specify a sub program to be called when the case number meets the
condition.
See the section 4.12.17 CS (Case Call: SUB 74) in details.
Format
mnemonic format.
The CM should be programmed immediately after the CS .Other
functions except CM must not be programmed between CS and CE.
SUB75
CM
¡¡¡¡ Sub program address
(P address)
Fig. 4.12.18 Format of CM instruction
Table 4.12.18 Mnemonic of CM instruction

Step Address
number No.
1 SUB 75 CM instruction
2 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Sub program address
(P Address)
Parameters
(a) Sub program address
Set a P address or symbol of a sub program that is call in the case.
- 397 -
4.12.19 CE (End of Case Call: SUB 76)

The CE ends the case call block.
See the section 4.12.17 CS (Case Call: SUB 74) in details.
Format
Fig.4.12.19 shows the ladder format and Table 4.12.19 shows the
mnemonic format.
SUB76
CE
Fig. 4.12.19 Format of CE instruction
Table 4.12.19 Mnemonic of CE instruction

Step Address
number No.
1 SUB 76 CE instruction
- 398 -
4.13 ROTATION CONTROL
The following types of rotation control instruction are available. Use

Instruction Sub
Processing
name number
1 ROT 6 Rotation control
2 ROTB 26 Binary rotation control
- 399 -
4.13.1 ROT (Rotation Control: SUB 6)
Controls rotors, such as the tool post, ATC, rotary table, etc., and is
used for the following functions.
(a) Selection of the rotation direction via the shorter path
(b) Calculation of the number of steps between the current position
and the goal position
(c) Calculation of the position one position before the goal or of the
number of steps up to one position before the goal
Format
mnemonic format.
RN0
¡¡¡¡. ¡
BYT
¡¡¡¡. ¡
DIR Rotating direction
W1 output
SUB 6
¡¡¡¡. ¡ ROT
POS ¡¡¡¡ Rotor indexing number
¡¡¡¡ Current position address ¡¡¡¡. ¡
¡¡¡¡ Goal position address
¡¡¡¡. ¡ ¡¡¡¡ Operation result output address
INC
¡¡¡¡. ¡
ACT
¡¡¡¡. ¡
Control condition
Instruction
Fig. 4.13.1 (a) Format of ROT instruction
- 400 -
Table 4.13.1 Mnemonic of ROT instruction

Step Address
Instruction Bit No. Remarks ST5 ST4 ST3 ST2 ST1 ST0
number No.
1 RD ¡¡¡¡ .¡ RN0 RN0
2 RD. STK ¡¡¡¡ .¡ BYT RN0 BYT
3 RD. STK ¡¡¡¡ .¡ DIR RN0 BYT DIR
4 RD. STK ¡¡¡¡ .¡ POS RN0 BYT DIR POS
5 RD. STK ¡¡¡¡ .¡ INC RN0 BYT DIR POS INC
6 RD. STK ¡¡¡¡ .¡ ACT RN0 BYT DIR POS INC ACT
7 SUB 6 ROT
8 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Rotor indexing
number
9 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Current position
address
10 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Goal position
address
11 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Operation result
output address
12 WRT ¡¡¡¡ .¡ Output of rotation W1
direction
Control conditions
(a) Specify the starting number of the rotor. (RN)
RN0=0: Begins the number of the position of the rotor with 0.
RN0=1: Begins the number of the position of the rotor with 1.
(b) Specify the number of digits of the process data (position data).
(BYT)
BYT=0: BCD two digits
BYT=1: BCD four digits
(c) Select the rotation direction via the shorter path or not. (DIR)
DIR=0: No direction is selected. The direction of rotation is
only forward.
DIR=1: Selected. See rotating direction output (W1) described
below for details on the rotation direction.
(d) Specify the operating conditions. (POS)

POS=0: Calculates the goal position.
POS=1: Calculates the position one position before the goal
position.
- 401 -
(e) Specify the position or the number of steps. (INC)

INC=0: Calculates the number of the position. If the position
one position before the goal position is to be calculated,
specify INC=0 and POS=1
INC=1: Calculates the number of steps. If the difference
between the current position and the goal position is to
be calculated, specify INC=1 and POS=0.
(f) Execution command (ACT)

ACT=0: The ROT instruction is not executed. W1 does not
change.
ACT=1: Executed. Normally, set ACT=0. If the operation
results are required, set ACT=1.
Parameters
(a) Rotor indexing number
Specify the rotor indexing number.
(b) Current position address

Specify the address storing the current position.
(c) Goal position address

Specify the address storing the goal position (or command value),
for example the address storing the NC output T code.
(d) Operation result output address

Calculate the number of steps for the rotor to rotate, the number of
steps up to the position one position before, or the position before
the goal. When the calculating result is to be used, always check
that ACT=1.
- 402 -
Rotating direction output (W1)
The direction of rotation for control of rotation via the shorter path is
output to W1. When W1=0, the direction is forward (FOR) when 1,
reverse (REV). The definition of FOR and REV is shown in Fig. 4.13.1
(b). If the number given to the rotor is ascending, the rotation is FOR;
if descending, REV. The address of W1 can be determined arbitrarily.
When, however, the result of W1 is to be used, always check that
ACT=1.
An example of a 12-position rotor

(a) (b)
1 1
12 2 2 12
11 3
3 11
FOR REV REV FOR
10 4 4 10
9 5 5 9
8 6 6 8
7 7
Indexing fixed position Indexing fixed position
Fig. 4.13.1 (b) Rotation direction
- 403 -
4.13.2 ROTB (Binary Rotation Control: SUB 26)
This instruction is used to control rotating elements including the tool

post, ATC (Automatic Tool Changer), rotary table, etc. In the ROT
command a parameter indicating the number of rotating element
indexing positions is a fixed data in programming. For ROTB,
however, you can specify an address for the number of rotating element
index positions, allowing change even after programming. The data
handled are all in the binary format. Otherwise, ROTB is coded in the
same way as ROT.
Format
mnemonic format.
RN0
DIR
W1
POS
SUB 26
ROTB ¡ Format specification
¡¡¡¡ * Rotating element indexed position address
INC
¡¡¡¡ * Current position address
¡¡¡¡ * Target position address
¡¡¡¡ * Arithmetic result output address
ACT
Fig. 4.13.2 (a) Format of ROTB instruction
- 404 -
Table 4.13.2 Mnemonic of ROTB instruction

Step Address
Instruction Bit No. Remarks ST4 ST3 ST2 ST1 ST0
number No.
1 RD ¡¡¡¡ .¡ RN0 RN0
3 RD. STK ¡¡¡¡ .¡ DIR RN0 DIR
4 RD. STK ¡¡¡¡ .¡ POS RN0 BYT POS
5 RD. STK ¡¡¡¡ .¡ INC RN0 BYT DIR INC
6 RD. STK ¡¡¡¡ .¡ ACT RN0 BYT DIR POS ACT
7 SUB 26 ROTB
8 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Rotating element indexed
position address
9 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Current position address
10 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Target position address
11 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Arithmetic result output
address
12 WRT ¡¡¡¡ .¡ Output of rotation direction W1
Control conditions
The control conditions do not differ basically from those for ROT
command. However, BYT has been eliminated from ROTB (it forms
part of the ROTB parameters).
For the reset, see ROT.
Parameters
(a) Format
Specifies data length (1, 2, or 4 bytes). Use the first digit of the
parameter to specify the number of bytes.
1: 1 byte
2: 2 bytes
4: 4 bytes
All numerical data (number of indexed positions for the rotating
elements, current address, etc.) are in the binary format.
Therefore, they require the memory space specified by data
length.
(b) Rotating element indexed position address

Specifies the address containing the number of rotary element
positions to be indexed.
(c) Other parameters

For the functions and use of the other parameters, see the ROT
instruction.
- 405 -
Output for rotational direction (W1)
See the ROT instruction.
Example of using the ROTB instruction
Fig. 4.13.2 (b) illustrates a ladder diagram for a 12-position rotor to be

controlled for rotation via the shorter path and for deceleration at the
position one position before the goal.
• The goal position is specified with NC 32B of binary code
(address F26 to F29).
• The current position is entered with the binary code signal
(address X41) from the machine tool.
• The result of calculating the position one position before the goal
is output to address R230 (work area).
• Operation starts with the output TF (address F7.3) from the NC.
• The binary compare instruction (CMPB) is used to detect the
deceleration and stop positions.
- 406 -
A
A Logic 1
R0228.0 R0228.0
A
R0228.0
A
CR-
CCW Shorter path or
R0228.0 SUB 26 4 Reference data format not
A ROTB D0000 Rotor indexing number R0228.1
X0041 Current position address
F0026 Goal position address
R0228.0 R0230 Calculation result output address
A
R0228.0
A
R0228.0
TF CW-M CCW-M
F0007.3 Y0005.6 Y0005.7
TF
SUB 32
1004 Reference data format
COMPB
F0007.3 R0230 Reference data
X0041 Comparison data address
TF Deceleration
TDEC position
detection
R9000.0 F0007.3 R0228.2
TDEC TF Deceleration
DEC-M
command
R0228.2 F0007.3 Y0005.5
TCOMPB DEC-M
R0228.3 Y0005.5
TF
SUB 32
1004 Reference data format
COMPB
F0007.3 F0026 Reference data
X0041 Comparison data address
TF Goal position
TCO (stop position)
MPB
detection
R9000.0 F0007.3
R0228.3
TF CR-CCW TCOMPB Forward
CW-M rotation
F0007.3 R0228.1 R0228.3 command
Y0005.6
TF CR-CCW TCOMPB Reverse
CCW-M rotation
command
F0007.3 R0228.1 R0228.3 Y0005.7
Fig. 4.13.2 (b) Example of a ladder diagram for the ROTB instruction
- 407 -
4.14 INVALID INSTRUCTIONS
The instructions listed below are invalid for 30i/31i/32i-A PMC.

If a ladder program used for another model is run on 30i/31i/32i-A
PMC, these instructions are not executed. They cause no error but are
treated as NOP instructions (which perform no operation when the
ladder program is executed).
Instruction Sub
Processing
name number
SPCNT 46 Main axis control
DISP 49 Message display
MMCWR 98 Reading of MMC window data
MMCWW 99 Writing of MMC window data
PSGNL 50 Position signal output
PSGN2 63 Position signal output 2
FNC90 90 Auxiliary functional instruction 1
- 408 -
4.15 NOTE ON PROGRAMMING
Some functional instructions may cause the ladder program to take a

long time to stop or make it unable to stop, if their ACT or RST
condition remains on for no apparent reason. If the ladder program
does not stop, all operations aimed at changing the ladder program will
take longer to end or will never end.
To avoid such problems, when you code a ladder program using
functional instructions, you need to design the ladder structure based
on a thorough understanding of the control conditions of the individual
instructions you use.
Listed below are typical cases in which the ladder program will not
stop.
• A low-speed window function is used for a WINDR or
WINDW functional instruction, and its ACT condition
remains on.
• In an EXIN instruction, its ACT condition remains on.
• In an AXCTL instruction, its ACT condition or RST
condition remains on.
• The jump destination label is present before a JMPB
instruction.
• In a JMPC instruction, the jump destination label points to
the same JMPC instruction.
If the ladder program takes long to stop or does not stop for any of these
reasons, the following operations will be affected.
1. Stopping the ladder program using a soft key on the screen
2. Reading a new ladder program from a memory card or other
medium, by using the data input and output screen
3 Updating the ladder program with changes made using the
ladder diagram edit screen
If any of the above phenomena occurs, the functional instruction

causing the problem needs to be fixed. Check the functional
instructions mentioned above to see whether there is any ACT or RST
condition remaining on, and correct the ladder program according to
the following procedure.
1. Put the machine in safe condition and turn off the power of
the NC.
2. Turn on the power of the NC while holding down the "CAN"
and "Z" keys simultaneously, to restart the NC with the
ladder program halted.
3. In the ladder diagram edit screen, redesign the logic
associated with the problematic functional instruction.
When done, set the ACT or RST condition to off. If the same
operation is repeating because of an inadequate JMPB or
JMPC instruction, review the jump condition and, if
necessary, change the ladder structure.
- 409 -
4. Write the resulting logic to flash ROM using the I/O screen.
5. Run the ladder program.
If the ladder program does not stop or cannot be changed even after you
make the correction, there may be other functional instructions that
have the same condition settings. Check for other functional
instructions having the same condition settings, besides the one you
have corrected, and repeat the above procedure to correct them all.
- 410 -
B-63983EN/02 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS
5 WINDOW FUNCTIONS
This chapter describes the functions that can be executed with the
WINDR (SUB 51) and WINDW (SUB 52) functional instructions, as
well as the formats and other details of the control data to be set for
executing these functions.
1. Compatibility with Series 16i/18i/21i

The specifications of following WINDOW functions on Series
30i/31i/32i-A are different from ones on Series 16i/18i/21i.
• The new function “No.321 Reading a real type
parameter” has been added. To read a real type CNC
parameter, use this function.
• The new function “No.323 Writing a real type
parameter” has been added. To write a real type CNC
parameter, use this function.
• In the function “No.23 Reading the alarm status”, the
output value has been extended into 4 bytes and some
contents have been changed.
• The function “No.33 Reading diagnosis data” has been
equipped as low-speed response type.
• The new function “No.395 Reading the pitch error
compensation data” has been added. The function
“No.17, 154 Reading the parameter” can not read a
pitch error compensation data. Use this new function to
read it.
• The new function “No.396 Writing the pitch error
compensation data” has been added. The function
“No.18 Writing the parameter” can not write a pitch
error compensation data. Use this new function to write
it.
• There is no general-purpose analog input on Series
30i/31i/32i-A. So the function “No.34 Reading the feed
motor load current value (A/D conversion data)” can not
read it. This function can only read the feed motor load
current value.
- 411 -
5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/02
5.1 FORMATS OF CONTROL DATA
Input and output control data has the following structure.
Top address +0
Function code
2
Completion code
4 These data set as input data are remain

Data length
(Byte length of data area) unchanged in the output data.
6
Data number
8
Data attribute
10
Data area * Data length
Depends on the function.
≈ ≈
(1) In the explanation of the window functions below, minuses (-) in

the data structure fields indicate that input data need not be set in
these fields or that output data in these fields is not significant.
(2) All data is in binary unless otherwise specified.
(3) All data block lengths and data lengths are indicated in bytes.
(4) Output data is valid only when window processing terminates
normally.
(5) Output data always includes one of the following completion
codes. Note, however, that all of the completion codes listed are
not always provided for each function.
Completion code Meaning

0 Normal termination
1 Error (invalid function code)
2 Error (invalid data block length)
3 Error (invalid data number)
4 Error (invalid data attribute)
5 Error (invalid data)
6 Error (necessary option missing)
7 Error (write-protected)
- 412 -
5.2 LOW-SPEED RESPONSE AND HIGH-SPEED RESPONSE
There are two types of window function - one executed at high speed
and the other executed at low speed.
Number of scans to be executed until the window

TYPE
instruction is completed
TWO SCAN TIMES OR MORE (Depends on the CNC
LOW
processing priority and operation status.)
HIGH 1 SCAN TIME
When using the low-speed response window function, set ACT to 0

immediately after the data transfer end data (W1) is set to 1 for the
window instruction. For details, see "CAUTION" below.
CAUTION
1 The window instruction of a low-speed response is
controlled exclusively with the other window
instructions of low-speed response.
Therefore, when the data is read or written
continuously, it is necessary to clear ACT of the
functional instruction to 0 once when the completion
information (W1) become 1.
It does not work about ACT=1 of the other window
instructions of low-speed response such as W1=1
and ACT=1 of the window instruction of a low-speed
response.
The window instruction of a high-speed response is
not exclusively controlled like a low-speed response.
Therefore, when the data is read or written
continuously, yow need not make ACT=0.
2 The window instruction of a low-speed response
should be executed with the lowest required
frequency. If some window instruction of a low-
speed response is executed continuously with a
high frequency, the completion of the other window
instruction of low-speed response will be delayed, or
may not be done.
- 413 -
5.2.1 Note on the Programming of a Low-speed Response Window

Instruction
If a low-speed response window instruction is programmed to keep its

ACT condition to on for no apparent reason, it may result in the ladder
program taking a long time to stop or not being able to stop at all. If
the ladder program does not stop, all operations aimed at changing the
ladder program will take longer to end or will never end.
To avoid such problems, when you code a ladder program using
functional instructions, you need to design the ladder structure based
on a thorough understanding of the control conditions of the
individual instructions you use.
If the ladder program takes long to stop or does not stop for any of
these reasons, the following operations will be affected.
1. Stopping the ladder program using a soft key on the screen

2. Reading a new ladder program from a memory card or other
medium, by using the DATA I/O screen
3. Updating the ladder program with changes made using the
LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR screen
If any of the above phenomena occurs, the functional instruction

causing the problem needs to be fixed. For information about how to
fix the problem, see Section 4.15.
- 414 -
5.3 LIST OF WINDOW FUNCTIONS
Function group order

Function
Group Description Response R/W
code
CNC information 1 Reading CNC system information 0 High-speed R
(Section 5.4) 2 Reading a tool offset 13 High-speed R
3 Write a tool offset 14 Low-speed W
4 Reading a workpiece origin offset value 15 High-speed R
5 Writing a workpiece origin offset value 16 Low-speed W
6 Reading a parameter 17, 154 High-speed R
7 Writing a parameter 18 Low-speed W
8 Reading a real type parameter 321 High-speed R
9 Writing a real type parameter 323 Low-speed W
10 Reading setting data 19, 155 High-speed R
11 Writing setting data 20 Low-speed W
12 Reading a custom macro variable 21 High-speed R
13 Writing a custom macro variable 22 Low-speed W
14 Reading the CNC alarm status 23 High-speed R
15 Reading the current program number 24 High-speed R
16 Reading the current sequence number 25 High-speed R
17 Reading modal data 32 High-speed R
18 Reading diagnosis data 33 Low-speed R
19 Reading the P-code macro variable 59 High-speed R
20 Writing the P-code macro variable 60 Low-speed W
21 Reading CNC status information 76 High-speed R
22 Reading the current program number (8-digit program 90 High-speed R
numbers)
23 Entering data on the program check screen 150 Low-speed W
24 Reading clock data (date and time) 151 High-speed R
25 Reading the pitch error compensation data 395 High-speed R
26 Writing the pitch error compensation data 396 Low-speed W
Axis information 1 Reading the actual velocity of controlled axes 26 High-speed R
(Section 5.5) 2 Reading the absolute position (absolute coordinates) of 27 High-speed R
controlled axes
3 Reading the machine position (machine coordinates) of 28 High-speed R
controlled axes
4 Reading a skip position (stop coordinates of skip 29 High-speed R
operation (G31)) of controlled axes
5 Reading the servo delay for controlled axes 30 High-speed R
6 Reading the acceleration/deceleration delay on 31 High-speed R
controlled axes
7 Reading the feed motor load current value (A/D 34 High-speed R
conversion data)
- 415 -
Function
code
Axis information 8 Reading the actual spindle speed 50 High-speed R
(Section 5.5) 9 Reading the relative position on a controlled axis 74 High-speed R
10 Reading the remaining travel 75 High-speed R
11 Reading the actual velocity of each controlled axes 91 High-speed R
12 Reading actual spindle speeds 138 High-speed R
13 Entering torque limit data for the digital servo motor 152 Low-speed W
14 Reading load information of the spindle motor (serial 153 High-speed R
interface)
15 Reading the estimate disturbance torque data 211 High-speed R
16 Presetting the relative coordinate 249 Low-speed W
Tool life 1 Reading the tool life management data (tool group 38 High-speed R
management number)
functions 2 Reading tool life management data (number of tool 39 High-speed R
(Section 5.6) groups)
3 Reading tool life management data (number of tools) 40 High-speed R
4 Reading tool life management data (tool life) 41 High-speed R
5 Reading tool life management data (tool life counter) 42 High-speed R
6 Reading tool life management data (tool length 43 High-speed R
compensation number (1): Tool number)
compensation number (2): Tool order number)
8 Reading tool life management data (cutter radius 45 High-speed R
10 Reading tool life management data (tool information (1): 47 High-speed R
Tool number)
Tool order number)
12 Reading tool life management data (tool number) 49 High-speed R
13 Reading the tool life management data (tool life counter 160 High-speed R
type)
14 Registering tool life management data (tool group) 163 Low-speed W
15 Writing tool life management data (tool life) 164 Low-speed W
16 Writing tool life management data (tool life counter) 165 Low-speed W
17 Writing tool life management data (tool life counter type) 166 Low-speed W
18 Writing tool life management data (tool length 167 Low-speed W
20 Writing tool life management data (cutter radius 169 Low-speed W
- 416 -
Function
code
Tool life 22 Writing tool life management data (tool information (1): 171 Low-speed W
management Tool number)
functions
23 Writing the tool management data (tool information (2): 172 Low-speed W
(Section 5.6) Tool order number)
24 Writing tool life management data (tool number) 173 Low-speed W
25 Reading the tool life management data (tool group No.) 200 High-speed R
(8-digit tool number)
Tool number) (8-digit tool number)
27 Registering tool life management data (tool group 202 Low-speed W
number) (8-digit tool number)
compensation number (1): Tool number) (8-digit tool
number)
number)
number)
number)
32 Writing the tool life management data (tool information 231 Low-speed W
(1): Tool number) (8-digit tool number)
33 Deleting tool life management data (tool group) 324 Low-speed W
34 Deleting tool life management data (tool data) 325 Low-speed W
35 Clearing tool life management data (tool life counter and 326 Low-speed W
tool information)
36 Writing tool life management data (arbitrary group 327 Low-speed W
number)
37 Writing tool life management data (remaining tool life) 328 Low-speed W
Tool management 1 Moving (exchanging) tool management data numbers in 329 Low-speed W
functions a cartridge management table
(Section 5.7) 2 Searching for a free pot 330 Low-speed R
3 Registering new tool management data 331 Low-speed W
4 Writing tool management data 332 Low-speed W
5 Deleting tool management data 333 Low-speed W
6 Reading tool management data 334 Low-speed R
7 Writing a specified type of tool management data 335 Low-speed W
8 Searching for tool management data 366 Low-speed R
9 Shifting tool management data 367 Low-speed W
10 Searching for a free pot (oversize tools supported) 397 Low-speed R
- 417 -
*1 Function codes that have R in the R/W column are window read
functions specifiable with the WINDR function command.
Function codes that have W in the R/W column are window write
functions specifiable with the WINDW function command.
*2 Functions of "High-speed" in their Response field can read or
write data immediately upon request. On the other hand,
functions of "Low-speed" in their Response field need to request
the CNC to read or write data and receiving response from CNC
completes the request.
CAUTION
To read or write data for the second path in two-path
control CNC, add 1000 to the function code number.
To read or write data for the third path in three-path
Similarly, to read or write data for the fourth to 10th
paths, add 3000 to 9000 accordingly to the function
code number.
- 418 -
Function code order

Function
Description Response R/W
code
0 Reading CNC system information High-speed R
13 Reading a tool offset High-speed R
14 Writing a tool offset Low-speed W
15 Reading a workpiece origin offset value High-speed R
16 Writing a workpiece origin offset value Low-speed W
17 Reading a parameter High-speed R
18 Writing a parameter Low-speed W
19 Reading setting data High-speed R
20 Writing setting data Low-speed W
21 Reading a custom macro variable High-speed R
22 Writing a custom macro variable Low-speed W
23 Reading the CNC alarm status High-speed R
24 Reading the current program number High-speed R
25 Reading the current sequence number High-speed R
26 Reading the actual velocity of controlled axes High-speed R
27 Reading the absolute position (absolute coordinates) of controlled axes High-speed R
28 Reading the machine position (machine coordinates) of controlled axes High-speed R
29 Reading a skip position (stop coordinates of skip operation (G31)) of controlled High-speed R
axes
30 Reading the servo delay for controlled axes High-speed R
31 Reading the acceleration/deceleration delay on controlled axes High-speed R
32 Reading modal data High-speed R
33 Reading diagnosis data Low-speed R
34 Reading the feed motor load current value (A/D conversion data) High-speed R
38 Reading the tool life management data (tool group number) High-speed R
39 Reading tool life management data (number of tool groups) High-speed R
40 Reading tool life management data (number of tools) High-speed R
41 Reading tool life management data (tool life) High-speed R
42 Reading tool life management data (tool life counter) High-speed R
43 Reading tool life management data (tool length compensation number (1): Tool High-speed R
number)
order number)
45 Reading tool life management data (cutter radius compensation number (1): Tool High-speed R
number)
order number)
47 Reading tool life management data (tool information (1): Tool number) High-speed R
48 Reading tool life management data (tool information (2): Tool order number) High-speed R
49 Reading tool life management data (tool number) High-speed R
50 Reading the actual spindle speed High-speed R
- 419 -
Function
code
59 Reading the P-code macro variable High-speed R
60 Writing the P-code macro variable Low-speed W
74 Reading the relative position on a controlled axis High-speed R
75 Reading the remaining travel High-speed R
76 Reading CNC status information High-speed R
90 Reading the current program number (8-digit program numbers) High-speed R
91 Reading the actual velocity of each controlled axes High-speed R
138 Reading actual spindle speeds High-speed R
150 Entering data on the program check screen Low-speed W
151 Reading clock data (date and time) High-speed R
152 Entering torque limit data for the digital servo motor Low-speed W
153 Reading load information of the spindle motor (serial interface) High-speed R
154 Reading a parameter High-speed R
155 Reading setting data High-speed R
160 Reading the tool life management data (tool life counter type) High-speed R
163 Registering the tool life management data (tool group) Low-speed W
164 Writing the tool life management data (tool life) Low-speed W
165 Writing the tool life management data (tool life counter) Low-speed W
166 Writing the tool life management data (tool life counter type) Low-speed W
167 Writing the tool life management data (tool length compensation number (1): Tool Low-speed W
number)
168 Writing the tool life management data (tool length compensation number (2): Tool Low-speed W
order number)
169 Writing the tool life management data (cutter radius compensation number (1): Low-speed W
Tool number)
170 Writing the tool life management data (cutter radius compensation number (2): Low-speed W
Tool order number)
171 Writing the tool life management data (tool information (1): Tool number) Low-speed W
172 Writing the tool management data (tool condition (2): Tool order number) Low-speed W
173 Writing the tool life management data (tool number) Low-speed W
200 Reading the tool life management data (tool group number) (8-digit tool number) High-speed R
201 Reading tool life management data (tool information (1): Tool number) (8-digit tool High-speed R
number)
202 Registering tool life management data (tool group number) (8-digit tool number) Low-speed W
211 Reading the estimate disturbance torque data High-speed R
229 Writing tool life management data (tool length compensation number (1): Tool Low-speed W
230 Writing tool life management data (cutter radius compensation number (1): Tool Low-speed W
- 420 -
Function
code
231 Writing the tool life management data (tool information (1): Tool number) (8-digit Low-speed W
tool number)
249 Presetting the relative coordinate Low-speed W
321 Reading a real type parameter High-speed R
323 Writing a real type parameter Low-speed W
324 Deleting the tool life management data (tool group) Low-speed W
325 Deleting the tool life management data (tool data) Low-speed W
326 Deleting the tool life management data (tool life counter and tool information) Low-speed W
327 Writing the tool life management data (arbitrary group number) Low-speed W
328 Writing the tool life management data (remaining tool life) Low-speed W
329 Moving (exchanging) tool management data numbers in a cartridge management Low-speed W
table
330 Searching for a free pot Low-speed R
331 Registering new tool management data Low-speed W
332 Writing tool management data Low-speed W
333 Deleting tool management data Low-speed W
334 Reading tool management data Low-speed R
335 Writing a specified type of tool management data Low-speed W
366 Searching for tool management data Low-speed R
367 Shifting tool management data Low-speed W
395 Reading the pitch error compensation data High-speed R
396 Writing the pitch error compensation data Low-speed W
397 Searching for a free pot (oversize tools supported) Low-speed R
*1 Function codes that have R in the R/W column are window read
functions specifiable with the WINDR function command.
Function codes that have W in the R/W column are window write
functions specifiable with the WINDW function command.
*2 Functions of "High-speed" in their Response field can read or
write data immediately upon request. On the other hand,
functions of "Low-speed" in their Response field need to request
the CNC to read or write data and receiving response from CNC
completes the request.
CAUTION
To read or write data for the second path in two-path
To read or write data for the third path in three-path
Similarly, to read or write data for the fourth to 10th
paths, add 3000 to 9000 accordingly to the function
code number.
- 421 -
5.4 CNC INFORMATION
5.4.1 Reading CNC System Information (High-speed Response)
[Description]
The system information specific to the CNC can be read including the
CNC type (e.g., series name like 30), the distinction between the
machining center system (M) and the lathe system (T) for each CNC
path, the ROM series and edition of the CNC system software, and the
number of axes to be controlled for each CNC path.
[Input data structure]
Top address + 0
(Function code)
0
2
(Completion code)
−
(Need not be set)
4
(Data length)
−
(Need not be set)
6
(Data number)
0
8
(Data attribute)
0
10
(Data area)
−
(Need not be set)
≈ ≈
42
[Completion codes]
0: CNC system information has been read normally.
- 422 -
[Output data structure]
Top address + 0
(Function code)
0
2
(Completion code)
0
(Always terminates normally.)
4
(Data length)
14
6
(Data number)
−
8
(Data attribute)
−
Value
10 ASCII characters
CNC series name (2 bytes) (30)
12 ASCII characters
Machine type M/T (2 bytes)
(M, T)
14 ROM series of CNC system software ASCII characters

(4 bytes) (B 0 0 0 1, . . . )
18 ROM version of CNC system ASCII characters

software (4 bytes) (0 0 0 1, 0 0 0 2, . . . )
22 Number of axes to be controlled for ASCII characters

the specified CNC path (2 bytes) ( 2, 3, 4, . . . )
NOTE
Data is stored from the upper digit in each lower
byte.
- 423 -
5.4.2 Reading a Tool Offset (High-speed Response)
[Description]
A tool offset value recorded in the CNC can be read.
Wear offset data, geometric offset data, cutter compensation data, and
tool length offset data can be read as a tool offset.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
13
2
(Completion code)
−
(Need not be set)
4
(Data length)
−
(Need not be set)
6
(Data number)
N
(N = offset number)
8
(Data attribute)
M
(M = offset type)
10
(Data area)
−
(Need not be set)
≈ ≈
42
(a) Offset types (for machining centers)

Cutter Tool length • If the type of tool offset need
not be specified, enter 0.
Wear 0 2
Geometric 1 3
(b) Offset types (for lathes)

B axis
X axis Z axis Tool tip R Virtual tool tip Y axis
(Reserved)
Wear 0 2 4 6 8 10
Geometric 1 3 5 7 9 11
nd
2 Geometric 12 13 14
- 424 -
[Completion codes]
0: The tool offset has been read normally.
3: The offset number specified for reading is invalid. (This
completion code is returned when the specified offset number data
is not from 1 to the maximum number of offsets.)
4: There are mistakes in the data attribute that specifies the type of the
offset to be read.
.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
13
2
(Completion code)
?
(See the explanation of
the completion codes.)
4
(Data length)
L (Normally set to 4)
(L: Byte length of offset value)
6
(Data number)
N
(N = offset number)
8
(Data attribute)
M
(M = offset type) Value
Tool offset value Signed binary (A negative value is

10 represented in 2's complement.)
Upper 3 bytes are always "0" for
virtual tool tip.
[Output data unit]

Input Increment system
system IS-A IS-B IS-C IS-D IS-E
Machining center mm, deg 0.01 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001

system inch 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001 0.0000001
Radius mm, deg 0.01 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001
specification
Diameter 0.01 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001
Lathe specification
system Radius inch 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001 0.0000001
specification
Diameter 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001 0.0000001
specification
- 425 -
5.4.3 Writing a Tool Offset (Low-speed Response)
[Description]
The tool offset value can be directly written into the CNC.
Wear offset data, geometric offset data, cutter compensation data, and
tool length offset data can be written as a tool offset.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
14
2
(Completion code)
−
(Need not to be set)
4
(Data length)
4
6
(Data number)
N
(N = offset number)
8
(Data attribute)
M
(M = offset type) Value
10 Signed binary (A negative value is
Tool offset value
represented in 2's complement.)
Upper 3 bytes are always "0" for
virtual tool tip.
(a) Offset types (for machining centers)

Cutter Tool length • If the type of tool offset need
Wear 0 2 not be specified, enter 0.
Geometric 1 3
(b) Offset types (for lathes)

B axis
X axis Z axis Tool tip R Virtual tool tip Y axis
(Reserved)
Wear 0 2 4 6 8 10
Geometric 1 3 5 7 9 11
nd
2 Geometric 12 13 14
- 426 -
[Input data unit]


system inch 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001 0.0000001
Radius mm, deg 0.01 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001
specification
Diameter 0.01 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001
Lathe specification
specification
Diameter 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001 0.0000001
specification
[Completion codes]
0: The tool offset has been written normally.
2: The data byte length for the tool offset specified for writing is
invalid.
3: The offset number specified for writing is invalid. (This
completion code is returned when the specified offset number data
is not from 1 to the maximum number of offsets.)
4: There are mistakes in the data attribute that specifies the type of the
offset to be written.
6: For the offset number specified for writing, the additional tool
offset number option is required, but it is missing.
Also, the tool function option is not added that is necessary for the
type of the offset specified for writing.
- 427 -
Top address + 0
(Function code)
14
2 (Completion code)
?
4
(Data length)
L
(L: Input data)
6
(Data number)
N
(N = Input data)
8
(Data attribute)
M
(Input data) Value
10
Signed binary (A negative value is
Tool offset value: Input data represented in 2's complement.)
- 428 -
5.4.4 Reading a Workpiece Origin Offset Value (High-speed

Response)
[Description]
The workpiece origin offset recorded in the CNC can be read.
A workpiece origin offset is provided for each controlled axis (the
first axis to the 32nd axis) in the CNC. Either the workpiece origin
offset for a specific axis can be read, or the workpiece origin offsets
for all axes can be read at one time. If the additional axis option is not
provided, however, the workpiece origin offset for the additional axis
cannot be read.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
15
2
(Completion code)
−
(Need not be set)
4
(Data length) N = 0: External workpiece origin offset
− N = 1: G54
(Need not be set) · ·
· ·
N = 6: G59
6 With "addition of workpiece coordinate system pair"
(Data number)
N = 7: G54.1 P1
N · ·
(N = offset group number) · ·
N = 306: G54.1 P300
8
(Data attribute)
M M = 1 to n: Workpiece origin offset number of a specific
(M = axis number) axis. n is the axis number.
10 M = −1: Read for all axes
(Data area)
−
(Need not be set)
≈ ≈
42
- 429 -
[Completion codes]
0: The workpiece origin offset has been read normally.
3: The specified offset number is invalid.
4: The specified axis number is invalid.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
15
2
(Completion code)
?
4 L = 4: The workpiece origin offset value for a
(Data length)
L specific axis is read.
(L: Byte length of the workpiece
origin offset value) L = 4*n: Workpiece origin offsets for all axes
are read.
6
(Data number)
N
(N = Input data)
8
(Data attribute)
M
(M = Input data) Value
10
Signed binary number (A negative value
Workpiece origin offset value is represented in 2's complement.)
[Output data unit]


system inch 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001 0.0000001
Radius mm, deg 0.01 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001
specification
Diameter 0.01 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001
Lathe specification
specification
Diameter 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001 0.0000001
specification
- 430 -
5.4.5 Writing a Workpiece Origin Offset Value (Low-speed

Response)
[Description]
Data can be written directly as a workpiece origin offset value in the
CNC.
A workpiece origin offset is provided for each controlled axis (the
first axis to the 32nd axis) in the CNC. Either the workpiece origin
offset value for a specific axis can be written, or the workpiece origin
offset values for all axes can be written at one time. If the additional
axis option is not provided, however, the workpiece origin offset value
for the additional axis cannot be written.
Top address + 0
(Function code) L = 4: Workpiece origin offset value for a specific
16 axis is written.
L = 4*n:
Workpiece origin offset values for all axes
2 are written.
(Completion code)
−
(Need not be set) N = 0: External workpiece origin offset
N = 1: G54
4 · ·
(Data length)
L · ·
(L: Byte length of the workpiece N = 6: G59
origin offset value) With the option of adding Workpiece coordinate systems
N = 7: G54.1P1
6 · ·
(Data number) · ·
N N = 306: G54.1P300
(N = Offset group number)
M = 1 to n: Workpiece origin offset number of a specific
8 axis. n is the axis number.
(Data attribute) M = −1: Write for all
M
(M = Axis number) Value
10 Signed binary (A negative value is

Workpiece origin offset value represented in 2's complement.)
- 431 -
[Input data unit]


system inch 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001 0.0000001
Radius mm, deg 0.01 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001
specification
Diameter 0.01 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001
Lathe specification
specification
Diameter 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001 0.0000001
specification
[Completion codes]
0: The workpiece origin offset has been written normally.
2: The specified data length is invalid.
3: The offset number is invalid.
4: The specified axis number is invalid.
6: There is no workpiece coordinate shift option added.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
16
2
(Completion code)
?
4
(Data length)
L
(L: Input data)
6
(Data number)
N
(N = Input data)
8
(Data attribute)
M
Workpiece origin offset value: Signed binary number (A negative

10 value is represented in 2's
Input data
complement.)
- 432 -
5.4.6 Reading a Parameter (High-speed Response)
[Description]
The integer type parameter data of the CNC is read by directly
accessing the CNC.
There are four types of the integer parameters in the CNC: Bit
parameters having a definite meaning for each bit, byte parameters
holding 1-byte data, word parameters holding 2-byte data, and double
word parameters holding 4-byte data. Therefore, the length of the
read data varies according to the parameter number specified.
Note that bit parameters cannot be read in bit units. The eight bits
(one byte) for a parameter number must be read at a time.
For axis parameters, data for a specific axis can be read, or data for all
axes can be read at a time.
For details of parameter data, refer to the Operator's manual of the
CNC.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
17 or 154
2
(Completion code)
−
(Need not be set)
4
(Data length)
−
(Need not be set)
6
(Data number)
N
(N = parameter number)
8 M = 0: No axis
(Data attribute)
M M = 1 to n: A specific axis
(M = Axis number)
M = −1: All axes
10
(Data area)
−
(Need not be set)
≈ ≈
42
- 433 -
[Completion codes]
0: Parameter data has been read normally.
3: The parameter number specified for reading is invalid.
4: The specified data attribute is invalid because it is neither 0, -1, nor
a value 1 to n (n is the number of axes).
Top address + 0
(Function code)
17 or 154
2 (Completion code) When no axis or one axis is specified

? L = 1: Bit or byte parameter
(See the explanation of L = 2: Word parameter
the completion codes.) L = 4: Double word parameter
4
(Data length)
L
(L = 1, 2, 4, 1*n, 2*n, 4*n) When all axes are specified
L = 1*n: Bit or byte parameter
6 L = 2*n: Word parameter
(Data number) L = 4*n: Double word parameter
N
(N = Input data)
8
(Data attribute)
M
10 Parameter data Parameter-dependent form
CAUTION
Macro executor parameters 9000 to 9011 cannot be
read.
- 434 -
5.4.7 Writing a Parameter (Low-speed Response)
[Description]
Data can be written in an integer parameter in the CNC.
There are four types of the integer parameters in the CNC: Bit
parameters having a definite meaning for each bit, byte parameters
holding 1-byte data, word parameters holding 2-byte data, and double
word parameters holding 4-byte data. Therefore, the length of the
written data varies according to the parameter specified.
Note that bit parameters cannot be written in bit units. The eight bits
(one byte) for the parameter number must be written at a time. This
means that when a bit needs to be written, the whole data for the
corresponding parameter number shall be read first, modify the target
bit in the read data, then the data shall be rewritten.
For details of parameter data, refer to the Operator's manual of the
CNC.
Some parameters cause a P/S alarm 000 when data is written. (The
power must be turned off before continuing operation.)
Top address + 0
(Function code)
18
2 When no axis or one axis is specified

(Completion code) L = 1: Bit or byte parameter
− L = 2: Word parameter
(Need not be set) L = 4: Double word parameter
4
(Data length)
L
N
8 M = 0: No axis
(Data attribute) M = 1 to n: A specific axis
M M = −1: All axes
(M = Axis number)
Value
10 Parameter data Parameter-dependent form
- 435 -
[Completion codes]
0: Parameter data has been written normally.
2: The data byte length of the parameter specified for writing is
invalid.
3: The parameter number specified for writing is invalid.
a value from 1 to n (n is the number of axes).
6: The necessary option is not added.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
18
2
(Completion code)
?
4
(Data length)
L
(L = Input data)
6
(Data number)
N
(N = Input data)
8
(Data attribute)
M
10 Parameter data: Input data Parameter-dependent form
CAUTION
Parameters may not become effective immediately
depending on the parameter numbers.
- 436 -
5.4.8 Reading a Real Type Parameter (High-speed Response)
[Description]
The real type parameter data of the CNC is read by directly accessing
the CNC.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
321
2
(Completion code)
−
(Need not be set)
4
(Data length)
−
(Need not be set)
6
(Data number)
8 N
10
(Data attribute) M=0 : No axis
M
(M = axis number) M = 1 to n : Specify an axis.
12 M = -1 : All axes
(Decimal point position)
14
(Data area)
−
16 (Need not be set)
18
NOTE
The function of this function code cannot read
integer type or bit type parameters. To read an
integer type or bit type parameter, use the function
having function code 17 or 154.
[Completion codes]
0: Parameter data has been read normally.
3: The specified parameter number is invalid.
4: The specified data attribute is invalid; namely, a value other than
0, -1 or outside the range from 1 to n (where n is the number of
controlled axes) is specified.
- 437 -
Top address + 0
(Function code)
321
2 (Completion code)
?
(See the above explanation of the
completion codes.)
4
(Data length)
6
6
(Data number)
N
8
(N = input data)
10
(Data attribute)
M
(M = input data)
12
(Input data)
14 Parameter data
16 4 bytes
18
The read parameter value is processed as follows.

Example)
(Read parameter value) = (CNC's value) × 10 (specified decimal point position)
Decimal point
Parameter value CNC's value
position
1 0
12 1
123 1.234 2
1234 3
12340 4
- 438 -
5.4.9 Writing a Real Type Parameter (Low-speed Response)
[Description]
Data can be written to a real type parameter data of the CNC.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
323
2
(Completion code)
−
(Need not be set)
4
(Data length)
6
6
(Data number)
8 N
10
(Data attribute) M=0 : No axis
M
(M = axis number) M = 1 to n : Specify an axis.
12 M = -1 : All axes
14
Parameter data
16
18
NOTE
The function of this function code cannot write
integer type or bit type parameters. To write an
integer type or bit type parameter, use the function
having function code 18.
[Completion codes]
0: Parameter data has been written normally.
2: The data length of the parameter specified for writing is invalid.
3: The parameter number specified for writing is invalid.
4: The specified data attribute is invalid; namely, a value other than
0, -1 or outside the range from 1 to n (where n is the number of
controlled axes) is specified.
6: The necessary option is not added.
- 439 -
Top address + 0
(Function code)
323
2 (Completion code)
?
(See the above explanation of the
completion codes.)
4
(Data length)
6
6
(Data number)
N
8 (N = input data)
10
(Data attribute)
M
(M = input data)
12
Decimal point position
(Input data)
14 Parameter data
4 bytes
16 (Input data)
18
The parameter value to be written is processed as follows.

Example)
(Value to be set to the CNC) = (parameter variable)/10 (specified decimal point position)
Parameter Decimal point

CNC's value
variable position
1234.000 0
123.400 1
12.340 1234 2
1.234 3
0.1234 4
CAUTION
Parameters may not become effective immediately
depending on the parameter numbers.
- 440 -
5.4.10 Reading Setting Data (High-speed Response)
[Description]
The data set in the CNC is read by directly accessing the CNC.
There are four types of setting data in the CNC: Bit setting data
having a definite meaning for each bit, byte setting data stored in
bytes, word setting data stored in 2-byte units, and double-word
setting data stored in 4-byte units. Therefore, the length of the read
data varies according to the setting data specified.
Note that bit setting data cannot be read in bit units. The eight bits
(one byte) for the setting data number must be read at a time.
For details of setting data, refer to the Operator's manual of the CNC.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
19 or 155
2
(Completion code)
−
(Need not be set)
4
(Data length)
−
(Need not be set)
6
(Data number)
N
(N = Parameter number)
8 M = 0: No axis
(Data attribute)
(M = Axis number)
M = −1: All axes
10
(Data area)
−
(Need not be set)
≈ ≈
42
- 441 -
[Completion codes]
0: Setting data has been read normally.
3: The setting number specified for reading is invalid.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
19 or 155
2 (Completion code) When no axis or one axis is specified

? L = 1: Bit or byte parameter
(See the explanation of L = 2: Word parameter
the completion codes.) L = 4: Double word parameter
4
(Data length)
L
N
(N = Input data)
8
(Data attribute)
M
10
Setting data Parameter-dependent form
- 442 -
5.4.11 Writing Setting Data (Low-speed Response)
[Description]
Data can be written as setting data in the CNC.
For details of setting data, refer to the Operator's manual of the CNC.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
20
2 When no axis or one axis is specified

(Completion code) L = 1: Bit or byte parameter
− L = 2: Word parameter
(Need not be set.) L = 4: Double word parameter
4
(Data length)
L
N
(N = Setting data number)
8 M = 0: No axis
(Data attribute)
(M = Axis number)
M = −1: All axes
Value
10 Setting data Setting data-dependent form
[Completion codes]
0: Setting data has been written normally.
2: The byte length of the setting data specified for writing is invalid.
3: The setting data number specified for writing is invalid.
- 443 -
Top address + 0
(Function code)
20
2
(Completion code)
?
4
(Data length)
L
(N = Input data)
6
(Data number)
N
(N = Input data)
8
(Data attribute)
M
10 Setting data: Input data Setting data-dependent form
- 444 -
5.4.12 Reading a Custom Macro Variable (High-speed Response)
[Description]
A custom macro variable in the CNC can be read.
Custom macro variables may or may not be read depending on the
variable type.
(1) Local variables

Local variables (#1 to #33) cannot be read.
(2) Common variables
Common variables (#100 to #149 and #500 to #531) can be read
in floating-point representation. When the option to add
common variables is provided, however, common variables
range from #100 to #199 and #500 to #999.
For details of the custom macro variables, refer to the Operator's

Manual for the CNC.
CAUTION
System variables cannot be read.

Top address + 0
(Function code)
21
2
(Completion code)
−
(Need not be set)
4
(Data length)
−
(Need not be set)
6 (Data number)
N
(N = Custom macro
variable number)
8
(Data attribute)
M
(M: Number of decimal places)
10
(Data area)
−
(Need not be set)
≈ ≈
42
- 445 -
[Completion codes]
0: The custom macro variable has been read normally.
3: The number of a custom macro variable that cannot be read was
specified as the data number.
4: The mantissa is out of range.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
21
2
(Completion code)
?
4 (Data length) L = 6: Custom macro B
L The mantissa of a floating-
(L: Byte length of custom macro point number is indicated in 4
variable data)
bytes, and the exponent is
6 indicated in 2 bytes.
(Data number)
N M = 0: The number of decimal places
(N = Input data) is not specified.
M = 1 ≤ n ≤ 7:
8 The number of decimal places is specified. n
(Data attribute) stands for the number of decimal places.
M
(M: Number of decimal places) Value
10 Custom macro variable data (4 bytes) Signed binary

Mantissa (custom macro B) (A negative value is represented in
2's complement.)
14 Custom macro variable data (2 bytes)

Exponent (custom macro B): Signed binary
The number of decimal digits 0 to 8 (no negative values)
- 446 -
5.4.13 Writing a Custom Macro Variable (Low-speed Response)
[Description]
Data can be written in a custom macro variable in the CNC.
For details of common variables, refer to the Operator's manual of the
CNC.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
22
2
(Completion code)
−
(Need not be set)
4
(Data length)
L L = 6: Custom macro B
(L: Byte length of custom The mantissa of a floating-point
macro variable data) number is indicated in 4 bytes,
6 and the exponent is indicated in
(Data number) 2 bytes.
N
(N = Custom macro variable number)
8
(Data attribute)
0
Value
10 Custom macro variable data (4 bytes) Signed binary

Mantissa (custom macro B) (A negative value is represented in
2's complement.)
Custom macro variable data (2 bytes)

14
Exponent (custom macro B): Signed binary
The number of decimal digits
[Completion codes]
0: The custom macro variable has been written normally.
2: The specified data length is invalid because it is not 6.
3: A custom macro variable number that cannot be written as the data
number was specified.
6: The additional custom macro or common variable option has not
been provided.
7: The custom macro variable is write-protected.
- 447 -
Top address + 0
(Function code)
22
2
(Completion code)
?
4
(Data length)
L
(N: Input data)
6
(Data number)
N
(N = Input data)
8
(Data attribute)
−
(Need not be set) Value
10 Custom macro variable data: Input Signed binary

data (A negative value is represented in
Mantissa (custom macro B) 2's complement.)
Custom macro variable data: Input

14
data
Signed binary
Exponent (custom macro B): The
number of decimal digits
- 448 -
5.4.14 Reading the CNC Alarm Status (High-speed Response)
[Description]
When the CNC is in the alarm status, the alarm status data can be read.
The following alarm status data can be read:
(1) First byte of alarm status data

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
SW
PW
IO
PS
OT
OH
SV
SR
SW : SW alarm (parameter writing alarm)

PW : PW alarm (alarm requiring power to be turned off)
IO : IO alarm (memory file alarm)
PS : PS alarm (program and operation alarm)
OT : OT alarm (overtravel alarm)
OH : OH alarm (overheat alarm)
SV : SV alarm (servo alarm)
SR : SR alarm (communication alarm)
(2) Second byte of alarm status data

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
MC
SP
DS
IE
BG
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
MC : MC alarm (macro alarm)

SP : SP alarm (spindle alarm)
DS : DS alarm (other alarm)
IE : IE alarm (malfunction prevention function alarm)
BG : BG alarm (background edit alarm)
MC : MC alarm (macro alarm)
- 449 -
(3) Third byte of alarm status data

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
(4) Fourth byte of alarm status data

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
- 450 -
Top address + 0
(Function code)
23
2
(Completion code)
−
(Need not be set)
4
(Data length)
−
(Need not be set)
6
(Data number)
0
8
(Data attribute)
0
10
(Data area)
−
(Need not be set)
≈ ≈
42
- 451 -
Top address + 0
(Function code)
23
2
(Completion code)
?
4
(Data length)
L
(L = 4)
6
(Data number)
−
8
(Data attribute)
−
Value
10
Alarm status 4bytes bit type
14
CAUTION
In the previous CNC model (Series 16, 18, 21 etc.),
the size of output data are 2 bytes. On this model,
note that the size of output data is expanded to 4
bytes.
- 452 -
5.4.15 Reading the Current Program Number (High-speed

Response)
[Description]
The program number of a machining program being executed or
selected on the CNC can be read.
When a subprogram is executed on the CNC, the program number of
the main program can also be read. Note that the program number that
can be read is the first program number (first loop main program).
This function accepts only 4-digit program numbers. When the
specification supports 8-digit program numbers, specify function code
90 to read 8-digit program numbers.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
24
2
(Completion code)
−
(Need not be set)
4
(Data length)
−
(Need not be set)
(Data number)
0
(Data attribute)
0
10
(Data area)
−
(Need not be set)
42
[Completion codes]
0: The program number of the currently executing program was read
successfully.
5: The program number exceeds 4-digit. (Use function code 90.)
- 453 -
Top address + 0
(Function code)
24
2
(Completion code)
?
(See the explanation above.)
4
(Data length)
4
6
(Data number)
−
8
(Data attribute)
−
Value
10 Current program number: ON Unsigned binary, 2 bytes long
12 Program number of main program:

OMN
(a) Current program number (ON)

The program number of the program being executed is set.
(b) Program number of main program (OMN)
When the currently executing program is a subprogram, the
program number of its main program (first loop main program)
is set. When the currently executing program is not a
subprogram, 0 is set.
- 454 -
5.4.16 Reading the Current Sequence Number (High-speed

Response)
[Description]
The sequence number of a machining program being executed on the
CNC can be read. If sequence numbers are not assigned to all blocks
of the machining program, the sequence number of the most recently
executed block is read.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
25
2
(Completion code)
−
(Need not be set)
4
(Data length)
−
(Need not be set)
6
(Data number)
0
8
(Data attribute)
0
10
(Data area)
−
(Need not be set)
≈ ≈
42
[Completion codes]
0: The current sequence number has been read normally.
- 455 -
Top address + 0
(Function code)
25
2
(Completion code)
?
4
(Data length)
L Note that the data length must be set to 4 bytes
(L = 4) even though the current program number is 2
bytes long (the sequence number is indicated by 5
6 digits).
(Data number)
−
8
(Data attribute)
−
Value
10
Current sequence number Unsigned binary
5.4.17 Reading Modal Data (High-speed Response)
[Description]
Modal information can be read from the CNC.
(1) Format and types of modal data for the G function

Data corresponding to the specified identification code is read
and stored in the data area. Whether the data is specified in the
block specified in the attribute of the data is determined by the
value at the most significant bit.
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
• Code in a group 1 byte
1 byte
0: Not specified in the block

1: Specified in the block
- 456 -
Data type Data Data type Data

Identification G code for machining G code for lathe (T, G) Code in a
Code in a group
code center (M) A series B series C series group
G00 0 G00 G00 G00 0
G01 1 G01 G01 G01 1
G02 2 G02 G02 G02 2
G03 3 G03 G03 G03 3
G33 4 G32 G33 G33 4
0
G33 8
G34 G34 G34 9
G90 G77 G20 5
G92 G78 G21 6
G94 G79 G24 7
G17 0 G96 G96 G96 1
1 G18 8 G97 G97 G97 0
G19 4
G90 0 G90 G90 0
2
G91 1 G91 G91 1
G68 G68 G68 1
3
G69 G69 G69 0
G94 0 G98 G94 G94 0
4
G95 1 G99 G95 G95 1
G20 0 G20 G20 G70 0
5
G21 1 G21 G21 G71 1
G40 0 G40 G40 G40 0
6 G41 1 G41 G41 G41 1
G42 2 G42 G42 G42 2
G43 1 G25 G25 G25 0
7 G44 2 G26 G26 G26 1
G49 0
G73 10 G22 G22 G22 1
G74 11 G23 G23 G23 0
G76 12
G80 0
G81 1
G82 2
8 G83 3
G84 4
G85 5
G86 6
G87 7
G88 8
G89 9
G98 0 G80 G80 G80 0
G99 1 G83 G83 G83 1
G84 G84 G84 2
9 G85 G85 G85 3
G87 G87 G87 5
G88 G88 G88 6
G89 G89 G89 7
- 457 -
Data type Data Data type Data

Identification G code for machining G code for lathe (T, G) Code in a
Code in a group
code center (M) A series B series C series group
G50 0 G98 G98 0
10
G51 1 G99 G99 1
G66 1 G66 G66 G66 1
11
G67 0 G67 G67 G67 0
G54 0 G54 G54 G54 0
G55 1 G55 G55 G55 1
G56 2 G56 G56 G56 2
13
G57 3 G57 G57 G57 3
G58 4 G58 G58 G58 4
G59 5 G59 G59 G59 5
G61 1
G62 2
14
G63 3
G64 0
G68 1
15
G69 0
G15 0
16
G16 1
G40.1 1
17 G41.1 2
G42.1 0
G25 0
18
G26 1
G50.2 G50.2 G50.2 0
19
G51.2 G51.2 G51.2 1
G13.1 0 G13.1 G13.1 G13.1 0
20
G12.1 1 G12.1 G12.1 G12.1 1
- 458 -
(2) Format and types of modal data for other than the G function
Data 4 bytes
FLAG1 1 byte
FLAG2 1 byte
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
- - - - -
0: Positive
1: Negative
0: A decimal point not specified

1: A decimal point specified
0: Not specified in the current block

1: Specified in the current block
- - - - - Number of decimal places
Note) The specification of whether a decimal point is specified or

not, in FLAG1, and the specification of the number of decimal
places, in FLAG2, are valid only for F code. Even if a
decimal point is not specified, the number of decimal places
may not be 0.
Note) As the numbers of input digits, M, S, T, and B, in a command
address, the allowable numbers of digits that are specified for
the appropriate parameters are returned.
M: Allowable number of digits of M code No. 3030
S: Allowable number of digits of S code No. 3031
T: Allowable number of digits of T code No. 3032
B: Allowable number of digits of B code No. 3033
Note) PMC-SB7 outputs the number of input digits to bits 0 to 3 of
FLAG1, while 30i/31i/32i-A PMC does not. If you need to
have the number of input digits output as with the former
specification, read the CNC parameters of the following
numbers, by using the window function for reading a
parameter (function code 17 or 154).
For the M function: CNC parameter No. 3030 (allowable
number of digits of the M code)
For the S function: CNC parameter No. 3031 (allowable
number of digits of the S code)
For the T function: CNC parameter No. 3032 (allowable
number of digits of the T code)
For the B function: CNC parameter No. 3033 (allowable
number of digits of the B code)
- 459 -
Data type
Identification code Specified address
Enter identification Description
−2 codes 100 to 126 at
one time.
100 B (Second auxiliary
101 D function)
102 E
103 F (Reserved)
104 H
105 L
106 M
107 S
108 T
109 R
110 P
111 Q
112 A
113 C
114 I
115 J
116 K
117 N
118 O
119 U
120 V
121 W
122 X
123 Y
124 Z
125 M2
126 M3
- 460 -
Top address + 0
(Function code)
32
2
(Completion code)
−
(Need not be set)
4
(Data length)
−
(Need not be set)
6 N = 0 to: See the identification codes of list of data

(Data number) explained above.
N N = −1: All data for G function
(N: Data type)
N = −2: All data for other than G function
8
(Data attribute)
M
(M: Specified block) M = 0: Current block
M = 1: Next block
10
(Data area)
− M = 2: Block after the next block
(Need not be set)
≈ ≈
20
When all data items are specified to be read, the data items are all
output simultaneously in the order specified in the above data table.
[Completion codes]
0: Modal information has been read normally.
3: Invalid data is specified as the data number.
4: Invalid data is specified as the data attribute.
- 461 -
Top address + 0
(Function code)
32
2
(Completion code)
?
4 L=2 : G function
(Data length)
L L = 2*n : All data for G function
(L = 2, 6, 2*n, 6*m)
L=6 : Other than G function
6
(Data number) L = 6*m : All data for other than G function
N (n: Number of groups for the G
(N: Input data) function)
(m: Number of types other than for the
8
G function)
(Data attribute)
M
(M: Input data) Value
See the data format for the G
10 Modal data for G function (2 bytes) function. The upper byte must always
be set to 0.
Or
8
(Data attribute)
M
10 Data part of modal data for other than See the data format for other than the
G function (4 bytes) G function.
See the flag format of the data for

14 Flag part of modal data for other than other than the G function. The upper
G function (2 bytes) byte must always be set to 0.
When all data items are specified to be read, the data items are all
output simultaneously in the order specified in the above data table.
- 462 -
5.4.18 Reading Diagnosis Data (Low-speed Response)
[Description]
The information displayed on the diagnosis data screen is read by
directly accessing the CNC.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
33
2
(Completion code)
−
(Need not be set)
4
(Data length)
−
(Need not be set)
6
(Data number)
N
(N: Diagnosis No.)
8 M=0: No axis
(Data attribute)
M M = 1 to n: One axis
(M: Axis number)
M = −1: All axes
10
(Data area)
−
(Need not be set)
[Completion codes]
0: Diagnosis data has been read from the CNC normally.
3: The specified diagnosis data number is invalid.
4: The data specified as the data attribute is invalid because it is
neither 0, -1, nor a value from 1 to n (n is the number of axes).
- 463 -
Top address + 0
(Function code)
33
2 (Completion code)
?
(See the explanation of When no axis or one axis is specified
the completion codes.) L = 1: Bit or byte data
4 L = 2: Word data
(Data length) L = 4: Double word data
L L = 6: Real type data
(L = 1, 2, 4, 1*n, 2*n, 4*n, 6*n)
When all axes are specified
6 L = 1*n: Bit or byte data
(Data number) L = 2*n: Word data
N L = 4*n: Double word data
(N: Input data) L = 6*n: Real type data
8
(Data attribute)
M
10 Diagnosis data Data-dependent form
1, 2, 4 bytes
In the case of Real type data
10 decimal point
2 bytes
12
Diagnosis data
4 bytes
16
- 464 -
5.4.19 Reading Value of the P-code Macro Variable (High-speed

Response)
[Description]
This function gets the value of variable for Macro-compiler (P-code
macro variable) of specified number.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
59
+2
(Completion code)
−
(Need not be set)
+4
(Data length)
−
(Need not be set)
+6
(Data number)
N
(P-code macro variable number)
+ 10
(Data attribute)
0
+ 12
(Data area)
−
(Need not be set)
+ 18
CAUTION
The 'Data number' occupies 4 bytes instead of 2
bytes of usual data structure.
[Completion codes]
0: Success to read the value of P-code macro variable.
3: The P-code macro variable specified by 'Data number' can not be
read.
4: The mantissa is out of range.
- 465 -
Top address + 0
(Function code)
59
+2
(Completion code)
?
(See the explanation above)
+4
(Data length)
6
+6
(Data number)
N
(Same as input data)
+ 10
(Data attribute)
−
Value
+ 12
Signed binary
Value of P-code macro variable (Minus number is represented by 2's
(4 bytes) complemental.)
+ 16 Figures after decimal point of the Signed binary

value of P-code macro variable (Minus number is represented by 2's
- 466 -
5.4.20 Writing Value of the P-code Macro Variable (Low-speed

Response)
[Description]
This function stores the value into the variable for Macro-compiler (P-
code macro variable) of specified number.
The extended P-code macro variable can not be written into.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
60
+2
(Completion code)
−
(Need not be set)
+4
(Data length)
6
+6
(Data number)
N
(P-code macro variable number)
+ 10
(Data attribute)
0
Value
+ 12
Value of P-code macro variable Signed binary
(4 bytes) (Minus number is represented by 2's
complemental.)
+ 16
Figures after decimal point of the Signed binary
value of P-code macro variable (Minus number is represented by 2's
CAUTION
The 'data number' occupies 4 bytes instead of 2
bytes of usual data structure.
[Completion codes]
0: Success to store the value into P-code macro variable.
2: The data length has illegal data (is not 6).
3: The P-code macro variable specified by 'Data number' can not be
written.
- 467 -
Top address + 0
(Function code)
60
+2
(Completion code)
?
+4
(Data length)
6
+6
(Data number)
N
+ 10
(Data attribute)
−
+ 12
Value of P-code macro variable
(4 bytes)
+ 16
Figures after decimal point of the
value of P-code macro variable
(2 bytes)
- 468 -
5.4.21 Reading CNC Status Information (High-speed Response)
[Description]
Status information (status indication on the screen) can be read from
the CNC.
The types of status information that can be read are as follows.
(1) Indication of which mode is selected, automatic or manual
(2) Status of automatic operation
(3) Status of movement along the axis and dwelling
(4) Status of M, S, T, and B functions
(5) Statuses of emergency stop and the reset signal
(6) Alarm status
(7) Status of program edits
Top address + 0
(Function code)
76
2
(Completion code)
−
(Need not be set)
4
(Data length)
−
(Need not be set)
6
(Data number)
0
8
(Data attribute)
0
10
(Data area)
≈ − ≈
(Need not be set)
42
[Completion codes]
0: CNC status information has been read normally.
- 469 -

Top address + 0
(Function code)
76
2
(Completion code)
?
4
(Data length)
14
6
(Data number)
−
(Input data)
8
(Data attribute)
−
(Input data)
Value
10
Indication of which mode is currently 0 : MDI
selected, automatic or manual (2 1 : MEMory
bytes) 2 : **** (Other states)
3 : EDIT
4 : HaNDle
5 : JOG
6 : Teach in JOG
7 : Teach in HND
8 : INC. feed
9 : REFerence
10 : ReMoTe
12
Status of automatic operation (2 0 : **** (Reset states)
bytes) 1 : STOP
2 : HOLD
3 : STaRT
14 Status of movement along the axis 0 : *** (Other states)

or dwelling (2 bytes) 1 : MoTioN
2 : DWell
16 Status of M, S, T, and B functions 0 : *** (Other states)

(2 bytes) 1 : FIN
18 Status of emergency stop (2 bytes) 0 : (Releases the emergency stop state)

1 : − −EMerGency − −
2 : − RESET −
(The reset signal is on.)
20 Alarm status (2 bytes) 0 : *** (Other states)

1 : ALarM
2 : BATtery low
22
Status of program edit (2 bytes) 0 : ******* (Non editing)
1 : EDIT
2 : SeaRCH
3 : OUTPUT
4 : INPUT
5 : COMPARE
6 : LabelSKip
7 : OFST
8 : WSFT
9 : ReSTaRt
- 470 -
5.4.22 Reading the Current Program Number (8-digit Program

Numbers) (High-speed Response)
[Description]
This function reads CNC program numbers extended to 8 digits from
the usual 4 digits.
Basically, this function is the same as function code 24 excluding the
different data length of function code 90.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
90
2
(Completion code)
−
(Need not be set)
4
(Data length)
−
(Need not be set)
(Data number)
0
(Data attribute)
0
10
(Data area)
−
(Need not be set)
18
[Completion codes]
0: The program number of the currently executing program has been
read normally.
- 471 -
Top address + 0
(Function code)
90
2
(Completion code)
?
(See the explanation of the
completion codes, above.)
4
(Data length)
8
6
(Data number)
-
8
(Data attribute)
-
Value
10
Number of the program currently Unsigned binary format, 4-byte length
being executed
ON
14
Program number of the main
program
OMN
18
(a) Number of the program currently being executed (ON)

The program number of the program currently being executed is set.
(b) Program number of the main program (OMN)
If the program currently being executed is a subprogram, the program
number of its main program is set.
If the program currently being executed is not a subprogram, 0 is set.
- 472 -
5.4.22 Entering Data on the Program Check Screen (Low-speed

Response)
[Description]
On the program check screen of the CNC, data can be entered for the
spindle tool No. (HD.T) and the next tool No. (NX.T).
This function is effective only when bit 2 of parameter 3108 is 1, and
bit 1 of parameter 13200 is 1.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
150
2
(Completion code)
-
(Need not be set)
(Data length)
4
6 N = 0 : Spindle tool No. (8 digits)

(Data number)
N
(N = 0, 1)
N = 1 : Next tool No. (8 digits)
8
(Data attribute)
0 Value
10
Data for the spindle tool No. Unsigned binary
(4 bytes)
or data for the next tool No.
(4 bytes)
[Completion codes]
0: Data has been entered on the program check screen normally.
2: The data length in bytes is invalid.
3: The data No. is invalid.
- 473 -
Top address + 0
(Function code)
150
2
(Completion code)
?
4
(Data length)
4
(Input data)
6 N = 0 : Spindle tool No.

(Data number)
N
(Input data)
N = 1 : Next tool No.
8
(Data attribute)
-
(Input data) Value
10
Data for the spindle tool No. Unsigned binary
(4 bytes)
or data for the next tool No.
(4 bytes)
- 474 -
5.4.23 Reading Clock Data (Date and Time) (High-speed Response)
[Description]
The current date (year, month, day) and time (hours, minutes,
seconds) can be read from the clock built into the CNC.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
151
2
(Completion code)
-
(Need not be set)
4
(Data length)
-
(Need not be set)
6 N = -1: Reads current date and time.

(Data number)
N N = 0: Reads current date.
(N = 0, 1)
N = 1: Reads current time.
8
(Data attribute)
0
10
(Data area)
-
(Need not be set)
[Completion codes]
0: Data of the clock built into the CNC has been read normally.
3: A value other than 0, 1, and -1 was specified for the data No.
- 475 -
Top address + 0
(Function code)
151
2
(Completion code)
?
4
(Data length)
6/12
6
(Data number)
N
(Input data)
8
(Data attribute)
-
(Input data) Value
10
Current date (year) or time (hours) Unsigned binary
12 Current date (month) or time

(minutes)
14 Current date (day) or time (seconds)
When both the current date and current time are specified to be read by entering [-1] for the data No.
-
(Input data)
Value
10
Current date (year) Unsigned binary
12
Current date (month)
14
Current date (day)
16
Current time (hours)
18
Current time (minutes)
20
Current time (seconds)
[Example] September 10th, 1990 [Example] 23:59:59

(hours:minutes:seconds)
Data area Data area
1990 23
+2 +2
9 59
+4 +4
10 59
- 476 -
5.4.24 Reading the Pitch Error Compensation Value (High-speed

Response)
[Description]
The pitch error compensation value on CNC can be read.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
395
2
(Completion code)
-
(Need not be set)
4
(Data length)
-
(Need not be set)
6
(Data number)
N
(N : pitch error compensation No.)
8
(Data attribute)
0
10
(Data area)
-
(Need not be set)
» »
42
[Completion codes]
0: The pitch error compensation value has been read normally.
3: Illegal pitch error compensation number.
- 477 -
Top address + 0
(Function code)
395
2
(Completion code)
?
4
(Data length)
L
(L = 1)
6
(Data number)
-
8
(Data attribute)
-
10
Pitch error compensation value
(1 byte)
11
- 478 -
5.4.25 Writing the Pitch Error Compensation Value (Low-speed

Response)
[Description]
Data can be written as pitch error compensation value on the CNC.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
396
2
(Completion code)
-
(Need not be set)
4
(Data length)
1
6
(Data number)
N
(N : pitch error compensation No.)
8
(Data attribute)
0
10
(1 byte)
11
[Completion codes]
0: The pitch error compensation value has been read normally.
2: Illegal data length.
3: Illegal pitch error compensation number.
- 479 -
Top address + 0
(Function code)
396
2
(Completion code)
?
4
(Data length)
L
(L : Input data)
6
(Data number)
N
(N : Input data)
8
(Data attribute)
M
(M : Input data)
10
(Input data)
11
- 480 -
5.5 AXIS INFORMATION
5.5.1 Reading the Actual Velocity of Controlled Axes (High-speed

Response)
[Description]
The actual velocity of a movement on CNC-controlled axes can be
read. Note that the read speed is the composite velocity for the
controlled axes. When movement involves only the basic three axes,
the X, Y, and Z axes, the composite velocity equals the actual velocity.
When movement, however, involves the fourth axis, such as a rotation
axis or a parallel axis, as well as some of the basic three axes, the
composite velocity for all the relevant axes does not equal the actual
velocity.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
26
2
(Completion code)
-
(Need not be set)
4
(Data length)
-
(Need not be set)
6
(Data number)
0
8
(Data attribute)
0
10
(Data area)
-
(Need not be set)
» »
42
[Completion codes]
0: The actual velocity for the controlled axes has been read normally.
- 481 -
Top address + 0
(Function code)
26
2
(Completion code)
?
4
(Data length)
L
(L = 4)
6
(Data number)
-
8
(Data attribute)
-
Value
10 Actual velocity for controlled axes Unsigned binary

<Data increments>
· Input in mm
1 mm/min.
· Input in inches
0.01 inch/min.
- 482 -
5.5.2 Reading the Absolute Position (Absolute Coordinates) of

Controlled Axes (High-speed Response)
[Description]
The absolute coordinates of the CNC-controlled axes for movement
can be read. The absolute coordinates indicate those after cutter
compensation or tool length compensation.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
27
2
(Completion code)
-
(Need not be set)
4
(Data length)
-
(Need not be set)
6
(Data number)
0
8 M = 1 to n: Absolute coordinate of a specific

(Data attribute) axis. n is the axis number.
M
(M = Axis number)
M = -1: Coordinates of all axes
10
(Data area)
-
(Need not be set)
» »
42
[Completion codes]
0: The absolute coordinates of the controlled axes have been read
normally.
4: Data specified as the data attribute is invalid because it is neither -1
nor a value from 1 to n (n is the number of axes). Alternatively,
the specified axis number is greater than the number of controlled
axes.
- 483 -
Top address + 0
(Function code)
27
2 (Completion code)
?
4 (Data length)
L
(L = 4*n, n is the number of
axes specified.)
6
(Data number)
-
8
(Data attribute)
M
10 Absolute coordinate of the controlled Signed binary

axis specified (4 bytes) (A negative value is represented in
2's complement.)
When the number of controlled axes is 4
Value
10 Absolute coordinate of the first axis Signed binary

(4 bytes) (A negative value is represented in
2's complement.)
14 Absolute coordinate of the second
axis (4 bytes)
18 Absolute coordinate of the third

axis (4 bytes)
22 Absolute coordinate of the fourth

axis (4 bytes)
[Output data unit]


system inch 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001 0.0000001
Radius mm, deg 0.01 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001
specification
Diameter 0.01 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001
Lathe specification
specification
Diameter 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001 0.0000001
specification
- 484 -
5.5.3 Reading the Machine Position (Machine Coordinates) of

Controlled Axes (High-speed Response)
[Description]
The machine coordinates of CNC-controlled axes for movement can
be read. The read value equals the machine coordinate indicated on
the current position display screen displayed in the CNC. (This screen
can be displayed by pressing the function key POS.)

Top address + 0
(Function code)
28
2
(Completion code)
-
(Need not be set)
4
(Data length)
-
(Need not be set)
6
(Data number)
0
8 M = 1 to n: Machine coordinate of a specific

(Data attribute) axis. n is the axis number.
M
(M = Axis number)
M = -1: Coordinates of all axes
10
(Data area)
-
(Need not be set)
» »
42
CAUTION
When an inch machine is used in metric input, or
when a millimeter machine is used in inch input, the
machine position that is read with bit 0 of parameter
No. 3104 set to 1 differs from the value indicated by
the CNC. In this case, therefore, the value read
through the ladder must be calculated (converted).
- 485 -
[Completion codes]
0: The machine coordinates of the controlled axes have been read
normally.
4: Data specified as the data attribute is invalid because it is neither -1
nor a value from 1 to n (n is the number of axes). Alternatively,
the specified axis number is greater than the number of the
controlled axes.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
28
2 (Completion code)
?
4 (Data length)
L
axes specified.)
6
(Data number)
-
8
(Data attribute)
M
10 Machine coordinate of the controlled Signed binary

axis specified (4 bytes) (A negative value is represented in
2's complement.)
Value
10 Machine coordinate of the first axis Signed binary

2's complement.)
14 Machine coordinate of the second
axis (4 bytes)
18 Machine coordinate of the third axis

(4 bytes)
22 Machine coordinate of the fourth

axis (4 bytes)
- 486 -
[Output data unit]


system inch 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001 0.0000001
Radius mm, deg 0.01 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001
specification
Diameter 0.01 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001
Lathe specification
specification
Diameter 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001 0.0000001
specification
- 487 -
5.5.4 Reading a Skip Position (Stop Coordinates of Skip Operation

(G31)) of Controlled Axes (High-speed Response)
[Description]
When a block of the skip operation (G31) is executed by the CNC and
the skip signal goes on to stop the machine, the absolute coordinates
of the stop position on the axes of movement can be read.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
29
2
(Completion code)
-
(Need not be set)
4
(Data length)
-
(Need not be set)
6
(Data number)
0
8 M = 1 to n: Skip coordinate on a specific axis. n

(Data attribute) is the axis number.
M
(M = Axis number)
M = -1: Coordinates on all axes
10
(Data area)
-
(Need not be set)
» »
42
[Completion codes]
0: The coordinates of the skip stop position for the controlled axes
have been read normally.
4: Data specified for the data attribute is invalid because it is neither
-1 nor a value from 1 to n (n is the number of axes). Alternatively,
the specified axis number is greater than the number of controlled
axes.
- 488 -
Top address + 0
(Function code)
29
2 (Completion code)
?
4 (Data length)
L
axes specified.)
6
(Data number)
-
8
(Data attribute)
M
10 Skip coordinate of the controlled axis Signed binary

specified (4 bytes) (A negative value is represented in
2's complement.)
Value
10 Skip coordinate of the first axis Signed binary

2's complement.)
14 Skip coordinate of the second axis
(4 bytes)
18 Skip coordinate of the third axis

(4 bytes)
22 Skip coordinate of the fourth axis

(4 bytes)
[Output data unit]


system inch 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001 0.0000001
Radius mm, deg 0.01 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001
specification
Diameter 0.01 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001
Lathe specification
specification
Diameter 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001 0.0000001
specification
- 489 -
5.5.5 Reading the Servo Delay for Controlled Axes (High-speed

Response)
[Description]
The servo delay, which is the difference between the specified
coordinates of CNC-controlled axes and the actual servo position, can
be read.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
30
2
(Completion code)
-
(Need not be set)
4
(Data length)
-
(Need not be set)
6
(Data number)
0
8 M = 1 to n: Servo delay for a specific axis.

(Data attribute) n is the maximum axis number.
M
(M = Axis number)
M = -1: Servo delay for all axes
10
(Data area)
-
(Need not be set)
» »
42
[Completion codes]
0: The servo delay for the controlled axes have been read normally.
neither -1 nor a value from 1 to n (n is the number of axes).
Alternatively, the specified axis number is greater than the number
of controlled axes.
- 490 -
Top address + 0
(Function code)
30
2 (Completion code)
?
4 (Data length)
L
axes specified.)
6
(Data number)
-
8
(Data attribute)
M
10 Servo delay for the controlled axis Signed binary

specified (4 bytes) (A negative value is represented in
2's complement.)
Value
10 Servo delay for the first axis (4 bytes) Signed binary

(A negative value is represented in
2's complement.)
14 Servo delay for the second axis
(4 bytes)
18 Servo delay for the third axis (4 bytes)
22 Servo delay for the fourth axis

(4 bytes)
- 491 -
5.5.6 Reading the Acceleration/Deceleration Delay on Controlled

Axes (High-speed Response)
[Description]
The acceleration/deceleration delay, which is the difference between
the coordinates of controlled axes programmed in the CNC and the
position after acceleration/deceleration is performed, can be read.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
31
2
(Completion code)
-
(Need not be set)
4
(Data length)
-
(Need not be set)
6
(Data number)
0
8 M = 1 to n: Acceleration/deceleration delay for a

(Data attribute) specific axis. n is the maximum axis
M number.
(M = Axis number)
M = -1: Acceleration/deceleration delay for
10 all axes
(Data area)
-
(Need not be set)
» »
42
[Completion codes]
0: The acceleration/deceleration delay for the control axis has been
read normally.
of controlled axes.
- 492 -
Top address + 0
(Function code)
31
2 (Completion code)
?
4 (Data length)
L
axes specified.)
6
(Data number)
-
8
(Data attribute)
M
10 Acceleration/deceleration delay for the Signed binary

controlled axis specified (4 bytes) (A negative value is represented in
2's complement.)
Value
10 Acceleration/deceleration delay for Signed binary

the first axis (4 bytes) (A negative value is represented in
2's complement.)
14 Acceleration/deceleration delay for the
second axis (4 bytes)

third axis (4 bytes)

fourth axis (4 bytes)
[Output data unit]


system inch 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001 0.0000001
Radius mm, deg 0.01 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001
specification
Diameter 0.01 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001
Lathe specification
specification
Diameter 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001 0.0000001
specification
- 493 -
5.5.7 Reading the Feed Motor Load Current Value (A/D Conversion
Data) (High-speed Response)
[Description]
The digital value converted from the load current of the CNC-
controlled axis can be read.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
34
2
(Completion code)
-
(Need not be set)
4
(Data length)
-
(Need not be set)
6
(Data number)
N
(N: Type of analog voltage)
8
(Data attribute)
M
(M = 1 to 8: Axis specification)
10
(Data area)
-
(Need not be set)
(a) Type of analog voltage (data number)

N Type of analog voltage
0 (reserved)
2 Load information for the CNC-controlled axes
- 494 -
(b) Specifying a CNC-controlled axis (data attribute)

Specify a CNC-controlled axis number for which the voltage
conversion data for the load current is to be read.
CAUTION
There is no general-purpose analog input on
30i/31i/32i-A. If you need such a function, use the
I/O Link analog input module.
[Completion codes]
0: A/D conversion data has been read normally.
3: The data specified for the data number is invalid.
4: The data specified for the data attribute is invalid, or the specified
axis number is greater than the number of controlled axes.
- 495 -
Top address + 0
(Function code)
34
2 (Completion code)
?
4
(Data length)
2
6
(Data number)
N
(Input data)
8
(Data attribute)
M
(Input data) Value
10 A/D conversion data (2 bytes) Binary number from 0 to ±6554

(For CNC controlled axis load
information)
(a) A/D conversion data (AD) of CNC controlled axis load

information
The load current for the specified CNC controlled axis is
converted into analog voltage, the input to the A/D converter to
output a digital data.
The value actually set in the AD field is obtained from the
following formula:
(AD) ´ N = Load current [Apeak]

6554
AD = A/D conversion data [Value read by the window function (± ±)]

N = Nominal current limit for the amplifier corresponding to the motor
For the nominal current limits, see the table below or the
descriptions of the control motor.
NOTE
For the nominal current limits, see the descriptions
of the control motor.
- 496 -
5.5.8 Reading the Actual Spindle Speed (High-speed Response)
[Description]
The actual speed of the spindle can be read from the CNC.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
50
2
(Completion code)
-
(Need not be set)
4
(Data length)
-
(Need not be set)
(Data number)
0
(Data attribute)
0
10
(Data area)
-
(Need not be set)
» »
42
[Completion codes]
0: The actual speed of the spindle has been read normally.
- 497 -
Top address + 0
(Function code)
50
2 (Completion code)
?
4
(Data length)
4
6
(Data number)
-
8
(Data attribute)
- Value
10
Actual spindle speed Unsigned binary
<Data unit>
min-1
- 498 -
5.5.9 Reading the Relative Position on a Controlled Axis (High-

speed Response)
[Description]
The relative coordinates of the machine moving along an axis
controlled by the CNC can be read.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
74
2
(Completion code)
-
(Need not be set)
4
(Data length)
-
(Need not be set)
6
(Data number)
0
8 M = 1 to n: Reads the relative coordinates of

(Data attribute)
M each axis. n is an axis No.
(M: Axis number)
M = -1: Reads the relative coordinates of all
10 axes.
(Data area)
-
(Need not be set)
» »
42
[Completion codes]
0: The relative coordinates on the controlled axis have been read
normally.
4: The specified data attribute is invalid. That is, a value other than
-1 and 1 to n (number of axes) was specified, or the specified axis
No. was greater than the number of controlled axes.
- 499 -
Top address + 0
(Function code)
74
2 (Completion code)
?
4
(Data length)
L
(L = 4*n. n is the number of
specified axes.)
6
(Data number)
-
8
(Data attribute)
M
(M: Input data)
Value
10
Relative coordinates on the Signed binary
specified controlled axis (4 bytes) (A negative value is represented in
2's complement.)
Value
10
Relative coordinates on the first Signed binary
axis (4 bytes) (A negative value is represented in
14 2's complement.)
Relative coordinates on the second
axis (4 bytes)
18
Relative coordinates on the third
(4 bytes)
22
Relative coordinates on the fourth
axis (4 bytes)
[Output data unit]

system inch 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001 0.0000001
Radius mm, deg 0.01 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001
specification
Diameter 0.01 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001
Lathe specification
specification
Diameter 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001 0.0000001
specification
Double values can be read for a machining center system or when

radius specification is used for the relevant axis of a lathe system.
- 500 -
5.5.10 Reading the Remaining Travel (High-speed Response)
[Description]
The remaining travel of the machine along an axis controlled by the
CNC can be read. The read value equals the remaining travel
indicated on the current position display screen on the CNC. (This
screen can be called by pressing the function key <POS>.)
Top address + 0
(Function code)
75
2
(Completion code)
-
(Need not be set)
4
(Data length)
-
(Need not be set)
6
(Data number)
0
8 M = 1 to n: Reads the remaining travel along

(Data attribute)
M each axis. n is an axis No.
(M: Axis number)
M = -1: Reads the remaining travel along all
10 axes.
(Data area)
-
(Need not be set)
» »
42
[Completion codes]
0: The remaining travel along the controlled axis has been read
normally.
- 501 -
Top address + 0
(Function code)
75
2 (Completion code)
?
4
(Data length)
L
(L = 4*n. n is the number of
specified axes.)
6
(Data number)
-
8
(Data attribute)
M
(M: Input data)
Value
10
Remaining travel along the Signed binary
specified controlled axis (4 bytes) (A negative value is represented in
2's complement.)
Value
10
Remaining travel along the first Signed binary
axis (4 bytes) (A negative value is represented in
2's complement.)
14
Remaining travel along the second
axis (4 bytes)
18
Remaining travel along the third
axis (4 bytes)
22
Remaining travel along the fourth
axis (4 bytes)
[Output data unit]


system inch 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001 0.0000001
Radius mm, deg 0.005 0.0005 0.00005 0.000005 0.0000005
specification
Diameter 0.01 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001
Lathe specification
specification
Diameter 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001 0.0000001
specification
- 502 -
5.5.11 Reading the Actual Velocity of each Controlled Axis (High-

speed Response)
[Description]
The actual velocity of each controlled axis can be read.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
91
2
(Completion code)
-
(Need not be set)
4
(Data length)
-
(Need not be set)
6
(Data number)
0
8
(Data attribute) M = 1 to n: Reads the actual velocity of each
M controlled axis. n is an axis No.
(M: Axis number)
M = -1: Reads the actual velocity of all
10
(Data area) controlled axes.
-
(Need not be set)
» »
42
[Completion codes]
0: The actual velocity of the each controlled axis has been read
normally.
- 503 -
Top address + 0
(Function code)
91
2
(Completion code)
?
4 (Data length)
L
(L=4*n, n is number of
specified axes)
6
(Data number)
-
8
(Data attribute)
M
10 Actual velocity of each controlled axes Signed binary.

2’s complement.)
Value
10
Actual velocity of first axis Signed binary.
14 2’s complement.)
Actual velocity of second axis
(4 bytes)
18
Actual velocity of third axis
(4 bytes)
22
Actual velocity of fourth axis
(4 bytes)
[Output data unit]

Increment system Data Increment
mm 1mm/min, 1deg/min
inch 0.01mm/min, 0.01deg/min
- 504 -
5.5.12 Reading Actual Spindle Speeds (High-speed Response)
(1) Actual spindle speed
[Description]
This function reads the actual speed of the serial spindles.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
138
+2
(Completion code)
-
(Need not be set)
+4
(Data length)
-
(Need not be set)
+6
(Data number)
0
+8 M = 1 to n: Read spindles on each axis.

(Data attribute) (n is the spindle number.)
M -1: Read spindles on No.1 and No.2 axes
(M = Spindle number)
-2: Read spindles on No.1 to No.3 axes
+10 -3: Read spindles on No.1 to No.4 axes
(Data area) -4: Read spindles on No.1 to No.5 axes
- -5: Read spindles on No.1 to No.6 axes
(Need not be set) -6: Read spindles on No.1 to No.7 axes
[Completion codes]
0: The actual spindle speed was read successfully.
4: The spindle speed in 'Data Attribute' has wrong values, that is, a
value outside of the range -1 to -(n - 1) or 1 to n (n: number of
spindles).
- 505 -
Top address + 0
(Function code)
138
+2
(Completion code)
?
+4
(Data length)
L
(L = 4 ´ n)
+6
(Data number)
-
+8
(Data attribute)
M
(Entered data)
Value
+10
Actual speed of specified spindle Signed binary
<Data unit>
min-1
+14
Or, 4 spindles:
Value
+10
Actual speed of No.1 spindle Signed binary
<Data unit>
min-1
+14
Actual speed of No.2 spindle
+18
+22
+26
- 506 -
(2) Position coder-less actual spindle speed
[Description]
This function reads the actual spindle speed (position coder-less actual
spindle speed) obtained by calculating the spindle motor speed of the
serial spindles.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
138
+2
(Completion code)
-
(Need not be set)
+4
(Data length)
-
(Need not be set)
+6
(Data number)
0
+8
(Data attribute) M = 11 to (10 + n): Read spindles on each axis.
M (n is the spindle number.)
(M = Spindle number + 10) -11: Read spindles on No.1 and No.2 axes
(Data area)
-
(Need not be set) -15: Read spindles on No.1 to No.6 axes
[Completion codes]
0: The actual spindle speed was read successfully.
4: The spindle speed in 'Data Attribute' has wrong values, that is, a
value outside of the range -11 to -(9 + 1) or 11 to (10 + n) (n:
number of spindles).
- 507 -
Top address + 0
(Function code)
138
+2
(Completion code)
?
+4
(Data length)
L
(L = 4 ´ n)
+6
(Data number)
-
+8
(Data attribute)
M
(Entered data)
Value
+10
Position coder-less actual spindle Signed binary
speed <Data unit>
min-1
+14
Or, 4 spindles:
Value
+10
Position coder-less actual No.1 Signed binary
spindle speed <Data unit>
min-1
+14
Position coder-less actual No.2
spindle speed
+18
spindle speed
+22
spindle speed
+26
- 508 -
5.5.13 Entering Torque Limit Data for the Digital Servo Motor (Low-
speed Response)
[Description]
Torque limit values for the digital servo motor can be entered.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
152
2
(Completion code)
-
(Need not be set)
(Data length)
2
6
(Data number)
0
8
(Data attribute)
M M = 1 to n: Axis No.
(M: 1 to n)
Value
10 Torque limit data Unsigned binary
(1 byte) <Unit: %>
The high-order byte is always set to Values from 0 to 255 correspond to
0. 0% to 100%.
CAUTION
Calculate the torque limit data assuming that the
short time rated value is 100%.
Example: To specify a torque limit of 50%, enter
128.
[Completion codes]
0: Torque limit data has been entered normally.
4: The specified data attribute is invalid. That is, a value other than 1
to n (number of axes) was specified, or the specified axis No. was
greater than the number of controlled axes.
- 509 -
Top address + 0
(Function code)
152
2
(Completion code)
?
4
(Data length)
2
(Input data)
6
(Data number)
-
(Input data)
8
(Data attribute)
M
10
Torque limit data (1 byte): Input data Unsigned binary
The high-order byte is always set to <Unit: %>
0. Values from 0 to 255 correspond to
0% to 100%.
- 510 -
5.5.13 Reading Load Information of the Spindle Motor (Serial

Interface) (High-speed Response)
[Description]
Load information of the serial spindle can be read.
The equation to normalize the load information is shown below
L
Load(%) = l
32767
L: Data read from the window

l: The percentage of the maximum output of the motor to the
continuous rated output of the motor (When the maximum output
is 180% and the continuous rated output is 100%, the percentage is
180.)
CAUTION
The "l" is equal to the value of parameter No. 4127.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
153
2
(Completion code)
-
(Need not be set)
4
(Data length)
-
(Need not be set)
6
(Data number)
N N = 0: Read the load of the No.1 spindle.
(Need not be set) 1: Read the load of the No.2 spindle.
2: Read the load of the No.3 spindle.
8 3: Read the load of the No.4 spindle.
(Data attribute) 4: Read the load of the No.5 spindle.
6: Read the load of the No.7 spindle.
(Data area) -1: Read the loads of the No.1 and No.2 spindles.
- -2: Read the loads of the No.1 to No.3 spindles.
(Need not be set) -3: Read the loads of the No.1 to No.4 spindles.
-4: Read the loads of the No.1 to No.5 spindles.
» » -7: Read the loads of the No.1 to No.8 spindles.
42
- 511 -
[Completion codes]
0: Load information of the serial spindle has been read normally.
L = 2: Specifies the first axis.

L = 4: Specifies the second axis. (when N = -1)
L = 6: Specifies the third axis. (when N = -2)
L = 8: Specifies the fourth axis. (when N = -3)
Top address + 0 L = 10: Specifies the fifth axis. (when N = -4)
(Function c of ode) L = 12: Specifies the sixth axis. (when N = -5)
153 L = 14: Specifies the seventh axis. (when N = -6)
L = 16: Specifies the eighth axis. (when N = -7)
2 (Completion code)
? N = 0: Read the load of the No.1 spindle.
(See the explanation of the N = 1: Read the load of the No.2 spindle.
completion codes.) N = 2: Read the load of the No.3 spindle.
N = 3: Read the load of the No.4 spindle.
4 N = 4: Read the load of the No.5 spindle.
(Data length)
N = 5: Read the load of the No.6 spindle.
L N = 6: Read the load of the No.7 spindle.
(L = 2, 4) N = 7: Read the load of the No.8 spindle.
N = -1: Read the loads of the No.1 and No.2 spindles.
6
(Data number) N = -2: Read the loads of the No.1 to No.3 spindles.
N N = -3: Read the loads of the No.1 to No.4 spindles.
(N: Input data) N = -4: Read the loads of the No.1 to No.5 spindles.
N = -5: Read the loads of the No.1 to No.6 spindles.
8 N = -6: Read the loads of the No.1 to No.7 spindles.
N = -7: Read the loads of the No.1 to No.8 spindles.
(Data attribute)
- Value
10
Load information of the serial Unsigned binary, 2 bytes long
spindle (first or second axis)
When two axes are specified
(Data attribute)
- Value
10
First axis in the load information of Unsigned binary, 2 bytes long
the serial spindle
12
Second axis in the load information
of the serial spindle
- 512 -
When three axes are specified
(Data attribute)
- Value
10
the serial spindle
12
14
Third axis in the load information of
the serial spindle
When four axes are specified
(Data attribute)
- Value
10
the serial spindle
12
14
Third axis in the load information of
the serial spindle
16
Fourth axis in the load information
- 513 -
5.5.14 Reading the Estimate Disturbance Torque Data (High-speed

Response)
Using the abnormal load detection function, the CNC constantly
calculates an estimated load torque. Enabling the estimated load
torque output function makes you able to read the data by using this
function.
CAUTION
The abnormal load detection function option is
required. For detailed settings of parameters and so
forth, refer to the description of abnormal load
detection in the connection manual (functions).
(1) Servo axis
[Description]
This function can read the estimate disturbance torque data. The
estimate disturbance torque data is the load current data except a
necessary current data for acceleration / deceleration of the servo
motor. This read value is normalized from –6554 to 6554. The value
6554 corresponds to the maximum current of servo amplifier.
Applying the following formula to this value, you can determine the
ratio of the estimate disturbance current to the maximum current of
amplifier.
Ratio (%) = [data] * 100 / 6554
Applying the following formula, you can also determine the estimate
disturbance current (Apeak).
Estimate disturbance current (Apeak) = [data] * N / 6554
The value of N is following.
Parameter N
No.2165
less than 20 The value of No.2165
20 or more The value that is rounded down below
the one's digit of the value of No.2165
- 514 -
Top address + 0
(Function code)
211
+2
(Completion code)
-
+4
(Data length)
-
+6
(Data number)
0
+8
(Data attribute) M = 1 to n: Estimate disturbance torque
M data for specific axis. "n" is the
(M = Axis number) axis number.
+10 M = -1: Estimate disturbance torque
(Data area) data for all axes.
-
+12
- 515 -
[Completion codes]
0: The estimate disturbance torque data have been read normally.
of controlled axes.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
211
+2
(Completion code)
?
(See the explanation of the
completion codes. )
+4
(Data length)
L
(L = 2 ´ n, n is the number
of axes specified.)
+6
(Data number)
0
+8
(Data attribute)
M
(M: Input data)
Value
+10
Estimate disturbance torque data (A negative value is represented in
for the controlled axis specified 2's complement. )
(2 bytes)
+12
Value
+10 Estimate disturbance torque
data for first axis Signed binary
2's complement. )
data for second axis
(2 bytes)
data for third axis
(2 bytes)
data for fourth axis
(2 bytes)
+18
- 516 -
(2) Spindle axis
[Description]
This function can read the estimate disturbance torque data. The
estimate disturbance torque data is the load torque data except a
necessary torque data for acceleration / deceleration of the spindle
motor. This read value is normalized from –16384 to 16384. The
value 16384 corresponds to the maximum torque of spindle motor.
Applying the following formula to this value, you can determine the
ratio of the estimate disturbance torque to the maximum torque of the
spindle motor.
Ratio (%) = [data] * 100 / 16384
Applying the following formula, you can also determine the estimate
disturbance torque (Nm). About the 30-min rated torque, refer to the
specification document of the motor.
Estimate disturbance torque (Nm) = [data] * N / 16384
N = [The 30-min rated torque of the motor] * 1.2.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
211
+2
(Completion code)
-
+4
(Data length)
-
+6
(Data number)
1 M = 1 to n: Read the load of each spindle.
(n is the spindle number.)
+8 -1: Read the loads of the No.1 and No.2 spindles.
(Data attribute) -2: Read the loads of the No.1 to No.3 spindles.
M -3: Read the loads of the No.1 to No.4 spindles.
(M = Spindle number)
+10 -5: Read the loads of the No.1 to No.6 spindles.
(Data area) -6: Read the loads of the No.1 to No.7 spindles.
- -7: Read the loads of the No.1 to No.8 spindles.
+12
- 517 -
[Completion codes]
0: The estimate disturbance torque data have been read normally.
of controlled axes.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
211
+2
(Completion code)
?
the completion codes. )
+4
(Data length)
L
(L = 2 ´ n, n is the number
of axes specified. )
+6
(Data number)
1
+8
(Data attribute)
M
(M: Input data)
Value
+10
Estimate disturbance torque Signed binary
data for the controlled axis 2's complement.)
specified (2 bytes)
+12
Value
+10 Estimate disturbance torque Signed binary

data for first axis (2 bytes) (A negative value is represented in
2's complement.)
» »
+8 + (2 ´ n) Estimate disturbance torque
data for second axis (2 bytes)
- 518 -
5.5.15 Presetting the Relative Coordinate (Low-speed Response)

[Description]
The preset data is set to the relative coordinate controlled by CNC. If
0 is set as preset data it becomes to origin.
But it is impossible to write the value of preset data to the transferring
axis. In the case of the preset of relative coordinate of all axes is
executed by using this function, if only one axis is transferring, the
preset of relative coordinate cannot be executed, neither.

Case of writing data on each axis.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
249
+2
(Completion code)
-
(Need not be set.)
+4
(Data length)
4
+6
(Data number)
0
Value
+8
M=1 to n: Write data on each (n
(Data attribute) is the axis number)
M
(M: Axis number)
+10
Value of relative coordinate for the Signed binary
controlled axis specified (4 bytes) (A negative value is represented in
2's complement)
+12
- 519 -
[Input data unit]

system inch 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001 0.0000001
Radius mm, deg 0.01 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001
specification
Diameter 0.01 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001
Lathe specification
specification
Diameter 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001 0.0000001
specification
Case of writing data on all axes (controlled axes are 4).
Top address + 0
(Function code)
249
+2
(Completion code)
-
(Need not be set.)
+4
(Data length)
16
+6
(Data number)
0
Value
+8
-1 must be set
(Data attribute)
M
(M = -1)
+10
Signed binary
Value of relative coordinate for the (A negative value is represented in
first axis (4 bytes) 2's complement)
+14
Value of relative coordinate for the
second axis (4 bytes)
+18
Value of relative coordinate for
the third axis (4 bytes)
+22
Value of relative coordinate for the
fourth axis (4 bytes)
- 520 -
[Completion codes]
0: Success to set the value of relative coordinate.
4: Data specified for the data attribute is invalid because it is neither
-1 nor a value from 1 to n (n is the number of axes).
Alternatively, the specified axis number is greater than the
number of controlled axes.
5: Relative coordinate is out of range.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
249
+2
(Completion code)
?
+4
(Data length)
L
+6
(Data number)
0
+8
(Data attribute)
M
(M: Input data)
+10
Value of relative coordinate
(4*n bytes)
- 521 -
5.6 TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT FUNCTION
5.6.1 Reading The Tool Life Management Data (Tool Group

Number) (High-speed Response)
[Description]
This function reads the tool group number in which the specified tool
number is registered.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
38
2
(Completion code)
-
(Need not be set)
4
(Data length)
-
(Need not be set)
6
(Data number)
0
8
(Data attribute)
M
(M: Tool No.)
10
(Data area)
-
(Need not be set)
» »
MAX138
CAUTION
1 When the tool number is set to "0", the tool group
number of the currently used tool is read. If a tool
group number is not specified after the power is
turned ON, tool group number "0" is read.
2 If the same tool belongs to two or more tool groups,
32 tool groups can be read in the maximum. In this
case, 128 bytes are required as the data area in
the maximum.
- 522 -
[Completion codes]
0: The tool group number is read successfully.
4: The tool number in 'Data Attribute' has a wrong value.
5: The tool number is not registered.
6: The tool life management option has not been added on.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
38
2 (Completion code)
?
4
(Data length)
L L = 4 to 4 ´ n
(L = 4 ´ n) n is the number of tool groups to which the
specified tool belongs.
6
(Data number)
-
8
(Data attribute)
M
10
Tool group No. (4 bytes) Unsigned binary
14
When the specified tool belongs to two or more tool groups
10
Tool group No. (4 bytes) Unsigned binary
14
Tool group No. (4 bytes)

18
Tool group No. (4 bytes)
22
- 523 -
5.6.2 Reading Tool Life Management Data (Number of Tool

Groups) (High-speed Response)
[Description]
This function reads the number of tool groups in the tool life
management data.
The maximum number of pairs of tool life management data in whole
CNC system is 256 pairs (or 1024 pairs when extended).
The number of pairs assigned to the path is set to CNC parameter
No.6813. The number of tool groups that can be registered varies
depending on the setting of parameter No.6800#0(GS1) and
No.6800#1(GS2) of the CNC, as indicated in the following table.
Parameter 6800
GS2 GS1 Number of tool groups Tools per group
0 0 1/8 of Max. pairs (No.6813) 32
0 1 1/4 of Max. pairs (No.6813) 16
1 0 1/2 of Max. pairs (No.6813) 8
1 1 Max. pairs (No.6813) 4
- 524 -
Top address + 0
(Function code)
39
2
(Completion code)
-
(Need not be set)
4
(Data length)
-
(Need not be set)
6
(Data number)
0
8
(Data attribute)
0
10
(Data area)
-
(Need not be set)
» »
42
[Completion codes]
0: The number of tool group numbers has been read successfully.
6: No option for the tool life management.
- 525 -
Top address + 0
(Function code)
39
2
(Completion code)
?
4
(Data length)
4
6
(Data number)
-
8
(Data attribute)
-
Value
10 Number of tool groups (4 bytes) Unsigned binary
- 526 -
5.6.3 Reading Tool Life Management Data (Number of Tools) (High-

speed Response)
[Description]
This function reads the number of tools that belong to the tool group
specified by tool group number, from the tool life management data.
The number of tools that can be registered in each tool group varies
depending on the setting of parameter 6800#0(GS1) and 6800#1(GS2)
of the CNC, as indicated in the following table.
Parameter 6800
Number of tools in
GS2 GS1
a tool group
0 0 1 to 32
0 1 1 to 16
1 0 1 to 8
1 1 1 to 4
- 527 -
Top address + 0
(Function code)
40
2
(Completion code)
-
(Need not be set)
4
(Data length)
-
(Need not be set)
6
(Data number)
N
(N: Tool group number)
8
(Data attribute)
0
10
(Data area)
-
(Need not be set)
» »
42
CAUTION
Specifying "0" to the tool group number means the
tool group that is currently selected.
While no tool group is selected yet after power-on of
CNC, "0" of the tool group number results "0" of
number of tools.
[Completion codes]
0: The number of tools has been read successfully.
3: The specified tool group number is incorrect.
- 528 -
Top address + 0
(Function code)
40
2
(Completion code)
?
4
(Data length)
4
6
(Data number)
N
(N: Input data)
8
(Data attribute)
-
Value
10 Number of tools (4 bytes) Unsigned binary
- 529 -
5.6.4 Reading Tool Life Management Data (Tool Life) (High-speed

Response)
[Description]
This function reads the tool life value of the tool group specified by
tool group number, from the tool life management data.
You can choose the method to manage tool lives by period of
machining time or by the count of machining cycles for each tool
group.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
41
2
(Completion code)
-
(Need not be set)
4
(Data length)
-
(Need not be set)
6
(Data number)
N
8
(Data attribute)
0
10
(Data area)
-
(Need not be set)
» »
42
CAUTION
CNC, "0" of the tool group number results "0" of tool
life value.
- 530 -
[Completion codes]
0: The tool life has been read successfully.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
41
2
(Completion code)
?
4
(Data length)
4
6
(Data number)
N
(N: Input data)
8
(Data attribute)
-
Value
Tool life (4 bytes) Unsigned binary

10
Time or number of cycles
In case the tool group chooses machining time to manage the lives of
the tools, CNC parameter No.6805#0(FCO) determines the unit of the
return value as below.
FCO Unit
0 1 minute
1 0.1 minute
- 531 -
5.6.5 Reading Tool Life Management Data (Tool Life Counter)

(High-speed Response)
[Description]
This function reads the tool life counter of the tool group specified by
tool group number, from the tool life management data.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
42
2
(Completion code)
-
(Need not be set)
4
(Data length)
-
(Need not be set)
6
(Data number)
N
8
(Data attribute)
0
10
(Data area)
-
(Need not be set)
» »
42
CAUTION
life counter.
- 532 -
[Completion codes]
0: The tool life has been read successfully.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
42
2
(Completion code)
?
4
(Data length)
4
6
(Data number)
N
(N: Input data)
8
(Data attribute)
-
Value
Tool life counter (4 bytes) Unsigned binary

10
Time or number of cycles
In case the tool group chooses machining time to manage the lives of
the tools, CNC parameter No.6805#0(FCO) determines the unit of the
return value as below.
FCO Unit
0 1 minute
1 0.1 minute
- 533 -
5.6.6 Reading Tool Life Management Data (Tool Length

Compensation Number (1): Tool Number) (High-speed
Response)
[Description]
This function reads the tool length compensation number of the tool
specified by tool group number and tool number, from the tool life
management data.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
43
2
(Completion code)
-
(Need not be set)
4
(Data length)
-
(Need not be set)
6
(Data number)
N
8
(Data attribute)
M
(M: Tool number)
10
(Data area)
-
(Need not be set)
» »
42
CAUTION
tool group that is currently selected, and "0" to the
tool number means the tool that is currently used in
the group.
CNC, specifying the current tool of the current group
results "0" of tool length compensation number.
- 534 -
[Completion codes]
0: The tool length compensation number has been read successfully.
4: The specified tool number is incorrect.
5: The specified tool number is not found in the specified tool group.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
43
2
(Completion code)
?
4
(Data length)
4
6
(Data number)
N
(N: Input data)
8
(Data attribute)
M
10 Tool length compensation number Unsigned binary

(4 bytes)
- 535 -

Compensation Number (2): Tool Order Number) (High-speed
Response)
[Description]
specified by tool group number and tool order number, from the tool
life management data.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
44
2
(Completion code)
-
(Need not be set)
4
(Data length)
-
(Need not be set)
6
(Data number)
N
8
(Data attribute)
M
(M: Tool order number)
10
(Data area)
-
(Need not be set)
» »
42
- 536 -
CAUTION
tool group that is currently selected. While no tool
group is selected yet after power-on of CNC,
specifying the current group results "0" of tool length
compensation number.
Specifying "0" to the tool order number means the
tool that is currently used. If the tool group has not
ever been selected, tool order number "0" means
the first tool in the group instead.
[Completion codes]
0: The tool length compensation number has been read successfully.
4: The specified tool order number is incorrect.
5: The specified tool group has no tool in the specified tool order
position.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
44
2 (Completion code)
?
4
(Data length)
4
6
(Data number)
N
(N: Input data)
8
(Data attribute)
M
(M: Input data)
Value
10
Tool length compensation number Unsigned binary
(4 bytes)
- 537 -
5.6.8 Reading Tool Life Management Data (Cutter Radius

Response)
[Description]
This function reads the cutter radius compensation number of the tool
management data.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
45
2
(Completion code)
-
(Need not be set)
4
(Data length)
-
(Need not be set)
6
(Data number)
N
8
(Data attribute)
M
(M : Tool number)
10
(Data area)
-
(Need not be set)
» »
42
CAUTION
the group.
results "0" of cutter radius compensation number.
- 538 -
[Completion codes]
0: The cutter radius compensation number has been read successfully.
5: The specified tool number was not found in the specified tool
group.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
45
2 (Completion code)
?
4
(Data length)
4
6
(Data number)
N
(N: Input data)
8
(Data attribute)
M
(M: Input data)
Value
10
Cutter compensation number Unsigned binary
(4 bytes)
- 539 -

Compensation Number (2): Tool Order Number) (High-speed
Response)
[Description]
specified by tool group number and tool order number, from the tool
life management data.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
46
2
(Completion code)
-
(Need not be set)
4
(Data length)
-
(Need not be set)
6
(Data number)
N
8
(Data attribute)
M
10
(Data area)
-
(Need not be set)
» »
42
- 540 -
CAUTION
If 0 is specified for the tool group number, the tool
group currently used is referred. In this case, if any
tool group has not been used since the power to the
CNC was turned on, 0 is read.
When 0 is specified for the tool order number, the
data of the current tool in the tool group is read if the
group has already been used, or the data of the first
tool in the group is read if the group has not ever
used.
[Completion codes]
0: The cutter radius compensation number has been read successfully.
position.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
46
2 (Completion code)
?
4
(Data length)
4
6
(Data number)
N
(N: Input data)
8
(Data attribute)
M
(M: Input data)
Value
10
Cutter compensation number Unsigned binary
(4 bytes)
- 541 -
5.6.10 Reading Tool Life Management Data (Tool Information (1):

Tool Number) (High-speed Response)
[Description]
This function reads the status information of the tool specified by tool
group number and tool number, from the tool life management data.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
47
2
(Completion code)
-
(Need not be set)
4
(Data length)
-
(Need not be set)
6
(Data number)
N
8
(Data attribute)
M
(M: Tool number)
10
(Data area)
-
(Need not be set)
» »
42
CAUTION
the group.
results "0" of tool status information.
- 542 -
[Completion codes]
0: The tool status information has been read successfully.
5: The specified tool number was not found in the specified tool
group.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
47
2 (Completion code)
?
4
(Data length)
4
6
(Data number)
N
(N: Input data)
8
(Data attribute)
M
10
Tool status information (4 bytes) 0: See "CAUTION" on the previous page.
1: The tool is registered.
2: The tool has reached the end of its life.
3: The tool was skipped.
The three high-order bytes are fixed to 0.
- 543 -

Tool Order Number) (High-speed Response)
[Description]
group number and tool order number, from the tool life management
data.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
48
2
(Completion code)
-
(Need not be set)
4
(Data length)
-
(Need not be set)
6
(Data number)
N
8
(Data attribute)
M
10
(Data area)
-
(Need not be set)
» »
42
CAUTION
specifying the current group results "0" of tool status
information.
- 544 -
[Completion codes]
0: The tool status information has been read successfully.
position.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
48
2 (Completion code)
?
4
(Data length)
4
6
(Data number)
N
(N: Input data)
8
(Data attribute)
M
10
Tool status information (4 bytes) 0: See "Caution" on the previous page.
1: The tool is registered.
2: The tool has reached the end of its life.
- 545 -
5.6.12 Reading Tool Life Management Data (Tool Number) (High-

speed Response)
[Description]
This function reads the tool number of the tool specified by tool group
number and tool order number, from the tool life management data.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
49
2
(Completion code)
-
(Need not be set)
4
(Data length)
-
(Need not be set)
6
(Data number)
N
8
(Data attribute)
M
10
(Data area)
-
(Need not be set)
» »
42
CAUTION
specifying the current group results "0" of tool
number.
- 546 -
[Completion codes]
0: The tool number has been read successfully.
position.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
49
2
(Completion code)
?
4
(Data length)
4
6
(Data number)
N
(N: Input data)
8
(Data attribute)
M
(M: Input data)
Value
10
Tool number (4 bytes) Unsigned binary
- 547 -
5.6.13 Reading the Tool Life Management Data (Tool Life Counter
Type) (High-speed Response)
[Description]
This function reads the tool life counter type of the tool group
specified by tool group number, from the tool life management data.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
160
+2
(Completion code)
-
(Need not be set)
+4
(Data length)
-
(Need not be set)
+6
(Data number)
N
(N : Tool group number)
+8
(Data attribute)
0
+ 10
(Data area)
-
(Need not be set)
+ 12
CAUTION
life counter type.
[Completion codes]
0: The tool life counter type has been read successfully.
6: No option for Tool life management.
- 548 -
Top address + 0
(Function code)
160
+2
(Completion code)
?
+4
(Data length)
2
+6
(Data number)
N
+8
(Data attribute)
-
Value
+ 10
Tool life counter type (2 bytes) 0 : No counter type
1 : Frequency
2 : Real time
- 549 -
5.6.14 Registering Tool Life Management Data (Tool Group)

(Low-speed Response)
[Description]
This function registers a tool group in the tool life management data,
with tool number, length of life and tool life counter type.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
163
+2
(Completion code)
-
(Need not be set)
+4
(Data length)
8
+6
(Data number)
0
+8
(Data attribute)
M
(M = Tool number)
Value
+ 10
Tool group number Unsigned binary
(2 bytes) 1–1024
+ 12
Tool life counter type 1: Number of uses
(2 bytes) 2: Real time in minutes
+ 14 Unsigned binary
Tool life (4 bytes)
1–65535 times (Number of uses)
1–4300 minutes (Real time) Note
With the tool life management B function
1–100000/60000 minutes (Real time) Note
NOTE
CNC parameter FCO(6805#0) decides the unit of
tool life value of real time counter type as follows:
6805#0 = 0 : 1 minute (1–4300)
6805#0 = 1 : 0.1 minute (1–43000)
With the tool life management B function, this
parameter also decides the effective region of life
value as follows:
6805#0 = 0 : 100000 minutes (1–100000)
6805#0 = 1 : 60000 minutes (1–600000)
- 550 -
[Completion codes]
0: Succeeded to register the tool group.
4: The tool number in 'Data attribute' has wrong value.
5: The length of tool life in 'Data area' is out of range.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
163
+2
(Completion code)
?
+4
(Data length)
8
+6
(Data number)
-
+8
(Data attribute)
M
+ 10
Tool group number (2 bytes)
+ 12
Tool life counter type (2 bytes)
+ 14
Length of Tool life (4 bytes)
- 551 -
5.6.15 Writing Tool Life Management Data (Tool Life)

[Description]
This function sets the length of tool life of the specified tool group in
the tool life management data.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
164
+2
(Completion code)
-
(Need not be set)
+4
(Data length)
4
+6
(Data number)
N
(N = Tool group number)
+8
(Data attribute)
0
Value
+10
Unsigned binary
Tool life (4 bytes) With the tool life management B function
NOTE
6805#0 = 0 : 1 minute (1–4300)
6805#0 = 1 : 0.1 minute (1–43000)
value as follows:
6805#0 = 0 : 100000 minutes (1–100000)
6805#0 = 1 : 60000 minutes (1–600000)
- 552 -
[Completion codes]
0: Succeeded to set the length of tool life.
5: The length of tool life is out of range.
13: The data of the currently selected tool group or the next tool
group cannot be rewritten. An attempt was made to rewrite the
data of the currently selected tool group or the next group.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
164
+2
(Completion code)
?
+4
(Data length)
4
+6
(Data number)
N
+8
(Data attribute)
-
+ 10
- 553 -
5.6.16 Writing Tool Life Management Data (Tool Life Counter)

[Description]
This function sets the tool life counter in the specified tool group in
Top address + 0
(Function code)
165
+2
(Completion code)
-
(Need not be set)
+4
(Data length)
4
+6
(Data number)
N
+8
(Data attribute)
0
Value
+10 Unsigned binary
Tool life counter (4 bytes)
NOTE
6805#0 = 0 : 1 minute (1–4300)
6805#0 = 1 : 0.1 minute (1–43000)
value as follows:
6805#0 = 0 : 100000 minutes (1–100000)
6805#0 = 1 : 60000 minutes (1–600000)
[Completion codes]
0: Succeeded to set the tool life counter.
5: The value for tool life counter is out of range.
- 554 -
Top address + 0
(Function code)
165
+2
(Completion code)
?
+4
(Data length)
4
+6
(Data number)
N
+8
(Data attribute)
-
+ 10
- 555 -
5.6.17 Writing Tool Life Management Data (Tool Life Counter Type)
[Description]
This function sets the tool life counter type of specified tool group in
Top address + 0
(Function code)
166
+2
(Completion code)
-
(Need not be set)
+4
(Data length)
2
+6
(Data number)
N
+8
(Data attribute)
0
Value
+ 10
Tool life counter type (2 bytes) 1: Number of uses
2: Real time in minutes
[Completion codes]
0: Succeeded to set the tool life counter type.
5: The value for tool life counter type is wrong.
- 556 -
Top address + 0
(Function code)
166
+2
(Completion code)
?
+4
(Data length)
2
+6
(Data number)
N
+8
(Data attribute)
-
+ 10
Tool life counter type (2 bytes)
- 557 -
5.6.18 Writing Tool Life Management Data (Tool Length

Compensation Number (1): Tool Number)
[Description]
This function sets the tool length compensation number of the
specified tool group in the tool life management data.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
167
+2
(Completion code)
-
(Need not be set)
+4
(Data length)
4
+6
(Data number)
N
+8
(Data attribute)
M
(M = Tool number)
Value
+ 10
(4 bytes) 1-255
[Completion codes]
0: Succeeded to set the tool length compensation number.
5: The tool number is not found in the tool group.
- 558 -
Top address + 0
(Function code)
167
+2
(Completion code)
?
+4
(Data length)
4
+6
(Data number)
N
+8
(Data attribute)
M
+ 10
Tool length compensation number
(4 bytes)
CAUTION
The effective value for tool length compensation
number depends on tool compensation number
available on CNC.
- 559 -

Compensation Number (2): Tool Order Number)
[Description]
This function sets the tool length compensation number of the tool of
the specified tool order number in the tool life management data.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
168
+2
(Completion code)
-
(Need not be set)
+4
(Data length)
4
+6
(Data number)
N
+8
(Data attribute)
M
(M = Tool order number)
Value
+ 10
(4 bytes) 1-255
[Completion codes]
0: Succeeded to set the tool length compensation number.
4: The tool order number is wrong.
- 560 -
Top address + 0
(Function code)
168
+2
(Completion code)
?
+4
(Data length)
4
+6
(Data number)
N
+8
(Data attribute)
M
+ 10
Tool length compensation number
(4 bytes)
CAUTION
available on CNC.
- 561 -
5.6.20 Writing Tool Life Management Data (Cutter Radius

[Description]
This function sets the cutter radius compensation number of the
Top address + 0
(Function code)
169
+2
(Completion code)
-
(Need not be set)
+4
(Data length)
4
+6
(Data number)
N
+8
(Data attribute)
M
(M = Tool number)
Value
+ 10
Cutter radius Unsigned binary
compensation number 1-255
(4 bytes)
[Completion codes]
0: Succeeded to set the cutter radius compensation number.
5: The tool number is not found in the tool group.
- 562 -
Top address + 0
(Function code)
169
+2
(Completion code)
?
+4
(Data length)
4
+6
(Data number)
N
+8
(Data attribute)
M
+ 10
Cutter radius
compensation number
(4 bytes)
CAUTION
The effective value for Cutter radius compensation
available on CNC.
- 563 -

Compensation Number (2): Tool Order Number)
[Description]
This function sets the cutter radius compensation number of the tool
of the specified tool order number in the tool life management data.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
170
+2
(Completion code)
-
(Need not be set)
+4
(Data length)
4
+6
(Data number)
N
+8
(Data attribute)
M
Value
+10
Cutter radius Unsigned binary
compensation number 1-255
(4 bytes)
[Completion codes]
0: Succeeded to set the cutter radius compensation number.
- 564 -
Top address + 0
(Function code)
170
+2
(Completion code)
?
+4
(Data length)
4
+6
(Data number)
N
+8
(Data attribute)
M
+10
Cutter radius
compensation number
(4 bytes)
CAUTION
The effective value for cutter radius compensation
available on CNC.
- 565 -
5.6.22 Writing the Tool Life Management Data (Tool Information (1):
Tool Number) (Low-speed Response)
[Description]
This function sets the Tool condition of the specified Tool group in
the Tool life management data.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
171
+2
(Completion code)
-
(Need not be set)
+4
(Data length)
2
+6
(Data number)
N
+8
(Data attribute)
M
(M = Tool number)
Value
+10
Tool information (2 bytes) 1: Tool state clear
2: Tool state skip
+12
[Completion codes]
0: The tool information is written successfully.
3: The tool group number exceeds maximum number of registered
groups.
5: The specified tool number is not registered to the specified tool
group.
- 566 -
Top address + 0
(Function code)
171
+2
(Completion code)
?
+4
(Data length)
2
+6
(Data number)
N
+8
(Data attribute)
M
+10
Tool information (2 bytes)
+12
This function changes tool condition as shown below.

Command Before call After call
Skip (#) Unused ( )
clear Skip (#) In use (@)
Expired (*) Unused ( )
Unused ( ) Skip (#)
skip In use (@) Skip (#)
Expired (*) Skip (#)
- 567 -
5.6.23 Writing the Tool Management Data (Tool Information (2): Tool
Order Number) (Low-speed Response)
[Description]
This function changes the status of the tool specified by tool group
number and tool order number, in the tool life management data.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
172
+2
(Completion code)
-
(Need not be set)
+4
(Data length)
2
+6
(Data number)
N
+8
(Data attribute)
M
(M : Tool order number)
Value
+10
Tool information (2 bytes) 1: Tool status clear
2: Tool status skip
[Completion codes]
0: The tool information has been set successfully.
4: The tool order number is incorrect.
6: No option for Tool life management.
- 568 -
Top address + 0
(Function code)
172
+2
(Completion code)
?
+4
(Data length)
2
+6
(Data number)
N
+8
(Data attribute)
M
+10

Skip (#) Unused ( )
Unused ( ) Skip (#)
- 569 -
5.6.24 Writing Tool Life Management Data (Tool Number)

[Description]
This function registers a tool to the specified tool group in the tool life
management data.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
173
+2
(Completion code)
-
(Need not be set)
+4
(Data length)
4
+6
(Data number)
N
+8
(Data attribute)
M
Value
+10
Tool number (4 bytes) Unsigned binary
1–99999999
[Completion codes]
0: Succeeded to register the tool number.
- 570 -
Top address + 0
(Function code)
173
+2
(Completion code)
?
+4
(Data length)
4
+6
(Data number)
N
+8
(Data attribute)
M
+10
Tool number (4 bytes)
- 571 -
5.6.25 Reading The Tool Life Management Data (Tool Group

Number) (High-speed Response)
[Description]
This function reads the tool group number in which the specified tool
number is registered. This function supports 8 digits tool number.
Top address 0
(Function code)
200
2
(Completion code)
-
(Need not be set)
4
(Data length)
-
(Need not be set)
(Data number)
0
8
(Data attribute)
M
(M = Tool number)
12
(Data area)
-
(Need not be set)
MAX140
NOTE
1 When the tool number is set to "0", the tool group
number of the currently used tool is read. If a tool
group number is not specified after the power is
turned ON, tool group number "0" is read.
2 If the same tool belongs to two or more tool groups,
32 tool groups can be read in the maximum. In this
case, 128 bytes are required as the data area in the
maximum.
- 572 -
[Completion codes]
0: The tool group number is read successfully.
5: The tool number is not registered.
Top address 0
(Function code)
200
2
(Completion code)
?
4
(Data length)
L L = 4 to 4 ´ n
(L = 4 ´ n) n is the number of tool group numbers
when multiple groups is specified.
6
(Data number)
-
8
(Data attribute)
M
(M: Entered data)
Value
12
Unsigned binary
Tool group number
(4 bytes)
16
Or, when the tool number is registered to multiple groups
Value
12 Tool group number Unsigned binary

(4 bytes)
16 Tool group number

(4 bytes)
20 Tool group number

(4 bytes)
24
- 573 -

Tool Number) (High-speed Response)
[Description]
group number and tool number, from the tool life management data.
Top address 0
(Function code)
201
2
(Completion code)
-
(Need not be set)
4
(Data length)
-
(Need not be set)
6
(Data number)
N
8
(Data attribute)
M
(M : Tool number)
12
(Data area)
-
(Need not be set)
16
CAUTION
the group.
results "0" of tool status information.
- 574 -
[Completion codes]
0: The tool information was read successfully.
group.
Top address 0
(Function code)
201
2
(Completion code)
?
4
(Data length)
4
6
(Data number)
N
(N: Entered data)
8
(Data attribute)
M
(M: Entered data)
Value
12
0: See "CAUTION" on the previous page.
Tool status information 1: The tool is registered.
(4 bytes) 2: The tool has reached the end of its life.
16
- 575 -
5.6.27 Registering Tool Life Management Data (Tool Group Number)

(Low-speed Response) (8-digit tool number)
[Description]
This function registers the tool group number to tool life management
data. Set the tool number, life value and life counter type to the
specified tool group.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
202
+2
(Completion code)
-
(Need not be set)
+4
(Data length)
8
+6
(Data number)
0
+8
(Data attribute)
M
(M = Tool number)
Value
+12
Unsigned binary
Tool group number 1–1024
(2 bytes)
+14
Tool life counter type 1: Number of uses
(2 bytes) 2: Real time in minutes
+16
Unsigned binary
Tool life 1–65535 times (Number of uses)
(4 bytes) 1–4300 minutes (Real time) Note
- 576 -
NOTE
6805#0 = 0 : 1 minute (1–4300)
6805#0 = 1 : 0.1 minute (1–43000)
value as follows:
6805#0 = 0 : 100000 minutes (1–100000)
6805#0 = 1 : 60000 minutes (1–600000)
[Completion codes]
0: The tool length was registered successfully.
5: The tool life value is out-of-range.
- 577 -
Top address 0
(Function code)
202
2
(Completion code)
?
4
(Data length)
8
6
(Data number)
-
(Data attribute)
M
12
Tool group number
(2 bytes)
14
Tool life counter type
(2 bytes)
16
Tool life value
(4 bytes)
20
- 578 -

Response)
[Description]
management data.
Top address 0
(Function code)
227
2
(Completion code)
-
(Need not be set)
4
(Data length)
-
(Need not be set)
6
(Data number)
N
8
(Data attribute)
M
(M : Tool number)
12
(Data area)
-
(Need not be set)
16
CAUTION
the group.
results "0" of tool length compensation number.
- 579 -
[Completion codes]
0: The tool length compensation number was read successfully.
group.
Top address 0
(Function code)
227
2
(Completion code)
?
4
(Data length)
4
6
(Data number)
N
(N: Entered data)
8
(Data attribute)
M
(M: Entered data)
Value
12
(4 bytes)
16
- 580 -

Response)
[Description]
management data.
Top address 0
(Function code)
228
2
(Completion code)
-
(Need not be set)
4
(Data length)
-
(Need not be set)
6
(Data number)
N
8
(Data attribute)
M
(M : Tool number)
12
(Data area)
-
(Need not be set)
16
CAUTION
the group.
results "0" of cutter radius compensation number.
- 581 -
[Completion codes]
0: The cutter radius compensation number was read successfully.
group.
Top address 0
(Function code)
228
2
(Completion code)
?
4
(Data length)
4
6
(Data number)
N
(N: Entered data)
8
(Data attribute)
M
(M: Entered data)
Value
12
Unsigned binary
Cutter radius compensation number
(4 bytes)
16
- 582 -

[Description]
This function sets the tool length compensation number of a specified
tool group in the tool life management data.
Top address 0
(Function code)
229
2
(Completion code)
-
(Need not be set)
4
(Data length)
4
6
(Data number)
N
(Data attribute)
M
(M = Tool number)
Value
12
Unsigned binary
Tool length 1–255
compensation number
(4 bytes)
16
[Completion codes]
0: The tool length compensation number was written successfully.
group.
- 583 -

Top address 0
(Function code)
229
2
(Completion code)
?
4
(Data length)
4
6
(Data number)
N
8
(Data attribute)
M
12
Tool length
compensation number
(4 bytes)
16
CAUTION
available on CNC.
- 584 -

[Description]
This function sets the cutter radius compensation number of a tool
belonging to a specified tool group in the tool life management data.
Top address 0
(Function code)
230
2
(Completion code)
-
(Need not be set)
4
(Data length)
4
6
(Data number)
N
(Data attribute)
M
(M = Tool number)
Value
12
Unsigned binary
Cutter radius 1–255
compensation number
(4 bytes)
16
[Completion codes]
0: The cutter radius compensation number was written successfully.
group.
- 585 -

Top address 0
(Function code)
230
2
(Completion code)
?
4
(Data length)
4
6
(Data number)
N
8
(Data attribute)
M
12
Cutter radius
compensation number
(4 bytes)
16
CAUTION
The effective value for Cutter radius compensation
available on CNC.
- 586 -
5.6.32 Writing the Tool Life Management Data (Tool Information (1):
Tool Number) (Low-speed Response)
[Description]
This function sets the tool information of a tool belonging to a
specified tool group in the tool life management data. This function
supports 8 digits tool number.
Top address 0
(Function code)
231
2
(Completion code)
-
(Need not be set)
4
(Data length)
2
6
(Data number)
N
(Data attribute)
M
(M = Tool number)
Value
12
1: Clears tool status.
Tool information
(2 bytes) 2: Skips tool status.
14
[Completion codes]
0: The tool information is written successfully.
3: The tool group number exceeds maximum number of registered
groups.
group.
- 587 -
Top address 0
(Function code)
231
2
(Completion code)
?
4
(Data length)
2
(Entered data)
6
(Data number)
N
(Entered data)
(Data attribute)
M
(Entered data)
12
Tool information
(2 bytes)
14

Skip (#) Unused ( )
Unused ( ) Skip (#)
- 588 -
5.6.33 Deleting Tool life Management Data (Tool Group)

[Description]
This function deletes the specified tool group in the tool life
management data. In other words, it makes the tool group to be
unregistered.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
324
+2
(Completion code)
-
(Need not be set)
+4
(Data length)
0
+6
(Data number)
N
+8
(Data attribute)
0
+10
[Completion codes]
0: Succeeded to delete the tool group number.
- 589 -
Top address + 0
(Function code)
324
+2
(Completion code)
?
+4
(Data length)
0
+6
(Data number)
N
+8
(Data attribute)
0
+10
- 590 -
5.6.34 Deleting Tool life Management Data (Tool Data)

[Description]
This function deletes the tool data at the specified tool order number
in the tool life management data.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
325
+2
(Completion code)
-
(Need not be set)
+4
(Data length)
0
+6
(Data number)
N
+8 (Data attribute)
M
+10
[Completion codes]
0: Succeeded to delete the tool group number.
- 591 -
Top address + 0
(Function code)
325
+2
(Completion code)
?
+4
(Data length)
0
+6
(Data number)
N
+8
(Data attribute)
M
+10
- 592 -
5.6.35 Clearing Tool Life Management Data (Tool Life Counter and
Tool Information) (Low-speed Response)
[Description]
This function clears the tool life counter and all tool information of the
Top address + 0
(Function code)
326
+2
(Completion code)
-
(Need not be set)
+4
(Data length)
0
+6
(Data number)
N
+8
(Data attribute)
0
+10
[Completion codes]
0: Succeeded to clear the tool life counter and the tool information.
- 593 -
Top address + 0
(Function code)
326
+2
(Completion code)
?
+4
(Data length)
0
+6
(Data number)
N
+8
(Data attribute)
0
+10
- 594 -
5.6.36 Writing Tool Life Management Data (Arbitrary Group Number)

[Description]
This function sets arbitrary group number of the specified tool group
in the tool life management data.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
327
+2
(Completion code)
-
(Need not be set)
+4
(Data length)
4
+6
(Data number)
N
+8
(Data attribute)
0
+10
Arbitrary group number
(4 bytes)
NOTE
Writing the tool life Management Data (Arbitrary
group number) is available for tool life management B
function.
[Completion codes]
0: Succeeded to set the arbitrary group number.
5: Arbitrary group number is out of range.
- 595 -
Top address + 0
(Function code)
327
+2
(Completion code)
?
+4
(Data length)
4
+6
(Data number)
N
+8
(Data attribute)
0
+10
Arbitrary group number
(4 bytes)
- 596 -
5.6.37 Writing Tool Life Management Data (Remaining Tool Life)

[Description]
This function sets the length of remaining tool life of the specified tool
group in the tool life management data.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
328
+2
(Completion code)
-
(Need not be set)
+4
(Data length)
4
+6
(Data number)
N
+8
(Data attribute)
0
+10
Remaining tool life
(4 bytes)
NOTE
Writing the tool life Management Data (Remaining
tool life) is available for tool life management B
function.
[Completion codes]
0: Succeeded to set the length of remaining tool life.
5: Remaining tool life is out of range.
- 597 -
Top address + 0
(Function code)
328
+2
(Completion code)
?
+4
(Data length)
4
+6
(Data number)
N
+8
(Data attribute)
0
+10
Remaining tool life
(4 bytes)
- 598 -
5.7 TOOL MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
Commands regarding the main axis position and standby position of a multi-
path system
In a multi-path system, the tool management data and the cartridge
data are shared by the paths. Regarding the main axis position and
standby position, by contrast, the system has separate data for each
individual path.
Therefore, when the PMC system issues a command regarding the
main axis position or standby position, the path number needs to be
included in that command as well.
The specifiable command values are listed below.
Main axis position

1st 2nd 3rd 4th
Path 1 111 (11) 112 (12) 113 (13) 114 (14)
Path 2 211 212 213 214
Path 3 311 312 313 314
Path 4 411 412 413 414
Path 5 511 512 513 514
Path 6 611 612 613 614
Path 7 711 712 713 714
Path 8 811 812 813 814
Path 9 911 912 913 914
Path 10 1011 1012 1013 1014
Standby position
1st 2nd 3rd 4th
Path 1 121 (21) 122 (22) 123 (23) 124 (24)
Path 2 221 222 223 224
Path 3 321 322 323 324
Path 4 421 422 423 424
Path 5 521 522 523 524
Path 6 621 622 623 624
Path 7 721 722 723 724
Path 8 821 822 823 824
Path 9 921 922 923 924
Path 10 1021 1022 1023 1024
NOTE
1 The CNC can control a maximum of four axes per
path.
2 When the maximum number of axes that can be
controlled per path is four, the CNC can control a
maximum of eight axes for all the paths from path 1
to path 10.
- 599 -
5.7.1 Moving (Exchanging) Tool Management Data Numbers in a

Cartridge Management Table (Low-speed Response)
[Description]
The tool management data numbers of the two pot numbers of the
specified cartridge numbers are exchanged.
When the cartridge number is in the range between 11 and 14 (main
axis position) or between 21 and 24 (standby position), the
corresponding pot number is a dummy number.
When specifying the main axis position or standby position of the
second or succeeding path of the CNC, enter the path number in the
position of the number of hundreds in the cartridge number. For
example, when specifying the third main axis of path 2, enter 213 as
the cartridge number. When specifying path 1, the number of
hundreds can be omitted. For example, cartridge number 122 may be
entered as 22.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
329
+2
(Completion code)
-
+4 (Need not be set)
(Data length)
8
+6
(Data number)
-
(Need not be set)
+8
(Data attribute)
-
(Need not be set)
+10
(Data number 2)
-
(Need not be set)
+12 (Detailed completion code)
-
(Need not be set)
+14 Cartridge number 1 (2 bytes)
+16
Pot number 1 (2 bytes)
+18
Cartridge number 2 (2 bytes)
+20
- 600 -
[Completion codes]
0: The processing has been executed normally.
2: The data length is invalid.
5: The specified cartridge number or pot number is not registered.
6: The necessary option is not found.
[Detailed completion codes]

The detailed completion code is always 0 when the completion code is
other than 5.
When the completion code is 5, the detailed completion code is one of
the following values:
21: Cartridge number 1 is invalid.
22: Pot number 1 is invalid.
24: Cartridge number 2 is invalid.
25: Pot number 2 is invalid.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
329
+2
(Completion code)
See the above explanation of
the completion codes.
+4
(Data length)
8
+6
(Data number)
-
+8
(Data attribute)
-
+10
(Data number 2)
-
+12
(Detailed completion code)
See the above explanation of the
detailed completion codes.
+14 Cartridge number 1 (2 bytes)
+16
+18
Cartridge number 2 (2 bytes)
+20
- 601 -
5.7.2 Searching for a Free Pot (Low-speed Response)

[Description]
The nearest free pot (one whose tool management data number is 0) in
the same cartridge is searched for, with reference to the specified pot
position. The main axis and standby positions are not regarded as free
pots.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
330
+2
(Completion code)
-
(Data length)
-
(Need not be set)
+6
(Data number)
Cartridge number
+8
(Data attribute)
Search direction
+10
(Data number 2)
Pot number

-
(Need not be set)
+14 Data area (4 bytes)
(Need not be set)
+16
[Search direction]
-1: Backward
0: Search direction not specified
1: Forward
[Completion codes]
3: The specified cartridge number or pot number is invalid.
4: The specified search direction is invalid.
13:There is no free pot.
- 602 -

other than 3.
21: The cartridge number is invalid.
22: The pot number is invalid.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
330
+2
(Completion code)
+4
(Data length)
4
+6
(Data number)
Cartridge number
+8
(Data attribute)
Search direction
+10
(Data number 2)
Pot number

+14 Cartridge number (2 bytes)
+16
Pot number (2 bytes)
If the search direction is not specified and if free pots are found at the
same distance in both forward and backward directions, the one found
in the forward direction takes precedence.
- 603 -
5.7.3 Registering New Tool Management Data (Low-speed

Response)
[Description]
A new tool is registered, based on the specified cartridge number and
pot number. The system searches for a free area, starting from the top
of the memory space, and registers the specified tool management
data in the free area found. A free area refers to a location in the
memory space where the tool management data is disabled (bit 0 of
the tool management data is set to 0). Error code 8 is returned if there
is no free area.
If the specified cartridge number or pot number does not correspond
to a free pot (a tool management data number is already assigned to it),
error code 13 is returned.
NOTE
The data length varies depending on whether the
"tool management function customized data
extension (5 to 20)" and "tool management function
customized data extension (5 to 40)" options are
present or not.
(a) Data length

76: When there is no option
140: When the "tool management function customized data
extension (5 to 20)" option is present
- 604 -
Top address + 0
(Function code)
331
+2
(Completion code)
-
(Data length)
76, 140, or 220
+6
(Data number)
Cartridge number
+8
(Data attribute)
-
(Need not be set)
+10
(Data number 2)
Pot number

-
(Need not be set)
+14
Tool type number (4 bytes)
+18
+22
» »
- 605 -
» »
Top address + 22
Maximum tool life value (4 bytes)
+26
Predicted tool life value (4 bytes)
+30
Tool life status (1 byte)
+31
Customized data 0 (1 byte)
+32
+34
Tool length compensation H (2 bytes)
For the machining and lathe systems

+36 (compound)
Cutter compensation number D
(2 bytes)
+38
Main axis rotation speed S
(4 bytes)
+42
Cutting feedrate F (4 bytes)
+46
Dummy (cartridge number)
(2 bytes)
+48
Dummy (pot number) (2 bytes)
+50
Tool geometry compensation
number G (2 bytes)
+52 For the lathe system only

Tool wear compensation number
W (2 bytes)
+54 (Reserved) (20 bytes)

0
» »
+74
Customized data 1 (4 bytes)
+78
+82
» »
- 606 -
» »
Top address + 86
+90
+94
» »
+150 Customized data 20 (4 bytes)
+154
» »
[Completion codes]
5: The input data is invalid.
7: The area is protected.
8: There is no free area.
13: There is no free pot.

other than 5.
1: The specified tool type number is invalid.
2: The specified tool life counter is invalid.
3: The specified maximum tool life value is invalid.
4: The specified predicted tool life value is invalid.
5: The specified tool life status is invalid.
7: The specified tool information is invalid.
8: The specified tool length compensation number (H) is invalid
[for the machining and lathe systems (compound)].
9: The specified cutter compensation number (D) is invalid [for
the machining and lathe systems (compound)].
10: The specified main axis rotation speed is invalid.
11: The specified cutting feedrate (F) is invalid.
- 607 -
12: The specified tool geometry compensation number (G) is

invalid (for the lathe system only).
13: The specified tool wear compensation number (W) is invalid
(for the lathe system only).
31 to 70: The specified customized data (1 to 40) is invalid.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
331
+2
(Completion code)
+4
(Data length)
76, 140, or 220
+6
(Data number)
Cartridge number
+8
(Data attribute)
-
+10
(Data number 2)
Pot number
+12
+14
+18
+22
+26
» »
+230
- 608 -
5.7.4 Writing Tool Management Data (Low-speed Response)

[Description]
The tool management data is changed, based on the specified cartridge
number, pot number, or tool management data number. In the case of
a free pot (a tool management data number is not assigned), error code
9 is returned.
NOTE
The data length varies depending on whether the
extension (5 to 20)" and "tool management function
customized data extension (5 to 40)" options are
present or not.
(a) Data length

76: When there is no option
- 609 -
Top address + 0
(Function code)
332
+2 (Completion code)
-
(Need not be set)
+4
(Data length)
76, 140, or 220
+6
(Data number)
Cartridge number
+8
(Data attribute)
-
(Need not be set)
+10
(Data number 2)
Pot number

-
(Need not be set)
+14
+18
+22
» »
- 610 -
» »
Top address + 22
+26
+30
Tool life status (1 byte)
+31
Customized data 0 (1 byte)
+32
+34
Tool length compensation H
(2 bytes)
+36 (compound)
(2 bytes)
+38
(4 bytes)
+42
+46
(2 bytes)
+48
+50
Tool geometry compensation
number G (2 bytes)
+52 For the lathe system only

Tool wear compensation number
W (2 bytes)
+54 (Reserved)(20 bytes)

0
» »
+74
+78
+82
» »
- 611 -
» »
Top address + 86
+90
+94
» »
+154
» »
[Completion codes]
9: Free pot.

other than 3 or 5.

- 612 -

10: The specified main axis rotation speed (S) is invalid.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
332
+2
(Completion code)
+4
(Data length)
76, 140, or 220
+6
(Data number)
Cartridge number
+8
(Data attribute)
-
+10
(Data number 2)
Pot number
+12
+14
+18
+22
+26
» »
+230
- 613 -
5.7.5 Deleting Tool Management Data (Low-speed Response)

[Description]
The tool management data is deleted, based on the specified cartridge
number and pot number.
In the case of a free pot (a tool management data number is not
assigned), error code 9 is returned.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
333
+2
(Completion code)
-
(Data length)
0
+6
(Data number)
Cartridge number
+8
(Data attribute)
-
(Need not be set)
+10
(Data number 2)
Pot number

-
(Need not be set)
[Completion codes]
9: Free pot.

other than 3.
- 614 -
Top address + 0
(Function code)
333
+2
(Completion code)
+4
(Data length)
0
+6
(Data number)
Cartridge number
+8
(Data attribute)
-
+10
(Data number 2)
Pot number
+12
- 615 -
5.7.6 Reading Tool Management Data (Low-speed Response)

[Description]
The tool management data is read, based on the specified cartridge
number, pot number, or tool management data number. In the case of
a free pot (a tool management data number is not assigned), error code
9 is returned.
NOTE
Customized data 5 to 20 can be read when the "tool
management function customized data extension (5
to 20)" option is present. Customized data 5 to 40
can be read when the "tool management function
customized data extension (5 to 40)" option is
present.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
334
-
(Need not be set)
+4
(Data length)
-
(Need not be set)
+6
(Data number)
Cartridge number
+8
(Data attribute)
-
(Need not be set)
+10
(Data number 2)
Pot number

-
(Need not be set)
+14 (Data area)
76, 140, 220
[Completion codes]
9: Free pot.
- 616 -

other than 3.
- 617 -
Top address + 0
(Function code)
334
+2
(Completion code)
+4
(Data length)
76 or 140
+6
(Data number)
Cartridge number
+8
(Data attribute)
-
+10
(Data number 2)
Pot number

+14
+18
+22
+26
+30 Tool life status (1 byte)
+31 Customized data 0 (1 byte)
+32
+34
Tool length compensation H
(2 bytes)
+36 (compound)
(2 bytes)
» »
- 618 -
» »
Top address + 38
(4 bytes)
+42
+46
(2 bytes)
+48
+50 Tool geometry compensation

number G (2 bytes)
For the lathe system only
+52 Tool wear compensation number W
(2 bytes)
+54 (Reserved) (20 bytes)

» 0 »
+74
+90
+94
» »
+150
+154
» »
- 619 -
5.7.7 Writing a Specified Type of Tool Management Data (Low-

speed Response)
[Description]
A specified type of tool management data is written to memory.
Enter the type of data to be written, as the data attribute.
The size of the required data area varies depending on the data type.
The following table shows the relationship between each input value
and its corresponding data type and required data area size.
Table 5.7.7 Input values of the data attribute and

required data area sizes
Input value Data type Data area size Remarks
1 Tool type number 4 bytes
2 Tool life counter 4 bytes
3 Maximum tool life value 4 bytes
4 Predicted tool life value 4 bytes
5 Tool life status 4 bytes
6 Customized data 0 1 byte Bit type
7 Tool information 2 bytes Bit type
8 Tool length compensation 2 bytes For the machining
(H) and lathe systems
(compound)
9 Cutter compensation 2 bytes For the machining
number (D) and lathe systems
(compound)
10 Main axis rotation speed (S) 4 bytes
11 Cutting feedrate (F) 4 bytes
12 Tool geometry 2 bytes For the lathe
compensation number (G) system only
13 Tool wear compensation 2 bytes For the lathe
number (W) system only
31 Customized data 1 4 bytes
» » » »
» » » »
- 620 -
NOTE
Customized data 5 to 20 can be written to memory
when the "tool management function customized
data extension (5 to 20)" option is present.
Customized data 5 to 40 can be written when the
extension (5 to 40)" option is present.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
335
+2
(Completion code)
-
(Need not be set)
+4
(Data length)
1, 2, 4
+6
(Data number)
Cartridge number
+8
(Data attribute)
Data type
+10
(Data number 2)
Pot number

-
(Need not be set)
+14 (Data area)
1, 2, 4
[Completion codes]
3: The specified cartridge number, pot number, or tool management
data number is out of the range.
4: The specified data type is invalid.
- 621 -

other than 3 or 5.

10: The specified main axis rotation speed (S) is invalid.
- 622 -
Top address + 0
(Function code)
335
+2
(Completion code)
+4
(Data length)
1, 2, 4
+6
(Data number)
Cartridge number
+8
(Data attribute)
Data type
+10
(Data number 2)
Pot number

+14 (Data area)
1, 2, 4
- 623 -
5.7.8 Searching for Tool Management Data (Low-speed Response)

[Description]
Tool data is searched, based on the customized data.
A search is conducted to see whether any tool data that matches the
specified customized data is registered in the cartridge management
table. The cartridge number and pot number of the first tool data
found to match the customized data are returned.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
366
-
(Need not be set)
+4
(Data length)
-
(Need not be set)
+6
(Data number)
Customized data number
+8
(Data attribute)
+10 Data compared

(Data number 2)

-
(Need not be set)
[Completion codes]

other than 3.
1: The specified customized data number is too small (a negative
value is specified).
2: The specified customized data number is too large (the value is
larger than 4, 20, or 40).
3: The specified tool data is not found.
- 624 -
Top address + 0
(Function code)
366
+2
(Completion code)
+4 (Data length)
4 or 0
+6
(Data number)
-
+8
(Data attribute)
-
+10
(Data number 2)
-

+14
Cartridge number (2 bytes)
+16 Pot number (2 bytes)
- 625 -
5.7.9 Shifting Tool Management Data (Low-speed Response)

[Description]
The pot numbers in the cartridge management table are shifted.
In the case of a cartridge with fixed pot numbers, the tool management
data numbers registered for the specified cartridge are shifted by the
specified amount.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
367
-
(Need not be set)
+4
(Data length)
0
+6
(Data number)
Cartridge number
+8
(Data attribute)
Shift direction
+10
(Data number 2)
Shift amount

-
(Need not be set)
[Completion codes]
4: The specified shift direction is invalid.

other than 3.
1: The specified cartridge number is invalid.
2: The specified shift amount is invalid.
As the shift amount, a value not greater than 0 or larger than the
number of cartridge data items is specified.
- 626 -
Top address + 0
(Function code)
367
+4
(Data length)
0
+6
(Data number)
Cartridge number
+8
(Data attribute)
Shift direction
+10
(Data number 2)
Shift amount
+12
The definitions of the shift direction are given below.
Shift direction: 1
The tool data in pot number 1 is shifted to pot number 2.
Shift direction: -1
Pot number 1 2 3 4 5
Shift direction: 1 7 3 4 5 6
Original status 3 4 5 6 7
Shift direction: -1 4 5 6 7 3
- 627 -
5.7.10 Searching for a Free Pot (oversize tools supported)(Low-

speed Response)
[Description]
The nearest free pot (one whose tool management data number is 0) in
the same cartridge is searched for, with reference to the specified pot
position. The main axis and standby positions are not regarded as free
pots.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
330
+2
(Completion code)
-
(Data length)
-
(Need not be set)
+6
(Data number)
Cartridge number
+8
(Data attribute)
Search direction
+10
(Data number 2)
Pot number

-
(Need not be set)
+14
Tool form number
+16 Data area (4 bytes)

(Need not be set)
+18
+20
[Search direction]
-1: Backward
0: Search direction not specified
1: Forward
[Completion codes]
3: The specified cartridge number or pot number or tool form number
is invalid.
4: The specified search direction is invalid.
13:There is no free pot.
- 628 -

other than 3.
26: The tool form number is invalid.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
330
+2
(Completion code)
+4
(Data length)
4
+6
(Data number)
Cartridge number
+8
(Data attribute)
Search direction
+10
(Data number 2)
Pot number

+14
Tool form number
+16 Cartridge number (2 bytes)
+18
Pot number (2 bytes)
+20
If the search direction is not specified and if free pots are found at the
same distance in both forward and backward directions, the one found
in the forward direction takes precedence.
- 629 -
6.OPERATING THE PMC SCREEN B-63983EN/02
6 OPERATING THE PMC SCREEN

The basic configuration of the PMC screen is described below.
Screen title Ladder PMC alarm PMC path NC program number

execution status
NC status indication [+]

Soft key page
turning key
Key entry line
Message display line
Return key
POS PROG OFFSET

SETTING
Function keys
SYSTEM MESSAGE GRAPH
· Screen title: Displays the name of a specific

submenu of the PMC.
· Ladder execution status: Displays the execution status of the
ladder program.
· PMC alarm: Indicates whether any PMC alarm is
occurring.
· PMC path: Displays the currently selected PMC.
· NC program number: Displays the number of the currently
selected NC program.
- 630 -
B-63983EN/02 6.OPERATING THE PMC SCREEN
· Key entry line: Line for entering a numerical value or

character key string.
· Message display line: Displays an error or warning message.
· NC status indication: Displays the NC mode, the execution
status of the NC program, the currently
selected NC path number.
· Return key: Used to switch from the PMC operation
menu to a specific PMC submenu or
from a specific PMC submenu to the
main menu of the PMC.
· Soft key page turning key: Used to turn soft key pages.
About the PMC screen

When you click the "SYSTEM" function key and then turn the soft
key page by clicking the [+] soft key, the main menu of the PMC is
displayed.
The PMC main menu offers the following three types of submenus,
which are respectively used for specific purposes.
· PMC maintenance
· PMC ladder
· PMC configuration
Each of these PMC submenus is explained below.
(1) PMC maintenance menu

This menu displays the screens related to the maintenance of the
PMC, such as those for PMC signal status monitoring and traces
and for PMC data display and editing.
(2) PMC ladder menu

This menu displays the screens related to the display and editing
of the ladder program.
(3) PMC configuration menu

This menu displays the screens related to the display and editing
of the data other than the ladder constituting the sequence
program, as well as the screen for setting the PMC functions.
- 631 -
6.1 OPERATION SCREENS OF THE PMC AND SOFT KEY

ORGANIZATION
6.1.1 Transition of the PMC Screens

SYSTEM
PMC main menu PMC maintenance submenu

STATUS Signal status screen (See Section 7.1.)
PMC MAINTE
I/O LINK I/O link connection status screen (See Section 7.5.)
<
PMC ALARM PMC alarm screen (See Section 7.2.)
I/O Data I/O screen (See Section 7.4.)
TIMER PMC parameter (timer) screen (See Subsection 7.3.1.)
COUNTR PMC parameter (counter) screen (See Subsection 7.3.2.)
PMC parameter (keep relay) (See Subsection 7.3.3.)

KEEP RELAY screen
DATA PMC parameter (data table) screen (See Subsection 7.3.4.)
TRACE Signal trace screen (See Subsection 7.6.1.)
Signal trace (parameter setting) (See Subsection 7.6.2.)

TRACE SETING
screen
I/O DGN II/O DIAGNOSIS screen (See Section 7.7.)
PMC ladder submenu

PMC LADDER LIST Program list screen (See Section 8.1.)
< Ladder display/editing screen (See Sections 8.2 to 8.5.)

LADDER
PMC configuration submenu

PMC CONFIG TITLE Title display/editing screen (See Section 9.1.)
Configuration parameter screen (See Section 9.9.)

< CONFIG PARAM
Setting screens (general, message shift, (See Section 9.5.)

SETING I/O link assignment data selection,
override)
PMC STATUS PMC status screen (multi-PMC switch) (See Section 9.6.)
SYSTEM PARAM
System parameter display/editing (See Section 9.8.)
screen
MODULE I/O module display/editing screen (See Section 9.4.)
Symbol and comment display/editing (See Section 9.2.)

SYMBOL screen
MESAGE Message display/editing screen (See Section 9.3.)
Online monitoring parameter setting (See Section 9.7.)

ONLINE
screen
- 632 -
6.1.2 Basic Screen Operations

Use the operation soft keys to operate the individual screens.
To switch to the operation soft keys, do the following:
· Click the [(OPRT)] soft key, which is one of the PMC submenu
soft key.
· Enter a numerical value or character string.
To switch from the operation soft keys to a specific PMC submenu or

to the PMC main menu, click the [<] soft key.
No operation soft keys are displayed when the screen requires no

operation. In that case, the [(OPRT)] soft key is not displayed, either.
On the other hand, a screen that involves multiple different functions
consists of two or more layers of operation soft keys.
In that case, to return from the operation soft keys of one layer to
those of the previous layer, click the [EXIT] soft key.
A transition diagram for the PMC main menu soft keys, PMC
submenu soft keys, and operation soft keys is shown below.
PMC main menu soft keys

<
PMC submenu soft keys
< (OPRT)
Operation soft keys (1st layer)
EXIT
The number of
operation soft key
Operation soft keys (2nd layer) layers differs for
each screen.
EXIT
Operation soft keys (3rd layer)
Fig. 6.1.2 Transition diagram for the PMC soft keys
- 633 -
Example) Ladder display/editing screen

Operate the ladder display/editing screen by switching three layers of
operation soft keys - ladder display operation soft keys (1st layer),
ladder editing operation soft keys (2nd layer), and ladder net editing
operation soft keys (3rd layer).
PMC main menu
PMC ladder submenu
Ladder display operation soft keys

(1st layer)
Ladder editing operation soft keys

(2nd layer)
Ladder net editing operation soft keys

(3rd layer)
- 634 -
6.2 DISPLAY AND OPERATION CONDITIONS FOR SCREENS

Several PMC screens can be protected from unauthorized attempts to
display data or operate the screen, based on preset conditions. This
section describes such display and operation conditions.
There are two kinds of data protection for PMC. One is the
Programmer Protection Function and another is Protection of Data at 8
Levels.
The Programmer Protection Function is effective in standard. When
the Protection of Data at 8 Levels is added, the Programmer Protection
Function becomes ineffective and the Protection of Data at 8 Levels
becomes effective.
6.2.1 Programmer Protection Function
CAUTION
This section contains important information for
developers of application system controlled by PMC.
Improperly implemented application system may
increase possibility of defects in its safety. Careful
examinations and considerations on using and
implementing with the functions explained especially
in this section are strongly required.
PMC system provides various embedded programmer functions such

as edit, diagnosis and debugging which help the programming and
debugging of sequence program. To use these functions which may
even disable safety mechanism realized by sequence program, it is
required that the operator of these functions should be an expert who
fully understands the sequence program and the operation of PMC. It
is also strongly recommended to the developer of machine that these
functions should be protected from careless use by ordinary operators
after the machine is shipped into the field. Furthermore, if these
functions partly need to be used in the field for any purpose such as
the maintenance or adjustment, the developer of the machine should
implement any means to enable these functions after forcing the
machine in safe mode or should let the operator know and strictly
follow proper procedure to ensure the safety.
The setting parameters described in this section are provided for the
developer of machine to be able to properly program the sequence or
control the parameters for necessary conditions on which the operator
is allowed to use PMC programmer functions safely by eliminating
careless operation which may cause "stopping the ladder", "changing
sequence program" or "changing important setting data".
These parameters can be set on the setting screen or in some system
keep relays (K900 to 999).
- 635 -
PROGRAMMER ENABLE (K900.1)

If you set "PROGRAMMER ENABLE" to "YES", it enables the
following functions as a supervisor mode.
· Ladder editing screen
· Title data editing screen
· Symbol/comment data editing screen
· Message data editing screen
· I/O unit address setting screen
· Clear of PMC parameter
· Start/stop of ladder
· Forcing function
· Override function*1
· Setting of multi-language message display function
· Data I/O screen
· System parameter screen
· Parameter setting screen for online monitor
· Setting screen for the I/O link assignment data selection function
· Setting screen for keep relay K900 or after
· Configuration parameter screen
· Sequence program input and output
· PMC parameter input and output
· Input and output of message data for multi-language display
· Saving of a sequence program to flash ROM
· Saving of message data for multi-language display to flash ROM
NOTE
The override function also requires the setting of
"OVERRIDE ENABLE" in the setting parameters.
CAUTION
Set this setting to "NO"(0) before shipment of the
machine. If this setting is left as "YES"(1), the
operator may stop execution of the ladder program
by mistake. If you want to protect this setting,
please make a sequence that always writes 0 in this
bit by your ladder. Or please control the machine to
force to translate into safety state by sequence
program using the way described in Section 4.15
when the ladder stops.
- 636 -
HIDE PMC PROGRAM (K900.0)

If you set "HIDE PMC PROGRAM" to "YES", it disables the
following functions which have the sequence program display.
· Ladder monitor screen

· Title data screen
· Title data (message) screen
· Title data editor screen
· Symbol/comment data viewer screen
· Symbol/comment data editor screen
· Message data viewer screen
· Message data editor screen
· I/O module viewer screen
· I/O module editor screen
· Clear of PMC parameter
· System parameter viewer screen
· System parameter editor screen
· Output of sequence program
· Output of message data for multi-language display
NOTE
Even if this parameter is set to "YES", these
functions do not be hidden except for Ladder
monitor/editing screen if "PROGRAMMER ENABLE"
is set to "YES".
- 637 -
EDIT ENABLE (K901.6)

If you set "EDIT ENABLE" to "YES", it enables the following
functions which can edit the program.
· Ladder editing screen*1
· Title data editing screen*1
· Symbol/comment data editing screen*1*2
· Message data editing screen*1*2
· I/O unit address setting screen*1*2
· Clear of PMC parameter*1*2
· Setting of multi-language message display function
· System parameter screen*1
· Setting screen for keep relay K900 or after
· Configuration parameter screen
· Sequence program input*2
· Saving of a sequence program to flash ROM
· Input of message data for multi-language display*2
· Saving of message data for multi-language display to flash ROM
NOTE
1 Even if this parameter is set to "YES", these
functions which have program display are invalid if
"HIDE PMC PROGRAM" is set to "YES".
2 These screens with stop of ladder program require
below setting "ALLOW PMC STOP".
CAUTION
machine if you want to prohibit operator form editing
the program. If you want to protect this setting,
bit by your ladder.
- 638 -
ALLOW PMC STOP (K902.2)

If you set "ALLOW PMC STOP" to "YES", it enables the following
functions which require stop/start of ladder program. *1
· Symbol/comment data editing screen*2

· Message data editing screen*2
· I/O unit address setting screen*2
· Clear of PMC parameter*2
· Start/stop of ladder
· System parameter screen*2
· Input of sequence program*2
· Input of message data for multi-language display*2
NOTE
1 Even if this parameter is set to "YES", these
functions which have program display are invalid if
"HIDE PMC PROGRAM" is set to "YES".
2 These editing screens require above setting "EDIT
ENABLE".
CAUTION
operator may stop execution of the ladder program
by mistake. If you want to protect this setting,
bit by your ladder. Or please control the machine to
force to translate into safety state by sequence
program using the way described in Section 4.15
when the ladder stops.
RAM WRITE ENABLE (K900.4)

If you set "RAM WRITE ENABLE" to "YES", it enables the
following functions, regardless of the other protection.
· Forcing function
· Override function*1
· The change of the PMC parameters from the timer, counter, keep
relay, and data screens is disabled.
· The input of the PMC parameters from the PMC I/O screen is
disabled.
NOTE
The override function also requires the setting of
"OVERRIDE ENABLE" in the setting parameters.
- 639 -
CAUTION
operator may modify PMC parameters or PMC
signals by mistake. If you want to protect this
setting, please make a sequence that always writes
0 in this bit by your ladder. Or please control the
machine to force to translate into safety state by
sequence program using the way described in
Section 4.15 when the ladder stops.
DATA TBL CNTL SCREEN (K900.7)

If you set "DATA TBL CNTL SCREEN" to "NO", the data table
control screen is not displayed.
IO GROUP SELECTION (K906.1)

If you set "IO GROUP SELECTION " to "SHOW", the setting screen
for the selectable I/O link assignment function is enabled.
HIDE PMC PARAM (K902.6)

If you set "HIDE PMC PARAM" to "YES", functions that are related
to the PMC parameters are protected, as follows:
· The timer, counter, keep relay, and data screens cannot be
displayed.
· The PMC I/O screen cannot output the PMC parameters.
CAUTION
To enter the PMC parameters from the data I/O
screen requires a special operation. For information
about how to enable the input of the PMC
parameters, see "Output from the data I/O screen"
in Subsection 6.2.2.
WARNING
If the sequence program is stopped while the
machine is operating, the machine may cause
unexpected operation. Before stopping the
sequence program, make sure that there is no one
near the machine and that the tool will not collide
with the workpiece or machine. Operating the
machine in any inappropriate fashion can result in
the death of or serious injury to the user. The tool,
workpiece, and/or machine can also be damaged.
- 640 -
PROTECT PMC PARAM (K902.7)

If you set "PROTECT PMC PARAM" to "YES", functions that are
related to the PMC parameters are protected, as follows:
· The change of the PMC parameters from the timer, counter, keep
relay, and data screens is disabled.
· The input of the PMC parameters from the PMC I/O screen is
disabled.
CAUTION
1 To change the PMC parameters on an individual
parameters, see "Input from the PMC parameter
screen" in Subsection 6.2.2.
2 To enter the PMC parameters from the data I/O
parameters, see "Output from the data I/O screen"
WARNING
machine is operating, the machine may cause
unexpected operation. Before stopping the
sequence program, make sure that there is no one
near the machine and that the tool will not collide
with the workpiece or machine. Operating the
machine in any inappropriate fashion can result in
the death of or serious injury to the user. The tool,
workpiece, and/or machine can also be damaged.
KEEP RELAY (SYSTEM) (K906.6)

If you set " KEEP RELAY (SYSTEM)" to "SHOW", The KEEP
RELAY for PMC system (after K900) screen is enabled.
- 641 -
Example for setting parameters

(1) If you want to prohibit completely operator from accessing the
sequence program;
· PROGRAMMER ENABLE (K900.1) "NO"
· HIDE PMC PROGRAM (K900.0) "YES"
· EDIT ENABLE (K901.6) "NO"
· ALLOW PMC STOP (K902.2) "NO"
(2) If you want to allow operator only monitoring the sequence

program;
· HIDE PMC PROGRAM (K900.0) "NO"
NOTE
Please use the password function of sequence
program for particular operator. Please refer to
FANUC LADDER-III operator's manual B-66234EN
"10.3".
(3) If you want to allow operator monitoring and editing the

sequence program;
· EDIT ENABLE (K901.6) "YES"
NOTE
"5.4".
- 642 -
(4) If you want to allow operator monitoring and editing the

sequence program which requires stop of ladder;
· EDIT ENABLE (K901.6) "YES"
· ALLOW PMC STOP (K902.2) "YES"
NOTE
"10.3".
WARNING
If a sequence program is stopped while the machine
is operating, the machine may behave
unexpectedly. Before stopping the sequence
program, make sure that nobody is near the
machine and that the tool cannot interfere with the
work-piece or machine. Incorrect operation of the
machine presents an extreme risk of death or
serious injury to the user. Damage the tool, work-
piece, and/or the machine is also likely.
(5) The case that operator who familiar with the machine and the
ladder sequence operate all the PMC programmer functions;
· PROGRAMMER ENABLE (K900.1) "YES"
WARNING
work-piece or machine. Incorrect operation of the
serious injury to the user. Damage the tool, work-
piece, and/or the machine is also likely.
- 643 -
(6) If you want to prohibit the editing and input/output of the ladder
and allow the input/output of the PMC parameters:
· RAM WRITE ENABLE (K900.4) "NO"
· HIDE PMC PROGRAM (K900.0) "YES"
· HIDE PMC PARAM (K902.6) "NO"
· PROTECT PMC PARAM (K902.7) "NO"
NOTE
1 To input the PMC parameters, place the NC in the
emergency stop state and set the PWE parameter,
which is one of the NC parameters, to 1.
2 To output the PMC parameters, set the EDIT mode.
- 644 -
6.2.2 PMC Parameter Input/Output Conditions
Input from the PMC parameter screen

Usually, no data can be entered for PMC parameters because they are
protected. The following methods can be used to make it possible to
enter data for them.
(1) If the sequence program is running (RUN state) (usually, this
method should be used when the machine is operating.)
(a) Place the NC in MDI mode or bring it to an emergency stop.
(b) Set "PWE" on the NC setting screen to 1 (see the following
table).
(c) Alternatively, set the program protect signal (KEY4) to 1
(only if counters or data tables are involved).
(d) The parameters are released from protection; so data can be
entered for them (see the following table).
PWE KEY4
Timer ¡
Counter ¡ ¡
Keep relay ¡
Data table ¡ ¡
(e) After entering data for the parameters, return "PWE" or the
KEY4 signal to the previous state.
(2) If the sequence program can be stopped (STOP state), for
example, while it is being debugged
(a) Stop the sequence program.
(b) The parameter protection is released; so data can be entered
for them.
WARNING
workpiece or machine. Incorrect operation of the
serious injury to the user. Damage the tool,
workpiece, and/or the machine is also likely.
NOTE
1 These operations may be protected by the
programmer protection function. For details of the
programmer protection function, see "PROTECT
PMC PARAM" in Subsection 6.2.1.
2 If you set "RAM WRITE ENABLE" to "YES", the
change of the PMC parameters is enabled,
regardless of the above operations and the other
protection. For details "RAM WRITE ENABLE", see
"RAM WRITE ENABLE" in Subsection 6.2.1.
- 645 -
The guidance message displayed when protected PMC parameters are

inputted on the PMC parameters screen.
Guidance message Contents
MUST BE IN EMERGENCY STOP NC is not in edit mode and not in
OR IN MDI MODE emergency stop mode.
PWE MUST BE ON PWE is 0.
EITHER PWE OR KEY4 MUST BE PWE is 0 and KEY4 signal is 0.
ON
THIS FUNCTION IS PROTECTED This function is protected by the
programmer protection function or
protection of data at 8 levels.
Input from the data I/O screen

To enter the PMC parameters from the data I/O screen requires the
operation described below. The following methods can be used to
enable the input of the PMC parameters.
(1) If the sequence program is running (RUN state) (Under normal

circumstances, this method should be used when the machine is
operating.)
(a) Place the NC in the emergency stop state.
(b) Set "PWE" on the NC setting screen to "1".
(c) The protection of the parameters is canceled, making it
possible to enter them.
(d) After entering the PMC parameters, reset "PWE" to its
original state.
(2) If the sequence program is being debugged and can be stopped

(STOP state)
(a) Place the sequence program in the stop state.
(b) The protection of the parameters is canceled, making it
NOTE
1 These operations may be protected by the
2 If you set "RAM WRITE ENABLE" to "YES", the input
of the PMC parameters from the PMC I/O screen is
enabled, regardless of the above operations and the
other protection. For details "RAM WRITE ENABLE",
see "RAM WRITE ENABLE" in Subsection 6.2.1.
- 646 -
The guidance message displayed when protected PMC parameters are

inputted on the I/O screen.
MUST BE IN EMERGENCY STOP NC is not in emergency stop mode.
PWE MUST BE ON PWE is 0.
Output from the data I/O screen

To output the PMC parameters from the data I/O screen requires the
operation described below. The following methods can be used to
enable the output of the PMC parameters.
(1) If the sequence program is running (RUN state) (Under normal

circumstances, this method should be used when the machine is
operating.)
(a) Place the NC in the EDIT mode.
(2) If the sequence program is being debugged and can be stopped

(STOP state)
(a) Place the sequence program in the stop state.
NOTE
These operations may be protected by the
The guidance message displayed when protected PMC parameters is

outputted on the I/O screen.
MUST BE IN EDIT MODE NC is not in edit mode.
- 647 -
6.2.3 Password Function

The password function provides protection against unauthorized
attempts to display or edit the content of the ladder program. When
the password function is in use, the ladder program cannot be
displayed or edited without entering the "password" that is preset with
an offline programmer such as FANUC LADDER-III.
(1) Types of password

There are two types of password.
· Display permission password
· Edit permission password
(2) Specifiable characters

For a character string to be specified as a password, it needs to
meet the following conditions:
· 16 characters or less in length
· Alphabetic letters (uppercase only) and/or numbers
(3) Screens to be protected

The following screens are protected through the use of the
password:
· Ladder display screen
· Program list display screen
· Program list editing screen
(4) Display of the protection status

The protection status of the program can be checked using the
program list display screen or program list editing screen. For
details, see (2) in Section 8.1.
(5) Cancellation of the password

When you attempt to switch to a password-protected screen, you
are asked to enter the password. In this process, you can cancel
the password by entering the "password character string" and
then clicking the input key.
NOTE
1 Once you cancel the password, you will not be
asked to enter the password until you either shut
down the system and turn on its power again or
replace the ladder program using the I/O or other
function.
2 The sequence program that lets you turn on the
power by pressing "X" and "O" simultaneously can
be cleared, regardless of whether the password is
set or not.
- 648 -
Switching of the password-protected screens
PMC main menu When the message appears

When the message appears prompting you to enter the
prompting you to enter the [PMC LADDER] password for displaying data,
password for displaying data, enter the display permission
enter the display permission password or edit permission
password or edit permission PMC ladder menu password (*1).
password (*1).
[<]
[LIST]
[LADDER]
[LIST]
Ladder display screen Program list
display screen
[ZOOM]
[EXIT] [EDIT]
When the message appears prompting you
to enter the password for displaying data,
Ladder editing enter the display permission password or
screen edit permission password (*1) (*2).
When the message appears prompting

you to enter the password for editing data,
enter the edit permission password.
NOTE
1 When only the display permission password is set,
both the display and editing functions are protected.
When only the edit permission password is set, the
editing function is protected.
When both the display permission password and
edit permission password are set, both the display
and editing functions are protected. In that case,
you can cancel the protection of the display and
editing functions by using the edit permission
password.
2 Enter the password when you want to display the
content of a program protected by the partial
protection function by using the [ZOOM] soft key.
- 649 -
6.2.4 Partial protection function for ladder program

This function classifies subprograms into two areas, protected area
and unprotected area, and the password protection affects only the
protected area. As a result, it enables the partial protection for ladder
program.
Therefore, it enables for dealers or end users to customize the ladder
program and protects the program of machine tool builders.
Ladder program
Level 1 Protected area:
Level 2 Display and edit permission passwords
Level 3 can protect the area from displaying and
editing.
Subprogram Machine tool builders can edit the
P1 to P1499 programs in this area
Subprogram
P1500 to P5000 Unprotected area:
Dealers or end users can edit the
programs in this area.
CALL
Setting method
On FANUC LADDER-III, you should set the edit permission
password which has “#” character at the beginning of string (Up to 16
characters including “#”)
(Ex.) The edit permission password #1425
The subprograms from P1500 to P5000 can be displayed and edited

regardless of the password protection. Even if you set the display
permission password, the display of subprograms from P1500 to
P5000 is not protected owing to this function.
Table 6.2.4 The protection status of each program for partial protection function
Protected/
Program type
not protected
Level 1 The display and editing functions are protected
Main programs Level 2 by each password.
Level 3
P1 to P1499
Sub programs P1500 to P5000 You can display and edit the subprograms
without password.
NOTE
This function can be used only for the first path
PMC.
- 650 -
6.2.5 Protection of Data at 8 Levels

The protection of data at 8 levels is a common function of CNC and
PMC.
8 operation levels can be set for CNC and PMC operation, and 8
protection levels can be set for various types of CNC and PMC data.
When various types of CNC and PMC data are changed or output
externally, the system compares the operation level with the protection
level to determine whether change or external output is allowed.
NOTE
For the details of the protection of data at 8 levels on
CNC, please refer to the Connection Manual
(Function) of CNC. And, please refer to the Users
Manual of CNC for the details of operation of setting
the protection levels.
CAUTION
When the protection of data at 8 levels is added, the
ordinary programmer protection function of PMC
becomes ineffective. But, the password function of
PMC is available with the protection of data at 8
levels at the same time.
WARNING
All protection levels of PMC item are level 0 in the
initial condition. Namely, all PMC data are not
protected. Therefore, please set the opportune level
(value) to prevent a miss operation.
- 651 -
Operation level
8 operation levels can be set for CNC and PMC operation.
Operation levels 0 to 3 are selected by the memory protection key
signal.
Operation levels 4 to 7 are selected by password.
Operation Setting method Sample classification

level
7 (High) Password --
6 Password MTB
5 Password Dealer, Integrator
4 Password End user
3 Memory protection key signal User level (Level1)
0 (Low) Memory protection key signal User level (Level4)
When operation level 4 to 7 is set, the operation level remains

unchanged until the password is cleared.
(The operation level also remains unchanged if the power is turned
off.)
Operation level 7 is reserved for CNC and PMC maintenance.
- 652 -
Data protection level

A data protection level can be set for each of the following types of
data.
There are two data protection levels as shown below.
- Change protection level
Protection level used for changing data.
- Output protection level
Protection level used for externally outputting data.
Protection levels 0 (low) to 7 (high) can be set.
There are common items and items of each path when using the multi-
path PMC. The setting items of each path can be set to different level
for each PMC path.
Table 6.2.5 (a) Setting items and protected action

Setting item Protected action
Data type Function Screen Operation
CONFIGURATION PARAMETER (Note1) CHANGE Configuration parameter screen Change
SETTING (ONLINE) (Note1) CHANGE Parameters for online monitor screen Change
SETTING (EACH PATH) CHANGE Setting screen Change
SEQUENCE PROGRAM CHANGE Ladder diagram screen Edit
Title screen Edit
System parameter screen Edit
I/O module screen Edit
Symbol and Comment screen Edit
Message screen Edit
PMC status screen Activate/Stop
program
Data I/O screen Read program
Write program to
Flash ROM
OUTPUT Data I/O screen Write program to
external device
PMC PARAMETER CHANGE Data I/O screen Read PMC
parameter
OUTPUT Data I/O screen Write PMC
parameter
TIMER CHANGE Timer screen Change
COUNTER CHANGE Counter screen Change
KEEP RELAY CHANGE Keep relay screen (user area) Change
KEEP RELAY (SYSTEM) CHANGE Keep relay screen (system area) Change
DATA TABLE CHANGE Data table screen Change
DATA TABLE CONTROL CHANGE Data table control screen Change
PMC MEMORY CHANGE Signal status screen Forced I/O
function
- 653 -
NOTE
1 These items are common setting of all PMC paths
when using multi-path PMC function.
2 Some data types do not have an output function.
3 For data whose protection level is higher than the
operation level, the protection level cannot be
changed.
4 The current data protection level cannot be changed
to a protection level that is higher than the current
operation level.
5 The I/O protection level of message data for multi-
language display is the same as the I/O protection
level of sequence programs.
Setting of PMC protection level

1 Press function key OFFSET
SETTING .
2 Press the continuous menu key several times until
[PROTECT] is displayed.
3 Press soft key [PROTECT].
4 Press soft key [PMC LEVEL].
The PROTECT LEVEL (PMC) screen shown below is displayed.
Fig. 6.2.5 (a) PMC protection level setting screen
5 When using multi-path PMC function, press soft key [SWITCH

PMC] to select the PMC path.
6 Move the cursor to “CHANGE” level or “OUTPUT” level of a
desired data item.
7 Key in a new desired level, then press soft key [INPUT].
NOTE
Some setting items with which an asterisk is
displayed after the data name are the common data
of all PMC paths when using multi-path PMC
function.
- 654 -
6.3 MULTI-PMC DISPLAY

In the case of a multi-PMC system, when you select a specific PMC
on the PMC status screen, each of the PMC screens listed below
displays the information regarding that selected PMC.
By default, the PMC screens display the information regarding the
first PMC. For details of the PMC status screen, see Section 9.6.
1st PMC 2nd PMC 3rd PMC Dual check safety

PMC
l Signal status screen

l PMC parameter screen
l I/O diagnosis screen (address order / symbol order)
l Program list screen
l Ladder display/editing screen
l Title display/editing screen
l Setting screen The PMC status screen lets you switch
l System parameter display/editing screen the PMC to be displayed or manipulated
l I/O module display/editing screen on each screen. In this figure, the third
l Symbol and comment display/editing screen PMC is selected.
l Message display/editing screen
An indication of the currently selected PMC is displayed at the upper

left corner of each PMC screen.
The currently selected PMC
- 655 -
The screens listed below display the information regarding all the
PMC on the same screen space, regardless of the switching of the
PMC.
Screens intended to display or manipulate all the PMCs
l PMC alarm screen

l I/O Link connection status screen
l Data I/O screen
l Signal trace screen
l I/O diagnosis screen (network order)
l Parameter setting screen for online monitoring
For details, see the sections describing the operation of the individual
screens.
NOTE
Although the signal trace screen allows you to trace
the signals of the first, second, and third PMC
simultaneously, it cannot trace the signal of the dual
check safety PMC.
- 656 -
6.4 DISPLAYING EXTENDED SYMBOL AND COMMENT

Extended symbol and comment is displayed on the PMC screen.
For details of Extended symbol and comment, see " SPECIFICATION
OF EXTENDED SYMBOL AND COMMENT " in Subsection 1.2.7.
Maximum 7 characters of a local symbol

are displayed on ladder diagram.
If no local symbol, a global symbol is
displayed.
Program No., Local symbol, value and A period is displayed on

comment are displayed on the additional the end of strings when
information line. comment is over the
If no local symbol, a global symbol is displayed. screen size.
Fig. 6.4 (a) Ladder diagram screen (extended symbol and comment)
Maximum 7 characters of a local

symbol are displayed on signal status
display area. If no local symbol, a
global symbol is displayed.
Program No., Local symbol and comment are A period is displayed on

displayed on the additional information line. the end of strings when
If no local symbol, a global symbol is displayed. comment is over the
screen size.
Fig. 6.4 (b) Signal status screen (extended symbol and comment)
- 657 -
When using extended symbol and comment, you can define local
symbols in each sub-program.
Moreover, you can define multiple symbol and comment to one signal.
However, only one symbol and comment can to be displayed on PMC

screen except I/O diagnosis screen and symbol and comment screen,
for a PMC address.
The priority of displaying symbol and comment, and range of search
function is defined as follows.
Screen Displaying symbol and comment Searching symbol and comment

Ladder screen (except address map) A symbol and comment is displayed The following symbol and comment
Program list screen by following priority. can be searched.
1 Local symbol and comment that - Local symbol that defined to
defined to displaying sub- displaying sub-program.
program. - Global symbol.
2 Global symbol and comment.
3 Symbol undefined comment.
Signal status screen A symbol and comment is displayed All symbols and comments can be
PMC parameter (timer) screen by following priority. searched.
PMC parameter (counter) screen 1 Global symbol and comment. You can search a local symbol by
PMC parameter (keep relay) screen 2 Local symbol and comment of following format.
PMC parameter (data table) screen LEVEL1 to 3. - (program name).(symbol)
Signal trace screen 3 Local symbol and comment of The program name is able to be
Signal trace (parameter setting) screen sub-program P1 to P5000. specified by sub-program number
Ladder (address map) screen 4 Symbol undefined comment. or a symbol of P-address.
I/O diagnosis screen All symbols and comments are All symbols and comments can be
Symbol and comment screen displayed. searched. A symbol or comment
can be searched by partial string.
NOTE
When multiple symbol and comment are defined in
one signal, you can search each symbol name. On
the other hand the symbol displayed on PMC
screen is one of these symbol names. So if you
search a symbol, displayed symbol name on
searched position may be different from searched
word.
- 658 -
B-63983EN/02 7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE])
7 PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE

SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE])
The PMC maintenance menu displays the screens related to PMC
maintenance including PMC signal status monitoring, trace, and PMC
data display/editing.
In order to move to the PMC maintenance menu, press the SYSTEM
key then select the [PMC MAINTE] soft key as shown below.
SYSTEM
PMC main menu

PMC maintenance submenu
PMC MAINTE STATUS SIGNAL STATUS screen
< I/O LINK I/O LINK MONITOR screen
PMC ALARM ALARM MESSAGE screen
I/O DATA I/O screen
TIMER PMC PARAM (TIMER) screen
COUNTR PMC PARAM (COUNTER) screen
KEEP RELAY PMC PARAM (KEEP RELAY) screen
DATA PMC PARAM (DATA TABLE) screen
TRACE SIGNAL TRACE screen
TRACE SETING SIGNAL TRACE (PARAMETER SETTING) screen
I/O DGN I/O DIAGNOSIS screen
- 659 -
7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) B-63983EN/02
7.1 MONITORING PMC SIGNAL STATUS ([STATUS] SCREEN)
The SIGNAL STATUS screen displays the data at all addresses

specified in the program. The data of each address consists of a bit
pattern (0s and/or 1s) and a hexadecimal or decimal number at the
rightmost position on a byte-by-byte basis.
Signal status display area
Additional information line
The additional information line at the bottom of the screen displays

the symbol and comment of the address on which the cursor is placed.
When the cursor is placed on a byte, the byte symbol and comment are
displayed.
Address Symbol Comment
Table contents
· ADDRESS: Address referenced by a sequence program
· 0 to 7: Data at each bit position
· HEX: Display of each byte in hexadecimal
· DEC: Display of each byte in decimal
- 660 -
Operation procedure
(1) Press the [STATUS] soft key. The screen shown above appears.
(2) Key in an address whose data to be displayed, then press the
[SEARCH] soft key.
(3) The data starting at the input address is displayed as a bit pattern.
(4) To display the data at another address, press the cursor keys,
page keys, or [SEARCH] soft key.
(5) To modify the status of a signal, switch to the forced I/O screen
by pressing the [FORCE] soft key.
NOTE
The [FORCE] soft key is displayed and usable
when the forced I/O function is enabled. For
(6) On the forced I/O screen, an overridden X signal or Y signal is

prefixed by a greater-than sign (>) to indicate the setting of
override.
- 661 -
Soft keys on the Signal Status screen
Address search Switching to the forced I/O screen PMC path switching
Switching to display in decimal
Switching to display in hexadecimal
Fig. 7.1.1 (a) Soft keys on the SIGNAL STATUS screen
Operations using soft keys

(1) [SEARCH] Search for an address
Searches for a byte address or bit address.
(2) [DEC] Switching to display in decimal
Displays the data of each byte in decimal.
This soft key is enabled only when hexadecimal display is
selected.
(3) [HEX] Switching to display in hexadecimal

Displays the data of each byte in hexadecimal.
This soft key is enabled only when decimal display is selected.
(4) [FORCE] Switching to the forced I/O screen

Switches the screen display to the forced I/O screen.
(5) [SWITCH PMC] PMC path switching
Switches PMC paths.
This soft key is effective to multi-PMC systems only.
- 662 -
7.1.1 Forced I/O Function
The forced I/O function enables a value to be input forcibly for the
signal at an arbitrary PMC address.
With this function, for example, a sequence program can be debugged
without using an I/O device by forced input to X, and the signal
routing on the I/O device can be checked efficiently without using a
sequence program by forced output to Y.
Two input modes are available: the forced I/O mode and the override
mode. Choose from the two modes for each application.
(1) Forced I/O mode

This mode is applicable to all PMC addresses.
Note, however, that a signal modified by forced I/O is over-
written by a sequence program or input scanning, so that the
result of modification by forced I/O is lost.
Machine
I/O address
Overwrite
X,Y
Overwrite
Ladder Overwrite G,F,R,T,K,C,D,E
Example 1: Forced I/O is performed for R0 in the following ladder

program:
X0.0
MOVE 1111
1111
K0
R0
<1> The initial signal status is as follows:

X0.0 = off, K0 = 55H, R0 = 00H
<2> FFh is forcibly input to R0.
X0.0 = off, K0 = 55H, R0 = FFH
<3> When X0.0 is turned on, the R0 assumes the result of output by
the sequence program.
X0.0 = on, K0 = 55H, R0 = 55H
- 663 -
Example 2: Forced I/O is performed for X0 in a configuration where

the I/O Unit-MODEL A is connected to X0 via the I/O
Link.
A value input from the I/O Unit-MODEL A is transferred to X0

cyclically. So, even if the value of X0 is modified forcibly during a
period, X0 is overwritten in the next cycle by the value input from the
I/O Unit-MODEL A.
1. Input from the machine
I/O Unit-MODEL A NC
X0 = FFh X0 = FFh
2. The value of X0 is forcibly modified to 00h. X0 = 00h
3. Input from the machine in the next cycle
The value set by forced modification is

I/O Unit-MODEL A NC overwritten by the value input from the
machine.
X0 = FFh X0 = FFh
A value may be cyclically transferred even to an unallocated address.

So, the forced I/O function for X in the forced I/O mode must be used
when a sequence program is debugged with no I/O device connected
or allocated.
When an I/O device is connected, use the override mode, described
below, to debug a sequence program.
- 664 -
(2) Override mode

The state that disables a sequence program and machine signal
from overwriting a value modified by forced I/O is referred to as
override. In the override mode, override can be set for arbitrary
X and Y signals. To X and Y addresses and other addresses for
which override is not set, forced I/O is applied.
Example: Forced I/O is performed for X0 in a configuration

where the I/O Unit-MODEL A is connected to X0
via the I/O link.
1. Input from the machine
I/O Unit-MODEL A NC
X0 = FFh
X0 = FFh
2. Override is set for X0.
I/O Unit-MODEL A ´ NC
Transfer from the I/O Unit-MODEL
A is disabled.
X0 = FFh
X0 = FFh
3. The value of X0 is forcibly modified to 00h.
I/O Unit-MODEL A ´ NC
X0 = FFh X0 = 00h
In this way, the forced I/O function for X in the override mode can
also be used to debug a sequence program when an I/O device is
connected. If the override state is set for an Y address, a value after
modification by forced I/O is output to the I/O device.
- 665 -
CAUTION
1 In the override mode, the I/O signal update period
matches the first level of the ladder. With the I/O
Link, which is usually updated at intervals of 2
msec, the timing of I/O signals delays. So, note
that a sequence that depends on the timing of I/O
signals can change operation.
2 Note that when the override mode is enabled, the
period of the second level can slightly increase.
3 Even if override is set for an Y address, the coil
on/off value on the LADDER DIAGRAM VIEWER
screen indicates the result of operation of a ladder
before modification by forced I/O. A value after
modification by the forced I/O function is output to
the I/O device. So, note that the on/off indication on
the LADDER DIAGRAM VIEWER screen does not
match a value output to the I/O device.
Example: Forced input is performed for Y0.0 with

the following ladder in a configuration where the I/O
Unit-MODEL A is connected to Y0 via the I/O Link:
In the state before override is set, the on/off

indication on the LADDER DIAGRAM VIEWER
screen matches a value output to the I/O Unit-
MODEL A as shown below.
X0.0 Y0.0
I/O Unit-MODEL A NC
(off) (off)
Y0.0 = off
Ladder diagram indication
If 1 is forcibly input after override is set for Y0.0, the

value after modification by forced I/O is output to
the I/O Unit-MODEL A as shown below.
X0.0 Y0.0
I/O Unit-MODEL A NC
(off) (off)
Y0.0 = on
Ladder diagram indication
WARNING
When modifying a signal with the forced I/O
function, pay special attention. If the forced I/O
function is used inadequately, the machine can
move in an unexpected way. When there is a
person near the machine, do not use this function.
- 666 -
7.1.2 Forced I/O Screen
On the forced I/O screen, the value of an arbitrary signal can be

modified forcibly.
The forced I/O screen can be used in one of two input modes: the
forced I/O mode and the override mode. To move to the forced I/O
screen, press the [FORCE] soft key on the SIGNAL STATUS screen.
On the forced I/O screen, the following operations can be performed:
· Signal search [SEARCH]
· Switching to display/input in decimal [DEC]
· Switching to display/input in hexadecimal [HEX]
· Transition to the SIGNAL STATUS screen [EXIT]
· Signal on [ON]
· Signal off [OFF]
· Override setting [OVRIDE SET]
· Override cancellation [OVRIDE RESET]
· Complete override cancellation [INIT]
Input mode
Signal status display area
Additional information
line
Key input line Message display line
In the input mode display area to the right of the title, "OVERRIDE"
is displayed only when the forced I/O mode is set to the override
mode.
The signal status display area indicates the signal status of each
address. The status shown below is indicated for X and Y signal bits
for which override is set.
- 667 -
(1) X signal
(Input signal from the I/O device) ® (Input signal to the ladder)
The hexadecimal or decimal display field on the rightmost
position of the screen displays the value of the input signal to the
ladder on the right side.
(2) Y signal
(Output signal from the ladder)®(Output signal to the I/O
device)
The hexadecimal or decimal display field on the rightmost
position of the screen displays the value of the output signal from
the ladder on the left side.
The message display line at the bottom of the screen displays an error
message as required.
Soft keys on the forced I/O screen
Forced I/O
Address search Signal on Signal off
Switching to decimal input Switching to the signal status display screen
Switching to hexadecimal input
Override
Switching to the signal status Override setting
display screen
Address search Signal on Override cancellation
Switching to decimal input Signal off Complete override

cancellation
Switching to hexadecimal input
Fig. 7.1.2 (a) Soft keys on the forced I/O screen
- 668 -
Operations using the soft keys

(1) [SEARCH] Search for an address
Searches for a byte address or bit address.
(2) [DEC] Switching to decimal input
Displays and inputs the data of each byte in decimal.
This soft key is enabled only when display/input in hexadecimal
is selected.
(3) [HEX] Switching to hexadecimal input
Displays and inputs the data of each byte in hexadecimal.
This soft key is enabled only when display/input in decimal is
selected.
(4) [EXIT] Switching to the signal status display screen
Quits the forced I/O function.
(5) [ON] Signal on
Turns on the signal on which the cursor is placed. Depending on
the cursor position, bit operation or byte operation can be
performed.
(6) [OFF] Signal off
Turns off the signal on which the cursor is placed. Depending on
the cursor position, bit operation or byte operation can be
performed.
(7) [OVRIDE SET] Override setting
Sets the override state for the X or Y address on which the cursor
is placed. Depending on the cursor position, bit operation or byte
operation can be performed.
This soft key is valid only in the override mode.
(8) [OVRIDE RESET] Override cancellation
Cancels the override state set for the X or Y address on which the
cursor is placed. Depending on the cursor position, bit operation
or byte operation can be performed.
(9) [INIT] Complete override cancellation
Cancels all override settings for X and Y addresses.
Screen operations using other keys

(1) Input key
The input key is used to modify the signal status.
(a) Bit-by-bit setting
· Input 1 then press the input key to turn on the signal.
· Input 0 then press the input key to turn off the signal.
· Press the input key to toggle between the on and off
statuses of the signal.
- 669 -
(b) Byte-by-byte setting

In the case of the byte cursor, input up to eight binary digits
then press the input key. (When an input value is shorter
than eight digits, the value is input from bit 0.)
Example: When 100 is input, this value is input as follows:
Bit number 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0
When the cursor is placed on the hexadecimal or decimal
display field, hexadecimal input or decimal input is enabled
on a byte-by-byte basis.
(c) Successive data input
Data items can be input successively in a column. The
cursor moves to the last input data item.
· As the data delimiter, ";" (EOB) is used.
Example: "1;0;1;" + Input key
· With ;=, the value of the immediately preceding data
item is input.
Example: "1;=;=;0;=" + Input key inputs 1,1,1,0,0.
· With ;;, data items can be input, skipping an address.
Example: "1;;1" + Input key inputs no data for the
second item.
· With "R;input-value;count", the same value can be input
as many times as a specified count.
Example: "R;1;200" + Input key inputs two hundred 1s
in a column.
(2) Cursor keys
With the cursor keys, select a signal to be modified.
If you press the cursor key for moving left when the cursor is
placed at bit 7 of an arbitrary address, the cursor changes to a
byte cursor.
If you press the cursor key for moving right when the cursor is
placed on the hexadecimal or decimal display field of an
arbitrary address, the cursor changes to a byte cursor for the next
one entire byte.
When the cursor is placed on the hexadecimal or decimal display
field or the cursor is a byte cursor, the one-byte signal data of the
address can be modified.
(3) Page keys
The page keys can be used to select a page to be displayed.
Operation of the return key

On the forced I/O screen, the operation of the return key is disabled.
Use the [EXIT] soft key to cancel the forced I/O mode and return to
the Signal Status screen.
- 670 -
7.2 CHECKING PMC ALARMS ([PMC ALARM] SCREEN)
On this screen, an alarm message output from the PMC is displayed.

To move to the PMC alarm screen, press the [PMC ALARM] soft key.
Page display
Alarm message display area
In the alarm message display area, an alarm message output from the
PMC is displayed. When many alarm messages are output to two or
more pages, the page keys can be used to switch from one page to
another.
In the page display area to the right of the title, the number of the page
currently displaying messages is indicated.
For information about messages displayed, see Section 11.1.
- 671 -
7.3 SETTING AND DISPLAYING PMC PARAMETERS
PMC parameters (timer, counter, keep relay, and data table) can be set
and displayed on each screen. Moreover, data items can be input
successively. The cursor moves to the last data item successively
input.
Method of input
(1) As the data delimiter, ";" (EOB) is used.
Example: "100;200;300;" + Input key
(2) With ;=, the value of the immediately preceding data item is
input.
Example: "100;=;=;200;=" + Input key inputs 100,100,100,200,
200.
(3) With ;;, data items can be input, skipping an address.
Example: "100;;100" + Input key inputs no data for the second
item.
(4) With "R;input-value;count", the same value can be input as many
times as a specified count.
Example: "R;100;200" + Input key inputs two hundred 100s in a
column.
- 672 -
7.3.1 Setting and Displaying Variable Timers ([TIMER] Screen)
This screen is used to set and display timer values for functional
instruction variable timers (TMR:SUB 3). This screen can be used in
one of two modes: the simple display mode and the comment display
mode. To move to the TIMER screen, press the [TIMER] soft key.
Page display
Key input line

Message
display line
line
Simple display mode
Comment display
area
Comment display mode
- 673 -
Table contents
· NO.: Timer number specified for a functional instruction
timer.
· PRESET: Timer setting value
· ACC: Timer accuracy
· COMMENT: T address comment
In the PRESET column, timer setting values are displayed. When the
timer accuracy is 8, 48, 1, 10, or 100 msec, only a numeric value is
displayed. When the timer accuracy is the second or minute, a time
value is displayed using H, M, and S with the separator "_" used to
delimit one unit from another as follows:
aaH_bbM_ccS
In the ACC column, timer accuracy values are displayed. The table
below indicates the time setting values and notation of each accuracy
value.
Timer No. Accuracy Minimum time Maximum time

notation setting setting
1 to 8 48 (initial value) 48 msec 1572.8 seconds
9 to 250 8 (initial value) 8 msec 262.1 seconds
1 to 250 1 1 msec 32.7 seconds
1 to 250 10 10 msec 327.7 seconds
1 to 250 100 100 msec 54.6 minutes
1 to 250 S 1 second 546 minutes
1 to 250 M 1 minute 546 hours

Soft keys on the TIMER screen
Switching the display mode T address search PMC path switching
Switching to the soft keys for accuracy setting
Setting accuracy to 100 msec
Setting accuracy to 1 second
Setting accuracy to 10 msec Setting accuracy to an initial value
Setting accuracy to 1 msec Setting accuracy to 1 minute
Fig. 7.3.1 Soft keys on the TIMER screen

- 674 -

(1) [SWITCH] Switching the display mode
Switches the display mode.
(2) [ACCRCY] Switching to the soft keys for accuracy setting
Switches to the soft keys for timer accuracy setting.
(3) [SEARCH] T address search
Searches for an input T address or timer number.
Switches PMC paths.
(5) [1MS] Setting accuracy to 1 msec
Sets timer accuracy to 1 msec.
(8) [1SEC] Setting accuracy to 1 second
Sets timer accuracy to 1 second.
(9) [1MIN] Setting accuracy to 1 mimute
Sets timer accuracy to 1 mimute.
(10) [INIT] Setting accuracy to an initial value
Sets the timer accuracy of the timer number on which the cursor
is placed to an initial value (8 msec or 48 msec).
Data input using the input key

When timer accuracy is set to 1 second or 1 minute, the unit is the
second if S is specified at the end of an input value; the unit is the
minute if M is specified; the unit is the hour if H is specified.
Example: When setting "2 hours, 46 minutes, 40 seconds" as the

timer address for timer accuracy 1 second:
"2H46M40S"+ input key is inputted.
- 675 -
7.3.2 Setting and Displaying Counter Values ([COUNTR] Screen)
This screen is used to set and display the maximum and minimum
counter values for functional instruction counters (SUB 5). This
screen can be used in one of two modes: the simple display mode and
the comment display mode. To move to the COUNTER screen, press
the [COUNTR] soft key.
Page display
Simple display mode
Comment display
area
- 676 -
Table contents
· NO.: Counter number specified for a functional
instruction counter
· PRESET: Maximum counter value (a minimum counter value
is specified by a counter instruction)
· CURRENT: Current counter value
· COMMENT: Comment on the C address of a setting value

If the cursor is placed on a PRESET value, the symbol and comment
of the address of the PRESET value are displayed. If the cursor is
placed on a CURRENT value, the symbol and comment of the address
of the CURRENT value are displayed.
Counter types and maximum values

Counter type PRESET maximum value CURRENT maximum value
BINARY 32767 32767
BCD 9999 9999
Soft keys on the COUNTER screen
Display mode switching C address search PMC path switching
Fig. 7.3.2 Soft keys on the COUNTER screen

(1) [SWITCH] Display mode switching
(2) [SEARCH] C address search
Searches for an input C address or counter number.
Switches PMC paths.
- 677 -
7.3.3 Setting and Displaying Keep Relays ([KEEP RELAY] Screen)
This screen is used for setting and displaying the Keep Relays. To
move to the KEEP RELAY screen, press the [KEEP RELAY] soft key.
Page display
Contents of the table

· ADDRESS: Address refered by sequence Program
· 0 to 7: Contents of each bit
· HEX: Value of the byte data in hexadecimal notation

When the cursor is placed on a byte, the byte symbol and comment are
displayed.
Since Keep Relay is nonvolatile memory, the contents are not lost
even if you turn off the power.
The Keep Relay area consists of parts as follows.
30i/31i/32i-A
First PMC Second PMC Third PMC Dual check
User area K0–K99 K0–K19 K0–K19 K0–K19
Area for management software K900–K999 K900–K999 K900–K999 K900–K999
- 678 -
For details of the area for the PMC management software, see
Subsection 2.2.11.
CAUTION
If the area for the PMC management software is
protected by the programmer protection function,
the area is not displayed on the KEEP RELAY
screen. For details, see Section 6.2.
Screen operations
Soft keys on the KEEP RELAY screen
K address search PMC path switching
Fig. 7.3.3 Soft keys on the KEEP RELAY screen

(1) [SEARCH] K address search
Searches for an input K address.
Switches PMC paths.
Data input using the input key

(1) Bit-by-bit setting
(2) Byte-by-byte setting
In the case of the byte cursor, input up to eight binary digits then
press the input key. (When an input value is shorter than eight
digits, the value is input from bit 0.)
Bit number 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0
When the cursor is placed on the hexadecimal display field, hexa-
decimal input is enabled on a byte-by-byte basis.
- 679 -
Cursor keys
If you press the cursor key for moving left when the cursor is placed at
bit 7 of an arbitrary address, the cursor changes to a byte cursor.
If you press the cursor key for moving right when the cursor is placed
on the hexadecimal display field of an arbitrary address, the cursor
changes to a byte cursor for the next one entire byte.
When the cursor is on the hexadecimal display field or the cursor is a
byte cursor, the one-byte signal data of the address can be modified.
CAUTION
1 Do not use the special use area, because the relays
in this area are reserved for PMC system software
use, and they affect behavior of the PMC software.
Set "0" to any relays that are not mentioned below,
to prevent unexpected behavior of PMC.
2 Be sure to set the reserved portion of the area for
the PMC management software to 0.
- 680 -
7.3.4 Setting and Displaying Data Tables ([DATA] Screen)

There are two data table types (data table control data table and data
table). To move to the data screen, press the [DATA] soft key.
(1) DATA TABLE CONTROL screen ([List] screen)
Pressing the [DATA] soft key displays the DATA TABLE
CONTROL screen for data table management. This screen can
be used in one of two modes: the simple display mode and the
comment display mode.
Display of the
number of groups
Page display
Key input line
Additional information line Message display line
Simple display mode
Comment
display area
- 681 -
Table contents
· GROUP TABLE COUNT: Number of data items in the data table
· NO.: Group number
· ADDRESS: Data table start address
· PARAMETER: Data table control parameter
· TYPE: Data length (0 = 1 byte, 1 = 2 bytes, 2 = 4 bytes, 3
= bit)
· DATA: Number of data items in each data table
· COMMENT: Comment on the start D address of each group

When the cursor is placed on the PARAMETER, TYPE, or DATA
column, the current setting is displayed.
The ADDRESS column displays the start address of a data table.

Multiple groups may share an address. When the [SYMBOL] soft key
is pressed, the symbol of the start address is displayed.
NOTE
The data table control parameters have the following meanings:
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0: Binary format
1: BCD format (Bits 2 and 3 are invalid.)
0: Without input protection
1: With input protection
0: Binary or BCD format (Bit 0 is valid.)
1: Hexadecimal format (Bits 0 and 3 are invalid.)
0: Signed (valid only when bits 0 and 2 are set to 0)
1: Unsigned (valid only when bits 0 and 2 are set to 0)
NOTE
1 When data table control data is protected by the
programmer protection function, the data table
control data screen is not displayed. For details,
see Section 6.2.
2 When PMC parameters are output using the I/O
screen (see Section 7.4), only the data of an
address D area set in the data table control data is
output from the data table screen. The data of an
address D area not set in the data table control data
is not output.
- 682 -
Soft keys on the DATA TABLE CONTROL screen
Display mode switching Data table control data initialization
Switching to the zoom screen Switching to the soft keys for parameter setting
Input of the number Symbol display Switching to the soft keys for data size
of groups switching setting
Group number search Address display PMC path switching

switching
Soft keys for parameter setting
Setting for signed decimal Setting for hexadecimal
Setting for unsigned Setting for BCD Protection state modification

decimal
Soft keys for data size setting
Setting for byte Setting for bit
Setting for word Setting for double word
Fig. 7.3.4 (a) Soft keys on the DATA TABLE CONTROL screen

(a) [SWITCH] Display mode switching
(b) [ZOOM] Switching to the zoom screen
Switches the screen display to the DATA TABLE screen.
(c) [G.CONT] Input of the number of groups
By pressing this soft key after inputting the number of
groups, the number of groups on the data table can be set.
(d) [NO.SRH] Group number search
By pressing this soft key after inputting a group number, the
cursor can be moved to the specified group.
(e) [SYMBOL] Symbol display switching
Displays the symbol of the start address of a data table in
the ADDRESS column.
This soft key is valid only for address display.
- 683 -
(f) [ADRESS] Address display switching

Displays the start address of a data table in the ADDRESS
column.
This soft key is valid for symbol display.
(g) [INIT] Data table control data initialization
Initializes the setting of data table control data.
NO. ADDRESS PARAMETER TYPE DATA
1 D0000 00000000 0 10000 (NOTE)
NOTE
1 When data table control data is initialized, the entire
data area is set as a single table. The start address
is the start address of the D addresses. The control
parameters are set as follows: signed binary format,
without input protection, one-byte data size, and the
number of data items set to the total number of
bytes in the entire D address area.
2 The initial number of data items for the first PMC is
10000. For the second PMC, third PMC, and the
PMC for dual check safety, the initial number of
data items is 3000.
(h) [PARAM] Switching to the soft keys for parameter setting
Switches to the soft keys for setting the parameters of data
table control data.
(i) [TYPE] Switching to the soft keys for data setting
Switches to the soft keys for data size setting.
(j) [SWITCH PMC] PMC path switching
Switches PMC paths.
(k) [SGNDEC] Setting for signed decimal
Sets signed decimal for the parameters of data table control
data.
(l) [USDEC] Setting for unsigned decimal
Sets unsigned decimal for the parameters of data table
control data.
(m) [BCD] Setting for BCD
Sets BCD for the parameters of data table control data.
(n) [HEX] Setting for hexadecimal
Sets hexadecimal for the parameters of data table control
data.
(o) [PROTECT] Protection state modification
Modifies the protection state of the parameters of data table
control data.
(p) [BYTE] Setting for byte
Sets the data size to one byte.
(q) [WORD] Setting for word
Sets the data size to two bytes.
- 684 -
(r) [DWORD] Setting for double word

Sets the data size to four bytes.
(s) [BIT] Setting for bit
Sets the data size to one bit.
When the data size is one bit, the unit for the number of data
items is one byte.
(2) DATA TABLE screen ([ZOOM] screen)
If the data table control data is specified, clicking the [ZOOM]
soft key on the data table control data screen displays the data
table setting screen. This screen can be used in one of three
modes: the simple display mode, the comment display mode,
and the bit display mode.
Group
information line
Page display

Simple display mode
Comment display area
- 685 -
Bit display mode

Table contents
· NO.
· ADDRESS: Address used by the sequence program
· DATA: Data value of data table
· COMMENT: Comment on the D address
· 0 to 7: Data of each bit
· HEX: Display of each byte in hexadecimal
The group information line at the top of the screen displays a group
number, group start address, settings, and comment on the start
address.

In the bit display mode, a bit symbol and comment, or a byte symbol
and comment are displayed, depending on the cursor position.
Soft keys on the DATA TABLE screen
Display mode switching Address search
Switching to the list screen Group number search
Fig. 7.3.4 (b) Soft keys on the DATA TABLE screen
- 686 -

(1) [SWITCH] Display mode switching
Switches the mode between the simple display mode and
comment display mode when the data size is one byte, two bytes,
or four bytes. When the data size is one bit, this soft key
switches the mode between the simple display mode and bit
display mode.
(2) [LIST] Switching to the list screen
Clicking this soft key switches to the data table control data
screen.
(3) [G-SRCH] Group number search
After the entry of a group number for a data table to be searched
in another group, clicking this key moves the cursor to the
beginning of that group.
(4) [SEARCH] Address search
After the entry of an address, clicking this key moves the cursor
to the specified address within the currently selected group. In
the bit display mode, this soft key searches for a byte address or
bit address.
Screen operations in the bit display mode

In the bit display mode, the method of operation described below is
used.
(1) Input key
(a) Bit-by-bit setting
(b) Byte-by-byte setting
In the case of the byte cursor, input up to eight binary digits
then press the input key. (When an input value is shorter
than eight digits, the value is input from bit 0.)
Bit number 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0
When the cursor is placed on the hexadecimal display field,
hexadecimal input is enabled on a byte-by-byte basis.
(2) Cursor keys
If you press the cursor key for moving left when the cursor is
placed at bit 7 of an arbitrary address, the cursor changes to a
byte cursor.
If you press the cursor key for moving right when the cursor is
placed on the hexadecimal display field of an arbitrary address,
the cursor changes to a byte cursor for the next one entire byte.
When the cursor is placed on the hexadecimal display field, or
the cursor is a byte cursor, the one-byte signal data of the address
can be modified.
- 687 -
7.4 DATA INPUT/OUTPUT ([I/O] SCREEN)
To move to the I/O screen, press the [I/O] soft key.
On this screen, sequence programs, PMC parameters and PMC

message data for multi-language display can be written to the
specified device, read from the device, and compared. The query
selection cursor, which moves vertically from one question to another,
is displayed, as is the option selection cursor, which moves
horizontally from one option to another.
The following types of devices can be used for input/output. The

desired device type can be selected by positioning the query selection
cursor to "DEVICE" and moving the option selection cursor to that
type.
· MEMORY CARD: Data can be output to and input from a

memory card.
· FLASH ROM: Data can be output to and input from flash
ROM.
· FLOPPY: Data can be output to and input from handy
files or floppy cassettes.
· OTHERS: Data can be output to and input from other
general-purpose RS-232C input/output
devices.
The multi-path PMC system enables an I/O target PMC to be selected.

For details, see Section 7.4.4.
- 688 -
In STATUS in the lower part of the screen, a detailed explanation of

execution and the execution status are displayed. During write, read,
and comparison, the size of the data already transferred is indicated as
the execution (intermediate) result.
The following gives a display example shown when PMC parameters
are written to a memory card:
Soft keys on the I/O screen
Execution Switching to the port setting screen
Switching to the list screen
Cancellation
Fig. 7.4 Soft keys on the I/O screen

(1) [EXEC] Execution
Executes a processing item selected for FUNCTION.
During execution, the [CANCEL] soft key is displayed.
- 689 -
(2) [LIST] Switching to the list screen

Switches the screen display to the file list screen.
This soft key is valid only when MEMORY CARD or FLOPPY
is selected for DEVICE.
(3) [PORT SETING] Switching to the port setting screen
Switches the screen display to the Port setting screen.
This soft key is valid only when FLOPPY or OTHERS is
selected for DEVICE.
(4) [CANCEL] Cancellation
Cancels execution. Upon normal termination, the display of this
soft key disappears.
NOTE
For the description of the error messages on the I/O
screen, see Section 11.1.
- 690 -
7.4.1 Writing to the Memory Card
A memory card used to input/output sequence programs with the I/O

screen can directly transfer data to and from the programmer device
(FANUC LADDER-III).
The table below indicates the available memory cards and their usable
functions.
Each card must comply with TYPE1 or TYPE2 of PCMCIA (Personal
Computer Memory Card International Association) 2.0 or later, or
must comply with TYPE1 or TYPE2 of JEIDA (Japan Electronic
Industry Development Association) 4.0 or later. The format complies
with the FAT file system of MS-DOS.
¡: Supported
´: Not supported
Flash memory card
SRAM card Supported Unsupported ATA card
card card
Read of a file ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
Format of a card ¡ ¡ ´ ¡
Write of a file ¡ ¡ ´ ¡
Delete of a file ¡ ´ ´ ¡
List of a file ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
· Writing to the flash memory card

The supported type of flash memory card is:
· Series 2 flash memory card of Intel (or equivalent)
A file can be written to a card formatted in the MS-DOS format.
However, the following restrictions are imposed:
· Existing files cannot be replaced.
· Cards formatted by the flash file system cannot be used.
(Even the read function and directory display function cannot
be used.)
· The data of a flash memory card written to in the built-in slot
of a personal computer may not be read.
No data can be written to the last 128K bytes of a card. This

means that the usable card size is (card size - 128K bytes).
For details, see Fig. 7.4.1.
- 691 -
Before a write
File-A
File-B
File-C
Added
File-D
128K bytes
After a write
File-A
File-B
File-C
File-D
128K bytes
Fig. 7.4.1
If an attempt is made to write File-D in Fig. 7.4.1, an error occurs.

Actually, the data of File-D is written to the shaded portion ( ), but
the data cannot be read, and the directory cannot be displayed.
Moreover, no additional files can be written to this memory card.
NOTE
Recommendable devices that can handle a flash
memory card formatted and written to by the
FANUC system are unavailable from manufacturers
other than FANUC. Moreover, recommendable
devices that can format and write to a card to allow
read operation by the FANUC system are
unavailable from manufacturers other than FANUC.
This is because the demand for flash memory cards
in the card market is so low that compatible models
are disappearing.
When using flash memory cards, understand the
situations mentioned above and fully take
compatibility into consideration.
- 692 -
7.4.2 Setting the Communication Port ([PORT SETING] Screen)
When FLOPPY or OTHERS is selected for DEVICE on the I/O

screen, the [PORT SETING] soft key is displayed. When you press
this soft key, the screen display changes to the port setting screen.
The screen below is a sample screen displayed when FLOPPY is
This screen allows the setting of the communication data required for
communication using the RS-232C. Communication data can be set
for each of the two types of devices independently of the other.
Selected device type is displayed to "DEVICE" menu on screen.
Explanation of each question

· CHANNEL
Check that an RS-232C cable is connected to the main board of
the control unit. Directly enter the number corresponding to the
connected connector.
1.......... JD36A
2.......... JD36B
· BAUD RATE
1200: Sets the baud rate to "1200".
· STOP BIT
1 BIT: Sets the number of stop bits to "1".
2 BITS: Sets the number of stop bits to "2".
- 693 -
· WRITE CODE
"WRITE CODE" is displayed when "OTHERS" is selected for
"DEVICE".
ASCII: Sets the output code to "ASCII".
ISO: Sets the output code to "ISO".
NOTE
Parity is always "NONE".
Soft keys on the port setting screen
Setting initialization Switching to the I/O screen
Fig. 7.4.2 Soft keys on the port setting screen
Explanation of soft keys

(1) [INIT] Setting initialization
Sets all the parameters to their initial values.
The table below indicates the initial value of each setting item.
Initial values
DEVICE DEVICE = FLOPPY DEVICE = OTHERS
CHANNEL 1 1
BAUD RATE 4800 4800
STOP BIT 2 BITS 2 BITS
WRITE CODE (NONE) ISO
(2) [I/O] Switching to the I/O screen

Terminates the setting of the communication parameters and
switches the screen display to the I/O screen.

On the port setting screen, the operation of the return key is disabled.
Use the [I/O] soft key to terminate the setting of the communication
parameters and return to the I/O screen.
- 694 -
7.4.3 Displaying a File List ([LIST] Screen)
When MEMORY CARD or FLOPPY is selected for DEVICE on the

I/O screen, the [LIST] soft key is displayed. When you press this soft
key, the screen display changes to the file list screen. The screen
below is a sample screen displayed when MEMORY CARD is
If MEMORY CARD is selected for DEVICE, and a memory card

holding files is inserted into the slot, the contents of the memory card
are displayed. If FLOPPY is selected for DEVICE, the contents of a
Floppy Cassette or Handy File are displayed.
NOTE
Up to 128 files can be displayed on this screen.
When 129 or more files are saved, the 129th and
subsequent files are ignored.
- 695 -
When a file is selected on this screen, the screen display can be

returned to the I/O screen. To select a file, place the cursor at the
name of the file, then press either the [SELECT] soft key or the
INPUT key. After the key entry, the screen display switches to the
I/O screen automatically. In this case, the cursor is positioned at
READ on the FUNCTION menu, and the number and name of the file
selected on the list screen are indicated in the FILE NO. and FILE
NAME fields, respectively. A display example is shown below.
To return the screen display to the I/O screen without selecting a file,
press the I/O soft key. Even if the memory card, Floppy Cassette, or
Handy File is exchanged while the file list screen is being displayed,
the display data is not automatically updated. In this case, press the
[REFRSH] soft key. The contents of the new memory card
are then displayed.
- 696 -
Soft keys on the file list screen
File selection Switching to the I/O screen
List updating
Fig. 7.4.3 Soft keys on the file list screen
Explanation of soft keys

(1) [SELECT] File selection
Selects a file, and returns the screen display to the I/O screen.
(2) [REFRSH] List updating
Redisplays the file list screen.
(3) [I/O] Switching to the I/O screen
Switches the screen display to the I/O screen without selecting a
file.

On the file list screen, the operation of the return key is disabled.
Use the [I/O] soft key to return to the I/O screen without selecting a
file.
- 697 -
7.4.4 Setting an I/O Target PMC
The multi-path PMC system enables an I/O target PMC to be selected

on the I/O screen.
Specification of a PMC in the item of PMC

Select PMC with the query selection cursor then select an I/O target
PMC by moving the option selection cursor.
NOTE
The PMC query may not be displayed, depending
on the setting of each query. For details, see the
description of each operation procedure.
Nonexistent PMCs are not displayed as options.

Example: When PMC2 does not exist
PMC = PMC1 / PMC3 / PMC DCS
When only PMC1 exists, the indication below is provided, so that no

selection operation is required. In this case, the query selection cursor
does not move to PMC.
PMC = PMC1
- 698 -
Specification of a PMC when a sequence program is read

When the data of the I/O screen is read, the type of data is
automatically identified. The procedure for reading a sequence
program is described below.
Soft keys for reading a sequence program
(1) Reading a sequence program including PMC information

(a) After setting a device on the I/O screen, select READ for
FUNCTION, then press the [EXEC] soft key.
(b) The following message is displayed:
"READING SEQUENCE PROGRAM (PMCx)"
(As PMCx, the PMC number embedded in the data is
displayed. "PMC DCS" is displayed for a program for dual
check safety.)
(c) Press the [EXEC] soft key to continue the operation.
(d) Press the [CANCEL] soft key to stop the operation.
(2) Reading a sequence program for the conventional model

(a) After setting a device on the I/O screen, select READ for
FUNCTION, then press the [EXEC] soft key.
(b) The following message is displayed, and the read operation
is terminated abnormally:
"LADDER TYPE UNMATCH"
- 699 -
Specification of a PMC when PMC parameters are read

When the data of the I/O screen is read, the type of data is
automatically identified. The procedure for reading PMC parameters
is described below.
Soft keys for reading PMC parameters
When PMC parameters including PMC information are read
When PMC parameters for the conventional model are read with the multi-PMC system
(1) Reading PMC parameters including PMC information

(a) After setting a device, select READ for FUNCTION, then
execute.
"READING PMC PARAMETER (PMCx)"
displayed. "PMC DCS" is displayed for parameters for dual
check safety.)
(c) Press the [EXEC] soft key to continue the operation.
(d) Press the [CANCEL] soft key to stop the operation.
(2) Reading PMC parameters for the conventional model

(a) After setting a device, select READ for FUNCTION, then
execute.
"READING PMC PARAMETER"
(c) Select a read source PMC with the corresponding soft key.
(d) Press the [CANCEL] soft key to stop processing.
NOTE
1 When only the first PMC exists, only the step for
reading PMC parameters including PMC
information needs to be executed.
2 For a nonexistent PMC, no soft key is displayed.
- 700 -
7.4.5 Outputting a Sequence Program to the Memory Card
A sequence program can be output from a PMC to the memory card.

To use this function, perform the operation described below on the I/O
screen.
NOTE
This operation can be performed only when the
operation condition allows sequence program
output. For details, see Section 6.2.
(1) On the I/O screen, make the following settings with the query
selection cursor and option selection cursor:
Query Setting
PMC (Output target PMC)
DEVICE MEMORY CARD
FUNCTION WRITE
KIND OF DATA SEQUENCE PROGRAM
For the setting of an output target PMC, see Subsection 7.4.4.
(2) Move the query selection cursor to FILE NAME, then enter a
desired file name.
Enter a file name not longer than eight characters with a three-
character extension in the MS-DOS format. When no file name
is entered, the following file name is automatically set:
Output target PMC File name

PMC1 PMC1_LAD.000
PMC2 PMC2_LAD.000
PMC3 PMC3_LAD.000
Dual check safety PMCS_LAD.000
If a file with the same file name already exists, the extension
number is incremented for output.
Example: PMC1_LAD.001
(3) Press the [EXEC] soft key to output the sequence program.
Press the [CANCEL] soft key to stop the operation.
For the supported memory cards, see the pertinent table in Subsection
7.4.1.
NOTE
For writing to the flash memory card, see "Writing to
the flash memory card" in Subsection 7.4.1.
- 701 -
7.4.6 Inputting a Sequence Program from the Memory Card
A sequence program can be input from the memory card to a PMC.

screen.
NOTE
operation condition allows sequence program input.
For details, see Section 6.2.
Query Setting
DEVICE MEMORY CARD
FUNCTION READ
(2) Specify an input target sequence program by performing the

following operations:
· Move the query selection cursor to FILE NO., then key in an
input target file number. At this time, the FILE NAME field
displays the file name corresponding to the entered file
number.
· Move the query selection cursor to FILE NAME, then key in
the input target file name.
· Switch the screen display to the list screen, then select the
input target file.
For the list screen, see Subsection 7.4.3.
NOTE
If a value is set in the FILE NO. field, and a file
name not corresponding to the file number is
entered in the FILE NAME field when FILE NO. and
FILE NAME are displayed at the same time, the
value set in the FILE NO. field is erased, and the
setting in the FILE NAME field becomes valid.
(3) Press the [EXEC] soft key.

Before the reading of the file is started, the following message is
displayed to check if read processing may be executed:
"READING SEQUENCE PROGRAM PMCx"
<Caution> Take special care reading a sequence program
or PMC parameters.
* When an inadequate file is read, the machine can make
an unexpected movement.
- 702 -
* When a sequence program is read during operation, the

program being executed is automatically stopped.
check safety.)
Press the [EXEC] soft key to continue the operation. Press the
[CANCEL] soft key to stop the operation.
If the reading of the sequence program is continued, the ladder
NOTE
1 When the format of a specified file cannot be
recognized, the read operation is terminated
abnormally with the following message:
"UNKNOWN FILE FORMAT"
2 Sequence programs for the conventional model
cannot be read. If a sequence program for the
conventional model is read, the read operation is
terminated abnormally with the following message:
WARNING
1 If a ladder program is read while another ladder
program is being executed, the ladder program
being executed is automatically stopped. Take
special care when stopping a ladder program. If a
ladder program is stopped at an inadequate timing
or in an inadequate machine state, the machine can
make an unexpected movement. Moreover, when
a ladder program is stopped, the safety feature and
monitoring based on the ladder program do not
function. Before stopping a ladder program, make
sure that the machine state is normal and that there
is no person near the machine.
2 When an attempt is made to stop the ladder
program being executed, the stop processing may
continue endlessly, depending on the ladder
operation. In such a case, modify the ladder
program according to Section 4.15.
7.4.1.
- 703 -
7.4.7 Comparing Sequence Programs with Memory Card Files
A sequence program comparison can be made between the PMC and

memory card. To use this function, perform the operation described
below on the I/O screen.
NOTE
Compare operation can be performed only when
the operation condition allows sequence program
Query Setting
DEVICE MEMORY CARD
FUNCTION COMPARE
(2) Specify a sequence program to be compared, by performing the

· Move the query selection cursor to FILE NO., then key in a
compare target file number. At this time, the FILE NAME
field displays the file name corresponding to the entered file
number.
the compare target file name.
compare target file.
NOTE
- 704 -
(3) Press the [EXEC] soft key to execute a sequence program

comparison.
NOTE
recognized, the compare operation is terminated
cannot be compared. If a sequence program for
the conventional model is compared, the compare
operation is terminated abnormally with the
following message:
7.4.1.
- 705 -
7.4.8 Saving Sequence Programs to the Flash ROM
Sequence programs can be saved from a PMC to the flash ROM. To

use this function, perform the operation described below on the I/O
screen.
NOTE
Query Setting
DEVICE FLASH ROM
FUNCTION WRITE
(2) Press the [EXEC] soft key to save sequence programs.

When writing to the flash ROM is performed, the processing
cannot be stopped.
NOTE
When programs are written, flash ROM initialization
may consume some time. During initialization,
"INITIALIZING FLASH ROM." is displayed in the
STATUS display field.
- 706 -
7.4.9 Inputting Sequence Programs from the Flash ROM
Sequence programs can be inputted from the flash ROM to a PMC.

screen.
NOTE
Query Setting
PMC (Input target PMC)
DEVICE FLASH ROM
FUNCTION READ
For the setting of an input target PMC, see Subsection 7.4.4.
(2) Press the [EXEC] soft key to input sequence programs.

When reading from the flash ROM is performed, the processing
cannot be stopped.
If the reading of sequence programs is continued, the ladder
WARNING
- 707 -
7.4.10 Comparing Sequence Programs with Flash ROM Files

flash ROM. To use this function, perform the operation described
NOTE
Query Setting
PMC (Compare target PMC)
DEVICE FLASH ROM
FUNCTION COMPARE
For the setting of a compare target PMC, see Subsection 7.4.4.

comparison.
When a sequence program camparison with the flash ROM is
performed, the processing cannot be stopped.
- 708 -
7.4.11 Outputting a Sequence Program to the FLOPPY
A sequence program can be output from a PMC to a Floppy Cassette

or Handy File connected via RS-232C. To use this function, perform
the operation described below on the I/O screen. To set the
communication parameters, display the port setting screen by pressing
the [PORT SETING] soft key. For the port setting screen, see
Subsection 7.4.2.
NOTE
This operation can be performed only when the operation condition

allows sequence program output. For details, see Section 6.2.
Query Setting
DEVICE FLOPPY
FUNCTION WRITE
desired file name.
For output to a FLOPPY in the DOS format, enter a file name not
longer than eight characters with an extension not longer than
three characters in the MS-DOS format. For output to a
FLOPPY in the FANUC format, enter a file name not longer than
seventeen characters. When no file name is entered, the
following file name is automatically set:

PMC1 PMC1_LAD.000
PMC2 PMC2_LAD.000
PMC3 PMC3_LAD.000
Dual check safety PMCS_LAD.000
Example: PMC1_LAD.001
(3) Press the [EXEC] soft key to output the sequence program.
- 709 -
7.4.12 Inputting a Sequence Program from the FLOPPY
A sequence program can be input to a PMC from a Floppy Cassette or

Handy File connected via RS-232C. To use this function, perform the
operation described below on the I/O screen. To set the
Subsection 7.4.2.
NOTE
Query Setting
DEVICE FLOPPY
FUNCTION READ
(2) Specify an input target sequence program by performing the

number.
input target file.
NOTE
- 710 -

check safety.)
If the reading of the sequence program is continued, the ladder
NOTE
WARNING
- 711 -
7.4.13 Comparing Sequence Programs with FLOPPY Files

Floppy Cassette or Handy File connected via RS-232C. To use this
function, perform the operation described below on the I/O screen.
To set the communication parameters, display the port setting screen
by pressing the [PORT SETING] soft key. For the port setting screen,
see Subsection 7.4.2.
NOTE
Query Setting
DEVICE FLOPPY
FUNCTION COMPARE
(2) Specify a sequence program to be compared, by performing the

number.
NOTE
- 712 -

comparison.
NOTE
following message:
- 713 -
7.4.14 Outputting Sequence Programs to Other Devices

(via the RS-232C Port)
Sequence programs can be output from a PMC to another type of

device connected via RS-232C. To use this function, perform the
Subsection 7.4.2.
NOTE
Query Setting
DEVICE OTHERS
FUNCTION WRITE
(2) Press the [EXEC] soft key to output sequence programs.

- 714 -
7.4.15 Inputting Sequence Programs from Other Devices

Sequence programs can be input to a PMC from another type of

device connected via RS-232C. To use this function, perform the
Subsection 7.4.2.
NOTE
Query Setting
DEVICE OTHERS
FUNCTION READ

Before the reading of a file is started, the following message is
check safety.)
If the reading of sequence programs is continued, the ladder
NOTE
- 715 -
WARNING
- 716 -
7.4.16 Comparing Sequence Programs with Files of Other Devices


another type of device connected via RS-232C. To use this function,
perform the operation described below on the I/O screen. To set the
Subsection 7.4.2.
NOTE
Query Setting
DEVICE OTHERS
FUNCTION COMPARE

comparison.
NOTE
following message:
- 717 -
7.4.17 Outputting PMC Parameters to the Memory Card
PMC parameters can be output from a PMC to the memory card. To

screen.
NOTE
operation condition allows PMC parameter output.
Query Setting
DEVICE MEMORY CARD
FUNCTION WRITE
KIND OF DATA PARAMETER
desired file name.

PMC1 PMC1_PRM.000
PMC2 PMC2_PRM.000
PMC3 PMC3_PRM.000
Dual check safety PMCS_PRM.000
Example: PMC1_PRM.001
- 718 -
(3) Press the [EXEC] soft key to output PMC parameters.

7.4.1.
NOTE
- 719 -
7.4.18 Inputting PMC Parameters from the Memory Card
PMC parameters can be input from the memory card to a PMC. To

screen.
NOTE
operation condition allows PMC parameter input.
Query Setting
DEVICE MEMORY CARD
FUNCTION READ
(2) Specify input target PMC parameters by performing the

number.
input target file.
NOTE
- 720 -

check safety.)
Press the [EXEC] soft key to continue the operation. When PMC
parameters for the conventional model are to be read with the
multi-PMC system, select a read source PMC with soft key
operation. For PMC selection, see Subsection 7.4.4. Press the
If the reading of PMC parameters is continued, the PMC
parameters are rewritten even when a ladder program is being
executed.
NOTE
When the format of a specified file cannot be
WARNING
When PMC parameters are read, a modified
parameter can exercise an unexpected influence on
ladder operation. Before reading PMC parameters,
make sure that the parameters to be read do not
affect ladder operation.
7.4.1.
- 721 -
7.4.19 Comparing PMC Parameters with Memory Card Files
A PMC parameter comparison can be made between the PMC and

memory card. To use this function, perform the operation described
NOTE
the operation condition allows PMC parameter
Query Setting
DEVICE MEMORY CARD
FUNCTION COMPARE
(2) Specify PMC parameters to be compared, by performing the

number.
NOTE
- 722 -
(3) Press the [EXEC] soft key to execute a PMC parameter

comparison.
When PMC parameters for the conventional model are to be read
with the multi-PMC system, select a read source PMC with soft
key operation. For PMC selection, see Subsection 7.4.4. Press
the [CANCEL] soft key to stop the operation.
NOTE
7.4.1.
- 723 -
7.4.20 Outputting PMC Parameters to the FLOPPY
PMC parameters can be output from a PMC to a Floppy Cassette or

Subsection 7.4.2.
NOTE
Query Setting
DEVICE FLOPPY
FUNCTION WRITE
desired file name.
For output to a FLOPPY in the DOS format, enter a file name not
longer than eight characters with an extension not longer than
three characters in the MS-DOS format. For output to a
FLOPPY in the FANUC format, enter a file name not longer than
seventeen characters. When no file name is entered, the
following file name is automatically set:

PMC1 PMC1_PRM.000
PMC2 PMC2_PRM.000
PMC3 PMC3_PRM.000
Dual check safety PMCS_PRM.000
Example: PMC1_PRM.001
(3) Press the [EXEC] soft key to output the PMC parameters.
- 724 -
7.4.21 Inputting PMC Parameters from the FLOPPY
PMC parameters can be input to a PMC from a Floppy Cassette or

Subsection 7.4.2.
NOTE
Query Setting
DEVICE FLOPPY
FUNCTION READ
(2) Specify input target PMC parameters by performing the

number.
input target file.
NOTE
- 725 -

check safety.)
executed.
NOTE
WARNING
- 726 -
7.4.22 Comparing PMC Parameters with FLOPPY Files

Floppy Cassette or Handy File connected via RS-232C. To use this
function, perform the operation described below on the I/O screen.
To set the communication parameters, display the port setting screen
by pressing the [PORT SETING] soft key. For the port setting screen,
NOTE
Query Setting
DEVICE FLOPPY
FUNCTION COMPARE
(2) Specify PMC parameters to be compared, by performing the

number.
NOTE
- 727 -

comparison.
NOTE
- 728 -
7.4.23 Outputting PMC Parameters to Other Devices

PMC parameters can be output from a PMC to another type of device

connected via RS-232C. To use this function, perform the operation
described below on the I/O screen. To set the communication
parameters, display the port setting screen by pressing the [PORT
SETING] soft key. For the port setting screen, see Subsection 7.4.2.
NOTE
Query Setting
DEVICE OTHERS
FUNCTION WRITE
(2) Press the [EXEC] soft key to output PMC parameters.

- 729 -
7.4.24 Inputting PMC Parameters from Other Devices

PMC parameters can be input to a PMC from another type of device

connected via RS-232C. To use this function, perform the operation
described below on the I/O screen. To set the communication
parameters, display the port setting screen by pressing the [PORT
SETING] soft key. For the port setting screen, see Subsection 7.4.2.
NOTE
Query Setting
DEVICE OTHERS
FUNCTION READ

Before the reading of a file is started, the following message is
check safety.)
executed.
NOTE
- 730 -
WARNING
7.4.25 Comparing PMC Parameters with Files of Other Devices


another type of device connected via RS-232C. To use this function,
perform the operation described below on the I/O screen. To set the
Subsection 7.4.2.
NOTE
Query Setting
DEVICE OTHERS
FUNCTION COMPARE

comparison.
NOTE
- 731 -
7.4.26 Outputting a Message Data for Multi-Language Display to the

Memory Card
A message data for multi-language display can be output from a PMC

to the memory card. To use this function, perform the operation
described below on the I/O screen.
NOTE
operation condition allows message data for multi-
language display output. For details, see Section 6.2.
Query Setting
DEVICE MEMORY CARD
FUNCTION WRITE
KIND OF DATA MESSAGE
desired file name.

PMC1 PMC1_MSG.000
PMC2 PMC2_MSG.000
PMC3 PMC3_MSG.000
Example: PMC1_MSG.001
(3) Press the [EXEC] soft key to output the message data for multi-
language display.
7.4.1.
NOTE
- 732 -
7.4.27 Inputting a Message Data for Multi-Language Display from

the Memory Card
A message data for multi-language display can be input from the

memory card to a PMC. To use this function, perform the operation
NOTE
language display input. For details, see Section
6.2.
Query Setting
DEVICE MEMORY CARD
FUNCTION READ
(2) Specify an input target message data for multi-language display

by performing the following operations:
number.
input target file.
NOTE

"READING MESSAGE DATA PMCx"
<Caution> Take special care reading a sequence program
or PMC parameters.
- 733 -
* When an inadequate file is read, the machine can make

an unexpected movement.
* When a sequence program is read during operation, the
displayed.)
If the reading of the message data for multi-language display is
continued, the ladder program being executed is automatically
stopped.
NOTE
WARNING
1 If a message data for multi-language display is read
while ladder program is being executed, the ladder
Take special care when stopping a ladder program.
If a ladder program is stopped at an inadequate
timing or in an inadequate machine state, the
machine can make an unexpected movement.
Moreover, when a ladder program is stopped, the
safety feature and monitoring based on the ladder
program do not function. Before stopping a ladder
program, make sure that the machine state is
normal and that there is no person near the
machine.
7.4.1.
- 734 -
7.4.28 Comparing Message Data for Multi-Language Display with

Memory Card Files
A message data for multi-language display comparison can be made

between the PMC and memory card. To use this function, perform the
operation described below on the I/O screen.
NOTE
the operation condition allows message data for
multi-language display output. For details, see
Section 6.2.
Query Setting
DEVICE MEMORY CARD
FUNCTION COMPARE
(2) Specify a message data for multi-language display to be

compared, by performing the following operations:
number.
NOTE
- 735 -
(3) Press the [EXEC] soft key to execute a message data for multi-
language display comparison.
NOTE
7.4.1.
- 736 -
7.4.29 Saving Message Data for Multi-Language Display to the Flash

ROM
Message data for multi-language display can be saved from a PMC to

the flash ROM. To use this function, perform the operation described
NOTE
language display output. For details, see Section
6.2.
Query Setting
DEVICE FLASH ROM
FUNCTION WRITE
KIND OF DATA MESSAGE
(2) Press the [EXEC] soft key to save s message data for multi-
language display.
When writing to the flash ROM is performed, the processing
cannot be stopped.
NOTE
When programs are written, flash ROM initialization
may consume some time. During initialization,
"INITIALIZING FLASH ROM." is displayed in the
STATUS display field.
- 737 -
7.4.30 Inputting Message Data for Multi-Language Display from the

Flash ROM
Message data for multi-language display can be inputted from the

flash ROM to a PMC. To use this function, perform the operation
NOTE
language display input. For details, see Section
6.2.
Query Setting
PMC (Input target PMC)
DEVICE FLASH ROM
FUNCTION READ
For the setting of an input target PMC, see Subsection 7.4.4.
(2) Press the [EXEC] soft key to input message data for multi-
language display.
When reading from the flash ROM is performed, the processing
cannot be stopped.
If the reading of message data for multi-language display is
continued, the ladder program being executed is automatically
stopped.
- 738 -
WARNING
1 If a message data for multi-language display is read
while ladder program is being executed, the ladder
Take special care when stopping a ladder program.
If a ladder program is stopped at an inadequate
timing or in an inadequate machine state, the
machine can make an unexpected movement.
Moreover, when a ladder program is stopped, the
safety feature and monitoring based on the ladder
program do not function. Before stopping a ladder
program, make sure that the machine state is
normal and that there is no person near the
machine.
- 739 -
7.4.31 Comparing Message Data for Multi-Language Display

with Flash ROM Files
A message data for multi-language display comparison can be made

between the PMC and flash ROM. To use this function, perform the
operation described below on the I/O screen.
NOTE
the operation condition allows message data for
multi-language display output. For details, see
Section 6.2.
Query Setting
PMC (Compare target PMC)
DEVICE FLASH ROM
FUNCTION COMPARE
For the setting of a compare target PMC, see Subsection 7.4.4.
(2) Press the [EXEC] soft key to execute a message data for multi-
language display comparison.
When a message data for multi-language display camparison
with the flash ROM is performed, the processing cannot be
stopped.
- 740 -
7.4.32 Deleting Memory Card Files or Formatting a Memory Card
A file on a memory card can be deleted, or a memory card can be

formatted. To use this function, perform the operation described
Deleting memory card files

Query Setting
DEVICE MEMORY CARD
FUNCTION DELETE
(2) Specify a file to be deleted, by performing the following

operations:
· Move the query selection cursor to FILE NO., then key in the
number of a file to be deleted. At this time, the FILE NAME
number.
the name of the file to be deleted.
· Switch the screen display to the list screen, then select the file
to be deleted.
NOTE
(3) Press the [EXEC] soft key to delete the file.

NOTE
No files can be deleted from a flash memory card.
- 741 -
Formatting a memory card

Query Setting
DEVICE MEMORY CARD
FUNCTION FORMAT
(2) Press the [EXEC] soft key to format the memory card.
NOTE
When the formatting of a memory card is executed
with FORMAT selected, all data of the memory card
is lost. Be careful when formatting a memory card.
7.4.1.
NOTE
- 742 -
7.4.33 Deleting One or All FLOPPY Files
A specified file or all files on a Floppy Cassette or Handy File

connected via RS-232C can be deleted. To use this function, perform
the operation described below on the I/O screen. To set the
the [PORT SETING] soft key. For details of the port setting screen,
Deleting a specified file on the FLOPPY
Query Setting
DEVICE FLOPPY
FUNCTION DELETE
(2) Specify a file to be deleted, by performing the following

operations:
· Move the query selection cursor to FILE NO., then key in the
number of a file to be deleted. At this time, the FILE NAME
number.
the name of the file to be deleted.
· Switch the screen display to the list screen, then select the file
to be deleted.
NOTE
(3) Press the [EXEC] soft key to delete the file.

- 743 -
Deleting all files on the FLOPPY
Query Setting
DEVICE FLOPPY
FUNCTION DELETE ALL
(2) Press the [EXEC] soft key to delete all files.

NOTE
The following Floppy Cassette does not support the
operation of FORMAT:
FLOPPY CASSETTE ADAPTER A13B-0131-B001
- 744 -
7.5 DISPLAYING I/O LINK CONNECTION STATUS ([I/O LINK]

SCREEN)
I/O LINK MONITOR screen shows the types and the ID codes of I/O
Units that are connected to I/O Link in order of Group number.
To switch the screen display to the I/O LINK MONITOR screen,
press the [I/O LINK] soft key.
Channel number
I/O Unit type
Group number I/O Unit ID code
Table 7.5 Displayed type and true type of I/O Units

Displayed I/O Unit ID True I/O Unit
CONNECTION UNIT 80 Connection Unit
OPERATOR PANEL 82 Connection Unit for Operators
Panel
I/O-B3 83 I/O B3
IO UNIT-MODEL A 84 I/O Unit-MODEL A
86
87
PLC SERIES 90-30 45 PLC SERIES 90-30
POWER MATE / I/O LINK BETA 4A Power Mate or I/O Link Beta
SERIES 0 50 Series 0
OPERATOR I/F BOARD (MPG1) 53 Machine Operators Panel
Interface
LINK CONNECTION UNIT 96 I/O Link Connecting Unit
I/O UNIT-MODEL B 9E I/O Unit-MODEL B
R-J MATE 61 R-J Mate
CONNECTOR PANEL MODULE A9 I/O module for connector panel
- 745 -
Table 7.5 Displayed type and true type of I/O Units

Displayed I/O Unit ID True I/O Unit
OPERATOR PANEL A1 AA I/O module for operator's panel
OPERATOR I/F BOARD (MPG3) 6B Operator Interface(with MPG)
LOADER I/O AF I/O Board for Loader
FRC DIF B0 DIF Board for ROBOCUT
FRC MIF B1 MIF Board for ROBOCUT
I/O CARD B2 I/O board
ROBOSHOT I/O CARD A B3 I/O for ROBOSHOT
LOADER I/O (MATRIX) B4 I/O Board for Loader(Matrix)
PROCESS I/O FA B5 Process I/O for robot controller
PROCESS IO 89 Process I/O for robot controller
I/O LINK ADAPTER 8B I/O Link adapter
ROBOT CONTROLLER 52 Controller for robot
GE Fanuc PLC 54 GE Fanuc PLC
OPERATOR PANEL 95 I/O for Series 0
LASER OSCILLATOR 97 Laser Oscillator
FIXED I/O TYPE A 98 I/O for Robot Type A
FIXED I/O TYPE B 99 I/O for Robot Type B
AS-I CONVERTER 77 AS-i Converter
OPERATOR PANEL B A8 I/O Module(for Operator Panel
48/32)
MACHINE OPERATOR PANEL A A8 I/O Module(for Machine Operator
Panel of 0 Type)
CONNECTION UNIT C1 (MPG) A8 Connection Unit C1(with MPG)
MACHINE OPERATOR PANEL B A8 I/O Module (for Machine Operator
Panel)
I/O MODULE WITH LCD A8 LCD display embedded I/O
UNKNOWN UNIT - Unknown I/O Unit
CAUTION
1 IDs other than those for the I/O units listed in Table
7.5 represent undefined units.
2 I/O Units not for this CNC system are also written in
Table 7.5.
Soft keys
Displays connection status of the Displays connection status of

previous channel the next channel
- 746 -
7.6 TRACING AND DISPLAYING PMC SIGNAL STATUS
After setting a signal sampling condition on the trace parameter

setting screen, PMC signal transitions can be traced on the SIGNAL
TRACE screen by executing the trace function.
To switch the screen display to the SIGNAL TRACE screen, press the
[TRACE] soft key.
To switch the screen display to the trace parameter setting screen,
press the [TRACE SETING] soft key.
With the multi-PMC system, the signals of all PMCs can be traced
simultaneously.
- 747 -
7.6.1 Signal Trace Function ([TRACE] Screen)
SIGNAL TRACE screen (initial screen)
Before trace operation can be executed, the trace parameters must be

set. Press the [TRACE SETING] soft key to switch the screen display
to the trace parameter setting screen.
By setting the PMC setting screen, the trace function can be
automatically started after the power is turned on. In this case as well,
the trace parameters must be set beforehand.
NOTE
For the setting to automatically start the trace
function after the power is turned on, see
Subsection 7.6.5.
- 748 -
7.6.2 Setting of Trace Parameter ([TRACE SETING] Screen)
On the trace parameter setting screen, a sampling condition can be set.

The screen consists of two pages. Use the page keys to switch
between the pages.
Trace parameter setting screen (first page)
(a) SAMPLING/ MODE

Determines the sampling mode.
· TIME CYCLE: Samples at every specified cycle
time.
· SIGNAL TRANSITION: Monitors the signal at a set cycle
and samples when the signal
makes a transition.
(b) SAMPLING/ RESOLUTION
The resolution of sampling is inputted. The default value is the
minimum sampling resolution (msec), which varies depending on
the CNC.
Setting range: Minimum sampling resolution to 1000 (msec)
An input value is rounded off to a multiple of the minimum
sampling resolution (msec) which is closest to but not greater
than the input value.
(c) SAMPLING/ TIME
This parameter is displayed when "TIME CYCLE" is set on
"SAMPLING/ MODE". The execution time of trace is inputted.
The value of "SAMPLING/ RESOLUTION" or the number of
specified signal address changes the range of the value that is
able to input. The range is displayed on the right side.
- 749 -
(d) SAMPLING/ FRAME

This parameter is displayed when "SIGNAL TRANSITION" is
set on SAMPLING/ MODE". The number of sampling is
inputted. The value of "SAMPLING/ RESOLUTION" or the
number of specified signal addresses changes the range of the
value that is able to input. The range is displayed on the right
side.
(e) STOP CONDITION
Determines the condition to stop the trace.
· NONE: Does not stop the tracing automatically.
· BUFFER FULL: Stops the tracing when the buffer becomes
full.
· TRIGGER: Stops the tracing by trigger.
(f) STOP CONDITION/ TRIGGER/ ADDRESS
When "TRIGGER" is set on "STOP CONDITION", this
parameter is enabled. Input signal address or symbol name as
stop trigger.
A PMC number can be set for a trigger address by entering the
PMC number at the time of address setting.
Example: 2:R9200.1 + Input key
A setting can be made by entering "PMC number" + ":" +
"address" as indicated above.
NOTE
1 For the PMC numbers, see Section 1.5.
2 If there is not “:” key in your keybord, use “;” or “/”.
(g) STOP CONDITION/ TRIGGER/ MODE

parameter is enabled. Determine the trigger mode when the trace
is stopped.
· RISING EDGE: Stops the tracing automatically by rising
up of the trigger signal.
· FALLING EDGE: Stops the tracing automatically by falling
down of the trigger signal.
· BOTH EDGE: Stops the tracing automatically by rising
up or falling down of the trigger signal.
- 750 -
h) STOP CONDITION/ TRIGGER/ POSITION

parameter is enabled. Input the ratio of the sampling time or
number which specifies the position where specified trigger
condition is on. If you would like to examine the transitions of
the signal before the trigger condition, you should set a big value
in this parameter. If you would like to examine the transitions of
the signal after the trigger condition, you should set a small value
in this parameter.
Example: The case that sampling time is 10 seconds and trigger
position is set as "10%".
Trigger position
¬ 1 sec ®¬ 9 sec ®
(i) SAMPLING CONDITION

When "SIGNAL TRANSITION" is set on "TRACE MODE",
this parameter is enabled.
Determine the sampling condition.
· TRIGGER: Samples the status of specified signals
when the specified sampling condition is
on.
· ANY CHANGE: Samples the status of specified signals
when the signals change.
(j) SAMPLING CONDITION/ TRIGGER/ ADDRESS
and "TRIGGER" is set on "SAMPLING CONDITION", this
parameter is enabled. Input signal address or symbol name as
sampling trigger.
A PMC number can be set for a trigger address by entering the
PMC number at the time of address setting.
NOTE
- 751 -
(k) SAMPLING CONDITION/ TRIGGER/ MODE

and "TRIGGER" is set on "SAMPLING CONDITION", this
parameter is enabled. Input trigger mode that determines the
condition of specified trigger.
· RISING EDGE: Samples the status of specified signals by
rising up of the trigger signal.
· FALLING EDGE: Samples the status of specified signals by
falling down of the trigger signal.
· BOTH EDGE: Samples the status of specified signals by
rising up or falling down of the trigger
signal.
· ON: Samples the status of specified signals
during the trigger signal is on.
· OFF: Samples the status of specified signals
during the trigger signal is off.
- 752 -
In page 2 of the PARAMETER SETTING screen, you can set the

addresses or symbols that should be sampled.
Trace parameter setting screen (second page)
a) Setting addresses
In case of inputting discrete bit addresses, any bit address can be
inputted.
Moreover, when you input byte address, all bits of the address
(bits 0 to 7) are set automatically. Maximum 32 points of signal
address can be inputted.
With the multi-PMC system, an address can be set for a desired
PMC by specifying its PMC number.
When no PMC number is specified, the specification of the
currently selected PMC is assumed. In this case, "PMC number"
+ ":" is automatically prefixed to a specified address.
When only one PMC is used as in the standard PMC system, no
PMC number needs to be specified.
- 753 -
NOTE
3 The signals of the PMC for dual check safety
cannot be traced.
4 Increasing the number of the signal address
changes the capacity of "SAMPLING/ TIME" or
"SAMPLING/ FRAME" in page 1. If the capacity is
changed, the following warning message is
displayed. (The "n" on the message means the
maximum value that is able to input.)
a) In case of "TIME CYCLE" mode
"SAMPLING TIME IS REDUCED TO n SEC."
b) In case of "SIGNAL TRANSITION" mode
"SAMPLING FRAME IS REDUCED TO n."
b) Soft keys
Soft keys on the setting screen of sampling address are as follows
· DELETE: Clears the value of the edit box on the
cursor.
· SYMBOL/ Changes the address display to the symbol
ADDRESS: display. However, display of the address
that is not defined the symbol does not
change. This soft key also changes to
"ADDRESS". The following soft keys are
displayed.
· MOVE UP: Exchanges the signal indicated the cursor
for the signal above one line.
· MOVE DOWN: Exchanges the signal indicated the cursor
for the signal below one line.
· DELETE ALL: Clears all of the value of the edit box.
c) Trigger setting
When "SIGNAL TRANSITION" is set on "TRACE MODE" and
"ANY CHANGE" is set on "SAMPLING CONDITION", it can
be set whether to use the setting address as the signals that should
trigger the sampling in the setting signals. As for the signal
address where the trigger was set, "ü" is displayed right. Soft
keys on the Trigger setting screen are as follows:
· TRGON: Sets the Trigger on.
· TRGOFF: Sets the Trigger off.
The default setting is trigger on for all signals.
- 754 -
7.6.3 Execution of Trace
After the trace parameters are set, a trace operation can be started by
pressing the [(OPRT)] soft key and the [RUN] soft key on the
SIGNAL TRACE screen. The following is the screen examples of the
trace execution by "TIME CYCLE" mode and "SIGNAL
TRANSITION" mode.
Execution of trace screen (TIME CYCLE mode)
Execution of trace screen (SIGNAL TRANSITION mode)
- 755 -
The result of trace is immediately displayed during execution of the

trace.
When the stop conditions that is set in parameter setting screen is
satisfied the execution is finished. Pushing [STOP] soft key aborts the
execution. In "SIGNAL TRANSITION" mode, graphic display is not
refreshed until any signal for sampling trigger changes.
- 756 -
7.6.4 Operation after Execution of Trace
When the execution is finished, the result of trace is displayed. The

followings are the screen examples of trace by "TIME CYCLE" and
"SIGNAL TRANSITION" mode.
Result of trace screen (TIME CYCLE mode)
Result of trace screen (SIGNAL TRANSITION mode)
- 757 -
The cursor indicating current position is initially displayed on the

original point (0 point). The position of the cursor is displayed in
"CURSOR POSITION" in the upper of the screen. The cursor can
move horizontally with the <¬> or <®> key. After the execution,
following operation is enabled.
a) Scroll of screen
- Cursor up/down key and Page up/down key
Enables the vertical scroll for the specified signal
- Cursor right/left key, [NEXT>>] soft key and [<< PREV] soft
key
Enables the horizontal scroll of the graph.
b) Automatic calculation of the selected range
Pushing [MARK] soft key marks the current position and
displays the mark cursor.
If the mark cursor duplicates with the current position cursor, the
current position cursor has priority of display. The "MARK
POSITION" that shows the position of the mark cursor and
"RANGE" that shows the range between the mark cursor and the
current position cursor are displayed in the upper of screen.
Moving the current position cursor changes these values. Pushing
[MARK] again releases the select range mode.
Result of trace screen (Mark cursor display)
- 758 -
c) Zoom in/Zoom out of waveform

Pushing [ZOOM IN] soft key magnifies the display of chart.
Pushing [ZOOM OUT] soft key reduces the display of chart.
Pushing these soft keys also change the scale value of the
graduation on the graph. When trace is just finished, the default
zooming level was the most magnified level. In [ZOOM OUT]
mode, "X" is displayed as following screen example when the
transitions of signal cannot be expressed accurately enough. The
limitation of [ZOOM OUT] displays all of result of the trace in
one page.
Result of trace screen (Zoom out display)
d) Exchange of sampling signal

Pushing [MOVE UP] soft key exchanges the signal indicated by
the signal cursor for the signal one line above. Pushing [MOVE
DOWN] soft key exchanges the signal indicated by the signal
cursor for the signal one line below. The result of the operation is
cancelled by the execution of trace or putting the power off.
When you would like to preserve the order of displayed signals
against the executing or powering off, please change the order on
"SAMPLING ADDRESS" screen.
- 759 -
7.6.5 Automatic Start of Trace Setting
Trace execution is automatically started after power-on by setting a

PMC setting data.
· TRACE START = MANUAL/AUTO
NOTE
For details of the method of setting PMC setting
data, see Section 9.5.
- 760 -
7.6.6 Trace Result Output
If trace result data is present when a trace operation has been executed,
the data can be output to the memory card. Output trace result data
can be input to application software such as spreadsheet software run
on the personal computer. For the method of input, refer to the
relevant manual of application software.
(1) Operation
Press the [PUNCH] soft key. The soft key display changes to
[EXEC] and [CANCEL]. Press the [EXEC] soft key to start
output. Upon completion of output, the soft key display returns
to the initial status on the signal trace result screen.
(2) File name

The name of an output file is PMCTRACE.000. If a file with the
same name exists on the memory card, the extension is
incremented to PMCTRACE.001, PMCTRACE.002, and so on
(up to PMCTRACE.999).
(3) Output format

Trace result data is output in the text format. Character string
data items such as item names and setting names are enclosed in
quotation marks (').
Output data is divided into four major blocks: a header, data of
the first parameter setting page, data of the second parameter
setting page, and trace result data.
(a) Header
At the start of data, an identifier representing the type of
data and edition information are output.
Identifier: ('PMC TRACE DATA')
Edition information: ('Edition', 1)
(b) Data of the first parameter setting page

identifier, , ,
setting-number, setting-item-name, setting, setting-character-string
:
:
· identifier Character string data

The character string 'Setting' is output.
- 761 -
· setting-number Numeric data

The numbers (starting with 1) assigned to setting items
in ascending order are output.
· setting-item-name Character string data

The character string of each setting item is output.
· setting Numeric data

A value that is originally numeric, such as a resolution
value, is directly output. Numbers (starting with 1) are
assigned from left to right to options from which a
choice is to be made, such as TIME CYCLE/SIGNAL
TRANSITION, and the number assigned to a selected
option is output.
· setting-character-string Character string data

For a setting that is numeric data, its unit, if used, is
output.
For an option that is converted to a number in the item of
"setting" mentioned above, the original character string
data is output. In other cases, a blank is output in this
column.
Table of data of the first parameter setting page

Item Setting Setting item name Setting Setting character string
number
1 'TIME CYCLE'
Sampling mode 1 'Sampling mode'
2 'SIGNAL TRANSITION'
Sampling resolution 2 'Sampling resolution' Numeric value 'MSEC'
Sampling time 'Sampling time'
3 Numeric value 'SEC'
Sampling frame 'Sampling frame'
1 'NONE'
Stop condition 4 'Stop condition' 2 'BUFFER FULL'
3 'TRIGGER'
Stop trigger address 5 'Stop trigger address' Address Symbol
1 'RISING EDGE'
Stop trigger mode 6 'Stop trigger mode' 2 'FALLING EDGE'
3 'BOTH EDGE'
Stop position 7 'Stop trigger position' Numeric value %
1 'TRIGGER'
Sampling condition 8 'Sampling condition'
2 'ANY CHANGE'
Sampling trigger address 9 'Sampling trigger address' Address Symbol
1 'RISING EDGE'
Sampling trigger mode 10 'Sampling trigger mode' 2 'FALLING EDGE'
3 'BOTH EDGE'
- 762 -
NOTE
1 For a setting item that is invalidated in combination
with another setting, only a setting number and
setting item name are output, with a blank output in
the setting column and the setting character string
column. (However, commas are not omitted.)
2 For an item name that changes according to the
setting of another item, the item name displayed
according to the setting is displayed. (Example:
Sampling time/Sampling frame dependent on the
selection of a Sampling mode option)
3 For a sampling stop trigger address and sampling
trigger address, an address is output in the setting
column, and a symbol is output in the setting
character string column. When no symbol is set, an
address is output in the setting character string
column as well.
4 For a sampling stop trigger position, (successful
trigger position/sampling frame count) is output
after "%". (This is because a frame position is
internally held, so that an error can occur at the
time of conversion to a percentage value.)
(c) Data of the second parameter setting page

identifier-1, data-1, data-2, data-3, . . . . .

'Address': Sampling address
'Symbol': Symbol defined for a sampling address
'Comment': Comment defined for a sampling address
'Check': Indicates whether a check is made to see if
each signal is used to trigger sampling when
SAMPLING CONDITION = ANY
CHANGE.
· data
'Address': Address character string
'Symbol': Symbol character string
'Comment': Comment character string
'Check': With check = 1/without check = 0
- 763 -
NOTE
1 Data is not output beyond set sampling addresses.
This means that no blank is output in the item of
'Address'.
2 For an address for which no symbol or no comment
is set, no data is output, but a blank is output in the
column. Commas are not omitted but are output for
up to set sampling addresses.
(d) Trace result data

identifier, sampling-address-1, sampling-address-2, . . . . .
frame-count, data-1, data-2, data-3. . . . .
:
:
:

The character string 'Data' is output.
· frame-count Numeric value
The position where the frame count is 0 is a position
where triggering is performed successfully. If triggering
is unsuccessful, the frame count is 0 at the point where
sampling stopped.
· data Numeric data
The value 0 or 1 is output.
It is assumed that data is output until an EOF (end of
file) appears. Information such as data size is not set.
- 764 -
(4) Example of trace result output (For view comfort, tab settings are
made in several places. In actual data output, however, no tab
settings are made.)
‘PMC TRACE DATA’

‘Edition’, 1
‘Setting’, , ,
1,‘Sampling mode’, 2, ‘SIGNAL TRANSITION’
2,‘Sampling resolution’, 8, ‘MSEC’
3,‘Sampling time’, 2000,
4,‘Stop condition’, 3, ‘TRIGGER’
5,‘Stop trigger address’, ‘X10.0’, ‘SYMBOL1’
6,‘Stop trigger mode’, 1, ‘RISING EDGE’
NOTE 7,‘Stop trigger position’, 50(1250/2500), ‘%’
8,‘Sampling condition’, 1, ‘TRIGGER’
9,‘Sampling trigger address’, ‘X10.1’, ‘SYMBOL2’
10,‘Sampling trigger mode’, 3, ‘BOTH EDGE’
‘Address’,‘R0000.0’, ‘R0000.1’, ‘R0000.2’, ‘R0000.3’, ‘R0000.4’, ‘R0000.5’,

‘R0000.6’, ‘R0000.7’, ‘R0001.0’, R0002.0’
‘Symbol’, ‘ZRN_M’ , , , ‘*SPA1’ , ‘*SPA2’, ‘MX-RD’,‘RSTN’, ‘RSTMA’,
‘MO1X’, ‘MO2X’
‘Comment’, ‘ZRN MODE’, ’TIME CNT.AUX1(MEM)’ , , , , ‘READ
STROBE’, ‘NORMAL RESET PB’, ‘INIT_M&RSTM (RST->MACRO)’,
‘OPTIONAL STOP1’,’OPTIONAL STOP2’
‘Check’, 0, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 0, 1, 1, 1
‘Data’,‘R0000.0’, ‘R0000.1’, ‘R0000.2’, ‘R0000.3’, ‘R0000.4’, ‘R0000.5’,

‘R0000.6’, ‘R0000.7’, ‘R0001.0’, ‘R0002.0’
-6, 1,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0
-5, 0,0,0,0,0,1,1,1,1,1
-4, 1,1,1,1,1,0,0,0,0,0
-3, 0,1,0,1,0,1,0,1,0,1
-2, 0,0,1,1,0,0,1,1,0,0
-1, 1,1,0,0,0,0,1,1,1,1
0, 1,1,1,1,1,1,1,1,1,1
1, 0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0
2, 1,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0
3, 0,0,0,0,0,1,1,1,1,1
4, 1,1,1,1,1,0,0,0,0,0
NOTE
With the multi-PMC system, this data is output in
the format: "PMC number" + ":" + "address".
Example: '2:R0000.0'
- 765 -
7.7 I/O DIAGNOSIS SCREEN
The I/O diagnosis screen shows the status of I/O variables, which are
extracted from symbol data, and configuration of network and the
status of communication of I/O modules. The following items are
listed in this screen:
· The symbol and comment of the variable

· The status of the variable
· The address of the variable
· The type of I/O network device
· The type of I/O module of the network device
· The network address information of the network device
· The communication status of the network device
NOTE
Supported types of I/O network device are
PROFIBUS and I/O LINK.
There are two screens related to I/O diagnosis function.
1 The I/O diagnosis screen

The I/O variables are listed in this screen. You can check the
configuration of the I/O network devices and the status of the
communication with them.
You can select three ways of ordering the list by softkeys:
· Address order (Default)

The variables are displayed in the order of their actual
addresses.
· Symbol order
The variables are displayed in the alphabetical order of their
symbols.
· Network order
The variables are displayed in the order of their network
addresses. Only the variables actually associated with an
I/O network appear in this mode.
NOTE
“Symbol order” is available only in case of the
sequence program with extended symbol and
comment.
2 The setting screen

You can configure the I/O diagnosis screen at the setting screen
- 766 -
7.7.1 MONITORING I/O DIAGNOSIS ([I/O DGN] SCREEN)
In I/O Diagnosis screen, you can check the status of each I/O variable.
You can also check the configuration of I/O devices and the
communication status with them.
Listing order
GRP (GROUP)
To include a specific string which means a kind of signals in a part of
symbol string, these signals on I/O diagnosis screen are classified and
you can easy to understand the status of signals.
The group names of the I/O variables are displayed, which are
extracted (Max. 4 chars) out of their symbol names as configured in
“GROUP FORMAT” in the setting screen.
The groups to be displayed can be specified by soft key.
[ALL GROUPS] All groups are displayed.
[GROUP] The group entered by key or the group under the
cursor is selected to be displayed.
PROG.SYMBOL (SYMBOL)
The symbol names of the I/O variables are displayed.
If you set “SHOW PROGRAM” to “SYMBOL”or “PROGRAM NO.”
in the setting screen of I/O diagnosis, the symbol names are displayed
in the form of “PROG.SYMBOL”.
- 767 -
If you set “SHOW PROGRAM” to “NONE” in the setting screen,

each symbol is displayed alone.
NOTE
For details of the display form of the symbol, see to
the description of “SHOW PROGRAM” in Section
4.2
ADDRESS
The actual locations of I/O variables are displayed.
VALUE
The current values of I/O variables are displayed as signed decimal,
according to the data type of them (i.e. BOOL, BYTE, WORD, and
DWORD). If the data type is BOOL, “ON” or “OFF” is also
displayed as follows.
I/O INFORMATION
The information related to I/O network is displayed in the display
format below:
<I/O type><Network type> : <Network address> : <status>
I/O type:
Module type Shown as
Input module I
Output module O
Other *
Network type:
Network type Shown as
PROFIBUS P
I/O LINK Ln (n: channel number)
Network address:
Network type Network address notation
PROFIBUS <Slave #>.<Slot #>
I/O LINK <Group #>.<Base #>.<Slot #>
- 768 -
NOTE
This screen shows the I/O information according to
the network setting that became effective at the
time of the last power-on.
The notes for each network device are as follows:
PROFIBUS
1. If you have changed some of the profibus
parameters, you have to cycle the power once to
make the changes take effect.
I/O LINK
1. Only the I/O Link assingments, which are made
effective by the setting of “Machine Signal Interface”
in Configuration Parameter menu and the setting of
“Selectable I/O Link Assignment Function”, are
displayed.
2. If you have changed the following parameters, you
have to cycle the power once to make them take
effect:
· “I/O module assignment data”
· “Machine signal interface” in PMC configuration
parameter
· “Selectable I/O Link assignment function”
3. If you have stored new sequence program to PMC,
its I/O Link assignment data will not take effect until
you write it into Flash-ROM and cycle the power
once.
Status: the status of communication

“OK” or “NG” is displayed.
REMARK
The remarks up to 8 characters extracted from comment data are
displayed. To specify the remark at this field, set “100” to the
attribute value of the comment, which you want to show in this field,
on FANUC LADDER-III,
- 769 -
Additional information window

In this window, symbol and comment of the I/O variable under the
cursor are displayed. When language dependent comment attributes
are specified, corresponding comment is displayed according to the
current language setting of the CNC.
In FANUC LADDER-III, the attribute value of comment should be
set to 0 to 15 to display language dependent comment
Attribute value: 0 to 15
0: English 8: Dutch
1: Japanese 9: Danish
2: German 10: Portuguese
3: French 11: Polish
4: Chinese (Traditional) 12: Hungarian
5: Italian 13: Swedish
6: Korean 14: Czech
7: Spanish 15: Chinese (Simplified)
NOTE
In case of the extended symbol and comment, the
comments on the screen will be switched
dynamically another language when the language
setting of CNC changes.
- 770 -
Screen operations
Softkeys on the I/O Diagnosis screen
Search for data Switch to the address order display Switch to the specified group display
Switch to the address order display Switch PMC path Screen settings
Switch to the address order display Switch to the all group display
Operations using soft keys

(1) [SEARCH] Search symbol or address
Pressing [SEARCH] soft key after a string searches the string in
the symbols and addresses, and shows a symbol or an address
that contains the string if found.
The search is performed toward bottom of the list. When it
reaches the bottom of the list, it goes back to the top and
continues.
Pressing [SEARCH] alone repeats the last search.
When the search hits, the part of the searched string is
highlighted by light blue background in the Additional
Information window.
Example: Case of searching “MESS” to hit the symbol

“OPMESS-20”.
- 771 -
NOTE
1 When arrived back to the starting position where
the first search operation hit by repeated search of
the same entry, the message “REACHED TO THE
END OF SYMBOL DATA.” appears.
2 If the setting “SHOW PROGRAM” is set to
“SYMBOL” or “PROGRAM NO.”, the symbol name
is displayed in one of forms below:
<Program Symbol>.<Signal Symbol>
<Program Number>.<Signal Symbol>
In this case, search function will not hit in “Program
Symbol” nor “Program Number”.
3 On a symbol screen in network order a searching
word is performed in address order. When you
search a part string and some word are hit, the
searched position (cursor position) may move to
unexpected direction.
(2) [ADRS ORDER] Sort by address order

Displays I/O variables in address order. (Default)
In this mode, the mark “(ADDRESS)” is appended in the title of
this screen, and the [ADRS ORDER] soft key is highlighted with
yellow background.
(3) [SYMBOL ORDER] Sort by symbol order

Displays I/O variables in symbol order.
In this mode, the mark “(SYMBOL)” is appended in the title of
this screen, and the [SYMBOL ORDER] soft key is highlighted
with yellow background.
NOTE
“Symbol order” is available only in case of the
sequence program with extended symbol and
comment.
- 772 -
(4) [NETWRK ORDER] Sort by network address order

Displays I/O variables in order of network address.
Only the I/O variables that is actually effective are displayed.
In this mode, the mark “(NETWORK)” is appended in the title of
this screen, and the [NETWRK ORDER] soft key is highlighted
with yellow background.
The I/O variables are sorted by its network address. The sorting
order is not affected by the type of modules such as input or
output. The order is determined according only to priority of
network address portion as following:
PROFIBUS : Slave Number, Slot Number

I/O LINK : Channel, Group, Base, Slot
NOTE
If while sorting the I/O variables in “Network order”
mode, the following messages may appear:
SORTING DATA [PROFIBUS : n SLAVE]
SORTING DATA [I/O LINK : n CH m GROUP]
(5) [GROUP] Filter by group

Choose a group to which the I/O variables to be displayed belong.
Press this soft key following the group name, or press it alone
with the cursor placed on the group you want to specify.
The way to order the I/O variables will not change.
If the setting “GROUP FORMAT” is not specified, the soft key
[GROUP] and [ALL GROUPS] are not effective.
NOTE
If while extracting the I/O variables of specific group, the
following messages may appear:
SELECTING GROUP [PROFIBUS : n SLAVE]
SELECTING GROUP [I/O LINK : n CH m GROUP]
(6) [ALL GROUPS] Cancel group filter

Displays I/O variables of any group. (Default)
If the setting “GROUP FORMAT” is not specified, the soft key
[GROUP] and [ALL GROUPS] are not effective.
- 773 -
(7) [SWITCH PMC] Switches PMC path.

Change the PMC path of which the I/O variables are to be shown.
In “Network order” mode, this soft key is not displayed because
the network addresses do not depend on PMC path.
Unless the system has multi-path PMC, this soft key is not
effective.
(1) [SETING] Configure the setting of this screen

Goes to the setting screen of I/O diagnosis.
Screen operation using other keys

(1) Cursor keys
Move cursor to change the I/O variable, whose information is
displayed in Additional information window, or to which the
forcing function is performed. They scroll up and down the
contents of the screen if necessary.
(2) Page keys

Scroll up or down the contents of the screen by page.
(3) Input key

If the forcing function is available, you can change the status of
I/O variables by Input key.
(a) Changing a bit signal
· “1” + Input key to turn on the signal.
· “0” + Input key to turn off the signal.
· Press Input key alone to toggle the signal
(b) Changing a byte, word, dword variable
Press Input key following signed decimal
If the setting item “FORCING ENABLE” is set to “YES” in the

setting screen, you can change the value of I/O variables as
described above.
The mark “FORCING” at the right end of the screen title
indicates the forcing function is enabled.
- 774 -
WARNING
1 You have to pay special attention to use Forced I/O
function to change status of signals. Inappropriate use of
Forced I/O function may cause unexpected reaction of
machine. You have to make it sure that nobody is near
the machine when you use this function.
2 As you use Forcing mode of Forced I/O function to
change status of signal, however, the signal may look
proof against Forced I/O function, because LADDER
program or I/O device writes into the signal repeatedly. In
this case, even if the signal looks unchanged, actual
signal may be changed in very short moment. You
should be careful for the reaction of machine to such
signal changes.
- 775 -
7.7.2 SETTING SCREEN OF I/O DIAGNOSIS
In “I/O DIAGNOSIS (SETTING)” screen, you can change the setting

to configure the I/O diagnosis screen
Fig. 7.7.2(a) Setting screen of the I/O diagnosis

(for extended symbol and comment)
Fig.7.7.2 (b) Setting screen of the I/O diagnosis

(for former symbol and comment)
- 776 -
GROUP FORMAT
The group names shown in I/O Diagnosis screen are strings extracted
from their symbol names according to this parameter.
· DELIMITER
Sets the character of delimiter for extraction. Every appearance
of this character in a symbol string cut the symbol into “fields”.
NOTE
If no character is given, the group feature of I/O
Diagnosis screen is disabled.
In this case, the field number has no effect.
· FIELD NUMBER
Sets the field number, which indicates the field to be a group
name. If this number is 1, the first field, which means the portion
of each symbol name from the first character to the character just
before the first appearance of the delimiter character,
NOTE
If 0 is set, the group feature of I/O Diagnosis
screen is disabled.
In this case, the delimiter has no effect.
Example: Case of “_” as delimiter, and group name at 2nd field

The symbol = I_AL_NC_WATCH_DOG_SIGNAL
DELIMITER = ‘_’
FIELD NUMBER = 2
As a result, “AL” is extracted as its group name
FORCING ENABLE
Enables or disables the forcing function.
WARNING
function to change status of signals. Inappropriate use of
Forced I/O function may cause unexpected reaction of
machine. You have to make it sure that nobody is near
the machine when you use this function.
change status of signal, however, the signal may look
proof against Forced I/O function, because LADDER
program or I/O device writes into the signal repeatedly. In
this case, even if the signal looks unchanged, actual
signal may be changed in very short moment. You
should be careful for the reaction of machine to such
signal changes.
- 777 -
NOTE
If the Forced I/O function is protected by the programmer
protection function, this setting is not effective.
The Forced I/O function will be protected in the condition
as follows.
In case of Programmer Protection Function

and
· RAM WRITE ENABLE (K900.4) "NO"
In case of Protection of Data at 8 Levels

· Operation level is less than CHANGE level of “PMC
MEMORY”.
SHOW PROGRAM
Determines the form of symbol name in the I/O Diagnosis screen.
SYMBOL: Symbol names are displayed in the form below:
<Program Symbol>.<Signal Simbol>
If symbol name is too long for the symbol field of the
I/O Diagnosis screen, the tail of signal symbol is cut to
fit it.
PROGRAM NO.:Symbol names are displayed in the form below:
<Program Number>.<Signal Simbol>
If symbol name is too long for the symbol field of the
I/O Diagnosis screen, the tail of signal symbol is cut to
fit it.
NONE: Program symbol nor program number is not displayed.
NOTE
These setting data are kept in the nonvolatile memory
not to be lost even if the power is turned off.
- 778 -
Screen operations
Softkeys on the I/O Diagnosis screen
Copy each itmes to all PMC path
Goes to I/O Diagnosis screen Initializes each items
(1) [EXIT]
Goes to the I/O Diagnosis screen.
(2) [SET ALLPMC] Copies settings to all PMC paths

Copies current settings to all other PMC paths.
(3) [INIT] Initializes settings

All the settings are initialized to their initial values as follows:
GROUP FORMAT: DELIMITER = none

FIELD NUMBER = 0
FORCING ENABLE: NO
SHOW PROGRAM: SYMBOL
- 779 -
8.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER]) B-63983EN/02
8 LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND

EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER])
The PMC LADDER menu contains the screens related to PMC
Ladder diagrams, such as the program list screen and the LADDER
DIAGRAM MONITOR/EDITOR screens.
You can switch to the PMC LADDER menu by operating on the
"SYSTEM" key and then the [PMC LADDER] soft key.
SYSTEM
PMC main menu

PMC LADDER menu
PMC LADDER LIST Program list screen
LADDER LADDER DIAGRAM

< MONITOR/EDITOR screen
Clicking the [LADDER] soft key causes the sequence program to be

dynamically displayed, allowing you to monitor operation. The editor
screen allows you to make changes to relay and functional instructions
in the sequence program to change the operation of the sequence
program.
The ladder diagram display/editor functions consist of the following
screens:
(1) Ladder diagram display screen (LADDER DIAGRAM
MONITOR screen)
Displays ladder diagrams to monitor the current states of relays,
coils, and so on.
(2) COLLECTIVE MONITOR screen
Displays selected ladder net to monitor the current states of
relays, coils, and so on.
(3) LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR screen
Allows you to edit ladder diagram in units of net.
(4) NET EDITOR screen
Allows you to edit single net in a ladder diagram.
(5) PROGRAM LIST VIEWER screen
Allows you to select the subprogram to be displayed on the
LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR screen.
- 780 -
B-63983EN/02 8.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER])
(6) PROGRAM LIST EDITOR screen

Allows you to edit a ladder program in units of subprograms.
Also allows you to select the subprogram to be edited on the
LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR screen.
The following screens can be called from the LADDER DIAGRAM
EDITOR screen:
(7) FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTION DATA TABLE VIEWER
screen
Allows you to view the contents of the data table for a data table
attached functional instruction.
(8) FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTION DATA TABLE EDITOR
screen
Allows you to edit the contents of the data table for a data table
attached functional instruction.
NOTE
You can protect these screens by using the
programmer protection function. For details, see
Section 6.2.
You can change between screens as shown in the figure below.
PMC main menu
[<] [PMC LADDER]

PMC LADDER menu
[<] [<]
[LADDER] [LIST]
[ZOOM]
LADDER DIAGRAM PROGRAM LIST
MONITOR screen VIEWER screen
[LIST]
Display function
(monitor)
[SWITCH] [LIST] [ZOOM]
[EXIT EDIT] [EDIT]
COLLECTIVE MONITOR screen
[ZOOM]
LADDER DIAGRAM PROGRAM LIST
Edit function EDITOR screen EDITOR screen
[LIST]
[EXIT] [CREATE NET] [ZOOM]
NET EDITOR screen
Fig. 8 Changes between screens
NOTE
The [EDIT] soft key on the LADDER DIAGRAM
MONITOR screen is displayed so that it is available if
the programmer protection function is enabled. For
- 781 -
8.1 DISPLAYING A PROGRAM LIST ([LIST] SCREEN)
The PROGRAM LIST VIEWER screen shows program information

such as the program size.
SP area
Size area
Ladder preview display area
Program number area
(1) Screen structures

(a) A program list is displayed on the left side of the screen; on
the right side, the ladder diagram of the program currently
indicated by the cursor on the program list is displayed.
(b) In the message line, error messages or inquiry messages will
be displayed depending on the situation.
(c) The program list displays up to 18 programs at a time in the
list display area.
- 782 -
(2) Area of program list

(a) In the "SP area", the protect information for subprograms is
displayed, so are their program types.
(Lock): Unable to browse and edit (Global
program)
(Magnifying glass): Ladder program which is able to
browse but unable to edit
(Pencil): Ladder program which is able to
browse and edit
(b) Program name is displayed in the "PROG NO." field for
each program.
There are three kinds of program names.
COLLECT: means the collective monitor screen.
GLOBAL: means the whole program.
LEVELn (n = 1, 2, 3): means the Ladder level 1, 2 and 3.
Pm (m = subprogram number):
means subprogram.
By changing the “ADDRESS NOTATION” item in the
LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR Setting screen to
“SYMBOL”, you can display symbols.
(c) The program size is displayed in the “SIZE” field for each
program.
If the program size is not over 1024 byte, the unit is shown
in byte.
If it is over 1024 byte, the unit is shown in kilo (1024) byte
with “K”.
Ex.) The case that program size is not over 1024 byte.
1023 bytes: “1023” is shown.
Ex.) The case that program size is over 1024 byte.
20000 bytes: “19K” is shown.
(Sizes are rounded off to whole
numbers before being displayed.)
- 783 -
(3) Operation with Soft keys
Soft key of PROGRAM LIST VIEWER screen

Switch PMC paths
Search for program
Display the contents

of program
(a) [ZOOM] Display the contents of program

Goes to LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR screen. If you
press [ZOOM] soft key without strings, the program under
the cursor is displayed at LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR
screen.
If you entered program name (See (a) in (5) for detail) or
symbol before pressing [ZOOM] soft key, the program
according to the preceding string is searched and the
program is displayed at LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR
screen.
But, when the selected program is protected to monitor, you
have to unlock the protection.
(b) [SEARCH] Search for program
Searches the program. If you entered program name (See (a)
in (5) for detail) or symbol and press [SEARCH] soft key,
the program according to the preceding string is searched,
the cursor points the program.
(c) [SWITCH PMC] Switch PMC paths
Switches PMC paths.
(4) Other operations

(a) Cursor move keys, Page change keys
You can move cursor by all cursor move keys and Page
change keys.
(b) INPUT key
You can operate same as [ZOOM] soft key.
- 784 -
(5) Note of searching and zooming operations

(a) When you specify a subprogram to search for, or to zoom
into, you can use following notation for each program part:
GLOBAL: “0”(Zero) or “G”
LEVEL1, 2, 3: “L” + Number Ex.) “L1”, “L01”, etc
Pn: Number or “P2 + Number
Ex.) “1”, “P1”, “P01”
(b) Search function by [SEARCH] soft key tries to suppose the
given word as an item to be searched in following order.
1. The string for GLOBAL or LEVEL: “0”(Zero), “G”,
“L” + Number
The number for subprogram: Number
2. Symbol
3. The string for subprogram: “P” + Number
(6) Ladder preview

The subprogram indicated by the cursor in the program list is
displayed in the ladder display area on the right of the screen.
If you wish to operate on the ladder diagram, you must switch to
the LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR screen by using the
[ZOOM] soft key from the program list.
- 785 -
8.1.1 Setting the Program List Screen
(1) Program list screen setting

To make settings on the program list screen, use the [SCREEN
SETING] soft key on the ladder screen.
Page 2 of the ladder setting screen contains the settings of the
program list screen.
(2) Setting items

· SORT PROGRAM LIST BY
Specifies whether to display each subprograms on Program
List display screen in order of program numbers or symbols.
When ADDRESS NOTATION is SYMBOL, programs
without symbols are displayed in order of program number
after programs with the symbols. COLLECT,GLOBAL,
LEVEL1, LEVEL2, LEVEL3 are out of target of sort.
PROGRAM NUMBER (default)
Program List display screen in order of program
numbers.
SYMBOL
Program List display screen in order of symbols.
· FRAME NET IN SUBPROGRAM MODE

Frame net means functional instruction END1, 2 and 3 on
LEVEL1, 2, 3, and functional instruction SP and SPE on
subprogram.
It determines whether the frame net in the LADDER
DIAGRAM MONITOR/EDITOR screen are displayed or
not, when you selected the program and press [ZOOM] soft
key in the PROGRAM LIST VIEWER/EDITOR screen.
- 786 -
SHOW (default)
The frame net is displayed in the LADDER
DIAGRAM MONITOR/EDITOR screen.
HIDE
The frame net is not displayed in the LADDER
DIAGRAM MONITOR/EDITOR screen.
- 787 -
8.2 MONITORING LADDER DIAGRAMS ([LADDER] SCREEN)
LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR screen shows the on/off status of

contacts and coils, and the contents of address specified for parameter
of functional instructions.
From the PMC LADDER menu, you can switch to the LADDER
DIAGRAM MONITOR screen by using the [LADDER] soft key.
You can use following operation at this screen, including "Forced I/O
function (Forcing mode)", by which you can force the relay or the
address parameters of functional instructions to a new status or value.
· Switch subprogram to show [LIST]
· Search for address or others [SEARCH MENU]
· Show data table of functional instructions [DATA TABLE]
· Go to COLLECTIVE MONITOR Screen [SWITCH]
· Forced I/O function (Forcing mode) "number" + INPUT key
Title information (REMARKS) Current subprogram
Area for LADDER Diagram
Key input line

Message line

(a) Title information (REMARKS) of the LADDER Program,
the current subprogram, and the current position
information of the Diagram displayed in this screen, are
displayed above the LADDER Diagram.
When you select a subprogram to be displayed, range for
search function is indicated at right of the top line as
"LOCAL" or "GLOBAL". In case of "LOCAL", the range
for search function is restricted within the current
subprogram. In case of "GLOBAL", on the other hand,
search function searches whole of LADDER program, and
switch current subprogram automatically according to the
result of searching.
- 788 -
(b) In the additional information line near the bottom of the

screen, the following information of the address under the
cursor when the cursor is shown.
· Net number of the net with the cursor
· Address and its symbol and comment information
· Current value
(c) In the message line, error messages or inquiry messages will
(d) In the area for LADDER diagrams, 8 ´ 8, 8 ´ 6, 8 ´ 4, 7 ´ 8,
7 ´ 6, and 7 ´ 4 relays can be displayed (horizontally and
vertically). For details, see Subsection 8.2.2.
(e) The gage indicating the current display position in relation
to the whole Ladder program is displayed at the right end of
the screen.
(2) LADDER diagram

(a) Nets wider than the screen width are displayed as
“Continuous Net” using continuous marks (“>A1>”). Same
continuous marks mean they are connected with each other.
(3) Monitor
(a) Contacts and coils change their colors and/or shapes
according to the status of the signals. The status of power
flow is not displayed.
(b) Usually, the parameters of functional instructions are
monitored and displayed. You can suppress the monitor
and display by an appropriate setting. For details, see
Subsection 8.2.2.
- 789 -
(4) Displaying Symbols and Comments

(a) Usually, addresses are displayed above contacts and coils.
For an address with a symbol assigned, you can change the
setting so that the symbol is displayed instead of the address.
You can add colors to addresses. For details, see
Subsection 8.2.2.
(b) If the address of a contact has a comment attached, the
comment is displayed below the contact. You can change
its display mode by changing the setting. You can add
colors to comments. For details, see Subsection 8.2.2.
(c) If the address used with coil has a comment string assigned,
the comment strings will be displayed at the right margin
beside the coil. You can use this margin area to display an
additional relay instead of the comment string by setting: at
this setting, one more relay can be displayed in each
diagram line. You can add colors to comments. For details,
- 790 -
8.2.1 Operating on the LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR Screen
Main soft keys of LADDER Diagram Monitor screen Switch PMC paths
LADDER Diagram Editor Switch to COLLECTIVE Screen Settings

Program List
MONITOR screen
Display Data Table

Exit
Search soft keys Search Write Coil Search previous Search next
Jump to Search Functional Pick up a Ladder

Top/Bottom Search Address or Net Instruction Diagram net Switch range

(a) [LIST] Go to PROGRAM LIST VIEWER screen
Goes to PROGRAM LIST VIEWER screen to choose
subprogram to be displayed at LADDER DIAGRAM
MONITOR screen.
(b) [SEARCH MENU] Search & Jump
Change soft keys to “Search soft keys”. Use “EXIT” soft
key to return to the “Main soft keys”.
“Search soft keys” consists of followings:
· [TOP BOTTOM] Jump to Top/Bottom
Jumps to the top of LADDER Program. If the top is
displayed already, then jump to the bottom.
- 791 -
· [SEARCH] Search Address/Net

Searches the PMC address or the net according to the
preceding string. You can specify both of bit address and
byte address.
When digits are entered, the digits are supposed to be a
net number and the screen will jump to the net of the net
number.
When a string other than digits is entered, the string is
examined as a symbol for PMC address at first. If the
string is found to match a symbol, then the address that
the symbol means will be searched for.
If no symbol matches the string, then the string is
examined as PMC address at next. If the string indicates
correct PMC address, then the address will be searched
for.
When cursor is hidden, the net that has the specified net
number or contains the specified address will be shown at
the top of the screen. When cursor is shown, the cursor
moves to the relay or the parameter to show the found
address directly.
· [W-SRCH] Search Write Coil
Searches for the write coils with the address that entered
string means. Any contacts with the address are ignored.
· [FUNC SEARCH] Search Functional Instruction
Searches for the functional instructions by its SUB
number or its mnemonic name such as “TMR” or
“END2”.
· [PICKUP] Pick up a ladder net and load it into the
COLLECTIVE MONITOR screen
Picks up the ladder net to monitor and loads it into the
COLLECTIVE MONITOR screen.
· [PREV] Search previous
Repeats to search the same thing backward (upward).
· [NEXT] Search next
Repeats to search the same thing forward (downward).
· [GLOBAL]/[LOCAL] Change range
Changes the range for searching between GLOBAL and
LOCAL; GLOBAL means whole of program, and
LOCAL means within the displaying subprogram.
Current range for searching is indicated at right of the
information line at top of screen.
· [EXIT] Exit from the search function
Exits from a search process and returns you to the main
soft key display.
- 792 -
(c) [DATA TABLE] Go to FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTION

DATA TABLE VIEWER screen
Goes to FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTION DATA TABLE
VIEWER screen to examine contents of Data Table of
functional instructions such as COD (SUB 7) and CODB
(SUB 27), which have Data Table in themselves. This soft
key appears only when the cursor is on a functional
instruction that has Data Table.
(d) [EDIT] Go to LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR screen
Goes to LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR screen. This soft
key appears only when Programmer function is enabled.
And activating Online Monitor function disables this soft
key.
If the ladder program is password-protected, you are asked
to enter a password. Enter the password required to edit the
program.
(e) [SWITCH] Switch to COLLECTIVE MONITOR screen
Switches to COLLECTIVE MONITOR screen.
(f) [SWITCH PMC] Switch PMC paths
Switches PMC paths.
(g) [SCREEN SETING] Screen settings
Goes to setting screen for LADDER DIAGRAM
MONITOR screen. You can change various settings for
LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR screen at the screen.
Use “EXIT” soft key to return to LADDER DIAGRAM
MONITOR screen. See Subsection 8.2.2 for the detail.
- 793 -

With cursor hidden, you can move diagram in the screen by
up/down Cursor move keys and Page change keys.
Function of Cursor keys when cursor is hidden

PAGE
Move screen
¬ ®
Search backward
PAGE ¯ Search forward
With cursor displayed, you can move the cursor by all

cursor move keys and Page change keys. When cursor is
placed on some relay or some address parameter of a
functional instruction, the information about the address
under cursor is displayed at “Additional Information Line”.
(b) “number” + INPUT key
When cursor is shown, you can force the value of the
address under cursor by entering new value as “number” +
INPUT key. In this screen, Forced I/O function is limited
only to Forcing mode. This Forced I/O function asks you to
confirm your intention before it takes effect. Once it is
confirmed that you actually want to change value by this
function, you can change the value of the same relay or
parameter without further confirmation. However, after you
move cursor or you operate other functions, you will be
asked when you use the Forced I/O function again.
- 794 -
WARNING
function to change status of signals. Inappropriate
use of Forced I/O function may cause unexpected
reaction of machine. You have to make it sure that
nobody is near the machine when you use this
function.
change status of signal, however, the signal may
look proof against Forced I/O function, because
LADDER program or I/O device writes into the
signal repeatedly. In this case, even if the signal
looks unchanged, actual signal may be changed in
very short moment. You should be careful for the
reaction of machine to such signal changes.
NOTE
1 If the forced I/O function is protected by the
programmer protection function, pressing the INPUT
key has no effect. For details of protection
conditions, and the like, see Section 6.2.
2 Parameters of timer functional instructions, TMR,
TMRB, and TMRC, which have special monitor
formats, are not supported by Forced I/O function.
For details, see the description of functional
instructions of special monitor format in Subsection
8.2.3.
(3) Notes for Search function

(a) The string followed by [SEARCH] is treated as symbol first.
In case that the symbol “D0” is assigned to the bit address
“R0.0”, the operation “D0” + [SEARCH] will search the bit
address “R0.0”, instead of byte address “D0”.
(b) To search the symbol that consists of only digit characters,
which will usually be treated as net number, you can use
leading space to specify explicitly the string is symbol. For
example, while “123” + [SEARCH] will search the 123rd
net from top of the LADDER, “_123” + [SEARCH] (“_” is
space) will search address with symbol “123”.
(c) When the range for searching is GLOBAL, and the target is
found in other than displaying subprogram, the screen will
automatically switch to the subprogram to which the found
target belongs. Searching GLOBAL net number that
current subprogram does not contain, for example, the
subprogram that contains the net of the net number will
appear in the screen, displaying the net.
- 795 -
(4) Shortcuts
(a) When cursor is hidden, left/right cursor move keys without
string act just like [PREV]/[NEXT] soft keys.
(b) String followed by [SEARCH MENU] soft key in “Main
soft keys” starts searching directly.
(c) [SEARCH] soft key in the search soft keys without string
searches the address or the functional instruction under
cursor forward. If cursor is hidden, or cursor is placed
neither on a relay nor on a functional instruction, this
operation just repeats the last successful search forward, just
like [NEXT] soft key.
(d) [W-SRCH] soft key without string searches forward a write
coil of the same address with relay under cursor. If cursor
is hidden, or cursor is not placed on a relay, this operation
will search a write coil of the bit address that is searched at
last successful search. If the last search was not made with
bit address, the last entered string for searching is used to
determine what bit address is to be searched for a write coil.
(e) [FUNC SEARCH] soft key without string searches forward
the same functional instruction with one under cursor. If
cursor is hidden, or cursor is not placed on a functional
instruction, this operation will search a functional
instruction that is searched at last successful search. If the
last search was not made for functional instruction, the last
entered string for searching is used to determine what
functional instruction is to be searched.
(f) [LIST] soft key following string that indicates subprogram,
switches subprogram on LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR
screen. Examples for strings to specify subprogram are
following:
“L1” Level 1
“P10”, “10” Subprogram “P10”
“0”(zero), “G” Whole of LADDER program (Global)
- 796 -
8.2.2 Setting the Display Format of the LADDER DIAGRAM

MONITOR Screen
(1) Display screen

The LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR screen is partially
displayed on the screen.
The relays displayed here will change real-time by changing the
setting.
(2) Setting items

LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR (SETTING) screen contains
the setting items below:
· ADDRESS NOTATION
Determines whether the bit and byte addresses in the
LADDER Diagram are displayed as corresponding symbols,
or the addresses themselves.
SYMBOL (default)
Addresses that have a symbol are displayed by the symbols.
Addresses without symbols are displayed by the addresses
themselves.
ADDRESS
All addresses are displayed as the addresses themselves
even if they have a symbol.
- 797 -
· FUNCTION STYLE
Change the shape of functional instructions. There are three
options as below. You have to choose other than
“COMPACT” to show the current values of address
parameters of functional instructions.
COMPACT (default)
Occupies least space in diagram. Monitors of current values
of address parameters are omitted.
WIDE
Extends the box horizontally to reserve spaces for the
monitors of current values of address parameters. The box
becomes wider than COMPACT.
TALL
Extends the box vertically to reserve spaces for the monitors
of current values of address parameters. The box becomes
taller than COMPACT.
Display styles of functional instructions
COMPACT
WIDE
TALL
The displays of current values of address parameters change

their format according to each parameter. See Subsection
8.2.3 for detail.
When you place the cursor on an address parameter, its
current value is displayed in the “Additional Information
Line” in both formats of binary decimal, and BCD (or
hexadecimal binary).
- 798 -
· SHOW COMMENT OF CONTACT

Set the style of relay comment. These are three options as
below. When you display relay comment, less ladder diagram
nets are shown.
NONE (default)
Relay comments are not displayed.
1 LINE
Relay comments are displayed in one line. Up to 7
characters can be displayed. Characters after 8th character
will not be displayed.
2 LINE
Relay comments are displayed in two lines. Up to 14
characters can be displayed.
Display styles of relay comment
NONE
1 LINE
2 LINE
· SHOW COMMENT OF COIL

Determines whether to show coil comments.
YES (default)
Right margin of 2 lines of 15 characters is reserved for
display of coil comments.
NO
Right margin is used to extend diagram by one more relay,
instead of showing coil comment. The screen position bar
is also displayed at the right edge of the screen in this option.
Show Coil comment setting
YES NO
- 799 -
· SHOW CURSOR
Determines whether to show cursor.
YES
Cursor is displayed. Cursor move keys will move the
cursor. When the cursor is placed on bit or byte addresses,
the information of the address is displayed at "Additional
Information Line". When you search something with the
cursor displayed, the cursor goes directly where it is found.
This option is recommended for search operation with
LADDER program that contains many large nets.
NO (default)
Cursor is not displayed. Up/down cursor move keys will
scroll the contents of screen directly. When you search
something with the cursor hidden, the net, which contains it,
will appear at the top of the screen.
· SUBPROGRAM NET NUMBER
Determines whether a net number is counted as "LOCAL"
starting from the top of current subprogram, or is counted as
"GLOBAL" starting from the top of whole program. This
setting also affects the expression of net number at searching
nets by number.
LOCAL
Net number starts from 1 at top of current subprogram. Net
number is defined only within current subprogram. The net
number information at upper right of the screen is displayed
in the format "displaying range/nets in subprogram NET".
GLOBAL (default)
Net number starts from 1 at top of Level 1 program. Net
number is defined identically at whole of program. The net
in the format "displaying range/subprogram range NET".
Definition of net number

LOCAL GLOBAL
Current Current
- 800 -
· WRAP SEARCH ENABLED

Allows search process to wrap from top/bottom to bottom/top
to continue to search.
YES (default)
Downward search will continue to search from top of
LADDER when reaches to bottom. Upward search will
also continue to search from bottom when reaches to top.
NO
Search process will fail when reached top or bottom, and
displays an error message at Message Line.
YES Wrap search

?????? NO
Not found
[PREV] [NEXT] [PREV] [NEXT]
Not found
- 801 -
· DIAGRAM APPEARANCE SETTING

Changes the appearance of LADDER diagram. Lines, relays,
and functional instructions that constitute LADDER diagram
can be changed in the colors and the shapes.
BOLD DIAGRAM
Sets thickness of diagram lines. This setting also affects
shapes of relays.
YES (default)
Diagram is drawn with thick lines. Relays are drawn in
more distinct shapes. You have to choose this option to
make following "VARIABLE RELAY SYMBOL" setting
effective.
NO
Diagram is drawn with thin lines. Relays are drawn in
smaller shapes.
Bold Diagram setting
VARIABLE RELAY SYMBOL

Determines whether to change the shapes of relays according
to their on/off status, or to fix their shapes. This setting is
- 802 -
effective only when the setting "BOLD DIAGRAM" is set to

"YES".
YES
Shapes of relays change according to their on/off status.
This option is effective only when the setting "BOLD
DIAGRAM" is set to "YES". If it is set to "NO", shapes of
relays will not change regardless of this setting.
NO (default)
Shapes of relays will not change.
Change of relay shapes at on/off status
ADDRESS COLOR
Colors for the relay address are set. You can specify these
colors by entering color number. 16 colors (from No. 0 to No.
15) are available. Foreground color should be different from
background one.
DIAGRAM COLOR
General color and its background color for LADDER Diagram.
You can specify these colors by entering color number, or by
using right and left cursor move keys to change the color
number. You can use 16 numbers from 0 to 15; however,
some different number may correspond to the same color.
You can not specify the same number to the foreground and
the background colors.
ACTIVE RELAY COLOR
Color setting for the active relay. When a contact allows
power flow, and when a coil receives power, they are active
and are displayed with this color setting. When contacts and
coils are not active, they are displayed with "general color".
You can specify these colors in the same manner as color
setting of DIAGRAM COLOR, etc.
PARAMETER COLOR
Color setting for the monitor of functional instruction
parameters. They are displayed when functional instructions
are displayed in the shape other than "COMPACT". You can
specify these colors in the same manner as color setting of
DIAGRAM COLOR, etc.
COMMENT COLOR
Colors for the relay comment are set. You can specify these
colors by entering color number, or by moving right and left
- 803 -
cursor. 16 colors (from No. 0 to No. 15) are available.

Foreground color should be different from background one.
(3) Soft keys

LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR (SETTING) screen has the
soft keys of options and following:
· [INIT] Initialize all settings
All settings will be initialized to the default values.
· [EXIT] Switch to LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR screen
Ends the LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR (SETTING)
screen and switches to LADDER DIAGRAM MONIITOR
screen.
- 804 -
8.2.3 Display Format for Parameters
The following table shows all monitor formats for each parameter of
each functional instruction.
NOTE
1 "Variable" in "Monitor format" field means that this
parameter changes its size according to the other
parameter. See the descriptions for each functional
instruction for detail.
2 Functional instruction with "*" mark has Data table.
No. Name Parameter Monitor format No. Name Parameter Monitor format
1 END1 - - 18 XMOV 1 constant
2 END2 - - 2 4-digits BCD
3 TMR 1 special 3 4-digits BCD
4 DEC 1 2-digits BCD 4 4-digits BCD
2 constant 19 ADD 1 constant
5 CTR 1 special 2 4-digits BCD
6 ROT 1 constant 3 4-digits BCD
2 4-digits BCD 4 4-digits BCD
3 4-digits BCD 20 SUB 1 constant
7 COD * 1 constant 3 4-digits BCD
3 4-digits BCD 21 MUL 1 constant
8 MOVE 1 constant 2 4-digits BCD
2 constant 3 4-digits BCD
3 2-digits HEX 4 4-digits BCD
4 2-digits HEX 22 DIV 1 constant
9 COM 1 constant 2 4-digits BCD
10 JMP 1 constant 3 4-digits BCD
11 PARI 1 1-byte binary 4 4-digits BCD
14 DCNV 1 no monitor 23 NUME 1 constant
2 no monitor 2 4-digits BCD
15 COMP 1 constant 24 TMRB 1 special
2 4-digits BCD 2 constant
3 4-digits BCD 25 DECB 1 constant
16 COIN 1 constant 2 variable binary
2 4-digits BCD 3 constant
3 4-digits BCD 4 2-digits HEX
17 DSCH 1 constant 26 ROTB 1 constant
2 4-digits BCD 2 variable binary
5 variable binary
- 805 -
27 CODB 1 constant 39 DIVB 1 constant
2 constant 2 variable binary
3 1-byte binary 3 constant or
4 variable binary variable binary
28 MOVOR 1 2-digits HEX 4 variable binary
2 2-digits HEX 40 NUMEB 1 constant
3 2-digits HEX 2 constant
29 COME - - 3 variable binary
30 JMPE - - 41 DISPB 1 constant
31 DCNVB 1 constant 42 EXIN 1 8-digits HEX
2 no monitor 43 MOVB 1 1-byte binary
3 no monitor 2 1-byte binary
32 COMPB 1 constant 44 MOVW 1 2-bytes binary
2 constant or 2 2-bytes binary
variable binary 45 MOVN 1 constant
3 variable binary 2 4-bytes binary
33 SFT 1 4-digits HEX 3 4-bytes binary
34 DSCHB 1 constant 47 MOVD 1 4-bytes binary
3 variable binary 48 END3 - -
4 variable binary 51 WINDR 1 2-bytes binary
5 variable binary 52 WINDW 1 2-bytes binary
35 XMOVB 1 constant 53 AXCTL 1 constant
2 variable binary 2 8-digits HEX
3 variable binary 54 TMRC 1 constant
4 variable binary 2 special
5 variable binary 3 special
36 ADDB 1 constant 55 CTRC 1 2-bytes binary
3 constant or 56 CTRB 1 constant
variable binary 2 special
4 variable binary 57 DIFU 1 constant
37 SUBB 1 constant 58 DIFD 1 constant
2 variable binary 59 EOR 1 constant
3 constant or 2 variable HEX
variable binary 3 constant or
4 variable binary variable HEX
38 MULB 1 constant 4 variable HEX
2 variable binary 60 AND 1 constant
3 constant or 2 variable HEX
variable binary 3 constant or
4 variable binary variable HEX
4 variable HEX
- 806 -
61 OR 1 constant 69 LBL 1 no monitor
2 variable HEX 70 NOP 1 constant
3 constant or 71 SP 1 no monitor
variable HEX
4 variable HEX 72 SPE - -
62 NOT 1 constant 73 JMPC 1 no monitor
2 variable HEX 74 CS 1 2-bytes binary
3 variable HEX 75 CM 1 no monitor
64 END - - 76 CE - -
65 CALL 1 no monitor
66 CALLU 1 no monitor
68 JMPB 1 no monitor
- 807 -
· Functional instructions of special monitor format
Displays instructions in the following format:

Functional instructions Functional instruction
Vertical display horizontal display
Timer number = Current value Timer number
Preset value Current value
Preset value
The monitor display format of the preset values and the
current values varies depending on the timer precision, as
given in the table below. For details of timer precision, see
TMR Subsection 7.3.1.
Precision Resolution Display format
0 8 msec/48 msec by second
1 1 msec by second
2 10 msec by second
3 100 msec by second
4 1 second HH:MM:SS
5 1 minute HH:MM:SS
Displays current value by seconds (HH:MM:SS if 1 minute or

TMRB
more) (preset value is displayed by milliseconds)
The 2nd parameter shows preset value, and the 3rd
parameter shows current value as their monitor displays.
These two monitor displays changes their format according
to the 1st parameter as below:
1st parameter Resolution Display format
0 8 msec by second
1 48 msec by second
TMRC
2 1 second HH:MM:SS
3 10 seconds HH:MM:SS
4 1 minute HH:MM:SS
5 1 msec by second
6 10 msec by second
7 100 msec by second
Displays in "Current/Preset" format by binary or BCD

CTR
according to the counter type setting in LADDER Program.
CTRB Monitors and displays preset values in binary mode.
CTRC Monitors and displays preset values in binary mode.
- 808 -
8.2.4 FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTION DATA TABLE VIEWER Screen
FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTION DATA TABLE VIEWER screen

shows the contents of following data table that belongs to some
· Functional Instruction COD (SUB7)
· Functional Instruction CODB (SUB27)
To reach this screen, at LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR screen,
press [DATA TABLE] soft key that is displayed when the cursor is on
the following functional instructions which have a data table.
Following operations are available at this screen.
· Search for data table number. [SEARCH NUMBER]
· Search for data value. [SEARCH VALUE]
· Change the displaying data digits. [BCD2], [BCD4]
(These soft keys can be operated only at FUNCTIONAL
INSTRUCTION DATA TABLE VIEWER screen of functional
instruction COD.)
· Switch to LADDER DIAGRAM [EXIT]
MONITOR screen.
FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTION DATA TABLE VIEWER screen of functional

instruction COD

(a) The functional instruction name, the number of data table,
data length and data types are displayed above the Data
Table.
(b) In the message line, error messages or inquiry messages will
- 809 -
(c) In case of functional instruction COD, the data of 6 lines

and 14 columns can be displayed in the area for Data table.
In case of functional instruction CODB, the data of 4 lines
and 14 columns can be displayed in the area for Data table.
(2) Operations
Soft keys of Functional Instruction Data Table Viewer screen of functional instruction COD
Display BCD4 digits

Search for data Search for
Exit
table number data value Display BCD2 digits
Soft keys of Functional Instruction Data Table Viewer screen of functional instruction CODB
Search for data Search for

Exit
table number data value
(a) [SEARCH NUMBER] Search for data table number

Searches the data table number which you specified.
Then the cursor is displayed on the data of the target
number.
And the cursor is disappeared when you operate something.
(b) [SEARCH VALUE] Search for data value
Searches the data value which you specified.
Then the cursor is displayed on the target data.
And the cursor is disappeared when you operate something.
(c) [BCD2] Display BCD2 digits
Changes the display data type to 2 digits of BCD. This
operation only switches the display data type. So it does
never edit the data on memory.
(d) [BCD4] Display BCD4 digits
Changes the display data type to 4 digits of BCD. This
operation only switches the display data type. So it does
never edit the data on memory.
(e) [EXIT] Exit View
Ends the FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTION DATA TABLE
VIEWER screen and switches to LADDER DIAGRAM
MONITOR screen.
(f) Cursor move keys, Page change keys
You can scroll screen by right/left cursor move keys and
Page change keys.
- 810 -
(g) Operation of the return key

On the FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTION DATA TABLE
VIEWER screen, the return key has no effect.
After you have finished editing data, and want to return to
the LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR screen, use the
[EXIT] soft key.
- 811 -
8.3 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS
At LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR screen you can edit LADDER

program to change its behavior.
To switch LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR screen, press [EDIT] soft
key at LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR screen.
Following operations are available at LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR
screen.
· Delete by net [DELETE]

· Move by net [CUT] & [PASTE]
· Copy by net [COPY] & [PASTE]
· Change address of contacts and coils
"bit address" + INPUT key
· Change parameters of functional instructions
"number" or "byte address"
+ INPUT key
· Add new net [CREATE NET]
· Change construction of net [ZOOM]
· Make changes effective [UPDATE]
· Abandon changes [RESTRE]
· Cancel edit [CANCEL EDIT]
LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR screen
- 812 -
CAUTION
1 You can edit ladder programs regardless of whether
they are active or not. To execute a ladder program
with the results of editing being reflected, you must
update the ladder program. To do this, click the
[UPDATE] soft key, or update the program when
exiting from the LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR
screen. For details of the method of protecting
editing, see Section 7.3.
2 After you have edited a sequence program, the
results of editing will be lost if the power is turned off
without first writing the edited sequence program to
flash ROM.
Write the sequence program to flash ROM on the
I/O screen. If you set "WRITE TO F-ROM(EDIT)" to
"YES" on the general functions' setting parameter
screen, a confirmation message will be displayed,
prompting you to ask whether to write a sequence
program to flash ROM after the end of editing. For
details of this setting, see Section 9.5.

(a) It is basically same with LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR
screen, except that no monitor displays of relays and
parameters of functional instructions are displayed.
(b) At right side of LADDER Diagram area, a position bar is
always displayed, which indicates screen position within
current subprogram: in LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR
screen, this position bar is exclusively displayed with
comments of write coil. Sometimes, this position bar hides
a part of write coil comments.
(2) LADDER Diagram

(a) Style of LADDER Diagram is basically same with
LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR screen, except that
functional instructions are drawn always in "COMPACT"
format that has no monitor displays.
(b) Cursor is shown always. And the net, which will be an
object of following editing operations, is emphasized in
screen.
- 813 -
8.3.1 Operating on the LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR Screen

Soft keys of LADDER Diagram Editor screen
Program List
Select net Copy net
Change to Search soft keys
Edit new net Delete net Cut net Paste net

Automatic input
Add net
Make changes
effective Exit
Change address Setting screen Cancel edit
Abandon changes Run/stop LADDER

Display address
map display
screen
Fig. 8.3.1 Soft keys of LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR screen

(a) [LIST] Go to PROGRAM LIST EDITOR screen
Goes to PROGRAM LIST EDITOR screen to choose which
subprogram to be edited at LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR
screen. The PROGRAM LIST EDITOR screen can also
edit subprograms.
(b) [SEARCH MENU] Search & Jump
Change soft keys to "Search soft keys". Use "EXIT" soft
key to return to the "Main soft keys".
"Search soft keys" are quite same with ones of LADDER
DIAGRAM MONITOR screen.
(c) [ZOOM] Change construction of net
Goes to NET EDITOR screen to modify structure of the
selected net.
(d) [CREATE NET] Add new net
Create and add new net to cursor position. Pressing this soft
key reaches NET EDITOR screen, so that new net is
constructed.
(e) [AUTO] Automatic input of unused address/parameter
number
Executes the function for automatically inputting an unused
address or parameter number. For details of these functions,
- 814 -
(f) [SELECT] Select multiple nets

Used to specify multiple nets before performing an editing
operation such as [DELETE], [CUT], and [COPY]. Click
the [SELECT] soft key to select the start point of the range
to be selected, then use the cursor movement keys or the
search function to specify the end point of the selected
range. After you have selected nets, edit them by pressing
the appropriate editing soft key. While the multiple nets are
being selected, the information on the selected range is
displayed on the additional information line. And the
[SELECT] soft key is highlighted with yellow background .
(g) [DELETE] Delete net
Deletes selected nets. The nets deleted by [DELETE] soft
key are lost. If you [DELETE] wrong nets, you have to
abandon the all modifications you have made, and restore
LADDER program to the original one before editing
operation by using the [RESTRE] soft key.
(h) [CUT] Cut nets
Cuts selected nets. The cut nets are preserved in Paste
Buffer, and disappear from diagram. The contents of Paste
Buffer before [CUT] operation are lost.
[CUT] and [PASTE] soft keys are used to move nets.
The Paste Buffer can contain approx. 8000 steps maximum,
and [CUT] may fail to cut nets of over 8000 steps.
(i) [COPY] Copy nets
Copy selected nets into Paste Buffer. No change on
diagram will be made. The contents of Paste Buffer before
[COPY] operation are lost.
[COPY] and [PASTE] soft keys are used to copy nets.
(j) [PASTE] Paste nets
Pastes nets at cursor position, which were stored into Paste
Buffer by [CUT] or [COPY] soft key.
Pressing [PASTE] soft key while selecting nets using
[SELECT] soft key, alters the selected nets with the nets in
Paste Buffer.
The contents of Paste Buffer will remain until turning NC
power off.
(k) [CHANGE ADRS] Change addresses
Switches to the mode in which the address alteration
function is enabled.
(l) [ADDRES MAP] Display the address map display screen
Displays the address map display screen to view references
of addresses in use.
(m) [UPDATE] Make changes effective
Reflects the results of the editing operations executed thus
far in the ladder program under execution. If it succeeds to
update running LADDER, edited LADDER starts to run.
- 815 -
WARNING
You have to pay special attention to modify running
LADDER program. If you modify LADDER program
in wrong way, or update LADDER program with the
machine in improper status, it may cause
unexpected reaction of the machine. You have to
make it sure that modifications you make on
LADDER program is appropriate, machine is in
proper status, and nobody is near the machine,
when you update LADDER program.
(n) [RESTRE] Abandon changes

Abandons all changes, and restores LADDER program to
the one at entering LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR screen,
or last updated one using [UPDATE] soft key. This soft
key is useful when you make wrong modifications and hard
to recover from them.
(o) [SCREEN SETING] Screen settings
Goes to setting screen for LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR
screen. You can change various settings for LADDER
DIAGRAM EDITOR screen at the screen. Use "EXIT" soft
key to return to LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR screen.
(p) [RUN]/[STOP] Run and stop LADDER program
Controls LADDER program execution. [RUN] soft key
makes LADDER run, and [STOP] soft key makes
LADDER stop. If changes are reflected normally, the
LADDER program as edited will be executed at that point.
WARNING
You have to pay special attention to run/stop
LADDER program. Running/stopping LADDER
program in a wrong timing, or with machine in
improper status, may cause unexpected reaction of
machine. You have to make it sure that machine is
in proper status, and nobody is near the machine
when you run/stop LADDER program.
(q) [CANCEL EDIT] Abandon editing

Abandons all changes, and restores LADDER program to
the one at entering LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR screen,
or last updated one using [UPDATE] soft key. Switches to
- 816 -
(r) [EXIT EIDT] Exit Editor

Updates running LADDER program to edited LADDER
program, so that the all modifications will take effects, and
exits the editor screen. Pressing function keys such as the
SYSTEM key while editing a ladder diagram does not allow
you to move to another screen, unless you have finished
editing.
WARNING
You have to pay special attention to modify running
LADDER program. If you modify LADDER program
in wrong way, or update LADDER program with the
machine in improper status, may cause unexpected
reaction of the machine.
You have to make it sure that modifications you
make on LADDER program is appropriate, machine
is in proper status, and nobody is near the machine,
when you update LADDER program.

Cursor move keys and Page change keys move cursor on
screen. When cursor is placed on some relay or some
address parameter of a functional instruction, the
information about the address under cursor is displayed at
"Additional Information Line".
(b) "bit address" + INPUT key
Changes bit address of relay under cursor.
(c) "number" or "byte address" + INPUT key
Changes parameter of functional instructions under cursor.
But, there are some parameters that can not change by this
operation. If you see a message that means that this
parameter can not be changed, use NET EDITOR screen to
change the parameter.
(3) Shortcuts
(a) Same shortcut search operations with LADDER
DIAGRAM MONITOR screen are available. For their
detail, see descriptions about shortcut operations of
(b) Same shortcut operations using [LIST] soft key with
LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR screen are available.
(4) Operation of the return key
On the LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR screen, the return key
has no effect.
After you have finished editing ladder data, and want to return to
the LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR screen, use the [EXIT]
soft key.
- 817 -
8.3.2 Setting the LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR Screen
Fig. 8.3.2 LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR (SETTING) screen
(1) Display screen

The LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR screen is partially displayed
on the screen.
The relays displayed here will change real-time by changing the
setting.
(2) Setting items

LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR (SETTING) screen contains the
setting items below:
· ADDRESS NOTATION
Determines whether the bit and byte addresses in the
LADDER Diagram are displayed as corresponding symbols,
or the addresses themselves.
SYMBOL (default)
Addresses that have a symbol are displayed by the symbols.
Addresses without symbols are displayed by the addresses
themselves.
ADDRESS
All addresses are displayed as the addresses themselves
even if they have a symbol.
- 818 -
· SHOW COMMENT OF CONTACT

Set the style of relay comment. These are three options as
below. When you display relay comment, less ladder diagram
nets are shown.
NONE (default)
Relay comments are not displayed.
1 LINE
Relay comments are displayed in one line. Up to 7
characters can be displayed. Characters after 8th character
will not be displayed.
2 LINE
Relay comments are displayed in two lines. Up to 14
characters can be displayed.
Display styles of relay comment
NONE
1 LINE
2 LINE
· SHOW COMMENT OF COIL

Determines whether to show coil comments. Unlike the
LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR screen, the gage indicating
the current display position is displayed at the right end of the
LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR screen, regardless of this
setting.
YES (default)
Right margin of 2 lines of 15 characters is reserved for
display of coil comments.
NO
Right margin is used to extend diagram by one more relay,
instead of showing coil comment.
Show Coil comment setting
YES NO
- 819 -
· SUBPROGRAM NET NUMBER

Determines whether a net number is counted as "LOCAL"
starting from the top of current subprogram, or is counted as
"GLOBAL" starting from the top of whole program. This
setting also affects the expression of net number at searching
nets by number.
LOCAL
Net number starts from 1 at top of current subprogram. Net
number is defined only within current subprogram. The net
in the format "displaying range / nets in subprogram NET".
GLOBAL (default)
Net number starts from 1 at top of Level 1 program. Net
number is defined identically at whole of program. The net
in the format "displaying range / subprogram range NET".
Definition of net number

LOCAL GLOBAL
Current Current
- 820 -

Allows search process to wrap from top/bottom to bottom/top
to continue to search.
YES (default)
Downward search will continue to search from top of
LADDER when reaches to bottom. Upward search will
also continue to search from bottom when reaches to top.
NO
Search process will fail when reached top or bottom, and
displays an error message at Message Line.
Wrap search
YES NO
Not found
[PREV] [NEXT] [PREV] [NEXT]
Not found
· FORCE POSTPROCESS AFTER EDIT

Allows you to specify whether to always perform the
postprocessing necessary to operate a ladder program or
perform it only if the ladder program has been changed.
YES (default)
Postprocessing is always performed when you exit from the
LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR screen. The
postprocessing checks the contents of the ladder diagram.
This means that merely by entering the LADDER
DIAGRAM EDITOR screen and then exiting from it, the
contents of the ladder diagram is checked again.
NO
Postprocessing is performed only if the ladder program has
been changed. No postprocessing will be performed when
you enter the LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR screen and
then exiting from it. This means that you can exit from the
LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR screen even if the ladder
program contains an error.
- 821 -
Page 3 of the setting screen
· DIAGRAM APPEARANCE SETTING

Changes the appearance of LADDER diagram. Lines, relays,
and functional instructions that constitute LADDER diagram
can be changed in the colors and the shapes. You can set
colors by entering their numbers. You can set 16 colors from
0 to 15. (Different numbers may correspond to the same
color.) You cannot set the same color number for the display
and background colors of the same portion.
BOLD DIAGRAM
Sets thickness of diagram lines. This setting also affects
shapes of relays.
YES (default)
Diagram is drawn with thick lines. Relays are drawn in
more distinct shapes.
NO
Diagram is drawn with thin lines. Relays are drawn in
smaller shapes.
Bold Diagram setting
YES
NO
- 822 -
ADDRESS COLOR
Colors for the relay address are set. You can specify these
background one.
DIAGRAM COLOR
General color and its background color for LADDER Diagram.
SELECTED NET COLOR
Color setting for a selected net. The net subject to the editing
operation will be displayed in this color.
PROTECTED NET COLOR
Color setting for a net protected from an editing operation.
The protected net will not be selected as an object of editing.
When a subprogram is displayed, those nets that contain the
following functional instructions are protected so that they
cannot be deleted or entered.
END1 END3 SP
END2 END SPE
COMMENT COLOR
Colors for the relay comment are set. You can specify these
background one.
(3) Soft keys

LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR (SETTING) screen has the soft
keys of options and following:
· [INIT] Initialize all settings
All settings will be initialized to the default values.
· [EXIT] Switch to LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR screen
Ends the LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR (SETTING) screen
and switches to LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR screen.
- 823 -
8.3.3 NET EDITOR Screen
At NET EDITOR screen, you can create new net, and modify existing
net.
· Changing existing nets

If you move a net with the [ZOOM] soft key, you will enter a mode
(Modify mode) in which you can add changes to the net currently
indicated by the cursor.
· Adding a new net
When [CREATE NET] soft key is used, this screen is in "New
mode" to create new net from nothing.
Following operations are available at this screen:

· Place new contacts and coils "bit address" + [ ], [ ],
etc.
· Change type of contacts and coils [ ], [ ], etc.
· Place new functional instructions [FUNC]
· Change type of functional instructions [FUNC]
· Erase contacts, coils, and functional instructions [ ]
· Draw/erase connecting lines [ ], [ ], [ ]
· Edit data table of functional instructions [DATA TABLE]
· Insert line/column [INSERT LINE], [INSERT COLUMN],
[APPEND COLUMN]
· Change address of contacts and coils "bit address" + INPUT key
· Change parameters of functional instructions "number" or "byte
address" + INPUT key
· Abandon modifications [CANCEL EDIT]
· Restore the net to the state it was before editing [RESTRE]
- 824 -
Fig. 8.3.3 (a) Structure of the NET EDITOR screen

(a) It is basically same with LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR
screen, except that only one net is in this screen, and that
position bar at right edge of screen does not appear at this
screen.
(b) Current edit mode is indicated at right of the top line as
"NEW MODE" or "MODFY MODE". When [ZOOM] soft
key at LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR screen is used to
reach NET EDITOR screen, the screen is in Modify mode,
and when [CREATE NET] soft key is used, it is in New
mode.
(c) Current net number is displayed at right of the top line. The
net number is same with the net number in previous
LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR screen.
(d) NET EDITOR screen expands image of net horizontally for
a wider net according to its width, while LADDER
DIAGRAM MONITOR/EDITOR screen folds nets wider
than screen width. When net width is expanded over screen
width, attempt to move cursor out of screen will scroll net
image to the direction.
The net of maximum size occupies area of 1024 elements,
but actually available area may be little less for internal use
according to the internal condition: "element" means the
space that is occupied by single relay.
- 825 -
Soft keys of Net Editor screen

Horizontal Automatic
A contact Normal coil connection Delete input
B contact Inverted coil Functional Left vertical Right vertical

instructions connection connection
Set coil Data table Edit next net Insert column Cancel edit
Reset coil Abandon changes Insert line Add column Exit
Fig. 8.3.3 (b) Soft keys of NET EDITOR screen
(a) [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ S ], [ R ]
Place relays (contacts and coils), or change type of existing
relays.
When one of these relay soft keys is pressed at cursor on
blank place, new relay of the soft key is placed under the
cursor. When the soft key follows a string that means a bit
address, the bit address is assigned to the newly placed relay.
If no bit address is given, last entered bit address is
automatically used for the new relay. If no bit address has
been entered yet, the new relay will have no address
assigned to it. Contacts can be placed at other than
rightmost column, and coils can be placed at rightmost
column only.
Moving cursor onto an existing relay, pressing a relay soft
key of different type changes the type of relay under the
cursor. But, changing coil to contact, and changing contact
to coil are forbidden.
Sample of contacts and coils
- 826 -
(b) [FUNC] Enter and change functional instruction

Places functional instruction, or changes type of existing
functional instruction.
When [FUNC] soft key is pressed at cursor on blank place,
new functional instruction will be placed under the cursor:
list of available functional instructions is displayed, then
choose type of functional instruction to be entered. When
[FUNC] soft key follows a string that means number or
name of a functional instruction, the specified functional
instruction is entered directly, without the list screen.
Moving cursor onto an existing functional instruction,
pressing [FUNC] soft key changes the type of functional
instruction under the cursor.
(c) [ ] Draw horizontal connection

Draws horizontal connection line. Or alters an existing
relay to horizontal line.
(d) [ ] Erase relays and functional instructions

Erases relays and functional instructions under cursor.
(e) [ ], [ ] Draw and erase vertical connection

Draw vertical connection line upward from right or left
edge of relay or horizontal line under cursor. Or erase
existing vertical lines.
If the relay or line under the cursor has no vertical line
upward, these soft keys have solid arrows, and indicate that
pressing them means drawing lines. On the other hand, if a
vertical line already exists under the cursor, arrows in these
soft keys become pale ([ ], [ ]), and indicate
that pressing them means erasing lines.
Drawing and erasing vertical connection line
- 827 -
(f) [AUTO] Automatic input of unused address/parameter

number
Executes the function for automatically inputting an unused
address or parameter number. For details of these functions,
(g) [DATA TABLE] Edit data table

Reaches FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTION DATA TABLE
EDITOR screen to edit data table of functional instruction
under cursor. This soft key appears only when cursor is on
a functional instruction that has data table with it.
For detail of editing operation of data table, see descriptions
of FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTION DATA TABLE
EDITOR screen.
(h) [RESTRE] Restore net

Restores the currently edited net to the state it was before
the start of editing. If you called the NET EDITOR screen
with the [CREATE NET] soft key from the LADDER
DIAGRAM EDITOR screen, the net will be restored to the
state in which it contains nothing; if you called the NET
EDITOR screen with the [ZOOM] soft key, the net will be
restored to the state it was before the changes.
- 828 -
(i) [NEXT NET] Go to next net

Finishes editing current net, and goes to next net.
If [ZOOM] soft key at LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR
screen is used to reach NET EDITOR screen, [NEXT NET]
will finish modifying current net, and the next net will be an
object of further editing operation.
Action of [NEXT NET] soft key in modifying an existing net
Net 1 Net 1
Net 2 Editing Net 2a Editing
Net 3 Net 2a Net 3 Net 3a
Net 4 Net 4
: :
: :
If [CREATE NET] soft key at LADDER DIAGRAM

EDITOR screen is used to reach NET EDITOR screen,
[NEXT NET] will finish creating current net, insert it into
the LADDER program, and start with blank to create
another new net to be inserted next to the current net.
Action of [NEXT NET] soft key in adding a new net
Net 1 Net 1
Net 2 Editing Net 2a Editing
Net 3 Net A Net A Net B
Net 4 Net 3
: Net 4
:
:
- 829 -
(j) [INSERT LINE] Insert line

Inserts one blank line at cursor position. Diagram elements
at or below vertical cursor position will be shifted
downward by one line. Inserting line at middle of
functional instruction box will expand the box vertically to
make a space between the input conditions.
Action of inserting line
(k) [INSERT COLUMN] Insert column before cursor

Inserts one blank column at cursor position. Diagram
elements at or on right of horizontal cursor position will be
shifted to right by one column. And if there is no room to
shift the elements, a new column is added and the Diagram
area will be expanded to right.
Action of inserting column
- 830 -
(l) [APPEND COLUMN] Insert column after cursor

Inserts one blank column at right of cursor position.
Diagram elements on right of horizontal cursor position will
be shifted to right by one column. And if necessary, net
will be expanded to right.
Action of appending column
(m) [CANCEL EDIT] Abandon changes

Restores the currently edited net to the state it was before
the start of editing and moves you to the LADDER
DIAGRAM MONITOR screen. If [CREATE NET] soft
key at LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR screen is used to
reach NET EDITOR screen, it will be back to blank net, and
if [ZOOM] soft key is used, it will be back to the old net
before modifications in this screen.
(n) [EXIT] Exit editor screen

Analyzes current editing net, and store it into LADDER
program.
If some error is found in the net, it still remains NET
EDITOR screen, and an error message will be displayed.
According to a kind of error, cursor may indicate where the
error is detected.
- 831 -

Cursor move keys and Page change keys move cursor on
screen.
NET EDITOR screen expands image of net horizontally for
a wider net according to its width, while LADDER
DIAGRAM MONITOR/EDITOR screen folds nets wider
than screen width. When net width is expanded over screen
width, attempt to move cursor out of screen will scroll net
image to the direction. The net of maximum size occupies
area of 1024 elements, but actually available area may be
little less for internal use according to the internal condition:
"element" means the space that is occupied by single relay.
(b) "bit address" + INPUT key
Changes bit address of relay under cursor.
(c) "number" / "byte address" + INPUT key
Changes parameter of functional instructions under cursor.

On the LADDER NET EDITOR screen, the return key has no
effect.
After you have finished editing ladder net data, and want to
return to the LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR screen, use the
[EXIT] soft key.
- 832 -
8.3.4 Structure of Valid Net
Valid net must have following structure:
Convergence point
Output
Input section section
Structure of valid net
"Input section" consists of contacts and functional instruction, and the

result of operations of input section is led to "Convergence point".
After the convergence point, there is "Output section" that consists of
coils only. The "Convergence point" is the nearest point to right
power line, where all connections join with each other to gather into
single connection.
Convergence Output
Input section point section
Sample of valid net
Input section contains at least one relay or functional instruction,

however, output section may contain nothing.
Example of net with no output section
Valid net is also restricted in following rules:

· Only one functional instruction is available for a net.
· Functional instruction can be placed only at last (rightmost) of input
section.
· Only coils can be contained in output section.
- 833 -
8.3.5 FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTION LIST Screen
Pressing [FUNC] soft key at NET EDITOR screen reaches

FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTION LIST screen at which you choose a
functional instruction to be entered from list of all available functional
instructions.
Fig. 8.3.5 FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTION LIST screen
Operations at this screen are below:
(1) Operation with soft keys

(a) [SELECT] Select a functional instruction
Selects a functional instruction. The functional instruction
is entered into the editing net.
(b) [SORT NUMBER], [SORT NAME] Rearrange functional
instructions list
Rearrange functional instructions list in two ways. [SORT
NUMBER] soft key arranges the list in numerical order
with their identifying numbers, on the other hand, [SORT
NAME] soft key arranges it in alphabetical order with their
names.
(c) [CANCEL] Quit selecting
Quits selecting functional instruction, and return to NET
EDITOR screen.
- 834 -

(a) Cursor move keys
Cursor move keys move cursor on screen. According to the
cursor position, the functional instruction to be selected
changes.
(b) INPUT key
Act just like [SELECT] soft key.
(3) Shortcuts
(a) [SELECT] soft key and INPUT key following number or
name of a functional instruction will select the specified
functional instruction directly, instead of the one under
cursor.
(b) When [FUNC] soft key in NET EDITOR screen is pressed
following a string that means number or name of a
functional instruction, the specified functional instruction is
entered directly, without displaying FUNCTIONAL
INSTRUCTION LIST screen.
- 835 -
8.3.6 FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTION DATA TABLE EDITOR Screen
At FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTION DATA TABLE EDITOR screen,

you can edit the contents of data table that belongs to some functional
instructions.
To reach this screen, at NET EDITOR screen, press [DATA TABLE]
soft key that is displayed when the cursor is on the following
functional instructions which have a data table.
· Functional Instruction COD (SUB7)
· Functional Instruction CODB (SUB27)
Following edit operations are available at this screen.
· Change the data table value "number" + INPUT key
· Change the data length [BYTE], [WORD], [DWORD]
(These soft keys can be operated only at FUNCTIONAL
INSTRUCTION DATA TABLE EDITOR screen of Functional
Instruction CODB.)
· Change the number of data [COUNT]
· Initialize all of data [INIT]
· Switch to LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR screen [EXIT]
Fig. 8.3.6 FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTION DATA TABLE EDITOR screen

It is same with FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTION DATA TABLE
VIEWER screen.
(2) Display data

The cursor is shown always. You can edit the data that is pointed
by the cursor.
- 836 -
8.3.7 Operating on the FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTION DATA TABLE

EDITOR Screen
Soft keys of FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTION DATA TABLE EDITOR screen

of functional instruction COD
Soft keys of FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTION DATA TABLE EDITOR screen

of functional instruction CODB
(1) [SEARCH NUMBER] Search for data table number

Searches the data table number which you specified.
(2) [SEARCH VALUE] Search for data value
Searches the data value which you specified.
(3) [BCD2] Display BCD2 digits
Changes the display data type to 2 digits of BCD. This operation
only switches the display data type. So it does never edit the data
on memory.
(4) [BCD4] Display BCD4 digits
Changes the display data type to 4 digits of BCD. This operation
only switches the display data type. So it does never edit the data
on memory.
NOTE
In the functional instruction COD (SUB7), the data
type of the data table can dynamically be changed
either BCD2 or BCD4 by "BYT" which is one of input
condition. So the data type of the data table is
decided when the functional instruction COD is
executed. Decide the display data digit according to
the status of "BYT" by pressing either [BCD2] soft
key or [BCD4] soft key. After turning the power on,
the default displaying data type is BCD4 digits. But if
you change data type by pressing [BCD2] soft key or
[BCD4] soft key, the data type is kept until you
change again.
The data table of functional instruction COD is stored
in the memory as BCD4 digits type. If you change
the data type from BCD4 digits to BCD2 digits, the
data is displayed without higher 2-digits. But the data
of higher 2-digits is kept in the memory. So you
return the data type from BCD2 digits to BCD4 digits,
the former BCD4 digits is recovered. The input range
of the data obeys the current data type.
- 837 -
(5) [BYTE] Change to the BYTE length

Changes data length to 1 byte. If overflowed data is found, the
cursor points it, and this operation aborts. Then, correct it and
press [BYTE] soft key again.
(6) [WORD] Change to the 2 BYTE length
Changes data length to 2 bytes. If overflowed data is found, the
cursor points it, and this operation aborts. Then, correct it and
press [WORD] soft key again.
(7) [DWORD] Change to the 4 BYTE length
Changes data length to 4 bytes.
NOTE
On functional instruction CODB, the data type is
decided by the first parameter of it. So, if you change
data type, the first parameter is changed too.
When you added functional instruction CODB to
ladder program, the default data type is BYTE.
(8) [COUNT] Change the number of data

Changes the number of data. If you expanded the number of data,
"0" is set to expanded data as default.
NOTE
In case of functional instruction COD, the number of
data is decided by the first parameter of it. In case of
functional instruction CODB, the number of data is
decided by the second parameter of it. If you change
the number of data, these parameters are changed
too.
(9) [INIT] Initialize all of data

Initializes all of data to "0". The number of data is not changed.
(10) [EXIT] Exit Editor
Ends the FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTION DATA TABLE
EDITOR screen and switches to NET EDITOR screen.
(11) Cursor move keys, page change keys
You can move the cursor by all cursor move keys and page
change keys.
On the FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTION DATA TABLE
EDITOR screen, the return key has no effect.
After you have finished editing ladder net data, and want to
return to the LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR screen, use the
[EXIT] soft key.
- 838 -
(13) "number" + INPUT key

Changes the data that is pointed by the cursor.
The input range of the data obeys the data length and the display
data type.
Ex.) The case of functional instruction COD and displaying
BCD2 digits
The available data range: 0 to 99
Ex.) The case of functional instruction CODB and length of 2
BYTE
The available data range: -32768 to 32767
And you can input multiple numbers by the following methods.
(a) ";"(EOB) is used for separating data.
(Ex.) Press the INPUT key after typing "100;200;300;"
(b) ";=" is used for inputting the same value as preceding data.
(Ex.) Press the INPUT key after typing "100;=;=;200;=",
and it becomes "100,100,100,200,200".
(c) ";;" is used for skipping an input address.
(Ex.) Press the INPUT key after typing "100;;100". The
second data is not inputted.
- 839 -
8.3.8 PROGRAM LIST EDITOR Screen
At PROGRAM LIST EDITOR screen you can create new program

and delete a program in addition to the function of PROGRAM LIST
VIEWER screen. To reach this screen, press [LIST] soft key at
LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR screen. Following operations are
available at PROGRAM LIST EDITOR screen. For more detail of
these operations, see the descriptions of each key to operate.
· Create new program [NEW]
· Delete a program [DELETE]
Fig. 8.3.8 PROGRAM LIST EDITOR screen
On the PROGRAM LIST EDITOR screen, a preview of the editor

screen for the ladder program currently positioned by the cursor on the
program list is displayed on the right of the screen.
(1) Operations using the soft keys

Soft keys of Program List Editor screen
Display the contents of program Add new program
Search for program Delete a program
Soft keys of PROGRAM LIST EDITOR screen
(a) [ZOOM] Display the contents of program

Goes to LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR screen.
- 840 -
(b) [SEARCH] Search for program

Searches for a program. Pressing [SEARCH] soft key after
entering a program name or symbol name searches for
program corresponding to the input character string and
moves the cursor to the program.
(c) [NEW] Create new program
If you entered program name or symbol and press [NEW]
soft key, the program will be checked its existence. If such
program is not found, new program will be created. The
created program is inserted automatically into the program
list and the cursor points it. The following ladder nets are
created automatically according to the type of created
program by this operation.
LEVEL1: Functional instruction END1
Subprogram: Functional instruction SP, SPE
If the status of protection of the program is enabled to edit,
this operation is available.
(d) [DELETE] Delete a program
Deletes a program. If you entered no strings and press
[DELETE] soft key, the program under the cursor is deleted.
If you entered program name or symbol and press
[DELETE] soft key, the program will be checked its
existence, and will be deleted if such program is found.
But, GLOBAL, LEVEL1 and LEVEL2 should always exist
on program list. If you delete these programs, the contents
of program are abandoned. But these programs do not
disappear on program list.
If the status of protection of the program is enabled to edit,
this operation is available.
But this operation is disable in case of the step sequence
program.
- 841 -
8.3.9 Setting the PROGRAM LIST EDITOR Screen
Fig. 8.3.9 PROGRAM LIST EDITOR (SETTING) screen
(1) Program list screen setting

To set the program list screen, use the [SCREEN SETING] soft
key on the Ladder screen.
Page 2 of the ladder setting screen, contains the setting items for
the program list screen.
· SORT PROGRAM LIST BY

Specifies whether to display each subprograms on Program
List editor screen in order of program numbers or symbols.
When ADDRESS NOTATION is SYMBOL, programs
without symbols are displayed in order of program number
after programs with the symbols. GLOBAL, LEVEL1,
LEVEL2, LEVEL3 are out of target of sort.
PROGRAM NUMBER (default)
Program List display screen in order of program numbers.
SYMBOL
Program List display screen in order of symbols.
· FRAME NET IN SUBPROGRAM MODE

Frame nets refer to function instructions END1, END2, END3
at LEVEL1, LEVEL2, and LEVEL3 and function instructions
SP and SPE in subprograms. When you display the contents
of a program with the [ZOOM] key from the PROGRAM
LIST VIEWER/EDITOR screens, specify whether or not to
display these frame nets.
- 842 -
SHOW (default)
Displays frame nets on the LADDER DIAGRAM
MONITOR/EDITOR screens.
HIDE
Hides frame nets from the LADDER DIAGRAM
MONITOR/EDITOR screens.
- 843 -
8.4 SELECTING AND DISPLAYING THE NECESSARY

LADDER NET ([SWITCH] SCREEN])
8.4.1 Collective Monitor Function
The COLLECTIVE MONITOR screen allows you to specify the

ladder net containing the coils to be monitored, so that you can
monitor only the necessary ladder net.
The COLLECTIVE MONITOR screen can be called in either of the
following ways:
(1) Calling from the PROGRAM LIST VIEWER screen

On the program list screen, move the cursor to the "COLLECT"
program position, then click the [ZOOM] soft key.
Fig. 8.4.1 (a) PROGRAM LIST VIEWER screen
- 844 -
(2) Calling from the LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR screen

On the LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR screen, click the
[SWITCH] soft key.
Fig. 8.4.1 (b) LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR screen
- 845 -
8.4.2 COLLECTIVE MONITOR Function
The COLLECTIVE MONITOR screen is such as that shown below.

At first, it does not display any ladder diagram. Ladder nets will be
added to this screen as they are selected with coil search and pickup
operations. Up to 128 nets can be added to the COLLECTIVE
MONITOR screen. If an attempt is made to add more, the most
recently added 128 nets will be displayed.
Fig. 8.4.2 (a) COLLECTIVE MONITOR screen (initial screen)
Soft keys of Collective Monitor screen

Initialization of COLLECTIVE
Program List Jump to the ladder diagram net MONITOR screen
Pick up a ladder Switches to LADDER Delete a net Screen setting

diagram net DIAGRAM MONITOR screen
Fig. 8.4.2 (b) Soft keys of COLLECTIVE MONITOR screen
(a) [LIST] Calling PROGRAM LIST VIEWER screen.

Calls PROGRAM LIST VIEWER screen. On PROGRAM
LIST VIEWER screen, you can switch subprograms to be
displayed on LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR screen.
- 846 -
(b) [PICKUP] Picking up ladder nets.

Picks up ladder nets with coil which you want to monitor,
on COLLECTIVE MONITOR screen.
(c) [JUMP] Jump to a ladder net.
On LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR screen, search the
ladder net at a cursor position on COLLECTIVE
MONITOR screen and jumps to the ladder net.
(d) [SWITCH] Switches to LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR
screen.
Switches to LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR screen.
(e) [DELETE] Quits to display a ladder diagram net on the
screen. (1 net)
Quits to display a ladder diagram net (only 1 net) which is
picked up on COLLECTIVE MONITOR screen. This soft
key appears by setting "SHOW CURSOR" to "YES" on the
setting screen.
(f) [DELETE ALL] Erases to display a ladder diagram net on
the screen. (all nets)
Erases to display ladder diagram nets (all net) which is
picked up on COLLECTIVE MONITOR screen.
(g) [SCREEN SETING] Screen settings.
Calling the setting screen for COLLECTIVE MONITOR
screen. You can change each settings of a ladder diagram
display. Return to COLLECTIVE MONITOR screen when
press the [EXIT] soft key.
(2) Specifying the ladder diagram to monitor

The operation for picking up ladder nets which you want to
monitor on COLLECTIVE MONITOR screen is as follows.
(a) Specification of ladder nets on COLLECTIVE MONITOR
screen
· Specify the address by key input
Pick up a ladder net by keying in the address used by a
coil.
· Indication from a ladder net on the COLLECTIVE
MONITOR screen
Indicate a relay on an already picked up ladder net, with
the cursor, to pick up the net that uses the relay address
for the coil.
(b) Specifying a ladder net from the LADDER DIAGRAM
MONITOR screen
Specify a net from the LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR
screen to pick it and load it into the COLLECTIVE
MONITOR screen.
- 847 -
(3) Picking up a ladder net on the COLLECTIVE MONITOR screen

You can pick up a ladder net from the COLLECTIVE
MONITOR screen. The procedure for picking up a ladder net is
as described below.
(a) Address specification
(i) Enter the address to monitor (for example, R10.1).
(ii) Click the [PICKUP] soft key.
(iii) The net in which a coil uses the address specified in (i)
will be picked up and loaded at the beginning of the
screen.
(b) Specification of an address from a ladder net on the screen
(i) Move the cursor to a relay on the ladder net that uses
the address you want to monitor.
(ii) Click the [PICKUP] soft key.
(iii) The net in which a coil uses the address specified in (i)
will be picked up and loaded at the beginning of the
screen, and the cursor moves to the specified coil
position.
Fig. 8.4.2 (c) COLLECTIVE MONITOR screen
- 848 -
(4) Picking up a ladder net from the LADDER DIAGRAM

MONITOR screen
You can pick up a ladder net from the LADDER DIAGRAM
MONITOR screen. The procedure for picking up a ladder net is
as described below.
(a) From the LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR screen, click
the [SEARCH] soft key to display the soft keys for search.
(b) Move the cursor to the ladder net to pick up.
(c) Click the [PICKUP] soft key to pick up and load the net
specified in (b) at the beginning of the COLLECTIVE
MONITOR screen.
(d) For the ladder net picked up and loaded into the
COLLECTIVE MONITOR screen, the "·" mark is
displayed at the left end of the net.
Fig. 8.4.2 (d) LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR screen (search soft keys)
- 849 -
8.5 ADDRESS ALTERATION FUNCTION
You can alter the address used in a ladder program with another
address.
To perform address change, click the [CHANGE ADRS] soft key to
switch to address change mode.
- 850 -
8.5.1 Screen Structures
LADDER diagram display area
Address input line Message display line Key input line
(1) Key input line

Area in which data is displayed as it is keyed in.
(2) Message display line
Area in which confirmation and error messages are displayed.
(3) Address input line
Enter the address used in the ladder program in the "OLD
ADDRESS" field and a new address into the "NEW ADDRESS"
field.
You can enter either PMC addresses or symbols as addresses.
- 851 -
8.5.2 Operating on the Screen
(1) Entering an address

You can enter an address by entering a "character string" and
pressing the [INPUT] key.
· Address specification using a wildcard

You can use a wildcard (*) in the bit portion of a bit address.
Example: X100.*, which represents X100.0 to X100.7
The following input examples result in errors (invalid input).

(a) Use of a wildcard in a symbol
Example: ALWYS*
(b) Use of a wildcard in a portion other than the bit portion of a
bit address
Example: X10*.0, X10*.*
(c) Use of a wildcard in a byte address
Example: X10*
Address alteration function soft keys
Search in the backward direction

Alter to the address specified in the NEW ADDRESS field
Acquire the address
Alter to the address specified in the NEW ADDRESS field at once
indicated by the cursor
Switch the cursor position Check the address to use Exit from the address alteration function
Move a symbol Search in the forward direction Specify the area subject to search and alteration
Address alteration function soft keys
(a) [ALTER] Alter to the address specified in the NEW

ADDRESS field
Alters the address indicated by the cursor in the ladder
diagram display area to the address specified in the "NEW
ADDRESS" field.
This soft key is not displayed if the cursor in the ladder
diagram does not indicate an address that can be altered.
- 852 -
(b) [ALTER ALL] Alter to the address specified in the NEW

ADDRESS field at once
Alters all instances of the address specified in the "OLD
ADDRESS" field to the address specified in the "NEW
ADDRESS" field at once. If a whole program is selected,
alteration will take place globally. If a local program is
selected, alteration will take place locally.
The following messages are displayed at the start and end of
alteration.
(Confirmation message before alteration)

DO YOU ALTER ALL OLD ADDRESS IN GLOBAL?
(At the end of alteration)
ADDRESSES WERE ALTERED INTO "XXXXX" IN
THE GLOBAL.
(c) [<=>] Switch the cursor position

Switches the cursor position between "OLD ADDRESS"
and "NEW ADDRESS" alternately.
(d) [MOVE SYMBOL] Move a symbol

Deletes the symbol of the address in the "OLD ADDRESS"
field and redefines it for the address in the "NEW
ADDRESS" field.
The following messages are displayed at the start and end of
alteration.
(Confirmation message before alteration)

ARE YOU SURE YOU WANT TO MOVE THE
SYMBOL?
(At the end of alteration)
THE SYMBOL WAS MOVED.
(e) [USE CHECK] Check the address to use

Checks to see if the address specified in the "NEW
ADDRESS" field is in use by searching for the address
through the ladder diagram.
(f) [PREV] Search in the backward direction

Searches for the address specified in the "OLD ADDRESS"
field through the ladder diagram in the backward direction.
(g) [NEXT] Search in the forward direction

Searches for the address specified in the "OLD ADDRESS"
field through the ladder diagram in the forward direction.
- 853 -
(h) [GLOBAL/LOCAL] Specify the area subject to search and

alteration
Used to specify either the entire program (global) or the
subprogram (local) as the area subject to search and
alteration in the ladder diagram.
This soft key is displayed when a local program is selected
in the program list screen.
(i) [PICKUP ADRS] Acquire the address indicated by the

cursor
Used to pick up and load the address indicated by the cursor
in the ladder diagram into the "OLD ADDRESS" or "NEW
ADDRESS" field.
(j) [EXIT] Exits from the address alternation function

Exits from the address alteration function and returns you to
the ladder edit functions.
To use the address alteration function again, press the
[CHANGE ADRS] key while the ladder edit functions are
displayed.
- 854 -
8.6 FUNCTION TO REFERENCE ADDRESSES IN USE
You can switch the LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR screen to the

address map display screen where you can view a list of addresses in
use.
The address map display screen displays 24-byte bit map starting at
any address.
Those "addresses not referenced in ladder diagrams that have
symbols/comments defined" are also displayed.
- 855 -
8.6.1 Address Map Display Screen
Clicking the [ADDRESS MAP] soft key on the ladder editor screen
causes that screen to switch to the address map display screen.
(1) Address representation

By representing each bit as described below, the status of PMC
addresses in use are indicated.
Blank: Address bit not in use
*: Address bit in use (When a byte is used, an asterisk (*) is
displayed to the left of the address representation.)
*R100 · · · · · · · ·: R100 is byte reference.
R101 * * * * * * * *: R101.0 to R101.7 are bit reference,
respectively.
*R102 * * * * * * * *: Either byte or bit reference
S: Bit not referenced in the ladder diagram but that has a
symbol/comment defined.
(2) Additional display line

Any symbol/comment of the address at the cursor position is
displayed in the additional display line.
- 856 -
8.6.2 Operating on the Screen
(a) [SEARCH] Search for an address

Searches for the specified address and displays it as the start
address of the address map display.
(b) [SEARCH UNUSED] Search for unused address
Displays an address map centering on the unused address
with the smallest number found from the specified address
(if not specified, the address at which the cursor is currently
located) and containing the preceding and succeeding 12
bytes, 24 bytes in total.
NOTE
1 Parameters of functional instructions are handled as
addresses in use with a length of one byte,
regardless of the data length of the parameters.
2 The range of the addresses to be searched for is
determined by the specified address.
Example: When R100.0 is specified, R100.0 to
R7999.7 are searched for.
3 The following addresses are not subject to unused
address search:
X/Y1000 to X/Y1127, R9000 to R9499, T0 to T499,
T9000 to T9499, C0 to C399, C5000 to C5199,
K900 to K999, A9000 to A9249, P1 to P5000, and
L1 to L9999
(c) [JUMP]
Moves you to the net in which the bit address at the cursor
position is in use. At this time, the soft keys will be those of
a search menu, allowing lap search with a single round,
regardless of the ladder screen settings.
(d) [EXIT]
Switches the screen to the LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR
screen. At this time, the LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR
screen displays the ladder net that it displayed before the
switch to this screen.
(2) Other operations with keys

You can use the page switch keys to switch between pages.
You cannot scroll with the cursor movement keys.
- 857 -
8.7 FUNCTION TO AUTOMATICALLY INPUT UNSUSED

ADDRESSES
This function automatically inputs unused R, D, and E addresses

during ladder editing.
Specifying an unused start address
Enter any R, D, or E address and click the [AUTO] soft key.

The system searches for an unused bit through a list of addresses in
the ascending order, starting at that address, inputs the unused address
of the unused bit and places that address at the top of the list of unused
addresses. If you repeat this operation, the unused start address will
be updated. This address is not displayed on the screen. Upon the
completion of editing, the stored unused start address is abandoned.
Automatic input of R, D, or E address
After you have specified an unused start address, entering a single

address character "R", "D", or "E" and clicking the [AUTO] soft key
causes an unused bit address subsequent to the specified unused
address to be automatically input.
For the R address, a simpler operation is available: Merely clicking
the [AUTO] soft key enables automatic input.
If you perform this operation without specifying an unused start
address, the system searches for unused bit, starting at the first address
of the specified address type.
If an address used by a functional instruction parameter before a
search for an unused address is found, the following message will be
displayed and the search for an unused bit will be stopped to avoid the
simultaneous uses of the address.
NO FREE ADDRESS IS FOUND BEFORE Xxxxx.
NOTE
This operation is available to bit addresses only.
You cannot automatically input byte addresses.
- 858 -
8.8 AUTOMATICALLY INPUTTING UNUSED PARAMETER

NUMBERS
This function automatically inputs the unused numbers for the

parameters of functional instructions during ladder editing.
Operation
This function is applicable to the first parameters of the following

SUB3 (TMR)
SUB5 (CTR)
SUB24 (TMRB)
SUB56 (CTRB)
SUB57 (DIFU)
SUB58 (DIFD)
Moving the cursor to one of these parameters and clicking the

[AUTO] soft key causes an unused parameter number to be input.
NOTE
Special specifications apply to SUB3 (TMR) and
SUB5 (CTR). For details, see "Automatic input of the
TMR parameter of a functional instruction" and
"Automatic input of the CTR parameter of a functional
instruction", described later.
If you perform this operation with a parameter number already input,

an unused parameter number subsequent to that number will be set.
If an attempt is made to perform this operation on a function
instruction to which this operation is not applicable, the following
error message will be displayed.
CANNOT PERFORM "AUTO" ON THE INSTRUCTION.
If no unused numbers for parameters are found, the following error

message will be displayed.
NO UNUSED PARAMETER NUMBER.
- 859 -
Automatic input of the TMR parameter of a functional instruction
When inputting the TMR parameter, you must consider precision.
(1) Range of parameter numbers subject to this automatic input

Timer numbers with their precision default setting being 8 msec
(timer number 9 and subsequent numbers) are assumed to be
subject to this automatic input.
(2) Display of setting and precision of an input timer number

The setting and precision of an input timer number are displayed
in the additional display line in the following format:
TMR-number xx: setting xxxxxxxxxx precision xxMS
Automatic input of the CTR parameter of a functional instruction
(1) Display of the setting and current value of an input counter

number
The setting and precision of an input counter number are
displayed in the additional display line in the following format:
CTR-number xx: setting xxxxxxxxxx current-value

xxxxxxx
- 860 -
8.9 DETECTION OF DOUBLE COILS
This function automatically detects double coils when you edit WRT
coils with ladder editing operations.
Time to check
When you edit WRT coils, this function always detects double coils.
When the check makes a hit, the following message is displayed:
Xxxxx.x IS USED IN NET xxxxx AS COIL.
WRT coil editing refers to the following:

· Creation of a new WRT coil and change of a coil to a WRT
coil
· Creation of a new WRT.NOT coil and change of a coil to a
WRT.NOT coil
· Creation of a new SET/RST coil and change of a coil to a
SET/RST coil
Objects of the check
Only WRT coils are the objects of this check.

Thus, the following are not the object of this check:
· Output parameters of functional instructions
- 861 -
9.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG]) B-63983EN/02
9 PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING

SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG])
The PMC configuration menu is used to display screens related to
PMC configuration data that change the target PMC, and display and
edit PMC data.
You can move to the PMC configuration menu by pressing the
[SYSTEM] key, then the [PMC CONFIG] soft key.
SYSTEM
PMC main menu PMC submenu

PMC configuration menu
PMC CONFIG TITLE Title display/edit screens
Configuration parameter screens

< CONFIG PARAM
Setting screens (for general functions, multi-
SETING language message function, selectable I/O Link
assignment function, and override mode)
PMC STATUS PMC status screen
SYSTEM PARAM System parameter display/edit screens
MODULE I/O module display/edit screens
SYMBOL Symbol and comment display/edit screens
MESAGE Message display/edit screens
ONLINE Online monitor parameter setting screen
- 862 -
B-63983EN/02 9.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG])
9.1 DISPLAYING AND EDITING TITLE DATA ([TITLE]

SCREENS)
9.1.1 Displaying Title Data

On the TITLE DATA screen, you can check the title data items and
some ladder information items. To switch to the TITLE DATA screen,
press the [TITLE] soft key.
On the TITLE DATA screen, you can perform the following
operations:
· Moving to the TITLE DATA EDITOR screen [EDIT]
· Moving to the TITLE DATA (MESSAGE) screen[MESAGE TITLE]
Title data display area
PMC basic software type and

sequence program PMC type
PMC basic software series and edition
Amount of memory occupied by each set of sequence data
Key input line

Current, maximum, and minimum Message display line
execution time of the ladder program
The title data corresponds to the title of a sequence program. It

consists of the following ten items:
· Machine tool builder name (32 characters)
· Machine name (32 characters)
· NC/PMC type (32 characters)
· Program number (sequence program number) (4 characters)
· Edition (2 characters)
· Program drawing number (sequence program drawing number)
(32 characters)
· Creation date (sequence program creation date) (16 characters)
· Creator name (sequence program creator name) (32 characters)
· ROM writer operator name (32 characters)
· Comment (32 characters)
- 863 -
In addition, the following data is displayed:

· PMC basic software series and edition
· Amount of memory occupied by each set of sequence data
· PMC basic software type and sequence program PMC type
· Current, maximum, and minimum execution time of the ladder
program
Screen operations
Soft keys on the PMC Title Data screen
Switch to the editor screen Switch to the TITLE DATA (MESSAGE) screen
Fig. 9.1.1 Soft keys on the TITLE DATA screen

(a) [EDIT] Switch to the editor screen
Switches to the TITLE DATA EDITOR screen.
(b) [MESAGE TITLE] Switch to the TITLE DATA
(MESSAGE) screen
Switches to the TITLE DATA (MESSAGE) screen.
CAUTION
When the programmer protection function is
enabled, the [EDIT] soft key appears and is
available. When the online monitor function is
enabled, you cannot move to the TITLE DATA
EDITOR screen. For details, see Section 6.2.
- 864 -
9.1.2 Editing Title Data

On the TITLE DATA EDITOR screen, you can edit title data items.
To switch to the TITLE DATA EDITOR screen, press the [EDIT] soft
key on the TITLE DATA screen.
On the TITLE DATA EDITOR screen, you can perform the following
operations:
· Changing the input mode [INPUT MODE]
· Deleting title data [DELETE]
· Moving to the TITLE DATA screen [EXIT EDIT]
Input mode
Title data edit area
Key input line
Screen operations
Soft keys on the PMC Title Data Editor screen
Change the input mode Move to the PMC Title Data screen
Delete title data
Fig. 9.1.2 Soft keys on the TITLE DATA EDITOR screen
- 865 -

(a) [INPUT MODE] Change the input mode
Pressing [INPUT MODE] changes the input mode. The
selection cycles in the following order. In the insert mode,
"INSERT" appears on the screen; in the replace mode,
"ALTER" appears.
Full-string Insert Replace

input mode mode
· Full-string input
The entire string at the cursor is selected and replaced
with an input string.
· Insert mode
Input characters are inserted at the cursor. Pressing the
INPUT key with inputting no characters inserts one space.
· Replace mode
Input characters replace characters at and after the cursor.
Pressing the INPUT key with inputting no characters
replaces the character at the cursor with a space.
(b) [DELETE] Delete characters

Deletes selected characters.
(c) [EXIT EDIT] Switch to the TITLE DATA screen

Terminates editing of title data and moves to the TITLE
DATA screen.
(2) Screen operation using other keys

Use cursor keys to select characters to be edited.
(3) RETURN key operation

On the TITLE DATA EDITOR screen, the return key operation
is disabled.
To terminate title editing and return to the TITLE DATA screen,
use the [EXIT EDIT] soft key.
- 866 -
9.1.3 Displaying Title Data (Message)

On the TITLE DATA (MESSAGE) screen, message data for multi-
language display can be checked. To switch to the TITLE DATA
(MESSAGE) screen, press the [MESAGE TITLE] soft key. On the
TITLE DATA (MESSAGE) screen, the operation described below
can be performed.
· Moving to the TITLE DATA screen [TITLE]
Title data display area
List of usable languages
Memory use status for message data
Message title data consists of the following items:

· TITLE : Message file title information
· AVAILABLE LANGUAGE : List of language IDs included in
a message file
· MEMORY USED : Memory use status of a message file
Screen operation
Soft key on the TITLE DATA (MESSAGE) screen
Switch to the TITLE DATA screen
Fig. 9.1.3 Soft key on the TITLE DATA (MESSAGE) screen
(1) Operation using the soft key

(a) [TITLE] Switch to the TITLE DATA screen
Switches to the TITLE DATA screen.
- 867 -
9.2 DISPLAYING AND EDITING SYMBOL AND COMMENT

DATA ([SYMBOL] SCREENS)
The display and operation of symbol and comment screen differs in
former type from extended type.
For details of former type symbol and comment screen, see

Subsection 9.2.1 to 9.2.4.
For details of extended type symbol and comment screen, see
Subsection 9.2.5 to 9.2.7.
9.2.1 Displaying Symbol and Comment Data

On the SYMBOL & COMMENT DATA VIEWER screen, you can
check symbol and comment data items defined for each address byte
or bit used by a ladder program.
Symbol and comment display area Scroll bar
Total amount of memory occupied

by symbol and comment data
Amount of memory Amount of memory occupied
occupied by symbol data by comment data
Message display line Key input line
ADDRESS: Displays the byte or bit addresses for

which a symbol or comment is
registered.
SYMBOL: Displays the symbol for each address
(16 characters).
COMMENT: Displays the comment for the address
(30 characters).
Scroll bar: Indicates the position of the current
displayed data.
- 868 -
Amount of occupied memory: The amounts of memory occupied by

symbol data and of that occupied by
comment data, and total amount of
memory occupied by symbol and
comment data are displayed under the
symbol and comment display.
Screen operations
Soft keys on the SYMBOL & COMMENT DATA VIEWER screen
Switch to the editor screen Search for data
Fig. 9.2.1 Soft keys on the SYMBOL & COMMENT DATA VIEWER screen

(a) [EDIT] Switch to the editor screen
Moves to the SYMBOL & COMMENT DATA EDITOR
screen.
(b) [SEARCH] Search for data
Searches for the address corresponding to the input string or
an address for which symbol or comment data containing
the input string is defined and displays it on the screen.
Both bit and byte addresses can be searched for.
(2) Screen operations using other keys

Cursor keys: Move the cursor.
Page keys: Scroll the screen up or down one page.
CAUTION
enabled, you cannot move to the SYMBOL &
COMMENT DATA EDITOR screen.
- 869 -
9.2.2 Editing Symbol and Comment Data

On the SYMBOL & COMMENT DATA EDITOR screen, you can
define a symbol for a desired address byte or bit and add a comment.
You can also change already defined symbol and comment data.
Amount of unused memory for

symbol and comment data
Amount of unused memory:

The amount of unused memory for editing symbol and comment data
is displayed under the symbol and comment display.
- 870 -
Screen operations
Soft keys on the SYMBOL & COMMENT DATA EDITOR screen
Register a new entry Delete all data

Terminate editing
Delete data Search for data
Change data or register changed data as a new entry
Fig. 9.2.2 Soft keys on the SYMBOL & COMMENT DATA EDITOR screen

(a) [ZOOM] Change data or register changed data as a new
entry
Switches to the screen for changing data of the entry at the
cursor or registering the changed data as a new entry.
(b) [NEW ENTRY] Register a new entry
Switches to the screen for registering a new entry.
(c) [DELETE] Delete data
Deletes symbol and comment data at the cursor.
(d) [DELETE ALL] Delete all data
Deletes all symbol and comment data.
(e) [SEARCH] Search for data
Searches for the address corresponding to the input string or
an address for which symbol or comment data containing
the input string is defined and displays it on the screen.
Both bit and byte addresses can be searched for.
(f) [EXIT EDIT] Terminate editing
Switches to the SYMBOL & COMMENT DATA VIEWER
screen.
- 871 -
(2) Editing a set of symbol and comment data at a time

An address, symbol, and comment are input at a time.
Enter a symbol and comment following an address with
delimiting them by non-alphanumeric characters as shown below
and press the INPUT key. Symbol or comment data can be
omitted.
address/symbol/comment/ INPUT key ("/" is a non-
alphanumeric character.)
Example 1: Inputs an address, symbol, and comment. A slash

“/” is used as a delimiter.
G0.4/*EMG/EMERGENCYSW/INPUT key
Example 2: Omits a comment. A slash “/” is used as a delimiter.

G0.4/*EMG// INPUT key
G0.4/*EMG/ INPUT key
G0.4/*EMG INPUT key
To update symbol or comment data for an existing address, move

the cursor to the target address and enter symbol or comment
data with omitting the address.
Example 3: Omits an address and inputs symbol and comment

data. A slash “/” is used as a delimiter.
/*EMG/EMERGENCYSW/INPUT key
In this case, when symbol or comment data is omitted, the

displayed data is not changed.

Page keys: Scroll the screen up or down one page.

On the SYMBOL & COMMENT DATA EDITOR screen, the
return key operation is disabled.
To terminate editing of symbol and comment data and return to
the SYMBOL & COMMENT DATA VIEWER screen, use the
[EXIT EDIT] soft key.
- 872 -
9.2.3 Partially Changing Symbol and Comment Data

On the SYMBOL & COMMENT DATA EDITOR screen, pressing
the [ZOOM] soft key displays the following screen. At the bottom of
the screen, the area for editing a symbol and comment data entry
appears. You can define a symbol for a desired address byte or bit
and add a comment. You can also change already defined symbol and
comment data.
For a registered data entry, you can edit the address, symbol, and
comment in character units.
Area for editing a symbol

and comment data entry


The amount of unused memory for editing symbol and comment
data is displayed.
Area for editing a symbol and comment data entry:
Enter an address, symbol data, and comment data.
- 873 -
Screen operations
Soft keys on the symbol & comment data entry editor screen
Replace an entry Delete characters
Change the input mode New entry Cancel edits
Fig. 9.2.3 Soft keys on the symbol & comment data entry editor screen

"ALTER" appears.

input mode mode
· Insert mode
· Replace mode
(b) [ALTER] Replace an entry
Replaces the target entry with edit data. When the data in
the address field is updated and the address is a new one,
the original data corresponding to the old address is deleted
and the edit data is registered as a new entry. If an address
to be registered as a new one is already registered, a
confirmation message appears, which asks you if you are
sure to overwrite the old data.
- 874 -
(c) [ADD LINE] New entry

Registers input data as a new entry. If the address of the
new entry is already registered, a confirmation message
appears, which asks you if you are sure to overwrite the old
data.
(d) [DELETE] Delete characters
Performs either of the following deletions:
· In the full-string input mode
Deletes the string at the cursor.
· In the insert or replace mode
Deletes one character at the cursor.
(e) [CANCEL EDIT] Cancel edits
Cancels edits and switches to the SYMBOL & COMMENT
DATA EDITOR screen. The data is not updated.

On the symbol & comment data entry editor screen, the return
key operation is disabled. To terminate editing of a symbol and
comment data entry and return to the SYMBOL & COMMENT
DATA EDITOR screen, use the [EXIT] soft key.
- 875 -
9.2.4 Registering New Symbol and Comment Data

On the SYMBOL & COMMENT DATA EDITOR screen, pressing
the [NEW ENTRY] soft key displays the following screen. At the
bottom of the screen, the area for editing a symbol and comment data
entry appears. You can register new entry data.
Area for editing a symbol

and comment data entry

Key input line


The amount of unused memory for editing symbol and comment
data is displayed.
Area for editing a symbol and comment data entry:
Enter an address, symbol data, and comment data.
- 876 -
Screen operations
Symbol & comment data entry editor screen
Delete characters
Change the input mode New entry Cancel edits
Fig. 9.2.4 Soft keys on the symbol & comment data entry editor screen

"ALTER" appears.

input mode mode
· Insert mode
· Replace mode
(b) [ADD LINE] Register new entry data
Registers input data as a new entry. If the address of the
new entry is already registered, a confirmation message
appears, which asks you if you are sure to overwrite the old
data.
(c) [DELETE] Delete entry data
Performs either of the following deletions:
· In the full-string input mode
Deletes the string at the cursor.
· In the insert or replace mode
Deletes one character at the cursor.
- 877 -
(d) [CANCEL EDIT] Cancel edits

Cancels edits and switches to the SYMBOL & COMMENT
DATA EDITOR screen. The data is not updated.
On the symbol & comment data entry editor screen, the return
key operation is disabled. To terminate editing of a symbol and
comment data entry and return to the SYMBOL & COMMENT
DATA EDITOR screen, use the [EXIT] soft key.
9.2.5 Displaying extended symbol and comment

Pressing the softkey “SYMBOL”, screen changes to symbol and
comment displaying screen. In this screen, you can see all defined
symbols and comments.
There are two displaying modes. One is “Outline mode” and another
is “Details mode”. You can change this mode each other by pressing
the softkey “DISP MODE”.
Scroll bar
Symbol and comment list display area
Amount of memory occupied Total amount of memory occupied

by comment data by symbol and comment data
Key input line
Amount of memory occupied

by symbol data
Fig. 9.2.5(a) Extended symbol and comment displaying screen (Outline

mode, Symbol order)
- 878 -
Symbol and comment list display area
Symbol and Comment detail display area
Fig. 9.2.5(b) Extended symbol and comment displaying screen (Details

mode, Symbol order)
Pressing the softkey “ADRS ORDER” or “SYMBOL ORDER”, you

can sort entries by address or characters of symbol.
Fig. 9.2.5(c) Extended symbol and comment displaying screen (Outline

mode, Address order)
- 879 -
Fig. 9.2.5(d) Extended symbol and comment displaying screen (Details

mode, Address order)
PROG.SYMBOL: Symbol is displayed. When a symbol is local

symbol, this symbol is displayed as the form
“[PROGRAM NAME].[SYMBOL]”
ADDRESS: Address is displayed.
TYPE: Data type is displayed.
COMMENT: Comment is displayed. When multi
comments are defined, you can see each
comment by pressing the soft key “SWITCH
COMMENT”.
- 880 -
Operation
Soft keys on the SYMBOL & COMMENT DATA VIEWER screen
Switch the program name to symbol notation
Search for data Switch to the address order display Change the display mode
Change the displayed

Switch to the editor screen
comment
Switch to the symbol order display
Switch the program name to program number
Fig. 9.2.5(e) Soft key layout in extended symbol and comment displaying screen
(1) Operation by soft key

(a) [EDIT] Changing to editing screen
Pressing the soft key “EDIT”, the screen is changed to
“extended symbol and comment editing screen”
(b) [SEARCH] Searching word
You can search entry by address expression, part characters
of symbol or part characters of comment.
(c) [ADRS ORDER] / [SYMBOL ORDER] Changing a
displaying order
You can change the displaying order. Pressing the soft key
“ADRS ORDER”, all entries are sorted by address. Pressing
the soft key “SYMBOL ORDER”, entries are sorted by
character of symbols in each sub programs.
(d) [PROG. SYMBOL] / [PROG. NO.] Changing a display of
program name
Pressing the soft key “PROG.SYMBOL”, all symbols
defined to addresses P are displayed as a name of sub
program. Pressing the soft key “PROG. ADRS”, addresses
P are displayed as a name of subprogram.
(e) [SWITCH COMENT] Changing a display of comment set.
Pressing the soft key “SWITCH COMENT”, current
displaying comment set is changed to next comment set.
(f) [DISP MODE] Changing the displaying mode
There are two displaying modes. One is “Outline mode” and
another is “Details mode”. You can change this mode each
other by pressing the soft key “DISP MODE”.
(2) Operation by other keys

CURSOR KEY: Moving cursor
PAGE KEY: Paging up or down.
- 881 -
9.2.6 Editing extended symbol and comment

In symbol and comment editing screen, you can change, add or delete
symbol and comment. To change screen to the symbol and comment
editing screen, press the soft key “EDIT” in the symbol and comment
display screen.
Fig. 9.2.6(a) Extended symbol and comment editing screen (One

comment display)
Pressing the soft key “ALL COMMENT” changes a screen to the “All
comment display” screen. In the “All comment display” screen, you
can refer to other comment sets in editing.
- 882 -
Fig. 9.2.6 (b) Extended symbol and comment editing screen (All
comment display)
FREE: Free memory size to store symbol and comment is shown.

Editing various data such as sequence program and message
will change this free size.
- 883 -
Operation
Soft keys on the SYMBOL & COMMENT DATA EDITOR screen
Change to the all comment Switch the program name to

displayed screen Switch to the address order display symbol notation
Display the previous entry Delete entry End of editing
Search for data Create a new entry Change displaying

comment
Display the next entry
Switch to the symbol order display Switch the program name

to program number
Change to the one comment

displayed screen
Change the input mode Delete all data Delete characters Copy characters
Input the line feed code

Select characters Cut characters Paste characters
(for comment)
Soft keys for the data type inputting edit-box
Set to BOOL Set to WORD
Set to BYTE Set to DWORD
Fig. 9.2.6 (c) Soft key layout in extended symbol and comment editing screen
- 884 -

(a) [ALL COMMENT] / [ONE COMMENT] Changing the
comment display mode
This soft key allows you to change the comment display
mode.
One mode is “All comment display”. Another is “One
comment display”. In the “All comment display” mode, you
can edit all comments in the same screen. In the “One
comment display” mode, you can refer to another symbol
and comment.
(b) [SEARCH] Searching word
You can search entry by address expression, part characters of
symbol or part characters of comment.
(c) [PREV ENTRY] Editing previous entry
You can edit a symbol and comment on previous entry
without leaving from editing mode.
(d) [NEXT ENTRY] Editing next entry
You can edit a symbol and comment on next entry without
leaving from editing screen.
(e) [NEW ENTRY] Adding a new entry
You can add a new symbol and comment entry.
(f) [DELETE ENTRY] Deleting entry
You can delete a symbol and comment entry.
(g) [ADRS ORDER] / [SYMBOL ORDER] Changing a
displaying order
You can change the displaying order. Pressing the soft key
“ADRS ORDER”, all entries are sorted by address. Pressing
the soft key “SYMBOL ORDER”, entries are sorted by
character of symbols in each sub programs.
(h) [PROG. SYMBOL] / [PROG. NO.] Changing a display of
program name
Pressing the soft key “PROG.SYMBOL”, all symbols
defined to addresses P are displayed as a name of sub
program. Pressing the soft key “PROG. NO.”, addresses P
are displayed as a name of subprogram.
(i) [SWITCH COMENT] Changing a display of comment set.
Pressing the soft key “SWITCH COMENT”, current
displaying comment set is changed to next comment set.
(j) [EXIT EDIT] Terminating editing
Pressing the soft key “EXIT EDIT”, editing of symbol and
comment is terminated. A screen is changed to symbol and
comment display screen.
- 885 -
(k) [INPUT MODE] Changing an input mode

Pressing the soft key “INPUT MODE”, input mode is
changed as following. Current input mode is displayed on
right top of the screen.
WHOLE INSERT ALTER
· WHOLE
This mode is whole editing mode. Whole characters on
the cursor are replaced.
· INSERT
The input characters are inserted before the cursor. On
comment editing box, pressing the INPUT key with no
character inserts one white space before the cursor.
· ALTER
The characters on and after cursor are overwritten by
input characters. On comment editing box, pressing the
INPUT key with no character overwrites a character on
the cursor by one white space.
(l) [LINE FEED] Inserting a new line code
On comment editing box, pressing the soft key “LINE
FEED” inserts a new line code. When you print a sequence
program on FANUC LADDER-III, comment string starts
new line at the inserted new line code. New line code is
only available in comment string.
(m) [DELETE ALL] Deleting all symbols and comments
Pressing the soft key “DELETE ALL” deletes all symbols
and comments.
(n) [SELECT] Selecting
Pressing the soft key “SELECT” starts selecting and after
that moving the cursor selects some characters for deleting,
overwriting, copying or cutting. To input characters with
selecting some characters can overwrites selecting
characters by the input characters.
(o) [DELETE] Deleting characters
To press the soft key “DELETE” with selecting some
characters deletes them.
(p) [CUT] Cutting characters
To press the soft key “CUT” with selecting some characters
cuts them and sends them to pasting buffer. Previous
contents of the pasting buffer are lost and new contents are
stored. To move some characters, use the soft key
“SELECT”, “CUT” and “PASTE”.
(q) [COPY] Copying characters
To press the soft key “COPY” with selecting some
characters send them to pasting buffer. Previous contents of
the pasting buffer are lost and new contents are stored. To
copy some characters, use the soft key “SELECT”, “COPY”
and “PASTE”.
- 886 -
(r) [PASTE] Pasting characters

To press the soft key “PASTE” pastes the contents of
pasting buffer. In the “WHOLE” mode, pasted characters
overwrite whole characters on the cursor. In the “INSERT”
mode, pasted characters are inserted at before the cursor. In
the “ALTER” mode, pasted characters overwrite characters
on the cursor. Pasting operation does not delete the contents
of pasting buffer. So you can paste repeatedly.

(3) Operation by “RETURN” key

On the symbol and comment editing screen, the “RETURN” key
is not available. To terminate symbol and comment editing, press
the soft key “EXIT EDIT”.
9.2.7 Adding an extended symbol and comment

To add a new entry of symbol and comment, press the soft key “NEW
ENTRY”. In this situation, you can also change the comment
displaying mode. One is the “one comment displaying mode” and
another is “all comments displaying mode”.
Fig. 9.2.7 (a) Adding new entry of symbol and comment screen (One
comment display)
- 887 -
Fig. 9.2.7 (b) Adding new entry of symbol and comment screen (All
comment display)
- 888 -
Operation
Soft keys on the SYMBOL & COMMENT DATA EDITOR screen (New entry mode)
Change to the all comment

displayed screen Registering the current entry and create a new entry
Registering the entry Cancel edits Switch displaying

comment
Change to the one comment

displayed screen
Change the input mode Select characters Cut characters Paste characters
Insert the line feed code (for comment) Delete characters Copy characters
Fig. 9.2.7 (c) Soft key layout in adding new entry of symbol and comment screen

(a) [ADD] Registering new entry
Pressing the soft key “ADD” register new entry of symbol
and comment.
(b) [NEXT ENTRY] Creating new entry
You can create a new symbol and comment entry without
leaving from editing mode.
(c) [CANCEL EDIT] Discarding the new entry
Pressing the soft key “CANCEL EDIT” discards current
new entry.
As for the explanation of other soft keys, please refer to "3.3.2

Editing a extended symbol and comment".

(3) Operation by “RETURN” key

On the symbol and comment editing screen, the “RETURN” key
is not available. To terminate symbol and comment editing, press
the soft key “ADD” or “CANCEL EDIT”.
- 889 -
9.3 DISPLAYING AND EDITING MESSAGE DATA ([MESAGE]

SCREENS)
9.3.1 Displaying Message Data

On the MESSAGE DATA VIEWER screen, you can check each
external message data item output to the NC screen by functional
instruction DISPB.
To display the MESSAGE DATA VIEWER screen, press the
[MESAGE] soft key. On the MESSAGE DATA VIEWER screen,
you can perform the following operations:
· Moving to the MESSAGE DATA EDITOR screen [EDIT]
· Searching for message data [SEARCH]
· Displaying double-byte characters [DOUBLE CHAR]
NOTE
Multi-language message data are not displayed on
this screen. When you create or edit the data, use
FANUC LADDER-III.
Simple message data display area
Detailed message data display
Description of items in the table

· ADDRESS: Message address
· MON: Current status of the message requests (A addresses)
· NO.: Message number
· MESSAGE: Message data
- 890 -
Screen configuration
(1) On the screen, message addresses, message requesting monitors,
message numbers, and message data are displayed from left to
right. A message requesting monitor indicates the status of the
signal (A addresses) of the message address. In the simple
message data display area, the first line of data is displayed.
(2) In the detailed message data display at the bottom of the screen,
message data at the cursor is all displayed.
(3) On the message display line at the bottom of the screen, an error
message appears when issued.
Screen operations
Soft keys on the PMC Message Data Viewer screen
Switch to the editor screen Display double-byte characters
Search for message data
Fig. 9.3.1 Soft keys on the MESSAGE DATA VIEWER screen

(a) [SEARCH] Search for message data
Searches for the address for which message data containing
an address, message number, or string corresponding to the
input string is set and displays the message data on the
screen.
When a byte address is searched for, a bit 0 address is found.
Example)
When A2 is searched for, the cursor moves to A2.0.
(b) [EDIT] Switch to the editor screen

Moves to the MESSAGE DATA EDITOR screen.
NOTE
enabled, you cannot move to the MESSAGE DATA
EDITOR screen. For details, see Section 6.2.
- 891 -
(c) [DOUBLE CHAR] Display double-byte characters

Displays a character code enclosed by at signs (@) with the
corresponding character actually displayed.
Example)
To terminate double-character display, press the [EXIT] soft

key.

Use cursor and page keys to change the message data in the
detailed message data display.
- 892 -
9.3.2 Editing Message Data

On the MESSAGE DATA EDITOR screen, you can edit message data
items.
To move to the MESSAGE DATA EDITOR screen, press the [EDIT]
soft key on the MESSAGE DATA VIEWER screen. On the
MESSAGE DATA EDITOR screen, you can perform the following
operations:
· Moving to the message data entry editor screen [ZOOM]
· Searching for message data [SEARCH]
· Moving to the MESSAGE DATA VIEWER screen [EXIT EDIT]
· Selecting multiple entries [SELECT]
· Deleting an entry [DELETE]
· Moving an entry [CUT] and [PASTE]
· Copying an entry [COPY] and [PASTE]
· Deleting all entries [DELETE ALL]
Message data edit area
Detailed message data display
(1) On the screen, message addresses, message numbers, and
message data are displayed from left to right. In the message
data edit area, the first line of data is displayed.
(2) In the detailed message data display at the bottom of the screen,
message data at the cursor is all displayed.
- 893 -
Screen operations
Soft keys on the PMC Message Data Editor screen
Delete an entry
Search for message data Switch to the display screen

Cut an entry
Display Copy an entry

Display the entry editor screen
double-byte
Paste an entry
Select multiple entries
Delete all entries
Fig. 9.3.2 Soft keys on the MESSAGE DATA EDITOR screen

(a) [ZOOM] Switch to the entry editor screen
Moves to the entry editor screen for message data to edit
entry data at the cursor.
(b) [SEARCH] Search for message data
Searches for an address, message number, or message data
string. The operation method conforms to that for
[SEARCH] on the MESSAGE DATA VIEWER screen.
For details, see "Screen operations" for the MESSAGE
DATA VIEWER screen.
(c) [DOUBLE CHAR] Display double-byte characters
The operation method conforms to that for [DOUBLE
CHAR] on the MESSAGE DATA VIEWER screen. For
details, see "Screen operations" for the MESSAGE DATA
VIEWER screen.
(d) [EXIT EDIT] Switch to the display screen
Terminates editing of message data and moves to the
MESSAGE DATA VIEWER screen.
- 894 -
(e) [SELECT] Select multiple entries

Use this key to specify multiple entries to be edited with a
soft key such as [DELETE]. Pressing this soft key puts the
screen into the mode for selecting multiple entries starting
from the entry being edited at that time. Move the cursor
and use the search function so that the entries to be edited
are selected. After the entries to be edited are selected, edit
them by pressing each edit soft key. When you want to
delete, move, or copy multiple entries, use this soft key to
select multiple entries.
(f) [DELETE] Delete an entry
Deletes a selected entry.
(g) [CUT] Cut an entry
Cuts a selected entry. The cut data is transferred to the
pasting buffer and deleted from message data. The contents
of the pasting buffer before the data is transferred are erased.
When you want to move data from an entry to another, use
this soft key together with the [PASTE] soft key.
(h) [COPY] Copy an entry
Transfers a selected entry to the pasting buffer. The
message data is not changed. The contents of the pasting
buffer before the data is transferred are erased. When you
want to copy data in an entry to another, use this soft key
together with the [PASTE] soft key.
(i) [PASTE] Paste an entry
Replaces data at the cursor with the entry transferred to the
pasting buffer by the [CUT] or [COPY] soft key. When the
contents of the pasting buffer are pasted by pressing the
[PASTE] soft key, they are not erased. The contents of the
pasting buffer are retained until the power to the NC is
turned off.
(j) [DELETE ALL] Delete all entries
Deletes all message data.
- 895 -
(2) Editing message data for an entry at a time

Message data for an entry is input at a time.
(a) Standard specification
Enter a message string following a message number with
delimiting them by a semicolon (;) as shown below and
press the INPUT key.
message-number;message-string
Example: 2001; ABCDEFG INPUT key
(b) Extended specification

Enter a message string following a message number in the
extended specification format as shown below and press the
INPUT key.
message-number;message-string
Example: AL1+000= ABCDEFG INPUT key
OP1+999= ABCDEFG INPUT key
NOTE
For details of the extended specification of message
number, see the description of Extended
specification in Subsection 4.11.1.(iv)

Use cursor and page keys to change the message data in the
detailed message data display.

On the MESSAGE DATA EDITOR screen, the return key
operation is disabled. To terminate editing of message data and
return to the MESSAGE DATA VIEWER screen, use the [EXIT
EDIT] soft key.
- 896 -
9.3.3 Editing Desired Message Data

On the message data entry editor screen, you can edit desired message
data. To move to the message data entry editor screen, press the
[ZOOM] soft key on the MESSAGE DATA EDITOR screen. On the
message data entry editor screen, you can perform the following
operations:
· Changing the input mode [INPUT MODE]
· Changing data to be edited [<=>]
· Inserting an at sign (@) [@]
· Moving to the MESSAGE DATA EDITOR screen [EXIT]
· Selecting a string [SELECT]
· Deleting a string [DELETE]
· Moving a string [CUT] and [PASTE]
· Copying a string [COPY] and [PASTE]
· Canceling edits [CANCEL EDIT]
Input mode
Simple message data display area
Message number edit area Area for editing a message data string
(1) On the screen, message addresses, message numbers, and
message data are displayed from left to right. In the simple
message data display area, the first line of data is displayed.
(2) The message number edit area and area for editing a message
data string at the bottom of the screen are used to edit the
message number and data.
- 897 -
Screen operations
Soft keys on the message data entry editor screen
Display double-byte characters Copy characters
Change the input mode Select characters Paste characters
Change data to be edited Switch to the editor screen Cut characters
Delete characters
Input an at sign (@)
Cancel edits
Fig. 9.3.3 Soft keys on the message data entry editor screen

"ALTER" appears.

input mode mode
· Insert mode
· Replace mode
(b) [<=>] Change data to be edited
Use this soft key to move the cursor between the message
number edit area and area for editing a message string. You
can check the cursor position to know which data is
currently being edited.
- 898 -
(c) [@] Input an at sign (@)

To display a kana, kanji, or special character, the character
code of the character is enclosed by at signs (@). To
simplify the input of an at sign (@), this soft key adds an at
sign (@) to the string in the key input line. This soft key is
enabled when the input mode is insert or replace. In the
full-string input mode, this soft key is not displayed.
(d) [DOUBLE CHAR] Display double-byte characters
The operation method conforms to that for [DOUBLE
CHAR] on the MESSAGE DATA VIEWER screen. For
details, see "Screen operations" for the MESSAGE DATA
VIEWER screen.
(e) [EXIT] Switch to the editor screen
Terminates entry editing of message data and moves to the
MESSAGE DATA EDITOR screen.
(f) [SELECT] Select characters
Use this key to specify multiple characters to be edited with
a soft key such as [DELETE]. Pressing this soft key puts
the screen into the mode for selecting multiple characters
starting from the character being edited at that time. Move
the cursor so that the characters to be edited are selected.
After the characters to be edited are selected, operate each
edit soft key or enter characters. This soft key is enabled
when the input mode is insert or replace. In the full-string
input mode, this soft key is not displayed.
(g) [DELETE] Delete characters
Deletes selected characters.
(h) [CUT] Cut characters
Cuts selected characters. The cut characters are transferred
to the pasting buffer and deleted from message data. The
contents of the pasting buffer before the characters are
transferred are erased. When you want to move characters,
use this soft key together with the [PASTE] soft key.
(i) [COPY] Copy characters
Transfers selected characters to the pasting buffer. The
message data is not changed. The contents of the pasting
buffer before the characters are transferred are erased.
When you want to copy characters, use this soft key
together with the [PASTE] soft key.
- 899 -
(j) [PASTE] Paste characters

Inserts the characters transferred to the pasting buffer by the
[CUT] or [COPY] soft key at the cursor in the insert input
mode or replaces the data at the cursor with the characters
in other input modes. When the contents of the pasting
buffer are pasted by pressing the [PASTE] soft key, they are
not erased. The contents of the pasting buffer are retained
until the power to the NC is turned off.
(k) [CANCEL EDIT] Cancel edits
Cancels edits made on this screen.

Use cursor keys to change the character to be edited.

On the message data entry editor screen, the return key operation
is disabled. To terminate entry editing of message data and
return to the MESSAGE DATA EDITOR screen, use the [EXIT]
soft key.
NOTE
1 For details of the input format for kanji and other
special character strings, see Subsection 4.11.1.
2 For details of the extended specification of
message number, see the description of Extended
specification in Subsection 4.11.1.(iv)
- 900 -
9.4 DISPLAYING AND EDITING I/O MODULE ALLOCATION

DATA ([MODULE] SCREENS)
9.4.1 Displaying I/O Module Allocation Data

The I/O MODULE VIEWER screen displays data of allocation of I/O
modules to X and Y addresses.
Check that I/O modules are allocated correctly.
To switch to the I/O MODULE VIEWER screen, press the
[MODULE] soft key.
Channel number
Key input line
Address Group Base Slot Allocation name
Screen operations
Soft keys on the I/O MODULE VIEWER screen
Switch to the allocation editor screen Change the channel
Fig. 9.4.1 Soft keys on the I/O MODULE VIEWER screen

(a) [EDIT] Switch to the I/O MODULE EDITOR screen
(b) [PRV.CH] Display I/O module allocation data for the
previous channel
(c) [NXT.CH] Display I/O module allocation data for the next
channel
- 901 -
9.4.2 Editing I/O Module Allocation Data

On the I/O MODULE EDITOR screen, you can edit data of allocation
of I/O modules to X and Y addresses.
To switch to the I/O MODULE EDITOR screen, press the [EDIT] soft
key on the I/O MODULE VIEWER screen.
Channel number
Key input line
Address Group Base Slot Allocation name
Screen operations
Soft keys in I/O MODULE EDITOR screen
Delete allocation at cursor position Delete all allocation Terminate editing

(a) [DELETE] Delete allocation data
Deletes allocation data at the cursor.
- 902 -
(b) [DELETE ALL] Delete all allocation data

When this soft key is pressed, the following confirmation
message appears:
"DO YOU DELETE ALL ALLOCATION DATA?"
The [YES] and [NO] soft keys appear. Press [NO] to cancel
deletion or [YES] to execute deletion.
(c) [EXIT EDIT] Switch to the I/O MODULE VIEWER
screen
(2) Allocation of I/O Units to X and Y addresses

(a) Set the cursor at address to which you will allocate new I/O
Unit.
(b) Type "Group. Base. Slot. I/O-module-name" and press
INPUT key.
Ex) In case you allocate "Group = 1, Base = 0, Slot = 5,
Name = ID16C" to X08, set the cursor at X08 and
1.0.5.ID16C + INPUT key
(a) Set the cursor at X08
(b) 1.0.5.ID16C + INPUT key
NOTE
As to the allocation name of I/O Unit, see Tables 3.2
(a) to 3.2 (c) in Chapter 3.
- 903 -
(c) The I/O Unit is allocated to address of the cursor position

for the I/O Unit size.
In case of above example (b), I/O Unit is allocated at X08
and X09 like as follows.
(c) I/O Unit is allocated at X08 and X09
NOTE
1 To make the allocation effective, after storing the
Ladder program in the flash ROM, turn the power to
the CNC and all slave I/O devices off, then on again.
2 The Ladder program is not stopped automatically
when you open I/O MODULE VIEWER screen or
EDITOR screen.
(3) Delete allocation

(a) Set the cursor at allocation of which you will delete and
press soft key [DELETE].
(b) The allocation is deleted.
(4) Delete all allocation
(a) Press soft key [DELETE ALL].
(b) "DO YOU DELETE ALL ALLOCATION DATA?" is
displayed.
(c) Press soft key [YES].
(d) Allocation of X and Y are all deleted.
On the I/O MODULE EDITOR screen, the return key operation
is disabled. To terminate editing of allocation data and return to
the I/O MODULE VIEWER screen, use the [EXIT EDIT] soft
key.
- 904 -
9.5 DISPLAYING AND EDITING PMC SETTINGS ([SETING]

SCREENS)
There are following setting parameter screens.
· PMC SETTING (GENERAL) screen
· PMC SETTING (MESSGE SHIFT) screen
· PMC SETTING (SELECTABLE I/O) screen
· PMC SETTING (OVERRIDE) screen
Use the [NEXT] and [PREV] soft keys to switch from a setting screen
to another as shown in the figure below.
NOTE
You can also use the keep relay screen (for K900
and after) to set these setting parameters.
Setting screen of multi-language display function, selectable I/O link

assignment function and OVERRIDE mode of the forced input/output
function and System Keep Relay screen can be protected by
programmer protection function.
PMC main menu
[PARAM] [KEEPRL]
[SETING]
Keep Relay
[<] (K0-K99)
PMC SETTING (GENERAL) screen
Page Down The screen protection
The screen protection [NEXT]

[PREV] Keep Relay
(K900-K919)
PMC SETTING (MESSAGE SHIFT)
screen

[PREV] [PREV]
PMC SETTING (WARN PMC SETTING (SELECTABLE I/O) screen

SELECTABLE I/O) screen EFFECTIVE GROUP SELECTION
[YES]
[PREV]
[NEXT]
PMC SETTING (OVERRIDE) screen
- 905 -
(1) PMC SETTING GENERAL screen

On the PMC SETTING (GENERAL) screen, set parameters that
specify the use condition of each PMC function.
Use the [] and [¯] keys to move the item cursor.
Use the [¬] and [®] keys to move the setting cursor and set the
parameter.
Use the page keys to switch to another page.
(a) TRACE START (K906.5)

MANUAL: Executes the trace function by operating the
corresponding soft key on the trace screen.
AUTO: Automatically executes the trace function after
power-on.
(b) EDIT ENABLE(EDIT) (K901.6)

NO: Prevents editing of the sequence program.
YES: Allows editing of the sequence program.
NOTE
This setting effects some PMC functions.
(c) WRITE TO F-ROM (EDIT) (K902.0)

NO: Does not write to flash ROM automatically after
editing of sequence program.
YES: Writes to flash ROM automatically after editing of
sequence program.
- 906 -
(d) RAM WRITE ENABLE (K900.4)

NO: Prevents forcing function.
YES: Allows forcing function.
NOTE
(e) DATA TBL CNTL SCREEN (K900.7)

YES: Displays PMC parameter data table control screen.
NO: Does not displays PMC parameter data table control
screen.
(f) HIDE PMC PARAM (K902.6)

NO: Allows PMC parameter display.
YES: Prevents PMC parameter display.
NOTE
(g) PROTECT PMC PARAM (K902.7)

NO: Allows PMC parameter editing.
YES: Prevents PMC parameter editing.
(h) HIDE PMC PROGRAM (K900.0)

NO: Allows sequence program display.
YES: Prevents sequence program display.
NOTE
(i) IO GROUP SELECTION (K906.1)

HIDE: The PMC SETTING (SELECTABLE I/O) screen
is not displayed.
SHOW: The PMC SETTING (SELECTABLE I/O) screen
is displayed.
(j) KEEP RELAY (SYSTEM) (K906.6)

HIDE: The KEEP RELAY (K900-K919) screen is not
displayed.
SHOW: The KEEP RELAY (K900-K919) screen is
displayed.
- 907 -
(k) LADDER START (K900.2)

AUTO: Executes the sequence program automatically
after the power turns on.
MANUAL: Executes the sequence program by [RUN] soft-
key.
(l) ALLOW PMC STOP (K902.2)

NO: Prevents run/stop operation of the sequence program.
YES: Allows run/stop operation of the sequence program.
NOTE
(m) PROGRAMMER ENABLE (K900.1)

NO: Disables embedded programmer.
YES: Enables embedded programmer.
NOTE
(2) PMC SETTING (MESSAGE SHIFT) screen

On the PMC SETTING (MESSAGE SHIFT) screen, set the
parameters for the message shift function by functional
instruction DISPB.
NOTE
For details of the display condition for this screen,
see Section 6.2.
- 908 -
(a) MESSAGE SHIFT VALUE (K918, K919)

Enter the amount by which the message display request bit
is to be shifted.
The valid data range is between 0 and 1999. The initial
value is 0.
After entering a value, press the INPUT key to set the value.
The input data is also retained after power-off.
(b) MESSAGE SHIFT START ADDRESS (K916, K917)

Enter the start bit address of the area for the message
display request bit to be shifted.
The specified address must be within the A address area.
The initial value is A0.0.
The input data is also retained after power-off.
NOTE
Data set for "MESSAGE SHIFT START ADDRESS"
is valid only when the value set for "MESSAGE
SHIFT VALUE" is other than 0.
- 909 -
(3) Setting screens for the selectable I/O link assignment function
(a) PMC SETTING (WARN SELECTABLE I/O) screen

This caution screen is displayed for the operator's attention
when the operator is switching to the PMC SETTING
(SELECTABLE I/O) screen.
Read the displayed caution carefully.

When you are sure to set parameters after reading the
caution, press the [YES] soft key.
This soft key switches to the PMC SETTING
(SELECTABLE I/O) screen.
NOTE
see Section 6.2.
WARNING
If you modify this setting parameter without care, the
I/O assignment data may not match I/O devices and
turning on the power may result in unexpected
malfunctions of machine. So, it is required that the
operator of this function should be an expert who
fully understands the sequence program and the
operation of PMC. It is also strongly recommended
to the developer of machine that this setting screen
should be protected from careless use by ordinary
operators after the machine is shipped into the field.
- 910 -
(b) PMC SETTING (SELECTABLE I/O) screen

You can set the group of optional I/O device that is
connected with each machines.
The maximum number of I/O Link channels per PMC is 4.

You can set as many sets of these parameters as the number
of available I/O Link channels.
To switch to another page, use the page keys.
Example)
When the number of I/O Link channels is 3, you cannot set
channel 4.
EFFECTIVE GROUP SELECTION

(channel 1: K920 and K921, channel 2: K922 and K923,
channel 3: K924 and K925, channel 4: K926 and K927)
You can select effective I/O group in I/O link assignment
data.
1: I/O group is effective.
0: I/O group is no effective.
The "*" mark means that the group is set as the basic part
by the parameter "BASIC GROUP COUNT" on the
SYSTEM PARAMETER screen. The value can not be set
into this parts.
- 911 -
(4) PMC SETTING (OVERRIDE) screen

On this screen, specify whether to enable the override function.
NOTE
see Section 6.2.
OVERRIDE ENABLE (K906.0)

YES: Enables the override function.
NO: Disables the override function.
NOTE
The change to this parameter setting is made
effective at the next power-on. After changing the
setting of this parameter, be sure to turn the power
off, then on again.

Soft keys common to the setting parameter screens
Move to the next setting screen
Move to the previous setting screen
- 912 -
Soft keys on the PMC SETTING (WARN SELECTABLE I/O)

screen
Move to the PMC SETTING (SELECTABLE I/O)
(a) [PREV] Switch to the previous page

(b) [NEXT] Switch to the next page
(c) [YES] Switch to the PMC SETTING (SELECTABLE I/O)
screen
- 913 -
9.6 DISPLAYING THE STATUS OF PMCS AND CHANGING

THE TARGET PMC ([PMC STATUS] SCREENS)
On the PMC STATUS screen, you can display the status of each
existing PMC and change the target PMC for display and operation on
each screen. To switch to the PMC STATUS screen, press the [PMC
STATUS] soft key.
Title information
Ladder execution time
Ladder execution performance monitor
Program number and edition
Alarm mark
This screen displays the status of up to three PMCs and dual check
safety.
The status display for each PMC shows title information (comment),
ladder execution performance monitor, current execution time of the
ladder program, sequence program number and edition corresponding
to the title data, and alarm mark.
The ladder execution performance monitor shows the progress of the

execution of the level-1 and level-2 sequence sections of the ladder
program on the monitor bar. The progress of the execution of the
level-1 sequence section of the ladder program is displayed with a
numeric value next to the monitor bar. When the ladder program is
stopped, the monitor bar is not displayed.
The alarm mark is displayed only when an alarm is issued on the PMC.
Nothing is displayed when no alarm is issued.
On this screen, you can start and stop a ladder program.
- 914 -
Soft keys on the PMC STATUS screen
Change the PMC Start and stop a ladder program
Fig. 9.6 Soft keys on the PMC STATUS screen
Operation using the soft key

(1) [SWITCH PMC] Change the PMC
Changes the target PMC for display and operation on each screen.
You can check the position of the cursor displayed at the title
information of each PMC to know the current target PMC.
(2) [RUN]/[STOP] Start and stop a ladder program

For details of these operations, see Subsection 9.6.1.
CAUTION
enabled, the [RUN]/[STOP] soft key appears and is
available. For details, see Section 6.2.
- 915 -
9.6.1 Starting and Stopping Sequence Programs

On the title display screen, you can start or stop a sequence program.
(1) Starting a sequence program ([RUN])

When a program is stopped, pressing the [RUN] soft key causes
the system to display the inquiry message "ARE YOU SURE
YOU WANT TO RUN PROGRAM?". Pressing the [YES] soft
key in response to this message causes the program to start. The
status line display changes to "RUN". The sequence program
starts from the beginning. The soft key changes to [STOP].
(2) Stopping a sequence program ([STOP])
When a program is running, pressing the [STOP] soft key causes
the system to display the inquiry message "ARE YOU SURE
YOU WANT TO STOP PROGRAM?". Pressing the [YES] soft
key in response to this message causes the program to stop. The
status line display changes to "STOP". The soft key changes to
[RUN].
WARNING
machine is operating, the machine may behave in
an unexpected way. Before stopping the sequence
program, ensure that there are no people near the
machine and that the tool cannot collide with the
workpiece or machine.
Otherwise, there is an extreme risk of death or
serious injury, as well as the likelihood of the tool,
workpiece, and machine being damaged.
(3) Automatic operation of a sequence program

When LADDER START is set to AUTO (bit 2 of the keep relay
K900 = 0) on the setting screen, a sequence program can be
executed automatically when the power is turned on.
And the inquiry message “ARE YOU SURE YOU WANT TO
RUN PROGRAM?” is displayed after editing the following data.
Pressing the [YES] softkey in response to this message causes
the program to start. The status line display changes to "RUN".
· symbol comment data
· message data
· system parameter
NOTE
In case of a fatal PMC alarm that prevents the
program to start, even if you press "YES" softkey,
the program will not start.
- 916 -
9.7 DISPLAYING AND SETTING PARAMETERS FOR THE

ONLINE FUNCTION ([ONLINE] SCREEN)
The online function allows PMC data to be displayed and edited on a
personal computer when the PMC is connected to FANUC LADDER-
III or Ladder Editing Package.
There is the following function in the online function.
· Ladder monitor display
· Online ladder editing
· PMC parameter display and editing
· Signal state monitor display and modifications
· Input/output to and from the PMC (loading from the PMC, storing
to the PMC)
· Writing to flash ROM
For detailed explanation of the online function, refer to the following
manuals:
Manual name Drawing Description

number
FANUC LADDER-III Operator's Manual B-66234EN Online function by FANUC LADDER-III
Ladder Editing Package (Windows) B-63484EN Online function by Ladder Editing Package
Operator's Manual
CAUTION
1 When one of the following screens is displayed at
PMC, the online communication can not be used.
Change to other screens from the following screens,
and use the online function.
[LADDER], [I/O], [TITLE], [SYSTEM PARAM],
[TRACE], [SYMBOL], [MESAGE], [MODULE]
Also, you can not use the above screens at PMC
during the online communication.
2 When the online function is used with RS-232C, the
selected channel is occupied by the PMC system.
To use other functions with RS-232C, specify other
channel setting than the one used by online
function.
- 917 -
9.7.1 Setting Parameters for the Online Function

The online function can be connected using one of the following three
methods.
Connection method Applicable software

Ethernet FANUC LADDER-III and Ladder Editing Package
RS-232C FANUC LADDER-III
HSSB Ladder Editing Package
Before using the online function, put the online function into the
connection waiting state on the PMC.
To put the PMC into the connection waiting state, use the
PARAMETERS FOR ONLINE MONITOR screen or relevant CNC
parameter.
To use Ethernet for connecting the online function, set Ethernet
communication parameters. For details of the Ethernet
communication parameters, see Subsection 9.7.3.
(1) Setting of online connection using the PARAMETERS FOR

ONLINE MONITOR screen
Press the [ONLINE] soft key to display the PARAMETERS
FOR ONLINE MONITOR screen.
NOTE
enabled, the online setting screen is available. For
- 918 -
Fig. 9.7.1 PARAMETERS FOR ONLINE MONITOR screen
EMG STOP: Terminates communication forcibly. Use this key if

communication becomes abnormal and the connection
cannot be terminated normally.
INIT: Initializes the parameters to their default values.
CAUTION
In case of configuration of CNC with which neither
Ethernet nor HSSB is available, the item of "HIGH
SPEED " is not displayed.
(a) Case of connection by RS-232C (FANUC LADDER-III)

(i) Check that "NOT USE" is selected at the "RS-232C"
item.
(ii) Set the parameter of "CHANNEL" and "BAUD
RATE".
(iii) Move the cursor to the "RS-232C" item with Up or
Down Cursor key.
(iv) Select "USE" with Left or Right Cursor key.
(b) Case of connection by Ethernet (FANUC LADDER-III,
Ladder Editing Package)
(i) Move the cursor to the "HIGH SPEED" item with Up
or Down Cursor key.
(ii) Select "USE" with Left or Right Cursor key.
- 919 -
(c) Case of connection by HSSB (Ladder Editing Package)

(i) Move the cursor to the "HIGH SPEED" item with Up
or Down Cursor key.
(ii) Select "USE" with Left or Right Cursor key.
NOTE
1 When both "RS-232C = USE" and "HIGH SPEED =
USE" are selected, the PMC system will
communicate with the application which is
connected at first. If PMC system is already
connecting with an application, it can not connect
with other applications.
2 When you use the online function by Ethernet, the
setting of Ethernet parameters at CNC is necessary
in advance.
(2) Setting of online connection by NC parameter

You can enable and disable the online connection for Ethernet,
HSSB and RS-232C by NC parameter No.24 without setting on
the PMC online setting screen.
For details of the parameter, see Subsection 2.4.3.
- 920 -
9.7.2 Communication Status

The communication status of RS-232C and HIGH SPEED are
displayed at the online monitor screen during the online
communication.
Fig. 9.7.2 Communication status of online setting screen
RS-232C : The communication condition of RS-232C is displayed.

HIGH SPEED : The communication condition of high-speed I/F (HSSB or
Ethernet) is displayed.
- 921 -
The display messages and the meanings are shown in the table of
below.
Displayed messages Meanings

INACTIVE The communication is inactive.
STOPPING The communication is being stopped.(Wait for the
termination of communication)
STARTING The communication is being started.(Wait for the
termination of communication over another
communication path)
STAND-BY The communication is in standby mode.
CONNECTED The communication is being connected.
NO OPTION The port can be not opened because there is not
option of RS-232C.
BAD PARAMETER Invalid RS-232C parameters are specified.
TIMEOUT ERROR A time-out has occurred and communication is
aborted.
TIMEOUT(K) ERROR A time-out has occurred and communication is
aborted.
BCC ERROR Invalid Block Check Code (packet parity) is
specified.
PARITY ERROR A parity error has occurred.
OVER-RUN ERROR A reception overrun has occurred.
SEQUENCE ERROR Packets have been received in invalid sequence.
DATA ERROR Incorrect packet has been received.
QUEUE OVERFLOW The transmit/receive queue has overflowed.
DISCONNECTED Communication has been terminated successfully.
NO CONNECTION The cable is disconnected.
- 922 -
9.7.3 About Ethernet Communication Parameters

(1) Setting of ethernet parameters
When you try to connect FANUC LADDER-III or Ladder
Editing Package with CNC by Ethernet, it is necessary to set
some Ethernet parameters. The setting of Ethernet parameters
can be set in the following Ethernet parameter screen of CNC.
Please refer to "FANUC Ethernet Board/DATA SERVER Board
OPERATOR'S MANUAL" (B-63354EN) about the detail of the
setting screen and setting parameters.
The setting item necessary for Ethernet connection for PMC
online function is as follows.
· IP ADDRESS (Set the IP address of CNC.
192.168.0.1 etc.)
· SUBNET MASK (Set the mask address of the IP
address. 255.255.255.0 etc.)
· ROUTER IP ADDRESS (If you use the router, set the Router
IP Address.)
· PORT NUMBER (TCP) (8193 etc.)
Fig. 9.7.3 Ethernet parameter setting screen
(2) Starting online communication by offline programmer (Ethernet

connection)
The procedures for online connection with PMC and the offline
programmer (FANUC LADDER-III, Ladder Editing Package) by
Ethernet are as follows. (Example: FANUC LADDER-III)
- 923 -
(a) Start up FANUC LADDER-III, and click the

[Communication] on [Tool] menu.
(b) Select the [Network Address] tab and push the <Add Host>
button. Input the "IP Address" and "Port No." inputted in
(1) of this subsection.
- 924 -
(c) Select the [Setting] tab, and add the IP Address to "Use
device".
(d) Push the <Connect> button for start of the communication.
- 925 -
9.7.4 About connection log of Ethernet

If any errors have occurred during Ethernet connection, the contents
of the errors are displayed at "EMBEDDED LOG" screen of CNC.
Refer to this screen when the communication does not start.
Fig. 9.7.4 The log screen of embedded Ethernet
- 926 -
Connection log Meanings and countermeasures

SnpErr: PDU = m, n, [x] date time An error has occurred during the online communication.
SnpErr: PDU = n, [x] date time m, n: Online communication information that is internal
SnpErr: TaskTimeOut[x] date time information of a system.
x: Error information
6001 PMC does not support the Ethernet.
Confirm the Series/Edition of PMC software.
6003 Unsupported command data was received.
Confirm the Series/Edition of Ethernet board
software.
6004 There was an error in command data.
Confirm the Series/Edition of Ethernet board
software.
6005 PMC does not receive command data.
Confirm the communication status at the online
setting screen of PMC.
6010 PMC does not receive command data.
Confirm if "HIGH SPEED = USE" is selected and
other application is not connected at the online
6011 Time-out error occurred at PMC.
Increase the value of "Time Out" in [Network
Address] of [Communication] menu for FANUC
LADDER-III or Ladder Editing Package.
6012 PMC does not receive command data because it
is busy for processing.
Confirm the communication status at the online
6013 Time-out error occurred at PMC.
Increase the value of "Time Out" in [Network
Address] of [Communication] menu for FANUC
LADDER-III or Ladder Editing Package.
6101 PMC received an unsupported function code.
Confirm the Series/Edition of PMC software.
date time : The time when the error occurred.
Ex.) "0323" means March 23rd.
"1858" means 6:58 PM.
"21161714" means 21st 4:17 PM 14 seconds.
- 927 -
9.8 DISPLAYING AND SETTING SYSTEM PARAMETERS

([SYSTEM PARAM] SCREENS)
On the SYSTEM PARAMETER screen, you can display and set the
following data items:
· Counter data type

· Parameters for an FS0 operator's panel
· Parameters for the selectable I/O Link assignment function
To switch to each data display/setting screen, use the page keys.
- 928 -
9.8.1 Displaying and Setting the Counter Data Type

Display and set the type of counter data used by the functional
instruction counter.
Set BINARY or BCD.
Display screen
Screen operation
Switch to the edit screen

[EDIT] Switch to the edit screen
Switches to the system parameter edit screen.
CAUTION
enabled, you cannot move to the system parameter
edit screen. For details, see Section 6.2.
- 929 -
Setting screen
Screen operation
Terminate setting Initialize settings

(a) [EXIT EDIT] Terminate setting
Switches to the system parameter display screen.
CAUTION
After changing the data type, set the counter value
again.
See Subsection 7.3.2.
(b) [INIT] Initialize settings

Initializes all system parameters.

Use cursor keys to switch between BINARY and BCD.

On the system parameter edit screen, the return key operation is
disabled. To terminate system parameter editing and return to
the system parameter display screen, use the [EXIT EDIT] soft
key.
- 930 -
9.8.2 Displaying and Setting Parameters for an FS0 Operator's

Panel
Display and set parameters for using an FS0 operator's panel.
Display screen
· FS0 OPERATOR PANEL Whether to use an FS0 operator's

panel
· KEY DI ADDRESS Start address of actually connected
external DI
· LED DO ADDRESS Start address of actually connected
external DO
· KEY BIT IMAGE ADDRESS Start address of the key image
referenced by user programs
· LED BIT IMAGE ADDRESS Start address of the LED image
generated by user programs
Screen operation
Move to the edit screen

- 931 -
CAUTION
enabled, you cannot move to the system parameter
edit screen. For details, see Section 6.2.
Setting screen
· FS0 OPERATOR PANEL

Specify whether to connect an FS0 operator's panel. When setting
this item to YES, set the addresses of the actual DI and DO
connected to the operator's panel, address of the key image
transferred from the operator's panel, and address of the LED
image transferred to the operator's panel.
· KEY DI ADDRESS
Set the start address of the actually connected external DI with a
PMC address (X0 to X127, X200 to X327, X400 to X527, or X600
to X727).
· LED DO ADDRESS
Set the start address of the actually connected external DO with a
PMC address (Y0 to Y127, Y200 to Y327, Y400 to Y527, or Y600
to Y727).
· KEY BIT IMAGE ADDRESS
Set the start address of the key image referenced by user programs
with a PMC address. Normally, set an internal relay (R) area.
· LED BIT IMAGE ADDRESS
Set the start address of the LED image generated by user programs
with a PMC address. Normally, set an internal relay (R) area.
- 932 -
Screen operation


Use the [] and [¯] cursor keys to change the item to be edited.
Use the [¬] and [®] cursor keys to change the setting.

key.
- 933 -
9.8.3 Displaying and Setting Parameters for the Selectable I/O Link
Assignment Function
Display and set parameters for using the selectable I/O Link
assignment function.
Display screen
· ENABLE SELECTION
Whether to enable or disable the selectable I/O Link assignment
function
· BASIC GROUP COUNT
Number of groups always enabled for any machine configuration
Screen operation
Move to the edit screen

CAUTION
enabled, the system parameter edit screen cannot
be displayed. For details, see Section 6.2.
- 934 -
Setting screen
· ENABLE SELECTION
Specify whether to enable or disable the selectable I/O Link
assignment function with YES or NO. The initial setting is NO
(disabled).
· BASIC GROUP COUNT
Set the number of groups always enabled for any machine
configuration.
CAUTION
When enabling this function, set the setting
parameters (K920 to K927 described below)
properly according to the actually connected I/O
devices. If this function is enabled, but the DI/DO
area is not assigned to a hardware channel, the
function does not operate.
NOTE
The parameters can be set only for available
channels according to the I/O Link configuration.
For a channel for which the parameters cannot be
set, the BASIC GROUP COUNT field is left blank.
- 935 -
Screen operation


Use the [] and [¯] cursor keys to change the item to be edited.
Use the [¬] and [®] cursor keys to change the setting.

key.
- 936 -
9.9 DISPLAYING AND SETTING CONFIGURATION

PARAMETERS ([CONFIG PARAM] SCREENS)
Configuration parameter setting screens display the following NC
parameters related to PMCs in an easy-to-understand manner and
facilitate setting.
No. Settings Remarks

11900 to Execution priorities of multiple LADDER EXEC screen
11902 PMCs
11905 to Execution ratios of multiple PMCs LADDER EXEC screen
11907
11910 to Input/output addresses of the I/O MACHINE I/F screen
11913 Link
11920 to G/F addresses of the CNC interface CNC I/F screen
11929
11930 Level-1 execution cycle LADDER EXEC screen
11931 Start/stop mode of multiple PMCs LADDER EXEC screen
CAUTION
1 For details of each NC parameter, see Subsection
2.4.3.
2 After setting these NC parameters, turn the power
off, then on again.
- 937 -
9.9.1 Menu for Setting Configuration Parameters

There are the following PMC configuration parameter setting screens:
· MENU screen
· CNC-PMC INTERFACE screen
· MACHINE SIGNAL INTERFACE screen
· LADDER EXECUTION screen
Move to each setting screen from the MENU screen.
Soft key on the PMC CONFIGRATION PARAMETER (MENU) screen
Switch to each setting screen
Fig. 9.9.1 Soft key on the PMC CONFIGRATION PARAMETER (MENU) screen

(a) [SELECT] Switch to each setting screen
NOTE
Each setting screen can be protected using the
programmer protection function. If a setting screen
is protected, the [SELECT] soft key is not displayed.

Use cursor keys to switch to a desired setting item.
- 938 -
9.9.2 Setting the CNC-PMC Interface

On the PMC CONFIGRATION PARAMETER (CNC-PMC
INTERFACE) screen, set a correspondence between the G/F
addresses of each PMC and CNC-PMC interface.
NOTE
For details of the CNC-PMC interface, see the
description of the CNC-PMC interface in Subsection
2.4.3.
G/F addresses
CNC-PMC interface blocks
PMC
Help message
PMC CONFIGRATION PARAMETER (CNC-PMC INTERFACE) screen
CNC-PMC INTERFACE
Displays the number of each CNC-PMC interface block.
BLOCK 1: G0000 to G0768/F0000 to F0768 viewed from the CNC
BLOCK 10:G9000 to G9768/F9000 to F9768 viewed from the CNC
- 939 -
PMC
Assign a PMC to each CNC-PMC interface block.
PMC1: First PMC
PMC2: Second PMC
PMC3: Third PMC
G/F ADDRESS
Set the start G/F addresses.
NOTE
If an invalid value is set for an NC parameter,
"ILLEGAL" is displayed as shown below:
Help message
A help message for operation is displayed.
Example of screen setting and corresponding NC parameter settings
When values are set on the screen as shown in the figure above, the
following settings are input for the corresponding NC parameters:
Block NC parameter
Setting
number number
1 11920 100
2 11921 101
3 11922 102
4 11923 103
5 11924 104
6 11925 105
7 11926 200
8 11927 201
9 11928 300
10 11929 301
- 940 -
NOTE
This screen can be protected from editing using the
Screen operation
Soft keys on the CNC I/F screen
Initialize settings
Previous choice Delete the setting
Next choice Move to the PMC CONFIGRATION PARAMETER (MENU) screen
Fig. 9.9.2 Soft keys on the CNC-PMC INTERFACE screen

(a) [PREV] Previous choice
[NEXT] Next choice
Inputs the value of the previous or next choice for the item
at the cursor like a toggle switch.
PREV NEXT
To select a PMC
PMC1
PMC2
PMC3
To select G/F addresses PREV NEXT

G0000 to G0768/F0000 to F0768
G1000 to G1768/F1000 to F1768
G2000 to G2768/F2000 to F2768
G3000 to G3768/F3000 to F3768
G4000 to G4768/F4000 to F4768
G5000 to G5768/F5000 to F5768
G6000 to G6768/F6000 to F6768
G7000 to G7768/F7000 to F7768
G8000 to G8768/F8000 to F8768
G9000 to G9768/F9000 to F9768
This soft key is displayed and can be operated only when

editing is allowed.
- 941 -
(b) [DELETE] Delete the setting

Deletes the setting of the item at the cursor.
After data is deleted, "*****" is displayed as shown below:

editing is allowed.
CAUTION
When the NC parameters are all set to 0, the initial
status (for the initial status, see (d)) is set. Deleting
all items with this operation is equivalent to setting
the initial status. For this reason, if an attempt is
made to delete the last item, the following message
appears and the item cannot be deleted:
"LAST SETTING DATA CAN NOT BE DELETED."
(c) [MENU] Switch to the MENU screen

Switches to the MENU screen.
(d) [INIT] Initialize settings

Initializes the interface settings.
editing is allowed.
The initial settings are as follows:
- 942 -

Cursor keys
Use them to change the CNC-PMC interface block to be set.
INPUT key
You can also set an item by entering a numeric value or string
and pressing the INPUT key.
To set a PMC
· Enter PMC1, PMC2, or PMC3.
· Enter a numeric value 1, 2, or 3.
To set G/F addresses
· Enter a displayed string such as G0000/F0000.
· Enter a start address such as 0, 1000, or 2000.
CAUTION
1 You can set an item on this screen regardless of the
NC mode.
2 If data is duplicate, the data is displayed in red and
the following message appears:
"DUPLICATE G/F ADDRESS"
- 943 -
9.9.3 Setting the Machine Signal Interface

On the PMC CONFIGRATION PARAMETER (MACHINE
INTERFACE) screen, set the input/output addresses of the I/O Link.
CAUTION
1 For details of input/output addresses of the I/O Link,
see the description of input/output addresses of the
I/O Link in Subsection 2.4.3.
2 For details of input/output addresses for virtual
channels of the I/O Link channel split function, see
the description of the setting related to the I/O Link
channel split function in Subsection 2.4.3.
X/Y addresses
I/O Link channels
PMC
Help message
PMC CONFIGRATION PARAMETER (MACHINE INTERFACE) screen
I/O LINK CH
Displays I/O Link channel numbers.
PMC
Displays each PMC.
PMC1: First PMC
PMC2: Second PMC
PMC3: Third PMC
PMCDCS: Dual check safety ladder
- 944 -
X/Y ADDRESS
Set the start X/Y addresses.
NOTE
Help message
CAUTION
For a channel for which the I/O Link expansion option is not used,
"NO OPTION" appears as shown below.
Settings of NC parameters corresponding to input/output addresses of

the I/O Link and input/output addresses for virtual channels of the I/O
Link channel split function
Channel NC parameter Setting
number
1 11910 100
2 11911 101
3 11912 0
4 11913 0
- 945 -
Screen operation
Soft keys on the MACHINE SIGNAL INTERFACE screen
Previous choice Delete the setting Initialize settings
Next choice Move to the PMC CONFIGRATION PARAMETER (MENU) screen
Fig. 9.9.3 Soft keys on the MACHINE SIGNAL INTERFACE screen

(a) [PREV] Previous choice
[NEXT] Next choice
Inputs the value of the previous or next choice for the item
at the cursor like a toggle switch.
PREV NEXT
To select a PMC
PMC1
PMC2
PMC3
PMCDCS
To select X/Y addresses

PREV NEXT
X0000 to X0127/Y0000 to Y0127
X0200 to X0327/Y0200 to Y0327
X0400 to X0527/Y0400 to Y0527
X0600 to X0727/Y0600 to Y0727

editing is allowed.
(b) [DELETE] Delete the setting

Deletes the setting of the item at the cursor.
After data is deleted, "*****" is displayed as shown below:

editing is allowed.
- 946 -
CAUTION
When the NC parameters are all set to 0, the initial
status (for the initial status, see (e)) is set. Deleting
all items with this operation is equivalent to setting
the initial status. For this reason, if an attempt is
made to delete the last item, the following message
appears and the item cannot be deleted:
"LAST SETTING DATA CAN NOT BE DELETED."
(c) [MENU] Switch to the MENU screen

(d) [INIT] Initialize settings

Initializes the interface settings.
editing is allowed.
The initial settings are as follows:

Cursor keys
Use them to change the I/O Link channel to be set.
INPUT key
You can also set an item by entering a numeric value or string
and pressing the INPUT key.
To set a PMC
· Enter PMC1, PMC2, PMC3, or PMCDCS.
· Enter a numeric value 1, 2, 3, or 9.
To set X/Y addresses

· Enter a displayed string such as X0000/Y0000.
· Enter a start address such as 0, 200,400 or 600.
CAUTION
NC mode.
2 If data is duplicate, the data is displayed in red and
the following message appears:
"DUPLICATE X/Y ADDRESS"
- 947 -
9.9.4 Setting the Parameters Related to Ladder Execution

On the PMC CONFIGRATION PARAMETER (LADDER EXEC)
screen, set the execution priorities of multiple PMCs, execution ratios
of multiple PMCs, level-1 execution cycle, and start/stop control of
multiple PMCs.
CAUTION
1 For details of execution priorities of multiple PMCs,
see the description of execution priorities of multiple
PMCs in Subsection 2.4.3.
2 For details of execution ratios of multiple PMCs, see
the description of execution ratios of multiple PMCs
3 For details of the level-1 execution cycle, see the
description of level-1 execution cycle in Subsection
2.4.3.
4 For details of the start/stop mode of multiple PMCs,
see the description of start/stop control of multiple
PMCs in Subsection 2.4.3.
PMC
Execution priority
Execution time
Execution cycle
Ladder start/stop
Help message
Key input line

EXEC PRIORITY PMC EXEC TIME RATIOS
Displays and sets the execution priority of each PMC. Also displays
and sets the execution time ratio of each PMC.
NOTE
- 948 -
EXEC CYCLE
Set the PMC execution cycle (4 or 8 msec).
NOTE
If an invalid value is set for an NC parameter, the
cursor is not displayed. Press the [INIT] soft key to
release the invalid state.
LADDER RUN/STOP
Specify whether to start/stop the ladder programs of multiple PMCs
synchronously or control the start/stop of the ladder program of each
PMC independently.
Help message
CAUTION
Screen operation
Soft keys for setting execution priorities on the LADDER EXECUTION screen
Move the priority up

Set the execution ratios automatically Initialize settings
Move the priority down Move to the PMC CONFIGRATION PARAMETER (MENU) screen
Soft keys for setting the execution cycle and synchronous start on the LADDER EXECUTION screen
Move to the PMC CONFIGRATION PARAMETER (MENU) screen Initialize settings
Fig. 9.9.4 Soft keys on the LADDER EXECUTION screen

(a) [MOVE UP] Move the execution priority up
Moves a PMC set under EXEC PRIORITY and changes its
execution priority.
The execution time ratio is not changed with this operation
because it is determined by the execution sequence.
This soft key is displayed only when the execution priority
is to be set.
- 949 -
(b) [MOVE DOWN] Move the execution priority down

Moves a PMC set under EXEC PRIORITY and changes its
execution priority.
The execution time ratio is not changed with this operation
because it is determined by the execution sequence.
is to be set.
(c) [AUTO] Set the execution time ratios automatically

Automatically sets the execution time ratios according to
the actual number of steps in the ladder programs.
is to be set.
Example: When PMC1 = 10000 steps, PMC2 = 5000 steps,
and PMC3 = 5000 steps
PMC1 = 10000/(10000 + 5000 + 5000) = 50%
PMC2 = 5000/(10000 + 5000 + 5000) = 25%
PMC3 = 5000/(10000 + 5000 + 5000) = 25%
(d) [MENU] Switch to the MENU screen

(e) [INIT] Initialize settings

Initializes settings.
· EXEC PRIORITY: Set to the default setting.
When the values are all set to 0, the following default
setting is used.
When only the first PMC is used
EXEC PRIORITY PMC EXEC RATIOS
1 PMC1 100%
2 - 0%
3 - 0%
When the first and second PMCs are used

1 PMC1 85%
2 PMC2 15%
3 - 0%
When the first and third PMCs are used

1 PMC1 85%
2 PMC3 15%
3 - 0%
- 950 -
When the first, second, and third PMCs are used

1 PMC1 75%
2 PMC2 15%
3 PMC3 10%
· EXEC CYCLE : 8MS

· LADDER RUN/STOP : INDEPENDENT
NOTE
If an invalid value is set for an NC parameter, press
the [INIT] soft key to release the invalid state.

Cursor keys
Use them to set an item for EXEC CYCLE and LADDER
RUN/STOP.
INPUT key
Use this key to input the execution time ratio in units of 1%.
If the total of values set for the PMCs exceeds 100%, the
following error message appears:
"TOTAL OF EXEC RATIO IS OVER 100%."
CAUTION
NC mode.
2 When the NC parameters are all set to 0, the initial
status (for the initial status, see (d) in (1)) is set.
Setting all execution time ratios to 0 with this
operation is equivalent to setting the initial status.
For this reason, if an attempt is made to set the last
item to 0, the following message appears and the
item cannot be set to 0:
"CANNOT SET 0% TO ALL EXECUTION TIME
RATIOS."
- 951 -
10.STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION B-63983EN/02
10 STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION
- 952 -
B-63983EN/02 10.STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION
10.1 OVERVIEW
10.1.1 Step Sequence Method
The ladder method is most often used for programming the sequence
control governed by a programmable controller. This method, shown
in Fig.10.1.1(a), was derived from relay-panel control circuits. Since
it has been in use for years, many sequence control engineers are
already familiar with it. This method is also used in PMC sequence
programming.
Fig. 10.1.1(a) Ladder method
The greater the number of functions implemented by the PMC for a

CNC system, the larger and the more complicated the sequence
program becomes. A large-scale system requires a larger program and
a greater number of processes, making it hard for the ladder method to
control the overall process. This is because the ladder method does
not describe the order of control. While the ladder method is suitable
for describing partial control, it is hard to apply it to the description of
the flow of control overall.
To overcome this problem, structured programming has been
introduced into sequence control. A PMC that supports the
subprogram function enables the use of modular programs. As shown
in Fig.10.1.1(b), a large-scale program is divided into subprograms for
each function, simplifying the unit of processing. Since the
programmer determines how to divide the main program into
subprograms and the control flow used to call the subprograms,
however, the programs are not necessarily easy-to-understand by
other programmers.
- 953 -
CALL
CALL
Subprogram
Subprogram
Fig. 10.1.1(b) Module method
Given these conditions, a step sequence method has been created to

describe programs structurally. It is well-suited to the control of entire
processes and provides an easy-to-understand visualized flow of the
process. The step sequence programming features the direct
representation of the control flow on a flow chart, as shown in Fig.
10.1.1(c).
Each block of processing is described as a subprogram, using the
ladder method. The entire program is then created by combining these
subprograms.
Step 1
Transition
Step 2
Subprogram of ladder diagram
Drawing flow
Fig. 10.1.1(c) Step sequence method
The step sequence method has the following features:

(1) Increased programming efficiency
· Since the flow of processes can be programmed directly,
simple, correct programming is enabled, reducing the time
required for programming.
· Even for complicated control, programming proceeds from
the main flow to detailed flow in each process, creating a
structured, top-down program, which is easy-to-understand
by persons other than the original creator.
· Structured modules can be used again easily.
- 954 -
(2) Easy debugging and maintenance

· Graphical display enables the operator to easily understand
the execution state of a program visually.
· Erroneous steps in a program can be found easily.
· A part of a program can be easily modified.
(3) High-speed program
· Since only the subprograms required for a certain process
are executed, the cycle time is reduced.
(4) Transition from ladder programs
· Since steps and transitions consist of conventional ladder
programs, conventional ladder programs can be converted
to new step sequence programs, without discarding ladder-
program resources.
In step sequence programming, a sequence control program is divided

into two types of subprograms, steps and transitions. Steps describe
processes. Transitions connect steps and determine whether the
transition conditions from one step to another evaluate true. As shown
in Fig. 10.1.1(d), a step sequence program is described using
graphical symbols.
[ ] Step A Starts execution. Waits for machining request.

(Process 1)
Transition B Machining request?
® When machining is requested
Step C Holds a workpiece on the pallet. (Process 2)
Loading completed?
Transition D
® Once loading has been completed
Step E Machines the workpiece. (Process 3)
Machining completed?
Transition F
® Once machining has been completed
Step G Unloads the workpiece to the pallet. (Process 4)
Unloading completed?
Transition H
® Once unloading has been completed
Step I Moves the pallet. (Process 5)
Fig. 10.1.1(d) Example of machining the workpiece
As shown in this example, the program flow from process 1 through

process 5 is expressed visually. Detailed programs related to the
movements performed as part of each process, and the signals used
for determining whether transition conditions for proceeding to the
next step are satisfied, are not described here. To program
complicated control flows, many other functions are supported, such
as divergence, jump, and nesting functions. The details of these
functions are described later.
Step sequence programming is suitable for creating programs which
control processes sequentially. Programs used for controlling a unit
which operates according to a certain sequence, such as a loader,
- 955 -
ATC, and other peripheral units, are best suited to step sequence
programming. For programs which control units with no particular
sequence, such as that of the operator’s panel which is always
monitoring the emergency stop signal or mode signals, however, are
not well-suited to step sequence programming. The PMC supports the
advantages of both methods, ladder and step sequence programming,
by calling subprograms written according to a step sequence and
those written as a ladder, from the main program.
10.1.2 Graphical Symbols
This manual uses the graphical symbols listed in Table 10.1.1 to

describe step sequence flowcharts. Depending on the character font
being used, the actually displayed symbols may differ slightly from
those listed here.
These graphical symbols are described in the subsequent chapters.
Table 10.1.1 List of graphical symbols

Display of Display
Contents programming Personal Computer
manual CNC Device
FANUC LADDER-III
Step
Sn Sn Sn
Initial Step
[ ] Sn [ ] Sn [ ] Sn
Transition
Pn Pn Pn
Divergence of
Selective
Sequence
Convergence
of Selective
Sequence
Divergence of
Simultaneous
Sequence
Convergence
of
Simultaneous
Sequence
Jump
→ Ln -> Ln -> Ln
Label
← Ln <- Ln <- Ln
Block Step
] Sn ] Sn ] Sn
- 956 -
Display of Display
Contents programming Personal Computer
manual CNC Device
FANUC LADDER-III
Initial Block
[ ] Sn [ ] Sn [ ] Sn
Step
End of Block
Step
10.1.3 Editing and Debugging Step Sequence Programs
The personal computer programmer "FANUC LADDER-III" is used

to edit a step sequence program.
For details of transferring and writing a step sequence program to the
PMC, see Subsection 1.3.4, "Transferring and Writing a Step
Sequence Program to the PMC".
A step sequence program is executed and debugged on the CNC.

For details of debugging a step sequence program, see Subsection
1.3.5, "Checking a Sequence Program".
Table 10.1.3 indicates the step sequence functions usable on FANUC

LADDER-III and the CNC.
Table 10.1.3 Step sequence functions
FANUC
PMC
LADDER-III
Display and edit of a program
• Display of subprogram list ¡ ¡
• Create a new subprogram ¡ ¡
• Delete a subprogram ¡
• Edit a subprogram of Step Sequence form ¡
• Edit a subprogram of ladder diagram ¡ ¡
Input and output
• Input and output with a memory card ¡ ¡
• Input and output with RS232C ¡ ¡
• Write to a FlashROM ¡ ¡
Execution of program
• Execution of a ladder diagram ¡ ¡
Diagnosis and debugging
• Diagnosis of Step Sequence program ¡
• Diagnosis of a ladder diagram ¡ ¡
• Set and display a monitoring timer ¡
- 957 -
10.2 STEP SEQUENCE BASICS
10.2.1 Terminology
A step sequence program is created using a variety of graphical

symbols, as shown in Fig. 10.2.1(a). The main terms used in the step
sequence are described below.
(Block)
[ ] S1 (Initial Step)
P100 (Transition)
S2 (Step)
P101 (Transition)
L1 (Label)
S3
(Divergence of Selective
(Divergence of Simultaneous
Sequence)
(Convergence of
Simultaneous Sequence)
(Convergence of Selective Sequence)
] S10 (Block Step)
L1 (Jump)
Fig. 10.2.1(a) Step sequence elements
- 958 -
(1) Step
Sn
(Pm)
A step indicates a process, which is the basic processing unit in a

step sequence program. In a step, specify the S address (Sn),
which is a step number, and P address (Pm), which indicates a
subprogram (action program) specifying the details of processing
in each step.
(2) Step state transition

When a step sequence program is executed, the process proceeds
as program processing advances, the state of each step changes
accordingly. Each step can assume any of the logical states listed
in Table 10.2.1, its state changes as shown in Fig. 10.2.1(b).
Activation refers to the changing of a step from the inactive state
to the active state.
Inactivation refers to the changing of a step from the active state
to the inactive state.
Table 10.2.1 Step state
State Processing Display

Active Execution Activated step.
Sn
The action program (subprogram) is
being executed.
Inactive Transition Transition from execution to halt.
to halt The action program (subprogram) is
executed once only, then the step
Sn
automatically transits to halt.
Halt Not activated state.
The action program (subprogram) has
not yet been executed.
Inactivate (halt status)
Activate (active status)
Inactivate (transition to halt)
Fig. 10.2.1(b) Step state transition
- 959 -
(3) Transition
Pn
A transition denotes the transition conditions. When these

evaluate true, the step of the corresponding state changes from
the inactive to active state or vice the reverse. Specify the P
address (Pn), which indicates a subprogram describing the
transition conditions in detail.
As shown in Fig. 10.2.1(c), step S2 changes its state from
inactive to active when the conditions described in transition P10
evaluate true, while step S2 changes its state from active to
inactive when the conditions described in transition P20 evaluate
true.
Executing step1 Executing step2 Executing step3
S1 (step 1) S1 (step 1) S1 (step 1)
P10 (Condition is true) P10 P10
S2 (step2) S2 (step2) S2 (step2)
P20 P20 (Condition is true) P20
S3 (step3) S3 (step3) S3 (step3)
Fig. 10.2.1(c) Transition of step state by the transition
Note that the step immediately before a transition must be active

in order to switch the next step from inactive to active when the
conditions specified in the transition evaluate true. As shown in
Fig. 10.2.1(d), step S3 does not change to the active state, even
when transition P20 evaluates true, if step S1 is active and step
S2 is inactive. An active state passes from a certain step to the
next step when the corresponding transition conditions evaluate
true, the execution of the step sequence program advancing one
step.
- 960 -
Executing step1 Executing step1
S1 (step1) S1 (step 1) S1 (step1)
P10 P10
S2 (step2) S2 (step2)
P20 (Condition is true) P20
Fig. 10.2.1(d) Transition of step state by transition
(4) Initial Step
[ ] Sn
(Pm)
While a normal step can be activated by a transition, the initial

step is activated automatically when execution of the program
starts, as shown in Fig. 10.2.1(e).
Stopping program (STOP) Executing program (RUN)

[ ] S1 (step1) [ ] S1 (step1)
P10 P10
P20 P20
Fig. 10.2.1(e) Activate of initial step
Although the initial step, which is usually executed first, is often

placed at the top of a program, it can also be specified at some
point within a program. It is always activated first. After being
deactivated once, it can be subsequently be activated again. In
this case, it acts in the same way as a normal step.
- 961 -
(5) Divergence and Convergence of Selective Sequence

To describe a complicated sequence, selective sequences
can be used.
A selective sequence offers multiple choices, from among which
the condition becomes true first activates the corresponding step,
as shown in Fig. 10.2.1(f). The divergent paths join to generate
the main sequence.
S1 S1 (step1)
(Divergence of selective sequence)
P21 P22 P23
S21 S22 S23
(Convergence of selective sequence)
When transition P21 evaluates true When transition P22 evaluates true.
¯ ¯
S1 S2
(true) (true)
S21 S22 S23 S21 S22 S23
Fig. 10.2.1(f) Selective sequence
- 962 -
(6) Divergence and Convergence of Simultaneous Sequence

A Simultaneous sequence can be used to execute multiple
processes simultaneously. In a Simultaneous sequence, as shown
in Fig. 10.2.1(g), one transition activates multiple steps. The
activated multiple steps are executed independently. Once all
steps along the multiple paths have been completed, the
divergent paths join to generate the main sequence.
S1
P10
(Divergence of simultaneous sequence)
S21 S22 S23
S31 S32 S33
(Convergence of simultaneous sequence)
S4
When transition P10 evaluates true
S1
P10 (true)
S21 S22 S23
S31 S32 S33
S4
Fig. 10.2.1(g) Simultaneous sequence
- 963 -
(7) Jump and Label

The jump function is used to describe a non–serial sequence,
such as a repeated loop. As shown in Fig. 10.2.1(h), when a
jump designation is activated, the sequence jumps to the step
having the corresponding jump destination label, after which that
step is activated. To specify a label number, the L address is
used in the same way as a jump instruction in ladder
programming. A jump can be made to a previous or subsequent
step.
Executing step3 Executing step1
L1 L1 (Label)
P10 P10
P20 P20
P30 (Condition is true) ®

P30
L1 (Jump) L1
Fig. 10.2.1(h) Jump and Label
- 964 -
(8) Block
A block refers to a group of consecutive steps and transitions. A
block can be a step sequence program. The more complicated the
sequence becomes, the larger and more complex the block is. A
program can be divided into multiple blocks in the same way as
for subprograms in ladder programming, based on the concept of
modular programming. Each block is identified by a P address,
which corresponds to the subprogram number in ladder
programming.
A block is executed as the main program in a step sequence, or
called from another step sequence program as a subprogram.
Block 1(P1) Block 2 (P2)
[ ] [ ]
Fig. 10.2.1(i) Block
- 965 -
(9) Calling block

To execute a block as the main program in a step sequence, call
the block with the CALLU (SUB 66) or CALL (SUB65)
instruction in the same way as for ladder subprogram calling
from the second level ladder program.
Ladder (Second level) Block2 (P2)
[ ]
CALLU P2
CALLU P3
Block3 (P3)
[ ]
Fig. 10.2.1(j) Calling block
(10) Block step (calling step sequence program)
Sn
( Pm )
To call a block from the step sequence program as a subprogram,

specify a block step in the step sequence program which calls the
block, as shown in Fig. 10.2.1 (k). This is called bloc nesting.
Block 1 (P1) Block 2 (P2)
[ ] S1 [ ] S231
S232
S21 S22 ] S23
S233
(P2)
S3
Fig. 10.2.1(k) Block nesting
The program shown in Fig. 10.2.1(k) is equivalent to in Fig.

10.2.1(l) which does not use a block step.
- 966 -
Block (P1)
[ ] S1
S21 S22 S231
S232
S233
S3
Fig. 10.2.1(l) Program without block step
(11) End of block step
Use an end block step to terminate nested–block–step calling and

to return to the calling sequence.
- 967 -
10.2.2 Execution of Step Sequence
Editing Compile Executing

(source program) (Object format program)
First level
(Ladder diagram)
END1 (SUB 1) function
Second level
CALL
(Ladder diagram)
CALL
Third level
(Ladder diagram)
Subprogram P1
(Ladder diagram)
[ ] Subprogram P2
(Step sequence)
Subprogram P3
(Ladder diagram)
[ ]
Subprogram P4
(Step sequence)
Subprogram Pn
END (SUB 64) function
Fig. 10.2.2(a) Structure of program
- 968 -
In the step sequence method, a program is created (edited) in units of

subprograms. The edited source program is compiled and converted to
an executable ROM–format program, then linked, as shown in Fig.
10.2.2(a).
A ROM–format program is a kind of a modular program, created
using conventional subprograms. A step sequence block is also a type
of a subprogram. Step sequence blocks are linked to the end of the
first level to third level ladder programs, together with other ladder
subprograms.
In the same way as in the ladder method, a program is activated at
certain intervals.
Refer to section 1.4.3 “Processing Priority (1st Level, 2nd Level, and
3rd Level) “ for details
All subprograms, created using either the ladder or step sequence

method, are called from the second level ladder. Hence, the execution
time of the second level ladder includes those of ladder subprograms,
step sequence programs (blocks), steps, and transitions. Since only the
activated step and the transition which checks the transition condition
from the step to the next step are executed in a step sequence program,
the second level ladder is executed much more frequently than may be
expected from the total number of steps.
- 969 -
LEVEL1 (Ladder diagram)
LEVEL2 (Ladder diagram)
CALLU P2
R0. 0
CALL P1
P1 (Ladder diagram)
P2 (Step sequence)
L1
[ ]
S1 (P3)
P4
S2 (P5)
P6
L1
P4 (Ladder diagram)
P3 (Ladder diagram)
Fig. 10.2.2(b) Execution of step sequence
- 970 -
In the step sequence program shown in Fig. 10.2.2(b), when step S1 is

activated, subprograms are executed according to the timing
illustrated in Fig. 10.2.2(c).
8 msec or 4 msec
1st PMC execution time
LEVEL1
First level
LEVEL2
Second level
Subprogram
P2 P1
Step
P3 P4
Transition
Fig. 10.2.2(c) Timing of execution of step sequence program
In this case, step sequence program P2, step P3, transition P4, and
ladder subprogram P1 are executed. Step P5 and transition P6 are not
executed.
- 971 -
10.3 CONFIGURATION AND OPERATION OF STEP–

SEQUENCE PROGRAMS
10.3.1 Step
A step is a unit of processing in a program.
[Display]
Sn
(Pm)
[Contents]
· Define a step number (Sn), necessary for controlling execution,
and subprogram number (Pm) specifying actual processing, for a
step.
· Assign a step number to a step.
· The same step number cannot be used twice in a program.
· A step has three logical states: the execution, transition to halt,
and halt states. The execution state is also called the active state.
The transition to halt and halt states are collectively called the
inactive state.
State Contents of operation Display Sn.0

Activate Execution Activated step. 1
Sn
The action program
(subprogram) is being
executed.
Inactivate Transition to Transition from execution to 0
halt halt. Sn
The action program
(subprogram) is executed once
only, then the step
automatically transits to halt.
Stop Not activated state. 0
The action program Sn
(subprogram) has not yet been
executed.
- 972 -
Example) State transition of Step B
Transition A
Inactivate (halt state)
Step B
Transition A
Activate (execution state)

Transition C
Transition C
Inactivate (transition to halt)
(Execute one time)
[Example]
After the M7 code is decoded, control is transferred to the next
step using a DEC functional instruction.
S1
(P1) Subprogram P1
MF R0.0
F0
DEC
F7.0 711
P101 Subprogram P101

R0.0
TRSET
- 973 -
10.3.2 Initial Step
An initial step is automatically activated when execution of the

program starts. Once it has been activated, it operates in the same way
as a normal step. The program can be returned to this step through
other steps.
[Display]
[ ] Sn
(Pm)
[Contents]
and subprogram number (Pm) specifying the actual processing,
for an initial step.
· All initial steps are activated when the other steps are not
activated.
· Each block must contain at least one initial step. No limit is
applied to the number of initial steps contained in a block.
· A block having no initial step cannot be executed if called.
· Assign a step number to an initial step.
· The same step number cannot be used more than once in a
program.
· In parallel branch, one initial step is required for each path. (See
example 2.)
[Example 1]
L1
When a program is executed, step P1, specified by an
[ ] S1 initial step, is activated first.
P101 Initial step S1 is executed in the same way as normal

step once S1 has been executed.
S2
P102
L1
- 974 -
[Example 2]
L1
When a program is executed, steps S3 and S4,
S1
specified by an initial step, are activated first.
P101 Once steps S3 and S4 have been executed, initial

steps S3 and S4 are executed in the same way as
normal step when the program starts from step S1.
S2 [ ] S3
P102 P103
[ ] S4 S5
P110
L1
- 975 -
10.3.3 Transition
A transition specifies the conditions governing the transition from the

step to the next step.
[Display]
Pn
[Contents]
· Only one transition is required between steps.
· Transition between steps is performed as described below.
While S1 is activate, only S1 and P101 are
S1
executed.
Other steps and transition are not executed.
P101 When the transition P102 evaluates true unless
S2 is not being executed, the state is ignored.
S2 When the transition P101 evaluates true, control
passes fro S1 to S2. In this case, when the
P102 condition is true, S1 is terminated regardless of
the state of S1, and S2 is activated.
· When a signal is set to 1 in a transition, it remains the state even

if the control is transferred to the subsequent step. To set the
signal to 0, use another subprogram to do so.
[Example]
Refer an example described on the Step function (Sub sec.
10.3.1).
- 976 -
10.3.4 Divergence of Selective Sequence
A selective sequence branches to two or more sequences. When the

transition evaluates true, the corresponding step is activated.
[Display]
[Contents]
· Transitions are placed after a divergence of selective sequence.
· The step connected to the transition for which the conditions are
true is first activated.
· When the conditions for any transition are true simultaneously,
the leftmost step is activated.
· A selective sequence can create up to 16 paths.
[Example]
[ ] S1
When the conditions for P101 are satisfied
earlier than those of P102, step S3 is
P100 P101 activated.
S2 S3
- 977 -
10.3.5 Convergence of Selective Sequence
It combines two or more divergent paths to the main sequence.
[Display]
[Contents]
The number of divergent paths must match that of the
convergent paths.
[Example]
S2 S3 S3 While step S3 is executed, the transition

P103 evaluates true, thus step S4 is activated.
P102 P103
S4
- 978 -
10.3.6 Divergence of Simultaneous Sequence
A simultaneous sequence branches to two or more sequences, and all

steps are activated simultaneously.
[Display]
[Contents]
· A transition must be placed before a divergence of simultaneous
sequence.
· All branched steps are activated simultaneously, then executed.
· A simultaneous sequence can create up to 32 paths.
[Example]
[ ] S1
When the transition P101 evaluates true, step
P101 S2 and S3 are activated simultaneously.
S2 S3
- 979 -
10.3.7 Convergence of Simultaneous Sequence
It combines two or more divergent paths to the main sequence.
[Display]
[Contents]
· A convergence of simultaneous sequence is processed as
follows.
S10 S20 When the transition P120 evaluates true,

step S10 and S20 are terminated and step
S21 is activated.
P120
S21
· Wait processing is processed as follows.

Case 1)
When the transition P109 evaluates true

S10 S15 unless both of step S11 and S16 are
active, control does not pass to step S20.
P110 P115
When the transition P109 evaluates true
while both of S11 and S16 are active, S11
S11 S16 and S16 are terminated and S20 is
activated. In the case, P109 provides the
termination conditions for both S11 and
S16.
P109
S20
- 980 -
Case 2)
S11 S16 To specify the termination conditions for

S11 and S16 separately, place the
conditions in P111 and P116 and specify
P111 P116
two dummy steps, S12 and S17, as
shown
S12 S17
(dummy) (dummy) A dummy step also requires a step
number and subprogram number. Also
specify a dummy transition condition,
which becomes always true, in P110.
P110
S20
10.3.8 Jump
A jump controls the execution of steps non–sequentially, together

with a transition.
[Display]
Ln
[Contents]
· Specify a jump destination label (Ln).
· The step to which control is transferred (jumped) is activated.
· The jump destination must be within the same program.
· A jump cannot be performed from outside a simultaneous
sequence to within the simultaneous sequence, or from within a
simultaneous sequence to outside.
· A jump cannot be performed between parallel–branched paths.
[Example]
L1
When steps S4 and S5 are executed and the
[ ] S1
transition P110 evaluates true, the program is
repeated from initial step S1.
P101
S2 S3
P102 P103
S4 S5
P110
L1
- 981 -
10.3.9 Label
A label specifies the jump destination.
[Display]
Ln
[Contents]
Specify the jump destination label (Ln).
[Example]
Refer to an example described on the jump function (Subsec.
10.3.8).
- 982 -
10.3.10 Block Step
A block step specifies the step sequence subprogram to be executed.
[Display]
] Sn
(Pm)
[Contents]
Define a step number (Sn), which controls the execution of a
block step, and a subprogram (Pm) specifying the actual process,
for a block step.
CAUTION
1 Assign a step number to a block step.
2 The same step number cannot be used twice in a program.
3 A transition must be placed after a block step.
Example)
S1 S1
P101 P101
] S2
(P2) P2
S20 S20
equal
P120 P120
S21 S21
P121 P121
P102
S3 S3
4 Transition P102 cannot be omitted due to the syntax of the step sequence method.
Specify a dummy transition, which becomes always true, for transition P102.
5 Transition P121 must specify the transition condition for the termination of the step
S21.
6 When the conditions of transitions P102 and P121 are switched, step S21 will not
be correctly executed.
- 983 -
10.3.11 Initial Block Step
This is an initial step on the block step.
[Display]
[ ] Sn
(Pm)
[Contents]
and subprogram number (Pm)specifying the actual processing,
for an initial step.
· This step has the same function and graphical symbol as an
initial step.
10.3.12 End Of Block Step
This terminates a block step.
[Display]
[Contents]
· Use this step to terminate a block step.
· Each block requires at least one end block step. No limit is
applied to the number of end block steps.
[Example]
[ ] S1
P100 P103
S2
P102
- 984 -
10.4 EXTENDED LADDER INSTRUCTIONS
To enable the specification of steps and transitions, the components of

a step sequence program, by means of the ladder method, the
following signals and functional instructions are provided. These
signals and instructions can only be used in subprograms in which
step sequence step and transitions are specified.
10.4.1 FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTION TRSET
[Function]
This instruction describes that the conditions for a transition
have been true.
This instruction is used in a subprogram which is called from a
transition.
[Format]
ACT
TRSET
(SUB122)
- 985 -
10.4.2 PMC ADDRESS (S ADDRESS)
[Contents]
· An S address is created to end block step processing.
· The meaning of each bit of the step number (S address) is shown
in the following.
Sn.0 0 : Transition to halt state, or halt state
1 : Execution state
Sn.4 0 : Transition to halt state, or halt state, or the scanning
execute for the first time.
1 : Execution state (Turns ON 1 scan delayed from Sn.0)
· This address allows any subprogram to reference the state of any
step.
· When 0 is written in the S address with byte size, the Execution
State of step that is specified can be initialized. When LADDER
was stopped, or the step which is no longer being called while in
the activated state, etc, the step sequence program can be execute
from the beginning when it is activated next time. The
initialization of Execution State of step should be carried out
with state that step sequence program which contains this step
isn’t called (ACT=0). To initialize a step sequence program,
writes 0 in all the S addresses included within the program.
· A ladder for the TRSET transition instruction can be
programmed using each bits of S address. Referring to S address,
however, adversely affects the portability and comprehensibility.
Use this feature sparingly.
[Example 1]
This address is used to reference the activation states of steps in
a step in which this address has been specified, and performs
complicated wait processing in a program including a
simultaneous sequence.
In case of synchronizing the executing of S2 and S6
S1 S4
P1 P4 Subprogram P1
S2.0
S2 S5 TRSET
P2 P1
S3 S6
- 986 -
[Example 2]
The section between JMP and JMPE in the following example is
execute only once after the specific step (The following example
is in the case of S100.) transits in the activated state from the
inactivated state.
[Processing to execute only once after the transition, here.]
[Processing to execute only every scanning, here.]
- 987 -
10.5 SPECIFICATION OF STEP SEQUENCE
10.5.1 Specification
Item Description
Number of subprogram Up to 5000 (P1 to P5000)
Number of step Up to 1000 Up to 2000 (S1 to S2000)
Number of label Up to 9999 (L1 to L9999)
Maximum number of jumps per block Up to 256
Nesting depth of block step Up to 8 levels
Size of block 192 lines ´ 48 columns
Number of paths Up to 32 paths
....
....
....
Up to 32 paths
....
....
Up to 32 paths
- 988 -
10.5.2 General Rules
· One transition must exist between step and step.
S1 S1
Subprogram
(P10) (P10)
Correct CALL P10
P1 or S1 CALL P11
S2 S2
(P11) (P11) The step S1 calls
subprogram P10, P11.
· The transition shall never be repeated even at the point of the

divergence and the convergence.
S1 S1
P1 Correct
P2 P10 P1 P10
S3 S10 S3 S10
S2 S10 S2 P10
P2 P11 Correct P2 P11
P12
S12 S12
- 989 -
· When a simultaneous sequence is specified in another simultaneous

sequence, one convergence must not be used for each sequence.
S1 S2 S1 S2
P2 P2
S3 S4 S3 S4
Correct
P3
P1
S5 S5
(dummy)
Correct
P1
S6
· When a selective sequence is specified in a simultaneous

sequence, dummy steps must be required both after the
divergence and before convergence.
S1 P2 P4 S1 S2 (dummy)
S2 S3
P2 P4
P3 P5
S3 S4
Correct
P3 P5
P1
S5 (dummy)
S4
P1
S6
- 990 -
· In case of branching again immediately after the convergence, a

step/transition is required between the divergence and
convergence.
S1 S2 S1 S2
Correct
P2 P10 P100 (dummy)

S100 (dummy)
S3 S10
P1 P10
S3 S10
S2 S10 S2 S10
P2 P11 Correct P2 P11
S12 S13 S100 (dummy)

P100 (dummy)
S12 S13
· Immediately after the block step, a dummy transition which is

always true is needed.
S10
P10 When block step S11 is used,
[ ] S100
transition P11 and P101 cannot be
P10 omitted
P100
] S11 Note) P11 is a dummy transition.
S101 The transition condition of
P11 must always be true.
P11
P101
S12
- 991 -
· The divergence must be terminated with the same type of

convergence.
P2 P4 P2 P4
Correct
S2 S3 S2 S3
P3 P5 P3 P5
P2 P2
Correct
S2 S3 S2 S3
P3
P3
· The number of convergences must match that of divergences.
P1 P2 P1 P2
S2 S3 L1 Correct S2 S3 L1
P3 P3
S4 S4
· The number of convergences must match that of divergences,

even at the end of a block step.
P1 P2 P1 P2
S2 S2
P3 P3
Correct
- 992 -
· It is not possible to jump to the other subprogram.
Subprogram P1
Subprogram P2
S10
S100
P10
P100
¬ L1
S101
S11 S20
P101
P11 P20
S102
S12 L1
· It is not possible to jump from a simultaneous sequence to

another simultaneous sequence.
S1
P1
S2 S10
P2 P10
S3 L1
P3
¬ L1
S4
- 993 -
· It is not allowed to jump from inside of the simultaneous

sequence to outside.
¬ L1
S1
P1
S2 S10 S20
P2 P10 P20
S3 S11 L1
- 994 -
10.5.3 Exclusive Control for Functional Instructions
The use of the following functional instructions is restricted in steps

and transitions.
Group Description Functional

instructions
A The instructions operate when a signal CTR (SUB5)
changes. CTRC (SUB60)
Condition Multiple functional instructions TMR (SUB3)
having the same number are TMRB (SUB24)
used. TMRC (SUB54)
Problem Not activated. DIFU (SUB57)
Correct operation cannot be DIFD (SUB58)
guaranteed.
B Restriction due to the interface. WINDR (SUB51)
Condition Data is input or output by using WINDW (SUB52)
two subprograms. DISP (SUB49)
Problem Invalid return value. DISPB (SUB41)
Not terminated. EXIN (SUB40)
AXCTL (SUB53)
(1) Functional instructions of group A

Since these functional instructions operate when the
corresponding signals change, they may not operate correctly
when called from multiple steps.
Example)
While multiple CTR functional instructions are used, when
control passes from S1 to S2 with ACT of CTR not set to
off, CTR is not counted when called from step S2.
S1 Subprogram P100
(P100) R0.0
( )
CTR 1
P1
S2
(P100)
X1.0
Subprogram P1
X1.0
TRSET
- 995 -
Correct program
Divide the subprogram so that ACT of CTR is called after it
is set to off.
S1 Subprogram P100
(P100)
R0.0
CTR 1 ( )
P101
S2
(P102)
X1.0
P103
S3
(P100) Subprogram P101
X1.0
P101 TRSET
S4
R0.0
P103 CTR 1 ( )
R9091.0
Subprogram P103
R9091.1
TRSET
(2) Functional instructions of group B

While an instruction is being executed through the interface with
the NC, other same instructions cannot be executed. PMC
control software does not receive the process when the
instruction is not at a same position (net).
If ACT is set to on and off in different instructions (or
subprograms), these processes are not terminated.
NOTE
Only the window instructions (WINDR and
WINDW) which work as low–speed–type belong to
the group B.
- 996 -
Example)
S1 Subprogram P100
(P100) R9091.1
WINDR R10 R0.0
P1 ( )
S2
R0.0
TRSET
Subprogram P101
R9091.0
WINDR R10 R0.0
( )
Correct program
Correct the program so that ACT is set to on and off within one
subprogram.
S1 Subprogram P100
(P100) R9091.1
R0.1
P1 ( )
S2 CALLU P2
(P101)
Subprogram P1
R0.0
TRSET
Subprogram P101
R9091.0 R0.1
( )
CALLU P2
Subprogram P2
R0.1
WINDR R10 R0.0
( )
- 997 -
10.6 STEP SEQUENCE SCREEN OPERATION
10.6.1 Displaying a Step Sequence Diagram
The following operations are supported to enable the diagnosis and

debugging of a step sequence program.
· Displaying a step sequence and editing a ladder

· Displaying the execution state of a step sequence
· Monitoring the run time of the step sequence program
A step sequence can be operated using the PMC ladder menu.

The PMC ladder menu is used to display PMC ladder related screens
such as a program list screen and ladder diagram display/editor
screen.
The screen display can be switched to the PMC ladder menu by
operating the <SYSTEM> key then the [PMC LADDER] soft key as
shown below.
SYSTEM
PMC main menu

PMC ladder menu
PMC LADDER LIST Program list screen
< LADDER Ladder display/editor screen
Pressing the [LADDER] soft key displays a sequence program

dynamically to enable operation monitoring. On the editor screen,
modifications can be made to relays and function instructions of a
sequence program to change the operation of the sequence program.
The ladder diagram display/edit function consists of the following
screens:
(1) Ladder diagram display screen (ladder diagram monitor screen)
Displays a ladder diagram and monitors the current state of
relays/coils.
(2) Selection monitor screen
Displays a selected ladder net only and monitors the current state
of relays/coils.
(3) Ladder diagram editor screen
Used to edit a ladder on a net-by-net basis.
(4) Net editor screen
Used to edit the contents of a net in a ladder.
(5) Program list display screen
Used to select a subprogram to be displayed on the ladder
diagram display screen.
- 998 -
(6) Program list editor screen

Used to edit a ladder program on a subprogram-by-subprogram
basis and select a subprogram to be edited on the ladder diagram
editor screen.
The following screens can be called from the ladder diagram editor
screen:
(7) Function instruction data table display screen
Enables the data table of a function instruction to be referenced.
(8) Function instruction data table editor screen
Enables the data table of a function instruction to be edited.
(9) Step sequence display screen
Displays a step sequence diagram and monitors the current
step/transition state.
(10) Subprogram list display screen
Used to select a subprogram used with a step sequence.
(11) Step sequence state display screen
Displays the execution state of each step of a step sequence.
NOTE
These screens can be protected using the
- 999 -
The screens make transactions as shown below.

Display function (monitor)
PMC main menu
[<] [PMC LADDER]
PMC ladder menu

[<] [<]
[LIST] (Note2) [LADDER] (Note 1) [LADDER] (Note 1) [LIST] (Note2)
[LIST]
[STEP] Step sequence
Step sequence state
display screen (Sub) state display [ZOOM] Program list editor
[STATE]
screen [ZOOM]
[BACK] Ladder diagram screen
[STEP] [SPLIST] monitor screen [LIST]
[STATE] [SPLIST] [ZOOM]
[SWITCH] [LIST] [ZOOM]
Subprogram list display screen [BACK]
Selection monitor screen
[ZOOM] [BACK] [EXIT] [EDIT]
[STEP] Step sequence [ZOOM] [ZOOM]

Step sequence state Ladder diagram Program list
state display
display screen (Sub) editor screen editor screen
screen
[STATE] [LIST]
[CREATE NET]
[EXIT]
[STATE] [SPLIST] [STEP] [SPLIST] [ZOOM]
Net editor screen Editing functions

Subprogram list display screen
Fig. 10.6.1 Transition of step sequence display and ladder display/editing screen
NOTE
1 Pressing the [PMC LADDER] soft key displays one
of the ladder diagram display screen, selection
monitor screen, or step sequence display screen,
the program list display screen or subprogram list
display screen, which was displayed most recently.
2 The [EDIT] soft key on the ladder diagram display
screen is displayed only when the programmer
function is enabled. (To enable the programmer
function, set the setting item "PROGRAMMER
ENABLE" on the PMC parameter setting screen to
"Yes" or set K900.1 to 1.) Alternatively, set "EDIT
ENABLE" to "Yes" or set K901.6 to 1.
- 1000 -
10.6.2 Hierarchy of Display
A subprogram of a step sequence can call another subprogram of step

sequence (block nesting). When you make a transition through the
step sequence programs, the hierarchical nesting level of the
subprogram currently displayed needs to be considered. The hierarchy
is such that the subprogram list screen is placed at the top, and that as
the nesting of subprograms becomes deeper, the hierarchical level
becomes lower.
To display step sequence subprogram information, three screens are
available: the step sequence display screen, the step sequence state
display screen, and the subprogram list display screen. Various items
of information about the same subprogram can be displayed by
switching among these three screens with the [STEP], [SPLIST] and
[STATE] soft keys. These screen transactions may be said to be
transactions on the same hierarchical level.
On the other hand, pressing the [ZOOM] soft key on the step
sequence display screen or the subprogram list display screen when
the cursor is placed on a step sequence switches the screen display to
the step sequence display screen on one level lower.
Pressing the [BACK] soft key returns the screen display to the step
sequence display screen on the calling subprogram level (one level
higher).
- 1001 -
10.6.3 Program List Display Screen
To display the step sequence diagram display screen first after the
power is turned on, select a subprogram of the step sequence on the
program list display screen.
Program list display screen (step sequence)
On the program list display screen, a subprogram of a step sequence is

marked with or in the "SP" display area. Pressing the
[ZOOM] soft key when the cursor is placed on a subprogram, the
screen display switches to the step sequence display screen.
For details of the program list display screen, see Section 8.1,
"DISPLAYING THE PROGRAM LIST ("LIST" SCREEN)".
- 1002 -
10.6.4 Step Sequence Display Screen
Pressing the [ZOOM] soft key when the cursor is placed on a step
sequence on the program list display screen, subprogram list display
screen, or step sequence screen displays the step sequence display
screen.
Subprogram displayed
Activated step
Additional
information
Fig. 10.6.4 Step sequence display screen
(1) Screen configuration

(a) At the top of the screen, information (“[comment] program
number (symbol)”) on the subprogram for which a sequence
diagram is currently displayed is displayed together with
the coordinates of the cursor position.
(b) The message display line displays a message such as an
error message and inquiry, depending on the situation.
(c) The additional information line displays detail information
on the step sequence diagram element where the cursor is
placed.
When the cursor is placed on a step, the information displayed

changes according to the setting of "STEP NOTATION" described in
Subsection 10.6.5, "Setting the Step Sequence Diagram Screen".
· When "S-ADDRESS" is set in "STEP NOTATION"
[P-address] S-address: symbol information of the S-address
(comment information of the S-address)
· When "P-ADDRESS" is set in "STEP NOTATION"
[S-address] P-address: symbol information of the P-address
(comment information of the P-address)
When the cursor is placed on a transition, jump, or label, detail
information is displayed in the following format:
- 1003 -
Address : Symbol information (Comment information)
When a step sequence diagram is displayed, the screen can display 16

elements vertically and 8 elements horizontally.
(2) Operations using soft keys
Soft keys for step sequence display screen

For 1st level
Subprogram data display Switch to state display screen Program search
Switch to program list screen Switch to subprogram list screen Display setting
For 2nd level andter
To previous level
(a) [ZOOM] Subprogram information display

Switches the screen display to the ladder diagram display
screen or the step sequence display screen.
When you press the [ZOOM] soft key without entering a
character string, the ladder diagram display screen is
displayed if the cursor is placed on a ladder, or the step
sequence display screen is displayed if the cursor is placed
on a step sequence.
When you press the [ZOOM] soft key after entering a
program name or symbol name, the program (ladder
diagram display screen or step sequence display screen)
corresponding to the entered character string is displayed. If
the program is protected, the password needs to be cleared.
If the [ZOOM] soft key is used beyond eight levels, the
zoom function is disabled with an error message.
(b) [LIST] or [BACK] Switch to the program list screen or
the previous level
If the current display screen is a screen on the first level
(namely, a screen selected from the program list screen),
the [LIST] soft key is displayed, and pressing the [LIST]
soft key returns the screen display to the program list
display screen.
If the current display screen is a screen on a second or
lower level, the [BACK] soft key is displayed, and pressing
the [BACK] soft key returns the screen display to the step
sequence display screen that is one level higher.
- 1004 -
(c) [SPLIST] Switch to the subprogram list screen

Switches the screen display to the subprogram list display
screen that displays a list of the subprograms referenced by
the step sequence currently displayed.
(d) [STATE] Switch to the state display screen
Switches the screen display to the step sequence state
display screen.
(e) [SEARCH] Program search
Searches for a program.
When you press the [SEARCH] soft key after entering a
program name or symbol name, the program corresponding
to the entered character string is searched for. If you press
the [SEARCH] soft key without entering any character
string, the program corresponding to the last successfully
found character string is searched for again.
If "NO" is set for "WRAP SEARCH ENABLED"
(Subsection 10.6.5, "Setting the Step Sequence Diagram
Screen"), the search operation ends when the end of the
step sequence program is reached. If "YES" is set, the
processing returns to the start to continue search operation.
(f) [SCREEN SETTING] Display setting
Switches the screen display to the step sequence display
setting screen.
(g) [<]
Switches the screen display to the PMC ladder menu.

(a) Cursor keys, page keys
The cursor can be moved using the up/down/left/right
cursor keys and the page keys.
By pressing the down cursor key after entering a program
name or symbol name, you can search for the program.
(b) INPUT key
With the INPUT key, operations equivalent to those
enabled by the [ZOOM] soft key can be performed.
- 1005 -
10.6.5 Setting the Step Sequence Diagram Screen
Set the display format for the step sequence display screen.
To set each item, use the left/right cursor keys or soft keys.
Fig. 10.6.5 Step sequence display screen
(1) Setting items

· ADDRESS NOTATION
Set whether to use an address or symbol when a
subprogram is to be displayed on the step sequence display
screen.
SYMBOL (default)
An address for which a symbol is defined is displayed
using the symbol. An address for which no symbol is
defined is displayed using the address.
ADDRESS
An address for which a symbol is defined is displayed
using the address at all times.
· STEP NOTATION
Set whether to use an S-address or P-address when the
subprogram of each step is to be displayed on the step
sequence display screen. This setting is valid for steps only.
S-ADDRESS (default)
When “ADDRESS NOTATION” is “ADDRESS”,
each step is displayed using an S-address (step
number). When “ADDRESS NOTATION” is
“SYMBOL”, the symbol set for the S-address is
displayed.
P-ADDRESS
When “ADDRESS NOTATION” is “ADDRESS”,
each step is displayed using a P-address (subprogram
- 1006 -
number). When “ADDRESS NOTATION” is

“SYMBOL”, the symbol set for the P-address is
displayed.
· DIAGRAM COLOR
Set the display color of an entire sequence diagram except
the activation state mark of each step on the step sequence
display screen.
The display color can be changed by entering a numeric
value or the left/right cursor keys. One of 15 color numbers,
0 to 14, can be set.
· ACTIVE STEP COLOR

Set the display color of the activation state mark of each
step on the step sequence display screen.
The setting method and settable colors are the same as for
the display color of a sequence diagram.

Set whether to perform continued search operation from the
start when search processing has reached the end of the step
sequence program.
YES (default)
When search processing has reached the end of the
step sequence program, it goes to the top of the
program to continue to perform the search operation.
NO
When search processing has reached the end of a step
sequence program, it ends with failure.

Soft keys on step sequence display setting screen
Switch to step sequence display screen
Initialization of setting
(a) [INIT]
Initializes all settings.
(b) [EXIT]
Returns the screen display to the step sequence display
screen.
- 1007 -
10.6.6 Subprogram List Display Screen
When you press the [SPLIST] soft key on the step sequence display
screen, a list of the subprograms that are being used with the step
sequence currently displayed is displayed.
The subprogram list display screen displays information on the

subprograms that are being used with the step sequence currently
displayed.
Subprogram displayed
Step sequence hierarchy information

List display area
Fig. 10.6.6 Subprogram list display screen

At the top of the screen, information (“[comment] program
number (symbol)”) on the subprogram currently displayed and
the number of programs being used with the subprogram are
displayed.
The message display line displays a message such as an error
message and inquiry, depending on the situation.
(2) List display area

A list of the programs being used in the step sequence diagram is
displayed. At the start of a program list, step sequence hierarchy
information is displayed.
A program on the current hierarchical level is displayed against a
light-blue background.
(a) The "SP" display area displays subprogram protection

information and program type information.
- 1008 -
(Lock) : Unable to browse and edit (Global

program)
(Loupe) : Ladder program which is able to browse
but unable to edit
(Pencil) : Ladder program which is able to browse
and edit
(Loupe) : Step sequence program which is able to
browse but unable to edit
(Pencil) : Step sequence program which is able to
browse and edit
Step sequence hierarchy information display includes

hierarchical level numbers.
(b) The "PROGRAM NO." area displays program names.

Program names are divided into three types:
Selection monitor : Means the selection monitor function.
Entire program : Means an entire program.
Level n(n = 1, 2, 3) : Represents ladder level 1, 2, or 3.
Pm (m = Subprogram number) : Represents a subprogram.
Symbols can displayed by setting "SYMBOL" for
"ADDRESS NOTATION" on the ladder diagram setting
screen.
(c) The "SIZE" area displays the size of a program in bytes.

If the size of a program exceeds 1024 bytes, the size is
indicated in K bytes (1024 bytes), and "K" is suffixed.
Example 1)
When the size of a program does not exceed 1024
bytes
1023 bytes : Indicated as "1023"
Example 2)
When the size of a program exceeds 1024 bytes
20000 bytes : Indicated as "19K"
(The fractional digits are discarded.)
Step sequence hierarchy information displayed does not include

size information.
- 1009 -
Soft keys for subprogram list display screen

For 1st level
Subprogram data display Switch to state display screen Program search
Switch to program list screen Switch to step sequence display screen
For 2nd level and after
To previous level
(a) [ZOOM] Subprogram information display

Switches the screen display to the ladder diagram display
screen or the step sequence display screen.
When you press the [ZOOM] soft key without entering a
character string, the ladder diagram display screen is
displayed if the cursor is placed on a ladder, or the step
sequence display screen is displayed if the cursor is placed
on a step sequence.
When you press the [ZOOM] soft key after entering a
program name or symbol name, the program (ladder
diagram display screen or step sequence display screen)
corresponding to the entered character string is displayed. If
the program is protected, the password needs to be cleared.
If the [ZOOM] soft key is used beyond eight levels, the
zoom function is disabled with an error message.
(b) [LIST] or [BACK] Switch to the program list screen or
the previous level
If the current display screen is a screen on the first level
(namely, a screen selected from the program list screen),
the [LIST] soft key is displayed, and pressing the [LIST]
soft key returns the screen display to the program list
display screen.
If the current display screen is a screen on a second or
lower level, the [BACK] soft key is displayed, and pressing
the [BACK] soft key returns the screen display to the step
sequence display screen that is one level higher.
(c) [STEP] Switch to the step sequence display screen
screen.
(d) [STATE] Switch to the state display screen
Switches the screen display to the step sequence state
display screen.
- 1010 -
(e) [SEARCH] Program search

Searches for a program.
When you press the [SEARCH] soft key after entering a
program name or symbol name, the program corresponding
to the entered character string is searched for. If you press
the [SEARCH] soft key without entering any character
string, the program corresponding to the last successfully
found character string is searched for again.
If "NO" is set for "WRAP SEARCH ENABLED"
(Subsection 10.6.5, "Setting the Step Sequence Diagram
Screen"), the search operation ends when the end of the
step sequence program is reached. If "YES" is set, the
processing returns to the start to continue search operation.
(4) Moving to a higher hierarchical level

When you press the [BACK] soft key after moving the cursor to
the hierarchy information area of the subprogram list, the screen
display moves to the specified higher hierarchical level. In this
case, the information below that level is lost.
10.6.7 Setting Subprogram List Screen
The method of setting the subprogram list display screen is the same
as for the program list display screen.
For details of the setting screen, see Subsection 8.1.1, "Setting
Program List Screen".
10.6.8 Ladder diagram monitor screen
The ladder diagram display screen is displayed by pressing the

[ZOOM] soft key when the cursor is placed on a ladder subprogram
on the program list screen, subprogram list screen, or step sequence
display screen.
This screen is the same as the screen described in Section 8.2, "
MONITORING LADDER DIAGRAMS ([LADDER] SCREEN) ".
For details of the screen, see Section 8.2.
10.6.9 Collective monitor screen
This screen is the same as the screen described in Subsection 8.4.2,

"COLLECTIVE MONITOR Function". For details of the screen, see
Subsection 8.4.2.
If you use the function for jumping to a ladder net with the [JUMP]
soft key on the selection monitor screen, step sequence display
hierarchy information is lost.
- 1011 -
10.7 EXECUTION STATE DISPLAY
The execution state of each step of a step sequence is displayed.
· Step sequence state display screen (global)

· Step sequence state display screen (subprogram)
· Time monitor setting screen
The screen configuration is shown below.
[STATE] [LIST]
Step sequence state Program list display
display screen screen
Time (global)
[MONIT] [STATE]
monitor
setting [LIST] [ZOOM]
screen
[STATE] [STEP]
Step sequence Step sequence
state display screen display screen
[MONIT] (subprogram)
[STATE]
[STATE] [SPLIST] [STEP] [SPLIST]
Subprogram list display screen
- 1012 -
10.7.1 Step Sequence State Display Screen (Global)
Pressing the [STATE] soft key on the program list screen displays the
step sequence state display screen (global).
This screen displays the execution state and the elapsed time of
operation of an entire step sequence.
Fig. 10.7.1 Step sequence state display screen (global)

STEP NO.
Displays a step number. In parentheses, the symbol of the
address of a step number is displayed.
STATUS
When "EXEC" is displayed, it means the active state. When
"EXEC" is not displayed, it means the inactive state.
ELAPSE(MS)
Indicates the period of time of the active state. In the active
state, the time indication changes.
MONITOR
Shows assigned time monitor information.
· T(x) : Timer number for monitoring
· OVER : Monitor time exceeded

- 1013 -
Soft keys for step sequence state display screen (global)
Switch to program list screen Switch to time monitor setting screen
Step search Abnormal state reset
(a) [LIST] Switch to the program list display screen

Switches the screen display to the program list display
screen.
(b) [SEARCH] Step search
Searches for a step. When you press the [SEARCH] soft
key after entering a step number or symbol name, the step
corresponding to the entered character string is found, and
the display is updated so that the found step is placed at the
start.
(c) [RESET] Abnormal state reset
Resets abnormal states that have occurred in all time
monitoring operations.
For individual resetting, reset a desired monitoring
operation on the time monitor setting screen.
(d) [MONIT] Switch to the time monitor setting screen
Switches the screen display to the time monitor setting
screen.
(e) [<]
Switches the screen display to the PMC ladder menu.

Page keys
The page keys can be used to switch from one display page
to another. A program can be searched using the down
cursor key following the step number or symbol name
entered.
- 1014 -
10.7.2 Step Sequence State Display Screen (Subprogram)
Pressing the [STATE] soft key on the subprogram list screen or the
step sequence display screen displays the step sequence state display
screen (subprogram).
This screen displays the execution state and the elapsed time of
operation of each step used in the currently selected step sequence.
Fig. 10.7.2 Step sequence state display screen (subprogram)

(a) STEP NO.
Displays a step number. In parentheses, the symbol of the
address of a step number is displayed.
(b) STATUS
When "EXEC" is displayed, it means the active state. When
"EXEC" is not displayed, it means the inactive state.
(c) ELAPSE(MS)
Indicates the period of time of the active state. In the active
state, the time indication changes.
(d) MONITOR
Shows assigned time monitor information.
· T(x) : Timer number for monitoring
· OVER : Monitor time exceeded

- 1015 -

Soft keys for subprogram list display screen
For 1st level
Switch to subprogram list screen Program search Abnormal state reset
Switch to program list screen Switch to step sequence display screen Switch to time monitor setting
For 2nd level and after
Soft keys for step sequence state display screen
(a) [LIST] or [BACK] Switch to the program list screen or

one level higher
screen one level higher. If one of these soft keys is
pressed on the step sequence display screen on the first
level, the screen display returns to the program list display
screen.
(b) [SPLIST] Switch to the subprogram list screen
Switches the screen display to the subprogram list display
screen.
(c) [STEP] Switch to the step sequence display screen
screen.
(d) [SEARCH] Step search
key after entering a step number or symbol name, the step
corresponding to the entered character string is found, and
the display is updated so that the found step is placed at the
start.
(e) [RESET] Abnormal state reset
Resets abnormal states that have occurred in all time
monitoring operations.
For individual resetting, reset a desired monitoring
operation on the time monitor setting screen.
(f) [MONIT] Switch to the time monitor setting screen
Switches the screen display to the time monitor setting
screen.
(g) [<]
Switches the screen display to the PMC main menu.
Page keys
The page keys can be used to switch from one display page
to another. A program can be searched using the down
cursor key following the step number or symbol name
entered.
- 1016 -
10.8 TIME MONITOR FUNCTION
The time monitor function reports an error if a step sequence

continues to be active for more than a specified monitor time. For
each of up to eight steps, a monitor time can be set.
If the active state of a step lasts for more than a specified time, the
processing described below is performed.
On the step sequence execution state display screen, "OVER" is
indicated for a step number whose monitor time has been exceeded.
The ladder just continues running.
(1) The bit of R9118 corresponding to a monitor timer number is

turned on. By monitoring R9118 with the ladder program, error
processing can be programmed.
Timer No. Corresponding bit

1 R9118.0
2 R9118.1
3 R9118.2
4 R9118.3
5 R9118.4
6 R9118.5
7 R9118.6
8 R9118.7
(2) The PMC alarm screen displays the following message:

"ER48 STEP SEQUENCE TIME OVER(xxH)"
xx represents the value of R9118 in hexadecimal.
- 1017 -
10.8.1 Time Monitor Setting Screen
Pressing the [MONIT] soft key on the step sequence state display
screen displays the time monitor setting screen. The time monitor
setting screen is used to set the time monitor function. Enter a step
number or monitor time after moving the cursor with the cursor
up/down/left/right keys to the input field then press the INPUT key
for setting.
Fig. 10.8.1(a) Time monitor setting screen

NO.
Monitor timer number. T(1): Uses Monitor timer 1.
STEP NO.
Step number and symbol
S0001: Step number
The symbol of the step number is displayed in the
parentheses at right.
ELAPSE(MS)
Elapsed time (in msec). In the active state, the time
indication changes.
MONITOR(MS)
Time (in msec) set with the timer for monitoring
- 1018 -
Soft keys on time monitor setting screen
Deletion of setting Switch to step sequence state display screen
Step sarch
(a) [DELETE] Deletion of setting

Deletes the setting of a specified monitor number. Move the
cursor to a number whose setting is to be deleted then press
the [DELETE] soft key.
(b) [SEARCH] Step search
key after entering a step number or symbol name, the cursor
will move onto the monitor item with the corresponding
step assigned if found.
(c) [STATE] Switch to the step sequence state display screen
Switches to the step sequence state display screen.
(d) [<]
Returns the display screen to the step sequence state display
screen.
- 1019 -
(3) Setting of monitoring
Fig. 10.8.1(b) Entering a step number
(a) Move the cursor to a input field then enter a step number
(or symbol) to set.
Type "S12" then press the INPUT key.
- 1020 -
(b) Move the cursor to the corresponding input field then set
the monitor time.
Fig. 10.8.1(c) Entering a monitor time
Type "100" then press the INPUT key.

· Up to eight monitor time values can be set.
· The cursor can be moved to a step number field and
monitor time field.
· The maximum settable monitor time is 214748367
msec. If a greater value is entered, an error occurs.
· If a monitor time is entered when the corresponding
step number is not entered, an error occurs.
· The same step number must not be set more than once.
(4) Canceling a setting of monitoring

Move the cursor to a field whose setting is to be deleted then
press the [DELETE] soft key.
The setting of a monitor number is deleted, regardless of which
field (step number or monitor time) the cursor is placed on.
(5) Modifying a setting of monitoring

Move the cursor to a field then enter a new value.
- 1021 -
11.PMC ALARM MESSAGES AND ACTIONS TO TAKE B-63983EN/02
11 PMC ALARM MESSAGES AND ACTIONS

TO TAKE
- 1022 -
B-63983EN/02 11.PMC ALARM MESSAGES AND ACTIONS TO TAKE
11.1 ALARM MESSAGE LIST
11.1.1 Messages That May Be Displayed on the PMC Alarm Screen
The following table lists the PMC alarm messages that may be
displayed on the PMC alarm screen.
Alarm number Faulty location/corrective action Contents

ER01 PROGRAM DATA ERROR <1> Enter the sequence program again. The sequence program is invalid.
<2> If this error recurs even after you have
entered the sequence program again,
the error may be due to a hardware
fault. In that case, contact us.
ER02 PROGRAM SIZE OVER <1> Reduce the size of the sequence The sequence program is too large
program. to load into the save area.
<2> Contact us, and specify a ladder step The sequence program is invalid.
count option that allows you to set a
larger program size.
ER03 PROGRAM SIZE <1> Reduce the size of the sequence The sequence program exceeds the
ERROR(OPTION) program. size specified by the ladder step
<2> Contact us, and specify a ladder step count option.
ER04 PMC TYPE UNMATCH Change the sequence program so that it The PMC type specified in the
specifies the adequate PMC type, by using sequence program does not match
the programmer. the type of the PMC actually in use.
ER07 NO OPTION(LADDER <1> Restore the backup CNC parameter No ladder step count option is found.
STEP) data.
<2> Contact us, and specify a ladder step
ER08 OBJECT UNMATCH Contact us. An unsupported function is used in
ER09 PMC LABEL CHECK <1> Turn on the power of the CNC again, The nonvolatile memory of the PMC
ERROR. PLEASE TURN ON by holding down the 'O' and 'Z' keys at system needs to be initialized in such
POWER AGAIN WITH the same time. cases as when you have changed
PRESSING 'O'&'Z'. (CLEAR PMC <2> Replace the backup batteries. the PMC model.
SRAM)
ER17 PROGRAM PARITY <1> Enter the sequence program again. The parity of the sequence program
<2> If this error recurs even after you have is invalid.
entered the sequence program again,
the error may be due to a hardware
fault. In that case, contact us.
ER18 PROGRAM DATA ERROR Enter the sequence program again. An interrupt was specified while the
BY I/O sequence program was being read.
ER19 LADDER DATA ERROR Display the LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR The ladder data is broken.
screen again, and terminate the editing
operation by pressing the [EXIT] soft key.
- 1023 -

ER22 NO PROGRAM Enter the sequence program again. The sequence program is empty.
ER27 LADDER FUNC. PRM IS Correct the sequence program; change the An out-of-range parameter number is
OUT OF RANGE parameter number specified in a functional specified in the TMR, TMRB, CTR,
instruction to a value that is within the CTRB, DIFU, or DIFD functional
allowable range. instruction.
ER28 NO OPTION(I/O LINK Contact us; specify the I/O Link point count The I/O Link point count expansion
CHx) expansion option for the indicated channel. option is not specified for CHx.
ER32 NO I/O DEVICE <1> Check whether the power of each I/O None of the I/O devices, such as the
device is on. I/O Link, connection unit, and Power
<2> Check whether the power of each I/O Mate, is connected.
device has been turned on before the
CNC.
<3> Check cable connections.
ER33 I/O LINK ERROR Contact us; replace the faulty hardware. The LSI for the I/O Link is faulty.
Or
ER33 I/O LINK ERROR(CHn)
ER34 I/O LINK ERROR(xx) <1> Check the cable connections to the An I/O device communication error
Or devices of group xx. occurred on the slave side of group
ER34 I/O LINK ERROR(CHn xx) <2> Check whether the power of each I/O xx.
device has been turned on before the
CNC.
<3> Replace any device of group xx in
which the PMC control module is
embedded.
ER35 TOO MUCH OUTPUT Reduce the output data count of group xx. The output data count of I/O Link
DATA IN GROUP(xx) group xx exceeds the upper limit (33
Or bytes). The superfluous data is
ER35 TOO MUCH OUTPUT regarded as invalid.
DATA IN GROUP(CHn xx)
ER36 TOO MUCH INPUT DATA Reduce the input data count of group xx. The input data count of I/O Link
IN GROUP(xx) group xx exceeds the upper limit (33
Or bytes). The superfluous data is
ER36 TOO MUCH INPUT DATA regarded as invalid.
IN GROUP(CHn xx)
ER37 TOO MUCH SLOT IN Correct the slot number to a value of 10 or The slot number for the I/O Link
BASE less. exceed the upper limit (10). The slot
Or number larger than 11 is regarded as
ER37 TOO MUCH SLOT IN invalid.
BASE(CHn)
ER38 MAX SETTING OUTPUT Reduce the total amount of output data of The I/O area for the I/O Link is
DATA OVER(xx) all groups to 128 bytes or less. insufficient.
Or (The area allocated to the group xx
ER38 MAX SETTING OUTPUT and later on the output side is
DATA OVER(CHn xx) regarded as invalid.)
ER39 MAX SETTING INPUT Reduce the total amount of input data of all The I/O area for the I/O Link is
DATA OVER(xx) groups to 128 bytes or less. insufficient.
Or (The area allocated to the group xx
ER39 MAX SETTING INPUT and later on the input side is
DATA OVER(CHn xx) regarded as invalid.)
ER48 STEP SEQUENCE TIME Remove the setting of exceeding setting The activated condition of step
OVER(xxH) time on the STEP SEQUENCE TIME sequence exceeds the time limit,
MONITOR SETTING screen. which is set on the STEP
SEQUENCE TIME MONITOR
SETTING screen.
- 1024 -

ER50 PMC EXECUTION ORDER Check CNC parameter Nos. 11900 to The set execution order of the multi-
ERROR 11902. PMC function is invalid.
ER51 PMC EXECUTION Check CNC parameter Nos. 11905 to The set execution percentage of the
PERCENTAGE ERROR 11907. multi-PMC function is invalid.
ER52 I/O LINK CHANNEL Check CNC parameter Nos. 11910 to The I/O Link channel assignment to
ASSIGNMENT ERROR 11913. the PMC system is invalid.
ER53 I/O LINK CHANNEL Check CNC parameter Nos. 11915 to The I/O Link channel division
DEVIDE ERROR 11918. function setting is invalid.
ER54 NC-PMC I/F Check CNC parameter Nos. 11920 to The interface assignment between
ASSIGNMENT ERROR 11929. NC and PMC is invalid.
ER55 LEVEL1 EXECUTION Check CNC parameter No. 11930. The set ladder level 1 execution
CYCLE ERROR cycle is invalid.
ER56 TOTAL PROGRAM SIZE Contact us; check ladder step option In multi-PMC, Total ladder step is too
OVER(OPTION) large
ER57 MULTI-PATH PMC I/F Check CNC parameter No. 11932. The assignment of multi-path PMC
ASSIGNMENT ERROR interface is invalid.
ER97 IO LINK FAILURE(CHx If this alarm begins to happen on a well- This alarm happens when less I/O
yyGROUP) worked machine, the cause may be devices are connected.
following. This alarm happens when a total
<1> CNC cannot communicate with I/O group count of the I/O module
devices of group yy. assignment are different with one of
- The failure of the cable or contact from connected device count.
group (yy – 1) to yy No I/O device that is connected to
- The power failure of I/O device of group yy the channel associated with this
- The delay of power of I/O device of group alarm will be linked.
yy The ladder program runs regardless
- The failure of the I/O device of group yy of the occurrence of this alarm.
- The failure of the I/O device of group (yy –
1)
<2> The power of some I/O devices remain
when you turn off and on power of the
CNC control.
- When you turn off power of CNC control,
you have to turn off power of all I/O
devices.
If this alarm happens when a debugging of

sequence program, the cause may be
above or following.
<1> The mistake of the I/O module
assignment
<2> The mistake of the parameter setting of
"I/O link assignment function"
WN02 OPERATE PANEL Correct the Series 0 operator's panel The Series 0 operator's panel
ADDRESS address that is set in the PMC system address that is set in the PMC
ERROR parameter. system parameter is invalid.
WN03 ABORT NC- <1> Check the ladder program to verify that The ladder program was stopped
WINDOW/EXIN it is free from errors, and then restart while communication was in
the ladder program (press the RUN progress between CNC and PMC.
key). This alarm may cause the WINDR,
<2> Turn on the power of the CNC again. WINDW, EXIN, and DISPB
functional instructions to malfunction.
- 1025 -

WN07 LADDER SP Correct the sequence program so that the There are too many levels of nesting
ERROR(STACK) subprogram has eight or fewer levels of (levels more than 8) for the CALL or
nesting. CALLU functional instruction to call
the subprogram.
WN09 SEQUENCE PROGRAM If you want to use a changed sequence You have changed the sequence
IS NOT WRITTEN TO FLASH program again next time you power on the program using the LADDER
ROM system, write the sequence program to DIAGRAM EDITOR screen or DATA
flash ROM. If you have made any I/O screen, but you have not yet
unwanted change to the sequence program written the changed sequence
by mistake, read the original sequence program to flash ROM. If you shut
program from flash ROM. down the system without writing the
changed sequence program to flash
ROM, the changes you have made
will be nowhere next time you turn on
the power.
WN10 NO OPTION(STEP <1> Add the step sequence option. No step sequence option was found
SEQUENCE) <2> Arrange so that the step sequence when the system attempted to
subprogram will not be called. execute a step sequence.
WN11 INCOMPATIBLE Compile the sequence program again with An incompatible functional instruction
FUNCTION FANUC LADDER-III or Ladder Editing is using in the sequence program.
Package.
WN57 OVERRIDE FUNCTION IS The Override function is for only debugging. The Override function is activating.
ACTIVE So, please disable the function when
shipping the machine.
WN58 UNSUPPORTED Correct the sequence program with Ladder An unsupported functional instruction
FUNCTION editing function on PMC screen. is using in the sequence program.
The functional instruction was
skipped.
WN59 MESSAGE FILE SYMBOL Correct the error in the message file for A symbol nonexistent in the ladder is
UNDEFINED multi-language display. defined in the message file for multi-
language display.
WN60 MESSAGE FILE SYMBOL Correct the error in the message file for A symbol other than those set in the
INVALID multi-language display. A address area is defined in the
message file for multi-language
display.
WN61 MESSAGE FILE Correct the error in the message file for The A address area has a duplicate
ADDRESS DUPLICATE multi-language display. definition between a symbol and
address or between symbols.
WN62 MESSAGE FILE NUMBER Correct the error in the message file for A message number differs between
ERROR multi-language display. the ladder and message file for multi-
language display at the same A
address.
WN63 MESSAGE FILE IS NOT If you want to use a changed message file You have changed the message
WRITTEN TO FLASH ROM for multi-language display again next time data for multi-language display using
you power on the system, write the DATA I/O screen, but you have not
message file to flash ROM. yet written the changed message
data to flash ROM. If you shut down
the system without writing the
changed message data to flash
ROM, the changes you have made
will be nowhere next time you turn on
the power.
- 1026 -

WN64 MESSAGE FILE SIZE <1> Reduce the size of the message file for The message file for multi-language
OVER multi-language display. display is too large to load into the
<2> Contact us and specify an option for a save area.
larger size. The message file for multi-language
display is invalid.
WN65 MESSAGE FILE Contact us. An unsupported function is used in
MISMATCH the message file for multi-language
display.
WN66 MESSAGE FILE PARITY <1> Enter the message file for multi- The parity of the message file for
language display again. multi-language display is invalid.
<2> If this error recurs even after you have
entered the message file for multi-
language display again, the error may
be due to a hardware fault. In that
case, contact us.
WN67 MESSAGE FILE ERROR Enter the message file for multi-language An interrupt was specified while the
BY I/O display again. message file for multi-language
display was being read.
- 1027 -
11.1.2 PMC System Alarm Messages

PC004 CPU ERR xxxxxxxx:yyyyyyyy This alarm may be due to a A CPU error occurred in the PMC
PC006 CPU ERR xxxxxxxx:yyyyyyyy software/hardware fault; contact us with system.
PC009 CPU ERR xxxxxxxx:yyyyyyyy information on the circumstances under xxxxxxxx and yyyyyyyy are internal
PC010 CPU ERR xxxxxxxx:yyyyyyyy which the alarm occurred (displayed error codes.
PC012 CPU ERR xxxxxxxx:yyyyyyyy message, system configuration,
operation suspected of causing the
alarm, timing of alarm occurrence,
frequency of occurrence, etc.) as well
as the displayed internal error codes.
PC030 RAM PARI xxxxxxxx:yyyyyyyy This alarm may be due to a hardware A RAM parity error occurred in the
fault; contact us with information on the PMC system.
circumstances under which the alarm xxxxxxxx and yyyyyyyy are internal
occurred (displayed message, system error codes.
configuration, operation suspected of
causing the alarm, timing of alarm
occurrence, frequency of occurrence,
etc.) as well as the displayed internal
error codes.
PC050 IOLINK ER1 CHz:GRyy:xx Check the I/O device which is located An I/O Link communication error
at group number yy (0-15) in channel occurred.
number z (1-4) with the following point z is a channel number.
of view. yy is a group number.
<1> The power of the I/O Link master xx is a internal error code.
and/or slave devices is faulty. There is a possibility that some
– instantaneous power failure problem occurs at the I/O Link device
– unstable power line or the neighborhood. However, please
<2> The power cable of the I/O Link note that It may not show a accurate
master and/or slave devices is group number with some conditions of
faulty. the problem. But in any case, this
– faulty wiring indicated number helps you to solve
– incomplete contact the problem.
<3> The communication cable to the
I/O Link device is faulty.
– faulty wiring
– incomplete contact
<4> The I/O Link device is faulty.
- 1028 -

PC051 IOLINK ER2 CHz:yy:xx:ww:vv
<1> When you use a I/O Unit-Model A, An I/O Link communication error
no base extension unit is occurred.
connected corresponding to a I/O z is a channel number.
assignment data. Check yy, xx, ww, vv are internal error code.
connection of I/O devices and I/O
assignment data.
<2> When you use Power Mate as I/O
Link slave device and/or Servo
Motor Beta series I/O Link option,
some system alarm occurs in such
devices.
<3> A Communication may be
influenced by noise. Check the
ground wire and the shield of the
communication cables.
<4> The output of the I/O Link devices
is short-circuited.
<5> The power of the I/O Link master
and/or slave devices is faulty.
– instantaneous power failure
– unstable power line
<6> The power cable of the I/O Link
master and/or slave devices is
faulty.
– faulty wiring
<7> The communication cable to the
I/O Link device is faulty.
– faulty wiring
PC060 BUS xxxxxxxx:yyyyyyyy This alarm may be due to a A bus error occurred in the PMC
software/hardware fault; contact us with system.
information on the circumstances under
which the alarm occurred (displayed
message, system configuration,
operation suspected of causing the
alarm, timing of alarm occurrence,
frequency of occurrence, etc.) as well
as the displayed internal error codes.
PC070 LADDER SPE (PMCn) Check the correspondence between A stack error occurred with the SPE
the CALL or CALLU instruction and the functional instruction of the ladder
SPE instruction. program of n path.
PC097 LADDER PARITY ERR(PMCn) This alarm may be due to a hardware A RAM check error occurred.
PC098 CODE PARITY ERR fault; contact us with information on the
circumstances under which the alarm
occurred (displayed message, system
etc.).
- 1029 -

PC501 NC/PMC INTERFACE ERR Contact us with information on the The read or write operation between
PATHn circumstances under which the alarm CNC and PMC failed.
occurred (displayed message, system
etc.).
PC502 LADDER SUBaaa (PMCn) Correct the sequence program so that The sequence program uses the
the SUBaaa functional instruction will SUBaaa functional instruction that is
not be used. not supported in PMCn.
- 1030 -
11.1.3 Operation Errors
Error messages that may be displayed on the PMC LADDER DIAGRAM

VIEWER screen

INPUT INVALID Input a valid address or numeric value. The input address or numeric value is
invalid.
LADDER PROGRAM IS Enter the password. The screen cannot be displayed because
PROTECTED BY PASSWORD the program is protected by the password.
ILLEGAL SUBPROGRAM NAME Input a existent subprogram number or A nonexistent subprogram number or
symbol. symbol is specified.
SYMBOL UNDEFINED Input a defined symbol or bit address. An undefined symbol character string is
specified.
THE NET IS NOT FOUND The specified net is not found.
THE ADDRESS IS NOT FOUND The specified address is not found.
THE FUNCTIONAL The specified functional instruction is not
INSTRUCTION IS NOT FOUND found.
WRITE COIL NEEDS BIT Specify a bit address for the write coil You entered a byte address when
ADDRESS search. specifying an address used for the write
coil search.
SOME NETS ARE DISCARDED The system cannot pick up all the nets. The system failed to pick up all the nets
Choose the nets to pick up, by using because there were 128 nets or more to
the LADDER DIAGRAM VIEWER be picked up.
display screen, and then perform the
net pickup operation manually.
PROGRAM IS BEING MODIFIED Disconnect the online communication The ladder data cannot be displayed
with FANUC LADDER-III. Stop other because online communication with
applications from accessing the ladder FANUC LADDER-III is in progress or
data. another application is accessing the
ladder data.
THIS FUNCTION IS Cancel the protection by the This function is protected by the
PROTECTED programmer protection function or 8- programmer protection function or 8-level
level protection function. protection function.
- 1031 -

EDITOR screen

THIS NET IS PROTECTED When you are editing data on a per-
subprogram basis, you cannot edit the
subprogram frame nets (END1, END2,
END3, SP, and SPE).
TOO LARGE DATA TO COPY Reduce the range of data to copy. The selected range of data exceeds the
Perform the copy operation several size of the copy buffer.
times, copying a smaller range of data
at a time.
TOO LARGE DATA TO PASTE Reduce the size of data to paste. An attempt was made to paste data
whose size exceeded the free space of
BIT ADDRESS IS REQUIRED Make sure that the address types An attempt was made to alter a bit
match for the alteration operation. address to a byte address.
BYTE ADDRESS IS REQUIRED Make sure that the address types An attempt was made to alter a byte
match for the alteration operation. address to a bit address.
ILLEGAL PMC ADDRESS Check the address to be input, and · A character string was entered that was
then enter it correctly. unacceptable as a PMC address.
· A wildcard (*) was specified in an
inappropriate manner.
· Ether "OLD ADDRESS" or "NEW
ADDRESS" was not entered.
THIS ADDRESS IS READ-ONLY Enter a write-permitted address. · An attempt was made to alter a write
coil address to a write-prohibited bit
address.
· An attempt was made to alter an
address set in an output parameter of a
functional instruction to a write-
prohibited bit address.
THE ADDRESS TYPE ARE Check the types of the address in The type of the addresses in "OLD
MISMATCHED "OLD ADDRESS" and "NEW ADDRESS" does not match that in "NEW
ADDRESS" and, if necessary, enter ADDRESS".
the correct address or addresses.
***** DOSE NOT HAVE SYMBOL Define symbol data in "OLD No symbol data is defined in "OLD
ADDRESS". ADDRESS".
***** ALREADY HAS SYMBOL Make sure that the address types Symbol data is already defined in "NEW
match for the alteration operation. ADDRESS".
- 1032 -

EDITOR screen (when updating)

OVERLAPPED COM If COME is missing, add it in proper There is no COME that corresponds to
position. If the COM is unnecessary, this COM.
remove it.
END IN COM If COME is missing, add it in proper END,END1,END2, or END3 is found
END1 IN COM position. If COM is unnecessary, remove between COM and COME.
END2 IN COM it.
JMPE IN COM JMPE and corresponding JMP must JMPE is found between COM and COME,
have same COM/COME status. Review and JMP and corresponding JMPE have
JMP range and COM range, to adjust not different COM/COME status.
to overlap with each other: it is possible
that one range includes the other
completely.
SP/SPE IN COM If COME is missing, add it in proper SP or SPE is found between COM and
position. If the COM is unnecessary, COME.
remove it.
COME WITHOUT COM If COM is missing, add it in proper There is no COM that corresponds to this
position. If the COME is unnecessary, COME.
remove it.
DUPLICATE CTR NUMBER If some of them are unnecessary, Plural CTRs have the same number as
(WARN) remove them. If all of them are their parameter. (This is warning.)
necessary, assign other number to
parameter of them to make them unique.
(If two or more instructions with same
parameter number will never be active
simultaneously at one time, the Ladder
program has a possibility to work
correctly, however, it is recommended
from safety and maintenance points of
view, that all these instructions should
have different parameter number with
each other.)
ILLEGAL CTR NUMBER If unnecessary, remove it. Assign correct CTR has parameter number that is out of
number not to exceed the maximum range.
number defined by each PMC model.
DUPLICATE DIFU/DIFD If some of them are unnecessary, Plural DIFUs or DIFDs have the same
NUMBER remove them. If all of them are number as their parameter. (This is
(WARN) necessary, assign other number to warning.)
each other.)
ILLEGAL DIFU/DIFD NUMBER If unnecessary, remove it. Assign correct DIFU or DIFD has parameter number that
number not to exceed the maximum is out of range.
- 1033 -

NO END Add END, END1, END2 or END3 in END, END1, END2 or END3 is not found.
NO END1 proper position.
NO END2
NO END3
DUPLICATE END1 Remove extra END1, END2 or END3. Multiple END1, END2 or END3 are found.
DUPLICATE END2
DUPLICATE END3
GARBAGE AFTER END Remove unnecessary nets, and move There are some nets after END, END2 or
GARBAGE AFTER END2 necessary nets to proper position so that END3, which will not be executed.
GARBAGE AFTER END3 they will be executed.
OVERLAPPED JMP If JMPE is missing, add it in proper There is no JMPE that corresponds to this
position. If the JMP is unnecessary, JMP.
remove it.
JMP/JMPE TO BAD COM JMP and corresponding JMPE must JMP and corresponding JMPE have
LEVEL have same COM/COME status. Review different COM/COME status.
JMP range and COM range, to adjust not
completely.
COME IN JMP COME and corresponding COM must COME is found between JMP and JMPE,
have same JMP/JMPE status. Review and COM and corresponding COME have
COM range and JMP range, to adjust not different JMP/JMPE status.
completely.
END IN JMP If JMPE is missing, add it in proper END,END1,END2, or END3 is found
END1 IN JMP position. If JMP is unnecessary, remove between JMP and JMPE.
END2 IN JMP it.
END3 IN JMP
SP/SPE IN JMP If JMPE is missing, add it in proper SP or SPE is found between JMP and
position. If the JMP is unnecessary, JMPE.
remove it.
JMPB OVER COM BORDER JMPB and its destination must have JMPB and its destination differ in
same COM/COME status. Review range COM/COME status.
of JMPB and COM range, to adjust not to
overlap with each other: it is possible that
one range includes the other completely.
JMPB OVER LEVEL JMPB can only jump to the same JMPB jumps to different program level.
program level, or within a subprogram. If
the JMPB is unnecessary, remove it. If
LBL for the JMPB is missing, add it in
proper position. If it should be JMPC,
correct it.
LBL FOR JMPB NOT FOUND If JMPB is unnecessary, remove it. If LBL Can not find proper LBL for JMPB.
is missing, add it in proper position.
JMPC IN BAD LEVEL JMPC is used to jump from a JMPC is used in other than subprogram.
subprogram to level 2. If the JMPC is
unnecessary, remove it. If it should be
JMPB or JMP, correct it.
LBL FOR JMPC NOT FOUND If JMPC is unnecessary, remove it. If LBL Can not find proper LBL for JMPC.
is missing, add it in proper position:
JMPC jumps into level 2.
- 1034 -

LBL FOR JMPC IN BAD LEVEL JMPC is used to jump from a Destination of JMPC is not level 2.
subprogram to level 2. If the JMPC is
unnecessary, remove it. If another LBL of
same L-address that the JMPC is
intended to jump exists in the
subprogram, assign different L-address
to these two LBLs. If it should be JMPB
or JMP, correct it.
JMPC INTO COM LBL for JMPC must be located out of any JMPC jumps to LBL between COM and
COM and COME pair. If the JMPC is COME.
unnecessary, remove it. If the LBL is
located wrong, move it to correct
position. If the L-address of JMPC is
wrong, correct it.
JMPE WITHOUT JMP If JMP is missing, add it in proper There is no JMP that corresponds to this
position. If the JMPE is unnecessary, JMPE.
remove it.
TOO MANY LBL Remove unnecessary LBLs. If this error There are too many LBLs.
still occurs, adjust the construction of
program to use less LBLs.
DUPLICATE LBL If some of these LBLs are unnecessary, Same L-address is used in plural LBLs.
remove them. If all of these LBLs is
necessary, assign other L-addresses to
them to make all LBLs unique.
OVERLAPPED SP If SPE is missing, add it in proper There is no SPE that corresponds to this
position. If the SP is unnecessary, SP.
remove it.
SPE WITHOUT SP If SP is missing, add it in proper position. There is no SP that corresponds to this
If the SPE is unnecessary, remove it. SPE.
END IN SP If SPE is missing, add it in proper END is found between SP and SPE.
position. If END is in wrong place, move
it to proper position.
DUPLICATE P ADDRESS If some of these SPs are unnecessary, Same P-address is used in plural SPs.
remove them. If all of these SPs is
necessary, assign other P-addresses to
them to make all SPs unique.
DUPLICATE TMRB NUMBER If some of them are unnecessary, Plural TMRBs have the same number as
(WARN) remove them. If all of them are their parameter. (This is warning.)
each other.)
ILLEGAL TMRB NUMBER If unnecessary, remove it. Assign correct TMRB has parameter number that is out
number not to exceed the maximum of range.
- 1035 -

DUPLICATE TMR NUMBER If some of them are unnecessary, Plural TMRs have the same number as
(WARNI) remove them. If all of them are their parameter. (This is warning.)
each other.)
ILLEGAL TMR NUMBER If unnecessary, remove it. Assign correct TMR has parameter number that is out of
number not to exceed the maximum range.
NO SUCH SUBPROGRAM If it calls wrong subprogram, correct it. If Subprogram that is called by
the subprogram is missing, create it. CALL/CALLU is not found.
UNAVAILABLE INSTRUCTION Confirm that this ladder program is Unsupported instruction for this PMC
correct one. If this program is correct model is found.
one, all these unsupported instructions
have to be removed.
SP IN BAD LEVEL SP can be used at top of a subprogram. SP is found in wrong place.
Correct it so that no SP exists in other
place.
LADDER PROGRAM IS This ladder program must be all cleared Ladder program may be broken by some
BROKEN once, and remake ladder program. reason.
NO WRITE COIL Add proper write coil. Write coil is necessary, but is not found.
CALL/CALLU IN BAD LEVEL CALL/CALLU must be used in Level 2 or CALL/CALLU is used in wrong place.
in subprograms. Do not use any other
places.
SP IN LEVEL3 If END3 is located wrong, move it to SP is found in level 3.
correct position. If the SP is
unnecessary, remove it.
CS/CM/CE IN COM If COME is missing, add it in proper CS,CM or CE is found between COM and
position. If the COM is unnecessary, COME.
remove it.
CS/CM/CE IN BAD LEVEL CS, CM or CE must be used in Level 2 or CS,CM, or CE is used in wrong place.
in subprograms. Do not use any other
places.
CM/CE WITHOUT CS If CE is missing, add it in proper position. There is no CS that corresponds to this
If the CS or CE is unnecessary, remove CM or CE.
it.
INSTRUCTION EXCEPT CM IN CS If CE is missing, add it in proper position. Instruction except CM is found between
If the CS or CE is unnecessary, remove CS and CE.
it.
OVERLAPPED CS If CS is missing, add it in proper position. There is no CE that corresponds to this
If the CE is unnecessary, remove it. CS.
- 1036 -
Error messages that may be displayed on the PMC NET EDITOR screen

ILLEGAL FUNCTIONAL Specify the name of an available The entered name of functional instruction
INSTRUCTION NAME functional instruction. is invalid.
TOO MANY FUNCTION IN ONE Only one functional instruction is Too many functional instructions are in
NET allowed to constitute a net. If one net.
necessary, divide the net into plural
nets.
TOO LARGE NET Divide the net into plural nets so that Net is too large. When a net is converted
step number in a net may become into the object, the net exceeds 256 steps.
small.
NO INPUT FOR OPERATION Coil without input, or coil connected to No signal is provided for logical operation.
output of functional instruction that has
no output, causes this error. If coil is
not necessary, remove it. If necessary,
connect it to meaningful input.
OPERATION AFTER FUNCTION Output of functional instruction can not No logical operation with functional
IS FORBIDDEN be connected to a contact, nor to instruction output is permitted, except
conjunction with other signal that will write coils.
be implemented by logical-or
operation.
WRITE COIL IS EXPECTED Write coil is not found even if it is Write coil is expected, but not found.
expected. Add proper write coil to the
net.
BAD COIL LOCATION Coil can be located only at rightmost Coil is located in bad position.
column. Any coil located at other place
must be erased once, and place
necessary coils in correct place.
SHORT CIRCUIT Find contact with terminals connected Some contacts are connected with short
by short circuit, and correct circuit. CTR has a parameter number that
connections. is out of the range.
FUNCTION AFTER Functional instruction can not be used Functional instruction is used in output
DIVERGENCE IS FORBIDDEN in output section of net. If necessary, section of net.
divide the net into plural nets.
ALL COIL MUST HAVE SAME Left terminals of all coils in a net must When a net contains more than one coil,
INPUT be connected to same input point. the coils should not have any contact
beside them affects only of the coils.
BAD CONDITION INPUT Check the connection of all condition Some condition input of functional
inputs of the functional instruction. instruction is not connected correctly.
Especially for functional instruction that
has more than one condition input,
check if connections to condition
inputs interfere with each other.
NO CONNECTION Find gap that is expected to be There is signal connected to nowhere.
connected, and correct the connection.
NET IS TOO COMPLICATED Examine every connection, and find Net is too complicated to analyze.
unnecessarily bending connection, or
coils that are connected to different
point.
PARAMETER IS NOT SUPPLIED Enter all of the relay addresses, and Relay with blank address, or blank
parameters of functional instructions. parameter of functional instruction, is
found.
- 1037 -
Error messages that may be displayed on the TITLE DATA EDITOR screen

TOO MANY Make sure that the entered character string The number of characters in the entered
CHARACTERS is within the allowable input length. character string exceeds the allowable input
length. Some of the characters are discarded.
PROGRAM IS BEING Disconnect the online communication with The title data cannot be displayed because
MODIFIED FANUC LADDER-III. Stop other online communication with FANUC LADDER-
applications from accessing the title data. III is in progress or another application is
accessing the title data.
THIS FUNCTION IS Cancel the protection by the programmer This function is protected by the programmer
PROTECTED protection function or 8-level protection protection function or 8-level protection
function. function.
Error messages that may be displayed on the SYMBOL & COMMENT DATA
EDITOR screen

TOO MANY Make sure that the entered address is The number of characters in the entered
CHARACTERS within the allowable input length. address exceeds the allowable address input
length.
ADDRESS IS REQUIRED Enter data in a batch correctly, as instructed No address was entered during the batch
in "Editing a set of symbol and comment input of address, symbol, and comment data
data" in Subsection 9.2.2. using the SYMBOL & COMMENT EDITOR
screen.
ILLEGAL PMC ADDRESS Enter an address correctly. The specified address is invalid, or the
entered address character string contains a
space or spaces.
THE ADDRESS Specify another address. An already registered address was entered.
ALREADY HAS AN
ENTRY
THE SYMBOL NAME IS Specify another symbol. An already registered symbol was entered.
ALREADY USED
PMC ADDRESS MUST Enter a PMC address in the ADDRESS No PMC address was entered when new
BE ENTERED field. symbol/comment data is registered.
TOO LONG SYMBOL Make sure that the symbol consists of 16 The entered symbol exceeds the specified
NAME characters or less. number of characters.
TOO LONG COMMENT Make sure that the comment consists of 30 The entered comment exceeds the specified
STRING characters or less. number of characters.
BAD SYMBOL NAME Define a symbol that contains no space. The entered symbol contains a space or
spaces.
THE STRING IS NOT Specify another character string for the The search was done for the specified
FOUND search. character string but did not find it.
OUT OF SPACE Create free space for the sequence The symbol/comment editing area has no free
program, by deleting unnecessary ladder or space.
message data.
PROGRAM IS BEING Disconnect the online communication with The symbol/comment data cannot be
MODIFIED FANUC LADDER-III. Stop other displayed because online communication with
applications from accessing the FANUC LADDER-III is in progress or another
symbol/comment data. application is accessing the symbol/comment
data.
- 1038 -

THIS FUNCTION IS Cancel the protection by the programmer This function is protected by the programmer
PROTECTED protection function or 8-level protection protection function or 8-level protection
function. function.
Error messages that may be displayed on the MESSAGE DATA EDITOR

screen

INPUT INVALID Enter ";" in the 5th digit position in the The delimiter code - semicolon (;) - was
batch message input process. not entered in the batch message input
process.
ILLEGAL NUMBER Enter a four-digit number as the The entered message number contains
message number. any nonnumeric character, or a number
shorter than four digits was entered.
THE NUMBER IS OUT OF Make sure that the entered message The entered message number is out of the
RANGE number is in the range between 1000 1000-9999 range.
and 9999.
CLOSING "@" IS NOT FOUND When entering kana or other Japanese One of the @ sign pair is missing.
characters, make sure that they are
enclosed within a pair of @ signs.
BAD NUMBER OF Enter a character string correctly The number of characters entered
CHARACTERS IN "@-@" between a pair of @ signs. between the pair of @ signs is not even.
ILLEGAL CHARACTER IN "@-@" Enter a character string correctly One or more invalid character codes exist
between a pair of @ signs. between the pair of @ signs.
BAD NUMBER OF Enter a two-byte code correctly The number of characters in the two-byte
CHARACTERS FOR 2-BYTE between @02 and 01@. code (characters entered between @02
CODE and 01@) is not a multiple of four.
ILLEGAL 2-BYTE CODE Enter a two-byte code correctly The two-byte code (characters entered
between @02 and 01@. between @02 and 01@) contains one or
more characters other than the JIS codes.
CLOSING CONTROL CODE "01" Enter the closing control code. The two-byte code (characters entered
IS NOT FOUND between @02 and 01@) lacks the closing
control code (01).
CONTROL CODE "XX" IS Remove any repeated control code. The starting control code (02), closing
REPEATED control code (01), and/or umlaut code (0D)
is repeated.
CLOSING "]" IS NOT FOUND Make sure that the "[" and "]" codes The delimiter codes for numerical data are
are entered in pairs. not entered in pairs.
BAD NUMERICAL DATA Specify the numerical data correctly. The format of the numerical data is invalid.
FORMAT
BAD PMC ADDRESS FOR Enter an available address. The address section of the numerical data
NUMERIAL DATA is invalid.
PROGRAM IS BEING MODIFIED Disconnect the online communication The message data cannot be displayed
with FANUC LADDER-III. Stop other because online communication with
applications from accessing the FANUC LADDER-III is in progress or
message data. another application is accessing the
message data.
- 1039 -
Error messages that may be displayed on the I/O MODULE EDITOR screen

GROUP NUMBER IS TOO Specify 15 or a smaller value as the The entered group number is too large.
LARGE group number.
BASE NUMBER IS TOO LARGE Specify base number 0 for I/O Unit-B The entered base number is too large.
(##, #1 - #10).
SLOT NUMBER IS TOO LARGE Specify 30 or a smaller value as the slot The entered slot number is too large.
number for I/O Unit-B (##, #1 - #10).
For other I/O units, specify 10 or a
smaller value.
SLOT NUMBER IS TOO SMALL Specify 0 or a large value as the slot The entered slot number is too small.
number for I/O Unit-B (##, #1 - #10).
For other I/O units, specify 1 or a larger
value.
I/O UNIT NAME MISMATCH Check the I/O unit name or address. The input I/O unit is assigned to the Y
address, or the output I/O unit is
assigned to the X address.
ILLEGAL I/O UNIT NAME Enter an I/O unit that is listed in Tables The entered I/O unit name is invalid.
3.2 (a) to 3.2 (c) in Chapter 3.
NOT ENOUGH SPACE Enter the data again after creating free There is not enough free address space
space by deleting the data allocated for the size of the I/O unit you are going
behind the current cursor position or by to assign.
other adequate means. This error also occurs if you attempt to
assign the I/O unit to an already
allocated address space.
PROGRAM IS BEING MODIFIED Disconnect the online communication The I/O module data cannot be
with FANUC LADDER-III. Stop other displayed because online communication
applications from accessing the I/O with FANUC LADDER-III is in progress
module data. or another application is accessing the
I/O module data.
PROTECTED programmer protection function or 8- programmer protection function or 8-
level protection function. level protection function.
Error messages that may be displayed on the SYSTEM PARAMETER screen

INPUT INVALID Enter a numerical value correctly, as The entered numerical value or its input
instructed in Section 9.8. format is invalid.
SYMBOL UNDEFINED Enter a defined symbol or bit address. An undefined symbol character string was
entered.
PROGRAM IS BEING MODIFIED Disconnect the online communication The system parameter data cannot be
with FANUC LADDER-III. Stop other displayed because online communication
applications from accessing the with FANUC LADDER-III is in progress or
system parameter data. another application is accessing the
system parameter data.
- 1040 -
Error messages that may be displayed on the SIGNAL STATUS screen

instructed in "Screen operations using format is invalid.
other keys" in Subsection 7.1.2.
entered.
Error messages that may be displayed on the PMC PARAM screen

instructed in Section 7.3. format is invalid.
Error messages that may be displayed on the SIGNAL TRACE screen

TRACE FUNCTION IS ALREADY Wait until FANUC LADDER-III or some FANUC LADDER-III or some other
IN USE other application finishes using the application is currently using the trace
trace function before executing it. function.
NO SAMPLING ADDRESS Specify a bit address as a sampling No sampling address is specified in the
address in the trace parameter. trace parameter.
NO STOP TRIGGER ADDRESS Specify a bit address as the stop The stop trigger address is not specified in
trigger address in the trace parameter. the trace parameter.
NO SAMPLING TRIGGER Specify a bit address as the sampling The sampling trigger address is not
ADDRESS trigger address in the trace parameter. specified in the trace parameter.
Error messages that may be displayed on the trace setting screen

INPUT INVALID Enter a numerical value that is within A nonnumeric value or an out-of-range
the specified data range of the relevant parameter value was entered.
trace parameter.
entered.
BIT ADDRESS IS REQUIRED Specify a bit address as the stop or A byte address was specified as the stop
sampling trigger address. or sampling trigger address.
INVALID STOP TRIGGER Enter a PMC signal address that can The bit address entered as the stop trigger
ADDRESS be used as the stop trigger address. address is invalid.
INVALID SAMPLING TRIGGER Enter a PMC signal address that can The bit address entered as the sampling
ADDRESS be used as the sampling trigger trigger address is invalid.
address.
- 1041 -
11.1.4 I/O Communication Error Messages
The error messages that may appear on the I/O screen and their
meanings and actions are listed below.
Error messages displayed during memory card I/O operation

MEMORY CARD IS NOT READY Check whether a memory card is No memory card is installed.
installed.
MEMORYCARD IS FULL Delete files to create available space. There is no available space in the memory
card.
MEMORYCARD IS WRITE Release the write protection of the The memory card is write-protected.
PROTECTED memory card.
MEMORYCARD IS NOT Format the memory card. The memory card cannot be recognized.
FORMATTED
TOO MANY FILES IN Delete unnecessary files to reduce the There are too many files.
MEMORYCARD number of files.
FILE NOT FOUND On the list screen, check the file name The specified file cannot be found.
or file number.
FILE IS READ-ONLY Check the attributes of the file. Write to the specified file is not permitted.
FILE NAME IS INVALID Specify the file name in MS-DOS form. The file name is illegal.
COULD NOT FORMAT MEMORY The NC cannot format this memory The memory card cannot be formatted.
CARD card. Use another unit such as a
personal computer to format the
memory card.
UNSUPPORTED MEMORYCARD Replace the memory card with another This memory card is not supported.
one.
CAN NOT DELETE FILE Check the attributes of the file. An error occurred when a file was deleted
from the memory card.
MEMORYCARD BATTERY Replace the battery of the memory The battery of the memory card has
ALARM card. become weak.
THIS FILE NAME IS ALREADY Change the file name to another one. The file name is already used.
USED
MEMORYCARD ACCESS Replace the memory card with another The memory card cannot be accessed.
ERROR one.
DIFFERENCE FOUND File comparison detected a mismatch.
MEMORY CARD IS LOCKED BY Wait until the PMC user completes Another PMC user is using the memory
OTHER FUNCTION processing, then retry. card.
MEMORY CARD HEADER ROM This file cannot be read. Check the An attempt was made to read a file, but its
DATA ID IS ILLEGAL type of the file. ROM data ID was illegal.
FILE NUMBER CAN NOT If the file does not exist, the key entry The file number cannot be selected.
SELECTED is invalid. If this error occurs even
when the cursor is placed at a file
name, contact the FANUC service
center.
THE FILE NUMBER DOES NOT Check the total number of files on the The entered file number is not present.
EXIST list screen. The entered number exceeds the total
number of files.
FILE NUMBER IS RESTRICTED Enter a numeric value not exceeding A value up to 128 can be entered as the
TO "128" 128. file number.
- 1042 -

MEMORY CARD IS USED BY Retry after terminating the other Some other function is currently using the
OTHER FUNCTION function that is currently using the memory card.
memory card.
MEMORY CARD IS WRITE Cancel the write protection of the The memory card is write protected.
PROTECTED memory card, or use another memory
card that is not write protected.
UNSUPPORTED MEMORY Use another memory card. This is an unsupported type of memory
CARD card.
COULD NOT DELETE FILE Check the read/write permission The file cannot be deleted.
attribute of the file.
TRACE FILE NUMBER IS OVER Delete unnecessary old trace result file No more trace result file can be created
or files. because the maximum trace result file
number (file extension) has been reached.
INTERNAL ERROR (xxxxxxxxxx) Contact the FANUC service center, An error due to an internal factor occurred.
and report the displayed message Details on the error are displayed in
correctly. parentheses.
Error messages displayed during flash ROM I/O operation

NOT IN EMG STOP MODE Place the system in the emergency The system is not in the emergency stop
stop state. state.
INVALID SEQUENCE PROGRAM Check the program. The transfer program is illegal.
DIFFERENCE FOUND A file comparison detected a mismatch.
FLASH ROM IS LOCKED BY Wait until the PMC user completes Another PMC user is using the flash ROM.
OTHER FUNCTION processing, then retry.
FLASH ROM HEADER ROM This file cannot be read. Check the An attempt was made to read a file, but its
DATA ID IS ILLEGAL type of the file. ROM data ID was illegal.
FLASH ROM IS USED BY This file cannot be read. Check the The ROM data ID of the file you attempted
OTHER FUNCTION type of the file. to read is invalid.
INTERNAL ERROR (xxxxxxxxxx) Contact the FANUC service center, An error due to an internal factor occurred.
and report the displayed message Details on the error are displayed in
correctly. parentheses.
- 1043 -
Error messages displayed during FLOPPY or other input/output device I/O

operation.

ILLEGAL PMC PARAMETER Specify a file of the PMC parameter The specified file is not of the PMC
FORMAT format. Also, check the specified file parameter format.
to see whether its content is not
disrupted.
ILLEGAL HANDY FILE FORMAT Specify a file of the handy file format. The specified file is not of the handy file
Also, check the specified file to see format.
whether its content is not disrupted.
UNKNOWN FILE FORMAT Specify file of recognizable format Can not recognize the format of specified
such as PMC parameter format, or file.
check the contents of the file.
FILE NAME OR FILE NUMBER IS Specify file name or file number for the Need file name or file number to identify
REQUIRED operation. file to read, compare, or delete.
COMMUNICATION TIMEOUT Check the communication parameters Communication with the I/O device has
such as baud rate, and retry to been timeout.
communicate.
I/O DEVICE IS NOT ATTACHED Check the power of I/O device is ON. Any I/O device is not connected, or some
OR IN ERROR STATUS Check the I/O device is connected. error has occurred in it.
Check the cable that connects I/O
device with PMC is correct one. If
some error has occurred in I/O device,
solve it.
RECEIVED BAD DATA: CHECK Check the PMC's communication Invalid data has been received.
THE COMMUNICATION parameters such as baud rate match
PARAMETERS the ones of I/O device.
RECEIVED DATA HAS Check the communication parameters Too many data have received at once.
OVERRUN about flow control.
OTHERS FUNCTION IS USING Use the other channel, or stop the Others function is using this channel.
THIS CHANNEL function.
BAD COMMUNICATION Check the communication parameters Setting parameters of communication are
PARAMETER such as baud rate. not correct.
OTHER FUNCTION IS USING I/O Wait until function that using I/O Another function such as FANUC
FUNCTION function do finish, or stop the function. LADDER-III is using I/O function.
UNKNOWN HANDY FILE Check the file. The received data is not a program of the
FORMAT DATA PMC system or is a program of some
other incompatible type.
ILLEGAL BAUD RATE SETTING Set a valid baud rate. The set baud rate is invalid.
ILLEGAL CHANNEL NUMBER Set a valid channel number. The set channel number is invalid.
ILLEGAL PARITY BIT SETTING Set a valid parity bit. The set parity bit is invalid.
ILLEGAL STOP BIT SETTING Set a valid stop bit. The set stop bit is invalid.
ILLEGAL WRITE CODE Set a valid output code. The set output code is invalid.
SETTING
SEQUENCE PROGRAM IS IN Wait until On-line function, do finish Can not input/output of sequence
USE BY ONLINE FUNCTION the using I/O function. In general, both program, because On-line function is
of I/O function and On-line function using sequence program.
should not be used at the same time.
- 1044 -
Common error messages that may be displayed on individual devices during

the I/O operations

ERROR OCCURS IN Check the PMC alarm screen and Data cannot be output because there is an
SEQUENCE PROGRAM correct the indicated program error error in the ladder program.
accordingly.
UNKNOWN DATA TYPE Check the file. The PMC type of the input data is
unknown.
THIS FUNCTION IS NOT Check the related settings. There are not all the settings that are
ALLOWED needed to use this function.
PMC PARAMETER IS LOCKED Retry after terminating the other The PMC parameter is currently used by
BY OTHER FUNCTION function that is currently using the some other function and cannot be
PMC parameter. referenced by this function.
THIS DEVICE IS USED BY Retry after terminating the other The specified device is currently used by
OTHER FUNCTION function that is currently using the some other function and cannot be used
specified device. by this function.
PMC PARAMETER IS Retry after terminating the other The PMC parameter is currently used by
PROTECTED BY OTHER function that is currently using the some other function and cannot be
FUNCTION PMC parameter. changed by this function.
LADDER TYPE UNMATCH Specify a program of a valid type. The specified program is of a different
type and cannot be read.
TOO LARGE SEQUENCE Check the file. Or, change to a step The ladder program is too large to read.
PROGRAM number option that allows you to set a
SEQUENCE PROGRAM IS Retry after terminating the other The ladder program is currently used by
USED BY OTHER FUNCTION function that is currently displaying the some other function and cannot be
ladder program. referenced by this function.
- 1045 -
11.2 I/O LINK COMMUNICATION ERRORS AND ACTIONS TO

TAKE
If an I/O Link communication error occurs, the system generates a

system alarm, displaying an error message of the following format.
PC050 IOLINK CHn GRa:bb
In this message format, CHn (where n is 1 or a higher number)

represents the number of the channel that has caused the
communication error. “Gra” represents a group number in which a
problem may occur. “bb” means internal code.
However, correct group number may not be shown depend on cause or
condition of the communication error. Please note that it is difficult to
identify the cause of the error or the location of the fault with these
values alone, for the following reasons.
(1) If the communication error has resulted from a hardware fault or

noise, these register values themselves may not be correct.
(2) Different register values may be presented for the same cause
depending on the timing of the error occurrence.
Therefore, it is important to consider other circumstantial factors in

addition to this displaying.
- 1046 -
11.2.1 Causes of Communication Errors
An I/O Link communication error can stem from various types of

causes such as those described below.
(1) Improper cable type, cable cut, or inadequate connection

Several different types of I/O Link electrical cables are used, as
listed below. Check that the cable of the proper type is
connected to each device. Also, check the connection of each
cable, based on "Connection Manual (Hardware)". Pay
particular attention to those signals to be carried over a twisted-
pair cable. Make sure that the SIN signal is paired with the *SIN
signal and that the SOUT signal is paired with the *SOUT signal.
If any of these signals is paired with the wrong signal, the cable
will become more susceptible to noise. Do not connect any
unnecessary cable. Since the system has the +24V and +5V
power cables, connecting an unnecessary cable can lead to a
failure or malfunction.
· K1X: Used to connect groups.
· K2X: Used for base extension.
· K3X: Used to connect an optical I/O Link adapter or
I/O Link dummy unit.
(2) Connection to the wrong connector

The output end of a cable between I/O Link groups is connected
to "JD1A" and its input end is connected to "JD1B". Check each
cable to see whether it is not connected to the wrong connector.
(3) Loose connector connection
Check each cable to see whether it is firmly connected to the
relevant connector. The cable may be connected loosely.
(4) Assignment data mismatch
If the actual link configuration does not match the assignment
data, a communication error may result. For example, if base
extensions (bases 1 to 3) are assigned but if those bases are not
connected, a system alarm is generated when the CNC is started.
(5) Noise
Take necessary counter-noise measures, as instructed in
"Connection Manual (Hardware)". If the communication cables
are bundled together with the power cables, noise may be
introduced to the communication cables. To avoid such noise,
install the communication cables and the power cables in
separate bundles. Also, connect the shield of the communication
cable to the ground plate using a cable clamp. (Refer to
"Connection Manual (Hardware)".)
- 1047 -
(6) DO connection to ground

With some types of operator's panel, a communication alarm
occurs if the DO terminal is connected to ground or to another
DO terminal due to inadequate cable connection, module
malfunction or failure, or other cause.
(7) Insufficient power capacity or drop in voltage
Check whether the power capacity is insufficient. While the
machine had a sufficient power capacity when originally
designed, it may be suffering a power shortage due to such
factors as subsequent modifications to the machine design and/or
the factory facilities. Also, even if there is no problem under
normal operating conditions, certain operations may result in a
drop in voltage.
(8) Loose power connection
Check that the power cable is connected firmly. Several cases
have been identified in which intermittent errors occur at an
extremely low incidence because the power cable is loosely
connected to the power unit precluding the stable supply of
power to the slave.
(9) Power unit malfunction or failure
A communication error may result from an instantaneous
interruption of power supply due to a malfunction or failure of
the power unit.
(10) Restart of the slave at the time of the CNC restart
When the master I/O Link device is restarted, the slave needs to
be restarted as well. Particular care must be exercised about
intelligent-type slaves (those that exert standalone control
independently, such as FS0-C, Power Mate, b amplifier, and
spindle monitor unit) because, when the power of the master is
turned off, a system alarm is generated in the slave. If the CNC
alone is restarted in this situation, the system alarm in the slave
causes another system alarm to be generated in the master.
(11) System alarm in the slave
In cases where intelligent-type slaves are used, if a system alarm
occurs in any of the slaves, the master also generates a system
alarm. Similarly, if a system alarm occurs in the master, the
slave generates a system alarm as well. Therefore, when such
slaves are used, it is important to know which device (master or
slave) has generated a system alarm first.
If only the master is experiencing a system alarm while no such
alarm is occurring in the slave, the likely cause is that the power
of the slave was turned off instantaneously, causing a system
alarm in the master, and then the slave was restarted.
- 1048 -
(12) Failure to connect the optical I/O Link adapter to ground

The optical I/O Link adapter, which accomplishes conversion
between electrical cable and optical cable, uses its own case as a
grounding body. Therefore, the case of the adapter must be
connected to ground.
(13) CNC or I/O device malfunction or failure
A communication error may stem from a hardware malfunction
or failure. Try replacing boards having an I/O Link connector
(master PCB and PMC boards), the PMC control module (which
may be attached directly to the master PCB in some PMC types),
back panel, individual slaves, or other adequate components.
(14) Operation mistake
If the error has occurred only once, it may be due to an operation
mistake, such as turning off the power of the slave inadvertently.
- 1049 -
11.2.2 Check Items
Check the following items individually to make a judgment as to

whether any of the causes described in the preceding subsection is
present.
(1) Operation records
"Had the machine been operating normally before the

error occurred?"
If the machine suddenly starts to experience problems while it

has been operating normally all along, one potential cause of
those problems is noise, loose connector connection, or
insufficient power capacity due to such factors as modifications
to machine design and/or the factory facilities. Another highly
likely cause is a hardware failure.
If the machine is still in the startup phase and has no operation
records, you need to begin your investigation by checking the
assignment data and hardware connections.
(2) Configuration and assignment data
"How are the I/O Link devices configured?"
Examine the actual I/O Link configuration (types of the master

and slaves and their connections) and the assignment data.
Based on "Connection Manual (Hardware)", check whether the
assignment data matches the actual I/O Link configuration,
whether the I/O Link point count is within the limit, whether
terminal resistors and other connectors are properly connected,
whether a power cable is properly connected to each master and
slave, whether the power-on or power-off procedure has been
performed normally, and so on.
- 1050 -
(3) Timing
"What did you do when the error occurred?"
If the error occurs when you turn on the power, first check
whether each cable connector is connected to the appropriate
device, as well as the assignment data. A system alarm occurs
when the power is turned on, if bases 1 to 3 are assigned while
bases 1 to 3 are actually not connected.
Also, when the master is restarted, the slave needs to be restarted
as well. Check that the power of the slave is off before turning
off the power of the master.
If the error repeats every time you carry out a certain operation,
the likely cause is that an inadequate voltage is applied to the
machine because of loose connector connection, noise,
insufficient power capacity, or DO connection to ground that is
caused by that particular operation.
(4) Operation
"Does the error occur every time you carry out the same
operation?"
If the error occurs every time you carry out the same operation,
you can locate the faulty part by removing the slaves sequentially
starting with the one having the largest group number. Note that
removing certain types of slaves (e.g., operator's panel) leaves
you unable to manipulate the machine. Take necessary
precautions for safety before removing such slaves.
If an error is unrepeatable and occurs with low frequency, its
cause is difficult to identify. In that case, there is no option but
to take every possible measure and see if the error will be
corrected. Such measures include replacing hardware
components (masters, slaves, cables, etc.), strengthening the
power supply (using an independent power source not shared
with other devices), enhancing the earth grounding system,
shielding the cables, and installing the PMC cables and other
cables in separate bundles.
- 1051 -
(5) Phenomenon
"Does the error cause the same phenomenon every time?"
Each time the same error occurs, check the system alarm
message (register values), the LEDs on the slave, and the system
alarm message displayed by the slave. As described earlier,
these indications may vary depending on certain conditions. If
the status denoted by these indications changes every time, the
information given by the register values and LEDs is not reliable.
(6) Alarm history/system alarm history
"Is there any other alarm?"
The communication error may be due to another alarm event that

occurred before the I/O Link system alarm. Check the alarm
history and system alarm history records for any such alarm.
If the slave also has alarm history and system alarm history data,
check those history records as well.
(7) Register values
"What kind of alarm is occurring?"
If the same register values are displayed every time the system
alarm occurs, those register values may help you identify the
location or cause of the error. However, as described earlier,
these register values are not always valid.
- 1052 -
(8) Retry counters
"Isn't the communication unstable?"
In response to an error that has occurred singly, the I/O Link

attempts to retransmit data. If the error cannot be avoided by this
retransmission attempt, then a system alarm is generated.
Every time such a retransmission takes place, one of the register
values is incremented by 1. The addresses of these registers are
the same regardless of the type of the PMC system.
Meaning of the register PMC address Size

Retry counter of channel 1 R9051 1 byte
By checking these register values, you can know whether the

communication had been unstable all along or a communication
error occurred suddenly after a reasonable period of stable
operation.
In cases where a communication error repeats intermittently and
the values of these registers are frequently updated, try replacing
adequate hardware components. If the register values come to
stay unchanged after you replace a certain hardware component,
then you can tell that particular hardware component is the cause
of the error.
These registers are volatile memory, and their values are cleared
to 0 at the time of powering on.
- 1053 -
11.2.3 Sample Cases
A system alarm occurs once a day.
<Category> Improper cable type, cable cut, or inadequate

connection
<Configuration>
NC
Optical I/O link Optical I/O link
adapter adapter
Optical cable
Operator's Connector I/O Unit-A

panel I/O panel I/O
Group 0 Group 1 Group 2
<Cause> Groups 0 and 1 were connected using a cable to

which a +5 V power wire was attached.
<Explanation> The cable to which a +5V power wire is attached is
intended to connect optical I/O Link adapters.
When not using optical I/O Link adapters, use a
cable to which a +5V power wire is not attached.
Note that, when this troubleshooting work
(replacing the cable) was done, the operator's panel
I/O module was replaced as well. Therefore, the
direct cause of the error might have been the
operator's panel I/O module.
- 1054 -
A system alarm occurs two or three times a day.
<Category> Improper cable type, cable cut, or inadequate

connection
<Configuration>
NC
Operator's b amplifier b amplifier Connector

panel I/O panel I/O
Group 0 Group 1 Group 2 Group 3
<Cause> The cable between groups 2 and 3 had a short

circuit inside it.
<Explanation> Because the alarm had been occurring with
relatively high frequency (two or three times a day),
the cause of the error was located by removing the
salve devices sequentially starting with the one
having the largest group number.
- 1055 -
A system alarm occurs if you execute "I/O Link startup" after storing the
ladder program using the online monitor.
<Category> Assignment data mismatch

<Register> 83:41
<Configuration>
NC
I/O Unit-A I/O Unit-A I/O Unit-A
<Cause> The groups and bases had been set mistakenly.
(Correct) (Wrong)
Group Base Slot Module name Group Base Slot Module name
0 0 N Module 1 0 0 n Module 1
<Explanation> If the base numbers are mistakenly assigned, the

error almost always occurs when the power of the
CNC is turned on.
- 1056 -
A system alarm is prone to occur when the feeder starts to operate after the
machining process.
<Category> Noise
<Configuration>
NC
I/O Unit-A Operator's Power

panel Mate-D
<Cause> None of the masters, slaves, or communication

cables were properly grounded to earth.
<Explanation> If a system alarm is prone to occur in response to a
specific operation, it is highly likely that a drop in
voltage, noise interference, loose cable connection,
or short circuit results from that operation.
- 1057 -
A system alarm occurs almost every time the automatic operation begins.
<Category> Noise
<Configuration>
NC
I/O Unit-A Operator's

panel
Group 0 Group 1
<Cause> The communication cables and power cables were

installed in the same bundle.
<Explanation> The error no longer occurred after the
communication cables and power cables were
installed in separate bundles. In this case, too,
noise is considered to be the cause of the error.
Note, however, that such noise-caused errors do
not necessarily occur in response to one specific
operation. In many cases, they emerge as
intermittent errors that occur with extremely low
frequency and it is difficult to identify any
particular condition for them to arise. Therefore, if
an error is occurring intermittently and if you have
potential error factors, such as any hardware
component not connected to ground, poor
grounding, and cables installed near a noise source,
you need to take necessary measures for each of
those error factors and see if the error will be
corrected.
- 1058 -
A system alarm occurs at a cycle start.
<Category> DO connection to ground

<Configuration>
NC
I/O Unit-A I/O Unit-A I/O Unit-A Operator's

Connection
panel I/O
unit
Group 0 Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Group 4
<Cause> DO was short-circuited due to a wiring mistake on

the operator's panel.
<Explanation> Some operator's panel I/O modules cause a system
alarm if the DO output is connected to ground. In
this case, we were able to identify the faulty
component by checking the signal which is turned
on at a cycle start on the operator's panel.
A system alarm occurs once every five times the feeder is moved.
<Category> Insufficient power capacity or drop in voltage

<Configuration>
NC
I/O Unit-A
Group 0
<Cause> The power voltage of the slave dropped from 24

volts to 17 volts when the feeder was moved.
<Explanation> If a system alarm is prone to occur in response to a
specific operation, it is highly likely that a drop in
voltage, noise interference, or loose cable
connection results from that operation.
- 1059 -
A system alarm occurs every time an external alarm is displayed.
<Category> Insufficient power capacity or drop in voltage

<Configuration>
NC
b amplifier I/O Unit-A
Group 0 Group 1
<Cause> A flashing lamp was lit when an alarm occurred,

which caused the power voltage of the slave to
drop from 24 volts to 10 volts.
<Explanation> We checked the LED of group 0 (b amplifier) and
found that an NMI had occurred. As a result of
examining the power supply of the b amplifier, we
were able to confirm that its voltage would drop
when its flashing lamp was lit.
- 1060 -
A system alarm occurs intermittently (A).
<Category> Loose power connection

<Configuration>
NC
I/O Unit-A Spindle I/O Unit-A I/O Unit-A

monitor unit
<Cause> The cable was loosely connected to the terminal

block of the slave power unit; it was merely in
touch of the block. We conducted a voltage
measurement and found that the voltage of the
slave sometimes dropped from the 24-volt level.
<Explanation> At the time when this measurement was conducted,
the voltage of the slave dropped only by 2 volts or
so and no system alarm occurred. However, when
the voltage level is unstable, any instantaneous yet
substantial change in voltage can lead to an error.
To prevent this, check that each cable is connected
firmly, replace the power supply unit, or use a
stable power supply.
A system alarm sometimes occurs at powering on.
<Category> Restart of the slave at the time of the CNC restart

<Configuration> (Unknown)
<Cause> Due to a wiring mistake, some slaves did not turn
off their power even when the power of the CNC
was turned off.
<Explanation> When the master I/O Link device is restarted, all
the slaves need to be restarted as well. The error
occurred intermittently because only the CNC
power was turned on or off rather than turning on
or off the main power.
- 1061 -
A system alarm occurs when data is written using the BOOT screen.
<Category> Restart of the slave at the time of the CNC restart

<Cause> When a macro was to be written using the BOOT
screen, only the power of the CNC was turned off
and then on while the power of the slaves remained
on.
<Explanation> When the master I/O Link device is restarted, all
the slaves need to be restarted as well.
A system alarm occurs every time the power is turned on.
<Category> System down of in the slave

<Configuration>
NC
Operator's I/O Unit-A Power Power

panel Mate-E Mate-E
connection unit
<Cause> A RAM parity error had occurred in Power Mate-E

of group 2.
<Explanation> Since group 2 was Power Mate-E, we checked the
alarm using the DPL and MDI and confirmed that
a RAM parity error had occurred in the device.
- 1062 -
System alarms began to occur after the machine had been in operation for
about one year.
<Category> Failure to connect the optical I/O Link adapter to

ground
<Cause> The connection between the optical I/O Link
adapter case and the inside of the optical I/O Link
adapter was loose.
<Explanation> The case of the optical I/O Link adapter is not
painted and serves as a grounding body as well.
Therefore, the optical I/O Link adapter must be
connected to ground. In this case, the adapter was
properly grounded but, because it was installed in a
position subject to vibration, the connection
between the adapter case and the inside of the
adapter had been lost.
A system alarm occurs every time the power is turned on.
<Category> CNC or I/O device malfunction or failure

<Configuration>
NC
Operator's Spindle Connector Connector Connector Connector

panel I/O monitor unit panel I/O panel I/O panel I/O panel I/O
Group 0 Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Group 4 Group 5
<Cause> The basic connector panel I/O module of group 5

was faulty.
<Explanation> Since the alarm had occurred every time the power
was turned on, we removed the devices
sequentially, starting with the one having the
largest group number, and checked whether an
alarm would arise. As a result, we found out that
the system would start normally when group 5 was
removed. We then conducted a test with the basic
module of group 5 attached to another CNC and
discovered that the error was due to the
malfunction of that individual module.
- 1063 -
B-63983EN/02 INDEX
NOTE
Volume 1 : Page 1 to 658 / Volume 2 : P. 659 to 1063
INDEX
BASIC INSTRUCTIONS..............................................186
<A>
Basic Screen Operations................................................633
About connection log of Ethernet .................................926
Basic Specifications ........................................................50
About Ethernet Communication Parameters .................923
BIT OPERATION.........................................................272
ADD (BCD Addition: SUB 19) ...................................322
Block Step .....................................................................983
ADDB (Binary Addition: SUB 36) ..............................310
Adding an extended symbol and comment....................887 <C>
ADDRESS ALTERATION FUNCTION......................850 CALL (Conditional Subprogram Call: SUB 65) ..........387
Address Map Display Screen ........................................856 CALLU (Unconditional Subprogram Call: SUB 66) ...389
Addresses ........................................................................57 Causes of Communication Errors................................1047
Addresses for Multi-path PMC interface (M, N).............96 Cautions for Reading from/Writing to Nonvolatile
Addresses for Signals Between the PMC and CNC Memory ...........................................................................99
(F, G)...............................................................................66 CE (End of Case Call: SUB 76) ....................................398
Addresses of Signals Between the PMC and Machine Check Items.................................................................1050
(X, Y) ..............................................................................67 CHECKING PMC ALARMS ([PMC ALARM]
ALARM MESSAGE LIST..........................................1023 SCREEN) ......................................................................671
AND (Logical AND: SUB 60) .....................................279 Checking Sequence Program...........................................16
AND Instruction............................................................193 Clearing Tool Life Management Data (Tool Life
AND.NOT Instruction...................................................194 Counter and Tool Information) (Low-speed Response) 593
AND.STK Instruction ...................................................199 CM (Sub Program Call in Case Call: SUB 75) .............397
ASSIGNMENT METHOD ...........................................140 CNC INFORMATION..................................................422
Assignment Method for a Handy Machine Operator's CNC Parameters Related to the PMCs ..........................111
Panel..............................................................................161 COD (Code Conversion: SUB 7) .................................291
Assignment Method for an AS-i Converter Unit...........163 CODB (Binary Code Conversion: SUB 27).................295
Assignment Method for Distribution I/O Connection CODE CONVERSION .................................................290
Panel I/O Modules and Distribution I/O Operator's COIN (Coincidence Check: SUB 16)............................263
Panel I/O Modules ........................................................152 Collective Monitor Function .........................................844
Assignment Method for I/O Link Connection Units .....159 COLLECTIVE MONITOR Function............................846
Assignment Method for I/O Unit-MODEL A ...............145 Collective monitor screen............................................1011
Assignment Method for I/O Unit-MODEL B ...............149 COM (Common Line Control: SUB 9) ........................373
Assignment Method for the Power Mate.......................158 COME (Common Line Control End: SUB 29) ............376
Automatic Start of Trace Setting ...................................760 Comment ...........................................................................7
AUTOMATICALLY INPUTTING UNUSED Communication Status ..................................................921
PARAMETER NUMBERS ..........................................859 COMP (Comparison: SUB 15)......................................261
AXCTL (Axis Control by PMC: SUB 53) ...................363 Comparing Message Data for Multi-Language Display
AXIS INFORMATION.................................................481 with Flash ROM Files ...................................................740
Comparing Message Data for Multi-Language Display
<B>
with Memory Card Files................................................735
Basic Configuration of PMC.............................................2
Basic Instructions ............................................................59
i-1
INDEX B-63983EN/02
NOTE
Comparing PMC Parameters with Files of Other Deleting Memory Card Files or Formatting a Memory
Devices (via the RS-232C Port) ...................................731 Card...............................................................................741
Comparing PMC Parameters with FLOPPY Files ........727 Deleting One or All FLOPPY Files...............................743
Comparing PMC Parameters with Memory Card Files .722 Deleting Tool life Management Data (Tool Data) (Low-
Comparing Sequence Programs with Files of Other speed Response) ............................................................591
Devices (via the RS-232C Port) ....................................717 Deleting Tool life Management Data (Tool Group) (Low-
Comparing Sequence Programs with Flash ROM Files 708 speed Response) ............................................................589
Comparing Sequence Programs with FLOPPY Files ....712 Deleting Tool Management Data (Low-speed
Comparing Sequence Programs with Memory Card Response) ......................................................................614
Files...............................................................................704 Details of the Basic Instructions....................................188
COMPARISON.............................................................257 DETECTION OF DOUBLE COILS .............................861
COMPATIBILITY WITH CONVENTIONAL Determining Specification...............................................13
MODELS ......................................................................122 DIFD (Falling Edge Detection: SUB 58) .....................275
Compatibility with the PMCs for the 15i-A/B ..............124 Difference Between Relay Sequence Circuit and Ladder
Compatibility with the PMCs for the 16i/18i/21i-B......122 Sequence Program.............................................................9
COMPB (Comparison Between Binary Data: SUB 32) 258 DIFU (Rising Edge Detection: SUB 57) ......................273
CONFIGURATION AND OPERATION OF STEP– DISPB (Display Message: SUB 41).............................336
SEQUENCE PROGRAMS ...........................................972 DISPLAY AND OPERATION CONDITIONS FOR
Configuration of an I/O Link.........................................137 SCREENS .....................................................................635
Convergence of Selective Sequence..............................978 Display Format for Parameters......................................805
Convergence of Simultaneous Sequence.......................980 Display of European characters.....................................132
COUNTER....................................................................221 Displaying a File List ([LIST] Screen)..........................695
Counter Addresses (C) ....................................................81 DISPLAYING A PROGRAM LIST ([LIST]
Creating Ladder Diagram ................................................13 SCREEN) ......................................................................782
CS (Case Call: SUB 74) ................................................394 Displaying a Step Sequence Diagram............................998
CTR (Counter: SUB 5)..................................................222 DISPLAYING AND EDITING I/O MODULE
CTRB (Fixed counter: SUB 56)....................................228 ALLOCATION DATA ([MODULE] SCREENS) ........901
CTRC (Counter: SUB 55) .............................................231 DISPLAYING AND EDITING MESSAGE DATA
([MESAGE] SCREENS)...............................................890
<D>
DISPLAYING AND EDITING PMC SETTINGS
DATA INPUT/OUTPUT ([I/O] SCREEN)..................688
([SETING] SCREENS).................................................905
DATA BACKED UP BY THE BATTERY ..................133
DISPLAYING AND EDITING SYMBOL AND
DATA SEARCH ...........................................................265
COMMENT DATA ([SYMBOL] SCREENS) .............868
Data Size for PMC Message Multi-Language Display....56
DISPLAYING AND EDITING TITLE DATA
Data Table Addresses (D) ...............................................91
([TITLE] SCREENS) ....................................................863
DATA TRANSFER.......................................................234
DISPLAYING AND SETTING CONFIGURATION
DCNV (Data Conversion: SUB 14) .............................298
PARAMETERS ([CONFIG PARAM] SCREENS) ......937
DCNVB (Extended Data Conversion: SUB 31)...........300
Displaying and Setting Parameters for an FS0
DEC (Decode: SUB 4) .................................................303
Operator's Panel ............................................................931
DECB (Binary Decoding: SUB 25) .............................305
DISPLAYING AND SETTING PARAMETERS FOR
THE ONLINE FUNCTION ([ONLINE] SCREEN) .....917
i-2
B-63983EN/02 INDEX
NOTE
Displaying and Setting Parameters for the Selectable Entering Data on the Program Check Screen
I/O Link Assignment Function......................................934 (Low-speed Response) ..................................................473
DISPLAYING AND SETTING SYSTEM Entering Torque Limit Data for the Digital Servo
PARAMETERS ([SYSTEM PARAM] SCREENS) .....928 Motor (Low-speed Response) .......................................509
Displaying and Setting the Counter Data Type .............929 EOR (Exclusive OR: SUB 59) .....................................277
DISPLAYING EXTENDED SYMBOL AND Example.........................................................................177
COMMENT ..................................................................657 Exclusive Control for Functional Instructions...............995
Displaying extended symbol and comment ...................878 EXECUTION OF SEQUENCE PROGRAM..................17
DISPLAYING I/O LINK CONNECTION STATUS Execution of Step Sequence ..........................................968
([I/O LINK] SCREEN) .................................................745 Execution of Trace ........................................................755
Displaying I/O Module Allocation Data .......................901 Execution Order and Execution Time Percentage ...........43
Displaying Message Data ..............................................890 Execution Procedure of Sequence Program ....................18
Displaying Symbol and Comment Data ........................868 EXECUTION STATE DISPLAY ...............................1012
DISPLAYING THE STATUS OF PMCS AND EXIN (External Data Input: SUB 42) ..........................351
CHANGING THE TARGET PMC ([PMC STATUS] EXTENDED LADDER INSTRUCTIONS ...................985
SCREENS)....................................................................914 Extended Relay Addresses (E) ........................................78
Displaying Title Data ....................................................863
<F>
Displaying Title Data (Message) ...................................867
Forced I/O Function ......................................................663
DIV (BCD Division: SUB 22) .....................................328
Forced I/O Screen..........................................................667
DIVB (Binary Division: SUB 39) ................................319
Format of the Functional Instructions ...........................205
Divergence of Selective Sequence ................................977
FORMATS OF CONTROL DATA...............................412
Divergence of Simultaneous Sequence .........................979
FS0 Operator's Panel .....................................................165
DSCH (Data Search: SUB 17) ......................................269
FUNCTION TO AUTOMATICALLY INPUT
DSCHB (Binary Data Search: SUB 34) ........................266
UNSUSED ADDRESSES.............................................858
<E> FUNCTION TO REFERENCE ADDRESSES IN
Editing and Debugging Step Sequence Programs .........957 USE ...............................................................................855
Editing Desired Message Data ......................................897 FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTION DATA TABLE
Editing extended symbol and comment.........................882 EDITOR Screen ............................................................836
Editing I/O Module Allocation Data .............................902 FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTION DATA TABLE
EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS ...............................812 VIEWER Screen ...........................................................809
Editing Message Data....................................................893 FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTION LIST Screen .............834
Editing Sequence Program ..............................................14 FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTION TRSET .....................985
Editing Symbol and Comment Data..............................870 FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS ................................205
Editing Title Data..........................................................865 Functional Instructions (Arranged in Sequence of
END (End of a Ladder Program: SUB 64)...................393 Instruction Group)...........................................................60
End Of Block Step ........................................................984 Functional Instructions (Arranged in Sequence of
END1 (1st Level Sequence Program End: SUB 1) ......392 SUB No.).........................................................................63
END2 (2nd Level Sequence Program End: SUB 2).....392
<G>
END3 (3rd Level Sequence Program End: SUB 48)....393
General Rules ................................................................989
Graphic Symbols of Relays and Coils ...............................8
i-3
INDEX B-63983EN/02
NOTE
Graphical Symbols ........................................................956 <K>

Keep Relay Addresses (K) ..............................................83
<H>
Hierarchy of Display ...................................................1001 <L>
Label..............................................................................982
<I> Label Number Addresses (L)...........................................97
I/O Communication Error Messages ...........................1042
Ladder Diagram Format ....................................................6
I/O DIAGNOSIS SCREEN...........................................766
LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR
I/O LINK.......................................................................135
SCREENS ([PMC LADDER]) .....................................780
I/O LINK COMMUNICATION ERRORS AND
Ladder diagram monitor screen ...................................1011
ACTIONS TO TAKE..................................................1046
LADDER LANGUAGE ................................................185
I/O LINK CONNECTION CHECK FUNCTION .........183
LBL (Label: SUB 69)...................................................385
I/O Signals of PMC...........................................................2
Line Number and Net Number ..........................................8
Implementation ...............................................................22
LIST OF WINDOW FUNCTIONS...............................415
Initial Block Step ..........................................................984
LOW-SPEED RESPONSE AND HIGH-SPEED
Initial Step .....................................................................974
RESPONSE...................................................................413
Inputting a Message Data for Multi-Language Display
from the Memory Card..................................................733 <M>
Inputting a Sequence Program from the FLOPPY ........710 Maximum number of message.......................................131
Inputting a Sequence Program from the Memory Card.702 Menu for Setting Configuration Parameters..................938
Inputting Message Data for Multi-Language Display Message Display Addresses (A) ......................................79
from the Flash ROM .....................................................738 Messages That May Be Displayed on the PMC Alarm
Inputting PMC Parameters from Other Devices Screen..........................................................................1023
(via the RS-232C Port)..................................................730 MONITORING I/O DIAGNOSIS ([I/O DGN]
Inputting PMC Parameters from the FLOPPY..............725 SCREEN) ......................................................................767
Inputting PMC Parameters from the Memory Card ......720 MONITORING LADDER DIAGRAMS ([LADDER]
Inputting Sequence Programs from Other Devices SCREEN) ......................................................................788
(via the RS-232C Port).................................................715 MONITORING PMC SIGNAL STATUS ([STATUS]
Inputting Sequence Programs from the Flash ROM......707 SCREEN) ......................................................................660
INSTRUCTIONS RELATED TO CNC FUNCTIONS.335 MOVB (Transfer of 1 Byte: SUB 43) ...........................235
Interface Between CNC and PMC ..................................46 MOVD (Transfer of 4 Bytes: SUB 47)..........................237
Interlock ..........................................................................39 MOVE (Logical Product Transfer: SUB 8)...................240
Internal Relay (System Area) Addresses (R)...................71 Moving (Exchanging) Tool Management Data
Internal Relay Addresses (R)...........................................70 Numbers in a Cartridge Management Table
INVALID INSTRUCTIONS.........................................408 (Low-speed Response) ..................................................600
MOVN (Transfer of an Arbitrary Number of Bytes:
<J> SUB 45).........................................................................238
JMP (Jump: SUB 10) ...................................................377
MOVOR (Data Transfer After Logical Sum: SUB 28) .242
JMPB (Label Jump 1: SUB 68)....................................381
MOVW (Transfer of 2 Bytes: SUB 44).........................236
JMPC (Label Jump 2: SUB 73)....................................383
MUL (BCD Multiplication: SUB 21)...........................326
JMPE (Jump End: SUB 30) .........................................380
MULB (Binary Multiplication: SUB 38) .....................316
Jump ..............................................................................981
Multi-Language Display................................................130
i-4
B-63983EN/02 INDEX
NOTE
Multi-Path PMC Interface...............................................48 Outputting a Sequence Program to the FLOPPY ..........709

MULTI-PMC DISPLAY...............................................655 Outputting a Sequence Program to the Memory Card...701
MULTI-PMC FUNCTION .............................................41 Outputting PMC Parameters to Other Devices
(via the RS-232C Port)..................................................729
<N>
Outputting PMC Parameters to the FLOPPY................724
NET EDITOR Screen....................................................824
Outputting PMC Parameters to the Memory Card ........718
Nonvolatile Memory Control Address (K)......................84
Outputting Sequence Programs to Other Devices
NOP (No Operation: SUB 70) .....................................393
(via the RS-232C Port).................................................714
NOT (Logical NOT: SUB 62)......................................283
OVERVIEW .................................................................953
NOTE ON PROGRAMMING ......................................409
OVERVIEW OF PMC ......................................................1
Note on the Programming of a Low-speed Response
Window Instruction.......................................................414 <P>
Notes .............................................................................182 PARAMETERS FOR THE PMC SYSTEM .................106
Notes on I/O Signals Updated by Other Than PMC .......40 PARI (Parity Check: SUB 11)......................................285
Notes on using subroutines .............................................32 Partial protection function for ladder program ..............650
Numbers of Input Points and of Output Points of the Partially Changing Symbol and Comment Data ............873
I/O Link.........................................................................139 Password Function ........................................................648
NUME (BCD Definition of Constant: SUB 23)...........333 PMC ADDRESS (S ADDRESS) ..................................986
NUMEB (Definition of Binary Constants: SUB 40)....330 PMC ALARM MESSAGES AND ACTIONS TO
TAKE ..........................................................................1022
<O>
PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS
Operating on the FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTION
([PMC CONFIG]) .........................................................862
DATA TABLE EDITOR Screen...................................837
PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS
Operating on the LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR
([PMC MAINTE]) ........................................................659
Screen............................................................................814
PMC MESSAGE MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY
Operating on the LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR
FUNCTION...................................................................127
Screen............................................................................791
PMC Parameter Format.................................................100
Operating on the Screen ................................................852
PMC Parameter Input/Output Conditions .....................645
Operating on the Screen ................................................857
PMC PARAMETERS .....................................................98
OPERATING THE PMC SCREEN ..............................630
PMC Signal Addresses......................................................3
Operation after Execution of Trace ...............................757
PMC SIGNAL ADDRESSES .........................................66
Operation Errors..........................................................1031
PMC SPECIFICATIONS................................................49
OPERATION INSTRUCTION.....................................309
PMC System Alarm Messages ....................................1028
OPERATION SCREENS OF THE PMC AND SOFT
PMC System Parameters ...............................................109
KEY ORGANIZATION................................................632
Presetting the Relative Coordinate (Low-speed
OR (Logical OR: SUB 61) ...........................................281
Response) ......................................................................519
OR Instruction...............................................................195
Processing Priority (1st Level, 2nd Level, and 3rd
OR.NOT Instruction......................................................196
Level) ..............................................................................20
OR.STK Instruction ......................................................201
Program Capacity............................................................53
Outline...........................................................................174
PROGRAM CONTROL................................................372
Outputting a Message Data for Multi-Language
Program List Display Screen.......................................1002
Display to the Memory Card .........................................732
i-5
INDEX B-63983EN/02
NOTE
PROGRAM LIST EDITOR Screen...............................840 Reading the Actual Velocity of each Controlled Axis
Programmer Protection Function ..................................635 (High-speed Response)..................................................503
Protection of Data at 8 Levels .......................................651 Reading the CNC Alarm Status (High-speed
Response) ......................................................................449
<R>
Reading the Current Program Number (8-digit
RD Instruction...............................................................189
Program Numbers) (High-speed Response) ..................471
RD.NOT Instruction......................................................190
Reading the Current Program Number (High-speed
RD.NOT.STK Instruction .............................................198
Response) ......................................................................453
RD.STK Instruction ......................................................197
Reading the Current Sequence Number (High-speed
Reading a Custom Macro Variable (High-speed
Response) ......................................................................455
Response) ......................................................................445
Reading the Estimate Disturbance Torque Data (High-
Reading a Parameter (High-speed Response)................433
speed Response) ............................................................514
Reading a Real Type Parameter (High-speed
Reading the Feed Motor Load Current Value (A/D
Response) ......................................................................437
Conversion Data) (High-speed Response).....................494
Reading a Skip Position (Stop Coordinates of Skip
Reading the Machine Position (Machine Coordinates) of
Operation (G31)) of Controlled Axes (High-speed
Controlled Axes (High-speed Response).......................485
Response) ......................................................................488
Reading the Pitch Error Compensation Value
Reading a Tool Offset (High-speed Response) .............424
(High-speed Response)..................................................477
Reading a Workpiece Origin Offset Value (High-speed
Reading the Relative Position on a Controlled Axis (High-
Response) ......................................................................429
speed Response) ............................................................499
Reading Actual Spindle Speeds (High-speed Response)505
Reading the Remaining Travel (High-speed Response) 501
Reading Clock Data (Date and Time) (High-speed
Reading the Servo Delay for Controlled Axes
Response) ......................................................................475
(High-speed Response)..................................................490
Reading CNC Status Information (High-speed
Reading The Tool Life Management Data (Tool
Response) ......................................................................469
Group Number) (High-speed Response) .......................522
Reading CNC System Information (High-speed
Reading The Tool Life Management Data (Tool Group
Response) ......................................................................422
Number) (High-speed Response) (8-digit tool number) 572
Reading Diagnosis Data (Low-speed Response)...........463
Reading the Tool Life Management Data (Tool Life
Reading Load Information of the Spindle Motor
Counter Type) (High-speed Response) .........................548
(Serial Interface) (High-speed Response)......................511
Reading Tool Life Management Data (Cutter Radius
Reading Modal Data (High-speed Response) ...............456
Reading Setting Data (High-speed Response)...............441
Response) ......................................................................538
Reading the Absolute Position (Absolute Coordinates)
of Controlled Axes (High-speed Response) ..................483
Reading the Acceleration/Deceleration Delay on
Response) (8-digit tool number)....................................581
Controlled Axes (High-speed Response) ......................492
Reading the Actual Spindle Speed (High-speed
Compensation Number (2): Tool Order Number) (High-
Response) ......................................................................497
speed Response) ............................................................540
Reading the Actual Velocity of Controlled Axes (High-
Reading Tool Life Management Data (Number of Tool
speed Response) ............................................................481
Groups) (High-speed Response)....................................524
i-6
B-63983EN/02 INDEX
NOTE
Reading Tool Life Management Data (Number of <S>

Tools) (High-speed Response) ......................................527 Sample Cases...............................................................1054
Reading Tool Life Management Data (Tool Information Saving Message Data for Multi-Language Display to
(1): Tool Number) (High-speed Response) ...................542 the Flash ROM ..............................................................737
Reading Tool Life Management Data (Tool Information Saving Sequence Programs to the Flash ROM..............706
(1): Tool Number) (High-speed Response) (8-digit tool Screen Structures...........................................................851
number) .........................................................................574 Searching for a Free Pot (Low-speed Response)...........602
Reading Tool Life Management Data (Tool Information Searching for a Free Pot (oversize tools supported)(Low-
(2): Tool Order Number) (High-speed Response).........544 speed Response) ............................................................628
Reading Tool Life Management Data (Tool Length Searching for Tool Management Data (Low-speed
Compensation Number (1): Tool Number) (High-speed Response) ......................................................................624
Response) ......................................................................534 SELECTABLE I/O LINK ASSIGNMENT
Reading Tool Life Management Data (Tool Length FUNCTION...................................................................174
Compensation Number (1): Tool Number) (High-speed SELECTING AND DISPLAYING THE NECESSARY
Response) (8-digit tool number) ...................................579 LADDER NET ([SWITCH] SCREEN]) .......................844
Reading Tool Life Management Data (Tool Length SEQUENCE PROGRAM CREATION PROCEDURE ..13
Compensation Number (2): Tool Order Number) (High- Sequence Program Memory Capacity .............................55
speed Response) ............................................................536 SET Instruction .............................................................203
Reading Tool Life Management Data (Tool Life Setting an I/O Target PMC............................................698
Counter) (High-speed Response) ..................................532 Setting and Displaying Counter Values ([COUNTR]
Reading Tool Life Management Data (Tool Life) (High- Screen) ..........................................................................676
speed Response) ............................................................530 Setting and Displaying Data Tables ([DATA] Screen)..681
Reading Tool Life Management Data (Tool Number) Setting and Displaying Keep Relays ([KEEP RELAY]
(High-speed Response) .................................................546 Screen) ..........................................................................678
Reading Tool Management Data (Low-speed SETTING AND DISPLAYING PMC
Response) ......................................................................616 PARAMETERS ............................................................672
Reading Value of the P-code Macro Variable Setting and Displaying Variable Timers ([TIMER]
(High-speed Response) .................................................465 Screen) ..........................................................................673
Registering New Symbol and Comment Data ...............876 Setting I/O Address for I/O Link.....................................45
Registering New Tool Management Data (Low-speed Setting of Trace Parameter ([TRACE SETING]
Response) ......................................................................604 Screen) ..........................................................................749
Registering Tool Life Management Data (Tool Group Setting Parameters.........................................................106
Number) (Low-speed Response) (8-digit tool number) 576 Setting Parameters for the Online Function ..................918
Registering Tool Life Management Data (Tool Group) SETTING SCREEN OF I/O DIAGNOSIS....................776
(Low-speed Response) ..................................................550 Setting Subprogram List Screen ..................................1011
Repetitive Operation .......................................................19 Setting the CNC-PMC Interface....................................939
ROT (Rotation Control: SUB 6) ..................................400 Setting the Communication Port ([PORT SETING]
ROTATION CONTROL...............................................399 Screen) ..........................................................................693
ROTB (Binary Rotation Control: SUB 26) ..................404 Setting the Display Format of the LADDER
RST Instruction .............................................................204 DIAGRAM MONITOR Screen.....................................797
Setting the LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR Screen......818
i-7
INDEX B-63983EN/02
NOTE
Setting the Machine Signal Interface ............................944 TIME MONITOR FUNCTION...................................1017

Setting the Parameters Related to Ladder Execution.....948 Time Monitor Setting Screen ......................................1018
Setting the PROGRAM LIST EDITOR Screen ............842 TIMER ..........................................................................213
Setting the Program List Screen ....................................786 Timer Addresses (T)........................................................80
Setting the Step Sequence Diagram Screen.................1006 TMR (Timer: SUB 3) ....................................................214
SFT (Shift Register: SUB 33) ......................................287 TMRB (Fixed Timer: SUB 24) .....................................216
Shifting Tool Management Data (Low-speed TMRC (Timer: SUB 54) ...............................................218
Response) ......................................................................626 TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT FUNCTION.................522
Signal Name (Symbol Name)............................................7 TOOL MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS........................599
Signal Trace Function ([TRACE] Screen) ....................748 Trace Result Output ......................................................761
SP (Subprogram: SUB 71) ...........................................390 TRACING AND DISPLAYING PMC SIGNAL
SPE (End of a Subprogram: SUB 72) ..........................391 STATUS........................................................................747
Specification..................................................................988 Transferring and Writing Sequence Program to PMC.....15
SPECIFICATION OF EXTENDED SYMBOL AND Transition ......................................................................976
COMMENT ....................................................................10 Transition of the PMC Screens .....................................632
SPECIFICATION OF STEP SEQUENCE ...................988
<U>
SPECIFICATIONS .........................................................50
Usage of PMC Message Multi-Language Display
Starting and Stopping Sequence Programs....................916
Function ........................................................................128
Step ...............................................................................972
STEP SEQUENCE BASICS.........................................958 <W>
Step Sequence Display Screen ....................................1003 WHAT IS LADDER LANGUAGE? .................................6
STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION...................................952 WHAT IS PMC? ...............................................................2
Step Sequence Method..................................................953 WHAT IS THE I/O LINK? ...........................................136
STEP SEQUENCE SCREEN OPERATION ................998 WINDOW FUNCTIONS ..............................................411
Step Sequence State Display Screen (Global) .............1013 WINDR (Reading CNC Window Data: SUB 51).........358
Step Sequence State Display Screen (Subprogram) ....1015 WINDW (Writing CNC Window Data: SUB 52) ........361
Storage and Management of Sequence Program .............16 Writing a Custom Macro Variable (Low-speed
Structure of Valid Net ...................................................833 Response) ......................................................................447
Structured Sequence Program .........................................22 Writing a Parameter (Low-speed Response) .................435
SUB (BCD Subtraction: SUB 20)................................324 Writing a Real Type Parameter (Low-speed Response) 439
SUBB (Binary Subtraction: SUB 37)...........................313 Writing a Specified Type of Tool Management Data
Subprogram List Display Screen.................................1008 (Low-speed Response) ..................................................620
Subprogram Number Addresses (P) ................................96 Writing a Tool Offset (Low-speed Response) ...............426
Subprogramming and nesting..........................................28 Writing a Workpiece Origin Offset Value (Low-speed
Synchronization Processing of I/O Signals .....................34 Response) ......................................................................431
System Keep Relay Addresses (K)..................................85 Writing Setting Data (Low-speed Response) ................443
Writing the Pitch Error Compensation Value
<T>
(Low-speed Response) ..................................................479
Terminology..................................................................958
Writing the Tool Life Management Data (Tool
The convert method of source program using FANUC
Information (1): Tool Number) (Low-speed Response) 566
LADDER-III .................................................................126
i-8
B-63983EN/02 INDEX
NOTE
Writing the Tool Life Management Data (Tool WRT.NOT Instruction...................................................192

Information (1): Tool Number) (Low-speed Response) (8-
<X>
digit tool number)..........................................................587
XMOV (Indexed Data Transfer: SUB 18).....................254
Writing the Tool Management Data (Tool Information
XMOVB (Binary Index Modifier Data Tranfer:
(2): Tool Order Number) (Low-speed Response)..........568
SUB 35).........................................................................244
Writing to the Memory Card .........................................691
Writing Tool Life Management Data (Arbitrary Group
Number) (Low-speed Response) ...................................595
Writing Tool Life Management Data (Cutter Radius
Compensation Number (1): Tool Number) (Low-speed
Response) ......................................................................562
Response) (8-digit tool number) ...................................585
Compensation Number (2): Tool Order Number) (Low-
speed Response) ............................................................564
Writing Tool Life Management Data (Remaining Tool
Life) (Low-speed Response) .........................................597
Writing Tool Life Management Data (Tool Length
Response) ......................................................................558
Response) (8-digit tool number) ...................................583
Compensation Number (2): Tool Order Number) (Low-
speed Response) ............................................................560
Writing Tool Life Management Data (Tool Life
Counter Type) (Low-speed Response) ..........................556
Writing Tool Life Management Data (Tool Life
Counter) (Low-speed Response) ...................................554
Writing Tool Life Management Data (Tool Life) (Low-
speed Response) ............................................................552
Writing Tool Life Management Data (Tool Number)
Writing Tool Management Data (Low-speed
Response) ......................................................................609
Writing Value of the P-code Macro Variable
WRT Instruction............................................................191
i-9
Revision Record
FANUC Sries 30i/300i/300is-MODEL A, Series 31i/310i/310is-MODEL A5, Series 31i/310i/310is-MODEL A,
Series 32i/320i/320is-MODEL A PMC PROGRAMMING MANUAL (B-63983EN)
Addition of functions
Addition of following models :
02 May, 2004 • Series 31i /310i /310is-MODEL A5
• Series 31i /310i /310is-MODEL A
• Series 32i /320i /320is-MODEL A
01 May, 2003
Edition Date Contents Edition Date Contents

• No part of this manual may be
reproduced in any form.
• All specifications and designs

are subject to change without
notice.

63983en PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

63983en PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

GE Fanuc Automation

Computer Numerical Control Products

GFZ-63983EN/02 June 2004

GE Fanuc Automation makes no representation or warranty, expressed, implied, or statutory

©Copyright 2004 GE Fanuc Automation North America, Inc.

DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE

• Read this manual carefully, and store it in a safe place.

1.5.1 Execution Order and Execution Time Percentage .................................................43

2.5 COMPATIBILITY WITH CONVENTIONAL MODELS................................ 122

4.1.6 AND Instruction...................................................................................................193

4.8.1 DIFU (Rising Edge Detection: SUB 57).............................................................273

4.12.5 JMPB (Label Jump 1: SUB 68) ..........................................................................381

5.4.12 Reading a Custom Macro Variable (High-speed Response)................................445

5.5.13 Reading Load Information of the Spindle Motor (Serial Interface)

5.7.1 Moving (Exchanging) Tool Management Data Numbers in a Cartridge

6 OPERATING THE PMC SCREEN ..................................................... 630

7.4 DATA INPUT/OUTPUT ([I/O] SCREEN) .................................................. 688

8 LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS

8.5.2 Operating on the Screen .......................................................................................852

9.7.2 Communication Status .........................................................................................921

10 STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION.......................................................... 952

10.4 EXTENDED LADDER INSTRUCTIONS.................................................... 985

11 PMC ALARM MESSAGES AND ACTIONS TO TAKE..................... 1022

1.1 WHAT IS PMC?

The programmable machine controller (PMC) is a programmable

1.1.1 Basic Configuration of PMC

The following is the basic configuration of the PMC:

CNC PMC Machine

Signal input to PMC

Fig. 1.1.1 Basic configuration of PMC

The sequence program reads input signals, performs operations, and

1.1.2 I/O Signals of PMC

1.1.3 PMC Signal Addresses

PMC signal addresses indicate the locations of I/O signals exchanged

Extra relay (E) (5) Extra relay (E)

Fig. 1.1.3 (a) PMC-related addresses

Fig. 1.1.3 (b) PMC address format

The first letter of an address number represents the type of the

Table 1.1.3 lists the address symbols and corresponding signals.

Table 1.1.3 Address Symbols and signal types

(1) Addresses of signals between the PMC and CNC (F and G)

(2) Addresses of signals between the PMC and machine (X and Y)

(3) Addresses of internal relays and extra relays (R and E)

(4) Signal addresses for message display (A)

(5) Nonvolatile memory addresses

(6) Multi-path PMC interface address (M, N)

(7) Other addresses

1.2 WHAT IS LADDER LANGUAGE?

The Ladder language is one of sequence programming languages. This

1.2.1 Ladder Diagram Format

Designers develop and see ladder diagrams in the design stage.

Line No. Signal name (symbol name) Address

Net No. Comment

The meanings of ladder diagram contents will be described later.

1.2.2 Signal Name (Symbol Name)

1.2.4 Graphic Symbols of Relays and Coils

Ladder diagrams use the following relay symbols:

These instructions perform a 1-bit operation and are called basic

1.2.5 Line Number and Net Number

A line number is indicated in every line of ladder diagrams.

1.2.6 Difference Between Relay Sequence Circuit and Ladder

In general relay sequence circuits, because of a limited number of relay

Fig. 1.2.6 (a)

Alarm Lock ESP Alarm Lock ESP